Vol II of III-BGL-Kakinada

Bhagyanagar Gas Limited
(BGL)
(A JOINT VENTURE OF HPCL & GAIL (India) Limited)
CNG & CITY GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR KAKINADA
BID DOCUMENT
FOR
LAYING & CONSTRUCTION OF 10”; 6” & 4” NB U/G
STEEL P/L NETWORK & ASSOCIATED WORKS IN
KAKINADA CITY
UNDER LIMITED DOMESTIC

BIDDING
Bid Document No.: 05/51/23LZ/BGL-KAKI/001-i)
VOLUME – II OF III
PREPARED AND ISSUED BY
MECON LIMITED
(A Govt. of India Undertaking)
LAYING & CONSTRUCTION OF 10”; 6” & 4” NB
U/G STEEL P/L NETWORK & ASSOCIATED
WORKS IN KAKINADA CITY
BHAGYANAGAR GAS
LIMITED Bid Document No.: 05/51/23LZ/BGL-KAKI/001-i) MECON LIMITED
CONTENTS
LIST OF SPECIFICATION / STANDARDS
VOLUME-II OF III
Pipeline Laying, Piping, Mechanical Works
1. Specification for Mainline Construction (Onshore) MEC/S/05/21/01
2. Specification for Welding of Onshore Gas MEC/S/05/21/02

Pipelines
3. Specification for Hydrostatic Testing of Onshore MEC/S/05/21/03

Pipeline
4. Specification for Major Water Crossings MEC/S/05/21/04

(Conventional)
5. Specification for Pipeline Crossing Roads, MEC/S/05/21/05

Railroads, Minor Water and Other Crossings
6. Specification for Piping Fabrication and Erection MEC/S/05/21/06
7. Specification for Shop and Field Painting MEC/S/05/21/07
8. Specification for Repair of Pipeline Corrosion MEC/S/05/21/08

Coating
9. Specification for Pipeline Markers MEC/S/05/21/10
10. Specification for Flushing and Testing of Piping MEC/S/05/21/11

Systems
11. Specification for Casing Insulators and End Seals MEC/S/05/62/12
12. Specification for Field Joint Coating (Onshore MEC/S/05/21/13

Pipelines)
13. Specification for Vents, Drains and Wells MEC/S/05/21/15
14. Specification for Blasting MEC/S/05/21/18
15. Specification for Gaskets, Bolts and Nuts MEC/S/05/21/19
16. Specification for Piping Material Specification MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092
17. Specification for Pre-Commissioning and MEC/S/05/21/61

Commissioning
18. Specification for Health, Safety and Environment MEC/S/05/21/65

Management (HSE)
19. Specification for Quality Assurance System MEC/S/05/62/66

Requirements
D:\old data\Vijyant\BGL-23LB\BGL-Kakinada\Tender\Laying\Vol-II of III\Contents Vol II of III-BGL Kakinada.doc Page 1 of 3

BHAGYANAGAR GAS
20. Specification for Documentation for Pipeline MEC/S/05/21/69

Construction
21. Specification for Field Joint Coatings of Pipeline for MEC/S/05/21/74

HDD Crossing
22. Specification for Pipeline Crossings Using HDD MEC/S/05/21/75

Method
23. Specification for Warning Mats MEC/TS/05/62/042, Rev-0
24. Specification for Long Radius Bends MEC/TS/05/62/015, R-1
25. Specification for Seamless Fittings and Flanges MEC/S/05/21/025

[Size up to DN 400mm (16") NB]
26. Specification for Assorted Pipes MEC/TS/05/62/059A
27. Specification for Ball Valves MEC/TS/05/21/002
Civil & Structural Works
1. Specification for Civil Works – Terminals MEC/S/05/11/01

2. Technical Specification for Fabrication, Erection and Painting MEC/S/05/12/01
of Steel Structures, Gates and Miscellaneous Work
3. Specification for Anti Buoyancy Measures (Concrete Weight MEC/S/05/11/03
Coating & Saddle Weight)
Instrumentation and Telecom Works
1. Specification for Installation of Instruments MEC/S/05/26/01
2. Specification for Instrument Tubing MEC/S/05/26/02
3. Specification for Instrument Tube Fittings MEC/S/05/26/04
4. Specification for Instrument Valves and Manifolds MEC/S/05/26/05
5. General Technical Specification for Instrumentation MEC/S/05/26/08
6. Specification for Optical Fiber Cable & HDPE Duct Laying and MEC/S/05/E5/T/001
Associated Work
7. Specification / Procedure for Optical Fiber Cable Testing MEC/S/05/E5/T/002
8. Technical Specification for Optical Fiber Cable & Accessories MEC/TS/05/E5/T/096
9. Technical Specification PLE HDPE Telecom Duct and MEC/TS/05/E5/T/037

associated items

BHAGYANAGAR GAS
Cathodic Protection Works
1. Specification for Temporary Cathodic Protection System MEC/S/05/21/016A

Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MAINLINE CONSTRUCTION (ONSHORE)
SPECIFICATION NO.: MEC/S/05/21/01
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
MECON LIMITED STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
834002 OIL & GAS SBU, DELHI
DOCUMENT NO. Page 1 of 1
TITLE MAINLINE CONSTRUCTION MEC/S/05/21/01 REVISION : 0

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 REFERENCE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
3.0 REQUIREMENTS OF R.O.U. AND ACCESS THERETO
4.0 RIGHT-OF-WAY
5.0 HANDLING, HAULING, STRINGING AND STORING OF MATERIALS
6.0 TRENCHING
7.0 BENDING
8.0 LINING UP
9.0 LAYING OF PIPE
10.0 BACK-FILLING
11.0 TIEING-IN
12.0 SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS ON THE PIPELINE
13.0 WORKING SPREAD LIMITATIONS
14.0 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION OF RIGHT-OF-WAY
15.0 MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
PREPARED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: ISSUE DATE :
(Shalini Singh) (Sunil Kumar) (A.K. Johri) Jan. 2009

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS
Sl. Clause / Paragraph / Page Revision Date By Verified

No. Annexure / Exhibit / No.
(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the minimum requirements for the various activities to be
carried out by CONTRACTOR for or about the construction of cross-country pipelines.
1.2 The various activities covered in this specification include the following works of
pipeline construction :
Clearing, grubbing and grading of Right-of-way
Construction of all temporary facilities required in connection with the WORKS
Staking of the pipeline route
Handling, hauling, stringing and storing of all materials
Trenching
Field-bending of line pipe
Lining-up
Pipeline laying
Backfilling
Tieing-in
Installation of auxiliary facilities and appurtenances forming a part of pipeline

installation
Clean-up and restoration of Right-of-way;
Maintenance during defects liability period.
1.3 This specification shall be read in conjunction with the conditions of all specifications
and documents included in the CONTRACT between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR.
1.4 CONTRACTOR shall, with due care and vigilance, execute the work in compliance with
all laws, by-laws, ordinances, regulations etc. and provide all services and labour,
inclusive of supervision thereof, all materials, excluding the materials indicated as
"COMPANY Supplied materials" in the CONTRACT, equipment, appliances or other
things of whatsoever nature required in or about the execution of the work, whether of
a temporary or permanent nature.
1.5 CONTRACTOR shall take full responsibility for the stability and safety of all operations
and methods involved in the WORK.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
1.6 CONTRACTOR shall be deened to have inspected and examined the work area(s) and
its surroundings and to have satisfied himself so far as practicable as to the form and
nature thereof, including sub-surface conditions, hydrological and climatic conditions,
the extent and nature of the WORK and materials necessary for the completion of the
WORK, and the means of access to the work area(s).
1.7 CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information subject as
above mentioned as to risks, contingencies and all other circumstances, which may
influence the WORK.
1.8 CONTRACTOR shall, in connection with the WORK, provide and maintain at his own
costs, all lights, guards, fencing, watching etc., when and where necessary or required
by COMPANY or by any duly constituted authority and/ or by the authorities having
jurisdiction thereof for the protection of the WORK and properties or for the safety and
the convenience of public and/ or others.
2.1 Reference has been made in this specification to the latest edition of the following
codes, standards and specifications :
a) ANSI B 31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping

Systems
b) ANSI B 31.4 - Liquid Petroleum Transportation Piping Systems
c) API 1104 - Standard for Welding Pipelines and Related

Facilities
d) API 1105 - Bulletin on Construction Practices for Oil and

Products Pipelines
e) Part 1992 - Transportation of Natural and Other Gas

Title 49 by Pipeline (US Department of Transportation -
Pipeline Safety Standards)
f) Part 195 - Transportation of Liquids by Pipeline (US

Department of Transportation - Pipeline Safety
Standards).
In case of differences between the requirements of this specification and that of the
above referred codes, standards and specifications, the requirements of this
specification shall govern.
2.2 For the purpose of this specification the following definitions shall hold:
the words "Shall" and "Must" are mandatory.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
the works "Should, "May" and "Will" are non-mandatory, advisory or

recommended.
3.0 REQUIREMENTS OF R.O.U. AND ACCESS THERETO
CONTRACTOR shall, before starting any clearing operations, familiarise himself with all
the requirements of the Authorities having jurisdiction over the Right of Way for work
along the pipeline route or in connection with the use of other lands or roads for
construction purpose.
CONTRACTOR shall notify COMPANY well in advance during work progress, the
method of construction for crossing road, pipeline, cable, railway, river and other
existing obstacles.
CONTRACTOR shall not commence work on such crossings before having obtained
approval from the authorities and land owners concerned to the satisfaction of
COMPANY. The crossings shall be installed to meet at all times the requirements and
conditions of the permit issued by the authorities concerned. In the absence of any
specific requirements by authorities, CONTRACTOR shall comply with COMPANY'S
instructions.
The right of ingress and egress to the ROW shall be limited to points where such ROW
intersects public roads, Arrangements for other access required by the CONTRACTOR
shall be made by him at his own cost and responsibility, and for such access, the
conditions of this specifications shall also apply.
Where the ROW comes within 30 metres of an existing line or facility, CONTRACTOR
shall propose and provide methods to safe-guard the existing line or facility (e.g. a
demarcation fence). No work is allowed in such area without COMPANY's prior
approval.
3.1 Safety measures during construction of pipelines inside the area influenced
by high voltage lines
3.1.1 General
Pipelines which are constructed inside the area of high voltage lines may be electrically
influenced by the high voltage lines. The voltage caused by the influence may at times
be high enough to pose danger to personnel working on the pipeline. It is imperative
therefore, that the instructions given below should be strictly observed.
3.1.1.1 It is a necessity that all personnel working on the pipeline which is being laid in the
area influenced by the high voltage systems, be given clear instructions on measures
to be taken.
3.1.1.2 Vehicles and equipment must be earth-connected. This may be effected by attaching
an uninsulated cable or chain (which touches the ground) of adequate length to the
underside of the vehicle.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
3.1.1.3 If its not impossible for plant and/ or materials to come within 50m of the centre of the
high voltage systems, special measures must be taken to prevent any approach
beyond that distance, unless article 3.1.2 is complied with.
3.1.1.4 DURING THUNDERSTORMS OR WHEN DISCHARGES ARE OBSERVED ON INSULATORS

ALL PERSONNEL MUST LEAVE THE AREA OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE LINE AND
PIPELINE.
3.1.1.5 To prevent electrical voltage in a non-buried section of the pipeline from rising to
dangerous levels, the length of the pipeline section which has been welded together
before burial must not exceed the length at which the max. admissible voltage may be
induced. This length may be calculated using an approved calculation method.
3.1.1.6 Before a pipeline section is lowered into the trench the structure's earth electrodes
indicated in the drawings or determined with calculation method must have been
installed and connected both to the pipeline section already buried and to the section
which is about to be buried. The electrical connections which serve the purpose of
preventing dangerous voltages must have a min. area of 35mm2.
Said connections must not be interrupted until after the permanent safety earth
connections have been installed and connected to the entire uninterrupted pipeline.
3.1.1.7 The welded connection between the pipeline section and the section already buried
must be installed at a distance of at least 50m from the nearest point of a pylon base.
3.1.1.8 Personnel doing work inside the area of influence of the high voltage system must
wear electrically insulating foot-wear (e.g. rubber kneeboots) and wear insulating
rubber or plastic gloves.
3.1.2 Additional measures for work at less than 50m from the centre of the high
voltage system.
If work is done at less than 50m from the centre of the high voltage system, the
regulations below must be complied with in addition to the rules specified in clause
3.1.1.
3.1.2.1 The work must not be started until agreement has been reached with the authorities
which controls the high voltage system, about the implementation of the safety
measures specified in this section.
3.1.2.2 Measures must be taken to prevent excavating and hoisting equipments from
approaching high voltage lines to within any of the following distances.
This distance depends on the voltage carried. For individual connections the distance
must be :
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
0 - 50 KV 3m
40 - 200 KV 5m
200 - 380 KV 8m
The measures taken may be as follows :
1. Special selection of equipment, or limiting or blocking certain directions of

movement, or limiting the operational area, thereby making it impossible for
any work to tbe done at a distance from the high voltage line of less than the
accepted minimum.
2. In case the measures recommended in 1. above are not feasible, installation of

clearly visible markers of sufficient height or laying out a "no passage beyond
this point" line of drums painted bright red and white must prevent any work
being done inside the danger area. Further, an inspector must be prevent all
the time.
3.1.2.3 In the event that a vehicle, crane etc. should accidently come into contact with a live
cable of a high voltage system or flash-over of electrical charge occurs, the driver must
not leave his vehicle because this will pose a serious threat to his life.
The vehicle or crane must break the contact WITHOUT ANY HELP FROM OUTSIDE.
The driver must not leave his vehicle unitl be has managed to leave "the dangerous
area, or alternatively, when the Electricity Authorities have given notice that the
cable(s) have been put out of circuit. In case a serious fire starts in the vehicle, he is
permitted to jump from the vehicle, clearing it as far as possible, while the jump
should possible be to a dry spot.
4.0 RIGHT-OF-WAY
The CONTRACTOR is required to perform his construction activities within the width of
Right-of-way set aside for construction of pipeline, unless he has made other
arrangements with the land owner and/ or tenant for using extra land. Variation in this
width caused by local conditions or installation of associated pipeline facilities or
existing pipelines will be identified in the field or instructed to the CONTRACTOR by
COMPANY.
The ROW boundary lines shall be staked by the CONTRACTOR, so as to prepare the
strip for laying the pipeline. CONTRACTOR shall also establish all required lines and
grades necessary to complete the work and shall be responsible for the accuracy of
such lines and grades.
4.1 Staking
Prior to cleaning operations CONTRACTOR shall :
1) Install Bench Marks, Intersection Points and other required survey movements.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
2) Stake markers in the centreline of the pipeline at distance of maximum 100

metres for straight line sections and maximum 10 metres for horizontal bends.
Wherever ROW centreline has been staked on ground, CONTRACTOR shall
exercise care in accurately staking the pipeline centreline, in consultation with
COMPANY.
3) Stake two ROW markers at least at every 100 metres.
4) Set out a reference line with respect in pipeline centreline at a convenient

location. Markers on reference line shall be at a distance of maximum 100m for
straight line sections and maximum 10m for horizontal bends.
5) Install distance markers locating and indicating special points, such as but not
limited to :
Contract limits, obstacle crossings, change of wall thickness, including

corresponding chainage, etc.
ROW markers shall be staked out at the boundary limits of Right-of-way wherever
possible. ROW markers shall be painted red with numbers painted in white. Number
shall be identical to centreline marker number with letters A (left side) and B (right
side) added, (looking, in flow direction). Reference markers shall also carry the same
information as its corresponding centreline markers.
Markers shall be of suitable material so as to serve their purpose and shall be coloured
distinctly for easy identification. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the
maintenance and replacement of the reference line markers until the permanent
pipeline markers are placed and the as-built drawings are submitted and approved.
Any deviation from the approved alignment shall be executed by CONTRACTOR after
seeking COMPANY approval in writing prior to clearing operations.
4.2 Monuments
All shrines, monument, border stones, stone walls and the like shall be protected and
shall be subjected to no harm during construction. Any violation of the above by the
CONTRACTOR shall be brought to the notice of the COMPANY and other concerned
authorities. Restoration of the above shall wholly be the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR.
4.3 Fencing
Prior to clearing or grading of the Right-of-way or stringing of pipe, CONTRACTOR shall

open fences on or crossing the construction Right-of-way and install temporary gate of
sound construction made of similar materials and suitable quality to serve purpose of
original fence. Adjacent post shall be adequately braced to prevent slackening of the
remainder of the fence. Before such fences are cut and opened, CONTRACTOR shall
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
notify the land owner or tenant, and where practicable, the opening of the fences shall
be in accordance with the wishes of said owner and tenant. In all cases where
CONTRACTOR removes fences to obtain work route, CONTRACTOR shall provide and
install temporary fencing, and on completion of construction shall restore such fencing
to its original condition.
CONTRACTOR shall install temporary fencing on either side of ROW where in

COMPANY's opinion, it is considered essential to ensure safety and non-interference,
especially in areas like grasing lands, villages etc.
Fencing shall be removable type wherever necessary, to permit crossing of traffic. The
type of fencing must be suitable for the situation in accordance with user. The pole
distance shall not be greater than 6m. The minimum height of the fencing shall be
1.2m above grade. Fencing can consist of one or more rows of smooth wire and/ or of
barbed wire.
Fencing shall be continuously maintained and the thorough-ways inspected to be shut

during the execution of the work.
4.4 Row Clearing and Grading
4.4.1 All stumps shall be grubbed for a continuous strip, with a width equal to trench top
width plus two metres on either side centred on the pipeline centreline. Further, all
stumps will be grubbed from areas of the construction Right-of-way, where Right-of-
way grading will be required. Outside of these areas to be graded and the mentioned
trench strip, at the option of CONTRACTOR, the stumps may either be grubbed or cut
off to ground level. Any stump cut off must be left in a condition suitable for rubber-
tyred pipeline equipment traffic.
4.4.2 All grubbed stumps, timber, bush undergrowth and root cut or removed from the
Right-of-way shall be disposed of in a manner and method satisfactory to COMPANY,
land-owner and/ or tenant, and Government Authorities having jurisdication and as
soon as practical after the initial removal. In no case, it shall be left to interfere with
the grading and laying operations. Whenever stumps are grubbed and a hole is left in
the ground, CONTRACTOR shall back-fill the hole and compact it to prevent water
from gathering in it and creating a big hole.
4.4.3 CONTRACTOR shall grade the pipeline Right-of-way as required for proper installation
of the pipeline, for providing access to the pipeline during construction, and for
ensuring that the pipeline is constructed in accordance with the good engineering and
construction practices.
4.4.4 CONTRACTOR shall grade sharp points or low points, without prejudice to section 6.0
of this specification, to allow the pipe to be bent and laid within the limits set forth in
these specifications and drawings as regards the minimum elastic curvature permitted,
and shall drill, blast or excavate any rock or other material which cannot be graded off
with ordinary grading equipment in order to make an adequate working space along
the pipeline.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
4.4.5 No temporary or permanent deposit of any kind of material resulting from clearing and
grading shall be permitted in the approach to roads, railways, streams, ditches,
drainage ditches and any other position which may hinder the passage and/or the
natural water drainage.
4.4.6 The Right-of-Way clearing and grading operations shall in no case involve embankment
structures of any type and class without prior approval of the authorities having
jurisdiction over the same.
4.4.7 In the case of natural or artificial deposits of loose soil, sand, heaps of earth, or other
fill materials, these shall be removed till stable natural ground level is reached so as to
ensure the construction of the pipeline ditch is in stable ground.
4.4.8 In the case of Right-of-Way clearing and grading on hillside or in steep slope areas,
proper barriers or other structures shall be provided to prevent the removed materials
from rolling downhill. The Right-of-Way crossfall shall not exceed 10%.
4.4.9 Wherever the pipeline Right-of-Way runs across plantations, alongside farmyards, built
up areas, groups of trees, horticultural spreads, gardens, grass-fields, ditches, roads,
paths, railways or any other area with restrictions of some kind, CONTRACTOR shall
grade only the minimum area required for digging and constructing the pipeline. In the
said places, CONTRACTOR shall carry out the works in such a way that damage done
from the pipeline construction is kept to a minimum.
4.5 Provision of Detours
CONTRACTOR shall do all necessary grading and bridging at road, water and other
crossings and at other locations where needed, to permit the passage of its men and
equipment. It is understood that the CONTRACTOR has recognised such restricctive
features of the Right-of-Way and shall provide the necessary detoors and execute the
works without any extra cost to COMPANY. Public travel shall not be inconvenienced
nor shall be wholly obstructed at any point.
CONTRACTOR at his own cost shall furnish and maintain watchman detours, lanterns,
traffic lights, barricades, signs, wherever necessary to fully protect the public.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for moving its equipment and men across or around
watercourses. This may require the construction of temporary bridges or culverts.
Temporary bridging or access to fording required for Right-of-Way crossing water
courses shall be constructed. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that such temporary works
shall not interfere with normal water flow, avoid overflows, keep the existing
morphology unchanged and shall not unduly damage the banks or water courses. No
public ditches or drains shall be filled or bridged for passage of equipment until
CONTRACTOR has secured written approval of the Authorities having jurisdiction over
the same. CONTRACTOR shall furnish COMPANY a copy of such approval.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
4.6 Steep and Rocky Terrain
Grading operations could normally be carried out along the Right-of-way with
mechanical excavators or manually. In certain areas, grading may have to be resorted
to exclusively by blasting.
In rough or steep terrain, CONTRACTOR may have to grade access roads and
temporary bypass roads for its own use. Where such access roads do not fall on the
Right-of-Way, CONTRACTOR shall obtain necessary written permission from land
owners and tenants and be responsible for all damages caused by the construction and
use of such roads, and at no extra cost to COMPANY, Wherever rocky terrain is
encountered, grading shall be carried out in all types of solid rocks which cannot be
removed until loosened by blasting, drilling, wedging or by other recognised means of
quarrying solid rocks.
Where use of explosives is required in connection with Right-of-Way grading and

trenching, CONTRACTOR shall comply fully with requirements of the use of explosives
as provided under clause 6.3 of this Specification.
4.7 Off Right-of-Way Damages
CONTRACTOR shall confine all its operations within limits of the Right-of-Way. Any
damage to property outside ROW shall be restored or settled to the CONTRACTOR's
account.
CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle all off Right-of-Way damage claims. Should
CONTRACTOR fail to do so, COMPANY shall give written notice to CONTRACTOR that if
CONTRACTOR does not settle such claims within seven days after such notice,
COMPANY shall have the authority to settle claims from the account of the
CONTRACTOR.
5.0 HANDLING, HAULING, STRINGING AND STORING OF MATERIALS.
5.1 General
The CONTRACTOR shall exercise utmost care in handling in pipe and other materials.
CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for all materials and their identification until
such time that the pipes and other materials are installed in permanent installation.
CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for materials, however, method of storage
shall be approved by COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the COMPANY for the cost of replacement of all
COMPANY supplied materials damaged during the period in which such materials are in
the custody of the CONTRACTOR. It shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility to unpack
any packing for the materials supplied by COMPANY.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
5.1.2 "Taking Over" of Line Pipe
The following stipulations shall apply in case CONTRACT provides for supply of line
pipe, bare and/or corrosion coated, by COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall receive and 'take over' against requisition, line pipe from the
COMPANY's designated place(s) of delivery as defined in the CONTRACT.
CONTRACTOR shall perform visual inspection of the bare pipes and coating of the
corrosion coated pipes, as the case may be, in the presence of COMPANY and all
damages shall be recorded. In the case of corrosion coated pipes CONTRACTOR at his
option may carry out holiday detection at a prescribed set voltage and record such
holidays, in the presence of COMPANY, at the time of 'taking over'. However, if
CONTRACTOR proposes to perform only visual inspection of coating, then repair of all
holidays found at the time of laying the pipeline shall be carried out by the
CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to COMPANY. The CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to
extra compensation for repair and rectification of defects recorded at the time of taking
over as per the rate set forth in the "CONTRACT". Repair of all damages after taking
over the delivery of the materials shall be to the CONTRACTOR'S cost. In case of delay
in handing over of COMPANY supplied material, CONTRACTOR shall be fully
responsible for stopping and rearranging means of transportation at no extra cost to
the COMPANY.
5.2 Handling and Hauling of Line Pipe
5.2.1 Bare Pipe
CONTRACTOR shall unload, load, stockpile and transport the bare pipes using suitable
means and in a manner to avoid denting, flattening, or other damage to pipes. Pipe
shall not be allowed to drop or strike objects which will damage the pipe but shall be
lifted or lowered from one level to another by suitable equipment. Lifting hooks when
used, shall be equipped with a plate curved to fit the curvature of the pipe. In loading
pipe on trucks each length shall be lowered to position without dropping and each
succeeding length shall rest on special supports on the truck and shall be separated
from the adjacent pipes. After loading, suitable chains and padding shall be used to tie
the load securely to each bolster. Pipes, when stock piled, shall be placed on suitable
skids to keep them clear of the ground and flood water. The CONTRACTOR shall
provide all necessary timber or other materials required for the stock-piling. While
stacking, the number of allowable layers of bare pipes shall be calculated as per API
RP5L1 and shall be agreed with COMPANY. The stacks must be properly secured
against sliding and shall consist of pipes of the same diameter and wall thickness.
Adjacent stacks of pipes having different dimensional characteristics shall be clearly
separated.
Pipes which are damaged at the time of delivery or "taking-over" (when line pipe is
supplied by COMPANY), particularly those which are dented, buckled, or otherwise
permanently deformed, must be stacked separately and may be transported to the
sites only when these defects have been repaired or eliminated.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
5.2.2 Corrosion Coated Pipes
The CONTRACTOR shall load, unload, transport and stockpile the coated pipes using
approved suitable means and in a manner to avoid damage to the pipe and coating.
CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY, a complete procedure indicating the
manner and arrangement used for handling and stacking of coated pipes for COMPANY
approval prior to commencement of handling operations.
Use of vaccum lifting equipments are preferred. Hooks may also be used for handling
the pipes provided they have sufficient width and depth to fit the inside of the pipe and
covered with soft material like rubber, teflon or equivalent, so as not to cause damages
to bevel or pipe ends. During hoisting, cables/wire ropes shall have sufficient
inclination compared to pipe axis so that they do not come into contact with external
coating.
Coated pipes may be handled by means of slings and belts of proper width (minimum
60mm) made of non-metallic/non - abrasive materials. In this case, pipes to be
stacked shall be separated row by row to avoid damage by rubbing the coated surface
in the process of taking off the slings. Use of round sectional slings are prohibited.
During handling, suitable handling equipment with proper length of booms shall be
used. Fork lifts may be used provided that the arms of the fork lift are covered by
suitable pads preferably rubber. Before lifting operations it is essential to ensure that
the pipe surface is free from foreign material with sharp edges. Belts/slings when used
shall be cleaned to remove hard materials such as stone, gravel etc. Coated pipes
shall not be bumped against any other pipe or any other objects. Rolling, skiding or
dragging shall be strictly forbidden.
Coated pipes at all times shall be stacked completely clear from the ground so that the
bottom row of pipes remain free from any surface water. The pipes shall stacked at a
slope so that driving rain does not collect inside the pipe.
The coated pipes at all times shall be stacked by placing them on ridges of sand free
from stones and covered with a plastic film or on wooden supports provided with
suitable cover. This cover can, for example, consist of dry, germ free straw with a
plastic film, otherwise foam rubber may be used. The supports shall be spaced in such
a manner so as to avoid permanent bending of the pipes, particularly in case of small
diameter pipes with low wall thickness. The pipes shall be stacked so that the
uncoated bevelled ends are in line at one end thus making differences in length clearly
noticeable.
Stacks shall consist of limited number of layers so that the pressure exercised by the
pipe's own weight does not cause damages to the coating. Each pipe section shall be
separated by means of spacers suitably spaced for this purpose. Stacks shall be
suitably secured against falling down and shall consist of pipe sections having the same
diameter and wall thickness. The weld bead of pipes shall be positioned in such a
manner so as not to touch the adjacent pipes.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
Coated Pipes stacked in open storage yards/dump yards shall be suitably covered on
top to decrease direct exposure to sunlight.
The ends of the pipes during handling and stacking shall always be protected with
bevel protecters.
The lorries/rail wagons shall be equipped with adequate pipe supports having as many
round hollow beds as the number of pipes to be placed on the bottom of the lorry bed.
Supports shall be provided for at least 10% of the pipe length. These supports shall be
lined with a rubber protection and shall be spaced in a manner as to support equal
load from the pipes. The rubber protection shall be free from all nails and staples
where pipes are in contact. The second layer and all subsequent layers shall be
separated from other layers with adequate number of separating layers of protective
material such as straw in plastic covers or otherwise to avoid direct touch between the
coated pipes.
All stachions of lorries/rail wagons used for transportation shall be covered by non-
abrasive material like rubber belts or equivalent. Care shall be exerclsed to properly
cover the top of the stanchions and convex portions such as reinforcement of the
truck/rail wagon only, rivets etc. to prevent damage to the coated surface.
5.3 Stringing of Pipe
Pipes shall be unloaded from the stringing trucks and lowered to the ground by means
of by means of boom tractor or swinging crane or other suitable equipment using
lifting devices as mentioned earlier. Dragging or sliding of pipe shall not be permitted.
Special precaution shall be taken during stringing of corrosion corrosion coated pipe as
per the special requirements of previous para. Stringing of pipe shall only be carried
out in daylight and after clearing and grading operations have been completed. Pipes
shall not be strung along the ROW in rocky areas where blasting may be required, until
all blasting is completed and the area cleared of all debris.
The stringing of the pipe on the ROW shall be done in such a manner so as to cause
the least interference with the normal use of the land crossed and to avoid damage to
and interference with the pipes. The sequence of pipes must be interrupted at suitable
intervals, spaced to coincide with passages, roads, railwys, water crossings as well as
at other places if requested by landowner / tenants to permit use of land.
In case line pipe supply is by different manufacturers s, CONTRACTOR shall string all
line pipes of one manufacturer before commencing the stringing of line pipes of
another manufacturer.
When parallel pipelines are being constructed, bumping against and contact with the
strung sections of pipe shall be avoided, whether the stringing of the pipes for the
individual lines is carried separately or simultaneously.
The pipe lengths shall be properly spaced in order to make easier the handling during
the welding phase.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to see that pipe is strung as per the
approved drawings for the proper placement of pipe by size, thickness, grade and
other specifications. Any additional handling of pipes due to failure to comply with the
requirements shall be at the CONTRACTOR's expense.
5.4 Repair of Damaged pipes
After the pipes have been strung along the ROW, they shall be inspected by the
CONTRACTOR and by the COMPANY. All defective pipe ends shall have to be repaired
as per the directions of the COMPANY or as per the requirements of this specification.
5.5 Materials other than linepipe
CONTRACTOR shall receive and take over against requisition all COMPANY supplied
materials from COMPANY's designated place(s) of delivery as defined in the
CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR shall perform visual inspection and defects, if any noted,
shall be recorded separately. The CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to extra
compensation for repair and rectification of such defects at the rates set forth in the
"CONTRACT".
The CONTRACTOR shall perform the necessary loading, unloading, hauling from points
designated by the COMPANY and storing, if necessary, of all materials. The
CONTRACTOR shall exercise care in handling, storing and distribution of materials in
order to avoid damage and deterioration of these materials and prevent their theft or
loss.
Materials excluding line pipe shall be stored in sheltered storages. Such materials shall
not be strung on the Right-of-Way but shall be transported in covered conveyances
for use only at the time of installation.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all valves and whenever applicable, other materials are
fitted with suitable end covers of the type approved by COMPANY. Materials with
worked surfaces such as flanges, pipe fittings, etc. must be stacked and handled so as
to avoid contact with the ground or with substances that could damage them.
The manufacturer's instructions regarding temperature and procedure for storing

materials which are subject to alteration of the original properties and cnaracteristics
did to unsuitable storage must be strictly complied with and, if required, an adequate
heat conditioning shall be provided for these materials.
When supplied in containers and packages they must not be thrown or dropped, not
handled using hooks which could damage the container or the materials, either during
loading/unloading or during successive handling, until their final use.
Storage of coating materials which are susceptible to deterioration or damages

especially due to humidity, exposure to high thermal cconditions or other diverse
weather conditions, shall be suitably stored and protected. These materials shall be
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
kept permanently in store, supported above the ground in a dry place, protected
against the weather and transported for use only at the time and in quantities
necessary for immediate application. Deteriorated materials shall not be used and
replaced with no extra cost to COMPANY.
5.6 Identification
CONTRACTOR shall provide all pipes, bends, etc. greater than 2" with serial numbers
as soon as possible and measure their length and state is on the pipes, etc. Pipes to be
bent shall be measured prior to bending. Identification (i.e. letter, number and length)
shall be indelible.
All serial numbers shall be recorded in a list, which shall also state appurtenant pipe
numbers.
Beside recording the stamped - in pipe numbers, length of pipe and painted-on serial
numbers, the stamped-in numbers of T-pieces, bends, valves, etc. and the batch
numbers of bends, T-pieces, valves, etc. and the make of valves, shall also be
recorded in said list.
Before a pipe length, pipe end, etc. is cut the painted serial number and stamped-in
pipe number shall be transferred by CONTRACTOR in the presence of COMPANY to
either side of the joint which is to be made by cutting, and the changes shall be
recorded in the above mentioned list stating the (new) length. The results shall be
such that all pipes, pups, etc. of diameter greater than 2" bear clear marks painted on.
CONTRACTOR shall explicitly instruct his staff that parts which cannot be identified
must not be removed, except after permission by COMPANY.
As a general rule parts must be marked as described above before being moved. In no
conditions may unmarked parts be incorporated into the WORK.
6.0 TRENCHING
6.1 Location
CONTRACTOR shall, excavate and maintain the pipeline trench on the staked center
line of the pipeline taking into account the curves of the pipeline.
6.2 Excavation
6.2.1 CONTRACTOR shall, by any method approved by COMPANY, dig the pipeline trench on
the cleared and graded Right-of-Way. In cultivable land and other areas specifically
designated by the COMPANY, top 60mm of the arable soil on the pipeline trench top
and 500mm on either side shall be excavated and stored separately to be replaced in
original position after backfilling and compacting rest of the trench.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
Suitable crossing shall be provided and maintained over the open ROW where
necessary, to pemit general public, property owners or his tenants to cross or move
stock or equipment from one side of the trench to the other.
Care shall be exercised to see that fresh soil recovered from trenching operation,
intended to be used for backfilling over the laid pipe in the trench, is not mixed with
loose debris or foreign material. The excavated material shall never be deposited over
or against the strung pipe.
6.2.2 In steep slope area or on the hillside, before commencing the works, proper barriers or
other protection shall be provided to prevent removed materials from rolling downhill.
6.2.3 On slopes where there is danger of landslide, the pipeline trench shall be maintained
open only for the time strictly necessary. Forever, the COMPANY may require
excavation of trench by hand, local route detours and limiting the period of execution
of the works.
6.2.4 In certain slope sections before the trench cuts through the water table, proper
drainage shall be ensured both near the ditch and the Right-of-Way in order to
guarantee soil stability.
6.2.5 All sewers, drains ditches and other natural waterways involved in the execution of the
works shall be maintained open and functional. The same applies to canals, irrigation
canals, pipelines and buried facilities crossed by the ditch for which temporary pipeline
shall be laid, if required, and proper temporary installations provided.
6.3 Blasting
Blasting for trenching and the related removal of scattered rock and debris caused by
the blasting from the Right-of-Way and/or adjacent property, shall be performed by
CONTRACTOR as part of his work.
Every possible precaution shall be taken to prevent injuries and damages to persons
and properties during blasting operations, which shall be performed in accordance with
Standard Rules for Blasting.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain necessary permits for storage and use of explosives and
comply with the laws, rules and regulations of the respective Governmental agencies
having jurisdiction thereof. No blasting will be allowed without prior and due notice
given by CONTRACTOR to COMPANY, Government authorities, land-owners, property
occupants, adjacent work crew, and other concerned parties.
CONTRACTOR shall employ only such workmen who are experienced in the type of
work to be performed, to supervise, handle and use explosives.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
6.3.1 Areas to be blasted are to be categorised as follows:
a) Where blasting is to be carried out beyond 50 meters away from any existing
pipeline or structures (either above or below ground) the CONTRACTOR shall
submit his proposed blasting procedure and perform a trial blast for
COMPANY's approval.
b) Where blasting is to be carried out between 50 and 15 meters from any

existing pipeline or structure (either above or below ground) the CONTRACTOR
shall submit a procedure for controlled blasting e.g. break-holes, slit trench etc.
which will also detail out safety precautions to safeguard the existing pipelines.
This procedure will be approved by COMPANY prior to commencement and
performing of trial blasting.
c) No blasting is allowed within 15 metres of any existing pipeline or structure

(either above or below around).
6.3.2 All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent stones from falling outside the
Right-of-way and in cultivated areas and to avoid any damage to the installation and
properties existing nearby.
6.3.3 Blasting and removal of debris shall be carried out prior to stringing the pipes.
6.3.4 Ground vibration due to blasting near the existing structures shall be continuously
monitored using certified instruments to be provided by CONTRACTOR and approved
by COMPANY and the peak particle velocities shall not exceed 50 mm/ sec.
COMPANY reserves the right to refuse blasting where possible danger exists to
property, existing utilities or other structures. In such locations other methods of
extracting rock shall be proposed by CONTRACTOR and shall be approved by
COMPANY.
6.4 Normal Cover and Trench Dimensions
The trench shall be excavated to a minimum so as to provide, on both sides of the

installed pipeline, a clearance as indicated in the job standard/ drawings and to a
depth sufficient to provide the minimum cover as indicated below. The dimensions in
the table below shall govern except as noted herein or as shown on the job standards
or detailed construction drawings or as required by authorities having jurisdiction,
whichever is greatest. Minimum depth of cover shall be measured from the top of pipe
corrosion/ concrete weight coating (as applicable) to the top of undisturbed surface of
the soil or top of graded working strip or top of road or top of rail whichever is lower.
Fill material in working strip shall not be considered to add to the depth of cover.
However, surface of fill material placed to fill hollows may be used to determine the
depth of cover subject to prior approval by COMPANY.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
Sl. Location Minimum Cover in meters

No.
a) Industrial, Commercial & 1.0

Residential Areas
b) Rocky Terrain 1.0
c) Minor water crossings/ canals / drain / 1.5

nala / stream
d) River crossings for which scour depth is 1.5

defined (below scour)
e) River crossings (Bank width < 50 m) 1.5

below lowest bed level)
f) Other crossings (Bank width > 50 m) 2.5 (for normal soil)

( below lowest bed level) 1.5 (for rocky strata)
g) Water crossing by HDD 2.5

(below least bed level)
h) Uncased/ Cased Road Crossings/ 1.2

Station approach
i) Railroad Crossings 1.7
j) Drainage, ditches at roads / railway crossings 1.0
k) Marshy land and creek area 1.5
Notes :
In case pipeline is located within 1.5 m from any dwelling unit, the cover shall be
increased by 300 mm over and above that specified.
6.5 Cutting and Removal of Paving
Whenever it is permitted by Authorities and / or COMPANY to open cut a paved road

crossing, or where the line is routed within the road pavement, CONTRACTOR shall
remove the paving in accordance with the restrictions and requirements of the
authorities having jurisdiction thereof or as directed by COMPANY. The open cut for
the road crossing shall be carried out only when the section of pipeline to be laid is
complete. After laying the pipeline, backfilling shall be immediately performed and all
the area connected with the works shall be temporarily restored.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
Throughout the period of execution of such works, CONTRACTOR shall provide and
use warning signs, traffic lights or lanterns, barricades, fencing, watchman, etc. as
required by the local authorities having jurisdiction and/ or COMPANY.
For all roads, paths, walkway etc. which are open-cut, CONTRACTOR shall provide
temporary diversions properly constructed to allow the passage of normal traffic with
the minimum of inconvenience and interruptions.
The paving shall be restored to its original condition after the pipeline is installed.
6.6 Extra Depth and Clearance
At points where the contour of the earth way require extra depth to fit the minimum
radius of the bend as specified or to eliminate unnecessary bending of the pipe
according to customary good pipeline practice, or where a deep trench is required at
the approaches to crossings of roadways, railroads, rivers, streams, drainage ditches,
and the like, CONTRACTOR shall excavate such additional depth as may be necessary
at no extra cost to the COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall excavate to additional depth where the pipeline approaches and
crosses other pipelines, sewers, drain pipes, water mains, telephone, conduits, and
other underground structures, so that the pipeline may be laid with at least 50
centimeters free clearance from the obstacle or as specified in the drawings, or such
greater minimum distances as may be required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Where the pipeline crosses areas, whose easements specifically require greater than
normal depths of cover, the trench shall be excavated to extra depth in accordance
with the Right-of-way Agreements or as required.
CONTRACTOR shall excavate all such additional depths as may be necessary at no

extra cost to the COMPANY.
6.7 Grades, Bends and Finish of Trench
The trench is to be cut to a grade that will provide a firm, uniform and continuous
support for the pipe. Bends shall be made in the pipe at significant changes in grade of
the trench. COMPANY reserves the right to set the grade of the trench and locate the
bends if so desired, in which case CONTRACTOR shall excavate, at no extra cost, the
trench and bend the pipe to such a grade. COMPANY desires to reduce to a minimum
the required number of cold field bends to lay the pipe to conform to the general
contour of the ground and maintain a normal cover. This can be accomplished by
cutting the trench slightly deeper at the crest of ridges and by gradually deepening the
trench in aproaches to crossings. Such trenching work shall be done by CONTRACTOR
at no extra cost to the COMPANY.
COMPANY intends that there will be a minmum of hand grading of the trench bottom.
However, to achieve this, CONTRACTOR will have to dig as square a bottom of the
trench as possible with his equipment. This in part can be obtained by adjusting and
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
adopting the crumbling shoe and digging teeth of the trenching machines and by use
of a drag behind the trenching machines or manually dressing-up the same.
CONTRACTOR shall do such hand work in the trench as is necessary to free the
bottom of the trench from loose rock and hard clods and to trim protruding roots from
the bottom and side walls of the trench.
6.8 Padding
In all cases where rock or gravel or hard soil is encountered in the bottom of the
trench, COMPANY will decide the exact extent of trench padding, that will be required.
The thickness of the compacted padding shall not be less than 150mm. In those areas
that are to be padded, the trench shall be at least 150mm deeper than otherwise
required, and evenly and sufficiently padded to keep the pipe, when in place, at least
150mm above bottom of excavated trench.
Acceptable padding shall be placed under the pipeline before its installation, and
around after installation to establish at both sides and on top of the pipe a permanent
layer of padding. The thickness of compacted padding on top of pipe corrosion coating
shall be at least 150mm. Padding materials that are approved by COMPANY shall be
graded soil/ sand and/ or other materials containing no gravel, rock, or lumps of hard
soil. Sand used for padding shall pass through sieve size ASTM-10 or ISO-2.00.
When specified in the CONTRACT, rock shield may be used in place of or in addition to
sand padding as indicated above. Such rock shield shall be in accordance with the
specification issued for the purpose and shall be subject to COMPANY approval.
6.9 Protection of Trench
CONTRACTOR shall keep the trench in good condition until the pipe is laid, and no
claim is to be made to the COMPANY by reason of its caving either before or after pipe
is laid.
All lumber, sheet-piling jacks or other materials, that may be necessary to shore the
trench, in order to prevent caving are to be furnished and removed by CONTRACTOR.
CONTRACTOR shall dewater if necessary, using well point system or other suitable
systems, shore, or do what else might be required to excavate the trench, install the
pipe in it and backfill the trench in accordance with these specifications at no extra cost
to COMPANY.
6.10 Protection of Underground Utilities and Special Methods
Details of some underground utilities, as far as acquired by COMPANY, shall be

indicated in the Drawings. However, CONTRACTOR shall obtain plans and full details of
all existing and planned underground services from the relevant Local Authorities and
shall follow these plans closely at all times during the performance of work.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for location and protection of all underground lines
and structures. In special locations the use of trenching machine, backhoe may result
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
in damage to property and subsurface structures likely to be encountered during

excavation. At such places, CONTRACTOR shall excavate the trench manually to same
specification at no extra cost.
Where the pipeline crosses other underground utilities/ structures, the CONTRACTOR
shall first manually excavate to a depth and in such a manner that the utilities/
structures are located.
Temporary under pinning or any other type of supports and other protective devices
necessary to keep the interfering structure intact shall be provided by the
CONTRACTOR at his own cost and shall be of such design as to ensure against their
possible failure.
Despite all precautions, should any damage to any structure/ utility etc., occur, the
Owner/ Authority concerned shall be contacted by the CONTRACTOR and repair shall
forthwith be carried out by the CONTRACTOR at his expense under the direction and
to the satisfaction of COMPANY and the concerned Owner/ Authority. If CONTRACTOR
fails to repair in reasonable time, COMPANY reserves the right to have the repair
executed at the cost of the CONTRACTOR.
6.11 Encroachments and Working near other utilities
In locations, where pipeline has to be laid in the body of a road, canal, dyke or other
locations under jurisdiction of Government/ Public Bodies, the CONTRACTOR shall
perform such work without extra compensation, according to the requirement of
concerned Authorities. When it becomes necessary that CONTRACTOR has to resort to
hand digging, well point, erection of sheet piling or any other special construction
methods in these areas, no extra compensation shall be paid. CONTRACTOR shall
contact the Authorities concerned in order to become familiar with their requirements.
In locations, where the pipeline has to be laid more or less parallel to an existing
pipeline, cable and/ or other utilities in the Right-of-way, CONTRACTOR shall perform
the work to the satisfaction of the Owner/ Authority of the existing pipeline/ cable/
utility. In such locations CONTRACTOR shall perform work in such a way that even
under the worst weather and flooding conditions, the existing pipeline/ utilities remain
stable and shall neither become undermined nor have the tendency to slide towards
the trench.
CONTRACTOR shall be liable for any damage occuring to, or resulting from damage to
other pipelines, underground structure/ utilities, as laid down in clause 6.10 of this
specification.
6.12 Provisions for negative buoyancy to the pipe
CONTRACTOR shall check if up-floating danger is present in open trench and then shall
take appropriate measures to prevent up-floating such as applying soil dams and
dewatering of trench or temporary filling of water into the line (in exceptional cases).
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
In the case of water on the ditch bottom when the pipeline is being laid, the ditch shall
be drained to the extent and for the time required to make a visual inspection of the
ditch bottom. After this inspection, the presence of water will be allowed provided its
level does not cause sliding of the ditch sides and pipe floating before backfilling when
no concrete weighting is provided.
The water pumped out of the ditch shall be discharged into a natural water course.
Wherever up-floating of the pipeline after backfilling is to be reckoned with, anti-

buoyancy measures shall be provided by CONTRACTOR for areas indicated in the
drawings or as may be encountered during construction, using one or a combination of
the following methods :
weighting by applying a continuous concrete coating around the pipe;

weighting by installing saddle weights;
installing metal anchors screwed into the suboil in pairs;
deeper burial of pipeline;
provision of select backfill material.
The above provisions shall be in accordance with the relevant specifications and/ or job
standards/ drawings.
7.0 BENDING
CONTRACTOR shall preferably provide for changes of vertical and horizontal alignment
by making elastic bends. CONTRACTOR may provide cold field bends, at its option for
change of direction and change of slope. COMPANY at its option, may authorise
fabricated bends for installation at points where in COMPANY's judgement the use of
such bends is unavoidable.
Overbends shall be made in such a manner that the center of the bend clears the high
points of the trench bottom. Sag bends shall fit the bottom of the trench and side
bends shall conform and leave specified clearance to the outside wall of the trench.
7.1 Elastic Bends
The minimum allowable radius for elastic bends in the buried pipeline including that for
continuous concrete weight coated pipe shall be in accordance with relevant job
standards. The elastic bend shall be continuously supported over its full length. A
radius smaller than permitted in elastic bending shall require a cold bend.
7.2 Cold Field Bends
7.2.1 The radius of cold field bends shall not be less than 40 times the pipe nominal
diameter for pipe diameter 18 inch and above and shall not be less than 30 times the
pipe nominal diameter for pipe diameter less than 18 inch.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
7.2.2 CONTRACTOR shall use a bending machine and mandrel and employ recognized and
accepted methods of bending of coated pipe in accordance with good pipeline
construction practice. However, bending machines shall be capable of making bends
without wrinkles, buckles, stretching and with minimum damage to the coating.
7.2.3 CONTRACTOR shall, before the start of the work, submit and demonstrate to
COMPANY a bending procedure which shall conform with the recommendations of the
manufacturer of the bending machine. The procedure shall include amongst other
steps - lengths, maximum degree per pull and method and accuracy of measurement
during pulling of the bend. This procedure and the equipment used shall be subject to
COMPANY's approval.
7.2.4 Pipes with longitudinal welds shall be bent in such a way that the weld lies in the plane
passing through the neutral axis of the bend which shall be installed positioning the
longitudinal weld in the upper quadrants. If horizontal deviations are to be achieved by
joining more adjacent bends, the bending of the pipe lengths shall be made by
positioning the longitudinal welds alternatively 70mm above and below the plane
passing through the neutral axis in such a way that the bends are welded with the
longitudinal welds displaced by about 150mm and situated in the upper quadrants. In
case of vertical bends formed from a number of pipe lengths, the longitudinal welds
shall be positioned on the plane passing through the neutral axis of the bend to the
right and left alternatively.
7.2.5 The pads, dies and rolls of the bending equipment shall have relatively soft surfaces to
avoid damage to the pipe coating. Where applicable, fully retaining bending shoes shall
be used. Roller type bending machines are preferred.
7.2.6 The ends of each bent length shall be straight and not involved anyway in the bending.
The length of the straight section shall permit easy joining. In no event shall the end of
the bend be closer than 1.5m from the end of a pipe or within one meter of a girth
weld.
7.2.7 The ovalisation caused on each pipe by bending shall be less than 2.5% of the nominal
diameter at any point. Ovalisation is defined as the reduction or increase in the internal
diameter of the pipe compared with the nominal internal diameter. A check shall be
performed on all bends in the presence of COMPANY by passing a gauge consisting of
two discs with a diameter equal to 95% of the nominal internal diameter of the pipe
connected rigidly together at a distance equal to 300mm.
7.2.8 The wall thickness of finished bends, taking into account wall thinning at the outer
radius, should not be less than the design thickness. An indication of wall thinning as a
percentage is given by the following empirical formula :
50
Wall Thinning = ---------------
n+1
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
Where ‘n’ is the inner bend radius divided by pipe diameter. Pipes with measured wall
thickness greater than the nominal wall thickness (i.e. with +ve tolerance) shall
normally be used for making cold field bends.
7.2.9 Cold bent pipes on site shall have the corrosion coating carefully checked with the aid
of a holiday detector for cracks in the coating down to the pipe wall. It must also be
checked whether the coating has disbonded from the pipe wall during bending by
beating with a wooden mallet along the outer radius. Any defects or disbonding of the
coating caused during bending (also forced ridges in the coating) shall be repaired at
the CONTRACTOR's expense in accordance with COMPANY approved procedures.
7.2.10 When pipelines are laid in parallel, the horizontal bends shall be concentric.
7.3 Miter and Unsatisfactory Bends
All bends showing buckling, wrinkles, cracks or other visible defects or which are in any
way in disagreement, in whole or in part, with this specification shall be rejected.
No miter bends shall be permitted in the construction of the pipe line. CONTRACTOR
shall cut out and remove any bend or bends which do not meet the specifications and
shall replace the same with satisfactory bends at no additional cost to the COMPANY.
In the event the CONTRACT provides for supply of line pipe by COMPANY, the pipes
required for replacement will be furnished by COMPANY, but the cost of replacement of
such pipes shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
Cutting of factory made bends and cold field bends for any purpose are not permitted.
8.0 LINING UP AND WELDING
Each length of pipe shall be thoroughly examined internally and externally to make
sure that it is free from visual defects, damage, severe corrosion (sea water pitting),
dirt, animals or any other foreign objects. Each length of the pipe shall be adequately
swabbed, either by use of canvas belt disc of proper diameter or by other methods
approved by the COMPANY. Damaged/corroded pipes shall be kept separate. Each
length of pipe shall be pulled through just before being welded.
All rust and foreign matters shall be removed from the beveled ends by power
operated brush. This shall be affected inside & out side and for a minimum distance of
25 mm from edge of bevel. The bevel shall be thoroughly inspected at this stage.
Should laminations, spilt ends or manufacturing defects in the pipe observed, the
length of the pipe containing such defects shall be removed from the line in
accordance with relevant specification.
Contractor shall align and weld together the Joints of pipe so as to construct a
continuous pipeline. All welds in the pipeline made by Contractor shall be of strength
equal to that of pipe. All welding shall conform to Company’s welding specifications
enclosed with the Contract.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
8.1 Pipe Defects and Repairs
It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to repair all internal and/or external defects.
8.1.1 Acceptability of defects in the pipe detected during inspection at the work site shall be
determined in accordance with latest edition of COMPANY's own material specification
or CODE ANSI B31.8/B 31.4 whichever is more stringent.
8.1.2 The maximum permissible depth of dents in pipes upto and including 123/4" OD is 5mm
and for pipes over 12 3/4" OD is 2% of the nominal pipe diameter.
8.1.3 Dents which contain a stress concentrator such as scratch, gauge, arc burn or groove,
and dents located at the longitudinal, spiral or circumferential weld shall be removed
by cutting out the damaged portion of pipe as a cylinder.
8.1.4 Repair on line pipe shall be executed as specified in COMPANY's material specification
or Code ANSI B 31.8/B 31.4, whichever is more stringent. A record of all repairs is to
be maintained by CONTRACTOR. This record, provided with the pipe identification
number is to be submitted to the COMPANY.
8.1.5 If due to cutting or repairs, the pipe identification number is removed, it shall be
reprinted immediately by CONTRACTOR in the presence of COMPANY. In the event,
the CONTRACT provides for supply of line pipe by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall be
charged for any pipe length due to loss of identification number. No pipe without
identification number shall be transported and/or welded into the pipeline.
8.1.6 Repair of damaged pipe ends by hammering and/or heating is not allowed. If the
dented area is minor and at least 200mm away from the pipe end, and the steel is not
stretched, severed, or split in the COMPANY's opinion, the pipe may be straightened
with a proper jack.
8.2 Pipe Handling And Skid Spacing
8.2.1 When lifting pipe, care must be taken not to kink or overstress it. Proper pipe slings
approved by COMPANY shall be used. CONTRACTOR shall submit his method of
skidding and skid spacing for COMPANY's approval. A strip of soft material shall be
placed in between skid and pipe to protect the external coating of the pipe. The
material shall be approved by the COMPANY.
8.2.2 The maximum skid spacing is not allowed before the stringer bead and the top and
bottom reinforcements are completed, provided that the distance between the
incomplete weld and the skid shall not exceed 9 (nine) percent of the skid spacing.
8.2.3 Skids shall be atleast 1.20 meter long. For pipe with an O.D. of 12-3/4 inch and larger
the skids in contact with the pipe shall have a width of at least 200mm. For pipe with
an O.D. of less than 12 inch the skids in contact with the pipe shall have a width of
atleast 150mm. Pipe supports shall be stable, so that pipe movement will not cause
the supports to move. Skids shall not be removed under a string before lowering in.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
The welded pipe shall be maintained on skids at the minimum distance of 500mm
above ground. Crotches shall be installed at frequent intervals (atleast every 10th
support) with a greater number required at bends and undulation grounds.
8.3 Night Caps
At the end of each day's work or every time when joining and welding operations are
interrupted, the open ends on the welded strings of pipes shall be capped with a
securely closed metal cap or plug as approved by COMPANY so as to prevent the entry
of dirt, water, or any foreign matter into the pipeline. These covers shall not be
removed until the work is to be resumed. The caps/plugs used shall be mechanical
type and shall not be attached to pipe by welding or by any other means which may
dent, scratch or scar the pipe.
8.4 Temporary Caps
Whenever the welded strings of pipes are left open at intervals to be tied in later after
an appreciable time lag, under roads, railroads, rivers, marshy crossings, ets.,
temporary caps approved by COMPANY shall be welded to the ends of the pipe.
9.0 LAYING OF PIPE
9.1 Lowering In Trench
9.1.1 Lowering can start after removal from ditch bottom of all off cuts, pipe supports,
stones, roots, debris, stakes, rock projections below underside of pipe and any other
rigid materials which could lead to perforation or tearing of the coating. Sand padding
and / or rock shield shall be provided as required in accordance with clause 6.8 of this
specification.
9.1.2 Lowering shall follow as soon as possible, after the completion of the joint coating of
the pipeline. In the case of parallel pipelines, laying shall be carried out by means of
successive operations, if possible without interruption.
9.1.3 Before lowering in, a complete check by a full circle holiday detector for pipe coating
and for field joint coating shall be carried out and all damages repaired at
CONTRACTOR's cost. All points on the pipeline where the coating has been in contact
with either the skids or with the lifting equipment during laying, shall be carefully
repaired. If, after checking, it becomes necessary to place the pipeline again on
supports at the bottom of the trench, these must be padded in such a way as to
prevent damage to the coating, thus avoiding necessity for further repairs when the
pipe is finally raised and laid. Before the last operation, a check must be made of the
coating at points of contact with the supports.
9.1.4 Before lowering in, short completed sections of the pipeline shall be cleaned with
compressed air in order to remove all dirt, etc. from the inside of pipe sections.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
9.1.5 The pipeline shall be lifted and laid using, for all movements necessary, suitable
equipment of non-abrasive material having adequate width for the fragility of the
coating. Care shall be exercised while removing the slings from around the coated pipe
after it has been lowered into the trench. Any damage caused to the coating shall be
promptly repaired. Lowering in utilizing standard pipe cradles shall be permitted if
CONTRACTOR demonstrates that pipe coating is not damaged. No sling shall be put
around field joint coating.
9.1.6 Wherever the pipeline is laid under tension, as a result of an assembly error (for
example, incorrect positioning of bends, either horizontal or vertical), the trench shall
be rectified or in exceptional cases a new assembly shall be carried out, to be
approved by COMPANY, so that it fits the excavation and the laying bed.
9.1.7 Laying shall be carried out under safe conditions so as to avoid stresses and temporary
deformations of the equipments which may cause damage to the pipeline itself and to
the coating. In localised points where the right-of-way is restricted to the minimum
necessary for the transit of mechanical equipment, the laying shall be carried out using
other suitable means. The pipe shall be placed on the floor or the excavation, without
jerking, falling, impact or other similar stresses. In particular, care must be taken that
the deformation caused during the raising of the pipe work from the supports, does
not exceed the values for the minimum allowable radius of elastic curvature, so as to
keep the stresses on the steel and on the coating within safe limits. The portion of the
pipeline between trench and bank shall be supported by as many side-booms as
required and approved by COMPANY for holding the line in gentle S-curve maintaining
minimum elastic bend radius as specified in job standard. Lowering in and back-filling
shall preferably be carried out at the highest ambient temperature.
9.1.8 The pipeline must be laid without interruption for the whole or the length of section
available. Where water is present, no laying shall be permitted until the ditch has been
drained to the extent and for the time necessary to make visual inspection possible of
the bed on which the pipe is to be laid. Following such inspections, the presence of
water will be permitted, provided that it is not so high as to cause cave-in of the walls
of the trench or floating of the pipeline before backfilling, when weighting is not
provided for the pipe.
9.1.9 CONTRACTOR shall take precautions immediately after lowering in to prevent the
movement of the pipe in trench.
9.1.10 In laying parallel pipelines in the same trench, the minimum distances between the
pipeline indicated in the approved drawings shall be observed. Once the first pipeline
has been positioned, it shall in no way be disturbed by laying of the subsequent
pipeline.
At every seven meters along the trench sand/earth filled bags shall be placed between
the parallel pipelines so as to ensure maintenance of the minimum stipulated distance
between the parallel lines.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
9.2 Overhead Sections and Sections in Tunnel
9.2.1 The following works shall be completed before proceeding with the assembly and
laying of overhead pipelines :
- Construction of the pipe support structures or of mounts on supports.

- Paints and/or coating of the pipework, as indicated in the engineering
specification.
9.2.2 The erection of the supports shall be carried out taking care that the elevation and
alignment is in accordance with the drawings.
In the case of metal work supports, prefabrication and/or assembly shall take into
account the maximum allowed free span and the supports shall not interfere with the
pipeline welds.
9.2.3 In case roller supports are used, the roller shall be lubricated, then checked for smooth
rotation and, in case of seizure, the defect shall be repaired or roller shall be replaced.
In the case of overhead section where the pipeline is slanting, the alignment of the end
supports shall be made after placing the pipeline in position. Before installation of the
pipe section, all the rollers shall be perfectly centered acting on the seat of the support
plates.
The above alignment operations shall be carried out before connecting the overhead
section with the ends of the buried section.
9.2.4 Lifting, moving and laying of the pipeline shall be carried out in accordance with the
provisions of clause 9.1.5.
An insulation sheet shall be installed to isolate the pipe from the support or support
from the earth.
The sheet shall be hard polyethylene at least 5mm thick.
It shall extend at least to 1cm outside the saddles or clamps.

9.2.5 Moving supports, if any, shall be centered on their support and allow for a movement
of at least 300mm in both directions.
9.2.6 A comprehensive report/method statement on the laying operation to be used shall be

submitted to the COMPANY well in advance for approval. The report as a minimum
shall include, but not limited to the following:
(a) Method of installation by lifting (as a preferred method).

(b) Pulling method and related calculations, whenever lifting method cannot be
used.
(c) Pulling device and its characteristics
(d) Method of anchoring the pulling device
(e) Characteristics of the pulling rope
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
(f) Braking device, if any

(g) Pipeline assembly systems.
10.0 BACK-FILLING
10.1 Backfilling shall not be done until the pipe and appurtenances have the proper fit and
the pipe is following the ditch profile at the required depth that will provide the
required cover and has a bed which is free of extraneous material and which allows the
pipe to rest smoothly and evenly. Before any such work is done, it shall be the
CONTRACTOR's responsibility to first secure the approval of COMPANY. If any
backfilling is done without COMPANY's approval, COMPANY will have the right to
require removal of the backfill for examination, and the cost of such uncovering and
refilling shall be borne by CONTRACTOR. Backfilling of trench in water courses shall be
carried out as per the relevant specifications issued for the purpose.
10.2 Backfilling shall be carried out immediately after the pipeline has been laid in the
trench, inspected and approved by the COMPANY, so as to provide a natural
anchorage for the pipeline, thus avoiding long exposure of coating to high
temperature, damaging actions of adverse weather conditions, sliding down of
trench sides and pipe movement in the trench. If immediate back filling is not
possible, a covering of atleast 200mm of earth, free of rock and hard lumps shall be
placed over and around the pipe and coating.
On no account the top soil from the ROW be used for this purpose. In general, the
trench shall be dry during backfilling. Deviations there of must have prior approval of
the COMPANY. The backfill material shall contain no extraneous material and/or hard
lumps of soil which could damage the pipe / coating or leave voids in the backfilled
trench. After the initial backfill has been placed into the trench to a level slightly above
the surrounding ground, CONTRACTOR shall compact the backfill material. The
surplus material shall be neatly crowned directly over the trench and the adjacent
excavated areas on both sides of the trench as per clause 6.2.1, to such a height which
will, in COMPANY's opinion, provide adequately for future settlement of the trench
backfill during the maintenance period and thereafter. The crown shall be high enough
to prevent the formation of a depression in the soil when backfill has settled into its
permanent position. Should depression occur after backfill, CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for remedial work at no extra cost to COMPANY. Surplus material, including
rock, left from this operation shall be disposed of to the satisfaction of land owner or
authority having jurisdiction at no extra cost to the COMPANY.
For further requirements reference is made to Section of 14.0 "Clean-up and

Restoration of Right-of-Way" of this specification.
10.3 Rock, gravel, lumps of hard soil or like materials shall not be backfilled directly onto the
pipe unless 'padding' and/or rock shell has been provided as per Section 6.0 of this
specification. When "Padding" as described in Section 6.0 of this specification is to be
used, the following shall be applicable.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
Where rock, gravel, lumps of hard soil or like materials are encountered at the time of
trench excavation, sufficient earth, sand or select backfill materials shall be placed
around and over the pipe to form a protective cushion extending at least to a height of
150mm above the top of the pipe. Select backfill materials for padding that are
acceptable to COMPANY shall be soil, sand, clay or other material containing no gravel,
rock or lumps or hard soil. Whether such padding material would be taken from the
adjacent spoil bank or imported from elsewhere shall be directed by COMPANY. All
these works shall be carried out by CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to COMPANY. Loose
rock may be returned to the trench after the required selected backfill material has
been placed, provided the rock placed in the ditch will not interfere with the use of the
land by landowner, or tenant.
10.4 When the trench has been dug through drive ways or roads, all backfills shall be
executed with sand or a suitable material as approved by COMPANY and shall be
thoroughly compacted. In certain cases, special compaction methods, such as
moistening or ramming of the backfill in layers may be required by COMPANY.
COMPANY and any public or private authority having jurisdiction over a road, street or
drive way may require that the surface of the backfill be graveled with crushed rock or
some other purchased material and the road shall be repaved. In such instances,
CONTRACTOR shall comply with said requirements at no extra cost to COMPANY.
10.5 Trenches excavated in dykes which are the property of railways or which are part of
main roads shall be graded and backfilled in their original profile and condition. If
necessary, new and/or special backfill materials shall be supplied and worked-up. The
materials required may include gravel, special stabilization materials or stabilized
mixtures. However, special processing and/or compacting methods shall require the
approval of COMPANY and/or competent authorities.
10.6 The trench in irrigated and paddy fields shall be backfilled to within 300mm of the top,
then rammed and further backfilled until the trench is completely backfilled. Surplus
material remaining after the operation shall be spread over the ROW as specified in
Section 14.0 "Clean-up and Restoration of Right-of-Way", of this specification.
10.7 At the end of each day's work, backfilling shall not be more than 500 meters behind
the head end of lowered-in pipe, which has been padded and approved for backfill.
The backfill shall be maintained by CONTRACTOR against washouts etc., until the
completion and final acceptance of the work by COMPANY.
10.8 CONTRACTOR shall furnish materials and install breakers in the trench in steep areas
(slope generally 10% and more) for the purpose of preventing erosion of the backfill.
The type of breakers installed shall be as per the approved drawings. Breakers shall be
constructed of grout bags filled with a mixture of 4:1 Sand:Portland cement at
COMPANY's direction. CONTRACTOR may propose other methods such as foam dams
etc. which shall be subject to approval by COMPANY. Such works shall be at no extra
cost to COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall pay attention to the direction of backfilling in
such steep areas.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
10.9 When backfilling the trenches in sloping terrains or steep areas, where in the opinion
of the COMPANY, the backfill may be washed out of the trench, sheet piling or other
effective water breakers across the trench shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. This is
to divert the flow of water away from the trench into normal drainage followed before
laying the line. In no case, the water is to be drained via the trench or via channels
other than those followed before the line was laid.
10.10 CONTRACTOR shall leave the pipe uncovered at certain locations to allow COMPANY to
survey the center line of the pipe and the level of the pipeline in the backfilled trench.
Within 48 hours after backfilling, COMPANY shall have carried out such survey and
informed CONTRACTOR of any realigning, if required. Thereafter CONTRACTOR shall
compact the backfill.
The maximum allowable deviation from the centerline for land sections as staked out
by COMPANY and as referenced by CONTRACTOR after backfilling is limited to:
Pipeline dia upto and including 24" : 200mm
Pipeline greater than 24" : 300mm
10.11 Before backfilling of the trench, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the requirements of
Clause 6.12 of this specification.
10.12 Stabilization of backfill shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR in sandy areas and
other such places to obtain consolidated cover as directed by the COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall carry out the stabilization over the pipeline at no extra cost to
COMPANY.
The backfill shall be stabilized preferably with 150mm layer of marl, mattresses of
gatch other than straw or other stable materials. The width of stablisation shall be
atleast 5.0 meters on either side of the pipeline, plus one meter for every 10 meters
height of dune (where the line passes through the dune areas).
10.13 Temporary workers shall be installed during backfilling and the survey as per clauses
10.10 to locate the pipeline axis. These markers shall then be replaced with permanent
pipeline markers.
10.14 Backfilling shall be preferably carried out at the highest ambient temperature.
11.0 TIEING-IN
11.1 The unconnected sections of the pipe line at various locations have to be tied in after
the sections are coated, lowered and backfilled. The sections to be connected shall
have at the ends, sections of over lapping, uncovered pipe of sufficient length to
absorb, without inducing excessive stresses in the steel, small displacements necessary
for perfect alignment and connection of the ends.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
11.2 Tie-in shall preferably be carried out at ambient temperatures corresponding to the
average operating temperature in the case of a pipeline conveying fluids at normal
temperatures and at the maximum ambient temperature in the case where the pipeline
is carrying fluids at high temperature.
11.3 CONTRACTOR shall carry out tie-in-welding (including necessary cutting, bevelling,
grinding of pipe weld seams and line-up etc.) cleaning, priming, coating and backfilling
for the tie-in portion as per relevant specifications. CONTRACTOR shall also excavate
the required bell-holes for the connection. Bell-holes made to facilitate welding shall
provide adequate clearance to enable the welders to exercise normal welding ability
and skill. All tie-in welds shall be radiographically examined.
11.4 The tie-in should be done in such a way as to leave a minimum of strain in the pipe. If
necessary, with respect to the trench, realigning of the pipe shall be done to eliminate
force or strain in the pipe by the CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to COMPANY.
11.5 If a pup end cannot be avoided for tie-in, the minimum length that shall be added is
1.0 meters and two or more such pups shall not be welded together. All cut-off lengths
greater than 1.0 meters shall be moved ahead in order to be welded into the pipeline
at a suitable location. Tie-in with two or more pups may be used provided that they
each have minimum length of 1.0 meter and are separated by an entire length of pipe.
In no case more than three (3) welds shall be permitted on a 10 meter length of
pipeline.
11.6 In connecting pipes, special items, fittings and equipment where different wall
thickness are to be welded, CONTRACTOR shall follow the procedures indicated in
ANSI B31.8/ANSI B31.4, as applicable. The required tapering shall be done by
CONTRACTOR at no extra cost to COMPANY.
11.7 For tie-in of adacent sections of pipeline already pressure tested, the pup used for tie-
in shall be of single length or off-cuts of pipe which have already been hydrostatically
tested. CONTRACTOR shall take care that sufficient number of pretested pipes with
different wall thicknesses are readily available.
12.0 SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS ON THE PIPELINE.
12.1 General
12.1.1 In addition to constructing the pipeline, CONTRACTOR shall also install certain other
auxiliary facilities and appurtenances.
CONTRACTOR shall do all work necessary at each of the installations to provide

facilities which are complete in all respects and ready for operation.
Without limiting the generality thereof, the work required to complete the installations
shall, where applicable, include all site surveys, site preparation, filling, grading,
fencing, foundations, installation of block valves, side valves, pipework, pipe supports,
pressure gauges, mechanical facilities, civil work, painting, installation of all electrical
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
equipments, motors, cables, conduIt, wiring and fixtures and hooking up of same;
installation of all instruments, piping, valves and fittings; mount all instruments and
make all piping and electronic connections, etc.
On completion, all elements of each installation shall be checked our and tested for full
and correct operation in the presence of and to the satisfaction of COMPANY. All work
shall be carried our strictly in accordance with the appropriate codes, the approved
drawings, and this and other related specifications.
CONTRACTOR shall fabricate all piping and install valves and fittings as required by the
detailed engineering drawings prepared by him and approved by COMPANY.
Stainless steel lines will be "swaged" using permanent fittings installed with a hydraulic
device.
Cold bending for the fitting of 1/2" and 1/4" pipes is allowed when special bending
tools are used with guides to prevent flattening. The minimum radius allowed shall not
be less than R = 10 D where D is the outside diameter of pipe.
The bending tool shall be subject to COMPANY's approval.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the piping assemblies are not in a strain prior to the
final bolting or welding. CONTRACTOR shall also ensure that all equipment and piping
are thoroughly swabbed clean of all dust, refuse, welding-spatter, scale, or any
potentially detachable matter prior to the tie-in or final bolting.
12.1.2 Dimensional tolerances.
These tolerances apply to in line items and corrections for other lines. These tolerances
can be executed on items such as vents, drains, dummy supports, field supports,
temperature and pressure connections, where the deviation will not affect another
spool.
a) General dimension such as face to face, face or end to end, face or end to
center, and center to center : ± 3 mm.
b) Inclination of flange face from true in any direction: 4 mm per meter.
c) Displacement of branch connection from indicated location: ± 1.6mm. When
multiple branches are involved, the displacement of the branches shall not
exceed 3mm from a common point.
d) Rotation of flange bolt holes shall not exceed 1.6 mm.
12.1.3 Flanged connections.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all flange faces are parallel and centered, according to
standard practice, prior to final bolting. CONTRACTOR shall not use bolting forces as a
means for attaining alignment. A gasket of proper size and quality shall be installed
between the flanges at each joint.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
Bolts shall be tightened in diagonal sequence and shall be centered with equal
amounts of thread visible on both sides. Bolts shall be uniformly tightened to produce
a leak-proof joint. Bolts that yield during tightening shall be remover and discarded. It
is mandatory that a torque wrench is used for bolt tightening.
12.1.4 Threaded connections.
Damaged threads shall be cut from the end of a run and the pipe shall be rethreaded.
CONTRACTOR shall properly align all threaded joints. Pipe entering unions shall be true
to centreline so the union will not be forced during tightening. The threaded pipe shall
not project through fittings to cause interference with valves or other operating
mechanisms.
Except for the threaded connections of instruments, which will require periodic testing
and maintenance, all threaded connections shall be seal welded. The latter joints shall
be made up without pipe joint compound and with a minimum of oil from the threaded
cutter. Seal welds should taper into the pipe with as little discontinuity as possible and
should cover all threads.
12.1.5 Welded connections
Where the Ends of the piping components being welded have an internal surface
misalignment exceeding 1.6mm, the wall of the component extending internally shall
be trimmed by machining so that the adjoining internal surfaces will be approximately
flush. All welding shall be performed in accordance with the specification " Specification
for welding of pipelines and related facilities".
Tie - ins between fixed points shall be made at maximum ambient temperature.
.
12.1.6 Civil Work
Civil work shall be provided in accordance with Specifications issued for the purpose.
12.1.7 Painting
All exposed surfaces like piping, valves, structures, and miscellaneous appurtenances
shall be painted in accordance with the specifications issued for this purpose. The
corrosion coating on pipe surface will end approximately 0.3 meter above the finish
grade and it will be necessary for CONTRACTOR to provide a clean interface at the
junction of the protective coating and the paint.
12.1.8 Coating of buried-Installations, etc.
All buried valves, insulating joints, flowtees, bends, other in-line fittings and
appurtenances shall be coated with minimum three coats of approved quality of coal-
tar epoxy or any other equivalent suitable COMPANY approved coating at no extra cost
to the COMPANY. For buried pipes either heat shrink tapes conforming to COMPANY's
specification or coal tar epoxy shall be used. CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
a report used alongwith all the test certificates. Only after obtaining written approval
from the COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall commence the work of coating.
12.1.9 Clean-up
After all required tests have been concluded satisfactorily CONTRACTOR shall clean up
the site as laid down in the specifications issued for the purpose. The Site finish shall
be graded in accordance with the approved drawings.
12.2 Installation of Valves and Valve Stations
12.2.1 Block and sectionalising valve stations shall be installed as shown on the approved
drawings. It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to have the units completely assembled,
tested and made fully functional including all related instruments etc.
12.2.2 The civil and structural work shall be carried our in accordance with the relevant
specifications issued for the purpose and in accordance with the approved drawings as
directed by COMPANY. This work as a minimum shall include clearing, grading,
fencing, foundations, etc, as required. All above ground structures shall be painted as
per the specification and color code given by the COMPANY.
12.2.3 A suitable concrete foundation as directed by COMPANY shall be constructed on which

the valve shall be firmly installed, after embedding an insulating sheet of hard
polyethylene with a thickness of atleast 5mm or equivalent. Such insulating sheet is
also to be installed under pipe clamps, etc.
12.2.4 Valves with flow arrows shall be installed according to the normal flow in the pipeline.
During, welding, the valves shall be in fully open position. In addition all
manufacturer's instructions shall be followed.
Care shall be taken to avoid entry of sand particles etc. to valve body, seals etc. during
transportation, storage, assembly and installation.
12.2.5 For valves and piping installed below ground and/or above ground, the anti-corrosion
coating/painting shall be as per the requirements of the relevant specifications issued
for the purpose. The anti-corrosion coating below ground shall extend upto 300mm
above grade at the lowest point.
12.2.6 Sectionalizing valves shall be installed on sections of the pipeline in the horizontal
position only or with an inclination not greater than that allowed by the valve
manufacturer. Installation shall be done in such a way that there is no strain in the
welded joint while the pipeline at upstream and downstream sides are straight.
12.2.7 All valves shall always be handled using equipment and methods to avoid impact,
shaking and other stresses. In particular, the equipment and tools for lifting and
handling shall never be done through handwheel, valve stem, joints and other parts
which may suffer damage.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
12.2.8 All sectionalizing valve and any other inline assemblies shall be prefabricated and
tested hydrostatically ex-situ as per applicable specification. All such assemblies shall
be installed at the locations shown in the drawings only after successful completion of
the hydrostatic test and dewatering. Thereafter the ends of the assembly shall be
closed off. CONTRACTOR shall carry out necessary excavation, cutting, bevelling and
welding of the tie-ins required for the installation of such assembly. The tie-in joints
shall be radiographically examined over 100% length and also 100% ultrasonically
examined prior to backfilling. All works shall be executed in accordance with the
relevant specifications issued for the purpose.
12.3 Installation of Scraper Launchers and Receivers
12.3.1 Scraper stations shall be fabricated and installed as per the approved drawings and
whenever applicable as per the requirements of clause 12.2 of this specification. It is
CONTRACTOR's responsibility to have the units completely assembled, tested and
made fully functional including all instruments & related piping.
12.3.2 The civil and structural works for the scraper stations shall be carried out as per the
relevant specifications, in accordance with the drawings and as directed by the
COMPANY. The work as a minimum shall include site survey, site preparation, clearing,
grading, fencing, foundations, etc. as required.
12.3.3 It shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility to maintain elevations shown on the approved

drawings and to carry out any pipework adjustments, necessary for this purpose. Field
cuts shall be square and accurate and field welds shall not be performed under stress
of pipe ends.
12.3.4 The painting for the scraper stations shall be carried out as per "Specifications for
Painting". The underground sections shall be coated as specified for the pipeline upto
atleast 300mm above grade.
12.3.5 The hydrostatic testing of the scraper stations shall be executed after installation in
accordance with the relevant specification issued for the purpose.
12.4 Installation of Insulation Joints
12.4.1.1 Insulation joints shall be installed at the locations shown in the drawings.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval from the COMPANY before installation of the
insulation joints.
12.4.2 Handing and installation of the insulating joints shall be carried out with all precautions
required to avoid damage and excessive stresses and that the original pup length is
not reduced.
12.4.2 The insulating joints and the welded joints shall be protected by external coating as
per relevant specifications issued for the purpose.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
12.4.4 The in-line inserting shall be made on the buried pipeline; care shall be taken to
operate at an external temperature as close as possible to the pipeline operating
temperature.
The joints shall be inserted on straight sections and laid on a fine sand bed.
12.4.5 During the execution of the in-line connection welding, the propagation of heat shall be
avoided. To achieve this, the joint shall be kept cold by means of nags continuously
wetted.
12.4.6 Insulating joints shall be electrically tested before welding into the pipeline. The
electrical conductance test shall be carried out using a Megger. Measurement of the
insulation resistance across the joints shall be approx. one (1) Mega Ohm. The tests
shall be repeated after installation and welding of the joint into the pipeline to verify
that the assembly is undamaged.
13.0 WORKING SPREAD LIMITATIONS
CONTRACTOR shall, in general, observe the following maximum distances between the
working mainline spread:
Between ROW grading, clearing and backfilling : 30 Kms
Between backfilling and final clean-up : 05 Kms
The above limitations do not apply to point spreads such as continuous rock blasting,
river crossing, etc.
Any deviations from the above shall require prior approval of COMPANY. COMPANY
reserves the right to stop the work, in case the approved spread limitations are
exceeded and CONTRACTOR shall not be paid any compensation for stoppage of work.
14.0 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION OF RIGHT OF WAY
14.1 CONTRACTOR shall restore the ROW and all sites used for the construction of
pipelines, water crossing and other structures in accordance with COMPANY's
instructions, and deliver them to the satisfaction of COMPANY.
14.2 Surplus Materials
The following stipulations shall apply in case CONTRACT provides for supply of line
pipe, bare and/or corrosion coated, by COMPANY.
All surplus and defective materials supplied by COMPANY shall be collected by

CONTRACTOR and delivered to designated stockpile areas.
All Pipe-ends shorter than 1.0m shall be returned to COMPANY being scrap, all pipes
longer than 8.0m shall be reconditioned (bevels, coating, provided with pipe letter,
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
number and length) and be returned to COMPANY's designated stockpile areas

together with all undamaged, unused COMPANY supplied materials. All pieces between
1.0 and 8.0m shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR by COMPANY. CONTRACTOR
shall record these returned materials in the Material account, to be prepared by him.
14.3 Disposal
14.3.1 All surplus and defective materials supplied by CONTRACTOR and all trash, refuse and
spoiled materials shall be collected and disposed of by CONTRACTOR.
14.3.2 The ROW shall be cleared of all rubbish, broken skids, empty cans, card board, sacks,
stamps, trash, and leftover construction material. All burnable matter shall be burned,
but only after obtaining appropriate permits for such burning. If burning is not allowed,
CONTRACTOR shall haul the clean-up material to approved dumping area. All scrap
metal and unburnable material shall be disposed of, in an appropriate manner, but
never be buried in the ROW.
14.3.3 Surplus soil can only be removed from the Owner's plot after authorisation by
COMPANY.
14.3.4 All dumping fees connected with the disposal of materials shall be to the account of
CONTRACTOR.
14.3.5 All loose stones and rock exposed by the construction operations and scattered over
the ROW or adjacent grounds shall be removed by CONTRACTOR and be transported
to a location considered suitable by the authorities having jurisdiction, for satisfactory
disposal. For stones, gravel or other hard material which may be buried in the trench
the provisions of the specifications shall apply with the understanding that the use of
the land by the land-owner and/or tenant will not be interfered with.
14.4 Temporary Structures
All auxiliary structures such as bridges, culverts, sheet piling, posts, signs, etc., which
were erected or installed by CONTRACTOR as temporary measure, shall be removed.
However, it may be necessary to remove the fence of ROW during the maintenance
period.
14.5 Repair of Damage
Damages to roads, bridges, private property shall be repaired by CONTRACTOR. All

fences and other structures which are damaged during construction shall be restored
to original condition.
Slopes, water course sides or banks which have been partially or totally demolished
during the execution of the works shall be properly consolidated and restored without
waiting for their natural consolidation and settling.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
All boundary stones which have been moved or removed during the work must be
reset in their original location to the satisfaction of the landowner concerned.
14.6 On completion of clean-up, the ROW shall be restored to such stable and usable
condition as may be reasonably consistent with the condition of the ROW prior to
laying the pipeline. The COMPANY shall be completely indemnified and held harmless
by CONTRACTOR from any and against all claims, demands, losses, expenses etc. that
may arise in this behalf or the COMPANY may anyway suffer or sustain, relative to,
arising out of, or in connection with same. The COMPANY may require from the
CONTRACTOR signed Releases from land owners regarding satisfactory
indemnification and restoration of their lands.
14.7 Special precautions shall be taken near slopes prone to erosions and land slides. All
necessary steps shall be taken to ensure the rapid growth of grass by providing wicker
barriers and by regulating the drainage of surface waters.
14.8 All cadastral or geodetric markers which may have been removed during the execution
of the works shall be restored in their exact position.
14.9 Ditches for which no instructions for restoration have been issued, or restoration
cannot be done according to existing banks because of the absence of it, shall be
restored as instructed by COMPANY. The bed of ditches crossed by the pipeline, shall
be cleaned over the full width or the ROW, also outside the ROW if necessary. This
restoration might involve the supply and installation proper materials for backfill and
protection, sodding or other precautions to prevent erosion or guarantee the stability.
Work has to be done after deliberation and acceptance of the authorities and
COMPANY. Other field drains have to be restored by hand and/or special equipment to
be used for that purpose as soon as possible and if necessary, also outside the ROW.
14.10 Any subsidence, cave-ins, wash-outs, which have been caused during the pipeline
construction and maintenance, caused by whatever reason within the edge of ditches
and open drains, shall be repaired by CONTRACTOR immediately or at first notice
given by COMPANY.
14.11 After the clean-up, the ROW of pastures has to remain fenced and to be removed
during the maintenance period. When agricultural and other traffic (requested by
tenant) have to cross the ROW the cross-overs have to be fenced with the same
material as the ROW. If necessary, special materials have to be used to allow traffic on
the cross-over. Fencing of the right-of-way as specified shall not be removed until
CONTRACTOR has obtained written permission by COMPANY. In general this has to be
done during the maintenance period.
14.12 All openings in or damage to the fence or enclosures shall be repaired by installing new
fencing of quality which shall be at least equal to the parts damaged or removed.
Provisional gates shall be removed and replaced with new fencing. All repairs to fences
and enclosures shall be carried out to the complete satisfaction of COMPANY, land
owner and/or tenant.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
14.13 If, in the opinion of COMPANY, the sod in pasture land has been damaged by vehicles
and wheel tracks are visible, the ROW shall be tilled with a disc-harrow or rotary
cultivator several times. The damaged sod shall be firmly cut up and thoroughly mixed
through the top-soil. In general the ROW has also to be ripped. After this procedure
no closed-in layers must be found and sufficiently loose top-soil 25 to 30cm thick must
be present. The whole procedure has to be approved by COMPANY. Subsequently, the
entire ROW which is part of pasture land, shall be prepared for seeding and fertilized
according to the instructions of COMPANY.
14.14 In crop fields the tillage shall consist of passing over the land several times with a disc
harrow, cultivating with a spading machine, or plow, to a depth of approx. 20 cm. In
general the ROW has also to be ripped. After this cultivation process no closed-in
layers must be found in the ROW. The equipment used and methods adopted shall
require the approval of COMPANY. Ripping, has to be done with rippers with a distance
of 50 cm between the ripper blades. The type to be used shall be approved by
COMPANY.
14.15 A sapling of any plant/tree uprooted or cut during construction shall be planted along
the route as per the direction of the COMPANY and in accordance with the Forest
Preservation Act, 1981. The cost of sapling and its plantation shall be to
CONTRACTOR's account.
14.16 The ROW and the backfilled trench in particular has to be finished in such a way that
after settlement of the soil the fields are at their original level.
If during the maintenance period certain parts of the ROW are lower than the original
level, COMPANY can order CONTRACTOR to bring these parts to the original level. If
the level of the ROW for clean-up is ordered by COMPANY, risk of above mentioned
additional restoration shall not be to CONTRACTOR's account.
In cases where heavy damage has occurred to the structure of the subsoil as a result
of special circumstances, COMPANY reserves the right to order CONTRACTOR to carry
out special work. Said special work can include:
- spading with dragline (depth 30 - 80 cm);

- spading with dragline (depth 80 - 100 cm);
- fertilizing;
- cover with sand.
If during clean-up operations, soil shortages become apparent outside the trench,
CONTRACTOR shall supplement said soil shortage using suitable materials, approved
by COMPANY.
If site and/or climatic conditions should render this necessary, COMPANY shall have the
right to order CONTRACTOR to suspend certain parts of the WORK related to the
clean-up and postpone it to a later date.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
14.17 Soil Surplus
If on site, as a result of the work and after careful backfilling and compacting, a sub-
soil surplus exists, this shall be worked up by grading and compacting below the sub-
soil top layer and as a rule this shall be done in the same plot of land. It shall not be
permitted to remove the surplus from the plot concerned, unless it concerns rejected
soil which has to be removed. Working up surplus soil or removal of rejected soil shall
be considered to pertain to the WORK.
To work a soil surplus into the ground CONTRACTOR shall remove an additional strip
of top soil beside the trench. Next the upper layer of sub-soil shall also be removed.
Both soil types shall be stored separately across a width depending on the size of the
soil surplus. The soil surplus shall then be distributed across the trench thus widened,
after which it shall be graded and compacted and subsequently the top layer of sub-
soil and the top-soil shall be replaced in the correct order, in accordance with the
Specifications.
In case COMPANY has given prior permission for mixed excavation of the sub-soil as
well as in cases where COMPANY deems mixed excavation permissible, the above
provision of separate storage of the upper layer of sub-soil shall not apply to the
working up of the soil surplus.
In cases where the soil surplus can be worked up in other plots where soil shortages
have arisen due to the WORK, this shall only be done after prior permission by land-
owner, land-user and COMPANY.
14.18 Soil Shortages
If due to unforeseen circumstances during backfilling and compacting there isn't

enough soil to fill the trench properly, or to install the crown height as stipulated,
CONTRACTOR shall supply the necessary backfill material.
Soil shortages shall be supplemented and applied before the top-soil is replaced.
The soil to be supplied shall be worked up in those locations and into those layers
where a soil shortage has been established. The quality of the supplemented soil shall
be equal to that of the shortage.
15.0 MAINTENANCE DURING DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
Defects liability Period (defined as period of liability in the CONTRACT) means the
period of 12 months calculated from the date certified in the Completion Certificate.
COMPANY reserves the right to carry out instrumented pigging survey of the
completed pipeline.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for making good with all possible speed at his
expense any defect in or damage to any portion of the Work which may appear or
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE)
EDITION : 1
occur during the Defects liability Period and which arise either:
a) from any defective material (other than supplied by COMPANY), workmanship

or design (other than a design made, furnished or specified by COMPANY and
for which CONTRACTOR has disclaimed responsibility in writing), or
b) from any act or omission of CONTRACTOR done or omitted during the said
period.
If such defect shall appear or damage occur, COMPANY shall forthwith inform
CONTRACTOR thereof stating in writing the nature of the defect or damage.
If any such defect or damage be not remedied within a reasonable time, COMPANY
may proceed to execute the work at CONTRACTOR's risk and expense, provided that
he does so in a reasonable manner. Such defect or damage can be, but is not limited
to:
- Clean up of ROW, including water courses

- Sagging or sinking of site level or pipe supports
- Sliding of ditch banks
- Repair of fencing or removal of construction fencing
- Repaving of pavements, repair of pavements, repair of coating, painting
- Realigning markers, signs
- Leak/burst of pipe, leaking flanges, washouts
- Short-circuit in casings
- Construction defects such as dents, ovality, welding offsets/defects, etc.
detected during intelligent pigging survey.
- etc.
Company reserves the right to have the required Computerised Potential Logging Test
executed during the DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD and whenever conditions are more
favorable for this job. The work shall at or as soon as practicable after the expiration of
the Defects Liability Period be delivered to COMPANY in the conditions required by the
CONTRACT, fair wear and tear excepted, to the satisfaction of COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall finish the work, if any outstanding, at the date of completion as
soon as possible after such date and shall execute all such work.
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
WELDING OF ONSHORE GAS PIPELINES
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE WELDING OF ONSHORE GAS MEC/S/05/21/02 REVISION : 0

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
01.0 SCOPE
02.0 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS
03.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
04.0 WELDING CONSUMABLES
05.0 EQUIPMENT & ACCESSORIES
06.0 WELDING PROCESSES
07.0 BEVEL CLEANING AND BEVEL INSPECTION
08.0 ALIGNMENT AND SPACING
09.0 WEATHER CONDITIONS
10.0 WELDING
11.0 HEAT TREATMENT
12.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING
13.0 REPAIR OF WELDS
14.0 DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF WELDED JOINT - BUTT WELDS
15.0 ULTRASONIC INSPECTION
16.0 AUTOMATED ULTRASONIC TESTING (AUT)
17.0 RADIOGRAPHY
ANNEXURE-I - ELECTRODE QUALIFICATION TEST RECORD

ANNEXURE-II - STRESS RELIEF HEAT TREATMENT PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
ANNEXURE-III - FORMAT FOR WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION (WPS)
ANNEXURE-IV - FORMAT FOR PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD (PQR)
ANNEXURE-V - FORMAT FOR MANUFACTURER'S RECORD FOR WELDER OR WELDING
OPERATOR QUALIFICATION TESTS
ANNEXURE-VI - RADIOGRAPHIC PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD FOR PIPE WELDING
ANNEXURE-VII - WELDERS IDENTIFICATION CARD
ANNEXURE-VIII - TYPE OF SOURCE AND FILMS TO BE USED FOR RADIOGRAPHY

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
01. SCOPE
This specification stipulates requirements for fabrication of all types of welded joints of
carbon steel main pipeline systems covering the pipeline and its facilities, which will
include the following:
• All line pipe joints of the longitudinal and circumferential butt welded and socket
welded types.
• Branch connections
• Joints in welded/ fabricated piping components.
• Attachments of castings, forgings, flanges and supports to pipes.
• Attachments of smaller connections for vents/ drain pipes and tappings for
instrumentation.
• Welded manifold headers and other sub-assemblies.
Note: Any approval accorded to the Contractor shall not absolve him of his
responsibilities and guarantees.
02. APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS & SPECIFICATIONS
All welding works, equipment for welding, heat treatment, other auxiliary functions and
the welding personnel shall meet the requirements of the latest editions of the
following codes, standards and specifications as listed below :-
• Code for Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping System (ANSI B31.8).
• Standard for welding of Pipelines and Related Facilities (API 1104).
• Specification for welding Electrodes and Filler Materials (ASME Sec. II C).
• Non Destructive examination (ASME Sec. V).
• Welding and Brazing Qualification, ASME Sec. IX.
03. MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
• In general carbon steel is used in this specification. The details of material

specifications will be given in a welding Specification Chart attached alongwith
other project data sheets.
• The CONTRACTOR will keep a record of test certificates of all the materials for the
reference of the welding engineer.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
04. WELDING CONSUMABLES
The CONTRACTOR shall provide at his own expenses all the welding consumbles
necessary for the execution of the job such as electrodes, oxygen, acetylene etc. and
the same shall be approved in advance by the Purchaser/ Consultant.
The welding electrodes/ filler wires supplied by the CONTRACTOR shall conform to the
class specified in the welding specification chart. The materials shall be of the make
approved by the COMPANY.
The electrode shall be suitable for the welding process recommended and base metal
used. Physical properties of the welds produced by an electrode recommended for the
welding of a particular base metal shall not be lower than the minimum values
specified for the base metal unless otherwise specified in Welding Specification Chart
and shall correspond to the physical properties of the class of electrode adopted. The
choice of electrode shall be made after conducting the required tests on the electrodes
as per relevant standards, and shall be the sole prerogative of the COMPANY.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit batch test certificates from the electrode
manufacturers giving details of physical and chemical tests carried out by them for
each batch of electrode to be used.
Electrode Qualification test records shall be submitted as per Annexure-I with respect
to the electrodes tested by the CONTRACTOR and submitted for approval of the
COMPANY, f or each batch of electrode.
All electrodes shall be purchased in sealed containers and stored properly to prevent
deterioration. The electrodes removed from the containers (except cellulosic coated
electrodes) shall be kept in holding ovens at the temperature recommended by the
electrode manufacturer. Ovens shall be used for low hydrogen electrodes only. Out-of-
the oven time of electrodes, before they are consumed, shall not exceed the limits
recommended by the electrode manufacturer. The electrodes shall be handled with
care to avoid any damage to the flux covering.
The electrodes used shall be free from rust, oil grease, earth and other foreign matter
which affect the quality of welding.
Different grades of electrodes shall be stored separately. Cellulosic electrodes used

shall however be used as per specific recommendations of manufacturer.
04.01 Shielding Gas
The composition and purity of shielding gas when required by the welding processes
other than shielded metal arc welding, when permitted by the COMPANY, shall have
prior approval of the COMPANY. Where appropriate, gases or gas mixture of the
following quality shall be used.
a) argon complying with BS 4365

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
b) carbon dioxide complying with type 1 specified in BS 4105
c) gas mixture that have been proved to be satisfactory as a result of procedure

approval tests.
When a gas mixture is used which has specified additions, e.g. 2% O2, 5% CO2 the
variation of such addition shall not exceed ± 10% of that stated. Moisture content shall
correspond to a dew point of - 30°C or lower.
05. EQUIPMENT & ACCESSORIES
5.1 The CONTRACTOR shall have sufficient number of welding and cutting equipment,
auxiliaries and accessories of sufficient capacities to meet the target schedule.
5.2 All the equipment for performing the heat treatment including transformers,
thermocouples, pyro-meters, automatic temperature recorders with suitable calibration
arrangements, etc. shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR, at his own expenses and
these shall bear the approval of the COMPANY. Adequate means of measuring current
and voltage shall be available.
5.3 Redoing of any work necessitated by faulty equipment or operation used by the
CONTRACTOR, will be done at his own expense.
06. WELDING PROCESSES
6.1 Welding of various materials under this specification shall be carried out using Shielded
Metal Arc Welding process (SMAW) with the approval of the COMPANY.
6.2 Main line (20” φ and above)
Semi-automatic Flux Cored Arc Welding for fill and cap passes, with root pass welding
by Surface Tension Transfer Process (STTP) of Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW) /
Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) process.
6.3 Tie-Ins and Crossings
Any of the processes specified above as per qualified procedures.
6.4 Double jointing of two pipe lengths using Submerged Arc Welding (SAW) process in a
specially laid pipe welding yard is also permitted.
Any deviation desired by the Contractor shall be obtained through the written consent
of the Company.
6.5 The welding procedure adopted and the consumables used shall be specifically
approved.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
6.6 The welding processes to be employed are given in the welding specification chart. Any
deviation desired by the CONTRACTOR shall be obtained through the express consent
of the COMPANY.
6.7 Automatic process shall be employed only with the express approval of the COMPANY.
The welding procedure adopted and consumables used shall be specifically approved.
6.8 A combination of different welding processes or a combination of electrodes of

different classes/ makes could be employed for a particular joint only after qualifying
the welding procedures to be adopted and obtaining the approval of the COMPANY.
07. BEVEL CLEANING AND BEVEL INSPECTION
Line pipe supplied by COMPANY shall have bevel ends as specified in the applicable
specification for Line Pipe attached with the Bid Package. Any modification thereto, if
required by CONTRACTOR due to his special welding technique shall be carried out by
the CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
Before welding, all rust and foreign matter shall be removed from the bevelled ends by
power operated tools. This shall be effected inside and outside and for a minimum
distance of 25mm from the edge of the weld bevel. The bevels shall be thoroughly
inspected at this stage. If any of the ends of the pipe joints are damaged to the extent
that, in the opinion of COMPANY, satisfactory weld spacing cannot be obtained and
local repair by grinding cannot be successfully done, the damged ends shall be cut and
re-bevelled to the satisfaction of the COMPANY, with an approved bevelling machine.
Manual cutting and weld repairs of bevels is not allowed. Should laminations, split ends
or inherent manufacturing defects in the pipe be discovered, the lengths of pipe
containing such defects shall be removed from the line to the satisfaction of COMPANY.
On pipes which have been cut back, a zone extending 25mm back from the new field
bevel, shall be ultrasonically tested to the requirement of the line pipe specification to
ensure freedom from laminations. The new bevel shall be subjected to 100% visual
and 100% dye penetrant/ MPI tests. A report shall be written for all testing and
records kept.
08. ALIGNMENT AND SPACING
Immediately prior to line-up CONTRACTOR shall inspect the pipe ends inside and
outside for damage, dents, laminations etc. Pipe for welding shall be set up, correctly
spaced, allowing for temperature changes during welding, in correct alignment and
shall in no circumstances be sprung into position. Temporary attachments of any kind
shall not be welded to the pipe. Welds joining the sections of the pipelines, valve
installation or similar welds classified as tie-in welds shall be made in the trench.
Otherwise the alignment and welding shall be made alongside the ditch with the pipe
supported on skids and back pad or other suitable means approved by COMPANY, at
least 500mm above the ground, unless approved by the COMPANY in specific cases.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
Seam orientation of welded pipe shall be selected to ensure that at the circumferential
welds, the longitudinal welds shall be staggered in the top 90° of the pipeline, or
250mm whichever is the lesser. A longitudinal joint shall pass an appurtenance of a
structural element at a minimum distance of 50mm. Should a section of the line
containing uncompleted welds fall from the skids, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately
inform COMPANY.
Every effort shall be made to reduce misalignment by the use of the clamp and
rotation of the pipes to obtain the best fit. For pipe of same nominal wall thickness off-
set shall not exceed 1.6mm. The off set may be checked from outside using dial
gauges. Any branch connection, sleeve, etc. shall be atleast 150mm from any other
weld. The welds for fittings shall be so located that the toe of the cold dressing is
permissible only in cases of slight misalignment and may only be carried out with a
bronze headed hammer. Hot dressing shall not be permitted. When welding pipes of
different wall thickness (as directed by COMPANY) a special transition piece shall be
used. This shall have a minimum of 1:4 taper. The welds shall be subject to both
ultrasonic and radiographic inspection.
The root gap shall be accurately checked and shall conform to the qualified welding
procedure. The use of internal line-up clamps is mandatory for pipe diameters 10" and
above. However, in some cases (tie-in welds, flanges, fittings, diameter of pipe 10"
etc.) where it is impossible to use internal clamps, an external line-up clamp may be
used.
The internal line-up clamp shall not be released before the entire root pass has been
completed.
When as external line-up clamp is used, all spaces between bars or atleast 60% of the
first pass shall be welded before the clamp is released and the pipe remaining
adequately supported on each side of the joint.
Segments thus welded shall be equally spaced around the circumference of the pipe.
Slag, etc. shall be cleaned off and the ends of the segments shall be prepared by
grinding, so as to ensure continuity of the weld bead.
09. WEATHER CONDITIONS
The parts being welded and the welding personnel shall be adequately protected from
rain and strong winds. In the absence of such a protection no welding shall be carried
out. The completed welds shall be suitably protected in case of bad weather
conditions.
10.0 WELDING
10.1 Root Pass

a) Root pass shall be made with electrodes/ filler wires recommended in the
welding specification chart attached along with other project data sheets. The
size of the electrodes used shall be as per the approved welding procedure.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
b) Position or roll welding (for yard double jointing) may be permitted. Separate
procedures shall be submitted and qualified for up hill, down hill, vertical down
and roll welding. The vertical up method of welding shall be used for the root
pass of the tie-ins, special crossings, fittings and special parts, filled welds,
repairs and when an external line up clamp is used. The down hill welding may
be used for root run welding of tie-ins and special crossings when (a) the edges
are machined or have equivalent preparation (b) line up clamps are used and
the fit up is geometrically and mechanically similar to one of the oridinary line
welding without misalignment or uneveness.
c) The root pass of butt joints shall be executed properly so as to achieve full
penetration with complete fusion of the root edges. Weld projection inside the
pipe shall not exceed 1.6 mm wherever not specified by the applicable code.
d) Any deviation desired from the recommended welding technique and electrodes
indicated in the welding specification chart shall be adopted only after obtaining
express approval of the COMPANY.
e) Welding shall be continuous and uninterrupted during a pass.
f) On completion of each run, craters, welding irreigularities, slag, etc., shall be

removed by grinding and chiselling.
g) While the welding is in progress care shall be taken to avoid any kind of
movement of the components, shocks, vibration and stresses to prevent
occurance of weld cracks.
h) Fillet welds shall be made by shielded metal arc welding process irrespective of
the thickness and class of piping. Electrode size shall not exceed 3.25mm
diameter for socket joints. Atleast two passes shall be made on socket weld
joints
i) Root pass of fillet weld for branch connection can also be made by GTAW
process. However other pass shall be made by SMAW process as mentioned
above (point h).
j) Peening shall not be used.
10.2 Joint Completion
In case of manual welding, the first pass shall be carried out by a minimum of two
welders, working simultaneously and so placed as to cause minimum distortion of the
pipe.
The number of welders and the allowable welding sequences shall be as those laid
down in the qualified welding procedure specification. Once the deposit of the first
pass has been started, it must be completed as rapidly as possible, reducing
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
interruptions to the minimum. The welding and wire speed shall be approximately
same as that established in the Qualified Welding Procedure Specification (QWPS).
The pipe shall always be adequately supported and must not be pumped or shaken
during welding. The clamp shall be removed, as indicated in clause 8.0 above. Before
starting the second pass, the first pass shall be cleaned and flattened with rotating
grinders.
The interruption between completion of the first pass and starting the second pass
shall be as stated in the procedure specification.
For crack prevention a top and bottom reinforcement of at least one electrode shall be
applied before lowering the pipe on the skid.
The welding speed selected shall enable production of a bead which is sufficiently thick
and which shows no undercutting.
The time lapse between second and third pass shall be as stated in the procedure
specification, normally not exceeding five minutes. After completion of the third or
following passes, welding operations may be suspended, so allowing the joint to cool
down, provided that the thickness of the weld metal deposited is equal to at least 50%
of the pipe thickness. Upon restarting, depending on the materials, wall thickness and
welding process, a preheating to atleast 100°C shall be carried out. Subsequent passes
up to weld completion shall be protected to avoid rapid cooling, if meteorological
conditions so dictate. Cleaning between passes shall be done carefully so as to reduce
the possibility of inclusions.
Electrodes starting and finishing points shall be staggered from pass to pass. Arc-
strikes outside the bevel on the pipe surface are not permitted. Arc - strike or arc-burn
on the pipe surface outside the weld, which are caused accidentally by electrical arcs
between the electrodes, electrode holder, welding cable shall be removed by grinding
in accordance with a procedure approved by COMPANY and the repair checked by
ultrasonic, radiographic, magnetic particle or dyepenetrant tests which the COMPANY
feels necessary. The pipe wall thickness after grinding shall not be less that the
minimum thickness limit permitted for the pipe. Repair of arc-strikes by welding is
prohibited.
The completed weld shall be carefully brushed and cleaned and shall appear free from
spatters, scales, etc.
These requirements apply not only to completed welds but also to the bare strip at
least so wide so as to allow full skid examination at both ends of the pipe to allow a
good ultrasonic inspection when it is required.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
11.0 HEAT TREATMENT
11.1 Preheating
Preheating, if required, shall be carried out as per the following :
a) Preheating requirements for the various materials shall be as per the welding
specification chart.
b) Preheating shall be performed using resistance or induction/ heating methods.

Preheating by gas burners, utilising acetylene or propane gas may also be
carried out. Oxypropane gas may be used with the permission of the COMPANY
under careful supervision.
c) Preheating shall extend uniformly to atleast three times the thickness of the
joint, but not less than 50mm, on both sides of the weld.
d) Preheating temperature shall be maintained over the whole length of the joint
during welding. Temperature indicating crayons or other temperature indicating
devices shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR to check the temperature.
11.2 Postweld Heat Treatment
a) Post weld heat treatment, wherever required for joints between pipes and
fittings, pipe body and supports shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR at his
expense as per the relevant specifications, applicable standards and the
instructions of the COMPANY.
b) The heat treatment of welded joints shall be carried out as per the
requirements laid down in ANSI B31.8 and other special requirements
mentioned in welding specification chart.
c) The CONTRACTOR shall submit for the approval of the COMPANY, well before
carrying out actual heat treatments the details of the post weld heat treatment
procedure, as per Annexure-II attached, that he proposes to adopt for each
of the materials/ assembly/ part involved.
d) Post weld heat treatment shall be done in a furnace or by using an electric

resistance or induction heating equipment, as decided by the COMPANY.
e) While carrying out local post weld heat treatment, technique of application of
heat must ensure uniform temperature attainment at all points of the portion
being heat treated. Care shall be taken to ensure that width of heated band
over which specified post weld heat treatment temperature is attained is atleat
as that specified in the relevant applicable standards/ codes.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
The width of the heated band centered on the weld shall at least be equal to
the width of weld plus 2" (50mm). The temperature gradient shall be such that
the length of the material on each side of the weld, at a temperature exceeding
half the heat treatment temperature, is atleast 2.5 rt where is the bore radius
and t is the pipe thickness at the weld.
f) Throughout the cycle of heat treatment, the portion outside the heat band shall
be suitably wrapped with insulation so as to avoid any harmful temperature
gradient on the exposed surface of pipe. For this purpose temperature at the
exposed surface of the pipe shall not be allowed to exceed 400°C.
g) The temperature attained by the portion under heat treatment shall be

recorded by means of thermocouple pyrometers. Adequate number of
thermocouples shall be attached to the pipe directly at equally spaced locations
along the periphery of the pipe joint. The minimum number of thermocouples
attached per joint shall be 2 upto 10" dia and 3 for 12" dia and above.
However, the COMPANY can increase the required minimum number of
thermocouples to be attached, if found necessary.
h) Automatic temperature recorders which have been suitably calibrated shall be

employed. The calibration chart of each recorder shall be submitted to the
COMPANY prior to starting the heat treatment operation and its approval shall
be obtained.
i) Immediately on completion of the heat treatment, the post weld heat

treatment charts/ records alongwith the hardness test results on the weld joints
(whenever required as per the welding specification chart) shall be submitted
to COMPANY for its approval.
j) Each joint shall bear an identification number which shall be maintained in the
piping sketch to be prepared by the CONTRACTOR. The joint identification
number shall appear on the corresponding post weld heat treatment treatment
charts. The same identification numbers shall also be followed for identification
on corresponding radiographic films. The chart containing the identification
number and piping sketch shall be submitted to the COMPANY in suitable
folders.
k) Vickers hardness/ Brinnel hardness of the heat affected zone as well as of the
weld metal, after heat treatment shall be measured using a suitable hardness
tester and shall not exceed the maximum hardness specified in the welding
specification chart. The weld joint shall be subjected to reheat treatment, when
hardness measured exceeds the specified limit, at the CONTRACTOR's own
expense.
l) The CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the hardness testing and shall maintain the
records of all the joints tested. These records shall be checked by the
COMPANY.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
12.1 General
a) The COMPANY's Inspector shall have free access to all concerned areas, where
the actual work is being performed. The CONTRACTOR shall be also provide
the COMPANY's inspector all means and facilities necessary to carry out
inspection.
b) The COMPANY is entitled to depute its own inspector to the shop or field where
pre-fabrication and erection of pipelines are being done, with (but not limited
to) the following objectives :-
i. To check the conformance to relevant standards/ specifications and

suitability of various welding equipment and the welding performance.
ii. To supervise the welding procedures qualification.
iii. To supervise the welder's performance qualification.
iv. To carry out visual/NDT examination of the weldings.
v. To check whether shop/ field welding is being executed is in

conformity with the relevant specification and codes of practice
followed in pipe construction.
c) CONTRACTOR shall intimate sufficiently in advance the commencement of

qualification tests, welding works and acceptance tests, to enable the
Company’s inspector to be present to supervise the same.
12.2 Welding Procedure Qualification
a) Welding procedure qualification shall be carried out in accordance with the

relevant requirements of API 1104 latest edition or other applicable codes and
other special requirements of the specification / job requirements by the
CONTRACTOR at his expense. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the welding
procedure specification chart format as per Annexure-III (attached)
immediately after the receipt of the order.
b) COMPANY's inspector will review, check and approve the welding procedure
submitted and shall release the procedure for procedure qualification tests. The
procedure qualification test shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR under
field conditions at his own expense. A complete set of test results in format as
per Annexure-III & Annexure-IV (attached) shall be submitted to the
COMPANY's Inspector for approval immediately after completing the procedure
qualification test and atleast 2 weeks before the commencement of actual
work. Standard tests as specified in the code shall be carried out in all cases. In
addition to these, tests, other tests like radiography, macro/ micro examination,
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
hardness tests, dye penetrant examination, charphy V-notch etc. shall be

carried out on specimens. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to
carry out all the tests required to the satisfaction of the COMPANY's Inspector.
The destructive testing of welded joints shall be as per Clause 14.0.
12.3 Welder's Qualification
a) Welders shall be qualifed in accordance with the API 1104 and other applicable
specifications by the CONTRACTOR at his expense. The butt weld test pieces of
the qualification test shall meet the radiographic test requirements specified in
Clause 12.5 and 16.0 of this specification. The COMPANY's Inspector shall
witness the test and certify the qualification of each welder separately. Only
those welders who have been approved by the COMPANY's Inspector shall be
employed for welding. CONTRACTOR shall submit the welder qualification test
reports in the standard format as shown in Annexure-V and obtain express
approval, before commencement of the work. It shall be the responsibility of
CONTRACTOR to carry out qualification tests of welders and obtain written
approval, before commencement of works.
b) The welders shall always have in their possession the identification card as
shown in Annexure-VII and shall produce it on demand by the COMPANY's
Inspector. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to issue the
identity cards after it has been duly certified by the COMPANY.
c) No welder shall be permitted to work without the possession of identity cards.
d) If a welder is found to perform a type of welding or in a position for which he is

not qualified, he shall be debarred from doing any further work. All welds
performed by an unqualfiied welder shall be cut and redone by a qualified
welder at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.
12.4 Visual Inspection
Inspection of all welds shall be carried out by COMPANY as per the latest editions of
the applicable codes and specifications. All finished welds shall be visually inspected for
parallel and axial alignment of the work, excessive reinforcement, concavity of welds,
shrinkage, cracks, under-cuts, dimensions of the weld, surface porosity and other
surface defects. Undercutting adjacent to the completed weld shall not exceed the
limits specified in the applicable standard/ code.
12.5 Non Destructive Examination
The non destructive examination shall mainly consist of examination using x-ray
radiography as detailed in Clause 17.0.
12.5.1 Radiographic examination of one hundred percent (100%) girth welds will be required
by the COMPANY.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
The non-destructive examination shall mainly consist of examination using Automated

Ultrasonic Testing (AUT) as detailed in clause no. 16.0. This shall be applicable for all
welds made by automatic GMAW process with narrow gap edge preparation and welds
made by semi-automatic FCAW process.
The CONTRACTOR shall make all the arrangements for the AUT of work covered by
the specification at his expense. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all the reports to the
COMPANY, immediately after examination together with the corresponding
interpretation reports on the approved format. The details of the AUT reports along
with the joint identification number shall be duly entered in a register and signed by
the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the COMPANY for approval. The COMPANY will
review all the AUT records of welds and inform the CONTRACTOR to those welds,
which are unacceptable. The decision of the COMPANY shall be final and binding in this
regard.
For 150# Rating Pipeline, welds shall meet the standards of acceptability as set forth in
API 1104. However for higher class rating pipeline welds shall meet the standards of
acceptability as set forth in API 1104 and as well as the requirements laid in
subsequent paragraphs.
The CONTRACTOR shall make all the arrangements for the radiographic examination of
work covered by the specification at his expense.
All requirements mentioned in the specification shall be arranged and executed by the
CONTRACTOR through his own resources. In addition, Radiography examination shall
be required in the following cases as per clause no. 17.0 of this Specification for pipes
with wall thickness 9.5mm and above, ultrasonic inspection is required in the following
cases as per clause 15.0 of this specification.
a) On the first 100 welded joints corresponding to each automatic GTAW / and
Semi-automatic FCAW welding procedure used.
b) When 20mm or more are cut from the pipe end as supplied, the ends shall be
ultrasonically inspected for an additional length of 20mm to assure no
lamination exist.
c) When welds are repaired.
d) When in the opinion of COMPANY, ultrasonic inspection is required to confirm

or clarify defects indicated by radiography.
e) When automatic procedure is used at least 10 cm on each weld shall be

ultrasonically inspected at COMPANY's discretion.
f) Welding of Transition piece of pipe.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
In addition, Radiography inspection may be required for certain critical welds of the
pipeline, i.e. tie-ins, welding of valves, flanges, randomly selected at COMPANY
discretion. All fillet and groove welds, other than those AUT examined, shall be
subjected to Dye-Penetrant /MP testing followed by manual Ultrasonic testing.
The non-destructive testing system used for inspecting welds must by approved by the
COMPANY.
All other welds made of FCAW and SMAW processes and the Tie-in joints having API
bevel shall be examined by Radiography. When Radiography is used, the provisions
stated in this para shall be applicable.
- For all production welds, X-ray Radiography by internal crawlers be used.
Welds shall meet the standards of acceptability as set forth in API 1104 and as well as
the requirements laid in subsequent paragraphs.
The CONTRACTOR shall make all the arrangements for the Radiography examination
of work covered by the specification at his expense.
The COMPANY will review all the radiographs of welds and inform the CONTRACTOR
regarding unacceptable welds. The decision of the COMPANY shall be final and binding
in this regard.
All the requirements mentioned in the specification shall be arranged and executed by
the CONTRACTOR through his own resources. In addition, Ultrasonic inspection is
required in the following cases as per clause no. 15.0 of this specification:
a) On the first 10 welded joints corresponding to each automatic GMAW and semi-
automatic FCAW welding procedures used.
b) When welds are repaired.
c) When in the opinion of COMPANY, Ultrasonic inspection is required to confirm
or clarify defects indicated by Radiography.
In addition, Ultrasonic inspection may be required for certain critical welds of the
pipeline, i.e. tie-ins, welding of valves, flanges, randomly selected at COMPANY
discretion. All fillet and groove welds, other than those are subjected to Radiography,
shall be subjected to Dye-Penetrant/MP inspection. The non-destructive testing system
used for inspecting welds must by approved by the COMPANY.
Acceptance Criteria
Weld quality is judged on the basis of the acceptability criteria mentioned below:
Any weld which as a result of radiographic and/ or ultrasonic examination in the

opinion of COMPANY exhibits imperfections greater than the limits stated in API-1104
latest edition or as superseded in this specification shall be considered defective and
shall so be marked with an identification point marker.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
In addition to the API-1104 requirements, the welds containing cracks including crater
cracks regardless of size of location are unacceptable.
1. Any length of inadequate penetration of the root bead as defined by API-

1104 is not acceptable except that root concavity is allowed as per API 1104.
2. Any amount of incomplete fusion at the root of the joint as detailed in API
1104 is considered unacceptable.
3. Unrepaired burn through areas are unacceptable.
Suitable records shall be maintained by the CONTRACTOR as desired by the COMPANY

on the day to day work done on welding, radiography, ultrasonic testing. The
CONTRACTOR shall present the records to the COMPANY on day to day basis and
whenever demanded, for approval.
12.6 Destructive Testing
The COMPANY has the authority to order the cutting of upto 0.1% of the total number
of welds completed for destructive testing at no extra cost of COMPANY. The
destructive testing of weld joints shall be made as per Clause 14.0.
In addition, welds already cut out for defects for any reason may also be subjected to
destructive testing. The sampling and the re-execution of welds shall be carried out by
the CONTRACTOR at his own expense. If the results are unsatisfactory, welding
operations shall be suspended and may not be restarted until the causes have been
identified and the CONTRACTOR has adopted measures which guarantee acceptable
results. If it is necessary in the COMPANY's opinion the procedure shall be re-qualified.
The weld joint represented by unsatisfactory welds shall stand rejected unless
investigation prove otherwise.
13.0 REPAIR OF WELDS
13.1 With the prior permission of COMPANY, welds which do not comply with the standards
of acceptability shall be repaired or the joint cut out and re-welded.
A separate welding procedure specification sheet shall be formulated and qualified by

CONTRACTOR for repair welds simulating the proposed repair to be carried out.
Separate procedures are required to be qualified for (a) thorough thickness repair (b)
external repair and (c) internal repair. Welders shall be qualified in advance for repairs.
The root pass, for repairs opening the root, shall be done by the vertical uphill
technique. The procedure shall be proven by satisfactory procedure tests to API 1104
including the special requirement of the specification, and shall also be subject to
metalographic examination, hardness surveys and Charpy tests to determine the
effects of repair welding on the associated structure.
Root sealing or single pass repair deposit shall not be allowed. Internal root defects
shall be ground thoroughly and welded with a minimum of two passes. However, while
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
grinding for repairs, care shall be taken to ensure that no grinding marks are made on
the pipe surface anywhere.
The repair shall be subjected, as a minimum requirement to the same testing and
inspection requirements as the original weld. The re-radiography of repaired weld shall
be limited to 6” weld length on either edge of the repaired area. A 100% ultrasonic
test shall be done at the repaired area externally. Any repaired area that is wide,
irregular or rough shall be rejected and a full cut out shall be done. Single pass repairs
shall be subjected to 100%, Dye-Penetrant / MP testing.
Repairs are limited to a maximum of 30% of the weld length. Not more than two
repairs are permitted on the same location. A report of all repairs shall be maintained
by CONTRACTOR and submitted every day to the Company / Consultant.
13.2 Weld Rejected by Accumulation of Defects
Where a weld is rejected by the accumulation of defect clause, as defined by API 1104
and this specification, repairs within these limitations are permitted. Defects in the
filling and capping passes shall be repaired preferentially.
14. DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF WELDED JOINT - BUTT WELDS
14.1 Preparation
Having passed the visual and the non-destructive-inspection the test weld shall be
subject to mechanical test.
After satisfactory completion of all visual and non-destructive testing the test weld shall
be set aside for a period not less than 24hours. No further work on the test weld and
no cutting of test specimens from the weld shall be performed until a period of at least
24 hours has expired. Having passed the visual and the nondestructive inspection, the
test weld shall be subjected to mechanical test.
Weld specimens shall be taken from the positions indicated in Fig. 1 of this
specification from areas as free from defects as possible; for this reason it is necessary
to take the previous non-destructive tests into account. The minimum number of tests
to be carried out is given in Table-1 of this specification.
The tests shall be carried out in laboratories approved by the COMPANY. The
specimens shall be prepared in accordance with the figures given in the paragraphs
which refer to the individual tests.
14.2 Tensile Strength
Specimens shall be taken from the position indicated in Fig. 1 & 1A of this
specification. Two ISO type specimens and two API - type specimens shall be taken.
The ISO test specimen are shown in Fig. 2 of this specification.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
14.2.1 Method
The test shall be carried out in accordance with ISO:375.
Table-1
Type and Number of Test Specimens for
Procedure Qualification Test & Production Welds
Pipe Size, Number of Specimens

Out Side
Diamter- Tensile Tensile Nick Root Face Side Macro Hard- Impact Total
Inches API ISO Break Bend Bend Bend Bend ness
Wall Thickness - ½ inch (12.7mm) and Under
Under 2-3/8 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 4
2-3/8 to 4- 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 4
½ incl.
Over 4-½ 2 0 2 2 2 0 2 2 12 24
less than
12.75
12- 3/4 and 2 2 4 4 4 0 2 2 24 44

over
Wall Thickness - Over ½ inch (12.7mm)
4-½ and 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 4
smaller
Over 4-½ 2 0 2 2 2 0 2 2 12 24
less than
12-3/4
12-3/4 and 2 2 4 0 0 8 2 2 24 44
over
14.3 Nick-Break Test
14.3.1 Preparation
Specimens for Nick-break test with notches thus worked can break in the base metal,
instead of in the fusion zone; therefore an alternative test piece may be used after
authorisation by the COMPANY with a notch cut in the reinforcement of outside weld
bead to a maximum depth of 1.5mm measured from the surface of the weld bead.
14.4 Macroscopic Inspection
14.4.1 Preparation
Specimens shall be taken from the positions indicated in Fig. 1 of this specification and
shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM E2 and E3.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
The width of the macrosection has to be at least three times the width of the weld.
The section is to be prepared by grinding and polishing and etched to clearly reveal the
weld metal and heat affected zone.
14.4.2 Method
Specimens shall be carefully examined under the microscope, with a magnification of

atleast 25 times (25:1). The COMPANY may ask for a macrograph with 5 times (5:1)
magnification for DOCUMENTATION purposes.
14.4.3 Requirements
Under macroscopic examination, the welded joints shall show good penetration and
fusion, without any defect exceeding the limits stated in the evaluation criteria of the
nick break test.
14.5 Hardness Test
14.5.1 Preparation
The prepared macrosection is to be used for hardness testing using the Vickers
method with 10 kg load Indentations are to be made along traverses each
approximately 1mm below the surface on both sides of the weld.
In the weld metal a minimum of 6 indentations equally spaced along the traverses are
to be made. The HAZ indentations are to be made along the traverses for
approximately 0.5mm each into unaffected materials, and starting as close to the
fusion line as possible.
One indentation on each side of the weld along each traverse is to be made on parent
metal. Refer Fig.3. The indentations are to be made in the adjacent regions as well on
the opposite sides of the macrosection along the specified traverses.
14.5.2 Method
The test shall be carried out in accordance with Recommendation ISO R81, Vickers
hardness, using a laboratory type machine controlled as pre-recommendation ISO R146
and using a diamond pyramid penetrator set at 2.37 rad (136°) with a load of 10 kg.
14.5.3 Requirements
Hardness value shall not exceed the limit specified in welding Specification chart. In
case of a single reading having a slightly (+10 HV) higher value than the specified
limit, further indentations shall be made to check if the high value was an isolated
case.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
All the hardness values contained from the heat affected zone shall not exceed 100 HV
with respect to the average hardness of the values obtained for the base metal. If
these additional tests give a hardness within the specification limit the slightly higher
value may be accepted.
14.6 Charpy - V - Notch Impact Test
14.6.1 Specimens shall be taken from the position indicated in Fig. 1 of this specification. The
test specimens will be prepared in accordance with ISO R148. Charpy V-notch
specimens shall have dimensions as given in Fig. 3 of this specification.
Three test specimens shall be taken from each sample and they shall be cut and
worked so that their length is transverse and perpendicular to the weld bead with the
notch position as shown in Fig. 4 of this specification. The notch shall be perpendicular
to the roller surface. The test specimen width shall depend upon the pipe wall nominal
thickness as following :
Sl. Nominal Wall Thickness in mm Test Specimen width mm
No.
1. Over 12 10
2. Over 9.5 and upto 12 7.5
3. From 7 upto 9.5 5
4. Less than 7 2.5
14.6.2 Test Method
The test shall be carried out as indicated in ISO R148 "Beam impact test V-notch".
Test pieces shall be immersed in a thermostatic bath and maintained at the test
temperature for at least 15 minutes. They shall then be placed in the testing machine
and broken within 5 seconds of their removal from the bath. The test temperature
shall be as mentioned in Special conditions of the Contract.
14.6.3 Requirements (Note-1)
The impact energy shall be as follows :
Sl. Test Specimen in "Average of three Minimum Single

No. mm Specimens (Note-2) Value (Note-1)
Joules (Min.) Joules
1. 10.0 27.0 22.0

2. 7.5 21.5 17.0
3. 5.0 18.5 15.0
4. 2.5 10.0 8.0
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
Note :
1) Only one value is permitted to be lower than average value upto the value
specified.
2) These values are specified for resistance to brittle fracture only, where
additional requirements are specified in project data sheet. (Ex. pipeline
materials with arrest properties i.e. a higher upper shelf charpy V-energy for
resistance against propagating ductile fractures) the same shall be followed.
14.7 Bend Test Requirements
The Bend test Specimens shall be made and tested as per the requirements of API
1104 Sixteenth Edition May 1983 except that the dimensions of the Jig for guided bend
test Fig. 5 para 2.6 API 1104 shall be modified as follows:
Radius of the Plunger À' : 2t

Radius of the die `B' : 3 t + 1.6mm
Width of the die `C' : 50.8mm
The acceptance criterion on shall however be as per para 2.643 and 2.653 of API 1104
nineteenth edition Sept. 1999.
Note : t = thickness of specimen
15. ULTRASONIC INSPECTION
In addition to the radiographic inspection, ultrasonic inspection is required as per

conditions listed in paragraph 12.5 of this specification. This section concerns manual
ultrasonic inspection. However ultrasonic by automatic equipment may be used if
15.1 Equipment and Operators
The CONTRACTOR who carries out the ultrasonic inspection shall have sufficient
qualified personnel equipment and instruments at his disposal to be able to effect the
tests without hindering or delaying the pipeline assembly operations.
The operators shall be fully qualified as per a recognised standard (ASME Sec. V or
equivalent) and they shall have as minimum level II as described in para 11.4.3, API
1104; nineteenth edition. The operators shall be able to :
calibrate the equipment ;

perform an operational test under production conditions;
interpret the screen picture ;
evaluate the size and location of reflectors
interpret the type of defects detected
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
The COMPANY has the option of checking the ability of personnel employed for
ultrasonic testing by means of qualification tests.
The CONTRACTOR appointed to carry out ultrasonic inspection shall supply all the
instruments necessary for their execution on site.
15.2 Specification for Ultrasonic Inspection Procedure Qualification
Before work begins, the CONTRACTOR shall present a specification describing the
proposed U.T. procedure qualification.
This specification shall state, as an indication only but not limited to the following
information :
type of U.T. equipment used

type and dimensions of transducers
frequency range
details for calibration
coupling medium
inspection technique
record details
reference to the welding procedure where it is intended to adopt the
specification.
temperature range of the joints to be inspected.
15.3 Qualification of Ultrasonic Inspection Procedure
The ultrasonic inspection procedure shall be approved by the COMPANY. Before

inspection begins, the COMPANY may require the qualification test of the ultrasonic
inspection procedure. This specification test consists in testing (under normal operating
conditions) some CONTRACTOR welds made according to the same production
procedure, where there are typical defects the test intends to detect.
This test shall be conducted in the presence of the COMPANY. The Ultrasonic
inspection procedure shall be approved by the Company.
15.4 Test Procedure
Circumferential welds shall be inspected from both sides using angled probes.
The surface with which the probes comes into contact shall be free of metal spatter,
dirt, iron oxide, and scales of any type; therefore it shall be necessary to clean a strip
at least 50mmwide on both sides of the weld with steel wire brushes and anyhow the
cleaned strip must be atleast wide enough to allow full skip examination.
If, during the test, echoes of doubtful origin appear, it shall be necessary to inspect a
convenient area on the pipe surface, close to the weld, with a straight beam transducer
in order to check whether any manufacturing defects are present which could have
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
interfered with the ultrasonic beam.

By way of an example, the equipment shall include but not be limited to the following:-
ultrasonic equipment and coupling medium

sample sections for calibration of instruments
equipment for cleaning of surface to be examined
rules calibrated in centimeters for exact location of the position of defects.
The characteristics of the above - listed instruments and equipment shall guarantee:
a) that the required standards of the inspection procedure, as previously

established and approved by the COMPANY, are satisfied.
b) continuous operation
All the instruments and equipment shall be approved by the COMPANY before
being used. The COMPANY has the authority to reject any item which is
considered unsuitable. The decision of the COMPANY is final. The
CONTRACTOR appointed to carry out ultrasonic inspections shall also ensure
the operational efficiency and maintenance of the instruments and equipment,
and shall immediately substitute any item rejected by the COMPANY.
All the instruments and equipment necessary for carrying out ultrasonic
inspection on site shall satisfy the requirements laid down by the public boards
of institutions which regulate `safety at work'.
15.5 Ultrasonic Instruments
The Ultrasonic Instruments shall satisfy the following:
be pulse-echo type, able to generate, receive and display, on the screen a

cathode ray tube (CRT) pulse at frequencies between 1 and 6 MHz. The useful
part of the CRT screen shall be at least 70mm wide and at least 50mm high.
shall have variable amplification, with steps of 1 or 2 dB over a range of a least
60 dB.
the regulation control shall be accurate to within ±1 db and this accuracy shall
be certified by the instrument manufacturer.
may be powered by a battery or an electric generator. In the first case, the
autonomy of operation (endurance) of the instrument shall be sufficient to
carry on working without frequent interruptions, and the instruments shall be
equipped with an automatic switch which switches it off when the battery runs
down; in the second case, there must be a voltage stabilising device with a
tolerance of ±2 Volts.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
15.6 Probes
The probes used shall have dimensions, frequencies, and a refraction angle suited to
the type of steel, the diameter, the thickness of the pipe and to the joint design.
15.7 Reference Sample Pieces
The efficiency of the equipment used, the effective refraction angle of the probe, and
the beam output point, shall be checked using a V1 and V2 sample block, IIW type or
calibration block ASTM E-428.
For manual Ultrasonic testing and automated Ultrasonic testing, the reference sample
pieces shall be as described in API 1104, Nineteenth Edition, para 11.4.5.
For the calibration of runs and the regulation of detection sensitivity during the test, a
calibration piece shall be used. This piece shall be taken from the production material,
and will be at least 150mm long (measured in the direction of the axis), and at least
50mm wide (measured in the direction of the circumference) (see Fig. 5 of this
specification).
In the middle of the inside and the outside surface of the calibration piece a groove
shall be made. The groove will have a rectangular cross-section, a flat bottom and the
following dimensions.
depth : 1 ± 0.1mm
breadth (measured parallel to the 150mm side) : 1 ± 01mm
Length (measured parallel to the 50mm side) not less than 30mm
In addition, the calibration piece shall have a hole, 2mm in diameter, passing through
its thickness and positioned so that during calibration the echoes returning from the
two grooves do not interfere with those returning from the hole.
15.8 Calibration
For a precise check of the sound paths necessary for a full inspection of the weld joint,
the probe shall be moved (half skip and full skip distance) until internal and external
notches on the test piece are detected (See Fig. 5 of this specification).
The relevant defect limits the path lengths on the time base. The calibration of
reference sensitivity is obtained by utilising the through - drilled test hole in the
thickness of the reference block to draw the distance - amplitude correction curve
relevant to the test probe.
Calibration shall be carried out according to the following procedure ; place its internal
vertex until the maximum height of echo is displayed on the screen ; this echo is
adjusted to 80% of full screen height by means of the sensitivity adjuster set in dB.
Without varying the amplification, the probe placed at full skip distance from the hole
is moved to detect the external vertex of the hole until the maximum height of echo is
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
obtained. The straight line connecting the peaks of the two echoes obtained by the
above procedure, represents 100% reference level, while the one connecting the two
points at half height of the same echoes represents "50% reference level".
The two straight lines shall be marked on the screen with a pen. Calibration shall be
repeated each time tests are re-started ; at intervals not longer than 30 minutes during
normal operations; each time the conditions fixed in advance are altered. This
calibration is applicable provided that the crystal of the probe is 8 x 9mm size. Should
this size of the crystal be different, the value of the sensitivity obtained from the
calibration by a crystal of a different size shall be brought to the value of sensitivity
obtained from the calibration by a 8 x 9mm crystal. The sensitivities of the two
different size probes shall be compared through the echoes obtained on the notch of
the test piece with the probe position at half skip of the distance.
15.9 Regulation of Amplification During Production Testing
Scanning sensitivity shall be as provided in API 1104 para 11.4.7.2 &11.4.7.3.
15.10 Qualification of Ultrasonic Testing Operators
Before the inspection begins or during the same inspection, the COMPANY may require
a qualification test for the ultrasonic equipment operators.
15.11 Evaluation of Indications Given by Ultrasonic Tests
Each time that echoes from the weld bead appear during production testing, the
instrument amplification shall be altered to coincide with the reference amplification
and the probe shall be oved until maximum response is obtained, paying attention all
the time of the probe-tube coupling.
If, under these conditions, the heights of the defect echo is equal to or greater than
that of the reference echo, the defect shall be evaluated according to other clauses of
this Specification. If the defect has also been detected by the radiographic and or
visual examination, the dimensions shall be judged according to the type of
examination which detects the greater defect. Returns which are less that 50% of the
reference echo, will not be considered. If returns are above 50% but lower than 100%
of the reference echo, and if the operator has good reasons to suspect that the returns
are caused by unfavourably oriented cracks, the same shall be informed to the
COMPANY. Moreover, when there is a defect to be repaired, such defect shall be
removed for a length corresponding to the one where no more return echo is given.
15.12 Other Equipment
The use of rules calibrated in centimeters, attached if possible to the probe, for the
precise location of the position of welding defects, is recommended. Defect location is
effected by measuring the projection distance between the probe output and the
reflecting surface.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
The operators carrying out the tests shall have besides the probing instrument, tools
for cleaning the pipe surface (files, brushes, etc.), as well as, the coupling liquid or
paste appropriate for the temperature of the section to be examined.
16.0 AUTOMATED ULTRASONIC TESTING (AUT)
INTRODUCTION
The specification shall be applicable for Automated Ultrasonic Testing (AUT) system
suitable for pipeline girth welds. The system shall be based on focused pulse-echo,
tandem or through transmission methods enhanced with mapping image and
augmented by Time Of Flight Diffraction (TOFD) technique.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
ASTM E 1961-98 “Standard Practice for Mechanized Ultrasonic examination of Girth

Welds using Zonal Discrimination with Focused Search Units”. The inspection system
shall meet and exceed the requirements of ASTM E 1961-98.
Appendix-E, “Automated Ultrasonic Girth Weld Testing”, OS-F101, Submarine Pipeline

Systems, January 2000.
API Std. 1104 – “Welding of Pipeline and Related Facilities”.
APPROVED AGENCIES
Automated Ultrasonic Testing (AUT) systems and agencies who have proven track
record and have done a single project of diameter 20” or above and minimum length
of 50 km and also have inspected a cumulative length of 500 km or above on large
diameter Pipe lines in the last ten years shall be accepted. The agency should have
been approved by the reputed inspection agencies. The track record shall be submitted
to the COMPANY for approval prior to engagement.
AUT SYSTEM
The system shall meet and exceed the requirements of ASTM E1961-98.
The system shall provide an adequate number of examination channels to ensure the
complete volumetric examination of the weld through the thickness in one
circumferential scan. The evaluation zones should be of maximum 2.0mm height. The
instrument linearity should be such that the accuracy is within 5%.
Each examination channel should be selective for pulse-echo or through transmission

mode gate position and length for a minimum of two gates and gain.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
TOFD techniques & B-scan mapping should be available to improve characterization.

Recording thresholds should be selectable to display signals between 0 and 100% of
full screen height for simple amplitude and transit time recording and it should be from
0 to 100% for B-scan or mapping type recording of data. Two recordable signals
output per gate should be available being either analog or digital and representative
of signal height and time of flight. Measuring distance accuracy of circumferential weld
shall be within 1.0 cm from zero (0) position.
Electronic noise shall be lower than acoustical noise in all channels for the probes and
sensitivities to be used during inspection. The signal to noise ratio for each channel
during examination shall be at least ≥ 20 dB for shear waved probes.
COUPLING
The coupling shall be obtained by using a medium suitable for the purpose. It shall be
suitable for the temperature used. No residue shall remain on the pipe surface. A
method should be employed to determine that constant coupling is achieved during
examination. An examination of the test piece with its surface wiped dry should
produce a record showing an absence of the couplant recording signal.
SEARCH UNITS
The search unit shall meet all the requirements specified in Para 6.4 of ASTM E1961¬-
98.
CALIBRATIONS
Reference standards shall be manufactured from a section of unflawed project specific

line pipe supplied by pipeline CONTRACTOR. The agency shall then submit the
reference standard design to the COMPANY before manufacturing. No design changes
in the reference standard shall be made without the prior approval. Annexure A3 of the
standard ASTM E1961-98 provides an example for minimum requirements for
reference standards.
The system shall be optimized and calibrated as stated in Para 7.0 and 8.0 of ASTM E
1961-98. Static and Dynamic calibration shall be done and the approved procedure
shall clearly state the gain setting fixed for each channel.
The reference standard should be used to verify the scanning sensitivity at the start of
each shift and thereafter at intervals not exceeding two (2) hours or ten (10) welds.
A re-calibration shall be carried out if :

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
a) The calibration of an inspection function differs more than +/- 3dB from the
previous calibration
b) The gate settings need to be adjusted with more than +/- 1.5 mm with the
previous calibration – i) after a weld repair, ii) after equipment breakdown.
In case the calibration differs from the initial setting, outside the given tolerances, the
applicable probe(s) and coupling shall be checked. If the calibration has to be changed,
the welds before this calibration upto the previous calibration will be re-examined.
The reference standard design for calibration shall be approved separately. The
procedure for calibration and verification shall be same as given above.
PROCEDURE
A detailed AUT procedure shall be prepared and qualified for each wall thickness and
joint geometry to be examined prior to the start of any NDT work. Repair procedure
shall be separately qualified for each joint geometry. All the requirements of ASTM
E1961-98 should be met. The procedure as a minimum shall include the following:
- Functional description of equipment

- Reference standards and guidelines controlling equipment maintenance
- Instructions for scanning device, Ultrasonic instrument, Ultrasonic electronics,
Hard & Software for recording processing, Display presentation and storage of
inspection data
- Transducer configuration(s), characteristics types coverage.
- Number of examination zones for each wall thickness to be examined.
- Gate settings
- Equipment settings -Description of calibration blocks including type, size and
location of calibration reflectors, a) calibration intervals, b) calibration records -
Static and dynamic calibration procedure
- Identification of inspection starting point scanning direction and indication of
length inspected
- Method for scanner alignment and maintenance of alignment
- Allowed temperature range
- Couplant coupling and coupling control and channels provided to indicate lack
of coupling and method to ensure constant coupling
- Transducer and over all functional checks
- Height and length sizing methodology
- Surface condition and preparation
- Description of inspection work
- Acceptance criteria and instructions for reporting including example of recorder
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
chart and form to be used.
- A table indicating corresponding channel no., probe, type, location of reflector,

probe coupling etc.
Setting of Inspection Gates
Pulse-echo and Tandem Channels
With each transducer positioned for the peak signal response from the calibration
reflector the detection gates are to be set. The gate shall start 2-6mm (allowance for
width of heat affected zone) before the theoretical weld bevel preparation. The gate
ends shall be after the theoretical weld centerline. All gates will be programmed to
record amplitude and/or transit distance information. The length of the transit distance
in the root channel will be extended to enable root penetration registration.
Mapping Channels
The mapping gates in the body of the weld shall start 2-6mm (allowance for width of
heat affected zone) before the theoretical weld bevel preparation. The gate length will
be extended to enable cap reinforcement registration. The mapping gates in the root
will be set identical to the pulse-echo transit distance channels to enable the
registration of the root penetration.
TOFD Channel
The TOFD gate start will be set 1 µSec before the arrival of the lateral wave and
should extend up to the first back wall echo to achieve full cover of wall thickness.
Note: The gate settings may be altered if geometry indications dictate.
Sensitivity Settings
With each transducer positioned for the peak signal response from the calibration
reflector (flat bottom holes), the detection gates are to be set. In this position, the
probe holder is fixed to the probe frame. The equipment sensitivity (echo amplitude)
for all inspection channels shall be set at 80% Full Screen Height (FSH).
Mapping channels in the body of the weld will be used to detect the presence of
porosity and in addition to identify the position of the weld cap reinforcement for
pattern recognition purpose. The sensitivity as a minimum is equal to the related
pulse- echo channels, increased with additional gain to ensure proper detection.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
Mapping channels in the root will be used to identify the position of the root
penetration for pattern recognition purpose. The sensitivity as a minimum shall be
equal to the related pulse-echo channels, increased with additional gain to ensure
proper detection.
The lateral wave of the TOFD channel sensitivity is set at 80% FSH.
TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION
1. All Inspectors’ of the COMPANY (Owner) shall be imparted training at the

CONTRACTOR’s cost. The inspector shall be provided complete awareness and
knowledge regarding the equipment, limitations, capabilities complete range,
method of operation, calibration, scanning, including development of suitable
procedure, training on variables effecting the system performance and
interpretation of results.
2. The Ultrasonic lead operator performing the examination shall be qualified in

accordance with the COMPANY’s written practice and in accordance with ASNT
Practice SNT-TC-1A and EN 473 Level II. He should have experience in
multichannel UT equipment and be trained in using mechanized UT
manipulators.
FIELD EXAMINATIONS AND REPORTING
All the requirements stated in Para 9 and 10 of ASTM E1961-98 shall be followed a
minimum.
INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS
General
With the transit distance measurements and with the information from the mapping
and TOFD channels visible on the result presentation, indications shall be judged
whether they are from the weld geometry or from the defects. The coupling channels
will check for coupling loss; in case of coupling loss, a re-scan shall be carried out.
Inspection Result
The inspection result should be evaluated and/or reported as follows:
Welds shall be evaluated using both the pulse-echo and TOFD criteria shown below.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
This shall be performed in parallel and rejection against either of these criteria shall be
cause for rejection of the weld. The exceptions to this are described in the following
notes:
1. All indications in the pulse echo channels should be evaluated which exceed the
threshold level of 20% FSH.
2. Defect length shall be measured for the pulse-echo channels from the point
where the signal exceeds 20% FSH to the point the signal falls below. The
largest height assessed with TOFD or the greatest measured amplitude with
pulse-echo shall be assumed to apply over the whole defect length.
3. If the indication cannot be resolved by TOFD i.e. the upper and lower flaw
diffraction tips cannot be separately distinguished, no measurement can be
made to determine the defect height. In this case, the signal from the pulse-
echo channels will be solely used to determine that particular area of the scan.
4. Defects shall be assessed for interaction as follows:
a) Horizontal interaction
If the distance between two adjacent defects is less than the length of
the smaller of the two defects, then the defect shall be treated as a
single defect.
b) Vertical interaction
Vertical interaction of defects shall be assessed using TOFD. If the
distance between the two adjacent defects is less then the height of the
shorter of the two defects, than the defect shall be treated as a single
defect. Where the individual defects cannot be resolved by TOFD for
the vertical interaction, then the defects are assumed to interact and
shall be treated as a single defect.
5. The maximum allowable accumulated defect length shall be as per the criteria
given in welding specification.
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Weld quality shall be judged on the basis of the acceptability criteria mentioned in
welding specification.
17.0 RADIOGRAPHY
17.1 Scope
This covers the radiographic inspection of all types of welded joints of the main
pipeline.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
The welded joints shall include the following :-
i. Full girth welds on the mainline construction including double jointing of pipe, if
adopted.
ii. Welds for installation of block valves, insulating joints and other appurtenances
and tie-ins.
iii. Welds at scraper launching and receiving barrels.
iv. Terminal Piping
17.2 Applicable Standards
This specification shall apply in conjunction with the following (all latest edition):
i. API 1104, Standard for welding Piplines and Related Facilities.
ii. ANSI B31.8, Code for Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
iii. ANSI B31.4, Code for Liquid Petroleum Transportation Piping Systems.
iv. ASTM E94, Recommended practice for Radiographic Testing.
v. ASTM E142, Standard Method for Controlling Quality of Radiographic Testing.
vi. The American Society for Non-destructive Testing. Recommended Practice No.
SNT - TC-1A Supplement A.
17.3 Procedure
17.3.1 The radiographic examination procedure to be adopted shall be submitted by the

CONTRACTOR as per Annexure VI.
17.3.2 The procedure of radiographic examination shall be qualified to the entire satisfaction
of COMPANY prior to use. It shall include but not be limited to the following
requirements :
i. Lead foil intensifying screens, at the rear of the film shall be used for all
exposures.
ii. Type 2 and 3 films as per ASTM E-94 shall be used.
iii. A densitometer shall be used to determine film density. The transmitted film
density shall be 2.0 and 3.5 throughout the weld. The unexposed base density
of the film shall not exceed 0.30.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
iv. Radiographic identification system and documentation for radiographic

interpretation reports and their recording system.
17.3.3 The CONTRACTOR shall qualify each procedure in the presence of the COMPANY prior
to use.
17.3.4 The procedure of radiographic examination shall produce radiographs of sufficient

density, clarity and contrast so that defects in the weld or in the pile adjacent to the
weld, and the outline and holes of the penetrameter are clearly discernible.
17.3.5 All the girth welds of mainline shall be subjected to 100% radiographic examination.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all the radiographs to the COMPANY, immediately after
processing them, together with the corresponding interpretation reports on approved
format. The details of the radiographs all alongwith the joint identification number shall
be duly entered in a register and signed by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the
COMPANY for approval.
17.3.6 When the radiation source and the film are both on the outside of the weld and located
diametrically opposite each other, the maximum acceptable length of film for each
exposure shall not exceed the values given in Table-4 of API 1104. The minimum film
overlap, in such cases, shall be 40mm. The ellipse exposure technique may be used on
nominal pipe sizes of 2 inch and smaller provided that the source of film distance used
is a minimum of 12 inch.
17.3.7 Three copies of each acceptable radiographic procedure (as per Annexure-VI) and
three copies of radiographic qualification records, shall be supplied to COMPANY. One
set of the qualifying radiographs on the job shall be kept by the CONTRACTOR's
authorised representative to be used as a standard for the quality of production
radiographs during the job. The other two sets shall be retained by COMPANY for its
permanent record.
17.3.8 Three copies of the exposure charts relating to material thickness, kilo voltage, source
of film distance and exposure time shall also be made available to COMPANY by the
CONTRACTOR.
17.3.9 The CONTRACTOR shall, on a daily basis, record for each radiograph (1) radiograph's
number, (2) welder's number (3) approximate chainage of weld location, (4) whether
or not the welds meet the specified acceptance standards and (5) the nature and
approximate location of unacceptable defects observed. It must be possible to relate
back to a particular butt weld and welder on piping drawing and pipe line alignment
drawing.
17.3.10 Each day's production of processed radiographs shall be properly packaged separately,
identified by at least the (1) date, (2) radiographic unit, (3) job locations, (4) starting
and ending progress survey stations and (5) shall include original and three copies of
the daily radiographic record. The package shall be submitted to the COMPANY daily
when possible, but in no event later than noon of the following day.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
17.3.11 The CONTRACTOR shall provide all the necessary facilities at site, such as a dark room
with controlled temperature, film viewer etc. to enable the COMPANY to examine the
radiographs.
17.3.12 The CONTRACTOR, if found necessary, may modify the procedure of radiographic
examination suiting to the local conditions prevailing. This shall, however, be subject to
the approval of the COMPANY.
17.3.13 COMPANY shall have free access to all the CONTRACTOR's work facilities in the field.
17.3.14 Any approval granted by the COMPANY shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his
17.4 Radiation Source
17.4.1 Radiographic examination shall be carried out using x-radiations, Radiographic

examination by Gamma rays may be allowed, at the discretion of the COMPANY, in
case of inaccessible joints. Radiography by Gamma-Ray for tie-in-joints shall be
acceptable provided D4 AGFA film or equivalent is used and the required sensitivity
obtained.
17.4.2 Whenever possible, pipeline welds will be inspected by placing the radiation source
inside the pipe, on the pipeline axis, with a radiation of 6.28 rad. (360°C).
If it is impossible to place the radiation source inside the pipe, the weld will be
inspected with the source on the outside. An overlap of at least 40mm at the ends of
each film shall be required to ensure that the first and last location increment numbers
are common to successive films and to establish that no part of a weld has been
omitted.
17.5 Level of Quality
The quality level of Radiographic sensitivity required for radiographic inspection shall
be at least equivalent to the values in Fig. 6
17.6 Penetrameters
The image quality indicator (abbreviation : IQI) shall be used for the qualification of
the welding procedure and during normal line production. Radiographic sensitivity shall
be measured with the wire image quality indicator (Penetrameter). The penetrameter
shall be selected according to DIN54109 or ISO1027. For radiographs made with the
source on the outside, a penetrameter shall be placed on each side of the film with the
smaller wiere of the penetrameter turned towards the end of the film itself. When a
complete weld is radiographed in a single exposure using a source inside the piping,
four penetrameter approximately equally spaced around the circumference shall be
used. During the procedure qualification, IQI shall be placed both on the source side
and on the film side. The sensitivity obtained with IQI on the source side shall not be
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
less than the values shown in Fig. 6 of this specification.
The sensitivity limit may be considered to have been reached when the outline of the
IQI, its identification number and the wire of the required diameter show up clearly on
the radiograph.
The COMPANY may authorise use of types of IQI other than those planned, provided
that they conform with recognised standards and only if the CONTRACTOR is able to
demostrate that the minimum sensitivity level required is obtained. For this
demostration, a test shall be carried out comparing the IQI specified and the
CONTRACTOR's, to show up the identification number and other details of the
proposed IQI, which must be visible in the test radiograph.
17.7 Film Identification Markers
All films shall be clearly identified by lead numbers, letters, and/or markers. The image
of the markers shall appear on the films, without interfering with the interpretation.
These markers positions shall also be marked on the part to be radiographed and shall
be maintained during radiography.
17.8 Protection and care of film
17.8.1 All unexposed films shall be protected and stored properly as per the requirements of
API 1104 standard and ASTM E.94.
17.8.2 The exposed and unexposed film shall be protected from heat, light, dust and
moisture. Sufficient shielding shall be supplied to prevent exposure of film to damaging
radiation prior to and following the use of the film for radiographic exposure.
17.9 Re-radiography
17.9.1 The weld joints shall be re-radiographed in case of unsatisfactory quality of the
radiographs, at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.
17.9.2 All the repaired weld joints shall be re-radiographed at no extra cost to the COMPANY
in the same manner as that followed for the original welds. In addition, the repaired
weld areas shall be identified with the original identification number plus the letter R to
indicate the repair.
17.9.3 When evaluating repair film, radiographers shall compare each section (exposure) of
the weld with the original film to assure repair was correctly marked and original defect
removed.
17.9.4 The COMPANY will review prior to any repair of welds, all the radiographs of welds
which contain, according to the CONTRACTOR's interpretation, unacceptable defects.
The final disposition of all unacceptable welds shall be decided by the COMPANY.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
17.10 Qualification of Radiographers
17.10.1 Pipeline radiographers shall be qualified in accordance with the requirement of API
1104 and to the full satisfaction of COMPANY.
17.10.2 Certification of all the radiographers, qualified as per 16.10.1 above, shall be furnished
by the CONTRACTOR to the COMPANY before a radiographer will be permitted to
perform production radiography. The certificate record shall include :
i. Background and Experience Record

ii. Training Course Record
iii. Technical Examination Record
iv. Doctor's report on radiographer's Oaecuer 0-1 acquity eye test.
v. Date of qualification
17.10.3 The radiographers shall be required to qualify with each radiographic procedure they
use, prior to performing the work assigned to him in accordance with the specification.
17.11 Preservation of Radiographs
17.11.1 The radiographs shall be processed to allow storage of films without any discoloration
for at least three years. All the radiographs shall be presented in suitable folders for
preservation alongwith necessary documentation.
17.11.2 All radiographs shall become property of the COMPANY.
17.12 Equipment and Accessories
17.12.1 CONTRACTOR shall make necessary arrangement at his own expense, for providing
the radiographic equipment, radiographic film and all the accessories for carrying out
the radiographic examination for satisfactory and timely completion of the job.
17.12.2 For carrying out the mainline radiographic examination the CONTRACTOR shall be
equipped with suitable mobile/ stationary type dark rooms.
These shall have all the required facilities for film processing. Film viewer used shall be
equipped with the film illuminator that has a light source of sufficient intensity and
suitably controlled to allow viewing film densities upto 4.0 without damaging the film.
17.13 Radiation Protection
17.13.1 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the protection and personnel monitoring of
personnel with or near radiation sources.
17.13.2 The protection and monitoring shall comply with local regulations.
17.13.3 In view of visual hazards in the handling of Radioactive source of material,

CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for complying with all rules and regulations
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
set forth by Atomic Energy Commission or any other Government agency of India in
this regard and COMPANY shall not be responsible and shall be kept indemnified by the
CONTRACTOR for default (s) of whatever nature by the CONTRACTOR. Safety
equipment as considered adequate by the COMPANY for all necessary personnel shall
be made available for use and maintained for immediate and proper use by the
CONTRACTOR.
17.14 Display of Safety Instructions
17.14.1 The safety provisions shall be brought to the notice of all concerned by display on a
notice board at a prominent place at the work spot. The person responsible for the
"safety" shall be named by the CONTRACTOR.
17.15 Enforcement of Safety Regulations
17.15.1 To ensure effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating to safety
precautions, the arrangement made by CONTRACTOR shall be open to inspection by
COMPANY or its representatives.
17.16 First Aid and Industrial Injuries
17.16.1 CONTRACTOR shall maintain first aid facilities for its employees and sub-contractors.
17.16.2 CONTRACTOR shall make outside arrangements for ambulance service and for
treatment of industrial injuries. Names of those providing these services shall be
furnished to COMPANY prior to start of work and their telephone no. shall be posted
prominently in CONTRACTOR's field office.
17.16.3 All critical industrial injuries shall be reported promptly to the COMPANY and a copy of
CONTRACTOR's report covering each personal injury requiring the attention of
physician shall be furnished to the COMPANY.
17.17 No Exemption
17.17.1 Notwithstanding the above there is nothing in these to exempt the CONTRACTOR from
the operation of any other act or rules in force.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-I
Sheet 1 of 3
ELECTRODE QUALIFICATION TEST RECORD
A. Tested at (Site name) Date :
Manufacturer's Name :
Brand Name :
Batch Number & Size Tested :
Classification & Code :
Intended for Welding in Position :
In combination with (if any) :
Code of Reference :
(used for testing)
Special requirements (if any) :
B. All Weld Tensile Test
Base Material used :
Pre-heat temp. :
Postweld Heat Treatment Details :
Visual Examination :
Radiographic Examination Results :
Tensile Test Results :
Sl.No. Identification No. U.T.S. Yield Point Elongation
1.
2.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-I
Sheet 2 of 3
C. Impact Test Results
Test Temperature : Notch in :
Type of Specimens : Size of Specimens :

(Charpy)
Sl.No. Specimen No. Impact Valve Average

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D. Chemical Analysis Result
Electrode Size used :
Batch No. :
%C %S %P %SI %Mn %Cr %Ni %Mo Other
E. Fillet Weld Test Results
Welding Positions :
Base Materials :
Size of Electrode used :
Visual Inspection Results : 1)

2)
3)
Macro Test results :

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-I
Sheet 3 of 3
Fracture Test Results :
Remarks :
F. Other Test Results
1. Transverse Tensile Test :
In combination with :
Position of Welding :
Preheat Temperature :
Post Weld Heat Treatment :
Radiography :
Identification No. U.T.S. Fracture in Remarks
2. Guided Bend Test
Position ID No. Root, Face or Side Bend Remarks

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Any other Tests :
Conclusion :
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-II
Sheet 1 of 2
STRESS RELIEF HEAT TREATMENT PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
Name of the Heat-Treater :
Name of the Project : Specification Reference No.:
1. General Details
Name of the Equipment :
Name of the Assembly/ Part :
Assembly/ Part Drawing No. :
Material :
2. Furnace Details
Type of Heating : Gas/ Oil/ Elec. Res./ Induction Type of Heating

(Tick mark)
Capacity (Size) :
Maximum Temp.(°C) :
Method of Temp. :
Measurement
Atmosphere Control :
3. Heat Treatment Cycle Details
Changing Temp. °C :
Rate of Heating, °C/ Hr. :

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-II
Sheet 2 of 2
Soaking Temp. °C :
Soaking Time, Hrs. :
Rate of Cooling, °C/ Hr. :
Mode of Cooling :
4. Other Details, if any.
Notes :
The following documents shall be furnished alongwith the specifications :
i. Material Test Certificates
ii. Assembly/ Part Drawing.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-III
Sheet 1 of 3
FORMAT FOR WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION (WPS)
________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name ________________________ By __________________________________
Welding Procedure Specification No. _____________ Date __________ Supporting PQR No. (S)
_________ Revision No. ________________ Date ________________
Welding Process (es) _________________________ Type (s) _____________________________
(Automatic, Manual, Machines or Semi Auto)
________________________________________________________________________________
JOINTS
Joint Design ____________________________________________________________

Backing (Yes) _________________________________________(No) ___________________
Backing Material (Type) _________________________________________
Sketches Production Drawings. Weld Symbols Written
Description should show the general arrangement of the parts to be welded. Where applicable, the
root specing and the details of weld groove may be specified.
(At the option of the Manufacturer sketches may be attached to illustrate joint design weld layers
and bead sequence e.g. for notch toughness procedures, for multiple process procedures, etc.)
________________________________________________________________________________
BASE METALS
P.No. ____________ Group No. ____________ to P. No. ____________ Group No. ___________
OR
Specification type and grade _______________________________________________________
to Specification type and grade ________________________________________________
OR
Chern. Analysis and Mech. Prop. ____________________________________________________
to Chern. Analysis and Mech. Prop. ___________________________________________
Thickness Range :
Base Metal: Groove ____________________________________ Fillet ________________
Deposited Weld Metal: Groove ___________________________ Fillet ________________
Pipe Dia Range : Groove : _____________________________________ Fillet ________________
Other ______________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-III
Sheet 2 of 3
FILLER METALS
F.No. ___________________________________________ Other _____________________________

A.No. ___________________________________________ Other _____________________________
Spec. No. (SFA) _____________________________________________________________________
A WS No. (Class) ____________________________________________________________________
Size of filler metals __________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
(Electrodes, Cold Wire, Hot Wire etc.)
Electrode-Flux (Class) ________________________________________________________________

Flux Trade Name ________________________________________________________________
Consumable Inset ________________________________________________________________
Each base metal/filler metal combination should be recorded individually.
WPS NO. _____________________ Rev. _______________
POSITIONS : POSTWELD ED HEAT TREATMENT
Position (s) of Groove ______________________ Temperature Range ___________________
Welding Progression: UP _____ Down ____ Time Range _________________________
Position (s) of Fillet _______________________
PREHEAT GAS
Shielding Gas (es) ___________________
Preheat Temp. Min. ___________________ Percent Composition (mixtures) _________
___________________________________
Interpass Temp. Max. ___________________ Flow Rate __________________________
Gas Backing ________________________
Preheat Maintenance ___________________
Trailing Shielding Gas Composition _______
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Current AC or DC__________________________ Polarity _______________________

Amps (Range) ____________________________ Volts (Range) _______________________
(Amps and volts range should be recorded for each electrode size, position, and thickness, etc. This
information may be listed in a tabular form similar to that shown below).
Tungsten Electrode Size and Type ______________________________________________
(Pure Tungsten, 2% Ceriated, etc)
Mode of Metal Transfer for GMAW ______________________________________________

(Spray arc, short circuiting arc, etc.)
Electrode Wire feed speed range _________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-III
Sheet 3 of 3
TECHNIQUE
String or Weave Bead ___________________________________________________________

Orifice or Gas Cup Size___________________________________________________________
Initial and Interpass Cleaning (Brushing, Grinding, etc.) _________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Method of Back Gouging ___________________________________________________________

Oscillation _______________________________________________________________________
Contact Tube to Work Distance ___________________________________________________________

Multiple or Single Pass (per side) ___________________________________________________________
Multiple or Single Electrodes ___________________________________________________________
Travel Speed (Range) ___________________________________________________________
Peening _____________________________________________________________________________
Other _______________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Weld Process Filler Metal Current Volt Travel Others

Layer(s) Class Dia Type Amp. Range Speed
Polarity Range Range
e.g.
Remarks,
comments,
Hot wire
Addition,
Technique
Torch Angle,
etc.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-IV
Sheet 1 of 3
FORMAT FOR PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD (PQR)
RECORD ACTUAL CONDITIONS USED TO WELD TEST COUPON
________________________________________________________________________________________
Company Name __________________________________________________________________________
Procedure Qualification Record No. _____________________________________ Date _________________
WPS No. _____________________________
Welding Process (es) _____________________________________________________________________

Types (Manual, Automatic, Semi-Auto) _______________________________________________________
JOINTS
Groove Design of Test Coupon
(For combination qualification the deposited weld metal thickness shall be recorded for each Filler metal or process weld)
________________________________________________________________________________________
BASE METALS POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT

Material Sepc. ____________________________ Temperature _____________________________
Type of Grade ____________________________ Time ___________________________________
P.No. __________ to P.No. _____________________ Other ___________________________________
Thickness of Test Coupon _____________________ ________________________________________
Diameter of Test Coupon _____________________ ________________________________________
Other __________ ___________________________ ________________________________________
FILLER METALS GAS

Weld Metal Analysis A No. _____________________ Type of Gas on Gases _____________________
Size of Filler Metal ___________________________ Composition of Gas Mixture _________________
Filler Metal E.No. ___________________________ Other ___________________________________
SF A Specification ___________________________ ________________________________________
A WS Classification ___________________________ ________________________________________
Other __________ ___________________________ ________________________________________
POSITION ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Position of Groove ___________________________ Current _________________________________
Weld Progression (Uphill, Downhill) ______________ Polarity _________________________________
Other __________ ___________________________ Amps. _________________________________
Tungsten Electrode Size ___________________
Other __________________________________
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-IV
Sheet 2 of 3
PREHEAT TECHNIQUE
Phreheat Temp. ___________________________ Travel Speed ___________________________
Interpass Temp. ___________________________ String or Weave Bead ______________________
Oscillation _______________________________
Multipass or Single Pass (per side) ___________
Single or Multiple Electrodes ________________
Other __________________________________
GUIDED BEND TESTS
Type of Figure No. Result
TOUGHNESS TESTS
Specimen Notch Notch Test Impact Lateral Exp. Drop Weight

No. Location Type Temp. Value % Shear Mils Break No Break
FILLET WELD TEST
Result - Satisfactory: Yes _______ No _______ Penetration into Parent Metal: Yes ______ No. ______
Marco – Results _______________________________________________________________________
OTHER TESTS
Type of Test _______________________________________________________________________________

Deposit Analysis ____________________________________________________________________________
Other _____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Welder's Name ___________________ Clock No. __________________ Stamp No. _____________________

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-IV
Sheet 3 of 3
Test Conducted by _______________________ Laboratory Test No. _______________________
We certified that the statements in this record are correct and test welds were prepared, welded and tested in
accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Code.
Date : ___________ Manufacturer : ____________________
By : _____________________________
(Detail of record of tests are illustrative only and may be moulded to conform to the type and number of tests
required by codes and specifications).
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-V
Sheet 1 of 2
FORMAT FOR MANUFACTURER'S RECORD FOR WELDER OR WELDING OPERATOR

QUALIFICATION TESTS
Welder Name ________________ Check No. __________________ Stamp. No. __________________

_____________________________________________________________________________________
Using WPS No. ________________ Rev. ________________
The above welder is qualified for the following ranges
Variable Record Actual Values Qualification Range

Used in Qualification
Process __________________ __________________
Process Type __________________ __________________
Backing (metal,
Weld metal, flux, etc) __________________ __________________
Material Spec. _________ to _________ _________ to _________
Thickness
Groove __________________ __________________
Filler __________________ __________________
Diameter
Groove __________________ __________________
Filler __________________ __________________
Filler Metal
Spec. No. __________________ __________________
Class __________________ __________________
F. No. __________________ __________________
Position __________________ __________________
Weld Progression __________________ __________________
Gas Type __________________ __________________
Electrical Characteristics
Current ________________ __________________
Polarity __________________ __________________
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-V
Sheet 2 of 2
Guided Bend Test Results
Type and Fig. No. Result
Radiographic Test Results

For alternative qualification of groove welds by radiography
Radiographic Results _______________________________________________________________
Fillet Weld Test Results
Fracture Test (Describe the location, nature and size of any crack of tearing of the specimen _____
Length and Per Cent of Defects _________________________ inches _____________%
Macro Test – Fusion _______________________________________________________________
Appearance - Fillet Size (ing) ______________x___________ Convexity or Concavity ___________
Test Conducted by _____________________________ Laboratory - Test No. _________________
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared.
Welded and tested in accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Code.
Date ___________________ Organization __________________

By ___________________________
(Details of record tests are illustrative only and may be modified to conformation to the type &
number of tests required by the Code).
Note: Any essential variables in addition to those above shall be recorded.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-VI
Sheet 1 of 1
RADIOGRAPHIC PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD
FOR PIPE WELDING
1. Location
2. Date of Testing
3. Name of the Contractor / Agency
4. Material : Carbon steel / Alloy Steel / Stainless Steel
4.A Technique: DWSI / SWSI / DWDI
5. Diameter & Thickness:
6. Type of Weld Joint:
7. Radiation Source:
8. Intensifying Screens/Lead Screens:
9. Geometric Relationship:
10. Limit of Film Coverage:
11. Film Type and Make:
12. Exposure Time:
13. Processing:
14. Density:
15. Sensitivity:
16.* Type of penetrameter:

(Source side)
17.* Type of penetrameter:

(Film side)
Signature of Contractor / Agency with Seal

Approval of MECON’s Inspector
* Ref. Para regarding recommended practice on placement of penetrameters Article 22, SE 142, ASME
Sec. V.
* For "Random Radiography" lines placement of penetrameters as per Article 2, ASME, Sec. V is
permitted.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-VII
Sheet 1 of 1
WELDERS IDENTIFICATION CARD
Name :
Photograph
Identification :
Date of Testing :
Process :
Diameter and Thickness :
Thickness Range Qualified :
Diameter Range Qualified :
WPS No. :
Welding Position & Progression :
Type of welding consumables used :
Valid Till :
Approved by : Employer's Signature with seal

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPELINES
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-VIII
Sheet 1 of 1
Type of Source and Films to be used for RADIOGRAPHY
NOMINAL WALL SHOP WELDED JOINTS IN-SITU WELDS

THICKNESS (T) IN mm SOURCE FILM : CEN Class SOURCE FILM : CEN Class
T> 19 All Materials Gamma Ray C5 Gamma Ray C5
8T< 19 Carbon Steel Gamma Ray C4 Gamma Ray C4
All other Gamma Ray C3 Gamma Ray C3
materials
<8 Carbon Steel Gamma Ray C3 Gamma Ray C3/C1
Other than
Inspection
Class IV *
All other X-Ray C4 X-ray with C4 or Equivalent to be
materials and used. Gamma Ray (Se 75 Source
Carbon Steel only) with C3/C2 Equivalent may
of Inspection be allowed only if in the
Class IV * assessment of the owner's
inspector, Joints are inaccessible
for X-ray equipment and
radiographic sensitivity is achieved.
Note: Integral to above table
1) Films slower than the above may have to be used, if required radiographic sensitivity is not achieved
consistently.
* Piping classes where 100% RT is specified. Refer Std. Spec. No. ____________.
COMPARISON OF FILMS FROM DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS
CEN Classification KODAK AGFA FUJI

--- CX D8 ---
C5 AA400 D7 IX 100
C4 T200 D5 IX80
C3 MX125 D4 IX50
C2 M100 D3 ---
CI DR50 D2 IX25
--- SR** --- ---
* * Special films, extremely fine grain & very high resolution

WELDING SPECIFICATION CHARTS TO SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING OF
ONSHORE GAS PIPELINES NO. : MEC/S/05/21/02
10” Dia THK. RANGE : 6.4-11.1 mm
PIPES API 5L Gr X-42 PSL 2 LINE PIPE
MATERIAL FITTINGS -
SPECIFICATIONS FLANGES -
OTHERS -
BASE METAL ‘P’ NO 1

GROOVE JOINTS
BUTT OTHER THAN BUTT
WELDING PROCESS FILLER PASS :
ROOT PASS : SMAW ROOT PASS : N.A. FILLER PASS : N.A.
SMAW
FILLET JOINTS / SOCKET JOINTS : N.A.
GROOVE JOINTS
HOT, FILLER & CAP
ROOT PASS : E6010 ROOT PASS : N.A.
WELDING MATERIAL PASS FILLER PASS : N.A.
E7010
BACKING RING : N.A. CONSUMABLE INSERT : N.A.
JOINT PREPARATION API 1104 / ASME SEC. –IX
GASES PURGING : SHIELDING :

GAS COMPOSITION PURGING : SHIELDING :
PREHEATING PREHEAT TEMP: As Applicable POST HEATING :
CONTINUITY OF WELDING AND PREHEAT : REFER TO SPECIFICATION
HOLDING TEMP : HOLDING TIME :
POST WELD HEAT
RATE OF HEATING: MIN. HOLDING TIME :
TREATMENT
METHOD OF COOLING : RATE OF COOLING :
MECHANICAL CHARPY ‘V’ NOTCH VALUE : MIN: 27 J AVERAGE :

PROPERTY AT TEMPERATURE : 0°C or Design temperature whichever is less
REQUIREMENTS HARDNESS :
CODE OF FABRICATION : API 1104 / ASME SEC. –IX
Technical Notes :
1. The Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) shall be examined with radiography by X-ray / Gamma.
WELDING SPECIFICATION CHART Specification No. : Rev.

BHAGYANAGAR GAS LIMITED MEC.WSC _ML 01 0
MECON Limited
PIPING CLASS: B1A
PIPES ASTM A106 GR.B, API 5L GR X-42 PSL2

MATERIAL
SPECIFICATIONS FITTINGS ASTM A105, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, ASTM A234 RG.WPB-W, MSS SP-75 GR.
FLANGES ASTM A105
OTHERS -

GROOVE JOINTS SINGLE SIDE BEVEL
WELDING PROCESS
ROOT PASS : SMAW FILLER PASS : SMAW ROOT PASS : SMAW FILLER PASS : SMAW
FILLET JOINTS / SOCKET JOINTS : SMAW
GROOVE JOINTS
ROOT PASS : ROOT PASS :
FILLER & CAP PASS FILLER & CAP PASS
WELDING MATERIAL ER6010 ER6010
E7018-1 E7018-1
FILLET JOINTS / SOCKET JOINTS : E7018-1

PREHEATING / INTER PREHEAT TEMP 10 -100 Deg POST HEATING : NA
PASS INTERPASS : Max 200 Deg
POST WELD HEAT
TREATMENT

PROPERTY AT TEMPERATURE : 0°C or Design Pressure whichever is lower
TECHNICAL NOTES :

BHAGYANAGAR GAS LIMITED MEC.WSC_AG 01 0
MECON Limited
WELDING SPECIFICATION CHARTS TO SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING OF
ONSHORE GAS PIPELINES NO. : MEC/S/05/21/02
6” & 4” Dia THK. RANGE : 6.4-11.1 mm
PIPES API 5L Gr B PSL 2 LINE PIPE
MATERIAL FITTINGS -
SPECIFICATIONS FLANGES -
OTHERS -

GROOVE JOINTS
WELDING PROCESS FILLER PASS :
ROOT PASS : SMAW ROOT PASS : N.A. FILLER PASS : N.A.
SMAW
GROOVE JOINTS
HOT, FILLER & CAP
ROOT PASS : E6010 ROOT PASS : N.A.
WELDING MATERIAL PASS FILLER PASS : N.A.
E7010

PREHEATING PREHEAT TEMP: As Applicable POST HEATING :
POST WELD HEAT
TREATMENT

PROPERTY AT TEMPERATURE : 0°C or Design temperature whichever is less
Technical Notes :
1. The Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) shall be examined with radiography by X-ray / Gamma.

BHAGYANAGAR GAS LIMITED MEC.WSC _ML 02 0
MECON Limited
PIPING CLASS: B1A
PIPES ASTM A106 GR. B, API 5L GR X-42 PSL2

MATERIAL
SPECIFICATIONS FITTINGS ASTM A105, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, ASTM A234 RG.WPB-W, MSS SP-75 GR.
FLANGES ASTM A105
OTHERS -

GROOVE JOINTS SINGLE SIDE BEVEL
WELDING PROCESS
ROOT PASS : SMAW FILLER PASS : SMAW ROOT PASS : SMAW FILLER PASS : SMAW
FILLET JOINTS / SOCKET JOINTS : SMAW
GROOVE JOINTS
ROOT PASS : ROOT PASS :
FILLER & CAP PASS FILLER & CAP PASS
WELDING MATERIAL ER6010 ER6010
E7018-1 E7018-1
FILLET JOINTS / SOCKET JOINTS : E7018-1

PREHEATING / INTER PREHEAT TEMP 10 -100 Deg POST HEATING : NA
PASS INTERPASS : Max 200 Deg
POST WELD HEAT
TREATMENT

PROPERTY AT TEMPERATURE : 0°C or Design Pressure whichever is lower
TECHNICAL NOTES :

BHAGYANAGAR GAS LIMITED MEC.WSC_AG 02 0
MECON Limited
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF ONSHORE
PIPELINE
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF MEC/S/05/21/03 REVISION : 0

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE
3.0 GENERAL
4.0 HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE MANUAL
5.0 TEST PRESSURE
6.0 EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION
7.0 PROCEDURES
8.0 ACCEPTANCE
9.0 TERMINATION
10.0 TEST REPORT
11.0 MEASUREMENTS
12.0 CALCULATION
13.0 PRECAUTIONS DURING THE TEST
14.0 PRESERVATION OF PIPELINE
TABLES
TABLE A DIFFERENCE BETWEEN WATER THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR AND STEEL THERMAL
EXPANSION FACTOR.
FIGURES
FIG.1 WATER COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR VS PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE.
(Shalini Singh) (Sunil Kumar) (A.K. Johri) Nov. 2008

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the minimum requirements of supply, works and operations to be
performed by CONTRACTOR for hydrostatic testing of cross-country steel pipelines
transporting hydrocarbons in liquid or gaseous phase under high pressure. This specification
does not cover the requirements of drying/precommissioning of the tested pipelines. This
specification shall be read in conjunction with the conditions of all specifications and
documents included in the CONTRACT between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR.
2.1 Reference has been made in this specification to the latest edition/ revision of the following
codes, standards and specifications.
a) ANSI B 31.8 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.

b) ANSI B 31.4 Liquid Petroleum Transportation Piping Systems.
c) API RP 1110 Pressure Testing of Liquid Petroleum Pipelines.
d) ASME Sec. VIII Div-1 Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code.
e) OISD 226 Natural Gas Transmission Pipelines and City Gas Distribution
Networks
2.2 In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and that of the above
referred coded, standards, and specifications, the requirements of this specifications shall
govern.
2.3 For the purpose of this specification the following definitions shall hold:
- the words 'shall' and 'Must' are mandatory;
- the words 'Should', 'May', and 'Will' are non-mandatory, advisory or recommended.
3.0 GENERAL
3.1 Hydrostatic test shall be performed on the entire length of the pipeline. Hydrostatic test shall
be performed in accordance with approved Hydrostatic Test Diagrams for each test section.
The maximum length of each test section shall not exceed 50 kms.
3.2 For pipeline sections which in COMPANY's opinion, once installed would require an inordinate
amount of effort for repair in case of a leak, a provisional pre-test shall be conducted.
However, after installation, such pretested sections shall be tested again alongwith the entire
pipeline.
3.3 Hydrostatic test shall commence only after mechanical and civil works completion, i.e., all
welds have been accepted and the pipeline has been laid and backfilled according to the
specifications. Hydrostatic test shall include those sections which have been previously tested,
viz. Rail/ road crossing, major water crossings including test on banks and in place after
installation, and scraper traps at the terminals. CONTRACTOR shall perform all works required
for hydrostatic testing after obtaining prior written approval from the COMPANY.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
3.4 The pipeline shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of ANSI
B 31.8 or ANSI B 31.4, OISD 226 as applicable, and requirements laid down in this
specification.
4.0 HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE MANUAL
CONTRACTOR shall prepare for COMPANY's approval a hydrostatic test procedure manual. The
procedure shall strictly comply with the requirements of this specification and shall be
submitted to COMPANY for approval well in advance. The procedure manual shall include all
temporary materials & equipment, but not be limited to the following items:
a) For the systems to be tested, a diagram indicating all fittings, vents, valves, temporary
connections, relevant elevations and ratings. The diagram shall also indicate injection
locations and intake and discharge lines.
b) Estimated amount of test water, water sources, including required concentration of

corrosion inhibitors and additives, procedure for inhibitor injection and control of
concentration.
c) Filling and flushing procedures, including a complete description of all proposed

equipment and instruments (including spares), their location and set-up.
d) The type and sequence of pigs and the pig tracking systems for cleaning and removal
of air pockets. Pig inspection procedures, including procedure to be followed in case
the calliper pig indicates damage.
e) Procedures for levelling and stabilization after filling and for pressurization and to allow
for temperature stabilization.
f) Pressure testing procedure including a complete description of all proposed equipment

and instruments (including spares), their location and set-up, and proposed system for
observation and recording of data during the pressure test.
g) Procedure for detection and location of leaks.
h) Procedure for dewatering the pipeline section(s) after testing, including a complete
description of all proposed equipment and instruments, (including spares), their
location and set-up, the type and sequence of pigs and the pig tracking system along
with the pig specifications.
i) Forms for recording the test data.
5.0 TEST DURATION AND PRESSURE
5.1 The duration of hydrostatic test shall be a minimum of 24 hours after stabilization and the test
pressure shall be as indicated in the approved hydrostatic test diagram.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
5.2 Unless specified otherwise in the CONTRACT, the hydrostatic test pressure shall be as follows :
For pipeline handling hydrocarbon in gaseous phase :
a) 1.25 times the design pressure for pipeline located in Class-1 and Class-2 locations as
per ASME B 31.8.
b) 1.4 times the design pressure for pipeline located in Class-3 and Class-4 locations as
per ASME B 31.8.
6.0 EQUIPMENT AND INSTRUMENTATION
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary equipment for performing the work as stated
in cleaning, flushing, filling, levelling, stabilizing, testing and dewatering procedures. This
shall include the following :
a) Pigs for filling , cleaning and gauging including
- Cleaning pigs with spring loaded steel wire brushes except for internal coated pipes. In
this case pigs to be provided with nylon / polyurethane brushes.
- Four cup batching pigs
- Calliper pigs with gauge plate diameter equal to 95% of the heavy wall pipe in the pipe
sections. Gauging pig fitted with gauge plate.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient number of pigs including spares.
b) Fill pumps : The CONTRACTOR shall determine the type and number of fill pumps
in order to guarantee the following :
Differential head 20% greater than the maximum required.

Flow rate : 400m3 / hr. min. ; 1000m3 / hr. max.
If a single pump is used, a standby unit must be available.
c) Variable speed positive displacement pumps equipped with a stroke counter to

pressurise the line with a known stroke and capable of exceeding the maximum test
pressure by at least 20 bar.
d) Two positive displacement meters to measure the volume of water used for filling
the line. These meters shall be provided with a callibration certificate not older than
one month.
e) Portable tanks of sufficient size to provide a continuous supply of water to the pump
during pressurizing.
f) Bourdon pressure gauges of suitable pressure range and accuracy.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
g) Dead weight testers with an accuracy of 0.01 bar measuring in increments of 0.05 bar
provided with a calibration certificate not older than one month.
h) Two 48 hours recording pressure gauges tested with charts and ink gauges tested with
dead weight tester prior to use. These shall be installed atp the test heads.
i) Pressure recording charts.
j) Two temperature recorders for fill water.
k) Thermocouples for measuring the pipe wall temperature.
l) Two laboratory thermometers 0°C to 60°C range, accuracy ± 0.1 degree to be used in
thermowells.
m) Means to measure the volume of water necessary to drop the line pressure by 0.5 bar
(container on scales or graduated cylinder).
n) Injection facilities to inject additives into the test medium in the required proportions.
o) Communication equipment suitable for a continuous connection between the beginning

and the end of the test section and with the inspection team along the line, in
accordance with the requirements of local Authorities.
p) The temporary scraper traps shall be installed according to the testing sections fixed in
the test procedure manual. Proper piping and valuing arrangements shall be available
to allow launching and receiving of each pig independently.
The test heads shall be sized in conformity with ASME specification Section VIII,
Division 2 with particular reference to Appendices 4 and 5.
q) Thermocouples for assuring the temperature of the pipe wall shall be installed on the
pipeline to be tested:
- 1 thermocouple at about 500m distance from the pumping head.

- 1 thermocouple every 2500m of the pipe the spacing may be increased to maximum
5000m depending on the terrain and nature of sub-soil along the alignment of section.
- 1 thermocouple at about 500m distance from the terminal head.
The spacing may be increased to maximum 5000 metre depending on the terrain and nature
of sub soil along the alignment of test section.
Thermocouples shall be attached on the external surface of the pipe after removal of external
coating and shall be adequately protected and COMPANY's coating instructions shall be
followed.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
7.0 PROCEDURES
7.1 Equipment and/or parts which need not or must not be subjected to the test pressures, must
be disconnected or separated from the pipeline to be tested.
7.2 If the difference of minimum and maximum atmosphere temperature should cause thermal
instability on the pipe section directly exposed to atmospheric condition, the scraper traps and
above ground pipeline shall be properly protected.
The pipeline test shall exclude long segments of line exposed to atmospheric conditions, viz.
Aerial lengths on piers, suspension bridges, etc., which shall be tested separately.
7.3 The test medium shall be soft non-aggressive water furnished by the CONTRACTOR. The
water to be used shall be filtered, shall not be contaminated, and free from sand or silt.
CONTRACTOR shall submit laboratory test reports of water used for testing. The possible use
of sea water shall be subject to its degree of cleanliness, the possibility of obtaining a pre
determined salinity neutralization and the use of corrosion inhibitors, this at the sole discretion
of COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall provide COMPANY approved corrosion inhibitors, oxygen
scavengers and bactericides to be added to the test water. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish
and install all temporary piping which may be necessary to connect from source of water to its
pumps and manifolds/ tankage.
7.4 Before filling operation the CONTRACTOR shall clean the pipeline by air driven pigs provided
with spring loaded bushes and chisels to remove all mill scale rust/ sand from the inside of
pipe section. For this purpose temporary headers for air cleaning shall be attached to the
pipeline. The number of pig runs is depending upon the cleaning results and shall be
determined by the COMPANY at site.
7.5 “After cleaning the pipeline by using air and acceptance by Company, gauging shall be carried
out by using gauging pig. The gauge plate diameter shall be equal to 95% of inside diameter
of the heaviest wall pipe in the test section. While computing the ID of heaviest wall pipe,
pipe manufacturing tolerance shall not be considered. A 10mm thick aluminium plate shall be
used for making gauge plate.
After receipt of gauging pig at the other end, the gauge plate shall be inspected in the
presence of Company representative. A deformed, bent or severally nicked plate or damaged
pig shall be evidence of gauging pig run failure and the same is not acceptable to company.
In such cases the Contractor shall repair and rectify the line and repeat the gauging pig run to
the satisfaction and approval of the Company Representative. Any obstruction and/ or faults
such as dents, buckles, flat spots, etc. analysed and noted during gauging pig run shall be
located and any necessary repair work shall be performed to rectify the same to the
satisfaction of the Company. A written approval shall be obtained from Company regarding
successful completion of gauging pig run.
After acceptance of gauging operation, air header shall be cut and removed. Pre-tested test
headers loaded with three numbers of four cup batching pig shall be welded to test Section.
Un-inhibited water equal to 10% of the volume of test section shall be introduced in front of
the first pig. The first pig shall be launched by introducing about 1.5 km un-inhibited water.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
Then the second pig shall be launched by pumping the inhibited water till the second pig is
received at the other end. The thermal stablisation and pressurisation can now the started”.
7.6 Thermal Stabilization
After a check has been made to confirm if the pressure has attained at least 1 bar (g) on the
highest section, thermal stabilization can be started.
Thermal equilibrium between the pipeline and environment shall be checked through the
thermocouples installed on the pipeline.
Temperature readings shall be made at 2 hours-intervals. Thermal stabilization shall be

considered to have been achieved when a difference not higher than 1°C is attained between
the average values of the last two readings. Thermal stabilization completion shall be
approved by COMPANY.
7.7 Pressurisation
Pressurisation shall be performed in the presence of COMPANY at moderate and constant rate
not exceeding 2 bars/min. One pressure recording gauge shall be installed in parallel with the
dead weight tester. Volume required to reach the test pressure shall be recorded periodically
throughout the pressurization as follows:
- each 5 bar increments up to 80% of test pressure as recorded by the dead weight
tester;
- each 2 bar increment between 80% to 90% of test pressure as recorded by the dead
weight tester;
- each 0.5 bar increment between 90% of test pressure to full test pressure as recorded
by the dead weight tester.
The pressurizing shall be cycled according to the following sequence:
a) Pressurize to 50% of test pressure, hold pressure for 1 hour.

b) Drop pressure to static head of test section at test head.
c) Pressurize to 75% of test pressure, hold pressure for 1 hour.
d) Drop pressure to static head of test section at the test head.
e) Pressurize to test pressure.
During the pressurization to each test pressure, two tests shall be carried out for the
calculation of air volume in the pipeline under test.
In case, during the hold pressure periods indicated above, a decrease in pressure is observed,
the operations shall not be repeated more than twice, after which the line shall not be
considered capable of test, until the CONTRACTOR has isolated and eliminated the cause for
the lack of water tightness.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
7.8 Air Volume Calculation
In order to check the presence of air in the pipeline, two separate consecutive pressure
lowering of 0.5 bar shall be carried out.
For calculation of air in the pipeline the second pressure lowering shall be used, and the
relevant drained water shall be accurately measured (V1). This amount measured shall be
compared to the theoretical amount (Vp) corresponding to the pressure lowering that has been
carried out, by using the procedure outlined in clause 12.1 of this specification.
If no air is present in the length under test:
V1
--- = 1
Vp
In order that the above ratio is acceptable, it shall not differ from 1 by more than 6% (i.e.
1.06).
If the air found in the pipeline is within the above established tolerance, then the pressurizing
can continue. If the ratio V1 / Vp exceeds 1.06, the hydrostatic testing cannot go on and
additional pig passages shall be performed to remove the air pockets.
The test shall be repeated as per the above procedure until above estimated tolerances are
satisfied. The pressurizing can then continue, to reach the value of test pressure.
7.9 Testing
After the section has been pressurized and the air volume test has given acceptable results the
test pressure shall be held for a minimum of 24 hours after stabilization. After temperature
and pressure has stabilized, the injection pump shall be disconnected and all connections at
the test heads shall be checked for leakage. The pressure recorders shall then be started with
the charts in a real time orientation for continuous recording throughout the test.
During the testing period the following measurements shall be recorded :
- every one hour pressure measurements form dead weight testers.

- every two hours the ambient temperature and the pipe temperature at the
thermocouples.
All data shall be recorded on appropriate forms attached to the hydrostatic test procedure
manual. Care shall be taken that the maximum test pressures are not exceeded.
Bleed-off water shall be accurately measured and recorded.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
8.0 ACCEPTANCE
8.1 The hydrostatic test shall be considered as passed if pressure has kept a constant value
throughout the test duration, except for change due to temperature effects. Such change shall
be evaluated as described under clause 12.2 of this specification.
The pressure change value as a function of temperature change shall be algebraically added to
the pressure value as read on the meters. The pressure value thus adjusted shall be compared
with the initial value and the test shall be considered as acceptable if the difference is less
than or equal to 0.3 bar. In case of doubt the testing period shall be extended by 24 hours.
8.2 If test section fails to maintain the specified test pressure after isolation, CONTRACTOR shall
determine by search the location of leakage or failure. All leaks and failures within the pipe
wall or weld seam shall be repaired by replacement of entire joint or joints in which leakage or
failure occurs. In circumferential welds the method of repair shall be determined by the
COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall comply with instructions of the COMPANY whether to replace
a section of the line pipe that includes the line leak or whether to repair the circumferential
weld. This repair should however meet the requirements of 'Specification for Welding Pipelines
and Related Facilities'. Where failure occur in pipeline field bends, bends shall be replaced with
same degree of bends. After completion of repairs, the hydrostatic test shall be repeated in
full, as per this specification.
8.3 The cost of repairs or replacements, followed by refilling and repressurizing the line, due to
poor workmanship, shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. In the event of leaks or failures
resulting form faulty COMPANY furnished materials, CONTRACTOR shall be reimbursed for
furnishing all labour, equipment, materials, except those materials furnished by the COMPANY,
and transportation necessary to repair and repressurize the section of the pipeline to the
pressure at the time of recognition of leak or line failure. CONTRACTOR shall be entitled for
compensation as per the provisions of the CONTRACT. All work of reinstalling line pipe, to
replace pipe failures shall be done in accordance with the relevant specification included in the
CONTRACT.
8.4 CONTRACTOR shall haul and stockpile all damaged and defective pipes to storage locations
designated by the COMPANY. All cracks and splice resulting from failures shall be coated with
an application of grease to preserve the characteristics of failures from corrosion. Joint of
failed pipes shall be marked with paint, with a tag indicating failure details, date and location
of failure and pressure at which failure occurred.
9.0 TERMINATION
After the positive results of testing and collection of all data the test shall be terminated upon
written approval given by the COMPANY.
9.1 CONTRACTOR shall dewater the tested line as per the following requirement after test
acceptance.
The dewatering shall be carried out by using four cup pigs and foam pigs driven by
compressed air. The detailed dewatering procedure shall be developed by the CONTRACTOR
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
in such a way as to provide adequate control of pigs during dewatering. Pigs and equipment
required for dewatering the line shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR and shall be approved in
advance by the COMPANY. Four cup pigs shall first be passed through the line to displace the
water. Foam pigs shall then be passed in order to complete the line dewatering.
CONTRACTOR shall use a number of foam pigs, each in different colors/ numbered for this
purpose. The line shall be considered dewatered when a negligible amount of water is flushed
out by the last foam pig and approval is given by the COMPANY.
9.2 During dewatering, care shall be taken to properly dispose the discharging water in order to
avoid pollution, damages to fields under cultivation and/or existing structures and interference
with the traffic. Before start of dewatering and disposal of hydrotest water, a procedure for
treatment of inhibited water to prevent pollution shall be submitted by contractor to owner/
consultant for review and approval.
9.3 Upon completion of the testing and dewatering operation, any provisional traps for pigs and all
other temporary installation relating to the test shall be removed. Subsequently the individual
sections of the line already tested shall be joined in accordance with the requirements of
relevant specifications issued for the purpose.
10.0 TEST REPORT
A complete report signed by CONTRACTOR and the COMPANY shall be submitted upon
completion of the hydrostatic test for each test section.
This report shall contain as a minimum:
- the cleaning, flushing, filling and testing procedures used;
- schematic layout of cleaning, filling and testing facilities;
- instruments calibration certificates;
- a profile of the pipeline that shows the test sites, all instrument and injection
connections;
- pipe filling logs and records;
- additive specification, required concentration and additive injection records;
- pig specifications;
- pig inspection records including photographs of the damages;
- records of gauging pig survey and photographs;
- pressurization and stabilization records;
- pressure and temperature recording charts with appropriate information inscribed

thereon;
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
- temperature data along the pipeline;
- dead weight tester logs and recording;
- air volume calculations;
- pressure change due to temperature change calculations;
- environmental data;
- depressurization logs and records;
- dewatering procedure and schematic layout of relevant facilities;
- dewatering logs and records;
- records and photograph of all leaks.
11.0 MEASUREMENTS
11.1 Water Amount Measurement
The water volume added to the section to be tested shall be measured during the filling stage
through a positive displacement meter (a turbine meter may also be used). In the calculation,
as per clause 12.1 of this specification, use shall be made of the geometrical volume of the
section in question.
11.2 Pressure Measurement
Pressure shall be measured with a dead weight tester with an accuracy of 0.01 bar that shall
permit readings of at least 0.05 bar.
During the test the pressure shall be recorded by means of a pressure recorder featuring the
following specifications:
Accuracy : ± 0.1% of the full-scale value
Recording : continuous on tape or disk, graph width 100mm
Feed : 20mm/h for tape diagrams, 7.5°/h for disk diagrams
Recording : to be such as to record pressure between 50% and 90% of the diagram
width.
The pressure recorder shall be checked by means of dead weight tester at the beginning,
during and at the end of the hydrostatic test.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
A pressure gauge tested with dead weight tester shall be connected in parallel to the dead
weight tester at the test head.
11.3 Temperature Measurements
Water temperature shall be taken at every 2 hours through the thermocouple that have been
installed on the pipe wall along the section under test on the pipe wall.
Further the temperature measurement shall be taken :
- during the filling operation

- during the thermal stabilization stage
- during the hydrostatic test
The thermocouple’s sensitivity shall enable temperature readings with an accuracy of ±0.2°C.
b) Water temperature shall also be measured on the pump delivery by means of a

recording thermometer (temperature recorder) throughout the filling stage.
The recording thermometer shall have the following features :
Accuracy ± 1% of the scale range
Scale - 10° to + 40° C
Recording: Continuous on tape or disk, diagram within 100mm
Feed : 20mm/h for tape diagrams, 7.5°/h for disk diagrams.
c) Ground temperature shall be taken by measuring pipe temperature at the

thermocouple prior to starting the filling operation.
d) Environmental temperature shall be recorded from the beginning of pressurization to

the end of the test by means of a recording thermometer featuring the following
characteristics:
Accuracy ± 1% of the scale range
Scale - 0° to + 60° C
Recording: Continuous on tape or disk, diagram width 100mm
Feed : 20mm/h for tape diagrams, 7.5°/h for disk diagrams.
12.0 CALCULATIONS
12.1 The theoritical water amount that is necessary for filling the section to be tested shall be
obtained from the geometrical volume of the section considering the pipe tolerances.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
The theoretical water amount that is necessary for pressurizing the section shall be calculated
by means of the following formula:
Vp = (0.884 r i/t +A) x 10-6 x Vt x ∆ P x K
Where:
Vp = computed water amount required to raise by P the pressure in the section to

be tested (m3).
Vt = geometrical volume of the section (m3)
∆ P = Pressure rise (bar)
ri= nominal inner radius of the pipe (mm)
t = nominal pipe thickness(mm)
A = isothermal compressibility value for water at the pressurization temperature in

the P range (bar-1) x 106.
(Refer water compressibility factor vs pressure and temperature chart). For

temperature above 30°C the values may be extrapolated.
K = a dimensionless coefficient that is equal to a value of 1.02 for longitudinally

welded pipe.
12.2 The pressure change due to a water temperature change shall be calculated by the following
formula:
B
∆P = -------------------------- ∆T
0.884 r i/ t +A
Where,
∆P = pressure change resulting from a temperature change (bar)
∆T algaebrical difference between water temperature at the beginning of the test and
water temperature as measured at the end of the test (°C).
B= value of the difference between the thermal expansion of water at the pressure and
temperature as measured at the end of the test and that of steel (°C-1) x 106
(Refer table – A)
A= Isothermal compressibility value of water as estimated at the pressure and

temperature values obtained at the end of test (bar-1) x 106 (Refer Figure 1)
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
ri= nominal inner radius of the pipe (mm).
t = nominal thickness of pipe (mm).
13.0 PRECAUTIONS DURING THE TEST
In addition to all that has been expressly described in the procedures for carrying out the
tests, the following additional requirements shall be complied with:
13.1 Provision shall be made for the installation of no-admittance signs to unauthorized personnel
from the roads to the R.O.W.
13.2 Signs stating "PIPE UNDER TEST-KEEP OFF" with local language translation shall be placed
where the pipeline is uncovered, and particularly where the provisional traps and stations are
located. Such areas shall be suitably fenced in such a way as to prevent access of
unauthorized personnel. No unauthorized personnel shall be closer than 40 m to the pipeline
or equipment under test.
13.3 Provisional scraper traps shall be installed in compliance with methods and suitable locations
so that their rupture cannot cause any injuries to the personnel or third parties.
13.4 The test station shall be placed in such a location as to prevent it from being affected by a
catastrophic failure in the test head.
13.5 Once dewatering is over, the sectionalizing valves and other valve assemblies tested
previously, shall be installed at locations shown in the drawings and in accordance with the
procedures contained in the relevant specifications. All thermocouple installed in the pipeline
shall be removed and damaged corrosion coating shall be repaired using COMPANY approved
materials and procedure.
14.0 PRESERVATION OF PIPELINE
When so stated in the CONTRACT, to preserve/conserve the pipeline for a specified duration,
CONTRACTOR shall completely fill the pipeline with water, with sufficient quantity of corrosion
inhibitors depending upon quality of water and the period of conservation, at a pressure to be
agreed upon with the COMPANY at a later stage. CONTRACTOR shall obtain necessary
approval from the COMPANY of the procedure and the type and quantity of the inhibitors
used before commencement of the works.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
TABLE - A
0
C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bar
0.981 -98.62 -79.89 -61.81 -44.34 -27.47 -11.14 +4.66 +19.98
10 -95.55 -76.94 -58.99 -41.65 -24.89 -8.67 +7.02 +22.23
20 -92.15 -73.68 -55.86 -38.64 -22.01 -5.92 +9.65 +24.74
30 -88.74 -70.40 -52.72 -35.63 -19.14 -3.16 +12.29 +27.26
40 -85.32 -67.12 -49.58 -32.62 -16.24 -0.41 +14.93 +29.78
50 -81.90 -63.84 -46.43 -29.60 -13.36 +2.36 +17.57 +32.31
60 -78.47 -60.55 42.27 -26.58 -10.46 +5.15 +22.89 +34.85
70 -75.03 -57.25 -40.10 -23.54 -7.56 +7.92 +22.89 +37.39
80 -71.60 -53.96 -36.94 -20.51 -4.65 +10.70 +25.55 +39.94
90 -68.16 -50.66 -33.77 -17.47 -1.73 +13.50 +28.23 +42.50
100 -64.72 -47.35 -30.60 -14.43 +1.18 +16.29 +30.90 +45.05
110 -61.28 -44.05 -27.43 -11.38 +4.10 +19.08 +33.58 +47.61
120 -57.84 -40.74 -24.26 -8.34 +7.02 +21.88 +36.26 +50.18
130 -54.40 -37.44 -21.08 -5.29 +9.95 +24.68 +38.94 +52.75
140 -50.96 -34.13 -17.90 -2.25 +12.87 +27.49 +41.63 +55.32
150 -47.53 -30.83 -14.73 +0.80 +15.79 +30.29 +44.31 +57.89
160 -44.10 -27.53 -11.56 +3.85 +18.72 +33.10 +47.00 +60.46
170 -40.67 -24.23 -8.40 +6.89 +21.64 +35.90 +49.69 +63.04
180 -37.24 -20.94 -5.23 +9.94 +24.56 +38.70 +52.37 +65.62
190 -33.83 -17.65 -2.06 +12.98 +27.48 +41.51 +55.06 +68.19
200 -30.42 -14.37 +1.09 +16.01 +30.40 +44.30 +57.75 +70.77
210 -27.02 -11.09 +4.25 +19.04 +33.31 +47.10 +60.43 +73.34
220 -23.63 -7.82 +7.40 +22.06 +36.22 +49.90 +63.12 +75.90
230 -20.24 -4.56 +10.54 +25.08 +39.13 +52.69 +65.80 +78.48
240 -16.87 -1.30 +13.67 +28.10 +42.03 +55.48 +68.48 +81.05
250 -13.50 +1.94 +16.79 +31.11 +44.92 +58.26 +71.15 +83.61
260 -10.14 +5.17 +19.90 +34.12 +47.81 +61.04 +73.81 +86.81
270 -6.80 +8.39 +23.00 +37.11 +50.69 +63.80 +76.48 +88.73
280 -3.48 +11.60 +26.11 +40.09 +53.56 +66.57 +79.14 +91.29
290 -0.17 +14.80 +29.19 +43.07 +56.43 +69.33 +81.78 +93.83
300 +3.13 +17.98 +32.27 +46.03 +59.29 +72.06 +84.83 +96.38
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE WATER THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR AND THE STEEL THERMAL
EXPANSION FACTOR ( 0 C -1 ) (10 -6)
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
TABLE - A
0
C 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Bar
0.981 +34.82 +4922 +63.20 +76.78 +89.99 +102.83 +115.34
10 +36.97 +51.26 +65.15 +78.64 +91.75 +104.51 +116.93
20 +39.36 +53.55 +67.33 +80.71 +93.72 +106.39 +118.71
30 +41.76 +55.84 +69.51 +82.79 +95.70 +108.26 +120.49
40 +44.18 +58.14 +71.70 +84.87 +97.68 +110.14 +122.28
50 +46.60 +60.45 +73.90 +86.96 +99.68 +112.04 +124.07
60 +49.02 +62.76 +76.10 +89.07 +102.67 +113.93 +125.88
70 +51.44 +65.08 +78.32 +91.17 +103.68 +115.84 +127.69
80 +53.88 +67.40 +80.53 +93.29 +105.69 +117.76 +129.50
90 +56.32 +69.73 +82.75 +95.41 +107.70 +119.67 +131.32
100 +58.77 +72.07 +84.98 +97.53 +109.73 +121.59 +133.15
110 +61.21 +74.41 +87.22 +99.66 +111.75 +123.52 +134.98
120 +63.67 +76.74 +89.45 +101.79 +113.79 +125.46 +136.82
130 +66.12 +79.09 +91.69 +103.93 +115.83 +127.39 +138.67
140 +68.58 +81.45 +93.93 +106.07 +117.67 +129.34 +140.51
150 +71.05 +83.80 +96.18 +108.21 +119.90 +131.20 +142.37
160 +73.51 +86.15 +18.43 +110.36 +121.96 +133.74 +144.22
170 +75.97 +88.51 +100.68 +112.51 +124.01 +135.19 +146.08
180 +78.44 +90.87 +102.94 +114.66 +126.06 +137.15 +147.94
190 +80.91 +93.23 +105.19 +116.82 +128.12 +139.11 +149.81
200 +83.37 +95.59 +107.45 +118.97 +130.17 +141.07 +151.68
210 +85.84 +97.95 +109.71 +121.13 +132.24 +143.03 +153.55
220 +88.30 +100.31 +111.97 +123.29 +134.29 +144.99 +155.42
230 +90.67 +102.67 +114.23 +125.45 +136.36 +146.96 +157.30
240 +93.22 +105.03 +116.48 +127.60 +138.42 +148.93 +159.18
250 +95.69 +107.39 +118.74 +129.76 +140.48 +150.90 161.05
260 +98.14 +109.74 +121.00 +131.92 +142.54 +152.87 +162.93
270 +100.60 +112.10 +123.25 +134.08 +144.61 +154.84 +164.81
280 +103.05 +114.44 +125.50 +136.24 +146.67 +156.84 +166.69
290 +105.50 +116.79 +127.75 +138.39 +148.73 +158.78 +168.57
300 +107.94 +119.13 +130.00 +140.54 +150.79 +160.75 +170.45
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE THERMAL EXPANSION FACTOR THE STEEL THERMAL EXPANSION
FACTOR ( 0 C -1 ) (10 -6)
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
TABLE - A
0
C 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Bar
0.981 +127.52 +139.41 +151.00 +162.31 +173.37 +184.18 +194.75 +205.08
10 +129.02 +140.83 +152.36 +163.58 +174.56 +185.30 +195.79 +206.07
20 +130.71 +142.42 +153.85 +165.00 +175.90 +186.55 +196.96 +207.16
30 +132.40 +144.02 +155.35 +166.42 +177.23 +187.80 +198.14 +208.26
40 +134.10 +145.62 +156.87 +167.85 +178.58 +189.07 +199.33 +209.37
50 +135.80 +147.24 +158.39 +169.85 +179.93 +190.34 +200.52 +210.49
60 +137.51 +148.86 +159.92 +170.73 +181.29 +191.62 +201.72 +211.61
70 +139.22 +150.49 +161.46 +172.18 +182.66 +192.91 +202.93 +212.74
80 +140.95 +152.11 +163.00 +173.64 +184.03 +194.20 +204.14 +213.88
90 +142.67 +153.75 +164.56 +175.10 +185.41 +195.50 +205.36 +215.03
100 +144.42 +155.40 +166.11 +176.58 +186.80 +196.80 +206.59 +216.17
110 146.15 +157.04 +167.66 +178.05 +188.20 +198.12 +207.82 +217.33
120 +147.90 +158.70 +169.24 +179.54 +189.59 +199.44 +209.06 +218.49
130 +149.65 +160.36 +170.81 +181.02 +191.00 +200.75 +210.31 +219.66
140 +151.40 +162.03 +172.39 +182.51 +192.41 +202.09 +211.56 +220.84
150 +153.16 +163.70 +173.98 +184.00 +193.82 +203.42 +212.81 +222.02
160 +154.93 +165.37 +175.56 +185.51 +195.24 +204.76 +214.08 +223.20
170 +156.69 +167.05 +177.15 +187.02 +196.66 +206.10 +215.34 +224.39
180 +158.47 +168.73 +178.75 +188.53 +198.09 +207.45 +216.61 +225.55
190 +160.24 +170.42 +180.35 +190.05 +199.52 +208.80 +217.89 +226.79
200 +162.01 +172.10 +181.95 +191.57 +200.97 +210.16 +219.17 +227.99
210 +163.80 +173.80 +183.55 +193.09 +202.40 +211.53 +220.46 +229.20
220 +165.58 +175.43 +185.16 +194.62 +203.85 +212.89 +221.74 +230.41
230 +167.36 +177.19 +186.78 +196.14 +205.30 +214.26 +223.04 +231.63
240 +169.16 +178.89 +188.39 +197.68 +206.75 +215.63 +224.33 +232.85
250 +170.94 +180.59 +190.01 +199.21 +208.20 +217.00 +225.63 +234.08
260 +172.73 +182.30 +191.63 +200.75 +209.66 +218.40 +226.93 +235.31
270 +174.53 +184.00 +193.25 +202.29 +211.12 +219.77 +228.24 +236.54
280 +176.32 +185.70 +194.88 +203.83 +212.59 +221.16 +229.55 +237.77
290 +178.11 +187.42 +196.50 +205.37 +214.05 +222.54 +230.86 +239.01
300 +179.90 +189.13 +198.13 +206.92 +215.51 +223.93 +232.18 +240.26
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ONSHORE PIPELINE
EDITION : 1
TABLE -A
0
C 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Bar
0.981 +215.22 +215.14 +234.88 +244.41 +253.79 +263.00 +272.03
10 +216.13 +225.99 +235.66 +245.13 +254.44 +264.59 +272.57
20 +217.15 +226.94 +236.53 +245.94 +255.18 +264.27 +273.18
30 +218.18 +227.88 +237.41 +246.75 +255.93 +264.95 +273.80
40 +219.21 +228.85 +238.30 +247.58 +256.69 +265.64 +274.42
50 +220.25 +229.82 +239.20 +248.40 +257.45 +266.33 +275.07
60 +221.30 +230.79 +240.11 +249.24 +258.22 +267.04 +275.70
70 +222.35 +231.78 +241.02 +250.08 +258.99 +267.75 +276.35
80 +223.42 +232.77 +241.94 +250.93 +259.78 +248.47 +277.01
90 +224.48 +233.76 +242.87 +251.79 +260.57 +269.19 +277.66
100 +225.56 +234.76 +243.79 +252.66 +261.36 +269.92 +278.33
110 +226.64 +235.78 +244.73 +253.53 +262.17 +270.77 +279.01
120 +227.73 +236.79 +245.68 +254.40 +262.98 +271.41 +279.69
130 +228.82 +237.81 +246.63 +255.28 +263.69 +272.16 +280.38
140 +229.92 +238.84 +247.59 +25618 +264.62 +272.92 +281.08
150 +231.03 +239.87 +248.55 +257.07 +265.44 +273.69 +281.78
160 +232.14 +240.91 +249.52 +257.97 +266.28 +274.46 +282.49
170 +233.26 +241.96 +250.49 +258.88 +267.12 +275.23 +283.20
180 +234.38 +243.01 +251.47 +259.79 +267.97 +276.01 +283.92
190 +235.51 +244.06 +252.46 +260.71 +268.82 +276.80 +284.64
200 +236.64 +245.12 +253.45 +261.63 +269.67 +277.59 +285.37
210 +237.77 +246.18 +254.45 +262.50 +270.54 +278.39 +286.11
220 +238.91 +247.26 +255.45 +263.49 +271.40 +279.19 +286.85
230 +240.06 +248.33 +256.46 +264.43 +272.28 +280.00 +287.59
240 +241.21 +249.41 +257.46 +265.37 +273.16 +280.82 +288.35
250 +242.36 +250.49 +258.48 +266.31 +274.04 +281.63 +289.11
260 +243.52 +251.58 +259.49 +267.27 +274.92 +282.46 +289.86
270 +244.68 +252.66 +260.52 +268.23 +275.82 +283.29 +290.64
280 +245.84 +253.76 +261.54 +269.18 +276.71 +284.12 +291.40
290 +247.01 +254.86 +262.57 +270.15 +277.61 +284.95 +292.18
300 +248.18 +255.96 +263.60 +271.11 +278.51 +285.79 +292.95
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MAJOR WATER CROSSINGS
(CONVENTIONAL)
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE MAJOR WATER CROSSINGS MEC/S/05/21/04 REVISION : 0

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
0.0 DEFINITION
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 GENERAL
3.0 TRENCHING
4.0 CONTINUOUS CONCRETE COATING
5.0 HYDROSTATIC PRE-TESTING
6.0 INSTALLATION
7.0 BACKFILLING AND BANK PROTECTION
8.0 FINAL HYDROSTATIC TEST
9.0 POST-CONSTRUCTION SURVEY
10.0 FINAL CLEAN-UP
11.0 DOCUMENTATION

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
00 DEFINITION
A major water crossing shall be reckoned the one which will necessitate passing
the gas pipeline across a water body such as perennial river, major irrigation canal,
pond, lake, lagoon, creek etc. using special attention and means. The parameters
required to classify a particular water body as a major water crossing shall
comprise of size, hydrological data, authority/ownership, importance and other
ecological/ environmental factors associated with it, and the authority to classify it
such, shall rest with the COMPANY.
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the minimum requirements for the various activities to be
performed by CONTRACTOR for the construction of pipeline major water crossings by
conventional trenching method. Provisions of this specification are applicable only for
"major water crossings" specifically named as such in the CONTRACT.
and documents included in the CONTRACT between COMPANY CONTRACTOR.
1.3 CONTRACTOR shall, with due care and diligence, execute the work in compliance
with all laws, by-laws, ordinances, regulations etc. and provide all services and
labour, inclusive of supervision thereof, all materials excluding the materials indicated
as "Company supplied Materials" in the CONTRACT, equipment, appliances or other
things of whatsoever nature required in or about the execution of the work, whether
of a temporary or permanent nature.
1.4 CONTRACTOR shall take full responsibility for the stability and safety of all
operations and methods involved in the work.
1.5 CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the work area and
its surroundings and to have satisfied himself so far as practicable as to the form and
nature thereof, including sub-surface conditions, hydrological and climatic conditions,
the extent and nature of the work and materials necessary for the completion of the
work, and the means of access to the work area.
1.6 CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information as to

risks, contingencies and all other circumstances, which may influence the work w.r.t.
the above.
1.7 CONTRACTOR shall, in connection with the work, provide and maintain at his own
costs all lights, guards, fencing, watching etc., when and where necessary or
required by COMPANY or by any duly constituted authority for the protection of the
work and properties or for the safety and the convenience of public and/ or others.
1.8 For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall hold :
• the words `Shall' and `Must' are mandatory

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
• the words `Should', `May' and `Will' are non-mandatory, advisory, or

recommended.
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 All works of the pipeline major water crossing shall be performed in accordance with
the approved construction drawings, procedures, other applicable documents as per
the CONTRACT, good pipeline practice and as directed by COMPANY.
2.2 Before start of the field construction, CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY, for
approval for each major water crossing a complete report containing at the
minimum:
i) installation method
ii) proposed time schedule indicating start and finish dates and detailed break-
up of time period for all critical activities associated with the work.
iii) required work area along with layout and location
iv) equipment to be used (including number and capacity of equipment).
v) manpower deployment during construction
vi) proposed sub-contractors and/ or vendors along with their scope of work.
The description of the installation method as a minimum shall include the following:
a) Study of water currents in relation to the method of launching (on bottom

and on surface).
b) Calculation for stability of pipeline during launching and final test.
c) Buoyancy studies
d) Preparation of fabrication yard and launching areas.
e) Pipeline construction details (handling, stringing, welding, concrete coating

etc.)
f) Pre-test procedure including trial mix, design & tests for concrete coating.
g) Procedure for corrosion coating of field joint
h) Dredging, anchoring program, spoil-deposit and trench survey method

including facilities for COMPANY.
i) Pulling or other installation method and related calculations.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
j) Pulling arrangement including launchway and anchoring and breaking device.
k) Trench correction before launching.
l) Method of positioning and sinking of pipeline.
m) Method of rectification of damages to the pipeline, during launching.
n) Method of backfilling, bank protection and survey.
o) Final test procedure after backfilling.
p) Safety systems during launching, rope tests.
q) Communication.
r) Abandonment and recovery procedures concurred.
s) Necessary permission from concerned authorities for crossing.
COMPANY shall inform CONTRACTOR within 21 days if any objection against the
document and procedure described requires resubmission by CONTRACTOR.
Approval by COMPANY of the methods used by CONTRACTOR shall in no way relieve

CONTRACTOR from the sole responsibility for safe and satisfactory installation of the
crossing.
2.3 CONTRACTOR shall comply with all the conditions and requirements issued by
authorities having jurisdiction in the area where the work is to be performed.
CONTRACTOR shall, at his own responsibility, obtain necessary permits from the
authorities having jurisdiction, for performing his work.
If no public roads exist, CONTRACTOR shall arrange on his own for access to his
work area at no extra cost to COMPANY.
2.4 Pre-construction Surveys
Prior to start of any work, CONTRACTOR shall carry out a survey of the major water
crossings and acquaint himself with site conditions and to collect any data regarding
the water velocity and the tidal variations in the flow pattern and shall verify the
suitability of his equipment and the methods of construction.
3.0 TRENCHING
3.1 Dredging/ Excavating
3.1.1 CONTRACTOR shall dredge or excavate the trench for the water crossing in
conformity with the approved drawings. Dredging of the trench shall be executed as
accurately as possible.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
3.1.2 The trench shall be excavated to such depth as required to provide the minimum
cover and the pipeline configuration as specified. The pipeline profile of the crossings
shall be followed as accurately as possible. Before laying, the trench shall be cleaned
and levelled. The trench shall be subject to inspection by COMPANY prior to
installation of the pipe.
3.1.3 Navigational traffic shall not be obstructed, unless permission has been given
thereto. CONTRACTOR shall issue all necessary publications according to the local
regulations. Instructions given by authorities shall be followed accurately and
immediately, so that there in no hindrance to traffic. For stoppage of navigational
traffic public notification, PA system, signal/ sign etc. shall be provided.
CONTRACTOR cannot request a compensation if his work is hampered or delayed

due to weather conditions, any obstacles/ or by any traffic on the spot, where work
is executed.
3.1.4 CONTRACTOR is fully responsible for the execution of the blasting (whenever
permitted) the dredging and excavation work, hopping of the soil, transportation,
dumping on land or in water, all to be executed in agreement with authorities, land
owners and COMPANY.
3.1.5 CONTRACTOR may be obliged to dredge or excavate a trench deeper or wider than
indicated in the drawings in order to properly lay the pipeline in unstable
(underwater) areas, or near and adjacent to the banks of water courses. It shall be
understood that CONTRACTOR is aware of such problems at the time of this bid and
that, when such additional excavation is required, it shall be done by CONTRACTOR
as part of the work and that he will install the necessary provision and/ or temporary
works such as sheet-piling, special filling materials, etc. at no extra cost to
COMPANY.
3.1.6 During, the execution of dredging work of CONTRACTOR, bearings, measurements

and levels shall be taken by or on behalf of COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall render
assistance for this purpose and make available for COMPANY appropriate survey
boats, fully manned and equipped before the start of excavation work of the water
crossing trench. CONTRACTOR, if so desired by COMPANY, shall make cross profiles
at intervals of not more than 10.0m of the bottom of the water-course along the
surveyed center line of the water crossing. In such a case horizontal measurements
shall be taken by triangulation or taping between known points and shall be made
with such accuracy that the location of each vertical measurement is known within
1.0m. Vertical measurements shall be taken with a sonic recording device, or with
line and rod, as directed by COMPANY and shall be taken with such accuracy that
each depth is known within 0.2m. Vertical measurements shall be taken at points
averaging not more than 5.0m apart and no two measurements shall be more than
7.0m apart. The cross profiles shall extend at least 10m on both sides of the top of
the trench.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
All measurements shall be witnessed by COMPANY. The resulting profile, corrected

to the elevation of the undisturbed water-course, shall then be the reference profile.
Said profile shall be plotted on a 1:200 vertical and horizontal scale.
3.1.7 CONTRACTOR shall keep the trench in good condition until the pipe is laid, and no
claim is to be made to the COMPANY by reason of its caving either before or after
the pipe is laid. CONTRACTOR shall do whatever is required to excavate the trench,
install the pipe in it and backfill the trench in accordance with these specifications at
no extra cost to COMPANY.
3.1.8 Immediately before installation of the water crossing in the excavated trench,
CONTRACTOR shall prepare a profile of the trench bottom along the surveyed center
line of the water crossing for comparison with the reference profile. CONTRACTOR
shall also make cross sections of the trench at intervals of not more than 100m. All
profile and cross section measurements shall be taken as specified and shall be
witnessed by COMPANY. These data shall be submitted to COMPANY for approval and
COMPANY will approve or reject the trench excavation as completed within 24 hours
after receipt of the profile and cross sections.
3.1.9 CONTRACTOR shall grade the trench in such a manner as to give the maximum
amount of uniform support to the pipeline when it is lowered or pulled into place. The
maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10.0m.
3.1.10 In submerged sections, where rock or gravel is encountered in the bottom of the
trench, padding is required. The thickness of the padding under the concrete coated
pipe shall at least be 50 cm and after installation at least 50 cm around the pipe.
Blasting, if any, and padding shall be included in the work.
3.2 Pumping Line
In case CONTRACTOR uses pumping lines to discharge the spoil, he shall take care of
the necessary permits.
Pumping lines, discharges and siphons shall be installed by CONTRACTOR and

removed before the completion of the work. At crossings with existing roads, the
pumping lines shall be led through a casing pipe bored/ jacked under the road or led
through a porch over the road. A stress calculation must then be handed over to
COMPANY. The necessary provisions to embank the dumping area and also the spoil
basins shall be made by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is responsible for transportation
of the soil and dumping on land and is liable for damage to works of third parties
caused by leakage of pumping lines, etc. CONTRACTOR shall at all time prevent
overflow of pumping water, spoil or sand over embankments, parcels or roads. Further
more, CONTRACTOR shall safeguard COMPANY from claims of compensation by third
parties due to encountered damage.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
3.3 Spoil
Spoil which is not dumped on and including spoil acquired after cleaning the water
crossing trench, shall be transported and dumped in places, designated thereto by
agreement between CONTRACTOR and authorities and approved of by COMPANY.
Spoil shall be transported in (split) barges; only those barges shall be used that avoid
spilling during transportation due to incorrect closing of the flaps, etc. Spoil which is
dumped outside the designated places shall be removed by CONTRACTOR at first
notice by COMPANY.
3.4 Dykes, Dams and Weirs
CONTRACTOR shall install temporary provisions in the existing dykes, dams, etc. to
prevent flooding of low areas.
Therefore in general, in existing dykes, dams, etc a double substituting weir must be
installed before start of excavation in the existing dyke or dam. Such a double
substituting weir can be a closed wall of sheet piling, supported by soil. The provisions
shall be such that the underwater profile of the dredged trench, the water movement
caused by ships, etc. cause no slides/ cave-ins of the dyke or dam.
4.0 CONTINUOUS CONCRETE COATING
CONTRACTOR shall provide concrete coating over the pipeline including the bends in
accordance with the specification issued for the purpose (refer specification no.
MEC/S/05/11/03 and approved procedure. CONTRACTOR shall coat the weld joints in
order to arrive at a continuously concrete coated pipeline. However this concrete
coating shall be applied after the hydrostatic pretest.
5.0 HYDROSTATIC PRE-TESTING
CONTRACTOR shall hydrostatically pre-test the pipe string of each water crossing
before installation as per approved procedure.
Joint coating of the welds shall be done after this pre-test.
The section of the pipeline corresponding to the major water crossing shall, before
installation, be subjected to hydrostatic pre-testing to a combined equivalent stress
of 90% of the SMYS of the pipe material.
After the temperature has been stabilised, the pressure shall be maintained in the
pipeline for at least twenty four (24) hours and recorded by manothermograph. During
the test CONTRACTOR shall check all welds for leakage. Failure, if any, during the test
shall be rectified by the CONTRACTOR. If the same is due to failure on account of any
cause other than defect in material supplied by COMPANY, the repairs shall be done
free of cost, to the satisfaction of COMPANY.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
6.0 INSTALLATION
6.1 CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed scheme for the method he proposes to adopt for
installing the pipeline to COMPANY for approval. CONTRACTOR shall calculate all
stresses in the pipeline while laying and check whether the stresses remain within
permissible limits. A set of all calculations shall be submitted to the COMPANY for
approval.
6.2 CONTRACTOR shall perform all work required to install the water crossings, including
the possible appurtenances indicated in the drawings. The water crossings shall be
installed in such a manner as to comply with the requirements and conditions stated
by the Authorities issuing the permits. CONTRACTOR shall pay special attention to
minimize any damage to embankments and dykes in the vicinity of water crossings.
6.3 The equipment for launching shall be arranged in such a way that the pipeline is laid
without impact or jerking and is not subjected to stresses of any type other than those
which are allowable. Minimum allowed radius of curvature shall be followed,
particularly at the end of the launching way towards the water in the freely suspended
section.
6.4 After the water-crossing section has been installed in place, CONTRACTOR shall fill this
section including the pertaining land sections with water for the final testing.
6.5 CONTRACTOR shall check if the position and depth of the water crossing are in
accordance with the approved drawings, by means of a profile of the pipeline, before
and after the water-crossing section is filled with water. CONTRACTOR shall lower each
pipeline section which is not sufficiently deep by dredging or jetting the underlying
ground.
6.6 The maximum allowed horizontal deviation from the required center line shall be
limited to the following :-
For pipeline dia. upto and including 24" - 300 mm
For pipeline dia greater than 24" - 500 mm
6.7 Prior to backfill the pipeline shall, when laid in the trench, conform to the bottom
contour of the trench grade, so that it will be firmly, uniformly and continuously
supported. COMPANY may employ a diver or use other suitable methods to inspect the
bottom of the trench and/ or after the pipe is installed prior to backfilling of the trench.
CONTRACTOR shall facilitate the work of the diver and shall furnish the necessary
equipment and helpers (other than actual diving equipment) necessary for the diver/
inspector to perform his work.
6.8 If the pipe does not properly fit the trench or does not rest at sufficient depth to satisfy
the minimum requirements of cover as specified in approved drawings, the
CONTRACTOR shall make necessary corrections to either trench or the pipe alignment
or to both so that the pipe, when finally in position in the trench, shall fully meet the
specifications, failing which CONTRACTOR may be asked to remove the pipeline. This
shall be done at no extra to the COMPANY.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
6.9 Installation of Parallel Pipelines
When parallel pipelines are required to be installed for a major water crossing.
CONTRACTOR shall further comply with the following requirements.
6.9.1 Depending on the diameters of the parallel pipelines, the characteristics of the crossing
and the limitations of CONTRACTOR's equipment, CONTRACTOR may propose
installation of the parallel pipelines either together in a combined operation or
separately in a common trench.
6.9.2 If the pipelines are installed together, the minimum clear distance between the parallel
pipelines (measured from the outside diameters of the concrete coated pipes) shall be
300mm. CONTRACTOR shall provide spacers at sufficient intervals along the length of
the pipe section(s), securely fixed to the pipes, or shall propose other suitable
alternative methods, so as to ensure that the stipulated minimum clear distance is
maintained. The spacers may be removed before the trench is backfilled.
CONTRACTOR shall furnish detailed drawings for the pipe assembly showing the
details of spacers/ other arrangements for COMPANY's approval before start of
construction.
6.9.3 If the parallel pipelines are installed separately in a common trench, the minimum clear
distance between the parallel pipelines in the trench shall be 5000mm. CONTRACTOR
shall ensure that this minimum spacing be maintained till the time the trench is
backfilled.
7.0 BACKFILLING AND BANK PROTECTION
7.1 Backfilling of the water-crossing section shall be performed as described in the

following clauses.
7.1.1 The bottom of the waterway shall be reinstated to its original level by backfilling the
trench in a manner and with suitable material and as prescribed and approved by the
authorities and COMPANY. In case material other than the original spoil is required,
this shall be supplied and applied by CONTRACTOR.
Wherever boulders, rock, gravel and other hard object are encountered, they shall not
be placed directly on the pipe. Sufficient earth, and or selected and approved backfill
material shall be backfilled initially around and over the pipe to provide a protective
padding or cushion extending to a minimum thickness of 50 centimeters around the
pipe before backfilling remainder of the trench with excavated or other material.
Wherever required by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall cover the (nearly) backfilled

trench with a layer of rock boulders to be approved by COMPANY over a width equal to
the width of the excavated trench with an extra of 5 m on either side at no extra cost
to COMPANY.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
7.1.2 Backfilling progress of the trench shall be checked continuously, and a daily progress
report shall be made and handed over to COMPANY.
7.1.3 All embankments and/ or dykes, bed and banks shall be reinstated to their original
state and levels, unless otherwise prescribed in the drawings or by the Competent
authorities or COMPANY.
7.1.4 All remaining spoil-deposits shall be cleaned by CONTRACTOR to the satisfaction of

COMPANY.
7.2 Bank Protection
7.2.1 Trenches in banks of major water crossings shall be backfilled with soil approved by
COMPANY. The fill at the banks shall be tamped firmly and reinforced with sacked
earth, rip-rap, or by other means as directed by COMPANY to the satisfaction of
authorities having jurisdiction thereof. In areas where the backfilled soil is expected to
be of loose type which is prone to flow, the trench shall be backfilled with boulder/
crushed rock of minimum 75mm thickness. The boulder/ crushed rock shall be derived
from solid, stable, non-soluble and approved quality store approved by COMPANY and
pipe shall be provided with adequate padding of soil of a quality approved by
COMPANY. Wherever necessary the boulder/ crushed rock shall be held to the bed by
use of 6.1 wire nets of minimum dia. of 3.2mm, made from steel having tensile
strength of 400 N/mm2 and with a minimum elongation at failure of 12%. The
minimum zinc coating of 275 gm-2 shall be applied on single/ double twisted wire. After
the trench has been backfilled and during the clean up works, the water crossing shall
be cleaned across the whole width of ROW. The existing bed profile shall be
maintained after restorations.
7.2.2 Unless stipulated otherwise by the authorities or by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall

protect the banks of the major water crossings by using gravel and boulders filled
embankment mattresses of galvanized iron wire (of specification as in 7.2.1 above) to
be laid over the backfilled, compacted and graded banks. In case slope of the banks is
1:1 or more, bank protection shall be carried out using gabions. Bank protection works
shall be carried out by CONTRACTOR in accordance with the drawings included in the
CONTRACT. All materials required for such works shall be supplied by CONTRACTOR
and all works carried out in accordance with specifications, approved drawings,
instructions of COMPANY and to the complete satisfaction of authorities having
jurisdiction at no extra cost to COMPANY.
The length of the above protection shall be equal to the actual bank excavation edge
including damage and further extending 10 m on either sides, The width of the
restoration on the slope shall be determined by the levels :
• 2m above Highest Water Level, (recordable) or upto the top of bank, whichever
is higher.
• 5m below Low Water Level (recordable) or upto pipe trench level in the bed.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
7.2.3 Before final hydrostatic testing, CONTRACTOR shall `prove' the diameter of the
pipeline by passing a gauging (caliper) pig through the pipeline. The gauging pig
shall have a diameter equal to 95% of the internal diameter of the pipe.
CONTRACTOR shall supply and install all temporary scraper, launchers. Receivers
and other equipment, piping and materials and consumables for the purpose.
8.0 FINAL HYDROSTATIC TEST
The complete water crossing must be tested immediately after the approved backfilling
of the trench. The test procedure shall result in a hoop stress in pipe corresponding to
90% SMYS of the pipe material. After temperature stabilisation pressure shall be
retained in the pipeline for a minimum of twenty four (24) hours and recorded by
manothermograph. The hydrostatic testing shall be carried out in accordance with
approved procedures.
9.0 POST-CONSTRUCTION SURVEY
After laying of the pipeline, CONTRACTOR shall carry out a post-construction survey
jointly with COMPANY. Any defects brought to the notice of CONTRACTOR shall be
promptly corrected by CONTRACTOR at his own expense to the complete satisfaction
of COMPANY.
10.0 FINAL CLEAN-UP
After completion of construction, CONTRACTOR shall clear the site of all balance
material and debris. All balance pipe lengths, in case supplied by COMPANY, shall be
returned to COMPANY's designated stock yard(s). Site shall be cleared to the complete
satisfaction of COMPANY and authorities having jurisdiction. All such works shall be
done at no extra cost to COMPANY.
11.0 DOCUMENTATION
11.1 In addition to the documents specified elsewhere in this specification. CONTRACTOR

shall submit to the COMPANY six copies of each of the following documents / records.
• Complete record of pipes `taken-over' from COMPANY, number of pipe lengths

used, and record of return of balance pipe lengths to COMPANY's designated
stock-yard(s).
• Copies of the permits obtained from authorities having jurisdiction for the
various works.
• Records of Non-destructive testing of welds.
• Clearance certificates from the land owners and authorities having jurisdiction
regarding satisfactory clean-up and restoration of pipeline ROU and work areas.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(CONVENTIONAL)
EDITION : 1
11.2 After completion of construction CONTRACTOR shall prepare & furnish six sets of
copies and two sets of reproducible of As-built drawing for the crossings.
As-built drawings shall be as a minimum, include the following information.
• True profile of the bed and banks of the water crossing along the pipeline after
backfilling.
• True profile of the pipeline as installed and the top of cover to top of pipe at
regular intervals.
• Location and angle of sag and over bends.
• Extent of backfill.
• Extent of bank protection.
11.3 All documents shall be in English Language

Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PIPELINES CROSSING ROADS, RAILROADS,
MINOR WATER AND OTHER CROSSINGS
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE PIPELINES CROSSING ROADS, MEC/S/05/21/05 REVISION : 0

RAILROADS, MINOR WATER
AND OTHER CROSSINGS EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE
3.0 GENERAL
4.0 ROAD AND RAIL-ROAD CROSSINGS
5.0 CROSSINGS OF BURIED SERVICES
6.0 MINOR WATER COURSE CROSSINGS

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the minimum requirement for the various activities to be
carried out by the CONTRACTOR for or about the installation of pipelines crossing
roads, railroads, minor water courses and other services.
The provisions of this specification are not applicable for pipelines crossing water
courses, which are specifically designated as "Major Water Courses" in the CONTRACT.
1.2 This specification shall be road in conjunction with the conditions of all specifications
For the purpose of this specification the following definitions shall hold :
• the words "Shall" and "Must" are mandatory

• the words "Should, "May" and "Will" are non-mandatory, advisory
recommended.
2.1 Reference has been made in this specification to the latest edition (edition enforce at
the time of floating the enquiry) of the following codes, standards and specifications.
a) ASME B 31.4 - Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquid

Hydrocarbons and Other Liquids.
b) ASME B 31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping

Pipelines Crossing Railroads and Highways.
c) API RP 102 - Recommended practice for Liquid Petroleum

Pipelines Crossings Railroads and Highways.
d) OISD 226 - Natural Gas Transmission Pipelines and City Gas

Distribution Networks
e) Part 192, Title 49 - Transportation of Natural and Other Gases by

Pipeline.
f) Part 195 - Transportation of liquids by Pipeline.
2.2 In case of conflict between the requirements of above mentioned codes, standards,
specifications and practices, the most stringent requirement shall govern.
3.0 GENERAL
3.1 Crossing of roads, railroads, buried services, canals and minor water courses with
equipment and/ or personnel is allowed only after acquiring approval from the
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

authorities having jurisdiction and after making arrangements for safeguarding the
roads, etc. and the buried services with appropriate provisions.
Highways, main-roads and railroads and their verges and banks of water crossings are
not allowed to be used for loading, unloading or stacking of materials and/ or
equipment. For secondary roads, such loading/ unloading is permitted only after prior
approval from the concerned authorities CONTRACTOR is not allowed to close or divert
roads or water courses without prior approval from the COMPANY and the concerned
authorities. CONTRACTOR shall never unnecesarilly hamper the users of the roads,
railroads, buried services and/ or water courses. The water flow shall not be obstructed
in any way.
3.2 COMPANY reserves the right to demand for individual crossings from the
CONTRACTOR a separate detailed report for approval, containing :
• Time schedule
• Working method with equipment
• Test procedure
• Manpower deployment
• Calculations of temporary works
• Soil investigations, etc.
• Approval letter from Competent Authority.
Such works shall be without any extra cost to COMPANY.
3.3 Pipeline crossings for road, railroad, canals and rivers etc., shall be hydrostatically
pretested ex-situ, prior to joint coating, whenever,
• Crossing is executed by boring ;
• Crossing is installed in casing pipe;
• River crossing pipes which are to be continuously concrete weight coated (to
be tested prior to concrete coating);
• Whenever, in COMPANY's opinion, the repair of pipeline at crossing, in case of

a leak during final hydrostatic testing, would require inordinate amount of effort
and/ or time;
• Whenever pretesting is insisted upon by the Authorities having jurisdication

over the utility crossed.
The section of the pipeline for the crossings shall be tested as a single string. Unless
specified otherwise in the CONTRACT, the test pressure shall be the one resulting in a
hoop stress corresponding to 90% of SMYS of pipe material. Test pressure shall be
retained in the pipeline for minimum period of 4 hours. Test section shall be visually
examined for leaks/ defects, etc.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

4.0 ROAD AND RAILROAD CROSSINGS
4.1 The work under crossings shall include necessary clearing, grading and trenching to
required depths and widths, welding of casing (when required) and carrier pipes,
coating, lowering-in, backfilling, clean-up, restoration to the original condition and
further strengthening and protective works, testing, installation of assemblies,
insulators and seals, and temporary works such as sheet pilling, bridges, etc.
The work shall be carried out in accordance with the approved drawings and job
standards, as directed by COMPANY and to the satisfaction of COMPANY and the
authorities having jurisdication over th facility crossed. The work carried out for road
and railroad crossings shall meet the minimum requirements of API RP 1102, latest
edition.
Before the installation work of crossings is started, the CONTRACTOR shall provide
suitable barricades, temporary bridge/ bypass work (especially where roads are open-
cut) with railing, if required by COMPANY for safety of traffic. Adequate traffic warning
signals and/ or traffic lights and suitable diversions shall be provided as directed by
COMPANY/ Authority having jurisdication over these areas. Such diversions shall not
cross the pipeline where it has already been installed, unless proper safeguarding in
COMPANY's opinion is ensured.
Prior approval from the statutory authorities shall be obtained to lay the pipeline across
highways/ roads either by boring or by open-cut method. Installation of the crossing
shall be by the method (i.e., boring/ open-cut) approved by Authorities having
jurisdiction. Railroad crossings shall always be bored/ jacked.
4.2 Boring/ jacking of carrier pipes for crossings is allowed only if the pipes for boring/
jacking are provided with a suitable corrosion coating and CONTRACTOR remains liable
for the suitablity of the pipe and weld-coating of carrier pipes to be bored and for
which coating and method of application are anyhow to be authorised by COMPANY
without prejudice to CONTRACTOR's liability. In all other cases the carrier pipes shall
be cased.
Before start of the boring/ jacking CONTRACTOR shall execute a soil investigation
and determine the ground water table. Based on these investigations CONTRACTOR
shall prepare a construction drawing and submit to COMPANY for approval including
time schedule and soil investigation report. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for
approval of COMPANY the method of boring / trenchless to be carried out,
depending on the nature of soil conditions, nature of crossing, local requirements
etc.
During the execution of boring the ground water table over the length of the boring
shall be lowered up to atleast 0.50 M below bottom of the pipeline. This water table
is to be regularly inspected and maintained by CONTRACTOR and reported to
COMPANY. To safeguard the stability of the borepit, CONTRACTOR shall, if necessary
in COMPANY's opinion, use a closed sheetpiling which shall extend atleast over 50%
of the length in undisturbed soil. The length of the boring shall be in accordance with
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

the length of the ROW of the crossing (road, railroad, etc.) with minimum 0.6 m
extra on either side.
If the soil conditions and groundwater for a particular boring give reasons for this,
CONTRACTOR is entitled to suggest to COMPANY for a relaxation of one or more of
the following requirements as defined hereforth :
• Soil investigation
• Lowering of groundwater table
• Sheetpiling
• Length of boring etc.
In approaches to the crossing, CONTRACTOR shall eliminate unnecessary bending of

pipe by conforming to the contour of the ground by gradually deepening the ditch at
such approaches as directed by the COMPANY.
4.3 The bottom of the trench and/ or the pit for at least twelve (12) metres at the
approach to each end of a casing shall be graded and if necessary backfilled with clean
sand and compacted upto atleast 95% Proctor density to an elevation that will provide
sufficient and continuous support to the pipeline so that the pipeline remains correctly
aligned at the casing ends during and after backfilling.
4.4 The diameter of the hole for a bored section shall have a hole diameter as close as
practicable to the outside diameter of the carrier or casing pipe. If excessive void or
too large hole results, or if it is necessary, in the opinion of COMPANY, to abandon the
bored hole, prompt remedial measures such as filling the hole with suitable material
shall be taken to the entire satisfaction of the COMPANY and Authorities having
jurisdication thereof at no extra cost to COMPANY. Equipment used for installation of
casing pipe shall be of the type approved by COMPANY.
An installation consisting of hydraulic jacks shall be provided with easily readable

pressure gauges (in bar) and sealable pressure limits. Their proper operation shall be
demonstrated before the work is started. COMPANY can request that the maximum
pressing force be limited.
At the front of the pipe there may be a cutting ring which may be 12mm larger than
the outside diameter for the pipe or casing. A lubricating pipe can also be used in
jacking, the nipples of which shall not protrude from the cutting edge. Said
lubricating pipe shall not be fixed to the pipe casing. When jacking, only biologically
degradable lubricants shall be used (e.g. WRC Medlube or an emulsion of bentonite).
Removal of soil from the pipeline during jacking shall be done mechanically by means
of a standard, locked auger, which has to be safeguarded against jacking ahead of the
pipe.
During jacking the progress of the pipe to be jacked and the cutting capacity of the
auger shall be mutually adjusted, by regulating the speed of the auger, to prevent the
road from bulging (rpm too low) or cave-ins (rpm too high). In any case no more soil
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

shall be removed than the volume of the pipe. The auger drive shall be provided with a
clutch.
The progress in the work, the readings of the gauge pipes, the jacking pressures
observed, etc., shall be recorded in a log book, to be shown to COMPANY upon
request. All information shall be supplied to COMPANY on completion of the work.
If the jacking fails, the casing shall not be withdrawn. It shall be filled with sand and
plugged at either end. The diameter of the casing pipe shall conform to API RP 1102
recommendations or as directed by the Engineer – in - charge.
COMPANY reserves the right to inspect certain lengths of pipes to assess damages, if
any, to the corrosion coating of the carrier pipe used for boring. CONTRACTOR shall
weld additional lengths of pipe and pull the required extra lengths of COMPANY's
inspection. If during inspection any defects are noticed, CONTRACTOR, in consultation
with COMPANY, shall carry out the remedial measures required.
4.5 While welding of the casing and vent/ drain pipes, internal high or low is not allowed.
Welding of casing and vent/ drain pipes need not be radiographed, however, only
normal visual checks shall be carried out. Before welding, the single length of pipe shall
be inspected in order to check that there is no out of roundness and dents. When such
defects are noticed, these must be completely removed before joining the pipes. If
these defects cannot be repaired, the defective section shall be cut out.
4.6 In the case of crossing where excavation has been authorised, the welding for the
casing pipe and for a continuous sectio of the pipeline corresponding to the expected
length shall be carried out in the proximity of the crossing. Casing must be laid
immediately after the trenching. Casing pipe must be laid with a single gradient in
order to allow for an easy insertion and, if necessary at a future date, to allow for the
removal or replacement of the pipeline, leaving the casing undisturbed.
4.7 The assembly of vent pipe units as approved by COMPANY shall be carried out by
direct insertion and welding to the ends of the casing pipe before introducing the
carrier pipe. The operation of assembling and extending the vent pipe shall be carried
out in such a way that there is no contact with the carrier pipe. The painting/ coating
of the vent pipes shall be applied before backfilling as per relevant specifications.
4.8 The casing pipe shall be considered ready for installation of the carrier pipe, after
careful inspection and internal cleaning with the removal of soil, mud, stones and other
foreign materials.
4.9 Insulators, as approved by COMPANY, shall be securely fastened to the pipe with all
bolts and fixtures firmly tightened. The number of insulators and spacing shall be as
shown in the drawings or at 2.5m intervals (whichever is more stringent). At the end of
both sides of the casing, a double set of insulators shall be installed.
4.10 Care must be taken in pushing or pulling carrier pipe into the casing so that the pipe is
aligned correctly in the casing and that the pushing or pulling force is evenly and
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

constantly applied to avoid damages to the insulators. A nose piece having a diameter
equal to that of the pipe shall be welded on the front and back end of the carrier pipe
to facilitate installation of the carrier pipe properly in the casing and to keep it dry and
clean.
4.11 After installation of the carrier pipe section, the casing and the appurtenances, but
prior to making tie-in welds and backfilling, an electrical test shall be conducted by the
CONTRACTOR in the presence of the COMPANY, to determine the resistance between
the casing and the carrier pipe or the carrier pipe and the soil. These tests shall show
at least a resistance of 100 kohm/m2. After backfilling and compaction, additional tests
shall be conducted to determine if the casing is electrically shorted to the pipe. If the
installation is found to be shorted, CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections
and repairs at his cost, until a test to the satisfaction of the COMPANY is obtained.
5.0 CROSSINGS OF BURIED SERVICES
5.1 The pipeline under construction may pass above or below the existing buried facilities
such as pipelines, cables, etc. Type of crossing shall be such that a minimum depth of
cover as required in the drawings and specifications are guaranteed. The minimum
clearance required between pipeline and the existing facility shall be 500mm.
5.2 Whenever buried services in the ROW are to be crossed by CONTRACTOR, he shall
safeguard the buried facilities and the required precautions shall be taken as approved
by Owner of the buried services and by COMPANY.
5.3 For buried services to be crossed by boring/ jacking, the relevant provisions of Section
3.0 shall apply.
6.0 MINOR WATER COURSE CROSSINGS
6.1 Minor water crossings are crossings of ditches, canals, water courses, rivers, streams
etc, whether the bed(s) contain(s) water or not, and not being specified as `Major
Water Crossings' in the CONTRACT.
6.2 For minor water crossings a standard drawing or a separate detailed approved drawing
for individual crossing shall be applicable, and all further specifications are applicable.
6.3 Whenever minor water crossings in the ROW are to be crossed, CONTRACTOR shall
install/ temporary bridges to facilitate movement.
6.4 In crossings of water courses with either moderate flow rate or of torrential nature
with marked and unpredictable flooding, an adequate survey shall be carried out
before starting the work with the object of determining what precautions are necessary
and the most favourable period for executing the work.
6.5 In case of crossings of water courses for which no special methods of laying are
required, a pipe section of a size as per the the approved drawings shall be assembled
and subsequently laid. Bends shall be of cold field type.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

Whenever required by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall, before start of construction,

execute a soil investigation. Based on this soil investigation he shall prepare
construction drawings, work method and time schedule for approval of COMPANY as
well as concerned local agencies.
The depth of the existing bottom of a minor water course crossing shall be
determined in relation to the adjacent stable ground level by taking the average of
four measurements. Measurement shall be taken with a gauge and with dimensions
60 x 60mm and having a flat bottom. The minimum force to be exerted shall be 360
N (36 kgf).
CONTRACTOR shall take special care to check with the responsible authorities for
special conditions applying to working on, over, under or through minor water
crossings and CONTRACTOR shall comply with any such conditions. Written
arrangements with authorities shall be drawn up in cooperation with COMPANY.
6.7 For crossings beneath the bed of water courses, the pipe section shal be made in such
a way that it conforms to the existing or future bed as indicated in the approved
drawings. In crossings for which an individual drawing has not been prepared, the
minimum cover of the pipeline shall not be less than that indicated in the standard
drawings for a similar type of crossing.
6.8 Whenever the crossing requries a straight section of pipe between the lower bends
coinciding with the river bed, this section shall be laid at a single horizontal level.
6.9 For crossings of ditches, canals, banked channels, etc. by boring, the pipe section shall
be prepared, laid and tested in accordance with the applicable clauses of Section 3.0 of
this specification.
6.10 The CONTRACTOR shall arrange temporary installation of diversions as may be

necessary, to ensure the effective functioning of these water courses crossed, to the
entire satisfaction of the concerned Local Authorities as well as the COMPANY.
6.11 Banks and trenches of minor water crossings shall be backfilled with soil which is to be
approved by COMPANY and shall be thoroughly compacted to prevent soil and bank
erosion as per the drawings and standards to the satisfaction of authorities having
jurisdication thereof and the COMPANY. Whenever boulders, rock, gravel and other
hard objects are encountered, they shall not be placed directly on the pipe. Sufficient
earth, sand or selected and approved backfill material shall be backfilled initially around
and over the pipe to provide a protective padding or cushion extending to a minimum
thickness of 30 centimeters around the pipe before backfilling remainder of the trench
with excavated or other material as per approved drawings and standards.
After the trench has been backfilled and during the clean up works, the minor water
crossing shall be cleaned at least across the whole of the ROW.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

When directed by the COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall stabilise and restore the bank
of the water crossings with materials to be supplied by him as follows.
The excavation shall be trimmed in steps-and-berms backfilled with well compacted

solid soil, followed by a minimum 0.25m thick layer of properly shaped boulders (75-
150mm) encased in a net of galvanised iron wire of dia 3mm spaced at a maximum
distance of 50mm to be laid over the backfilled, compacted and graded banks.
The GI wire shall be made from steel having tensile strength of 400 N/mm2 and with a
minimum elongation at failure of 10%. The minimum zinc coating of 200 gm-2 shall be
applied on single/ double twisted wire.
The length of the above protection shall be equal to the actual bank excavation edge
including damage and extending 2m on either sides. The width of this protection on
the slope shall be determined by the following :
• 2m plus the highest water level (recoverable) or upto the top of bank
whichever is higher.
• Upto the bottom of the crossing or 20m below the highest water level
whichever is smaller.
Bank stabilisation for certain minor water crossings shall be determined by COMPANY
based on nature of crossing e.g. type of river, canal, major nallah, flood control
banks and other water bodies; type of soil, regulations of local authorities; and any
other socio-economic consideration evaluated by the COMPANY.
6.12 The crossing of any embankments shall be carried out strictly in accordance with
approved drawings.
No drilling work on embankments shall be permitted without prior written approval

from the competent authorities.
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PIPING FABRICATION AND ERECTION
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE PIPING FABRICATION AND MEC/S/05/21/06 REVISION : 0

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 SCOPE
3.0 BASIS FOR WORK
4.0 FABRICATION
5.0 ERECTION
6.0 WELDING
7.0 ERECTION
8.0 INSPECTION
9.0 PROTECTIVE COATING
10.0 FLUSHING
11.0 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
ANNEXURE-1 - WELDING SPECIFICATION
EXHIBIT-A - ELECTRODE QUALIFICATIONS TEST RECORD

EXHIBIT-B - STRESS RELIEF HEAT TREATMENT PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
EXHIBIT-C - STANDARD PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION NO.
EXHIBIT-D - COUPON TEST RECORD
EXHIBIT-E - WELDER's IDENTIFICATION CARD
EXHIBIT-F - RADIOGRAPHIC PROCEDURE FOR PIPE WELDING
EXHIBIT-G - WELDING SPECIFICATION CHART
ANNEXURE-2 - DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF WELDED JOINT - BUTT WELDS
ANNEXURE-3 - ULTRASONIC INSPECTION
ANNEXURE-4 - RADIOGRAPHY
(Shalini Singh) (Sunil Kumar) (A.K. Johri) Dec. 2008

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
1.0 GENERAL
This specification covers general requirements of fabrication and erection of aboveground and
trench piping systems at site. The specification covers the scope of work of contractor, basis of
work to be carried out by contractor and standards, specifications and normal practice to be
followed during fabrication and erection by the contractor.
2.0 SCOPE
Generally the scope of work of contractor shall include the following :
2.1 Transportation of required piping materials, pipe support and all other necessary piping
materials from Owner's storage point or contractor's storage point (in case of contractor's
scope of supply) to work site / shop including raising store requisitions for issue of materials in
the prescribed format & maintaining an account of the materials received from Owner's stores.
2.1.1 Piping materials include the following but not limited to the same.
a. Pipes (All sizes and schedule)
b. Flanges (All sizes, types & Pressure ratings).
c. Fittings (All sizes, types and schedule)
d. Valves (All sizes, types and Ratings)
e. Gaskets (All sizes, types & Ratings)
f. Bolts, Nuts or M/C Bolts (All types)
g. Expansion Joint / Bellows (All types)
h. Specialty items like online filters, ejectors, sample coolers, steam traps, strainers, air
traps etc.
i. Online instruments like control valve, orifice flange, rotameter, safety valves etc.
2.2 Shop & field fabrication and erection of piping in accordance with documents listed under Cl.
3.0 i.e. 'BASIS OF WORK' including erection of all piping materials enumerated above.
2.3 Fabrication and erection of pipe supports like shoe, saddle, guide, stops, anchors, clips,
cradles, hangers, turn buckles, supporting fixtures, bracket cantilevers, struts, teeposts
including erection of spring supports and sway braces.
2.4 Fabrication
2.4.1 Fabrication of piping specials like special radius bends, reducers, mitres etc.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
2.4.2 Fabrication of plain and threaded nipples from pipes as required during erection.
2.4.3 Fabrication of swage nipples as and when required.
2.4.4 Fabrication of odd angle elbow like 60°, 30° or any other angle from 90/45° elbows as and
when required.
2.4.5 Fabrication of flange, reducing flange, blind flange, spectacle blinds as and when required.
2.4.6 Fabrication of stub-in connection with or without reinforcement.
2.4.7 Grinding of edges of pipes, fittings, flanges etc. to match mating edges of uneven / different
thickness wherever required.
2.5 Modifications like providing additional cleats, extension of stem of valve, locking arrangement
of valves etc. as and when required.
2.6 Preparation of Isometrics, bill of materials, supporting details of all NON-IBR lines upto 2-1/2"
within the unit battery limit and get subsequent approval from Engineer-in-Charge as and
when called for.
2.7 Obtaining approval for drawings prepared by contractor from statutory authority, if required.
2.8 Spun concrete lining of the inside of pipes 3" NB & above including fittings and flanges as
required in accordance with specification.
2.9 Rubber lining inside pipes, fittings, flanges as and when required, in accordance with
specification.
2.10 Radiography, stress relieving, dye penetration, magnetic particle test etc. as required in
specification.
2.11 Performing PMI using alloy analysers as per 'Standard Specification for Positive Material
Identification at Construction Sites, 6-82-0002'.
2.12 Casting of concrete pedestals and fabrication & erection of small structures for pipe supports
including supply of necessary materials.
2.13 Providing insert plates from concrete structures and repair of platform gratings around pipe
openings.
2.14 Making material reconciliation statement and return of Owner's supply left over materials to
Owner's storage.
2.15 Flushing and testing of all piping systems as per standard specification for inspection, flushing
and testing of piping systems (Specification No. MEC/S/05/21/11).
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
3.0 BASIS FOR WORK
3.1 The complete piping work shall be carried out in accordance with the following
3.1.1 "Approved for Construction" drawings and sketches issued by MECON to the Contractor - Plans
and/or Isometrics.
3.1.2 "Approved for Construction" drawings and sketches issued by Turn-key bidders to the
Contractor - Plans and/or Isometrics.
3.1.3 Approved Process licensor's standards and specifications.
3.1.4 Drawings, sketches and documents prepared by contractor duly approved by Engineer-in-
Charge' (such as isometrics and offsite piping etc.)
3.1.5 Approved construction job procedures prepared by Contractor as stipulated in 2.16
3.1.6 MECON specifications/documents as below :
a. Process and Instrument Diagram.
b. Piping Materials Specification
c. Piping support standards.
d. Line list / Number
e. Piping support index.
f. Standard specification of NDT Requirement of Piping
g. Welding specification charts for piping classes.
h. Standard specification for Pressure Testing of Erected Piping System.
i. Welding specification for fabrication of piping
j. Any other MECON or OTHER specifications attached with Piping Material Specification
or special condition of contract.
k. Procedure for storage, preservation and positive identification of materials Contractors

works / stores.
3.1.7 Following codes, standards and regulations
a. ASME B 31.3 : Process Piping

b. ASME Sec. VIII : Code for unfired pressure vessel.
c. IBR Regulations
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
d. IS:823 : Code for procedure for Manual Metal Are Welding

of Mild Steel (for structural steel).
e. NACE Std. : Code for Sour Services material requirements
MR.
Note : All codes referred shall be latest edition.
3.2 Deviations
Where a deviation from the "Basis of Work" and approved job procedure described above is
required or where the basis of work does not cover a particular situation, the matter shall be
brought to the notice of Engineer - in - Charge and the work carried out only after obtaining
written approval from him in each case.
4.0 FABRICATION
4.1 Piping Material
Pipe, pipe fittings, flanges, valves, gaskets, studs bolts etc. used in a given piping system shall
be strictly as per the "Piping Material Specification" for the "Pipe Class" specified for that
system. To ensure the above requirement, all piping material supplied by the Owner /
Contractor shall have proper identification marks as per relevant standards / MECON’s
specifications / Licensors specification. Contractor shall provide identification marks on left over
pipe lengths wherever marked up pipe lengths have been fabricated / erected. Material
traceability is to be maintained for AS., S.S., NACE, LTCS, material for Hydrogen service and
other exotic materials by way of transferring heat number, etc. (hard punching) as per
approved procedure. This shall be in addition to colour coding for all piping materials to avoid
mix-up.
4.2 Fabrication
4.2.1 All fabrication shall be carried out in accordance with piping general arrangement drawings,
(prepared by CONTRACTOR and approved by COMPANY) including this specification and codes
as specified in section 2.0.
4.2.2 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for working to the exact dimensions as per the approved
drawings. Dimensional tolerances to be adopted during implementation of fabrication work
shall be as per attached sketch "TOLERANCES FOR FABRICATION".
4.2.3 Flange bolt holes shall generally straddle the established centre lines unless other orientation is
required and as called out in approved drawings.
4.2.4 Threading shall be NPT to ANSI B 1.20.1. Threading shall preferably be done after bending,
forging or heat treatment operation. However if it is not possible, precaution shall be taken to
protect threading against deformation. Thread shall be clean cut with no burrs or stripping.
Dies shall be new, sharp and properly designed for piping material. Ends shall be reamed to
remove burrs.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
4.2.5 All threaded joints shall be aligned properly. The pipe entering unions shall be true to
centrelines so as to avoid forcing of union coupling during make up. Damaged threads shall be
cut from the end of run and the pipe shall be rethreaded.
4.2.6 Immediately before testing the piping, all threads of pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly
cleared of cuttings, fuel oil or other foreign matter. The male threads shall be sealed with
thread sealant and the piping made up sufficiently for the thread to seize. Sealant shall be
teflon tape.
4.2.7 Seal welding of threaded connections when specified shall include the first block valve, cover
all threads. The joint shall be cleaned of all cutting oil and other foreign material and made up
dry to full thread engagement. Instrument threaded connections which are frequently
subjected to testing and maintenance shall not be seal welded.
4.2.8 All threaded connections shall be protected from rusting by applying greases or oil when in
operating condition.
4.2.9 When socket weld fittings or valves are used, pipe shall be spaced approximately 1/16" to
avoid bottoming which could result in excessive weld stress.
4.2.10 Where the ends of the piping components being welded have an internal surface misalignment
exceeding 1.6mm, the wall of the component extending internally shall be trimmed by
machining so that the adjoining internal surface will approximately flush.
For the purpose of common understanding the construction job procedure, to be submitted by
the contractor, shall include proposal for
- Maximizing prefabrication, inspection and testing at fabrication shop with minimum

field joints.
- Positive material identification, handling, storage & preservation.
4.3 Dimensional Tolerances
Dimensional tolerances for piping fabrication shall be as per MECON Standard Specification.
The Contractor shall be responsible for working to the dimensions shown on the drawings.
However, the Contractor shall bear in mind that there may be variations between the
dimensions shown in the drawing and those actually existing at site due to minor variations in
the location of equipments, inserts, structures etc. To take care of these variations "Field
Welds" shall be provided during piping fabrication. An extra pipe length of 100 mm over and
above the dimensions indicated in the drawing may be left on one side of the pipe at each of
the field welds. During erection, the pipe end with extra length at each field weld, shall be cut
to obtain the actual dimension occurring at site. Isometrics, if supplied may have the field
welds marked on them. However, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide adequate
number of field welds. In any case no extra claims will be entertained from the Contractor on
this account. Wherever errors / omissions occur in drawings and Bills of Materials it shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to notify the Engineer-in-Charge prior to fabrication or erection.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
4.4 IBR Piping
4.4.1 Contractor shall be supplied generally with all drawings for steam piping falling under the
purview of Indian Boiler Regulations duly approved by Boiler Inspectorate. The Contractor
shall carry out the fabrications, erection and testing of this piping as per requirements of
Indian Boiler Regulations and to the entire satisfaction of the local Boiler Inspector. The
Contractor shall also get the approval of IBR inspector for all fabrication and testing done by
him at his own cost. All certificates of approval shall be in proper IBR forms. . .
4.4.2 Approval of boiler inspector on the drawings prepared by the contractor shall be obtained by
the contractor at his own cost.
4.5 Pipe Joints
The piping class of each line specifies the type of pipe joints to be adopted. In general, joining
of lines 2" and above in process and utility piping shall be accomplished by butt welds. Joining
of lines 1-1/2" and below shall be by socket welding / butt welding / threaded joints as
specified in "Piping Material Specifications". However, in piping 1-1/2" and below where socket
welding/ threaded joints are specified butt - welds may be used with the approval of Engineer-
in-Charge for pipe to pipe joining in long runs of piping. This is only applicable for non-
galvanized piping without lining.
Flange joints shall be used at connections to Vessels, Equipment's, Valves and where required
for ease of erection and maintenance as indicated in drawings.
4.6 Butt Welded and Socket Welded Piping
End preparation, alignment and fit-up of pipe pieces to be welded, welding, pre-heat, post-
heating and heat treatment shall be as described in the welding specification and NDT
specification.
4.7 Screwed Piping
In general, Galvanized piping shall have threads as per IS:554 or ANSI B 2.1 NPT as required
to match threads on fittings, valves etc. All other piping shall have threads as per ANSI B 2.1,
tapered unless specified otherwise.
Threads shall be clean cut, without any burrs or stripping and the ends shall be reamed.
Threading of pipes shall be done preferably after bending, forging or heat treating operations.
If this is not possible, threads shall be gauge checked and chased after welding heat treatment
etc.
During assembly of threaded joints, all threads of pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly
cleaned of cuttings, dirt, oil or any other foreign matter. The male threads shall be coated with
thread sealant and the joint tightened sufficiently for the threads to seize and give a leakproof
joint.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
Threaded joints to be seal-welded shall be cleaned of all foreign matter, including sealant and
made up to full thread engagement before seal welding.
4.8 Flange Connections
All flange facings shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of pipe to which they are
attached. Flanged bolt holes shall straddle the normal centerlines unless different orientation is
shown in the drawing.
Wherever a spectacle blind is to be provided, drilling and tapping for the jack screws in the
flange, shall be done before welding it to the pipe.
4.9 Branch Connections
Branch connections shall be as indicated in the piping material specifications. For end
preparation, alignment, spacing, fit-up and welding of branch connections refer welding
specifications. Templates shall be used wherever required to ensure accurate cutting and
proper fit-up.
For all branch connections accomplished either by pipe to pipe connections or by using forged
tees the rates quoted for piping shall be inclusive of this work.
Reinforcement pads shall be provided wherever indicated in drawings/ specifications etc.
4.10 Bending
Bending shall be as per ASME B31.3 except that corrugated or creased bends shall not be
used.
Cold bends for lines 1-1/2" and below, with a bend radius of 5 times the nominal diameter
shall be used as required in place of elbows wherever allowed by piping specifications.
Bending of pipes 2" and above may be required in some cases like that for headers around
heaters, reactors etc.
The completed bend shall have a smooth surface, free from cracks, buckles, wrinkles, bulges,
flat spots and other serious defects. They shall be true to dimensions. The flattening of a
bend, as measured by the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters at any
cross-section, shall not exceed 8% and 3% of the nominal outside diameter, for internal and
external pressure respectively.
4.11 Forging and forming
Forging and forming of small bore fittings, like reducing nipples for piping 1-1/2" and below,
shall be as per ASME B 31.3.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
4.12 Mitre Bends and Fabricated Reducers
The specific application of welded mitre bends and fabrication reducers shall be governed by
the Piping Material Specifications. Generally all 90 deg. mitres shall be 4-piece 3-weld type and
45 deg. mitres shall be 3-piece 2-weld type as per MECON Standard unless otherwise
specified. Reducers shall be fabricated as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge. The
radiographic requirements shall be as per Material Specifications for process and utility
systems and NDT Specification for steam piping under IBR, radiographic requirements of IBR
shall be complied with.
4.13 Cutting and Trimming of Standard Fittings & Pipes
Components like pipes, elbows, couplings, half-couplings etc. shall be cut / trimmed / edge
prepared wherever required to meet fabrication and erection requirements, as per drawings
and instructions of Engineer-in-Charge. Nipples as required shall be prepared from straight
length piping.
4.14 Galvanised Piping
Galvanised carbon steel piping shall be completely cold worked, so as not to damage
galvanised surfaces. This piping involves only threaded joints and additional external threading
on pipes may be required to be done as per requirement.
4.15 Jacketed Piping
The Jacketing shall be done in accordance with MECON Specification or Licensors specification
as suggested in material specification or special condition of contract.
Pre-assembly of jacketed elements to the maximum extent possible shall be accomplished at

shop by Contractor. Position of jumpover and nozzles on the jacket pipes, fittings etc. shall be
marked according to pipe disposition and those shall be prefabricated to avoid damaging of
inner pipe and obstruction of jacket space. However, valves, flow glasses, in line instruments
or even fittings shall be supplied as jacketed.
4.16 Shop Fabrication / Prefabrication
The purpose of shop fabrication or pre-fabrication is to minimise work during erection to the
extent possible. Piping spool, after fabrication, shall be stacked with proper identification
marks, so as facilitate their withdrawal at any time during erection. During this period all
flange (gasket contact faces) and threads shall be adequately fabricated by coating with a
removable rust preventive. Care shall also be taken to avoid any physical damage to flange
faces and threads.
4.17 Miscellaneous
4.17.1 Contractor shall fabricate miscellaneous elements like flash pot, seal pot, sample cooler,
supporting elements like turn buckles, extension of spindles and interlocking arrangement of
valves, operating platforms as required by Engineer-in-Charge.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
4.17.2 Spun Concrete Lining
The work of inside spun concrete lining of pipes and specials of diameter 3" and above shall
be done as per material specifications and special condition contract.
4.17.3 Fabrication of pipes from plate
Pipes shall be fabricated at site as and when required as per the specifications attached and
the actual Piping Material Specification.
5.0 ERECTION
5.1 Cleaning of Piping before Erection
Before erection all pre-fabricated spool pieces, pipes, fittings etc. shall be cleaned inside and
outside by suitable means. The cleaning process shall include removal of all foreign matter
such as scale, sand, weld spatter chips etc. by wire brushes, cleaning tools etc. and blowing
with compressed air/or flushing out with water. Special cleaning requirements for some
services, if any shall be as specified in the piping material specification or isometric or line list.
S.S jacketed piping requiring pickling shall be pickled to remove oxidation and discolouring due
to welding.
5.2 Piping Routing
No deviations from the piping route indicated in drawings shall be permitted without the
consent of Engineer- in-Charge.
Pipe to pipe, pipe to structure / equipments distances / clearances as shown in the drawings
shall be strictly followed as these clearances may be required for the free expansion of piping /
equipment. No deviations from these clearances shall be permissible without the approval of
Engineer-in-Charge.
In case of fouling of a line with other piping, structure, equipment etc. the matter shall be
brought to the notice of Engineer-in-Charge and corrective action shall be taken as per his
instructions.
5.3 Cold Pull
Wherever cold pull is specified, the Contractor shall maintain the necessary gap, as indicated
in the drawing. Confirmation in writing shall be obtained by the Contractor from the Engineer-
in-Charge, certifying that the gap between the pipes is as indicated in the drawing, before
drawing the cold pull. Stress relieving shall be performed before removing the gadgets for cold
pulling.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
5.4 Slopes
Slopes specified for various lines in the drawings / P&ID shall be maintained by the Contractor.
Corrective action shall be taken by the Contractor in consultation with Engineer-in-Charge
wherever the Contractor is not able to maintain the specified slope.
5.5 Expansion Joints / Bellows
Installation of Expansion Joints/Bellows shall be as follows:
¾ All Expansion joints / Bellows shall be installed in accordance with the specification and
installation drawings, supplied to the Contractor.
¾ Upon receipt, the Contractor shall remove the Expansion Joints/ Bellows from the
case(s) and check for any damage occurred during transit.
¾ The Contractor shall bring to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge any damage done to
the bellows / corrugations, hinges, tie-rods, flanges / weld ends etc.
¾ Each Expansion Joint / Bellow shall be blown free of dust / foreign matter with
compressed air or cleaned with a piece of cloth.
¾ For handling and installation of Expansion Joints, great care shall be taken while
aligning. An Expansion Joints shall never be slinged from bellows corrugations /
external shrouds, tie / rods, angles.
¾ An Expansion Joints / Bellow shall preferably be slinged from the end pipes / flanges or
on the middle pipe.
¾ All Expansion Joints shall be delivered to the Contractor at "Installation length",

maintained by means of shipping rods, angles welded to the flanges or weld ends or
by wooden or metallic stops.
¾ Expansion Joints stop blocks shall be carefully removed after hydrostatic testing.
Angles welded to the flanges or weld ends shall be trimmed by saw as per
manufacturer's instructions and the flanges or weld ends shall be ground smooth.
¾ The pipe ends in which the Expansion Joint is to be installed shall be perfectly aligned
or shall have specified lateral deflection as noted on the relevant drawings.
¾ The pipe ends / flanges shall be spaced at a distance specified in the drawings.
¾ The Expansion Joint shall be placed between the mating pipe ends / flanges and shall
be tack welded/bolted. The mating pipes shall again be checked for correct alignment.
¾ Butt-welding shall be carried out at each end of the expansion joint. For flanged
Expansion Joint, the mating flanges shall be bolted.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
¾ After the Expansion Joint is installed the Contractor shall ensure that the mating pipes
and Expansion Joints are in correct alignment and that the pipes are well supported
and guided.
¾ The Expansion Joint shall not have any lateral deflection. The Contractor shall maintain
parallelism of restraining rings or bellows convolutions.
¾ Precautions
• For carrying out welding, earthing lead shall not be attached with the Expansion
Joint.
• The Expansion bellow shall be protected from arc weld spot and welding spatter.
• Hydrostatic Testing of the system having Expansion Joint shall be performed with
shipping lugs in position. These lugs shall be removed after testing and certification
is over.
5.6 Flange Connections
While fitting up mating flanges, care shall be exercised to properly align the pipes and to check
the flanges for trueness, so that faces of the flanges can be pulled together, without inducing
any stresses in the pipes and the equipment nozzles. Extra care shall be taken for flange
connections to pumps, turbines, compressors, cold boxes, air coolers etc. The flange
connections to these equipments shall be checked for misalignment, excessive gap etc. after
the final alignment of the equipment is over. The joint shall be made up after obtaining
approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
Temporary protective covers shall be retained on all flange connections of pumps, turbines,
compressors and other similar equipments, until the piping is finally connected, so as to avoid
any foreign material from entering these equipments.
The assembly of a flange joint shall be done in such a way that the gasket between these
flange faces is uniformly compressed. To achieve this the bolts shall be tightened in a proper
sequence. All bolts shall extend completely through their nuts but not more than 1/4".
Steel to C.I. flange joints shall be made up with extreme care, tightening the bolts uniformly
after bringing flange flush with gaskets with accurate pattern and lateral alignment.
5.7 Vents and Drains
High point vents and low point drains shall be provided as per the instructions of Engineer-in-
Charge, even if these are not shown in the drawings. The details of vents and drains shall be
as per piping material specifications / job standards.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
5.8 Valves
Valves shall be installed with spindle / actuator orientation / position as shown in the layout
drawings. In case of any difficulty in doing this or if the spindle orientation / position is not
shown in the drawings, the Engineer-in-Charge shall be consulted and work done as per his
instructions. Care shall be exercised to ensure that globe valves, check valves, and other uni-
directional valves are installed with the "Flow direction arrow "on the valve body pointing in
the correct direction. If the direction of the arrow is not marked on such valves, this shall be
done in the presence of Engineer-in-Charge before installation.
Fabrication of stem extensions, locking arrangements and interlocking arrangements of valves

(if called for), shall be carried out as per drawings / instructions of Engineer-in-Charge.
5.9 Instruments
Installation of in-line instruments such as restriction orifices, control valves, safety valves, relief
valves, rotameters, orifice flange assembly, venturimeters, flowmeters etc. shall form a part of
piping erection work.
Fabrication and erection of piping upto first block valve / nozzle / flange for installation of
offline Instruments for measurement of level, pressure, temperature, flow etc. shall also form
part of piping construction work. The limits of piping and instrumentation work will be shown
in drawings / standards / specifications. Orientations / locations of take-offs for temperature,
pressure, flow, level connections etc. shown in drawings shall be maintained.
Flushing and testing of piping systems which include instruments mentioned above and the
precautions to be taken are covered in flushing, testing and inspection of piping. Care shall be
exercised and adequate precautions taken to avoid damage and entry foreign matter into
instruments during transportation, installation, testing etc.
5.10 Line Mounted Eqipments / Items
Installation of line mounted items like filters, strainers, steam traps, air traps, desuperheaters,
ejectors, samples coolers, mixers, flame arrestors, sight glasses etc. including their supporting
arrangements shall form part of piping erection work.
5.11 Bolts and Nuts
The Contractor shall apply molycoat grease mixed with graphite powder (unless otherwise
specified in piping classes) all bolts and nuts during storage, after erection and wherever
flange connections are broken and made-up for any purpose whatsoever. The grease and
graphite powder shall be supplied by the Contractor within the rates for piping work.
5.12 Pipe Supports
Pipe supports are designed and located to effectively sustain the weight and thermal effects of
the piping system and to prevent its vibrations. Location and design pipe supports will be
shown in drawing for lines 2” NB. However, any extra supports desired by Engineer-in-Charge
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
shall also be installed.
No pipe shoe / cradle shall be offset unless specifically shown in the drawings.
Hanger rods shall be installed inclined in a direction opposite to the direction in which the pipe
move during expansion.
Preset pins of all spring supports shall be removed only after hydrostatic testing and insulation
is over. Springs shall be checked for the range of movement and adjusted if necessary to
obtain the correct positioning in cold condition. These shall be subsequently adjusted to hot
setting in operating condition. The following points shall be checked after installation, with the
Engineer-in-Charge and necessary confirmation in writing obtained certifying that :
- All restraints have been installed correctly.
- Clearances have been maintained as per support drawings.
- Insulation does not restrict thermal expansion.
- All temporary tack welds provided during erection have been fully removed.
- All welded supports have been fully welded.
6.0 WELDING
Welding of pipelines shall be done as per applicable codes and Annexure-1
7.0 ERECTION
7.1 Pre-fabrication and Field Assembly
Extent of pre-fabrication shall be purely at the discretion of CONTRACTOR keeping in

view the following :-
7.1.1 Field joint shall be decided by CONTRACTOR keeping in view the transportation of pre-
fabricated pieces to site.
7.1.2 There can be some variations in the dimensions and level appearing in the
arrangement drawings and those actually occurring at site due to minor variations in
the location of equipments, structures, cut out etc. Adequate field joints shall be
provided, permitting assembly and erection of pipe work without major modification.
7.2 Supporting
Location and design of pipe supports shown in approved drawings and support
drawings shall be strictly followed.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
7.2.1 Supports shall be installed in such a way that they do not contribute to over stressing
of a line.
7.2.2 Fabrication and erection of additional supporting elements and structural fixtures which
in COMPANY's view are required for proper supporting of the system, shall be carried
out by CONTRACTOR at no extra cost.
7.2.3 All temporary supports, elements required for alignment, erection and assembly shall
be removed after completion of work.
7.3 Equipment hook-up
7.3.1 Prior to hook-up, the alignment and trueness of flange faces shall be checked to
ensure that no undue stresses shall be induced in the system while hooking up.
8.0 INSPECTION
8.1
8.2 CONTRACTOR shall provide all facilities/ assistance to COMPANY for proper execution
of their inspection without any extra charge.
8.3 All piping work shall be subjected to inspection by COMPANY at any time during
fabrication. CONTRACTOR shall furnish to COMPANY detailed work programme
sufficiently in advance, in order to enable COMPANY to arrange for inspection.
9.0 PROTECTIVE COATING
9.1 All above ground piping system shall be applied with protective coating in accordance
with specification for shop & field painting.
9.2 All under ground portion of piping system shall be coated with three layer P.E. coating.
CONTRACTOR shall prepared procedure for epoxy painting of burried pipeline for
approval of COMPANY. Procedure shall include surface preparation, brand and type of
coating to be adopted. Coating of pipes shall not commence without approval of
coating procedure. Total dry film thickness to be achieved shall not be less than 300
microns. Compatible primer and finish coat as recommended by coating manufacturer
shall only be applied. Coating integrity shall be checked by "Holiday detector" over full
length of coated pipe work. Coating to be supplied by CONTRACTOR shall be suitable
for design temperature.
9.3 Once the coating has been accepted by COMPANY, backfiling operation can be started.
In order to protect coated pipe from damage, the excavated trench shall be examined
for stone, rock and any other hard substance detrimental to coating. All such
substances shall be removed before lowering the pipe in the trench. COMPANY may
ask for a 100mm padding of clear sand under and above pipeline in rocky or otherwise
hard soil area. No additional payment on account of padding shall however be
admissible.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
10.0 FLUSHING
Completed piping systems shall be flushed by CONTRACTOR with fresh water, to clean
the pipe of all dirt, debris, and foreign material. CONTRACTOR shall prepare a
procedure for flushing of the system for approval of COMPANY. Flushing shall not be
commenced without approval of flushing procedure.
10.1 CONTRACTOR shall perform all activities like dismantling and reinstalling of all
strainers, in line instruments etc. before and after completion of flushing.
10.2 Flushing shall be considered as complete only after inspection and approval by
COMPANY.
10.3 Disposal of muck and flushing media shall be arranged by CONTRACTOR as directed
by COMPANY, in such a manner that it does not spoil the adjacent installation.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain COMPANY approval regarding the place and method to be
adopted for disposal of debris.
10.4 Record of flushing giving following details shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to

COMPANY for its approval and records :
a) Date of flushing
b) Identification of line : flushed-line number
11.0 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
11.1 Completed piping system as approved by COMPANY shall be hydrostatically tested in

the presence of COMPANY. The general requirements of hydrostatic testing shall be in
accordance with codes specified in section 2.0.
11.2 CONTRACTOR shall prepare hydrostatic test procedure based on specified codes. The
hydrostatic test shall commence only after approval of procedure by COMPANY.
11.3 Piping system shall be hydrostatically tested to a pressure corresponding to 1.4 times
the design pressure.
11.4 Fresh water shall be used as test media. CONTRACTOR shall locate the source of water
supply and arrange for transportation of water to test site. CONTRACTOR shall arrange
at his own cost the water analysis and confirm that water is suitable for testing. In
case any corrosion inhibitor is to added, the same shall be done after approval of
COMPANY.
11.5 Lines repaired subsequent to hydrostatic test shall be retested using the same
procedure as originally adopted. However COMPANY may waive such retest in case of
minor repairs by taking precautionary measures to ensure sound construction.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
11.6 All equipment and instruments used for hydrostatic test shall be approved by
COMPANY before start of tests.
11.7 Pressure gauges shall be installed on line to measure test pressures. In case of longer
lines two or more pressure gauges shall be installed as directed by COMPANY. One
gauge shall be installed at the discharge of the pressurising pump. Pressure gauge
used for hydrostatic testing shall be calibrated with dead weight tester in the presence
of Engineer-in-charge. Range of pressure gauge shall generally be 1.5 times the test
pressure.
11.8 Orifice plates and restriction orifices shall not be installed until hydrostatic testing is
completed. Temporary gaskets shall be used during testing.
11.9 First block valve of pressure instruments shall be half open & plugged at the time of
hydrostatic testing. Temperature connections shall be blanked off during testing.
11.10 All equipments, in line instruments, relief valves shall be disconnected from piping
system by means of blinds during testing. Control valves shall be replaced by spool
pieces during testing.
11.11 High point vents and low point drain required for testing in addition to those marked in
the drawings shall be provided by CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
11.12 All welded and screwed joints shall be kept clean for detecting leaks during testing.
11.13 Test pressure shall be maintained long enough to facilitate complete inspection of the
system. Minimum duration of test shall be 6 hours unless other wise specified.
Pressurising equipment shall be isolated immediately after test pressure is attained.
11.14 After successful completion of hydrostatic testing, the piping system shall be
dewatered. All lines shall be completely dried using compressed air. CONTRACTOR
shall make his own arrangement for supply of compressed air. Drying of lines shall be
considered complete on approval by COMPANY.
11.15 Test Records
The records in duplicate shall be prepared and submitted by CONTRACTOR as below :
a) Date of test
b) Identification of pipe tested - line number
c) Test pressure
d) Test results
e) Signature of CONTRACTOR
f) Approval signature by COMPANY.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-1
WELDING SPECIFICATION
1.0 GENERAL
This specification shall be followed for the fabrication of all types of welded joints of
carbon steel above ground natural gas service piping systems.
The welded pipe joints shall include the following :
a) All line pipe joints of the longitudinal and circumferential butt welded.
b) Attachments of castings, forgings, flanges.
c) Welded manifold headers and other sub-assemblies
d) Welded branch connections with or without reinforcing pads.
e) Joints in welded/ fabrication piping components.
f) The attachments of smaller connections for vents drain drips and other
instrument tappings.
Any approval granted by the Engineer-in-charge or owner's inspectors shall not relieve
the contractor of his responsibilities & guarantees.
1.1 Applicable Codes & Standards
All welding work, equipments for welding, heat treatment, other auxiliary functions and
the welding personnel shall be as per the requirements of the latest editions of the
following approved standards and procedures :-
i) Code for gas transmission and distribution piping systems. ANSI B31.8.
ii) Code for petroleum refinery piping, ANSI B31.3.
In addition, the following codes/ specifications referred to in the relevant code of

fabrication shall be followed for the welding/ brazing qualifications, consumable
qualifications and non destructive test procedures.
i) Standard for welding of pipelines and related facilities API-1104.

ii) Material Specifications - Welding rods, electrodes and filler materials -
ASME Sec. - IIC.
iii) Code for non destructive examination ASME Sec-V.
iv) Qualification standard for welding and brazing procedure and welders,
brazers, welding and brazing operators - ASME Sec-I
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
In the event of any difference due to the additional requirements mentioned in this
specification, over and above those obligation as per codes, this specification shall be
binding.
1.2 Base Material
a) In general carbon steel is used in this plant. The details of material

specifications are given in the welding Specification Chart.
b) The contractor shall provide the Manufacturer's test certificates for every heat
of the materials supplied by him.
1.3A Filler Materials
a) The Contractor shall provide all the necessary welding electrodes, filler
materials, etc. required for the execution of the work.
b) The welding electrodes/ filler wires supplied by the Contractor shall conform to
the class specified in the welding specification chart. The materials shall be of
the make approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
c) The electrode shall be suitable for the welding process recommended and base
metal used. Unless otherwise specified physical properties of the welds
produced by a electrode recommended for the welding of a particular base
metal shall not be lower than the minimum valves specified for the base metal
and shall correspond to the physical properties of the class of electrode
adopted. The choice of electrode shall be made after conducting the required
tests on the electrodes as per relevant standards, and shall be the sole
prerogative of the Engineer-in-charge.
d) Tungsten electrodes used shall conform to ASME Sec. II C SFA 5.12

specification. Thoriated Tungsten electrodes shall not be permitted due to
possible radiation hazard. Instead, ceriated Tungsten Electrodes (EWCe-2 or
equivalent) shall be used for GTA Welding.
e) Electrode qualification test records should be submitted as per the Exhibit-A

(attached) in respect of the electrodes tested by the contractor, for obtaining
the approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
f) The Contractor shall submit batch test certificate from the electrode
Manufacturers giving details of physical and chemical tests carried out by them,
for each batch of electrodes to be used.
g) All electrodes shall be purchased in sealed containers and stored properly to

prevent deterioration. The electrodes removed from the containers shall be
kept in holding ovens at temperature recommended by the electrode
Manufacture. Out-of-the oven time of electrodes before they are consumed
shall not exceed the limits recommended by the electrodes manufacturer. The
electrodes shall be handled with care to avoid any damage to flux covering.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
h) All low hydrogen type of electrodes shall be rebaked at 350°C for 1 hour
minimum and stored in ovens kept at 80-100°C before use. Recommendations
of the electrode Manufacturer shall be followed if available.
i) The electrodes, filler wires and flux used shall be free from rust, oil, greases,
earth and other foreign matter which can affect the quality of welding.
1.3B SHIELDING & PURGING GAS
a) Argon gas used in GTA welding for shielding purposes shall be 99.995% pure.
The purity of the gas shall be certified by the manufacturer. The rate of flow for
shielding purposes shall be established through procedure qualification tests.
Normally this rate may be 12-20 CFH.
b) Argon gas with a purity level of 99.995% shall be used for purging.
c) When GTAW process alone or a combination of GTA Wand SMAW processes is

recommended for the production of a particular joint, the purging shall be
maintained during the root pass and for the first filling pass to minimize
oxidation on the inner side of the pipe, unless otherwise specified in Welding
Specification Chart.
d) Initial purging shall be maintained for sufficient period of time so that at least
4-5 times the volume between the dams is displaced, in order to completely
remove the entrapped air. In no case should the initial purging period be less
than 10 minutes. High gas pressure should be avoided.
e) After initial purging, the flow of the backing gas should be reduced to a point
where only a slight positive pressure prevails. For systems, which have a small
volume (up to 1/2 cubic foot) to be purged, a gas flow rate of 6-CFH is usually
adequate. Systems of larger volume may require higher flow rates and these
should be established during procedure qualification tests.
f) Gas backing (purging) is not required for socket type of welded joints.
g) Dams, used for conserving inert gas during purging, shall be removed after
completion of the welding, and shall be accounted for. Wherever, removal of
dams is not possible after welding, use of water-soluble dams should be made.
1.4 Welding Consumables
The Contractor shall provide at this own expense all the welding consumables
necessary for the execution of the job such as electrodes filler wires, oxygen,
acetylene, etc. and these should bear the approval of the COMPANY.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
1.5 Equipment & Accessories
1.5.1 The Contractor should have the arrangement of sufficient number of welding and
cutting equipments, auxiliaries and accessories of sufficient capacities so as to meet
the target schedule.
1.5.2 All the equipment for performing the heat treatment, including transformers,
thermocouples, flow meters, automatic temperature recorders with suitable calibration
arrangement etc. shall be provided by the Contractor, at his own expense and these
should bear the approval of the COMPANY.
1.5.3 Contractor shall make necessary arrangements at his own expense for providing the
radiographic equipment, radiographic films, and all the equipment/ materials required
for carrying out the dye penetrant/ magnetic particle test for satisfactory and timely
completion of the job.
1.5.4 Redoing of any work necessitated by faulty equipments or operation used by the
Contractor, will be done at his own expense.
1.6 Welding Processes
1.6.1 Welding of various materials under this specification shall be carried out using Shielded
Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) Process with the approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
1.6.2 The welding processes to be employed are given in the welding specification chart. Any
deviation desired by the Contractor shall be obtained through the express consent of
the Engineer-in-charge.
1.6.3 Automatic and semi-automatic welding processes shall be employed only with the
express approval of the Engineer-in-charge. The welding procedure adopted and
consumables used shall be specifically approved.
1.6.4 A combination of different welding processes or a could be employed for a particular

joint only after duly qualifying the welding procedure as per the requirements of code
of fabrication to be adopted and obtaining the approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
1.7 End Preparation
1.7.1 End Preparation
The edges to be welded shall be prepared to meet the joint design requirements by
gas cutting, machining or grinding method. After gas cutting, oxides shall be removed
by chipping or grinding.
1.7.2 Cleaning
a) The ends to be welded shall be properly cleaned to remove paint, oil, greases,
rust, oxides, sand, earth and other foreign matter. The ends shall be
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
completely dry before the welding commences.
b) On completion of each run, craters, welding irregularities, slag etc., shall be

removed by grinding and chiseling. Wire brushes used for cleaning stainless
steel joints shall have stainless steel wires and the grinding wheels used for
grinding stainless steel shall be of a suitable type. Separate grinding wheels
and wire brushes should be used for carbon steels and stainless steels.
1.8 Alignment and Spacing
a) Prior to alignment, the contractor shall inspect the pipe ends inside and outside
for damage, dents, laminations etc. Pipe for welding shall be set up correctly
spaced. Temporary attachment of any kind shall not be welded. Every effort
shall be made to reduce misalignment by the use of clamp and rotation of
pipes to the best fit. For pipes of same nominal wall thickness, the off set
should not exceed 1.6mm. Any branch connections sleeve shall be at least
150mm from any other weld. The welds for fitting shall be so located that top
of the weld shall not come within 50mm of any other weld. The use of internal
line up clamps is mandatory for diameters 10" and above. However, in case
where it is impossible to use internal line up clamp, external line up clamp may
be used.
b) Tack welds, for maintaining the alignment, of pipe joints shall be made only by
qualified welders using approved WPS. Since the tack welds become part of the
final weldment they shall be executed carefully and shall be free from defects.
Defective tack welds must be removed prior to the actual welding of the joints.
1.9 Weather Conditions
1.9.1 The parts being welded and the welding personnel should be protected from rain and
strong winds. In the absence of such a protection no welding shall be carried out.
1.9.2 During field welding using GTAW process, particular care shall be exercised to prevent
any air current affecting the welding process.
1.10 Welding
1.10.1 Root Pass
a) Root pass shall be made with electrodes/ filler wires recommended in the
welding specification chart. The preferable size of the electrode is 2.5mm
diameter (12 SWG) but in no case greater than 3.25mm (10 SWG).
b) Uphill welding shall be adopted for welding pipes weld fixed with its axis
horizontal. Downward technique of welding shall not be used for welding of
pipes in horizontal position, unless specifically permitted by Engineer-in-charge
for a particular case.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
c) The root pass of but joints should be executed properly so as to achieve full
penetration with complete fusion of the root edges. Weld projection inside the
pipe shall not exceed .4mm wherever not specified by the applicable code.
d) Any deviations desired from the recommended welding technique and

electrodes indicated in the welding specification chart should be adopted only
after obtaining express approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
e) Welding shall be continuous & uninterrupted during a pass.
f) On completion of each run, craters, welding irregularities, slag etc., shall be

removed by grinding and chiselling.
g) While the welding is in progress care should be taken to avoid any kind of
movement of components, to prevent occurrence of weld cracks.
h) Fillet welds shall be made by shielded metal arc/ GTAW welding process
irrespective of the thickness and class of piping.
i) Peening shall not be used unless specified in the welding specification chart.
1.10.2 Joint Completion
a) Joint shall be completed using the class of filler wires/ electrodes,

recommended in the welding specification chart. Size of the electrode shall not
exceed 4 mm in diameter for stainless steels and alloy steels used for low
temperature applications.
b) Two weld beads shall not be started at the same point in different layers.
b) Butt joints shall be completed with a cover layer that would effect good cover
at the joint edge and a gradual notch free surface.
d) Each weld joints should have a workman like finish.
e) Weld identification mark shall be stamped clearly at each joint, just adjacent to
the weld. Metal stamping shall not be used on the thin wall pipe. Suitable paint
shall be used on thin wall pipes for identification.
f) No painting shall be done until the weld joint has been hydrostatically tested.
1.10.3 Dissimilar Welds
Where welds are to be produced between carbon steels and alloy steels, preheat and
post weld heat treatment requirements shall be those specified for corresponding alloy
steels and filler wire / electrodes shall correspond to ER 70 S-G or AWS E-7016/7018
type. For welds between two dissimilar Cr-Mo low alloy steels, preheat and post weld
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
heat treatments shall be those specified for higher alloy steel and electrodes used shall
correspond to those specified for steel of lower alloy content. For carbon steel or alloy
steel to stainless welds, use of filler wire / electrodes E/ER-309/E-310/E NiCr Fe-3 shall
be made. The welding procedure, electrodes / filler wires to be used shall be approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
1.11 Heat Treatment
1.11.1 Preheating
a) Preheating requirements for the various materials shall be as per the welding
specification chart attached. No welding shall be carried out without preheating
the joint to 10°C (50°F) when the ambient temperature is below 10 degree.
b) Preheating shall be performed using resistance or induction heating methods.

Preheating by gas burners, utilising any acetylene or oxy-propane gas mixtures,
with neutral flame may also be carried out when permitted by the Engineer-in-
charge.
c) Preheating shall extend uniformly to atleast three times the thickness of the
joint, but not less than 50mm, on both sides of the weld.
d) Preheating temperature shall be maintained over the whole length of the joint
during welding. Temperature indicating crayons or other temperature indicating
devices shall be provided by the contractor to check the temperature.
e) Preheating temperature shall be maintained over the whole length of the joint
during welding. Temperature recorders shall be provided by the Contractor to
record the temperature.
1.11.2 Post Heating
In case of alloy steel materials such as Cr-Mo steels, if the post weld heat treatment is
not performed immediately after welding, the weld joint and adjacent portion of pipe,
at least 50 mm on either side of weld, shall be uniformly heated to 300°c. This
temperature shall be maintained for half an hour minimum, and then wrapped with
mineral wool before allowing it to cool to room temperature. If the Post Heating
temperature specified in the Welding Specification Charts exceeds 300°C, the same
shall be followed. Similarly, if the welding specification chart specifies post-heat time,
the same shall be applicable. Post weld heat treatment as specified in the Welding
Specification Chart shall be carried out later on.
1.11.3 Postweld Heat Treatment
a) Post weld heat treatment, wherever required for joints between pipes, pipes an
fittings, pipe body and supports shall be carried out as per the relevant
specifications, applicable standards and the instructions of the Engineer-in-
charge. In this regard procedure qualification to be done before carrying out
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
PWHT in production welds.
b) The heat treatment of welded joints shall be carried out as per the
requirements laid down in ANSI B31.8 and welding specification chart.
c) The contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer-in-charge, the
details of the post weld heat treatment procedure, as per Exhibit `B'
attached, that the propose to adopt for each of the materials/ assembly/ part
involved, well before carrying out actual heat treatment.
d) Post weld heat treatment shall be done by using an electric resistance or

induction heating equipment as decided by the Engineer-in-charge.
e) While carrying out local post weld heat treatment, technique of application of
heat must ensure uniform temperature attainment at all points of the portion
being heat treated. Care shall be taken to ensure that width of treated band
over which specified post weld heat treatment is carried out, the temperature
attained is atleast as that specified in the relevant applicable standards/ codes.
f) Throughout the cycle of heat treatment, the portion outside the heated band
shall be suitably wrapped under insulation so as to avoid any harmful
temperature gradient at the exposed surface of pipe. For this purpose
temperature at the exposed surface of the pipes should not be allowed to
exceed 400°C.
g) The temperature attained by the portion under heat treatment shall be

recorded by means of thermocouple pyrometers. Adequate number of
thermocouples should be attached to the pipe directly at the equally spaced
location along the periphery of the pipe joint. The minimum number of
thermocouples attached per joint shall be 1 upto 6" dia, 2 upto 10" dia and 3
upto 12" and above. However the Engineer-in-charge can increase the required
minimum number of thermocouples to be attached if found necessary.
h) Automatic temperature recorders which have been duly calibrated should be

employed. The calibration chart of each recorder should be submitted to the
Engineer-in-charge prior to starting the heat treatment operation and his
approval should be obtained.
i) Immediately on completion of the heat treatment, the post weld heat

treatment charts/ records alongwith the hardness test results on the weld joints
(whenever required as per the welding specification chart), shall be submitted
to Engineer-in-charge for his approval.
j) Each joint shall bear an identification number which shall be maintained in the
piping sketch to be prepared by the contractor. The joint identification number
should appear on the corresponding post weld heat treatment charts. The
same identification numbers shall also be followed for identification for
corresponding radiographic films. The chart containing the identification
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
numbers and piping sketch shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge in

suitable folders.
k) The hardness of the heat affected zone as well as of the weld metal, after heat
treatment, shall be measured using suitable hardness tester and shall not
exceed the maximum hardness specified in the welding specification chart. The
weld joint shall be subjected to re-heat treatment when hardness measured
exceeds the specified limit, at the contractor's own expenses.
l) The contractor shall arrange for the hardness testing and shall maintain the
records of all joints tested. These records shall be checked by the plant
Owner's inspector.
1.12 Cleaning of the Weld Joints
All weld joints shall be free from adherent weld spatter, slag, dirt or foreign matter.
This can be achieved by brushing.
1.13 Inspection & Testing
1.13.1 General
a) The owner's inspector shall have free access to all concerned areas, where the
actual work is being performed. The contractor shall also offer the Owner's
inspector all means and facilities necessary for carrying out inspection.
b) The owner is entitled to depute his own inspector to the shop or field where
pre-fabrication and erection of pipelines are being done with (but not limited
to) the following objectives :-
i. To check the conformance to relevant standards and suitability of

various welding equipments and the welding performance.
ii. To supervise the welding procedure qualification.
iii. To supervise the welder performance qualifications.
c) Contractor shall intimate sufficiently in advance the commencement of

qualification tests welding works and acceptance tests, to enable the plant
owner's inspector to be present to supervise them.
1.13.2 Welding Procedure Qualifications
a) Welding Procedure Qualification shall be carried out in accordance with the

relevant requirements of API 1104/ ASME Sec-IX or other applicable codes and
other job requirements by the contractor at his expense. The contractor shall
submit the welding procedure specifications in format as per Exhibit-C
(attached) immediately after the receipt of the order.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
b) COMPANY's inspector will review, check and approve the welding procedure
submitted and shall release the procedure for procedure qualification tests. The
procedure qualification test shall be carried out by the Contractor under field
conditions at this own expense. A complete set of test results in format as per
Exhibit-D (attached) shall be submitted to the COMPANY's inspector for
approval immediately after completing the procedure qualification test and
atleast 2 weeks before the commencement of actual work. Standard tests as
specified in the code shall be carried out in all cases. In addition to these tests,
other tests like radiography, macro/ micro examination, hardness testers, dye
penetrant examination, Charpy V-notch etc. shall be carried out on specimens.
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to carry out all the tests required
to the satisfaction of the COMPANY's Inspector. The destructive testing of
welded joints shall be as per Annexure-2 and ASME Sec-IX.
1.13.3 Welder's Qualification
a) Welders shall be qualified in accordance with the API 1104/ ASME IX and other
applicable codes by the contractor at his expense. The butt weld test pieces of
the qualification test shall meet the radiographic tests requirements as
mentioned in this specification. The COMPANY's inspector shall witness the test
and certify the qualification of each welder separately. Only those welders who
have been approved by the COMPANY's inspector shall be employed for
welding. Contractor shall submit the welder qualification test reports in the
standard format and obtain express approval, before commencement of the
work. No welder shall be permitted to work without the possession of the
identify card. It shall be the responsibility of contractor to carry out
Qualification tests of welders.
b) The welders shall always have in their possession the identification card as
shown in Exhibit-E and shall produce it on demand by the COMPANY's
Inspector. It shall be the responsibility, of the Contractor to issue the identify
cards after it has been duly certified by the COMPANY. If a welder is found to
perform a type of welding for which he is not qualified, he shall be debarred
from doing any further work. All welds performed by an unqualified welder
shall be cut and redone by a qualified welder at the expense of the Contractor.
1.13.4 Visual Inspection
Inspection of all welds shall be carried out by COMPANY as per the latest editions of
the applicable codes and specifications. All finished welds shall be visually inspected for
parallel and axial alignment of the work, excessive reinforcement, concavity of welds,
shrinkage, cracks, under cuts, dimensions of the weld, surface porosity and other
surface defects. Under-cutting adjacent to the completed weld shall not exceed the
limits specified in the applicable standard/ code.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
1.13.5 Non-destructive Examination
The non destructive examination shall mainly consist of examination using x-ray
radiography as detailed in Annexure-4.
Radiographic examination of one hundred percent (100%) girth welds will be required
by the COMPANY. Welds shall meet the standards of acceptability as set forth in API
1104 and as per the requirements laid in subsequent paragraphs.
The CONTRACTOR shall make all the arrangements for the radiographic examination of
work covered by this specification at his expense.
The COMPANY will review all the radiographs of welds and inform the CONTRACTOR
regarding unacceptable welds. The decision of the COMPANY shall be final and binding
in this regard.
All requirements mentioned in the specification shall be arranged and executed by the
CONTRACTOR through his own resources. In addition, for pipes with wall thickness
9.5mm and above, ultrasonic inspection is required in the following cases as per
Annexure-3 of this specification.
a) On the first 100 welded joints corresponding to each automatic (GTAW/

GMAW) welding procedure used.
b) When 20mm or more are cut from the pipe end as supplied, the ends shall be
ultrasonically inspected for an additional length of 20mm to ensure no
lamination exist.
c) When welds are repaired.
d) When in the opinion of COMPANY, ultrasonic inspection is required to confirm

or clarify defects indicated by radiography.
e) When automatic procedure is used at least 10cm on each weld shall be

ultrasonically inspected at COMPANY's discretion.
In addition, ultrasonic inspection may be required for certain critical weldings of the
pipeline (i.e. tie-ins, welding of valves, flanges) randomly selected at COMPANY's
discretion. All fillet and groove welds other than that radiographed shall be subjected
to dye pentrant/ MP inspection. The non destructive test system used for inspecting
welds must be approved by the COMPANY.
Weld quality is judged on the basis of the acceptability criteria mentioned below :
Any weld which as a result of radiographic and / or ultrasonic examination in the

opinion of COMPANY exhibits imperfections greater than the limits stated in API-1104
latest edition or as superseded in this article shall be considered defective and shall so
be marked with an identification paint marker.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
In addition to the API-1104 requirements, the welds containing cracks including crater
cracks regardless of size of location are unacceptable.
i. Any amount of inadequate penetration of the root bead as defined by API-1104

is unacceptable.
ii. Any amount of incomplete fusion between the root and bevel as defined by
API-1104 is unacceptable.
iii. Unrepaired burn through areas are unacceptable.
Contractor shall appoint agency for carrying out the radiography works at site from the
list of agency (ies) enclosed in the bid document.
• The Radiographic Examination procedures to be adopted shall be submitted by

the contractor as per Exhibit-F and shall be got approved from the Owner's
Inspector prior to employment. A person qualified to ASNT Level-II or ASNT
Level-III in Radiographic testing shall prepare the procedure. The Radiography
Procedure shall be established to demonstrate that the required sensitivity can
be consistently achieved under the most unfavorable parameters (e.g. source
to film distance, geometric unsharpness, thickness etc.). The radiographic
technique and procedure adopted shall conform of the requirements mentioned
in Article 2 as well as Article 22 of ASME Sec.V. The IQI sensitivity obtained
shall be equal to or better than the requirements mentioned in Article 2 of
ASME Sec.V. Source side penetrameter shall be used in establishing
radiographic procedure / technique. The acceptance criteria shall be as per the
relevant codes of Fabrication and over riding requirements if mentioned else
where in the technical specifications of the contract. The Contractor shall be
responsible for carrying out Radiography; rectification of defects and re-
radiography of welds repaired/rectified at his cost.
• The extent of Radiography shall be as per specifications to be supplied to the

Contractor. For welds between dissimilar materials, the extent of Radiographic
Examination shall be the more stringent of the two recommended for the
materials being welded. Wherever random Radiography is called for, in a
particular piping class, the dissimilar materials weld joints shall essentially be
included.
• Type of Radiation source and film to be used shall be as per Exhibit-H for
carrying out radiographic examination. However if specifications (as given else
where in the contract) for some critical material require usage of X-Radiation,
then Radiography shall be done using X-Rays only.
• The Contractor shall fulfill all the statutory and owner's safety requirements
while handling X-ray and Gamma-ray equipments.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
• In case of random radiography, the joints for Radiography shall be selected by

the Owner's Inspector and the Radiography shall be performed in his presence,
if he instructs the contractor to do so. The contractor shall furnish all the
radiographs, to the Owner's Inspector immediately after processing along with
evaluation by a person qualified to ASNT Level-II in Radiographic testing, inline
with Article 2 of ASME Sec.V. The certificate of ASNT / ISNT Level II
qualification of the NDT personnel shall be submitted to owner's inspector for
his approval prior to start of job.
• The Contractor shall provide the Owner's Inspector, all the necessary facilities
at site such as a dark room with controlled temperature, illuminator (viewer)
suitable for varying densities, a duly calibrated electronic densitometer with
batteries, magnifying glass, tracing papers, ruler, marking pencils etc. to enable
him to review the radiographs.
• Where random radiography is specified, the first weld of each welder shall be
completely radiographed. In the case of pipe of size 6" and below, the first two
welds shall be completely radiographed.
• For each weld performed by a welder found unacceptable, two additional

checks shall be carried out on welds performed by the same welder. This
operation is iterative and the of two additional welds for each weld deemed
unsatisfactory shall be continued till such time that two consecutive welds of
satisfactory quality are found for every defective weld.
• The Contractor shall carry out these additional radiographic testing at his own
expense. To avoid the possibility of too many defective welds by a single
welder remaining undetected for a long period to time, the Contractor shall
promptly arrange for Radiographic Examination so that there is no
accumulation of defective joints.
• Contractor shall quote rates for X-ray as well as Gamma Ray for joints indicated
to be radiographed by X-ray in Table of Exhibit-H.
1.13.6 Check shots
(a) Owner / Engineer- in- charge or his representative shall select 5% of the total
joints radiographed on a day for check shots. Contractor shall carry out check
shots as directed.
(b) Weld profiles of check shots shall be compared with weld profile observed in
the earlier Radiographs. In the event of anyone variation in the check shots
and earlier Radiographs, contractor shall re-shoot the entire lot of joints
radiographed by particular Radiography agency on the particular date. All the
re-shot films shall be compared with the originally submitted films.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
1.13.7 Magnetic Particle & Liquid Penetrant Examination
a) Whenever such tests are specified, the tests shall be carried out on joints
chosen by the Owner's inspector, as per ASME Section V article 6 and 7
respectively. The tests are to be performed by a person possessing a valid
ASNT / ISNT Level-II qualification in the method being used.
(b) For austenitic stainless steels and other nonmagnetic materials, liquid (dye)
penetrant test shall be carried out. For carrying out this test, the materials shall
be brought within a temperature limit of 15° to 50°C.
1.13.8 Hardness Test
Hardness requirements for welds shall be as per the Welding Specification Chart / Non
Destructive Examination Specification attached elsewhere in the contract. Hardness
testing shall be carried out by Vickers Hardness Tester during welding procedure
qualification and shall be cross sectional. For production welds, hardness testing shall
be carried out by portable digital hardness testers. Poldi hardness tester shall not be
permitted. Contractor shall produce documentary evidence/calibration certificate to the
Owner's Inspector and obtain approval of the hardness testing equipment.
1.13.9 Proof Tests
Hydrostatic and pneumatic tests shall be performed as per the requirements laid down
in the respective flushing & testing specification/ applicable codes to demonstrate the
soundness of the welds. The tests shall be conducted only after fulfilling the
requirements of visual examination, radiography etc. and after the entire work has
been certified by the Owner's inspector, as fit for subjecting to such test.
1.14 Repairs of Welds
a) Defects ascertained, through the inspection methods, which are beyond

acceptable limits shall be removed from the joint completely by the process of
chipping and grinding.
b) When an entire joint is judged unacceptable, the welding shall be completely

cut and the edges be suitably prepared as per required alignment tolerances.
The welded joint shall again be examined following standard practices.
c) No repair shall be carried out without prior permission of the Owner's inspector.
d) Where random radiography is specified, the test welds of each welder shall be
completely radiographed. In the case of pipes of sizes 6" and below, the first
two welds shall be completely radiographed.
e) For each weld found unacceptable due to a welder's fault, two additional
checks should be carried out on welds performed by the same welder. This
operation is interactive and the procedure of radiographing two additional
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
welds for each weld deemed unsatisfactory shall be continued till such time
that the two consecutive welds of satisfactory quality are found for every
defective weld.
The contractor shall carry out these additional radiographic testing.
To avoid the possibility of too many defective welds by a single welder

remaining undetected for a long period of time, the Contractor shall promptly
arrange for radiographic examination so that there is no accumulation of
defective joints.
1.15 Limitations on Repairs
Only one attempt at repair of any region is permitted. Repairs are limited to a
maximum 30% of the weld length. For internal or external repairs which open the weld
root, only 20% of the weld length may be repaired. Repairs opening the root must
only be carried out in the presence of COMPANY. The minimum length of a repaired
area shall be 100mm as measured over the recapped length. Welds containing cracks
shall be cut out and rebevelled to make a joint, COMPANY shall authorise all repairs.
1.16 Weld Rejected by Accumulation of Defects
Where a weld is rejected by the accumulation of defect clause, as defined by API-1104

and this specification, repairs within these limitations are permitted. Defects in the
filling and capping passes shall be repaired preferentially.
1.17 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED BY CONTRACTOR (4 COPIES EACH)
a) Electrode and Welding Consumable Qualification Records as per Exhibit-A, for

the Welding Consumables tested and approved for the work.
b) Batch Test Certificates, for the Electrodes used, obtained from the Electrode
Manufacturers.
c) Proposed Heat Treatment Procedure as per Exhibit-B.
d) Heat Treatment Charts.
e) Weld joint hardness test results.
f) Welding Procedure Specifications as per Exhibit-C immediately after receipt of
the order.
g) Welding Procedure Qualification records as per Exhibit-D.
h) Welder Performance Qualification records as per Exhibit-E immediately after
conducting Welder Qualification Tests.
i) Radiography Procedure as per Exhibit-F and other NDT procedures.
j) Radiographic test Report along with Radiographs and other NDT reports.
k) Piping Sketch (Isometric) giving all the details regarding the pipe specifications,
welded joints, joints radiographed magnetic particle, tested, ultrasonic tested,
penetrant tested, joints heat treated, WPS used, welders identification number,
etc.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
EXHIBIT-A
Sheet 1 of 4
ELECTRODE QUALIFICATIONS TEST RECORD
A: Tested at Date :
(Site Name)
Test Period :
Manufacturer's Name :
Brand Name :
Batch Number & size Tested :
Classification & Code :
Intended for Welding in positions :
In combination with (if any) :
Code of Reference (used for testing) :
Special requirements (if any) :
B: All - Weld Tensile Test
Pre-heat temperature :
Postweld Heat Treatment Details :
Visual Examination :
Radiographic Examination Results :

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
Sheet 2 of 4
Tensile Test Results :
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. Identification U.T.S. Yield Point Elongation Remarks
No. Number
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C: Impact Test Results
Test Temperature : Notch in :
Type of Specimens (Impd, Charpy : Size of Specimens :
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Specimen No. Impact Value Average
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
D: Chemical Analysis Result
Electrode size used :
Batch No.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
%C %S %P %Si %Mn %Cr %Ni %Mo
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
Sheet 3 of 4
E: Fillet Weld Test Results
Welding Positions :
Base Materials :
Size of electrode used :
Visual Inspection Results : 1)

2)
3)
Micro Test Results
Fracture Test Results :
Remarks :
F: Other Test Results
i) Transverse Tensile Test :
In Combination with :
Position of Welding :
Preheat Temperature :
Postweld Heat Treatment :
Radiography :
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Identification No. U.T.S. Fracture in Remarks
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
Sheet 4 of 4
2. Guide Bend Test
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Position ID No. Root, Face or Remarks
Side Bend
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
3
4
5
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Any other tests
Conclusions
Approved By :
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
EXHIBIT-B
Sheet 1 of 2
STRESS RELIEF HEAT TREATMENT PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
Name of the Heat - Treatment :.................................................................

Name of the Project :.....................................Specification
Reference No. ..............
1. General Details
Name of the Equipment : ............................................................................
Name of the Assembly/ Part : .....................................................................
Assembly/ Part Drawing No. : .....................................................................
Material : .................................................................................................
2. Furnace Details
Type of Heating : Gas/ Oil/ Elec. Res./ Induction (Tick Mark)
Capacity (size) : ........................................................................................

Maximum Temp. (°C)
Method of temp. measurement : ...................................................................
Atmosphere Control : .................................................................................
3. Heat Treatment Cycle Details
Charging Temp. °C : ...................................................................................
Rate of Heating, °C/Hr : ..............................................................................
Soaking Temp., °C : ...................................................................................
Soaking Time, Hrs. : ..................................................................................
Rate of Cooling, °C/Hr : ..............................................................................
Mode of Cooling : ......................................................................................

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
Sheet 2 of 2
4. Other Details, if any : .................................................................................
5. The following documents are to be furnished :

along with these specification :
i) Material Test Certificates
ii) Assembly/ Part Details

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
EXHIBIT-C
Sheet 1 of 2
STANDARD PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION NO.
for ................................ Welding of .............................. Pipe and Fittings
• Process & type ......................................................................................... (Details of special

machines).
• Material .................................................................................................... (Pipes to which

the procedure applied, grade of steel, type of pipe, Reference Specification).
• Diameter and wall thickness ........................................................................ (Series of dia

and thickness to which procedure is applicable)
• Joint Design .............................................................................................
• Filler Metal and Number of Beads .................................................................
• Electrical or Flame Characteristics ................................................................
• Position .....................................................................................................
• Direction of Weldings .................................................................................. (Uphill,

Downhill, Mixed)
• Number of Welders .....................................................................................
• Time Lapse between passes ........................................................................
• Type of Line-up Clamp ................................................................................
• Removal of Line-up Clamp ........................................................................... (Minimum

percentage of welding carried out before removal of clamps)
• Cleaning ....................................................................................................
• Preheat, Stress Relief .................................................................................
• Shielding Flux ............................................................................................
• Speed of Travel ..........................................................................................
• Sketches and Tabulations (to be attached) ....................................................
• Wire Speed (rate of wire speed and variation range) ........................................
• Minimum No. of passes which must be completed before discontinuing weld.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
Sheet 2 of 2
• Minimum No. of welders required for the first pass and second pass :
Tested : ....................................... Welder ......................................
Approved : ....................................... Welding Supt. ............................
Accepted : ....................................... Chief Engineer ...........................

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
EXHIBIT-D
Sheet 1 of 2
COUPON TEST RECORD
Location .............................................................................................................
Date ................................... State ................................ Roll Weld ...................... Fixed position
weld ............................................... welder ................................... Mark
.................................................. Welding Time .......................................... Time of day
............................... M. Temperature ................................ F. Weather Condition
........................................ Wing break used ......................................... Voltage
.................................. Amperage ............................................... Type of welding machine
...................................................... Size ................................... Filler Metal
......................................................................................................... Size of reinforcement
........................................................................................... Pipe kind and Grade
............................................................................................. Wall thickness
........................................................... Dia O.D. ............................
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Bead No. ............................................................................................................ Size of electrode

................................................................................................ No. of electrode
..................................................................................................
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Coupon Stenciled ................................................................................................ Original

Dimension of Plate .................................................................................. Original area of plate
(inch2) ................................................................................ Maximum Load
................................................................................................... Tensile S/ in. plate area
....................................................................................... Fracture Location
................................................................................................
Procedure Qualifying Test Qualified

Welder Line Test Disqualified
Max. tensile strength ................... min. tensile strength ..........................................
Avg. tensile strength ........................ Remarks on tensile strength ...........................
1. .................................................................................................................
2. .................................................................................................................
3. .................................................................................................................
4. .................................................................................................................
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
Sheet 2 of 2
Remarks on Bend Tests
1. .................................................................................................................
2. .................................................................................................................
3. .................................................................................................................
4. .................................................................................................................
Remarks on Nick Tests
1. .................................................................................................................
2. .................................................................................................................
3. .................................................................................................................
4. .................................................................................................................
Other Tests ........................................................................................................
( Use back for additional remarks )

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
EXHIBIT-E
WELDER's IDENTIFICATION CARD
Name :
Identification :
Date of Testing :
Valid Unit :
Approval of Welding :
Welding Position :
Material :
Diameter :
Wall Thickness :
Type of Welding Consumable :
Approved By : Employer's Signature

with Seal
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
EXHIBIT-F
Sheet 1 of 1
RADIOGRAPHIC PROCEDURE FOR PIPE WELDING
1. Location
2. Date of Testing
3. Name of Supervised Contractor
4. Material
5. Dia. & Thickness
6. Type of Weld Joint
7. Radiation Source (X-ray, gamma ray)
8. Type of equipment (external/ internal)
9. Intensifying screens and material
10. Filter type and placement mask, diaphragm lead screen etc. adjacent to radiation sources or
specimen.
11. Geometric relationship (source local spot size, max and min source strength, object to film
distance, radiation angle with respect to weld and film).
12. Limit of film coverage
13. Film type and make
14. Exposure Time
15. Processing (time temperature for development stop bath or rinse, fixation, washing, drying
etc.)
16. Density
17. Sensitivity
18. Type of penetrameter
Approval of the COMPANY Signature of CONTRACTOR

with seal
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
WELDING SPECIFICATION CHART EXHIBIT-G

Sheet 1 of 2
Class :
Material Specification :
Pipes : API 5L Gr. X 60, API 5L Gr. B API 5L Gr. X 42
Fittings : A 105, A234 Gr. WPB. MSS-SP-75, Gr. WPHY42, MSS-S
Flanges : A 105, MSS-SP-44 Gr. F42, MSS-SP as Gr. WPH 60
Other : 44 Gr. F6C
Base Metal of NCL :
Welding Processes : Groove Joints : Butt
Root Pass SMAW Filler Pass SMAW Root Pass SMAW Filler Pass SMAW Filler Joints/ Socket Joints :
SMAW
Welding Materials : Groove Joints : Butt
Root Pass E6010G/ E7010G Filler Pass F7010G/ E8010G/ E8818G

Root Pass E7010/ E7018G/ E8018G Filler Pass F7016/ E7018G/ E80118G
Filler Joints/ Socket Joints : E7016/ E7018/ E7018G/ E8018G
Backing Page Consumable :
Gases : Purging Sheilding
Gas Composition : Purging Sheilding
Preheating : 10 min for all welds, 100°C Post heating
Post weld heat treatment :
Holding temp. : 595-650 C Holding Time : 1 Hr. per inch thk

Rate of heating : 200 C/hr max. Min holding time : 1 hr.
Method of cooling : Controlled Rate of cooling : 200°C/hr max.
Mechanical property requirements :

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
Sheet 2 of 2
Charpy `V' notch impact test valve :
Normal : 22 J
Average : 27 J
At temperature : 0 °C
Hardness : 300 HV10 (for weld & HAZ)
Code of fabrication : ANSI B31.8; API 1104 and welding specifications.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
TECHNICAL NOTES
1. Welding, heat treatment and non destructive testing shall be carried out in accordance with
the requirement of ANSI B31.8/ API-1104 and additional requirement specified in the
specification. In case of conflict between code and specification more stringent conditions shall
be applicable.
2. No welding shall be carried out without preheating the joint to 10°C (50 °F) when the ambient
temperature is below 10°C (50 °F).
3. Preheat shall be applied while welding the following material as detailed below :
API 5L Gr. B : Thickness upto 100 °F min.

and inclusive of 12mm
A 105 :
MSS-SP-44 Gr. F60 : Thickness beyond 200 °F
A 234 Gr. WPB : 12 mm
MSS-SP-75-WPHY60
4. For fillet welds complete welding may be carried out using the electrodes recommended for
filler passes.
5. All weldments & HAZ shall meet the hardness requirements of 300 HV10 during procedure
qualification. If the hardness exceeds 300 HV10 the joints shall be heat treated at temp. 1100-
1250 °F for one hour. The heating and cooling rates shall be decided during procedure
qualification subject to a maximum of 200 °C/Hr. Hardness testing shall be carried out by
Vickers hardness tester during welding procedure qualification test only. No hardness test is
required for production welds.
6. The electrodes used shall meet the following additional requirement :
Specification UTS (Min.) (As welded) Impact (As welded)
E7018-G 52.7 kg/mm2 20 ft. lb. at 0°C
E7018-I 52.7 kg/mm2 -
E6010 - -
E6018 - 20 ft. lb. at 0°C
7. All the weldments & HAZ shall meet the impact test requirement of 20 ft. lb at 0°C.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-2
1.0 DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF WELDED JOINT - BUTT WELDS
1.1 Preparation
Having passed the visual and the non destructive inspection, the test weld shall be subjected
to mechanical test.
After satisfactory completion of all visual and non destructive testing the procedure test weld
shall be set aside for a period not less than 24 hours. No further work on the test weld and no
cutting of test specimens from the weld be performed till a period of at least 24 hours has
expired.
Weld specimens, for pipe diameter greater than or equal to 12.3/4" shall be taken from the
positions indicated in Fig. 1 of this specification from areas as free from defects as possible.
For this reason it is necessary to take the previous non destructive tests into account. The
minimum no. of tests to be carried out is given in Table-I of this specification.
The test shall be carried out at laboratories approved by COMPANY. The specimens shall be
prepared in accordance with the figure given in the paragraphs which refer to the individual
test.
Table-I
TYPE AND NUMBER OF TEST SPECIMENS FOR

PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION TEST
Pipe Size, Number of Specimens

Out-side Tensil Tensil Nick Root Face Side Macro Hard- Impa Total
diameter e API e ISO Break Bend Bend Bend ness ct
Inches
Wall Thickness > ½ inch (12.7mm) and under
Under 2 3/8 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 4
2 3/8 to 4½ 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 4
incl.
Over 4½ less 2 0 2 2 2 0 2 2 12 24
than 12 3/4
12 3/4 and 2 2 4 4 4 0 2 2 24 44
over
Wall Thickness > ½ inch (12.7mm)
4½ and 0 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 4
smaller
Over 4½ less 2 0 2 2 2 0 2 2 12 24
than 12 3/4
12 3/4 and 2 2 4 0 0 8 2 2 24 44
over
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
1.2 Tensile Strength
Specimens for pipe diameter over 12 3/4" shall be taken from the position indicated in
Fig. 1 of this specification. Two API type specimen shall be taken for pipe diameter
greater than or equal to 12 3/4".
1.3 Nick-Break Test
1.3.1 Preparation
Specimens for nick-break test with notches thus worked can break in the base metal,
instead of in the fusion zone; therefore an alternative test piece may be used after
authorisation by the COMPANY with a notch cut in the reinforcement of outside weld
bead to a maximum depth of 1.5mm measured from the surface of the weld bead.
1.4 Macroscopic Inspection
1.4.1 Preparation
Specimens shall be taken from the positions indicated in Fig. 1 of this specification and
shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM E2 and E3.
The width of the macrosection has to be at least three times the width of the weld.
The section is to be prepared by grinding or polishing and etching to clearly reveal the
weld metal and heat effected zone.
1.4.2 Method
Specimens shall be carefully examined under the microscope with a magnification of at

least 25 times. The COMPANY may ask for a macrograph with 5 times magnification
for documentation purposes.
1.4.3 Requirements
Under macroscopic examination, the welded joints shall show good penetration and
fusion, without any defect exceeding the limits stated in the evaluation criteria of the
nick break test.
1.5 Hardness Test
1.5.1 Preparation
The prepared macrosection is to be used for hardness testing using the Vickers
method with 100 N (10 kg) load. Indentations are to be made along traverses each
approximately 1mm below the surface at both side of the weld.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
In the weld metal a minimum of 6 indentations equally spaced along the traverses are
to be made. The HAZ indentations are to be made along the traverses for
approximately 0.5mm each into unaffected material, and starting as close to the fusion
line as possible.
One indentation at each side of the weld along each traverse has to be made on
parent metal. Reference is made to fig. 3 of this specification. The indentation are to
be made in the adjacent region as well as on the opposite side of the macrosection
along the specified traverses.
1.5.2 Method
The test shall be carried out in accordance with Recommendation ISO R81, Vickers
hardness, using laboratory type machine controlled as per-recommendation of ISO R
146 and using a diamond pyramid penetrator set at 2.37 rad. (136) with a load of 100
N (10 kg).
1.5.3 Requirements
Hardness value shall not exceed 300 H VI0 . In case of a single reading slightly (+10
HV) higher than the specified limit, further indentations should be made to check if the
high value was an isolated case.
All the hardness values obtained from the heat effected zone shall not exceed 100 HV
with respect to the average hardness of the values obtained for the base metal.
If these additional tests mentioned above give a hardness within the specification limit,
the slightly higher value may be accepted.
1.6 Charpy-V-notch Impact Test
1.6.1 Specimens shall be taken from the position indicated in Fig. 1 of this specification. The
test specimens will be prepared in accordance with ISO R 148. Charpy V-notch
specimens shall have dimensions as given in Fig. 3 of the specification.
Three test specimens shall be taken from each sample and they shall be cut and
worked so that their length is transversal and perpendicular to the weld bead with the
notch position as shown in Fig. 4 of this specification. The notch shall be perpendicular
to the roller surface. The test specimens width shall depend upon the pipe wall
nominal thickness as following :
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nominal wall thickness in Test Specimens width in
mm mm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
> 12 12
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
> 9.5 and ≤ 12 7.5
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
≥ 7 and ≤ 9.5 5
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<7 2.5
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.6.2 Test Method
The test shall be carried out as indicated in ISO R 148 "Beam Impact Test V-notch.
Test pieces shall be immersed in a thermostatic bath and maintained at the test
temperature for at least 15 minutes. They shall than be placed in the testing machine
and broken within 5 seconds of their removal from the batch.
1.6.3 Requirements
The impact energy shall be greater or equal to :-
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Test Specimens in Average of Minimum
mm Three specimens Single Value
Joule (min) (Note-2) Joules (Note 1)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 27 22
7.5 21.5 17.5
5 18.5 15.0
2.5 10.0 8.0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note:
1) Only one value is permitted to be lower than average upto the value specified.
1.7 Bend Test Requirements
The bend test specimens shall be made and tested as per the requirements of API-
1104 sixteenth edition - May, 1983 except that the dimensions of Jig for guided bend
test fig. 5 para 2.6 API-1104 shall be modified as follows :
Radius of the plunger °A' =2t

Radius of the die °B' = 3 t + 1.6mm
Width of the die °C' = 50.8
The acceptance criteria shall however be as per para 2.643 and 2.653 of API-1104
sixteenth edition - May, 1983.
Note t = Thickness of Specimen (nominal)

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-3
1.0 ULTRASONIC INSPECTION
In addition to the radiographic inspection ultrasonic inspection is required as per

conditions mentioned in Annexure-1 of this specification.
This section concerns manual ultrasonic inspection. However ultrasonic inspection by

automatic equipment may be used if approved by the COMPANY.
1.1 Equipment and Operators
The CONTRACTOR who carries out the ultrasonic inspection shall have sufficient
qualified personnel, equipment and instrument at his disposal to be able to effect the
tests without hindering or delaying the pipeline assembly operations.
• Calibrate the equipment;

• Perform an operational test under production conditions;
• Interpret the screen picture;
• Evaluate the size and location of reflectors
• Interpret the type of defects detected.
The COMPANY has the option of checking the ability of personnel employed for
ultrasonic testing by means of qualification tests.
The CONTRACTOR appointed to carry out UT inspection shall supply the instruments
necessary for their execution on site.
1.2 Specification for Ultrasonic Testing Procedure
Qualification
Before work begins the CONTRACTOR shall present a specification describing the
proposed U.T. procedure qualification.
This specification shall be state, as an indication only but not limited to the following
information :
• Type of U.T. equipment used

• Type and dimensions of transducers
• Frequency range
• Details for calibration
• Coupling medium
• Inspection technique
• Record details
• Reference to the welding procedure where it is intended to adopt the
specification.
• Temperature range of the joints to be inspected.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
1.3 Qualification of Ultrasonic Inspection Procedure
The ultrasonic inspection procedure shall be approved by the COMPANY. Before

inspection begins, the COMPANY may require the qualification test of the ultrasonic
inspection procedure. This specification test consists in testing (under normal operating
conditions) some CONTRACTOR welds made according to the same production
procedure, when there are typical defects the test intends to detect.
1.4 Test Procedure
Circumferential weld shall be inspected from both sides using angled. Probes.
The surface with which the probe comes into contact shall be free of metal spatter,
dirt, iron oxide and scales of any type: therefore it shall be necessary to clean a strip at
least 50mm wide on both sides of the weld with steel - wire brushes and anyhow the
cleaned strip must be atleast wide enough to allow full skip examination.
If during the test, echoes of doubtful origin appear, it shall be necessary to inspect a
convenient area on the pipe surface, close to the weld, with a straight beam
transducer in order to check whether any manufacturing defects are present which
could have interfered with the ultrasonic beam.
By way of an example, the equipment shall include but not be limited to the following :
• Ultrasonic equipment and coupling medium

• Sample sections for calibration of instruments.
• Equipment for cleaning of surface to be examined.
• Rulers calibrated in centimeters for exact location of the position of defects.
The characteristics of the above-listed instruments and equipment shall guarantee:
a) that the required standards of the inspection procedure, as previously

established and approved by the COMPANY, are satisfied.
b) continuous operation
All the instruments and equipment shall be approved by the COMPANY before
being used. The COMPANY has the authority to reject any item which is
considered unsuitable. The decision of the COMPANY is final. The
CONTRACTOR appointed to carry out ultrasonic inspection shall also ensure
the operational efficiency and maintenance of the instruments and equipment,
and shall immediately substitute any item rejected by the COMPANY.
All the instrument and equipment necessary for carrying out ultrasonic
inspection on site shall satisfy the requirements laid down by the public board
of institutions which regulate "safety at work".
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
1.5 Ultrasonic Instruments
The ultrasonic instruments :
• Shall be each pulse type, able to generate, receive and display, on the screen a
cathode ray tube (CRT) pulse, at frequencies between 1 and 6 mhz. The useful
part of the CRT screen shall be at least 70m wide and at least 50mm high.
• Shall have various amplification, with steps of 1 or 2 dB over a range of a least

60 dB.
• The regulation control shall be accurate to within 1 dB and this accuracy shall
be certified by the instrument manufacturer.
• May be powered by a battery or an electric generator. In the first case, the

autonomy of operation (endurance) of the instrument shall be sufficient to
carry on working without frequent interruptions, and the instrument shall be
equipped with an automatic switch which switches it off when the battery runs
down, in the second case, there must be a voltage stabilising device with a
tolerance of 2 volts.
1.6 Probes
The probes used shall have dimensions, frequencies, and a refraction angle suited to
the type of steel, the diameter the thickness of the pipeline and to the joint design.
1.7 Reference Sample Pieces
The efficiency of the equipment used, the effective refraction angle of the probe, and
the beam output points, shall be checked using a V1 and V2 sample block, IIW type or
the calibration block ASTM E-428.
For the calibration of runs and the regulation of detection sensitivity during the test, a
calibration piece be used. This piece shall be taken from the production material, and
will be at least 150mm long (measured in the direction of the axis), and at least 50mm
wide (measured in the direction of the circumference), (see Fig. 4 of this specification).
In the middle of the inside and the outside surface of the calibration piece a groove
shall be made. The groove will have a rectangular cross-section, a flat bottom and the
following dimensions :-
• Depth : 1 +/- 0.1mm

• Breadth (measured parallel to the 150mm side) : 1 +/- 0.1mm
• Length (measured parallel to the 50mm side) not less than 30mm.
In addition, the calibration piece shall have a hole, 2mm in diameter, passing through
its thickness and positioned so that during calibration the echoes returning from the
two grooves do not interfere with those returning from the hole.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
1.6 Calibration
For a precise check of the sound paths necessary for a full inspection of the weld joint,
the probe shall be moved (half skip and full skip distance) until internal and external
notches on the test piece are detected (see Fig. 5 of this specification).
The relevant defect limits the path lengths on the time base. The calibration of
reference sensitivity is obtained by utilising the through drilled test hole in the
thickness of the reference block to draw the distance amplitude correction curve
relevant to the test probe.
Calibration shall be carried out according to the following procedure : place its internal
vertex until the maximum height of echo is displayed on the screen; this echo is
adjusted to 80% of full screen height by means of the sensitivity adjuster set in dB.
Without varying the amplification, the probe placed at full skip distance from the hole
is moved to detect the external vertex the hole until the maximum height of echo is
obtained. The straight line connecting the peaks of the two echoes obtained by the
above procedure, represents the 100% reference level, while the one connecting the
two points at half height of the same echoes represents "50% reference level".
The two straight lines shall be marked on the screen with a pen. Calibration shallbe
repeated each time tests are re-started at intervals not longer than 30 minutes during
normal operations; each time the conditions fixed in advance are altered. This
calibration is applicable provided that the crystal of the probe is 8 x 9mm size. Should
this size of the crystal be different, the value of the sensitivity obtained from the
calibration by a crystal of a different size shall be brought to the value of sensitivity
obtained from the calibration by a 8 x 9mm crystal. The sensitivities of the two
different size probes shall be compared through the echoes obtained on the notch of
the test piece with the probe position at half skip of the distance.
1.9 Regulation of Amplification during Production Testing
The amplification during production testing shall be obtained by adding 2-6 dB

(according to the surface condition of the pipe and its cleanness) to the reference
amplification.
1.10 Qualification of Ultrasonic Testing Operators
Before the inspection begins or during the same inspection, the COMPANY may require
a qualification test for the ultrasonic equipment operators.
1.11 Evaluation of Indications given by Ultrasonic Tests
Each time that echoes from the weld bead appear during production testing, the
instrument amplification shall be altered to coincide with the reference amplifications
and the probe shall be moved until maximum respond is obtained paying attention all
the time to the probetube coupling.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
If, under these conditions, the height of the defer echo is equal to or greater than that
of the reference echo, the defect shall be evaluated. If the defect has also been
detected by the radiographic and or visual examination, the dimensions shall be
judged according to the type of examination which detects the greater defects.
Returns which are less than 50% of the reference echo, will not be considered. It
returns are above 50% but lower than 100% of the reference echo, and if the operator
has good reasons to suspect that the returns are caused by unfavorably oriented
cracks, he shall inform the COMPANY. Moreover, when there is a defect to be repaired
such defect shall be removed for a length corresponding to the one where no more
return echo is given.
1.12 Other Equipment
The use of rules calibrated in centimeters, attached if possible to the probe, for the
precise location of the position of welding defects, it recommended. Defect location is
effected by measuring the projection distance between the probe output and the
reflecting surface.
The operators carrying out the tests shall have besides the probing instrument, tools
for cleaning the pipe surface (files, brushes, etc.) as well as the coupling liquid or paste
appropriate for the temperature of the section to be examined.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-4
RADIOGRAPHY
1.0 SCOPE
This annexure covers the radiographic inspection of all types of welded joints of the
main pipeline. The welded joints shall include the following :
i) Full girth welds on the mainline construction including double jointing of pipe, if
adopted.
ii) Welds for installation of block valves, insulating joints and other appurtenances
and tie-ins.
iii) Welds at scraper launching and receiving barrels
iv) Terminal Piping.
2.0 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
This specification shall apply in conjunction with the following (all latest edition) :
i) API 1104, Standard for welding pipelines and related facilities.
ii) ANSI B31.8, code for Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.
iii) ANSI B31.4, Code for Liquid Petroleum Transportation Piping System.
iv) ASTM E94, Recommended practice for Radiographic Testing.
v) ASTM, E 142, Standard Method for Controlling Quality of Radiographic Testing.
vi) The American Society for non-destructive Testing. Recommended Practice No.
SNT-TC-1A Supplement-A.
3.0 PROCEDURE
3.1 The radiographic examination procedure to be adopted shall be submitted by the

CONTRACTOR as per Exhibit-F.
3.2 The procedure of radiographic examination shall be qualified to the entire satisfaction
of COMPANY prior to use. It shall include but not be limited to the following
requirements.
i) Lead foil intensifying screens, at the rear of the film shall be used in all
exposures.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
ii) Type 2 and 3 films as per ASTM E-94 shall be used.
iii) A densitometer shall be used to determine film density. The transmitted film
density shall be 2.0 and 3.5 through out the weld. The unexposed base density
of the film shall not exceed 0.30.
iv) Radiographic identification system and documentation for radiographic

interpretation reports and their recording system.
3.3 The CONTRACTOR shall qualify each procedure in the presence of the COMPANY prior
to use.
3.4 The procedure of radiographic examination shall produce radiographs of sufficient

density, clarity and contrast so that defects in the weld or in the pipe adjacent to the
weld, and the outline and holes of the pentrameter are clearly discernible.
3.5 All the girth welds of mainline shall be subjected to 100% radiographic examination.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all the radiographs to the COMPANY, immediately after
processing them, together with the corresponding interpretation reports on approved
format. The details of the radiographs alongwith the joint identification number shall
be duly entered in a register and signed by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the
COMPANY for approval.
3.6 When the radiation source and the film are both on the outside of the weld and located
diametrically opposite each other, the maximum acceptable length of film for each
exposure shall not exceed the values given in Table 4 of API 1104. The minimum film
overlap, in such cases, shall be 40mm. The ellipse exposure technique may be used on
nominal pipe sizes of 2 inch and smaller provided that the source to film distance used
is a minimum of 12 inches.
3.7 Three copies of each acceptable radiographic procedure (as outlined in Specification
no. MEC/S/O5/62/02) and three copies of radiographic qualification records, shall be
supplied to COMPANY. One set of the qualifying radiographs on the job shall be kept
by the CONTRACTOR's authorised representative to be used as a standard for the
quality of production radiographs during the job. The other two sets shall be retained
by COMPANY for its permanent record.
3.8 Three copies of the exposure charts relating to material thickness, kilo voltage, source
to film distance and exposure time shall also be made available to aCOMPANY by the
CONTRACTOR.
3.9 The CONTRACTOR shall, on a daily basis, record for each radiograph (1) radiography
number (2) approximate chainage of weld location, (3) whether or not the welds meet
the specified acceptance standards and (4) the nature and approximate location of
unacceptable defects observed. It must be possible to relate to a particular butt weld
and welder on piping drawing and pipeline alignment drawing.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
3.10 Each day's production of processed radiographs shall be properly packaged separately,
identified by at least the (1) date, (2) radiographic unit, (3) job locations, (4) starting
and ending progress survey stations and (5) shall include original and three copies of
the daily radiographic record. The package shall be submitted to the COMPANY daily
when possible, but in no event later than noon of the following day.
3.11 The CONTRACTOR shall provide all the necessary facilities at site, such as a dark room
with controlled temperature, film viewer etc. to enable the COMPANY to examine the
radiographs.
3.12 The CONTRACTOR, if found necessary, may modify the procedure of radiographic
examination suiting the local conditions prevailing. This shall, however, be subject to
the approval of the COMPANY.
3.13 COMPANY shall have free access to all the CONTRACTOR's work facilities in the field.
3.14 Any approval granted by the COMPANY shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his
4.0 RADIATION SOURCE
4.1 Radiographic examination shall be carried out using x-radiations. Radiographic

examination by Gamma rays may be allowed, at the discretion of the COMPANY, in
case of inaccessible joints.
4.2 Whenever possible, pipeline welds will be inspected by placing the radiation source
inside the pipe, on the pipeline axis, with a radiation of 6.28 rad. (360°).
If it is impossible to place the radiation source inside the pipe, the weld will be
inspected with the source on the outside. An overlap of at least 40mm at the ends of
each film shall be required to ensure that the first and last location increment numbers
are common to successive films and to establish that no part of a weld has been
omitted.
5.0 LEVEL OF QUALITY
The quality level of radiographic sensitivity required for radiographic inspection shall be
at least equivalent to the values in Figure-6.
6.0 PENETRAMETERS
6.1 The image quality indicator (abbreviation : IQI) shall be used for the qualification of
the welding procedure and during normal line production. Radiographic sensitivity shall
be measured with the wire image quality indicator (Penetrameter). The penetrameter
shall be selected according to DIN 54109 or ISO 1027. For radiographs made with the
source on the outside, a penetrameter shall be placed on each side of the film with the
smaller wire of the penetrameter turned towards the end of the film itself. When a
complete weld is radiographed in a single exposure using a source inside the piping,
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
four penetrameters approximately equally spaced around the circumference shall be

used. During the procedure qualification, IQI shall be placed both on the source side
and on the film side. The sensitivity obtained with IQI on the source side shall not be
less than the values shown in Fig. 6 of this specification.
The sensitivity limit may be considered to have been reached when the outline of the
IQI, its identification number and the wire of the required diameter show up clearly on
the radiographs.
The COMPANY may authorise use of types of IQI other than those planned, provided
that they conform with recognised standards and only if the CONTRACTOR is able to
demonstrate that the minimum sensitivity level required is obtained. For this
demonstration, a test shall be carried out comparing the IQI specified and the
CONTRACTOR's to show up the identification number and other details of the proposed
IQI, which must be visible in the test radiograph.
7.0 FILM IDENTIFICATION MARKERS
All films shall be clearly identified by lead numbers, letters, and/ or markers. The image
of the markers shall appear on the films, without interfering with the interpretation.
These markers positions shall also be marked on the part to be radiographed and shall
be maintained during radiography.
8.0 PROTECTION AND CARE OF FILM
8.1 All unexposed films shall protected and stored properly as per the requirements of API
1104 standard and ASTM E 94.
8.2 The exposed and unexposed film shall be protected from heat, light, dust and
moisture. Sufficient shielding shall be supplied to prevent exposure of film to damaging
radiation prior to and following the use of the film for radiographic exposure.
9.0 RE-RADIOGRAPHY
9.1 The weld joints shall be re-radiographed in case of unsatisfactory quality of the
radiographs, at the expense of the CONTRACTOR.
9.2 All the repaired weld joints shall be re-radiographed at no extra cost to the COMPANY
in the same manner as that followed for the original welds. In addition, the repaired
weld area shall be identified with the original identification number plus the letter `R'
to indicate the repair.
9.3 When evaluating repair film, radiographers shall compare each section (exposure) of
the weld with the original film to assure repair was correctly marked and original defect
removed.
9.4 The COMPANY will review prior to any repair of welds, all the radiographs of welds
which contain, according to the CONTRACTOR's interpretation, unacceptable defects.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
The final disposition of all unacceptable welds shall be decided by the COMPANY.
10.0 QUALIFICATION OF RADIOGRAPHERS
10.1 Pipeline radiographers shall be qualified in according with the requirement of API 1104
and to the full satisfaction of COMPANY.
10.2 Certification of all the radiographers, qualified as per 10.1 above, shall be furnished by
the CONTRACTOR to the COMPANY before a radiographer will be permitted to perform
production radiography. The certificate record shall include :
i) Background and experience record

ii) Training course record
iii) Technical examination record
iv) Doctor's report on radiographer's Oaecuer 0-1 acquity eye test.
v) Date of qualification.
10.3 The radiographers shall be required to qualify with each radiographic procedure they
use, prior to performing the work assigned to him in accordance with the specification.
11.0 PRESERVATION OF RADIOGRAPHS
11.1 The radiographs shall be processed to allow storage of films without any discoloration
for at least three years. All the radiographers shall be presented in suitable folders for
preservation alongwith necessary documentation.
11.2 All radiographs shall become property of the COMPANY.
12.0 EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES
12.1 CONTRACTOR shall make necessary arrangement at his own expense, for providing
the radiographic equipment, radiographic films and the accessories for carrying out the
radiographic examination for satisfactory and timely completion of the job.
12.2 For carrying out the mainline radiographic examination the CONTRACTOR shall be
equipped with suitable mobile/ stationary type with rooms. These shall have all the
required facilities for film processing. Film viewer used shall be equipped with the film
illuminator that has a light source of sufficient intensity and can be suitably controlled
to allow viewing film densities upto 4.0 without damaging the film.
13.0 RADIATION PROTECTION
13.1 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the protection and personal monitoring of every
man with or near radiation sources.
13.2 The protection and monitoring shall comply with local regulations.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ERECTION
EDITION : 1
13.3 In view of visual hazards in the handling of radioactive source of material,

CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for complying with all rules and regulations
set forth by Atomic Energy Commission or any other Government agencies of India in
this regard and COMPANY shall not be responsible and shall be kept indemnified by the
CONTRACTOR for default(s) of whatever nature by the Contractor. Safety equipment
as considered adequate by the COMPANY for all necessary personnel shall be made
available for use and maintained for immediate and proper use by the CONTRACTOR.
14.0 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
14.1 The safety provisions shall be brought to the notice of all concerned by display on a
notice board at prominent place at the work spot. The person responsible for the
"safety" shall be named by the CONTRACTOR.
15.0 ENFORCEMENT FOR SAFETY REGULATIONS
15.1 To ensure effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating to safety
precautions, the arrangement made by the CONTRACTOR shall be open to inspection
by COMPANY or its representatives.
16.0 FIRST AID INDUSTRIAL INJURIES
16.1 CONTRACTOR shall maintain first aid facilities for its employees and those of its sub-
contractors.
16.2 CONTRACTOR shall make outside arrangements for ambulance service and for
treatment of industrial injuries. Names of those providing these services shall be
furnished to COMPANY prior to start of work and their telephone no. shall be posted
prominently in CONTRACTOR's field office.
16.3 All critical industrial injuries shall be reported promptly to the COMPANY and a copy of
CONTRACTOR's report covering each personal injury requiring the attention of
physician shall be furnished to the COMPANY.
17.0 NO EXEMPTION
17.1 Not withstanding the above there is nothing in these clauses to exempt the
CONTRACTOR from the operation of any other act or rules in force.
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
SHOP & FIELD PAINTING
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE SHOP & FIELD PAINTING MEC/S/05/21/07 REVISION : 0
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 SCOPE
3.0 CODES & STANDARDS
4.0 EQUIPMENT
5.0 SURFACE PREPARATION
6.0 PAINT MATERIALS
7.0 PAINTING SYSTEMS
7.1 PRE-ERECTION/ PRE-FABRICATION AND SHOP PRIMING FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW
TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL, STEEL STRUCTURES, PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT ETC.
7.2 REPAIR OF PRE-ERECTION/ FABRICATION AND SHOP PRIMING AFTER ERECTION/
WELDING FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY
STEEL, ITEMS IN ALL ENVIRONMENTS.
8.0 FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR NORMAL CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT (FOR CARBON
STEEL, LOW TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL)
9.0 FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT (FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW
TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL AND LOW ALLOY STEEL)
10.0 FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR HIGHLY CORROSIVE AREA (FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW
ALLOY STEEL) EXTERNAL SURFACE OF UNINSULATED COLUMNS, VESSELS, HEAT
EXCHANGERS, BLOERS, PIPING, PUMPS, TOWERS, COMPRESSORS, FLARE LINES,
STRUCTURAL STEEL ETC.
11.0 FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CARBON STEEL STORAGE TANKS (EXTERNAL) FOR ALL
ENVIRONMENTS
12.0 FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CARBON STEEL AND LOW ALLOY STEEL STORAGE TANK
(INTERNAL)
13.0 COATING SYSTEM FOR EXTRNAL SIDE OF UNDERGROUND CARBON STEEL, PLANT
PIPING AND TANKS.
14.0 PAINTING UNDER INSULATION FOR (HOT, COLD & SAFETY) CARBON STEEL LOW
TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & STAINLESS STEEL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IN ALL
ENVIRONMENT
15.0 INTERNAL PROTECTION OF CARBON STEEL WATER BOXES AND TUBE SHEETS OF
COOLERS/ CONDENSERS.
16.0 FIELD PAINTING SYSTEM FOR GI TOWERS/ NON-FERROUS TUBE SHEET
17.0 STORAGE
18.0 COLOURS CODE FOR PIPING
19.0 IDENTIFICATION OF VESSELS, PIPING ETC.
20.0 PAINTING FOR CIVIL DEFENCE REQUIREMENTS
22.0 GUARANTEE
23.0 QUALIFICATION CRITERIA O PAINTING CONTRACTOR.
24.0 PROCEDURE FOR APPROVAL OF NEW PAINT MANUFACTURERS.
ANNEXURE-I- LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURES
ANNEXURE-II- LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURE’S PRODUCTS.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 These technical specifications shall be applicable for the work covered by the
contract, and without prejudice to the various codes of practice, standard
specifications etc. it is understood that contractor shall complete the work in all
respects with the best quality of materials and workmanship and in accordance
with the best engineering practice and instructions of Engineer-in-charge.
1.2 Wherever it is stated in the specification that a specific material is to be supplied

or a specific work is to be done it shall be deemed that the same shall be
supplied or carried out by the contractor.
Any deviation from this standard without within deviation permit from appropriate
authority will result in rejection to job.
2.0 SCOPE
Scope of work covered in the specification shall include, but not limited to the
following.
2.1 This specification defines the requirements for surface preparation, selection and
application of paint on external surfaces of equipment, vessels, machinery,
piping, ducts, steels structures, external & internal protection of storage tanks for
all services RCC Chimney & MS Chimney with or without refractory lining and
flare lines etc.
2.2 Extent of Works
2.2.1 The following surface and materials shall require shop, pre-erection and field
painting.
a. All uninsulated C. S. & A.S. equipment like columns, vessels, drums,

storage tanks, heat exchangers, pumps, compressors, electrical panels
and motors etc.
b. All uninsulated carbon and low alloy piping fitting and valves (including
painting of identification marks), furnace, ducts and stacks.
c. All items contained in a package unit as necessary.
d. All structural steel work, pipe, structural steel supports, walkways,

handrails, ladders, platforms etc.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
e. RCC/ MS chimneys with or without refractory lining & Flare lines.
f. Identification colour bands on all piping as required including insulated

aluminium clad, galvanised, SS and non-ferrous piping.
g. Identification lettering/ numbering on all painted surface of equipment/

piping insulated aluminium clad, galvanised, SS and non-ferrous piping.
h. Marking/ identification signs on painted surfaces of equipment/ piping for

hazardous service.
i. Supply of all primers, paints and all other materials required for painting
other than owner’s supply.
j. Over insulation surface of equipments and pipes wherever required.
k. Painting under insulation for carbon steel and stainless steel as specified.
l. Repair work of damaged/ preerection/ fabrication shop primer and weld

joints at field.
2.2.2 The following surface and materials shall not be painted unless otherwise
specified:
a. Uninsulated austentic stainless steel.
b. Plastic and/ or plastic coated materials.
c. Non ferrous materials like aluminium, galvanised “piping”, “gratings” and

“handrails” etc. except G. I. Towers.
2.3 Documents
2.3.1 The contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the following
documents issued to him for executions of work.
a. Bill of quantities for piping, equipment, machinery and structure etc.
b. Piping line list.
c. Painting specifications including special civil defence requirement.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
2.4 Unless otherwise instructed final painting on pre-erection/ shop primed pipes and
equipments shall be painted in the field, only after mechanical completion and
testing on system are completed as well as, after completion of steam purging
wherever required.
2.5 Changes and deviations required for any specific job due to clients requirement
or otherwise shall be referred to MECON for deviation permit.
3.0 CODES & STANDARDS
3.1 Without prejudice to the provision of clause 1.1 above and the detailed
specifications of the contract, the following codes and standards shall be
followed for the work covered by this contract.
IS:5 : Colour coding
IS-101 : Methods of test for ready mixed paint

and enamels.
IS-2379:1990 : Indian standard for pipe line

Identification –Colour code.
ASTM Vol. 6.01 and 6.03 : American standard test methods for
Paints and coatings.
ANSI A 13.1-1981 : Scheme for Identification of piping systems

: American National Standard Institution.
3.2 Surface Preparation Standards:
Following standards shall be followed for surface preparations:
3.2.1 Swedish Standard : SIS-05 5900-1967/ ISO-8501-1-1998

(Surface preparation standards for painting steel surfaces).
This standard contains photographs of the various standards on four different

degrees of rusted steel and as such is preferable for inspection purpose by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
3.2.2 Steel structure painting Council, U.S.A (surface preparations specifications

(SSPC-SP).
3.2.3 British standard (surface finish or Blast-cleaned for painting) BS:4232
3.2.4 National Associations of Corrosion Engineers, U.S.A. (NACE)
3.2.5 Various International Standards equivalent to swedish Standard for surface

preparation are given in Table-I.
3.3 The contractor shall arrange, at his own cost, to keep a set of latest edition of
any one of the above standards and codes at site.
3.4 The paint manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed as far as practicable at all
times. Particular attention shall be paid to the following:
a. Instructions for storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of

temperature.
b. Surface preparations prior to painting.
c. Mixing and thinning.
d. Application of paints and the recommended limit on time intervals

between coats.
4.0 EQUIPMENT
4.1 All tools, brushes, rollers, spray guns, abrasive materials hand/ power tools for
leaning and all equipments, scaffolding materials, shot/ wet abrassive blasting,
water blasting equipments & air compressors etc. required to be used shall be
suitable for the work and all in good order and shall be arranged by the
contractor at site and in sufficient quantity.
Mechanical mixing shall be used for paint mixing operations in case of two pack
systems except that the Engineer-in-Charge may allow the hand mixing of small
quantities at his discretion.
5.0 SURFACE PREPARATION, SHOP COAT, COATING APPLICATION & REPAIR

AND DOCUMENTATION
5.1 General
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
5.1.1 In order to achieve the maximum durability, one or more of following methods of
surface preparation shall be followed, depending on condition of steel surface
and as instructed by Engineer-in-Charge. Adhesion of the paint film to surface
depends largely on the degree of cleanliness of the metal surface. Proper
surface preparation contributes more to the success of the paint protective
system:
a. Manual or hand tools cleaning.

b. Mechanical or power tool cleaning.
c. Blast cleaning.
5.1.2 Mill scale, rust, rust scale and foreign matter shall be removed fully to ensure
that a clean and dry surface is obtained. The minimum acceptable standard in
case of manual or hand tool cleaning shall be St. 2 or equivalent, in case of
mechanical or power tool cleaning it shall be St. 3 or equivalent, in case of blast
cleaning it shall be Sa 2½ or equivalent as per Swedish Standard SIS-055900-
1967/ ISO-8501-1-1988. Where highly corrosive condition exits, then blast
cleaning shall be Sa3 as per Swedish Standard.
Remove all other contaminants, oil, grease etc. by use of an aromatic solvent
prior to surface cleaning.
5.1.3 Blast cleaning shall not be performed where dust can contaminate surfaces
undergoing such cleaning or during humid weather conditions having humidity
exceeding 85%.
5.1.4 Irrespective of the method of surface preparation, the first coat of primer must be
applied on dry surface. This should be done immediately and in any case within
4 hours of cleaning of surface. However, at times of unfavourable weather
conditions, the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the liberty to control the time
period, at his sole discretion and / or to insist on recleaning, as may be required,
before primer application is taken up. In general, during unfavourable weather
conditions, blasting and painting shall be avoided as far as practicable.
5.1.5 The external surface of R.C.C. chimney to be painted be dry and clean. Any
loose particle of stand, cement, aggregate etc. shall be removed by rubbing with
soft wire brush if necessary, acid etching with 10-15% HCL solution about 15
minutes shall be carried out and surface must be thorought washed with water to
remove acid & loose particles then dry completely before application of paint.
5.2 Procedure of Surface Preparation.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
5.2.1 Blast Cleaning
5.2.1.1 Air Blast Cleaning
The surface shall be blast cleaned using one of the abrasives: AL202 particles
chilled casts iron or malleable iron and steel at pressure of 7kg. Cm2 at
appropriate distance and angle depending on nozzle size maintaining constant
velocity and pressure. Chilled cast iron, malleable iron and steel shall be in the
form of shot or grit of size not greater than 0.055” maximum in case of steel and
malleable iron and 0.04” maximum in case of chilled iron. Compressed air shall
be free form moisture and oil. The blasting nozzles should be venturei style with
tungsten carbide or boron carbide as the material for liners. Nozzles orifice may
vary from 3/16” to ¾”. On completion of blasting operation, the blasted surface
shall be clean and free from any scale or rust and must show a grey white
metallic lusture. Primer or first coat of paint shall be applied within 4 hours of
surface preparation. Blast cleaning shall bot be done outdoors in bad weather
without adequate protection or when there is dew on the metal which is to be
cleaned, surface profile shall be uniform to provide good key to the paint
adhesion (i.e.35to 50µ). If possible vacuum collector shall be installed for
collecting the abrasive and recycling.
5.2.1.2 Water Blast cleaning
Environmental, health and safety problems associated with abrassive blast

cleaning limit the application of air blast cleaning in many installations. In such
case water blast cleaning is resorted to.
Water blast cleaning can be applied with or without abrassive and high-pressure
water blasting. The water used shall be inhibited with sodium chromate/
phosphate. The blast cleaned surface shall be washed thoroughly with
detergents and wiped solvent and dried with compressed Air. For effective
cleaning abrassives are used. The most commonly used pressure for high
pressure water blast cleaning for maintenance surface preparation is 3000 to
6000 psi at 35-45 liters/ minute water volume and pressure upto 10000 psi and
water volume of 45 liters/ minute provide maximum cleaning.
The wate blast cleaned surface shall be comparable to SSPC-SP-12/ NACE No.
5. The operation shall be carried out as per SSPC guidelines for water blast
cleaning. The indicative values for sand injection is
Air : 300 to 400 Cu.ft/ min.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
Water : 5-10 liter/ min. with corrosion inhibitor

Sand : 200-400 lbs/ hr.
Nozzle : 0.5 to 1” dia
Special equipments for water blast cleaning with abrasives now available shall
be used.
5.2.2 Mechanical of Power tool cleaning
Power tool cleaning shall be done mechanical striking tools, chipping hammers,
griding wheels or rotating steels wire-brushes. Excessive burnish of surface shall
be avoided as it can reduce paint adhesion. On completion of cleaning, the
detached rust mill scale etc. shall be removed by clean rags and/ or washed by
water or stream and thoroughly dried with compressed air jet before application
of paint.
5.2.3 Manual or hand tool cleaning
Manual or hand tool cleaning is used only where safety problems limit the
application of other surface preparation procedure and hence dones not appear
in the specifications of paint systems.
Hand tool cleaning normally consists of the following:
a. Hand descaling and/ or hammering

b. Hand scraping
c. Hand wire brushing
Rust, mill scale spatters, old coating and other foreign matter, shall be removed
by hammering, scrapping tools, emery paper cleaning, wire brushing or
combination of the above methods. On completion of cleaning, loose materials
shall be removed from the surface by clean rags and the surface shall be
brushed, swept, deducted and blown off with compressed air/ steam to remove
all loose matter. Finally the surface may be washed with water and dried for
effective cleaning.
5.3 Non compatible shop coat primer
The compatibility of finishing coat should be confirmed from the paint

manufacturer. In the event of use of primer such as zinc rich epoxy, inorganic
zinc silicate etc. as shop coat the pant system shall depend on condition of shop
coat, if shop coat is in satisfactory condition showing no major defects, the shop
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
coat shall not be removed. The touch up primer and finishing coat(s) shall be
identified for application by Engineer-in-Charge.
5.4 Shop coated (coated with primer & finishing coat) equipment should not be
repainted unless paint is damaged.
5.5 Shop primed equipment and surface will only be ‘spot cleaned’ in damaged
areas by means of power tool brush cleaning and then spot primed before
applying one coat of filed primer unless otherwise specified. If shop primer is not
compatible with field primer then shop coated primer should be completely
removed before applications of selected paints system for particular
environment.
5.6 For packaged units/ equipment, shop primer should be as per the paint system
given in this specification. However, manufacturer’s standard can be followed
after review.
5.7 Coating Procedure and Application:
5.7.1 Surface shall not be coated in rain, wind or in environment where injurious
airbone elements exists, when the steel surface temperature is less than 5° F
above dew point when the relative humidity is greater then 85% or when the
temperature is below 40° F.
5.7.2 Blast cleaned surface shall be coated with one complete application of primer as
soon as practicable but in no case later than 4 hrs. the same day.
5.7.3 To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of material shall be applied as a
continuous film uniform thickness free of probes. Any spots or areas missed in
application shall be recoated and permitted to dry before the next coat is applied.
Applied paint should have the desired wet film thickness.
5.7.4 Each coat shall be proper state of cure or dryness before the application of
succeeding coat. Material shall be considered dry for recoating when an
additional coat can applied without the development of any detrimental film
irregularities such as lifting or loose of adhesion of the under coat. Manufacturer
instruction shall be followed for intercoat interval.
5.7.5 When the successive coat of the same colour have been specified, alternate
coat shall be tinted, when practical, sufficiently to produce enough contrast to
indicate complete coverage of the surface. The tinting material shall be
compatible with the material and not detrimental to its service life.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
5.7.6 Air spray application shall be in accordance with the following:
a. The equipment used shall be suitable for the intended purpose, shall be
capable of properly atomizing the paint to be applied, and shall be
equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gauges. The air caps,
nozzles, and needles shall be those recommended by the manufacturer
of the equipment for the material beign sprayed. The equipment shall be
kept in satisfactory condition to permit proper paint application.
b. Traps or separators shall be provided to remove oil and condensed water

from the air. These traps or separators must be of adequate size and
must be drained periodically during operations. The air from the spray
gun impinging against the surface shall show condensed water or oil.
c. Ingredients shall be kept properly mixed in the spray pots or

containers during application by continuous mechanical agitation.
d. The pressure on the material in the pot and of the air at the gun shall be
adjusted for optimum spraying effectiveness. The pressure on the
material in the pot shall be adjusted when necessary for change in
elevation of the gun above the pot. The atomizing air pressure at the gun
shall be high enough to properly atomize the paint but not so high as to
cause excessive fogging of paint, excessive evaporation of solvent, or
less by overspray.
e. Spray equipment shall be kept sufficiently clean so that dirt, dried paint,
and other foreign materials are not deposited in the paint film.
Any solvents left in the equipment shall be completely removed before

applying paint to the surface begin painted.
f. Paint shall be applied in a uniform layer, with overlapping at the edge of

the spray pattern. The spray patterns shall be adjusted so that the paint
is deposited uniformly. During application the gun shall be held
perpendicular to the surface and at a distance which will ensure that a
wet layer of paint is deposited on the surface. The trigger of the gun
should be released at the end of each stroke.
g. All runs and sags shall be brushed out immediately or the paint shall be
removed and the surface repainted.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
h. Areas inaccessible to the spray gun shall be painted by brush: if not

accessible by brush, daubers or sheepking shall be used.
i. All nameplates, manufacturer’s identification tags, machined surface

instrument glass, finished flange faces, control valve items and similar
items shall be masked to prohibit coating disposition. If these surface are
coated, the component shall be cleaned and restored to its original
condition.
j. Edges of structural shapes and irregular coated surface shall be coated

first and an extra pass made later.
k. If spray gun shown choking, immediately dechoking procedure shall be

followed.
5.7.7 Airless spray application shall be in accordance with the following procedure: as
per steel structure paint manual vol. 1 & vol. 2. By SSPC, U.S.A., Air less spray
relies on hydraulic pressure rather than air atomization to produce the desired
spray. An air compressor or electric motor is used to operate a pump to produce
pressures of 1,000 to 6.000 psi. Paint is delivered to the spray gun at this
pressure through a single hose within the gun, a single paint stream is divided
into separate streams, which are forced through a small orifice resulting in
atomization of paint without the use of air. This result in more repaid coverage
with less overspray. Airless spray usually is faster, cleaner, more economical and
easier to use than conventional airspray.
Airless spray equipment is mounted on wheels, and paint is aspirated in a hose

that sucks paint from any container, including drums. The unit shall have in built
agitator that keep the paint uniformly mixed during the spraying. The unit shall
consists of in built strainer. Usually very small quantities of thinning is required
before spray. Incase of High Build epoxy coating (two pack), 30:1 pump ratios
and 0.020-0.023” tip size will provide a good spray pattern. Ideally fluid hoses
should no be less than 3/8” ID and not longer than 50ft to obtain optimum
results.
In case of gun choking, decoking steps shall be followed immediately.
5.7.8 Brush application of paint shall be in accordance with the following:
a. Brushes shall be of a style and quality that will enable proper application
of paint
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
b. Round or oval brushes are most suitable for rivets, bolts, irregular
surfaces and rough or pitted steel. Wide flat brushes are suitable for
large flat areas, but they shall not have width over five inches.
c. Paints shall be applied into all corners.
d. Any runs or sags shall be brushed out.
e. There shall be minimum of brush marks left in the applied paint
f. Surface not accessible to brushes shall be painted by spray, duubers, or

sheepkin.
5.7.9 Manual application by sling (where 6 O’ clock position of pipe is not

approachable)
A canvas strip (alternatively a tinplate strip) about 450mm wide and 1.5m longs
is hold under the pipe by two men. Liquid coating poured on the sling at each
side of the pipe. The men holding this sling move it up and down and walk slowly
forward while fresh coating is poured on the pipe and they manipulate the sling
so that an even coating is ontained all round the bottom. This work shall be done
vey carefully and by experienced personnel. There shall bot be any formation of
“Whiskers” and holes in the coating. The coating film shall be inspected by
mirror.
5.7.10 For each coat the painter should know the WFT corresponding to the specified
DFT and standardise the paint application technique to achieve the desired
WFT. This is to be ensured in the qualification trial.
5.8 Drying of Coated Surface
5.8.1 No coat shall be applied unit the preceding coat has dried. The material shall be
considered dry for re-coating when another coat can be applied without the
development of any film irregularities such as lifting or loss of adhesion of
undercoats. Drying time of the applied coat should not exced maximum specified
for it as a first coat; if it exceeds the paint material has possible deteriorated or
mixing is faulty.
5.8.2 No paint shall be force dried under condition which will cause checking, wrinkling
blistering formation of pores, or detrimentally after the condition of the paint.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
No drier shall be added to a paint on the job unless specifically called for in the
manufacturer’s specification for the paint.
Paint shall be protected from rain, condensation, contamination snow and

freezing until dry to the fullest extent practicable.
5.9 Repair of damaged paint surface.
5.9.1. Where paint has been damaged in handling and in transportation, the repair of
damaged coating of pre-creation/ fabrication shall be as given below.
5.9.2. Repair of damaged inorganic zinc silicate primer after erection/ weldding:
Quickly remove the primer from damaged area by mechanical scraping and
emery paper to expose the white metal. Blasts clean the surfaces possible.
Feather the primer over the intact adjacent surface surrounding the damaged
area by emery paper.
5.9.3 Repair of damaged pre-erection and shop priming in the design temperature of
90° C to 500° C.
- Surface preparation shall be done as per procedure 5.9.2
- One coat of F-9 shall be applied wherever damaged was observed on

pre-erection/ pre-fabrication/ shop primer of inorganic zinc silicate coating
(F-9) shall not be applied if damaged area is not more than 5 x 5 cm.
5.10 PAINT APPLICATION
5.10.1 Shop priming/ pre-erection priming with F9 of F12 shall be done only on blasted
surface.
5.10.2 Shop priming/ pre-erection priming with F-9 or F-12 shall be done only with
airless spray.
5.10.3 For large flat surface field painting shall be done by airless spray otherwise brush
can be used.
5.11 Assessment of Painting Requirement
The paint system to be applied for a specific job shall be arrived as sequentially
as given below :
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
- Identify the environment from area classification details and chose the
appropriate table.
- Identify the design temperature from the technical documents.
- Identify the specific field paint system and surface preparation

requirement from the above identified table and temperature range.
- Identify the shop priming requirement from Table 7.1 based on

compatibility of the above paint system.
- Identify the need of repair of shop primer and execute as per Table 7.2.
5.12 Documentation.
A written quality plan with procedure for qualification trials and for the actual
work.
Daily progress report with dedtails of weather condition, particular of application
no of coats and type of materials applied, anomolies, progress of work versus
programme.
Result of measurement of temperature relative humidity, surface profile, film
thickness, holiday detection, adhesion tests with signature of appropriate
authority.
Particular of surface preparation and paint application during trials and during the
work.
Details of non-compliance, rejects and repairs.
Type of testing equipments and calibration.
Code and batch numbers of paint material used.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TABLE-I (for clause 5.0)

SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS
S. DESCRIPTION VARIOUS INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS REMARK

NO. (EQUIVALENT)
SWEDISH SSPC-SP NACE USA BRITISH
STANDARD USA STANDARD
SIS-05-5900 BS-4232:
1967 1967
1. MANUAL OR HAND TOOL CLEANING THIS METHOD IS APPLIED
WHEN THE SURFACE IS
REMOVAL OF LOOSE RUST LOOSE MILL EXPOSED TO NORMAL
SCALE AND LOOSE PAINT, CHIPPING, ATMOSPHERIC CONDITION
SSPC-SP-
SCRAPING, SANDING AND WIRE ST.2 - - WHEN OTHER METHODS
2
BRUSHING, SURFACE SHOULD HAVE A CANNOT BE ADOPTED AND
FAINT METALLIC SHEEN. ALSO FOR SPOT CLEANING
DURING MAINTENANCE
PAINTING.
2. MECHANICAL OR POWER TOOL CLEANING
REMOVAL OF LOOSE RUST, LOOSE MILL
SCALE AND LOOSE PAINT TO DEGREE
SPECIFIED BY POWER TOOL CHIPPING, SSPC-SP-
ST.3 - - -DO-
DESCALING, SANDING, WIRE BRUSHING 3
AND GRINDIN, AFTER REMOVAL OF DUST,
SURFACE SHOULD HAVE A PRONOUNCED
METALLIC SHEEN.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1

S. DESCRIPTION VARIOUS INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS REMARKS
NO. (EQUIVALENT)
SWEDISH SSPC-SP NACE BRITISH
STANDARD USA USA STANDARD
SIS-05-5900 BS-4232:
1967 1967
3. BLAST CLEANING (AIR & WATER)
THERE ARE FOUR COMMON GRADES OF
BLAST CLEANING
3.1 WHITE METAL SA-3 SSPC-SP- NACE#1 FIRST WHERE EXTREMELY CLEAN
5 QUALITY SURFACE CAN BE EXPECTED
BLAST CLEANING TO WHITE METAL FOR PROLONG LIFE OF PAINT
CLEANLINESS REMOVAL OF ALL VISIBLE SYSTEMS.
RUST, MILL SCALE PAINT & FOREIGN
MATTER 100% CLEANLINESS WITH
DESIRED SURFACE PROFILE.
3.2 NEAR WHITE METAL SA 2 ½ SSPC-SP- NACE #2 SECOND THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENT
10 QUALITY FOR CHEMICALLY RESISTANT
BLAST CLEANING TO NEAR WHITE METAL PAINT SYSTEM SUCH AS
CLEANLINESS, UNIT AT LEAST 95% OF EPOXY, VINYL,
EACH ELEMENTS OF SURFACE AREA IS POLYURETHANE BASED AND
FREE OF ALL VISIBLE RESIDUES WITH INORGANIC ZINC SILICATE
DESIRED SURFACE PROFILE. PAINTS, ALSO FOR
CONVENTIONAL PAINT
SYSTEM USED UNDER FAIRLY
CORROSIVE CONDITIONS TO
OBTAIN DESIRED LIFE OF
PAINT SYSTEM.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1

S. DESCRIPTION VARIOUS INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS REMARKS
NO. (EQUIVALENT)
SWEDISH SSPC-SP NACE BRITISH
STANDARD USA USA STANDARD
SIS-05- BS-4232:
5900 1967 1967
3.3 COMMERCIAL BLAST FOR STEEL REQUIRED
TO BE PAINTED WITH
BLAST CLEANING UNIT AT LEAST CONVENTIONAL PAINTS
TWO—THIRD OF EACH ELEMENT OF THIRD FOR EXPOSURE TO
SA-2 SSPC-SP-6 No. 3
SURFACE AREA IS FREE OF ALL QUALITY MILDLY CORROSIVE
VISIBLE RESIDUES WITH DESIRED ATMOSPHERE FOR
SURFACE PROFILE. LONGER LIFE OF THE
PAINT SYSTEMS.
3.4 BRUSH-OFF BLAST SA-1 SSPC-SP-7 No. 4
BLAST CLEANING TO WHITE METAL

CLEANLINESS, REMOVAL OF ALL
VISIBLE RUST, MILL SCALE , PAINT &
FOREIGN MATTER, SURFACE PROFILE
IS NOT SO IMPORTANT.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
6.0 PAINT MATERIALS
Paint manufacturers shall furnish all the characteristics of paint material

on printed literature, alongwith the test certificate for all the specified
characteristics given in this specifications. All the paint materials shall be
of first quality and conform to the following general characteristics as per
the table 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
PAINT MATERIALS
TABLE NO.: 6.1 PRIMERS
S. DESCRIPTION P-2 P-4 P-6

No.
1. Technical Name Chlorinated rubber Zinc Etch primer/ wash Epoxy zinc phosphate
Phosphpate primer primer primer
2. Type and composition Single pack, air drying Two pack polyvinyl Tow component
chlorinated rubber butyral resin medium polyamide cured epoxy
based medium cured with phosphoric resin medium,
plasticised with acid solution pogmented pigmented with zinc
unsaponlfiable with zic tetroxy phosphate.
plasticizer, plgmented choromate.
with Zic phosphate.
3. Volume solids (approx) 40% 7-8% 40%
4. DFT (Dry dilm thickness) per coat (approx) 40-50µ 8-10µ 40-50µ
5. Theoretical covering capacity in M2/ coat/ litre 8-10 8-10 8-10
(approx)
6. Welght per litre in kgs/ litre (approx) 1.3 1.2 1.4
7. Touch dry at 30° C (approx) 30 minutes 2 hrs. After 30 mins.
8. Hard dry at 30° C (approx) Min.: 8 hrs. Min.: 2 hrs. Min.: 8 hrs.
Max.: no limitation Max.: 24 hrs. Max.: 3-6 months
9. Over Coating Interval (approx.) Min : 8 hrs Min : 4.6 hrs Min : 8 hrs
Max : No limitation Max : 24 hrs Max : 3-6 months
10. Pot life (approx) at 30° C for two component Not applicable Not applicable 8 hrs.
paints (approx).
11. Temperature Resistance 60°C Not applicable 80°C
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
PAINT MATERIALS
TABLE NO.: 6.2FINISH PAINT
S. DESCRIPTION F-2 F-3 F-6 F-7
No
1. Technical Name Acrylic polyurethane Chlorinated rubber Epoxy-High build High build coaltar
finish paint based finish paint finish paint epoxy coating.
2. Type and composition Two-pack aliphatic Single pack plasticised Tow- pack Tow pack polyamide
isocynate cured chlorinated rubber polyamide/ cured epoxy resin
acrylic finish paint based medium with ployamine cured blended with coal/ tar
chemical and weather epoxy resin medium, suitably
resistant pigments. medium suitable pigmented.
pigmented.
3. Volume solids (approx) 40% 40% 62% 65%
4. DFT (Dry film thickness) per coat 30-40µ 40-50µ 100-125µ 100-125µ
(approx)
5. Theoretical covering capacity in 10-13 8-10 5-6 5-2-6.5
M2/ coat/ litre (approx)
6. Welght per litre in kgs/ litre 1.3 1.2 1.4 1.5
(approx)
7. Touch dry at 30° C (approx) 1 hrs. 30 minutes 3 hrs. 4 hrs.
8. Hard dry at 30° C (approx) Overnight 8 hrs. Overnight 48 hrs.
9. Overcoating interval (approx) Min.: Overnight (12) Min.: Overnight Min.: Overnight Min.: 24 hrs.
hrs. Max.: Unlimited Max.: 5 day Max.: 5 day
Max.: Unlimited
10. Pot life at 30° C for two component 6-8 hrs. Not applicable 4-6 hrs. 4-6 hrs.
paints (approx).
11. Temperature Resistance 80°C 60°C 80°C 125°C
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
PAINT MATERIALS
TABLE NO.: 6.3 FINISH PAINTS

No
1. Technical Name Self priming type surface tolerant Inorganic Zinc Slicate Heat resistant Heat resistant silicone
high build epoxy coating coating synthetic medium aluminum paint
(Complete rust control coating) based two pack suitable upto 500° C
aluminum paint temperature
suitable upto 250°C
dry temperature
2. Type and composition Two-pack epoxy resin based A two-pack air drying Heat resistant Single pack silicone
suitable pigmented and capable self-curing solvent synthetic medium resin based medium
pigmented and capable of based inorganic zinc based two pack with aluminum flakes.
adhering to manually prepared silicate coating. aluminum paint
surface and old coating suitable upto 250°C
3. Volume solids (approx) 72% 60% 25% 20%

4. DFT (Dry film thickness) per 100-125µ 65-75µ 20-25µ 20-25µ
coat (approx)
5. Theoretical covering capacity 6.0-7.2 8-9 10-12 8-10
in M2/ coat/ litre
6. Welght per litre in kgs/ litre 1.4 2.3 1.2 1.1
(approx)
7. Touch dry at 30° C (approx) 3 hrs. 30 min. 3 hrs. 30 min.
8. Hard dry at 30° C (approx) 24 hrs. 12 hrs. 12 hrs. 24 hrs.
9. Overcoating interval (approx) Min.: 10 hrs. Min.: 8 hrs. at 20°C Min.: 16 hrs. Min.: 16 hrs.
Max.: 6 months and 50% RH. Max.: Unlimited Max.: Unlimited
Max.: Unlimited
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1

No
10. Pot life (approx) at 30° C for 90 min. 4-6 hrs. Not applicable Not applicable
two component paints
(approx).
11. Temperature resistance 80°C 400°C 250° C 500° C
F-14: Specially for mulated polyamine cured coal tal epoxy suitable for-45°C to 125°C for application under insulation
F-15: Two pack cold curved epoxy phenolic coating suitable for 45°C to 125°C for application under insulation
F-16: Eoxy siloxane anser coat 738
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
PAINT MATERIALS
TABLE NO. 6.4 FINISH PAINTS
Sl. Description F-14 F-15 F-16 F-17

No.
1. Technical name Polyamine cured Two-component Ambient Two component
coal tar epoxy Epoxy phenolic temperature solvent free type
coating cured curing Poly high build epoxy
with polyamine Siloxane coating phenolic /
adduct hardner / High build cold novalac epoxy
system (primer + applied phenolic coating
intermediate inorganic cured with
coat + finish copolymer Polyamine
paint) based aluminum adduct hardner
coating suitable system.
for under
insulation
coating of CS
and SS piping
for high
temperature
service.
2. Type & composition Specially Two pack Amercoat 738 Two component
formulated ambient from Ameron solvent free type
polyamine cured temperature Products, USA / high build epoxy
coal tar epoxy curing epoxy Berger 938 from phenolic /
suitable for phenolic coating Berger Paints novalac epoxy
application system suitable Ltd., or phenolic coating
under insulation for application Intertherm 751 cured with
under insulation CSA from Akzo Polyamine
of CS / SS Nobel coating. adduct hardner
piping. Note : 6 system.
3. Volume Solids 70% 65% 60% 98-100%
(minimum)
4. DFT (Dry Film 125 µm 75 - 100 µm 75 - 100 µm 125- 150 µm
thickness) per coat
(minimum)
5. Theoretical covering 5.5 6.5-8.5 6.0-8.0 6.5-8.0
2
capacity in M / coat
/ litre (minimum)
6. Weight per liter in 1.5 1.7 1.3 1.7
kgs/litre (max paint)
(minimum)
7. Touch dry at 30°C 4 hrs. 2 hrs. 1 hr. 2 hrs.
(maximum)
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
Sl. Description F-14 F-15 F-16 F-17

No.
8. Hard dry at 30°C 24 hrs. 24 hrs. 16 hrs. 24 hrs.
(maximum) Full cure
30°C (for immersion 168 hrs.(7 days) 168 hrs.(7 days) - 168 hrs.(7 days)
/ high temp. service)
9. Over-coating interval Min. 6 hrs. Min. 36 hrs. Min. 16 hrs. Min. 16 hrs.
Max. 5 days Max. 21 days Max. Not Max. 21 days.
applicable
10. Pot life at 30°C for 4 hrs. 1.5 hrs. 1 hr. 1 hr.
two component
paints (minimum)
11. Temperature -45°C to 125°C -45°C to 125°C Up to 400°C for -45°C to 150°C
Resistance (min.) under insulation under insulation CS & SS under for immersion
(Note : 5) insulation service
Notes:
1. Covering capacity and DFT depends on method of application. Covering
capacity specified above are theoretical. Allowing the loose during the
application, minimum specified DFT should be maintained.
2. All primers and finish coats should be cold cured and air drying unless otherwise
specified.
3. All paints shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction for

surface preparation, intervals, curing and application. The surface preparation,
quality and workmanship should be ensured.
4. Technical data sheets for all paints shall be supplied at the time of submission of
quotations.
6.4 List of recommended manufacturers
The paint shall conform to the specifications given above and the best quality in
their products range of the manufacturers listed in Annexure-I.
7.0 PAINT SYSTEM
The paint system should vary with type of environment envisaged in and around
the plants. Three types of environment as given below are considered for
selection of paint system. The paint system is also given for specific
requirements.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
Primers & finish coats covered in table nos. 7.0 to 15.0
PRIMERS
P-2 : Chlorinated Rubber Zinc Phosphate Primer
P-4 : Etch Primer/ Wash Primer
P-6 : Epoxy Zic Phosphate Primer
FINISH COATS/ PAINTS
F-2 : Acrylic- Polyurethane finish paint
F-3 : Chlorinated Rubber Finish Paint
F-6 : High Build Epoxy finish coating
F-7 : High Build Coal Tar epoxy coating
F-8 : Self-priming surface tolerant high build epoxy

coating
F-9 : Inorganic Zinc Silicate Coating.
F-11 : Heat resistant Synthetic medium based

Aluminum paint.
F-12 : Heat resistant Silicone Aluminum paint.
F-14 : Specially formulated polyamine-cured coal for

Epoxy coating
F-15 : Epoxy phenolic coating

F-16 : Epoxy Siloxane Coating : Amercoat 738
F-17 : Two component solvent free type high built epoxy
phenolic / novalac epoxy phenolic coating cured with
polyamine.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TABLE 7.1: PRE-ERECTION/ PRE-FABRICATION AND SHOP PRIMING FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW TEMPERATURE
CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL, STEEL STRUCTURE, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ETC.
S. No. DESIGN TEMPERATURE IN SURFACE PAINT SYSTEM TOTAL DFT IN REMARKS

°C PREPARATION MICRONS (MIN.)
7.1.1 -90 TO 400 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-9 65-75 No overcoating is to

be done
7.1.2 401 To 500 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-12 40-50 Finish Coat at Site
7.1.3 -40 to 150 for Structures, hand rails and SSPC-SP-3 1 COAT OF F-9 OR 65-75 OF F-9 For Damaged Area
Grating only 2 COATS OF P-7 @ OR of more than 5 x 5
40µ DFT / COAT 80 (P-7) Cm2.
TABLE 7.2: REPAIR OF PRE-ERECTION/ PRE- FABRICATION AND SHOP PRIMING AFTER ERECTION/ WELDING FOR CARBON STEEL
LOW TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL, ITEMS IN ALL ENVIRONMENT.
S. No. DESIGN TEMPERATURE IN SURFACE PREPARATION PAINT SYSTEM TOTAL DFT IN REMARKS
°C MICRONS (MIN.)
7.2.1 -90 TO 400 SSPC-SP-3 (FOR REPAIR 1 COAT OF F-9 65-75 FOR DAMAGED
ONLY) AREA OF MORE
SSPC-SP-10 THAN 5X5 CM.
7.2.2 401 TO 550 SSPC-SP-3 1 COAT OF F-12 20 FOR DAMAGED
AREA OF MORE
THAN 5X5 CM.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TABLE 8.0: FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR NORMAL CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT (FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW TEMPERATURE
CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL)
ALL NORMAL CORROSIVE AREAS SUCH AS OFF SITES EXTERNAL SURFACE OF UNINSULATED COLUMNS, VESSELS, HEAT
EXCHANGERS, BLOWERS, PIPING, PUMPS, TOWERS, COMPRESSORS, STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS, RCC CHIMNEY WITH
OR WITHOUT REFRACTORY LINE INSIDE CHIMNEY (ALL ENVIRONMENTS), EXCLUDING TANK TOPS, FLARE LINES, D.M.
PLANTS, INTERIOR OF TANKS ETC. FLARE LINES FOR NORMAL CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT ALSO TO NE PAINTED AS PER
TABLE 9.0
S. DESIGN SURFACE PAINT SYSTEM TOTAL REMARKS

NO. TEMPERATUR PREPARATIO FIELD PRIMER FINISH PAINT DFT IN
E IN C N MICRONS
(MIN.)
8.1 -90 TO –15 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR OF PRE-FABRICATION NONE 65-75 No over coating to be
PRIMER 1 COAT OF F-9 @65-75µ done follow repair
DFT/ COAT procedure only on
damaged areas of pre-
erection/ pre-fabrication
primer/ coating F-9
8.2 -14 TO 60 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR OF PRE-FABRICATION 2 COATS OF F-3 @ 225
PRIMER 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65-75µ 40 µ DFT/ COAT
DFT/ COAT + 2 COATS OF P-2 @ 40µ 2 X 40 = 80
DFT/ COAT
2 X 40 = 80
8.3 61 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR OF PRE-FABRICATION 1 COATS OF F-6 @ 245
DFT/ COAT + 2 COATS OF P-6 @ 40µ
DFT/ COAT
2 X 40 = 80
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1

NO. TEMPERATUR PREPARATIO FIELD PRIMER FINISH PAINT DFT IN
E IN C N MICRONS
(MIN.)
DFT/ COAT 3 X 20 = 60

DFT/ COAT 2 X 20 = 40
8.6 401 TO 500 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR AS PER 7.2.2 2 COATS OF F-12 @ 80

20 µ DFT/ COAT
2 X 20 = 40
NOTE 1 : FOR MS CHIMNEY OR WITHOUT REFRACTORY LINING 8.3, 8.4 AND 8.5 SHALL BE FOLOWED.
NOTE 2 : FOR EXTENAL SURFACE OF RCC CHMNEY: 2 COATS OF F-6 @ 100 µ DFT/ COAT TO OBBTAIN 2 X 100=200µ
SHALL BE APPLIED AFTER MAKING SURFACE PREPARATION AS PER GUIDELINES IN 1.5
NOTE 3 : WHEREVER REQUIRED S.NO. 8.3 SHALL BE USED FOR 14°C TO 80°C AND S.NO. 8.2 WILL BE DELETED.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TABLE 9.0: FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENT (FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW TEMPERATURE
CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL)
FOR ALL CORROSIVE AREAS ABOVE GROUND WHERE H2S, SO2 FUMES OR SPILLAGE’S OF ACID/ ALKALI/ SALT
ARE LIKELY TO COME IN CONTACT WITH SURFACE SUCH AS EXTERNAL SURFACE OF UNINSULATED COLUMNS,
VESSELS, HEAT EXCHANGERS, BLOWERS, PIPING, PUMPS, TOWERS, COMPRESSORS, FLARE LINES,
STRUCTURAL STEEL ETC.
S. DESIGN SURFACE PAINT SYSTEM TOTAL DFT REMARKS

NO. TEMPERATUR PREPARATION FIELD PRIMER FINISH PAINT IN MICRONS
E IN °C (MIN.)
9.1 -90 TO –15 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR OF PRE-FABRICATION NONE 65-75 Repair of pre-erection/
PRIMER 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65-75µ pre fabrication primer
DFT/ COAT shall be done wherever
damage is observed.
9.2 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR OF PRE-FABRICATION 1 COATS OF F-6 225 Surface preparation is
PRIMER 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65-75µ @ 100µ DFT/ required only for repairing
DFT/ COAT + 1 COATS OF P-6 COAT of damaged pre-erection/
@40 µ DFT/ COAT + 1 COAT OF F-2 fabrication primer
@ 40µ DFT/
COAT
9.3 81 TO 400 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR OF PRE-FABRICATION 2 COATS OF F-12 105
PRIMER 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65-75µ @ 20 µ DFT/
DFT/ COAT COAT
2 X 20 = 40
9.4 401 TO 500 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR 2S PER 7.2.2 2 COATS OF F-12 80
@ 20 µ DFT/
COAT
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TABLE 10.0: FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR HIGHLY CORROSIVE (FOR CARBON STEEL, LOW TEMPERATURE
CARBON STEEL & LOW ALLOY STEEL) EXTERNAL SURFACES OF UNINSULATED COLUMNS,
VESSELS, HEAT EXCHANGERS, BLOWERS, PIPING PUMPS, TOWERS, COMPRESSORS, FLARE
LINES, STRUCTURE STEEL ETC.
EXPOSED TO SPILLAGE OR FUMES OF HCL H2S04, SALTY WATER IMPINGEMENT, CHLORIDE ETC.

NO. TEMPERATUR PREPARATION FIELD PRIMER FINISH PAINT DFT IN
E IN °C MICRONS
(MIN.)
10.1 -90 TO –15 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR OF PRE-FABRICATION NONE 65-75 Repair of pre-erection/
PRIMER 1 COAT OF F-9 65-75µ fabrication primer shall be
DFT/ COAT followed. No over coating is
allowed
10.2 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR OF PRE-FABRICATION 2 COATS OF F-6 345 Surface preparation is
PRIMER 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65-75µ @ 100µ DFT/ required only for repairing
DFT/ COAT + 1 COATS OF P-6 COAT = 2 X 100= of damaged pre-erection/
@40 µ DFT/ COAT 200 + 1 COAT OF fabrication primer.
F-2 @ 40µ DFT/
COAT
10.3 81 TO 400 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR OF PRE-FABRICATION 2 COATS OF F-12 105
PRIMER 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65-75µ @ 20 µ DFT/
DFT/ COAT COAT
2 X 20 = 40
10.4 401 TO 500 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR AS PER 7.2.2 3 COATS OF F-12 80
@ 20 µ DFT/
COAT
2 X 20 = 40
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TABLE 11.0 : FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CARBON STEEL STORAGE TANKS (EXTERNAL) FOR ALL
ENVIRONMENTS.
S. NO. DESIGN SURFACE PAINT SYSTEM TOTAL DFT IN REMARKS

TEMPERATURE IN PREPARATION FILED PRIMER FINISH PAINT MICRONS (MIN.)
°C
1.1 EXTERNAL SHELL. WIND GIRDERS APPARATUSES, ROOF TOPS OF ALL GROUND TANK INCLUDING TOP SIDE OF
FLOATING ROOF OF OPEN TANK AS WELL AS COVERED FLOATING ROOF AND ASSOCIATED STRUCTURAL WORK
ROLLING AND STATIONARY LADDERS, SPIRAL STAIRWAYS, HAND TAILS FOR ALL ENVIRONMENTS FOR GRUDE OIL,
LDO, HSD, ATF KEROSENE, GASOLINE, MOTOR SPIRIT, DM WATER, FIREWATER, RAW WATER, POTABLE WATER, ACIDS,
ALKALIS SOLVENTS AND CHEMICALS ETC.
11.1.1 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 1 COATS OF F-6 285 F-6 should be
65-75µ DFT/ @ 100µ DFT/ suitable for
COAT + 1 COATS COAT + 2 COATS occasional water
OF P-6 @40 µ OF F-2 @ 40µ immersion
DFT/ COAT DFT/ COAT
65 X 40 = 105 2 X 40 = 80
11.1.2 81 TO 500 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 2 COATS OF F-12 105
65-75µ DFT/ @ 20 µ DFT/
COAT COAT
2 X 20 = 40
11.2 EXTERNAL SURFACE OF BOTTOM PLATE (SOIL SIDE) FOR ALL STORAGE TANKS.
11.2 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 3 COATS OF F - 7 365 F7 should be
65-75µ DFT/ @ 100 µ DFT/ suitable for
COAT COAT immersion service
3 X 100 = 300 of the products
given.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TABLE 12.0 : FIELD PAINT SYSTEM FOR CARBON STEEL AND ALLOY STORAGE TANK: (INTERNAL)
S. NO. DESIGN TEMPERATURE IN SURFACE PREPARATION PAINT SYSTEM TOTAL DFT IN REMARKS
°C FILED PRIMER FINISH PAINT MICRONS (MIN.)
INTERNAL SURFACE OF UNDERSIDE OF FLOATING ROOF, INTERNAL STRUCTURAL OF CONE ROOF, BOTTOM PLATE, ROOF STRUCTURE,
STEEL, LADDERS SUPPORTS FOR STORING GRUIDE OIL, LDO AND HSD (EXCLUDING WHITE OIL PRODUCTS)
12.1 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65- 3 COATS OF F-7 @ 100µ 365 F7 should be suitable for
75µ DFT/ COAT DFT/ COAT immersion service of the
3 X 100 = 300 products given.
12.2 BARE SHEEL OF INSIDE FLOATING ROOF TANK AND CONE ROOF TANK FOR PRODUCTS MENTIONED IN 12.1
12.2.1 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 PHOSPHATING 2 COATS OF @10 µ 20
TREATMENT WITH 2 X 10 = 20
PHOSPHATING
CHEMICALS (2
COATS)
12.3 FLOATING CONE ROOF TANKS FOR PETROLEUM PRODUCTS SUCH AS ATF, GASOLINE, NAPHTHA, KEROSENE, MOTOR SPIRIT, INSIDE
OF BOTTOM PLATE, UNDERSIDE OF FLOATING ROOF AND SHELL ABOVE MAXIMUM LIQUID LEVEL AND STRUCTURAL STEEL , LADDERS ETC.
12.3.1 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65- 3 COATS OF F-6 @ 100µ 365 F-6 should be suitable for
75µ DFT/ COAT DFT/ COAT immersion service of
3 X 100 = 300 petroleum produce like
ATF, Kerosene, petrol etc.
12.4 BARE SHELL OF INSIDE OF FLOATING CONE ROOF TANKS FOR PRODUCTS MENTIONED IN 12.3
12.4.1 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65- NONE 65-75 No over coating is allowed
75µ DFT/ COAT same as per pre-erection
primer, if any
12.5 INTERNAL PROTECTION IF FIXED ROOF TYPE STORAGE TANKS FOR POTABLE WATER: INSIDE OF SHELL, UNDER SIDE OF ROOF AND ROOF STRUCTURE
INSIDE SURFACE BOTTOM PLATE AND STRURAL STEEL WORKS, LADDERS, WALKWAYS, PLATFORMS ETC.
12.5.1 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 2 COAT OF F-6 @ 40µ 2 COATS OF F-6 @ 100µ 280 F-6 shall be suitable for
DFT/ COAT DFT/ COAT immersion service.
2 X 40 = 80 2 X 100 = 200
12.6 D. M. (DEMINERALISED WATER) AND HYDROCHLORIC ACID (HCL): INTERNAL SHELL, BOTTOM PLATE AND ALL ACCESSORIES
12.6.1 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 EBONITE RUBBER LINING AS PER SMMS SPECIFICATION 6-06-204
12.7 EG TANKS (INTERNAL SHELL, BOTTOM PLATE ROOF AND ALL ACCESSORIES)
12.7.1 ALL SSPC-SP-10 3 COATS VINYL CHLORIDE CO-POLYMER 225
AMERCOAT 23 @ 75µ / COAT
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
S. NO. DESIGN TEMPERATURE IN SURFACE PREPARATION PAINT SYSTEM TOTAL DFT IN REMARKS
°C FILED PRIMER FINISH PAINT MICRONS (MIN.)
12.8 INSIDE PONTOON AND INSIDE OF DOUBLE DECK OF ALL FLOATING ROOFS.
12.8.1 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-3 1 COAT OF F-8 @ 1 COATS OF F-6 @ 100µ 200
100µ DFT/ COAT DFT/ COAT
1 X 100 = 100
12.9 INTERNAL SURFACE OF AMINE & SOUR WATER STORAGE TANKS
12.9.1 -14 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 65- 2 COATS OF F-15 @ 75µ 215-225
75µ DFT/ COAT DFT/ COAT
2 X 40 = 80 2 X 75 = 150
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TABLE 13.0 : COATING SYSTEM FOR EXTERNAL SIDE OF UNDERGROUND CARBON STEEL PLANT PIPING
AND TANKS
S. NO. DESIGN TEMPERATURE SURFACE PREPARATION PAINT SYSTEM TOTAL DFT IN REMARKS
IN °C PRIMER FINISH PAINT MICRONS (MIN.)
13.1 CARBON STEEL PLANT PIPING (UNDERGROUND)
13.1.1 YARD COATING
13.1.1.1 25 TO 60 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF 4mm THICK COALTAR 4mm CTE coating shall
SYNTHETIC FAST COATING WRAPPING confirm to 120/ 5 as
DRYING PRIMER AS PER AWWA-C-203 per BS: 4164
TYPE-B AS PER IN 2 LAYER OF EACH
AWWA-C-203 2mm THICKNESS
(1991)
13.1.2 OVER THE DITCH COATING
13.1.2.1 25 Tto 60 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF 2 LAYERS OF 4 mm
SYNTHETIC FAST COALTAR BASED
DRYING PRIMER TAPE COATING AS
TYPE-B AS PER PER AWWA-C-203.
AWWA-C-203
(1991)
13.2 CARBON STEEL PLANT PIPING (UNDERGROUND)
13.2.1 61 TO 400 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-9 @ NONE 65-75
65-75µ DFT/ COAT
13.3 EXTERNAL SIDE OF UNINSULATED UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANKS:
13.3.1 40 TO 80 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-9 @ 3 COATS OF F-7 @ 365
65-75µ DFT/ COAT 100µ DFT/ COAT
3 X 100 = 300
13.3.2 -90 TO –41 SSPC-SP-10 1 COAT OF F-9 @ NONE 65-75
81 TO 400° c 65-75µ DFT/ COAT
1 COAT OF
AMERCOAT 738 @ NONE 250
250µ DFT/ COAT
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TABLE 14.0 : PAINTING UNDER INSULATION FOR INSULATED (HOT COLD SAFETY CARBON STEEL, LOW
ALLOY STEEL, LOW TEMPERATURE CARBON STEEL & STAINLESS STEEL PIPING,
STORAGE TANKS EQUIPMENTS IN ALL ENVIRONMENT
IN °C MICRONS (MIN.)
PRIMER FINISH PINTS
14.1 INSULATED CARBON STEEL, LOW ALLOY STEEL AND LTCS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT & TANKS
14.1.1 -4 TO 125 SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR OF PRE- 2 COATS OF F-14 @ 315 For other temprature
FABRICATION 125µ DFT/ COAT ranges no painting is
PRIMER F-9 @ 65- required under
2 X 125 = 250 OR 3
75µ DFT insulation.
COATS OF F-15= 3 X
80=240
14.1.2 OPERATING SSPC-SP-10 REPAIR OF PRE- 3 COATS OF F-12 @ 105-115
TEMPERATURE –45 TO FABRICATION 20µ DFT/ COAT
125° C BUT DESIGN PRIMER F-9 @ 65-
3 X 20 = 60
TEMPERATURE 126-400° 75µ DFT
C
14.2 INSULATED STAINLESS STEEL INCLUDING ALLOY-20- PIPING
14.2.1 BELOW 0° C TO ALL ALUMINUM SHEETING WITH ALUMINUM FOIL AND CHLORIDE FREE MINERAL SEALANT If the piping &
MINUS TEMPRATURE CONTAINING BARIUM CHROMATE SHALL BE APPLIED equipments are already
erected then surface
14.2.2 0 TO 120 SSPC-SP-10 ( 15-25µ NONE 2 COATS OF F-14 @ 250 shall be prepared by
SURFACE PROFILE) 125µ DFT/ COAT cleaning with emery
paper and wash/ flush
2 X 125 = 250 OR 3 with chloride free DM
COATS OF F-15= 3 X water followed by
80 = 240 wiping with organic
solvent
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
IN °C MICRONS (MIN.)
PRIMER FINISH PINTS
14.2.3 121 TO 500 SSPC-SP-10 NONE 3 COATS OF F-12 @ 60 No pre erection
20µ DFT/ COAT primer to be applied
3 X 20 = 60
14.2.4 501 TO 1000 SSPC-SP-10 NONE 1 COAT OF 150 Only Amorcoat 738
AMERCOAT 738 @ from Amoron is
150µ DFT/ COAT available for this
temperature range.
14.2.5 CYCLIC SERVICE-196 TO SSPC-SP-10 NONE 1 COAT OF 150

480 EXCEPTING –45 TO AMERCOAT 738 @
120 150µ DFT/ COAT
14.3 NO PAINTING REQUIRED FOR INSULATED MONEL, IN COLOY AND NICKEL LINES
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TABLE 15.0 : INTERNAL PROTECTION OF CARBON STEEL WATER BOXES AND TUBE SHEETS OF
COOLERS/ CONDENSERS WATER BOXES, CHANNELS, PARTITION PLATES, END COVERS AND
TUBE SHEETS ETC.
S. NO. DESIGN SURFACE PREPARATION PAINT SYSTEM TOTAL DFT IN REMARKS

TEMPERATURE IN °C PRIMER FINISH PAINT MICRONS (MIN.)
15.1 Upto 65 SSPC-SP-10 1 COATS OF F-6 @ 2 COATS OF F-7 @ 290 For C. S.
40µ DFT/ COAT 125µ DFT/ COAT
2 x 125 = 250
15.2 Upto 65 SSPC-SP-10 1 COATS OF P-4 @ 2 COATS OF F-7 @ 300 FOR NON
NON FERROUS AND 8µ DFT/ COAT 125µ DFT/ COAT FERROUS
BRASS TUBE 1 COATS OF P-6 @ 2 x 125 = 250 SURFACE
SHEETS 40µ DFT/ COAT
TABLE 16.0 FIELD PAINTING SYSTEM FOR GI TOWERS/ NON-FERROUS TUBE SHEET
S. NO. DESIGN SURFACE PREPARATION PAINT SYSTEM TOTAL DFT IN REMARKS

TEMPERATURE IN °C FILED PAINT FINISH PAINT MICRONS (MIN.)
16.1 Upto 65 SSPC-SP-10 1 COATS OF P-4 @ 2 COATS OF F-2 @ 40µ 130 SHADE AS PER
8-10µ DFT/ COAT + DFT/ COAT DEFENCE
1 COAT OF P-6 @ 2 x 40 = 250 REQUIREMENTS
4µ DFT/ COAT
16.2 Upto 65 SSPC-SP-10 1 COATS OF P-4 @ 2 COATS OF F-7 @ 300
NON FERROUS AND 8µ DFT/ COAT 125µ DFT/ COAT
BRASS TUBE 1 COATS OF P-6 @ 2 x 125 = 250
SHEETS 40µ DFT/ COAT
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
17.0 STORAGE
17.1 All paints and painting materials shall be stored only in rooms to be
arranged by contractor and approved by Engineer-in-Charge for the
purpose. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent fire. The
storage building shall preferably be separate from adjacent building. A
signboard bearing the words “ PAINT STORAGE NO NAKED LIGHT-
HIGHLY INFLAMMABLE” shall be clearly displayed outside.
18.0 COLOUR CODE FOR PIPING
For identification of pipeline, the colour code as per Table 18.1 shall be
used. Paint material for color-coding shall be as specified in this standard
in clause- 6.0.
18.1 Colour coding scheme for pipe, equipment, machinery & structure:
SR. NO. DESCRIPTION GROUND FIRST SECOND

COLOUR COLOUR BAND COLOUR
BAND
18.1.1 ALL KINDS OF WATER
DRINKING WATER Sea Gree French Blue Signal Red
DE-MINERALISED WATER -do- Gulf Red -
COOLING WATER -do- French Blue -
BOILER FEED WATER -do- Gulf Red -
CONDENSATE -do- Light Brown Signal Red
QUENCH WATER -do- Dark Grey -
WASH WATER -do- Ganary Yellow -
PROCESS WATER -do- Oxide Red -
PROCESS WATER -do- Crimson Red -
FIRE WATER Fire red White -
SEA WATER Sea Green -
18.1.2 STEAM
VERY HIGH PRESSURE STEAM Aluminiumto Signal Red -
(VHP) IS2339
HIGH PRESSURE STEAM (SH) -do- French Blue -
MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM -do- Gulf Red
(SH) -do- Canary Yellow Canary Yellow
LOW PRESSURE STEAM (SL) -do- Grey
DILUTION STEAM/ PURGE
STEAM
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
SR. NO. DESCRIPTION GROUND FIRST SECOND

COLOUR COLOUR BAND COLOUR
BAND
18.1.3 COMPRESSED AIR Sky Blue Signal Red -
PLANT AIR -do- Silver Grey -
INSTRUMENT AIR -do- French Blue -
NITROGEN Canary Yello Black -
OXYGEN -do- White -
CO2 -do- Light Grey -
18.1.4 GASES
FUEL GAS AND SOUR GAS Canary Yellow Grey Dark Violet
CHARGE GAS -do- Signal Red French Blue
RESIDUE GAS, LPG -do- Oxide Red White
ACETYLENE -do- Service Brown -
SWEET GAS -do- Grey -
18.1.5 ACIDS AND CHEMICALS

SULFURIC ACID DARK Violet Briliant Green Light Orange
NITRIC ACID -do- French Blue -do-
HYDROCHLORIC ACID -do- Signal Red -do-
ACETIC ACID -do- Silver Grey -do-
CAUSTIC smoke Grey Light Orange -
CHLORINE Canary Yellow Dark Violet -do-
18.1.6 HYDRO CARBONS

NAPTHAS Dark Admiralty Brilliant Green Black
PROPYLENE Grey -do- Smoke Grey
PROPYLENE C.G. (LIQ) -do- -do- Gulf Red
ETHYLENE GLYCOL -do- -do- -
ETHYLENE DICHLORIDE -do- Gulf Red -
BENZENE -do- Canary Yellow -
BUTADIENE -do- Black
ETHANE(LIQ) -do- Light Grey French Blue
PROPYLENE(LIQ) Dark Admiralty Signal Red Black
ETHYLENE(LIQ) Grey Light Grey Black
TAR -do- Signal Grey Brilliant Green
AROMATIC GASOLINE -do- Brilliant Green Canary Yellow
METHANOL (LIQ) -do- White Gulf Red
PYROLYSIS GASOLINE -do- Brilliant Green Black
MIXED C4(LIQ) -do- Signal Green Light Brown
LPG(LIQ) -do- Brilliant Gren Dark Violet
KEROSENE -do- -do- -
DIESEL OIL (WHITE) -do- -do- -
DIESEL OIL (BLACK) Light Brown -
-do-
-do-
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
18.2 The colour code scheme is intended for identification of the individual
group of the pipeline. The system of colour coding of a ground colour and
colour bands superimposed on it.
18.3 Ground colours as given in Table 18.1 shall be applied throughout the
entire length for uninsulated pipes, on the metal cladding & on surfaces
covered by Clause 2.2.2, ground colour coating of minimum 2m length or
of adequate length not to be mistaken as colour band shall be applied at
places requiring colour bands. Colour band(s) shall be applied at the
following location.
a. At battery limit points
b. Intersection points & change of direction points in piping ways.
c. Other points, such as midway of each piping way, near valves,

junction joints of services appliances, walls, on either side of pipe
culverts.
d. For zong stretch/ xard piping at 50M interval.
e. At start and terminating points.
18.4 Identification Sign
18.4.1 Flow direction shall be indicated by an arrow in the location stated in Para
a,b,c & d and as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
18.4.2 Colours of arrows shall be black or white and in contrast to the colour on
which they are superimposed.
18.4.3 Product names shall be marked at pump inlet, outlet and battery limit in a
suitable size as approved by Engineer-in-charge.
18.4.4 Size of arrow shall be either of those given in 18.5.
18.5 Colour Bands

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
18.5.1 As a rule minimum width of colour band shall conform to the following
table:
Nominal Pipe Size Width : L(mm)

3” NB and below 25mm
Above 3” NB upto 6” NB 50mm
Above 8” NB upto 12” OD 75mm
Above 12” OD 100mm
Note: For insulated pipes, nominal pipe size means the outside diameter
of insulation.
Nominal pipe size figures are to be inches.
18.5.2 Colour band(s) shall be arranged in the sequence shown in Table 18.1
and the sequence follows the direction of flow. The relative proportional
width of the first colour band to the subsequent bands shall be 4:1,
minimum width of any band shall be as per Clause 18.5.1.
18.5.3 Whenever it is required by the Engineer-in-charge to indicate that a

pipeline carries a hazardous material, a hazard marking of diagonal strips
of black and golden yellow as epr IS:2379 shall be painted on the ground
colour.
18.6 Wherever it is required by the Engineer-in-charge to indicate that a

pipeline carries a hazardous material, a hazard marking of diagonal strips
of black and golden yellow as per IS:2379 shall be painted on the ground
colour.
19.0 IDENTIFICATION OF VESSELS, PIPING ETC.
19.1 Equipment number shall be stencilled in black or white on each vessel,

column, equipment & machinery (insulated or uninsulated) after painting.
Line number n black or white shall be stencilled on all the pipelines of
more than one location as directed by Engineer-in-charge, size of letters
printed shall be as below :
Column & Vessels - 150mm(high)

Pump, Compressor and other machinery - 50mm (high)
Piping - 40-150mm
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
19.2 Identification of storage tanks
The storage tanks shall be marked as detailed in the drawing.
20.0 PAINTING FOR CIVIL DEFENCE REQUIREMENTS
20.1 Following items shall be painted for camouflaging if required by the client.
a. All columns
b. All tanks in offsites
c. Large vessels
d. Spheres
20.2 Two coats of selected finishing paint as per defence requirement shall be
applied in a particular pattern as per 20.3 and as per the instructions of
Engineer-in-charge.
20.3 Method of Camouflaging
20.3.1 Disruptive painting for camouflaging shall be done in three colours in the
ratio of 5:3:2 (all matt finish).
Dark Green Light Green Dark Medium Brown

5: 3: 2
20.3.2 The patches should be asymmetrical and irregular.
20.3.3 The patches should be inclined at 30 degree to 60 degree to the

horizontal.
20.3.4 The patches should be continuous where two surfaces meet at an angle.
20.3.5 The patches should not coincide with corners.
20.3.6 Slits and holes shall be painted and dark shades.
20.3.7 Width of patches should be 1 to 2 meters.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
21.1 All painting materials including primers and thinners brought to site by
contractor for application shall be procured directly from manufacturers as
per specifications and shall be accompanied by manufacturer’s test
certificates. Paint formulations without certificates are not acceptable.
21.2 Engineer-in-Charge at his discretion, may call for tests for paint
formulations. Contractor shall arrange to have such tests performed
including batchwise test of wet paints for physical & chemical analysis. All
costs there shall be borne by the contractor.
21.3 The painting work shall be subject to inspection by Engineer-in-Charge at

all times. In particular, following stagewise inspection will be performed
and contractor shall offer the work for inspection and approval of every
stage before proceeding with the next stage. The record of inspection
shall ne maintained in the registers. Stages of inspection are as follows:
a. Surface preparation
b. Primer application
c. Each coat of paint
In addition to above, record should inculde type of shop primer already

applied on equipment e. g. Redd oxide zinc chromate or zinc chromate or
Red lead primer etc.
Any defect noticed during the various stages of inspection shall be

rectified by the contractor to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge
before proceeding further. Irrespective of the inspection, repair and
approval at intermidiate stages of work. Contractor shall be responsible
for making good any defects found during final inspection/ guarantee
period/ defect liability period as defined in general condition of contract.
Dry film thickness (DFT) shall be checked and recorded after application
of each coat and extra coat of paint should be applied to make-up the
DFT specified without any extra cost to owner, the extra cost should have
prior approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
21.4 Primer Application
After surface preparation the primer should be applied to cover the

crevices, corners, sharp edges etc. in the presence of inspector
nominated by Engineer-in-Charge.
21.5 The shades of successive coats should be slightly different in colour in

order to ensure application of individual coats, the thickness of each coat
and complete coverage should be checked as per provision of this
specification. This should be approved by Engineer-in-Charge before
application of successive coats.
21.6 The contractor shall provide standard thickness measurement instrument

with appropriate ranges(s) for measuring.
Dry film thickness of each coat, surface profile guage for checking of
surface profile in case of blast cleaning. Holiday directors and pinhole
detector and positector whenever required for checking in case of
immersion conditions.
21.7 Prior to application of paints on surface of chimneys the thickness of the

individual coat shall be checked by application of each coat of same paint
on M. S test panel. The thickness of paint on test panel shall be
determined by using guage such as ‘Elkomere’. This thickness of each
coat shall be checked as per provision of this specification. This shall be
approved by Engineer-in-Charge before application of paints on surface of
chimney.
21.8 At the discretion of Engineer-in-Charge, the paint manufacturer must

provide the expert technical service at site as and when required. This
service should be free of cost and without any obligation to the owner, as
it would be in the interest of the manufacturer to ensure that both surface
preparation and application are carried out as per their recommendations.
21.9 Final inspection shall include measurement of paint dry film thickness.
Adhesion Holiday detection check of finish and workmanship. The
thickness should be measured at as many points/ locations as decided by
Engineer-in-Charge and shall be within + 10% of the dry thickness,
specified in the specifications.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
21.10 The contractor shall arrange for spot checking of paint materials for Sp.
Gr., flow time (ford cup) and spreading rate.
22.0 GUARANTEE
22.1 The contractor shall guarantee that the chemical and physical properties
of paint materials used are in accordance with the specifications
contained herein/ to be provided during execution of work.
22.2 The contractor shall produce test report from manufacturer regarding the
quality of the particular batch of paint supplied. The Engineer-in-Charge
shall have the right the test wet samples of paint at random, for quality of
same as stipulated in clause 11 above. Batch test report of
manufacturer’s for each batch paint supplied shall be made available by
the contractor.
23.0 QUALIFICATION CRITERIA OF PAINTING CONTRACTOR
Painting contractor who is awarded any job for MECON, projects under
this standard must have necessary equipments, machinery, tool and
tackles for surface preparation, paint application and inspection. The
contractor must have qualified trained and experienced surface
preparation, paint applicator, inspector, and supervisors. The contractor
supervisor, inspector surface perpetrator and paint applicator must be
conversant with the standards referred in this specification the contractors
capacity, capability and competency requirements for the job shall be
quantified in the tender document and shall be assessed by an MECON
team before awarding any job.
24.0 PROCEDURE FOR APPROVAL OF NEW COATING MATERIALS AND

MANUFACTURER’S
Following procedure is recommended to be followed for approval of new

manufacturers.
24.1 The manufacturer should arrange testing of the inorganic zinc silicate
coating materials as per the list of tests given in para 24.5 below from one
of the reputed Government laboratories.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
24.2 Samples of coating should be submitted to the Govt. laboratory in sealed

containers with batch no. and test certificate on regular format of
manufacturer’s testing laboratory. The sampling shall be certificate and
sealed by a citifying agency.
24.3 All test panels should be prepared by govt. testing agency coloured
photographs of test panels should be taken before and after the test
should be enclosed alongwith test report.
Sample batch. No. and manufacturer’s test certificate should ne enclosed

alongwith the report. Test reports contain details of observation and
rusting if any, as per the testing code. Suggested government laboratories
are:
RRL, Hayderabad
HBTI, Kanpur
DMSRDE, Kanpur
IIT, Mumbai
BIS Laboratory
UDCT, Mumbai
RITES, Calcutta
PDIL
24.4 Manufacturers should intimate the company, details of sample submitted

for testing name of Govt. testing agency, date, contact personnel of the
Govt. testing agency. At the end of the test the manufacturer should
submit the test report to the company for approval. The manufacturer(s)
shall be qualified based on the result of these tests and other
assessment and the Company’s decision in this regard shall be final and
binding on the manufacturer.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
24.5 Tests required for evaluation of acceptance of coating materials for

offshore application.
Test ASTM Test Method
Density D 1475
Dipping properties D 823
Film Characteristics
Drying time D 1640
Flexibility D 1737/ D 522
Hardness D 3363
Adhesion D 2197
Abrasion resistance D 968/ D 1044
DFT/ Coat AS PER SSPC GUIDELINES
Storage Stability D 1849
Resistance to
Humidity for 2000 hrs. D 2247
Salt Spray for 2000 hrs. B 117
Accelerated Weathering D 822
% Zn in DFT G 53
24.6 Coating system for panel test shall be decided after discussion with
MECON.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-I
LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
Indian Vendors
1.0 Asian Paints(I) Ltd.

2.0 Berger Paints Ltd.
3.0 Goodlass Nerlolac Paints Ltd.
4.0 Jenson And Nicholson Paint Ltd & chokuGu Jenson & Nicholson Ltd.
5.0 Shalimar Paints Ltd.
6.0 Sigma Coating, Mumabai
7.0 CDC Carboline Ltd.
8.0 Premier Products Ltd.
9.0 Coromandel Paints & Chemicals Ltd.
10.0 Anupam Enterprises
11.0 Grand Polycoats
12.0 Bombay Paints Ltd.
13.0 Vanaprabha Esters & Glycer, Mumbai
14.0 Sunil Paints and Varnishes Pvt. Ltd.
15.0 Courtaulds Coating & Sealants India (Pvt.) Ltd.
16.0 Mark-chem Incorporated, Mumbai (for phosphating chemicals only)
17.0 VCM Polyurethane Paint (for polyurethane Paint only)
FOREIGN VENDORS FOR OVERSEAS PRODUCTS
1.0 Sigma Coating, Singapore

2.0 Ameron, USA
3.0 Kansai Paint, Japan
4.0 Hempel Paint, USA
5.0 Valspar Corporation, USA
6.0 Courtaulds Coating, UK.
Note: This list subjected to revision based fresh approval which will be intimated to
PDD/ Vendor Cell.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE-II
LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURER’S PRODUCTS
S. MANUFACTURER P2 P4 P6 F9
No. NAME CHLORINATED RUBBER ETCH PRIMER/ WASH EPOXY ZINC PH. INORGANIC ZINC
Zp PRIMER PRIMER PRIMER SILICATE PRIMER/
COATING
1. ASIAN PAINTS (I) LTD. ASIOCHL OR HB. ZN.PH APCONYL WP 636 (PC APCODUR HB. APCOCIL 605
PRIMER RO PC 168 335) RO.ZP-PC433
2. BARGER PAINT LTD. LINSOL HIGH BUILD ZP BISON WASH PRIMER EPILUX 610 ZINC ANODE 304
PRIMER
3. AMERON/ GODDLASS - AMERCOAT 187 AMERCOAT 71 DIMET COTE-9
NEROLAC PAINTS
LTD.
4. JENSON & NICHOSON JENSOLAC CHLORINATED J & N ETCH PRIMER EPILAC ZINC -
PAINTS LTD. AND RUBBER HB ZN.PH. PHOSPHATE
CHOKUGU JENSON PRIMER PRIMER
NICHOLSON
5. SHALIMAR PAINTS CHIOROKOTE ZINC TUFFKOTE ETC EPIGUARD 4 ZINC TUFFKOTE ZILICATE TL
LTD. PHOSPHATE PRIMER PRIMER PHOSPHATE
GREY PRIMER GREY
6. SIGMA COATING SIGMA NUCOL UNICOAT SIGMA COVER PRIMER COLTURE CM SIGMASIL MC (7568)
7321 (7413) PRIMER 7412
7. CDC CARBOLINE LTD. - - CARBOLINE 893 CARBOZINC 11
8. PRIMER PRODUCTS - - P-15/3A U17/ 92 ETHYL

LTD. U-16/92 SILICATE INORGANIC
ZINC
9. CORAMANDEL PAINTS COROCLORE CR HB. ZN. CPC WASH PRIMER COROPEX EPOXY -
CHEMICALS LTD. PH. PRIMER ZH. PH. HIGH BILD
PRIMER
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
COATING
10. ANUPAM ANUCHLOR ZP PRIMER ANUPRIME 291 ANUPAM ANILICOR -
ENTERPRISES A-EZP-500
11. GRAND POLYCOATS GP CHILOROPRIME 601 GP PPRIME 401 - -
12. BOMBAY PAINTS HEMPA TEX HIGHBUILD PENTOLITE WASH HEMPEL’S SHOP GALVASOL 1570
LTD. THEMPEL 4633 PRIMER 8520 PRIMER E-1530
MAKINE PAINTS
13. VANAPRABHA VEGCHLOR HB PRIMER VEG WASH PRIMER VEGPOX 1241 Z/ -
ESTERS & 1143 1181 P
GLYCERIDES,
14. SUNIL PAINTS AND SUNCHLOR HB ZINC SUN WASH SUNPOXY ZINC -
VARNISHED PVT. PHOSPHATE PRIMER PHOSPHATE
LTD. PRIMER
15. COURTAULDS - - INTERGARD 251 INTERZINC
COATING LTD.
16. MARK-CHEM RUST PREVENTIVE
INCOPORATED, LIQUID DRSAIO
(FOR PHOSPHATING
CHEMICAL ONLY)
17. VCM
POLYURETHANE
PAINTS (FOR POLY
EURETHANE PAINTS
ONLY)
18. JOTUN PAINTS EPOXY CQ JOTACOTE – 2
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
COATING
SPECIAL ZINC
PHOSPHATE
PRIMER
19. KCC PRODUCTS EZ 180(N)
(KOREA)
LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURER’S PRODUCTS (Contd….)
S. MANUFACTURER F2 F3 F6 F7
No. NAME ACRYLIC-POLY CHLORINATED HIGH BUILD HIGH BUILD COAL
YURETHANE FINISH RUBBER FINISH FINISH PAINT TAR EPOXY
PAINT PAINT COATING
1. ASIAN PAINTS (I) APCOTHANE CF76 (PC ASIOCHLOR CF 621 APCODUR HB APCODUR CF 300
LTD. 1109) (PC 161) COATING 9466
2. BARGER PAINT LTD. BARGER THANE LINOSOL EPILUX 04 AND 78 EPILUX 555
ENAMEL (81) CHLORINATED HB EPOXY
RUBBER HB COATING
COATING
3. AMERON/ AMERCOAT 450GL AMERCOAT 515 AMER COAT 383 AMERCOAT 78 HB
GODDLASS HS
NEROLAC PAINTS
LTD.
4. JENSON & J & N 993 HB JENSON HB EPILAC 981 EPILAC
NICHOSON PAINTS POLYURETHANE CHLORINATED ENAMEL SOLVENTLESS COAT
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
S. MANUFACTURER F2 F3 F6 F7
No. NAME ACRYLIC-POLY CHLORINATED HIGH BUILD HIGH BUILD COAL
YURETHANE FINISH RUBBER FINISH FINISH PAINT TAR EPOXY
PAINT PAINT COATING
LTD. AND CHOKUGU FINISH PAINT. RUBBER FINISH TAR EPOXY
JENSON PAINT COATING
NICHOLSON
5. SHALIMAR PAINTS SHALITHANE FINISH CHLORKOTE FINISH EPIGARD KL BIPIGARD’S BLACK
LTD. FINISH HB COAL TAR EPOXY
COATING
6. SIGMA COATING SIGMADOUR HS SIGMA NUCOL SIGMA COVER COLTURIET TCN 300
SEMIGLOSS 7530 FINISH 7308 CM 7456
7. CDC CARBOLINE CARBOLINE 132 - CARBOLINE 191 CARBOMASTIC-14
LTD.
8. PRIMER PRODUCTS U3/ 92 POLYURETHANE CR-71 FINISH PAINT 42B/ 4A HIGH 350B/ 3A, COAL TAR
LTD. BUILD EPOXY EPOXY COATING
9. CORAMANDEL - COROCLORE CR COROPEX EPOXY COROPEX EPOXY
PAINTS CHEMICALS FINISHING HB COATING COAL TAR COATING
10. ANUPAM ANUTHANE ENAMEL ANUCHLOR HB DURACOAT-6000 COROGUARD
ENTERPRISES ENAMEL
11. GRAND POLYCOATS GP COAT 131, 132 GP CHILOROGAURD GP GUARD HP POLYGUARD GE
GP BOND 141 631 234
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
S. MANUFACTURER’S F2 F3 F6 F7
NO. NAME
12. BOMBAY PAINTS PENTATHANE FP 4510 HEMPATEX HIBUILD HEMPADUR HIGH HEMPADUR 1510
LTD./ PAINTS 4633 BUILD 5520
13. VANAPRABHA VEGTHANE FP 3641 VEGCHLOR FP 3140 VEGPOX- 3265 VEGPOX 4265
ESTERS & VEGPOX 3562
GLYCERIDES,
14. SUNIL PAINTS AND SUNTHANE (ALIPHATIC) SUNCHLOR HB CR LPOXY HB ‘PS LPOXY BLACK P. S.
VARNISHED PVT. COATING 901’ 551
LTD.
15. COURTAULDS INTERTHANE - INTEGARD EM INTERTUF JXA 006/
COATING LTD. SERIES 007/ 010
16. MARK-CHEM
INCOPORATED,
(FOR PHOSPHATE
PAINTS ONLY)
17. VCM PIPCOTHANE
POLYURETHANE ALIPHATIC
PAINTS (FOR POLY POLYURETHANE
EURETHANE PAINTS FINISH PAINT
ONLY)
18. JOTUN PAINTS HARDTOP AS PENGUARD JOTAGUARD 85
19. KCC PRODUCTS KOPOX TOPCOAT EH 173
(KOREA) HB ET 5740
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
S. MANUFACTURER’S NAME F-8 F-11 F-12

NO. EPOXY MASTIC COATING HEAT RESISTANCE HEAT RESISTANCE SILICON
SURFACE TOLERANT SYNTHETIC MEDIUM AL. PAINT
ALUMINUM PAINT
1. ASIAN PAINTS (I) LTD. APCODOR CF 640 ASIAN HR ALUMINUM HR SILICON ALUMINUM PAINT
PAINT (PC 300) (PC 189)
2. BARGER PAINT LTD. PROTECTOMASTIC FERROLOT HR BARGER HEAT RISISTANT
ALUMINUM PANT SILICON ALUMINUM PAINT
3. AMERON/ GODDLASS AMERLOCK 400 AMERCOAT 878
NEROLAC PAINTS LTD.
4. JENSON & NICHOSON PAINTS - FERROTECT FERRLOTECT SILICON HEAT
LTD. AND CHOKUGU JENSON SYNTHETIC RUBBER RESISTANCE 1000
NICHOLSON H/R ALUMINUM PAINT
4000
5. SHALIMAR PAINTS LTD. EPIPLUS 56 HEAT RESISTING LUSTOTHERM HIGH TEMP
LUSTROL ALUMINUM ALUMINUM PAINT
6. SIGMA COATING SIGMA ETPC ALUMINUM HIGH TEMPERATURE AROSTA FINISH HR
RESISTANT EPOXY
SUSTEM UPTO 200° C
4062
7. CDC CARBOLINE LTD. CARBOMASTIC-15 CARBOLINE 1248 CARBOLINE 4674
8. PRIMER PRODUCTS LTD. HB EPOXY MATIC 150B/
150A
9. CORAMANDEL PAINTS - SILVOTOL HR CPC SILICONE HR ALUMINUM
CHEMICALS ALUMINUM PAINT PAINT
10. ANUPAM ENTERPRISES ANUMASTIC-102 - ANUPAM HEAT GUARD
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
S. MANUFACTURER’S NAME F8 F11 F12

NO.
11. GRAND POLYCOATS GP PRIME GUARD -
235
12. BOMBAY PAINTS LTD./ HEMPADUR 1708 KANGAROO HHR HEMPADUR HIGH BUILD 5520
HEMPEL MARINE PAINTS ALUMINUM 4950
13. VANAPRABHA ESTERS & VEGEPOX MASTIC VEG HR AL PAINT TO VEG HHR AL PAINT TO 600°C
GLYCERIDES, 2255 IS211339
14. SUNIL PAINTS AND LPOXY HIGHBUILD - -
VARNISHED PVT. LTD. P.S.901
15. COURTAULDS COATING INTERPLUX - INTERTHERM 50
LTD.
16. MARK-CHEM
INCOPORATED, (FOR
PHOSPHATE PAINTS
ONLY)
17. VCM POLYURETHANE -
PAINTS (FOR POLY
EURETHANE PAINTS
ONLY)
18. JOTUN PAINTS JOTUMATIC 87 SOLVELITT HEAT RESISTANT SILICON
PAINT
19. KCC PRODUCTS (KOREA) EH 4158H QT 606
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
REPAIR OF PIPELINE CORROSION COATING
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE REPAIR OF PIPELINE MEC/S/05/21/08 REVISION : 0

CORROSION COATING
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
1. SCOPE
2. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
3. APPLICATION PROCEDURE
4. INSPECTION/ TEST
5. HOLIDAY INSPECTION
6. DOCUMENTATION

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

CORROSION COATING
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

CORROSION COATING
EDITION : 1
1.0 SCOPE :
This specification covers the minimum requirement of material and equipment,

installation procedure and inspection of repair of damaged polyethylene coatings on
steel pipes.
1.1 The repair shall be carried out using repair patch made of radiation crosslinked
Polyolefin backing, coated on the inside with semi-crystalline thermoplastic Adhesive
and filler mastic
1.2 The repair patch shall have thermal indicators to ensure correct heat is being applied
during application.
2.0 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
2.1 CONTRACTOR shall supply all ,equipment and manpower required for a skillful and
adequate application in the field in accordance with the specification.
2.2 The repair material shall be :
• Repair patch shall be cross linked polyolefin with semi-crystalline thermoplastic

adhesive (PERP 80 patch make of Covalence Raychem or equivalent).
• Filler mastic : PERPFILLER of make Covalence Raychem or equivalent.
• PERP melt stick of make Covalence Raychem or equivalent.
• Certified by DIN to meet the requirement of EN12068 stress class CHT 80.
2.3 The material shall not be older than their period of validity at the time of Application by
CONTRACTOR. Deteriorated/decomposed materials shall not be used.
2.4 Material shall be stored in sheltered storages in the manufacturer's original packing and
away from direct sunlight and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.0 APPLICATION PROCEDURE
The application procedure to be followed for Holiday type of damage shall be in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and minimum requirements specified
below whichever is more stringent.
Preparation : Remove coating from damaged area with knife, scraper or power brush.
Scrap off the damaged area and adjacent coating to remove oil, grease, ruse dirt and
moisture.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

CORROSION COATING
EDITION : 1
Preheating : Preheat the exposed bare metal surface to about 80°C and adjacent pipe
coating to about 60°C with a torch moved back and forth over the surface.
Application of the Filler : Plastic filler shall be applied to all exposed metal surface. The
mastic is heated and smoothed down with a paint scraper to cover all bare metal in a
manner such that all entrapped air is removed.
Application of repair tape : Cut a patch from the tape in a manner such that it extends
50 mm beyond the damaged area, position it over the damaged area, heat until the
temperature sensitive paint on the outside of the patch changes colour. It shall be
smoothed down to confirm with the contour of lap, and shall be freed of any air
bubbles or wrinkles.
For cosmetic type of defects such as minor gauging tearing, scratches which do not
indicate holiday during holiday inspection, following procedure shall be adopted :
The defect area shall be roughened to remove loose polyethylene coating, oil grease,
dirt etc.
This shall be followed by application of repair patch as described above.
4.0 INSPECTION, TEST
A visual inspection shall be carried out for the following :
- Mastic extrusion on ends of the patch shall be examined.

- There shall be no sign of punctures or pin holes or bend failure. The external
appearance of the patch shall be smooth, free from dimples, air entrapment or
void formation.
- The entire repair patch shall have changed colour uniformly.
5.0 HOLIDAY INSPECTION
- The holiday detector used shall be checked and calibrated easily with an
accurate D.C. Voltmeter. The detector electrode shall be in direct contact with
the surface of coating to be inspected.
- The entire surface of the repaired section shall be inspected by means of a full
circle holiday detector approved by company set to a DC Voltage of at least 25
KV. Inspection of repaired patch shall be conducted only after it has cooled
below 50°C.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

CORROSION COATING
EDITION : 1
- No repaired point shall be covered or lowered in the trench until it has been
- Procedure qualification shall be carried out for repair patch. The value for peel
strength to pipe surface and to factory coating carried out as per EN 12068
shall be 0.5 N/mm minimum at 60°C.
6.0 DOCUMENTATION
6.1 Prior to procurement of coating repair materials, Contractor shall furnish four copies of,
but not limited to, the following for qualification of the Manufacturer and material :
i) Complete descriptive technical catalogs describing the materials offered

alongwith samples of repair coating materials, its properties and installation
instruction as applicable specifically to the project.
ii) Test certificate and results of previously conducted tests from independent
inspection agency.
iii) Reference list of previous supplies of the similar material indicating the project
details such as diameter, quantity, service conditions, year of supply, project
name, contact person and feed back on performance.
Once the Company’s approval has been given, any change in material or Manufacturer
shall be notified to Company, whose approval in writing of all changes shall be
obtained before the materials are manufactured.
6.2 Prior to shipment of materials from the Manufacturer’s works. Contractor shall furnish
six copies of the following :
i) Test Certificates for each batch of materials.

ii) Specific installation instruction with pictorial illustrations.
iii) Specific storage and handling instructions.
6.3 All documents shall be in English Language only.

Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PIPELINE MARKERS
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE PIPELINE MARKERS MEC/S/05/21/10 REVISION : 0
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 REFERENCE CODES AND DRAWINGS
3.0 GENERAL
4.0 AERIAL MARKERS
5.0 KILOMETRE MARKERS
6.0 PIPELINE WARNING SIGN
7.0 ROW BOUNDARY MARKERS
8.0 DIRECTION MARKERS
9.0 NAVIGABLE WATERWAY PIPELINE CROSSING WARNING SIGN
REFERENCE DRAWINGS
MECON STANDARD DRAWINGS
MEC/TYP/05/21/10/001 : TYPICAL ROW BOUNDARY

MARKER
MEC/TYP/05/21/10/002 : K.M. POST
MEC/TYP/05/21/10/003 : PIPELINE WARNING SIGN
MEC/TYP/05/21/10/004 : NAVIGABLE WATERWAY PIPELINE
CROSSING WARNING SIGN
MEC/TYP/05/21/10/005 : AERIAL MARKER
MEC/TYP/05/21/10/006 : DIRECTION MARKER

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the minimum requirements for supply, fabrication and
erection of pipeline markers to be installed by CONTRACTOR at various locations along
the route of a cross-country pipeline.
2.0 REFERENCE CODES
Reference has been made in this specification to the latest revision of the following
code :
API RP 1109 : Recommended practice for marking liquid petroleum pipeline

facilities.
3.0 GENERAL
3.1 CONTRACTOR shall supply, fabricate and install the pipeline markers along the pipeline
route. The locations of markers as indicated in the approved drawings shall be treated
for guidance purposes only and the exact location of the markers shall be based on AS
BUILT drainage and as directed by COMPANY.
3.2 The pipeline markers shall be fabricated, painted (Painting shall be in accordance with
the MECON Standard Specification for Shop & Field Painting) and installed in
accordance with the MECON standard drawings included herein. Before start of
fabrication of the markers, CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit for COMPANY's
approval the detailed scheme for the marker plates as applicable for the project.
3.3 The pipeline markers shall be installed, as far as possible, at locations such that to
cause no hindrance to the regular use of the land or to the traffic.
4.0 AERIAL MARKERS
Aerial markers shall in general be installed along the pipeline at every five (5)
kilometres intervals and at places specified by COMPANY. Refer MECON Standard
Drawing No. MEC/TYP/05/21/10/005 for details.
5.0 KILOMETRE MARKERS
Kilometre markers shall in general be installed along the pipeline between the aerial
markers at every one (1) kilometre interval. Markers shall indicate cumulative distance
in kilometres from the reference station, as directed by COMPANY. A kilometre marker
is not required if the relative length between its location and any pipeline warning sign
is less than 200 metres. Refer MECON Standard Drawing No. MEC/TYP/05/21/10/002
for details.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
6.0 PIPELINE WARNING SIGN
Pipeline Warning Sign shall in general be installed at
• National and State Highway Crossings (2 Nos.)

• Other Road Crossings (1 No.)
• Railway Crossings (2 Nos.)
• Minor Water Crossings (less than 15m width) (1 No.)
• Minor Water Crossings (above 15m width) (2 Nos.)
• Major Water Crossings (2 Nos.)
• Valve Station (1 No.)
• And at any other location as shown in the approved drawings and as directed
by the COMPANY.
Pipeline Warning Sign shall identify the existence of the pipeline and display the name
of the COMPANY, with an emergency telephone number, as shown in MECON Standard
Drawing No. MEC/TYP/05/21/10/003 for details.
7.0 ROW BOUNDARY MARKERS
Right-of-Way boundary markers shall be fabricated and installed as per the drawings at
every 250 metres interval along the entire pipeline route. These shall be installed on
either side of the pipeline alignment to define the ROW boundary limits. These shall
also be installed at pipeline turning points to maintain the continuity of the ROW limits.
Refer MECON Standard Drawing No. MEC/TYP/05/21/10/001 for details.
8.0 DIRECTION MARKERS
Direction markers as shown in MECON Standard Drawing No. MEC/TYP/05/21/10/006

shall be installed to identify the significant turning points of the pipeline during aerial
traverse. One direction marker shall be installed at each turning point, in addition, two
more direction markers shall be installed along the pipeline alignment, one on either
side of the turning point at 200m from the turning point.
9.0 SPECIAL MARKERS
As directed by Company, Special Marker shall be installed at Location where the

following changes takes place :
- Change in pipeline diameter and wall thickness.

- Change in type of pipe.
- Change in class locations for pipeline conveying gas.
The above data may be provided on other types of marker (except RoU boundary
marker), if the relative distance between the two does not exceed 100 m.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
10.0 NAVIGABLE WATERWAY PIPELINE CROSSING WARNING SIGN
The Navigable Waterway Pipeline Crossing Warning Sign shall be fabricated in

accordance with MECON Standard Drawing No. MEC/TYP/05/21/10/004. Such Warning
Sign shall be installed one on each bank of navigable water courses at the pipeline
crossing location, in lieu of the Pipeline Warning Sign described in clause 6.0 of this
specification.
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
FLUSHING AND TESTING OF
PIPING SYSTEMS
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE FLUSHING AND TESTING OF MEC/S/05/21/11 REVISION : 0

PIPING SYSTEMS
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 REFERENCES
3.0 INSPECTION
4.0 FLUSHING
5.0 TESTING
5.1 EXTENT OF TESTING
5.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT/TEST PREPARATION FOR TESTING
5.3 TESTING MEDIA, TEST PRESSURE AND TEST PRESSURE GAUGES.
5.4 TESTING PROCEDURE
5.5 COMPLETION OF TESTING
5.6 TEST RECORDS

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPING SYSTEMS
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

No. Annexure / Exhibit / Drawing No.
(Name) (Name)
Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPING SYSTEMS
EDITION : 1
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for Inspection, flushing and testing
of piping systems. However testing of steam lines falling under IBR shall also be
governed by Indian Boiler Regulations.
Flushing and testing of all piping system shall be witnessed by the Consultant
Representative / Engineer-in- Charge.
2.0 REFERENCE
ASME B31.3-2004 : Process Piping
IBR : Indian Boiler Regulations
3.0 INSPECTION
During various stage and after completion fabrication and erection, the piping system
shall be inspected by the Consultant Representative / Engineer- in - Charge to ensure
that :
- Proper piping material has been used.

- Piping has been erected as per drawings and the instruction of the engineer- in
charge.
- All supports have been installed correctly.
- Test preparations mentioned in this specification have been carried out.
4.0 FLUSHING
Flushing of all lines shall be done before pressure testing.
Flushing shall be done by ‘fresh potable water’ or ‘dry compressed air, wherever water
flushing is not desirable’ to clean the pipe of all dirt, debris or loose foreign materials.
Required pressure of water, flushing shall meet the fire hydrant pressure or utility water
pressure. For air flushing the line, system will be pressurised by compressed air at the
required pressure which shall be 50 psi maximum. The pressure shall then be released
by quick opening of a valve, already in the line for this purpose. This procedure shall be
repeated as many times as required till the inside of the pipe is fully cleaned.
In line instruments like control valves, orifice plates, rotameters, safety valves and
other instruments like thermowells which may interfere with flushing shall not be
included i m the flushing circuit.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPING SYSTEMS
EDITION : 1
From all permanent strainers the screens/meshes shall be removed before flushing.
Screens/meshes shall be reinstalled after flushing but before testing.
During flushing temporary strainers shall be retained. These shall be removed, cleaned
and reinstalled after flushing, but, before testing.
In case an equipment such as column, vessel, exchanger etc. forms part of a piping
circuit during flushing, this shall be done with the approval of Engineer- in - Charge.
However equipment thus included in the circuit, shall be completely cleaned and dried
with comprss4ed air, after flushing is completed.
During flushing discharged water/air shall be drained at the place directed the
Engineer- in - Charge. If necessary, proper temporary drainage shall be provided by
the contractor.
Care shall be taken during flushing so as not to damage/spoil work of other agencies.
Precautions shall also be taken to prevent entry of water/foreign matter into equipment,
electric motors, instruments, electrical installations etc. in the vicinity of lines being
flushed.
The contractor shall carry out all the activities required before, during and after the
flushing operation, arising because of flushing requirements, such as but not limited to
the following.
Dropping of valves, specials, distance pieces, online instruments and any other piping
part before flushing. The flanges to disengaged for this purpose shall be envisaged by
the contractor and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. These flanges shall be
provided with temporary gaskets at the time of flushing.
After flushing is completed and approved, the valve, distance pieces, piping specials
etc. shall be re-installed by the contractor with permanent gaskets. However, flanges of
equipment nozzles and other places where isolation is required during testing, only
temporary gaskets shall be provided.
Records in triplicate shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor for each piping
system for the flushing done in the proforma provided / approved by EIC.
5.0 TESTING
Pressure testing, in general shall be as per clause 345 of ASME B31.3, unless
otherwise specified, herein. Lines carrying highly hazardous / poisonous fluids must
have a sensitive leak test. For IBR lines, ‘IBR Regulations’ shall also be followed.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPING SYSTEMS
EDITION : 1
5.1 Extent of testing
With the exclusion of instrumentation. piping system fabricated or assembled in the

field shall be tested irrespective of whether or not they have been pressure tested prior
to site welding of fabrication.
To facilitate the testing of piping systems, vessels and other equipments may be
included in the system with the prior approval of Engineer-in-charge, if the test
pressure specified is equal to or less than that for the vessels and other equipments.
Pumps, compressors and other votary equipments shall not be subjected to field test
pressures.
Lines which are directly open to atmosphere such as vents, drains, safety valves,
discharge need not be tested, but all joints shall be visually inspected wherever
necessary such lines shall be tested by continuous flow of fluid to eliminate the
possibility of blockage. However, such lines if provided with block valve shall be
pressure tested upto the first block valve.
Seats of all vales shall not be subjected to a pressure in excess of the maximum cold
welding pressure of the valve. Test pressure applied to vales shall not be grater than
the manufacturer is recommendation nor less than that required by the applicable
code. Where desirable set pressure is less than test pressure, test shall be made
through an open valve.
Instruments in the system to be tested, shall be excluded from the test by isolation or
removal, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer-in-charge. Restrictions which
interfere with filling, venting and drawing such as orifice plates etc. shall not be installed
unless testing is complete.
Control valves shall not be included in the test system. Where by-passes are provided
test shall be performed through the by-pass end/or necessary spool shall be used in
place of the control valve.
Pressure gauges which are part of the finished system, but cannot withstand test
pressure shall not be installed until the system has been tested. Where piping systems
to be tested are directly connected at the battery limits to piping for which the
responsibility tests with other agencies, the piping to be tested shall be isolated from
such piping by physical disconnection such as valves or blinds.
5.2 General Requirement/Test preparation for Testing
Test shall be carried out with permanent gaskets installed unless specified otherwise or
instructed by the Engineer-in- charge.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPING SYSTEMS
EDITION : 1
No pressure test shall be carried out against close valve unless approved by the
Engineer-in-charge.
The Engineer-in-charge shall be notified in advance by the contractor, of the testing

sequence and programme, to enable him to be present for witnessing the test. The
contractor shall be fully responsible for making arrangements with the local boiler
inspector to witness the tests for steam lines falling under IBR. IBR certificates for
these tests shall be obtained in the relevant IBR forms and furnished to the
Engineer-in-charge. Before testing, all piping shall be cleaned by flushing to make it
free from dist loose scale, debris and other loose foreign materials.
All piping systems to be hydrostatically tested shall be vented at the high points and
the systems purged of air before the test pressure is applied.
Wherever in the line any void is existing due to any reasons, for absence of control
valve, safety valve, check valves etc. it shall be filled with temporary spools.
All joints welded, screwed or flanged shall be left exposed for examination during the
test. Before pressuring the lines, each weld joint shall be cleaned by wire brush to free
it from rest and any other foreign matter.
Where a system is to be isolated of a pair of companion flanges, a blank shall be

inserted between the companion flanges. Minimum thickness of the blank shall be
designed in accordance with applicable design code.
Open ends of piping system where blanks cannot be used, such as pumps,
compressors, turbines or wherever equipment or pipe spool have been receivered or
disconnected prior to hydrostatic testing, shall be blinded – off by using standard blind
flanges of same rating as the piping system being tested.
Pressure gauges used in testing shall be installed as close as possible to the lowest
point in the piping system to be tested, to avoid overstressing of any of the lower
portion of the system. For longer lines and vertical lines, two or more pressure gauges
shall be installed at locations selected by the Engineer-in-charge. For lines containing
check valves any of the following alternatives shall be adopted for pressure testing.
Wherever possible pressurise up-stream side of valve.
Replace the valve by a temporary spool and re-install the valve after testing.
Provide blind on valve flanges and test the upstream and downstream of the line
separately and remove the blind after testing. All these flanges, temporary gaskets
shall be provided during testing and shall be replaced by permanent gaskets
subsequently. For check valves in lines 1-1/2" and below, flapper or seat shall be
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPING SYSTEMS
EDITION : 1
removed during testing (if possible). After completion of testing the flopper/ seat shall
be refitted.
Gas lines when hydrostatically tested shall be provided with additional temporary
supports during testing as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
Piping which is spring or counter – weight supported shall be temporarily supported,

where the weight of the fluid would overload the support. Retaining pins for spring
supports shall be removed only after testing is completed and test fluid is completely
drained.
2
When testing any piping system, air or steam of approximately 2 kg/cm (g) may be
used as preliminary test to detect missing gaskets etc. as this avoids the necessity of
purging the gas to make repairs. However, this method may not be used for this
purpose, if the steam temperature is more than the design temp. of the line.
For jacketed pipes testing of core pipes shall be done on individual pieces where the
pipe is continuously packed, before it is jacketed. The outer jacket shall be tested
separately as a system for piping with discontinuous jacketing, the core pipe and the
jacket shall be tested as separate system.
5.3 Testing Modes, Test pressure and Test Pressure Gauges
5.3.1 Testing Modes
In general all pressure test shall be hydrostatic using iron free water, which is clean
and free of silt. Maximum clorine content in water for hydrostatic testing for MS piping
shall be 15-20 ppm. Air shall be used for testing only if water would cause corrosion of
the system or overloading of supports etc. in special cases as directed by
Engineer-in-charge.
If operating fluid in the line is much lighter than testing fluid, the additional weight of
testing fluid may render piping supports (as designed) inadequate. This will call for
additional temporary supports. The typical examples are flare and vapor lines. It is
preferable that hydrostatic testing is avoided in such systems and instead pneumatic
testing may be specified.
Where air/water tests are undesirable substitute fluid such as gas, oil, methanol etc.
shall be used as the testing medium, with due consideration to the hazards involved.
These test fluids shall be specified in the line list given to the contractor.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPING SYSTEMS
EDITION : 1
5.3.2 Test Pressure
The hydrostatic/pneumatic test pressure shall be as indicated in the line list or as per
the instruction of Engineer-in-charge.
The selection of the piping system for one individual test shall be based on the
following :-
Test pressure required as per line list.
Maximum allowable pressure for the material of construction of piping depending upon
the above requirements and based on construction progress, maximum length of
piping shall be included in each test.
5.3.3 Test Pressure Gauge
All gauge used for field testing shall have suitable range so that the test pressure of the
various system falls in 35% to 65% of gauge scale range. Pressure gage shall be
minimum of 150 mm. Size of Bourdon shall not be less than 75% of nominal diameter
of dial range. Gauge shall be of a good quality and in first class working condition.
Prior to the start of any test or periodically during the field test programmes, all test
gauges shall be calibrated using a standard dead weight gauge tester or other suitable
approved testing apparatus. Any gauge having an incorrect zero reading or error of
more than ± 2% of full scale range shall be discarded. The Engineer-in-charge shall
check the accuracy of master pressure gauge used for calibration.
5.4 Testing Pressure
5.4.1 Hydrostatic Test
All vents and other connections used as vents shall be kept open while filling the line
with test fluid for complete removal of air. For pressurising and depressurising the
system, temporary isolating valves shall be provided if valves, vents, drains do not exist
in the system.
Pressure shall be applied only after the system/line is ready and approved by the
Engineer-in-charge.
Pressure shall be applied by means of a suitable test pump or other pressure source
which shall be isolated from the system as the desired test pressure is reached and
stabilised in the system.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPING SYSTEMS
EDITION : 1
A pressure gauge shall be provided at the pump discharge for guiding the system to
the required pressure.
The pump shall be attended constantly during the test by an authorised person. The
pump shall be isolated from the system wherever the pump is to be left unattended.
Test pressure shall be maintained for a sufficient length of time to permit through
inspection of all joints for leakage or signs of failure. Any joint found leaking during a
pressure test, shall be re-tested to the specified pressure after repair. Test period shall
be maintained for a minimum of four hours.
The pump and the piping system to be tested are to be provided with separate
pressure indicating test gauges. There gauges are to be checked by the standard test
gauge before each pressure test.
Care shall be taken to avoid increase in the pressure due to atmospheric variation
during the test.
5.4.2 Air Test
When testing with air, pressure shall be supplied by means of a compressor. The
compressor shall be portable type with a receiver after cooler & oil separator.
Piping to be tested by air shall have joints covered with a soap and water solution so
that the joints can be examined for leaks.
All other activities shall be same as per hydrotesting procedure (specified above).
5.5 Completion of Testing
After the hydrostatic test has been completed, pressure shall be released in a manner
and at a rate so as not to endanger personnel or damage equipments.
All vents and drains shall be opened before the system is to be drained and shall
remain open till all draining is complete, so as to prevent formation of vacuum in the
system. After draining lines/systems shall be dried by air.
After testing is completed the test blinds shall be removed and equipment/piping
isolated during testing shall be connected using the specified gaskets, bolts and nuts.
These connections shall be checked for tightness in subsequent pneumatic tests to be
carried out by the contractor for complete loop/circuit including equipments (except
rotary equipments).
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PIPING SYSTEMS
EDITION : 1
Pressure tests shall be considered complete only after approved by the

Engineer-in-charge. Defects, if any, noticed during testing shall be rectified
immediately and retesting of the system/line shall be done by the contractor at his cost.
5.6 Test Records
Records in triplicate shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor for each piping
system, for the pressure test done in the proforma provided / approved by the
Engineer-in-charge.
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CASING INSULATORS
AND END SEALS
SPECIFICATION NO. MEC/S/05/62/12
(PROCESS & PIPING DESIGN SECTION)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
C:\Documents and Settings\hcl\Desktop\Specs\WORKS\12 casing insulator & end seals\12_CASING INSULATORS AND END SEALS.doc
MECON LIMITED PROCESS & PIPING STANDARD SPECIFICATION
REGD. OFF: RANCHI (BIHAR) DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI
TITLE CASING INSULATORS AND END SPECIFICATION NO. PAGE 1 OF 6

SEALS MEC/S/05/62/12 REVISION 0
CONTENTS
PART-A CASING INSULATIONS
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 FUNCTION
3.0 DESIGN
4.0 MATERIAL
PART-B CASING END-SEALS
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 FUNCTION
3.0 DESIGN
4.0 MATERIAL
PART-C SUPPLEMTARY REQUIREMENTS
PREPARED BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY
REGD. OFF : RANCHI (BIHAR) DESIGN SECTION
NEW DELHI

PART-A CASING INSULATORS
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements of design, material,

manufacture and supply of casing insulators intended to be used for cased
pipeline crossings.
2.0 FUNCTION
Pipeline insulators shall be used to support the carrier pipe inside the casing
pipe and electrically isolate the carrier pipe from the casing pipe at the cased
crossings.
The casing insulators shall:
- Resist cold flow and will not soften at design temperature.
- Resist corrosion
- Resist mechanical damage while being pulled into the casing.
- Have high electrical insulating value and low water absorption, thus
preventing leakage and maintain electrical isolation between carrier and
casing pipes
- Have high compressive strength in order to assure a permanent support

to the carrier pipe.
3.0 DESIGN
The arrangement of insulator shall be generally in accordance with Fig. 3.0. It

shall be made in segments duly held together with cadmium plated bolts and
nuts, to be supplied with casing insulators.
The number of segments shall be two for pipe diameters upto 12” (generally).
For larger diameters, the number of segments may be more than two, but their
number shall be kept minimum.
The skid height shall be such that it is slightly less than the value obtained by
following formula.
NEW DELHI

Casing internal dia-carrier outer dia

2
Manufacturer shall obtain prior approval from COMPANY on casing insulators

drawings/designs.
4.0 MATERIAL
Casing insulators shall be made of injection moulded high density polyethylene

or other material equivalent or superior as approved by COMPANY and shall
meet the following specifications:
Property Value ASTM Test Method
Dielectric strength 450-500 Volts/Mil D-149
Compresssive strength 3200 psi D-695i
Tensile strength 3100-5000 D-638, D-651
Impact strength 4.Oft. 1b./inch of notch D-256
Water Absorption 0.01% D-570
Manufacturer shall furnish material test certificates of the components used in

the assembly of casing insulations as per the requirements of clause 4.0 of this
specification.
NEW DELHI

PART-B CASING END-SEALS
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements of design, material,

fabrication and supply of casing end-seals intended to be used for pipeline
cased crossings.
2.0 FUNCTION
Casing end seals are intended to be used for sealing the annular space
between casing pipe and carrier pipe at casing ends so as to prevent ingress
of moisture and water.
3.0 DESIGN
The scale shall be suitable for the casing and carrier pipe diameters as
applicable for each case.
The casing end-seal shall be flexible to cater for the expansion and contraction
of carrier and casing pipes and shall be able to tolerate both angular and
concentric misalignment of casing pipe without loss of sealing efficiency.
The design of the casing end-scale shall permit easy installation of the seal to
the cased pipeline crossing.
It shall provide moisture-proof seals when installed for the entire anticipated life
of the buried pipeline.
Manufacturer shall obtain prior approval from COMPANY on casing end seals
design/drawings.
4.0 MATERIAL
The casing end-scale shall be made of head shrink high density radiation
crosslinked polyethylene with an adhesive having a melt point suitable for the
pipeline service temperature and ambient temperatures foreseen during
construction. End-seals material shall be resistant to heat, cold, vibration,
impact, abrasion, corrosive fluids, disbonding, organic and bio-deterioration.
Manufacturer shall confirm compatibility of end seals with carrier pipe coating.
NEW DELHI

Casing end seals shall meet following minimum property requirements:
Property Minimum Value Test Method
a) Backing (Sleeve and closure patch)
Tensile strength 2200 psi ASTM D-638
Ultimate Elongation 400% ASTM D-638
Heat Shock No visual cracks, ASTM D-2671

flow or drips
(at 225°C, 4 hours)
b) Adhesive
Ring and Ball softening 90°C ASTM E-28

point
Lap Shear 60°C - 25 psi ASTM D-1002

23°C - 250 psi
(2 inch/min)
c) System (as applied)
Peel strength 5 pli ASTM

(To casing and carrier (10 inch/min.) D-1000
pipe and closure patch)
Manufacturer shall furnish material test certificates of the components used in

the assembly of casing end-seals as per the requirements of this specification.
NEW DELHI

PART-C SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
1.0 The Manufacturer shall replaces, at no extra cost, any material not conforming
to the material and performance requirements of this specification.
2.0 Manufacturer shall submit detailed specification of the materials used in the
assemblies, along with instructions for handling, use and installation of the
material for COMPANY approval prior to procurement.
3.0 Manufacturer shall submit all the documents, test reports, records and other
information in six copies to the COMPANY for record after approval as per
clause 2.0 above.
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIELD JOINT COATING
(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE FIELD JOINT COATING MEC/S/05/21/13 REVISION : 0

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
5.0 INSPECTION
6.0 TESTING
7.0 REPAIRS
8.0 DOCUMENTATION
(Shalini Singh) (Sunil Kumar) (A.K. Johri) May 2009

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements of materials, equipment and

installation of field joint anti-corrosion coating of underground onshore factory coated
pipelines with either three layer polyethylene or fusion bonded epoxy (FBE) coating by
heat shrink wraparound sleeves conforming to DIN EN 12068 – “Cathodic Protection –
External Organic Coatings for the Corrosion Protection of Buried or Immersed Steel
Pipelines used in Conjunction with Cathodic Protection – Tapes and Shrinkable
Materials” and the requirements of this specification. Unless modified / replaced by
this specification, all requirements of DIN EN 12068 shall remain fully applicable and
complied with.
This specification shall be read in conjunction with the conditions of all specifications
and documents included in the Contract between Company and Contractor. Unless
specified otherwise, all sections of this specification shall apply to all specifications
referred in this specification.
Reference has been made to the latest edition (edition enforce at the time of floating
the enquiry) of the following standards, codes and specifications:
a) ASTM D-149 : Standard Test Methods of Dielectric Breakdown voltage

and Dielectric Strength of solid electrical insulating
materials at commercial frequencies.
b) ASTM D-257 : Standard Test Methods for D-C Resistance or

conductance of insulating materials.
c) ASTM D-570 : Standard Method of Test for Water Absorption of

Plastics.
d) ISO 8502-3 : Preparation of Steel Stubstrates before Application of

Paints and Related Products – Part-3 – Assessment of
Dust on Steel Surfaces Prepared for Painting (Pressure
Sensitive Tape Method).
e) ISO:8503-1 : Part-1 : Specification and definitions for ISO surface

profile comparator for the assessment of abrasive blast
cleaned surfaces.
f) ISO:8503-4 : Part-4 : Methods for calibration of ISO surface profile

comparator and for the determination of surface profile –
Stylus instrument procedure.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
g) SIS-055900 : Pictorial surface Preparation Standard for Painting Steel

Surfaces.
h) SSPC-SP 1 : Steel Structure Painting Council.
In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and that of above
referred documents, the requirements of this specification shall govern.
The Contractor shall be familiar with the requirements of these documents and shall
make them readily available at the site to all personnel concerned with carrying out the
works specified in this specification.
3.0 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
3.1 Contractor shall supply joint coating materials, all equipment and manpower required
for a skillful and adequate application of coating in the field in accordance with the
specifications.
Contractor shall submit and demonstrate to Company proposed materials and works
procedures for applying field coating and repair procedures for same. These
proposed procedures and all materials, equipment and tools used in the work shall
be subject to Company’s approval.
3.2 Field Joint Corrosion Coating Material
Field joint anti-corrosion coating material shall be either heat shtrinktable wraparound
sleeve or cold applied tape suitable for a maximum operating temperature of (+) 65°C
(Tmax) and shall conform to designation EN 12068 – C HT 60 UV. In addition the field
joint anti-corrosion coating shall comply the requirements specified in para 3.3 of this
specification.
3.2.1 Heat Shrinkable Wraparound Sleeve
Heat shrinkable wrap around sleeve shall consist of radiation cross-linked thermally
stabilised, ultraviolet resistant semi-rigid polyolefin backing with a uniform thickness of
high shear strength thermoplastic/copolymer hot melt adhesive. The joint coating
system may consist of a solvent free epoxy primer applied to the pipe surface prior to
sleeve application. The backing shall be coated with thermochrome paint which will
change colour when the desired heat during shrinking is attained. The wraparound
sleeve shall be supplied in pre-cut sizes to suit the diameter and the requirements of
overlap.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
The total thickness of heat shrinkable wraparound sleeve in the as applied condition
shall be as follows :
Pipe Size Thickness (mm)

(Specified Outside Diameter) On Pipe Body On Weld Bead
(Min.) (Min.)
4” (114.3 mm) to 10” (273.0 mm) 2.0 mm 1.6 mm
12” (323.9 mm) to 18” (457.2 mm) 2.2 mm 1.8 mm
20” (508.0 mm) to 30” (762.0 mm) 2.5 mm 2.0 mm
≥ 32” (812.8 mm) 3.0 mm 2.5 mm
The heat shrink wraparound sleeve shall have the required adhesive properties when
applied on various commercial pipe-coating materials. The pre-heat and application
temperatures required for the application of the shrink sleeve shall not cause loss of
functional properties of the pipe coating.
Heat shrinkable wraparound field joint coating system manufactured by M/s Covalence
and M/s Canusa are acceptable for the supply of field joint coating materials. The
Contractor shall propose the specific grade of field joint coating system meeting the
requirements of this specification from these manufacturers. In case the Contractor
proposes to supply heat shrinkable wraparound sleeve from any other manufacturer,
then the Contractor shall propose only those coating systems that have been
previously used for pipelines of size same or higher than the size indicated in tender,
for a length of 50 km and above in a single project for similar operating conditions.
3.2.2 Cold Applied Tapes
Cold applied tape system shall comprise of primer, an inner wrap and an outer wrap.
The inner and outer wraps shall be asymmetric 3-ply tape with co-extruded
polyethylene carrier film and butyl rubber adhesive layers on both sides. The inner
layer of butyl rubber adhesive of inner wrap shall have a thickness of min. 1.0 mm. The
inner and outer wraps are to be spirally wrapped with 55% overlap, equivalent to two
layers each providing a total minimum thickness of 3.0 mm on the pipe body and 2.5
mm on the weld.
The Contractor shall propose only those cold applied tape coating systems that have
been previously used in pipelines of size 16" and above and a length of 50 km and
above in a single project for similar operating conditions.
3.3 Functional Requirements of Field Joint Coating
3.3.1 Properties of the PE backing and the as applied joint corrosion coating shall be as
follows :
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
Sl. Property Unit Requirement Test

No. Method
i) Tensile Strength @+25°C N/mm2 ≥12 DIN EN
12068
ii) Ultimate Elongation % @+ % ≥250 DIN EN
25°C 12068
iii) Dielectric withstand KV with kv ≥30 ASTM D
1000 Volts/sec 149
iv) Water absorption % ≤0.05 ASTM D
@+ 25°C for 24 hours 570
v) Volume Resistivity @+25°C Ohm-cm ≥1015 ASTM D
257
vi) Resistance to thermal aging % Change in DIN 30672
at 100°C elongation ≤ 250
3.3.2 Functional Properties of Joint Coating System (As applied)
As applied field joint coating system shall comply the requirements of DIN EN 12068.
Table 1 and 2 corresponding to designation DIN EN 12068 – C HT 60 UV, except as
modified below :
a) Cathodic Disbondment Resistance at Tmax i.e. 60°Cshall be 20mm when

tested as per Annexure K of DIN EN 12068. Test shall be carried out at (+)
60°C.
b) Peel Strength shall be as follows :
Peel Strength Unit Requirement for Test

Mech Resistance Method as
Class C per DIN EN
(Minimum) 12068
Inner to Inner + @23°C N/mm 1.5
Outer to Inner @Tmax N/mm 0.3
Annexure-B
Outer to Outer @23°C N/mm 1.5
@Tmax N/mm 0.3
To Pipe Surface @23°C N/mm 3.5
@Tmax N/mm 0.3
Annexure-C
To Factory @23°C N/mm 3.5
Coating @Tmax N/mm 0.3
Notes
(Tmax shall be (+) 60°C)
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
Contractor shall obtain prior approval from Company regarding the manufacturer of the
joint coating material. Complete technical details alongwith test certificates complying
with the requirements of clause 3.2.1 and 3.2.2 shall be submitted to Company for this
purpose. The Contractor shall furnish test certificates from an independent DIN
recognized / approved laboratory for all the properties required for the specified EN
designation of field joint coating and the requirements of this specification.
3.3 The materials shall not be older than their period of validity at the time of application by
CONTRACTOR. Deteriorated/ decomposed material shall be disposed of and replaced
by CONTRACTOR at his own expense.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the coating materials supplied by him are properly
packed and clearly marked with the following :
- Manufacturer’s name
- Material qualification
- Batch number
- Date of manufacturing and date of expiry.
3.4 CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the manufacturer has carried out all quality control
tests on each batch and manufacturer shall provide test certificates to certify that the
supplied materials meet the manufacturer’s specifications as indicated in the purchase
order and as approved by COMPANY. Certificates and data sheets certifying the
qualities of the coating materials shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to COMPANY
prior to application. COMPANY reserves the right to have the materials tested by an
independent laboratory.
3.5 Materials shall be stored in sheltered storage in the manufacturer’s original packing
and away from direct sunlight and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.6 CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain mobile facilities which contains all
necessary equipment and its spares for cleaning, coating repairs, inspection and tests.
3.7 CONTRACTOR shall furnish sufficient number of the following equipment and the
required spares as a minimum for inspection and test purpose for each crew.
a) Fully automatic full circle adjustable holiday detector with a visible and audible
signal system for inspection of coatings.
b) Thickness gauge for measuring thickness.
c) Contact type temperature recording thermometer (Digital Pyrometer with flat
probe type contact).
d) Roughness profile measuring (Stylus) instrument
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
4.1 General
4.1.1 The application procedure shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and
the minimum requirements specified below whichever are the most stringent and
shall be demonstrated to and approved by the Company. Manufacturer’s expert
shall supervise the application and shall be available at site upon request during
qualification of application procedure and during construction at Contractor’s cost.
4.1.2 Operators for coating application shall be given necessary instructions and training
before start of work, by the Contractor. To verify and qualify the application
procedures, all coating applied during the qualification test, shall be removed for
destructive testing until the requirements stated in sections “Inspection” and
“Testing” of this specification are met.
4.1.3 Oil, grease and salt shall be removed from steel surface by wiping with rags soaked
with suitable solvents such as naphtha or benzene. Kerosene shall not be used for
this purpose. Solvent cleaning procedure according to SSPC-SP1 shall be followed.
4.1.4 Each field joint shall be blast cleaned using a closed cycle blasting unit or an open
expendable blasting equipment. With the first equipment type, steel or chilled shot
and iron grit shall be used and Garnet material with the second one (in case the
authority having jurisdiction have no objection, the contractor may adopt sand
blasting instead of garnet material). During blast cleaning the pipe surface
temperature shall be simultaneously more than 5° and more than 3°C above ambient
Dew Point, while the ambient Relative Humidity shall not be greater than 85%. Prior
to surface cleaning the surface shall be completely dry. The surface shall be
cleaned to a grade Sa 2½ in accordance with Swedish Standard SIS-055900 with a
roughness profile of 50-70 microns. Surface roughness profile shall be measured
using an approved profile comparator in accordance with ISO 8503-1 and shall be
calibrated prior to the start of the work in accordance with ISO:8503-3 or ISO:8503-
4. The blast cleanliness shall be checked on every joint and the roughness profile
shall be checked 1 every 10 joints.
Dust grit or foreign matter shall be removed from the cleaned surface by an industrial
vacuum cleaner. The dust contamination allowed shall be of a rating max 2 as per
ISO:8502-3. The frequency of checking for dust contamination shall be 1 every 10
joints.
Blast cleaned field joint shall be coated within 2-4 hours according to the conditions
below :
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
- Relative Humidity (RH) > 80% - 2 Hours

- Relative Humidity (RH) 70-80% - 3 Hours
- Relative Humidity (RH) < 70% - 4 Hours
Pipes delayed beyond this point or pipes showing any visible rust stain shall be blast
cleaned again.
4.1.5 The field joint surface shall be inspected immediately after blast cleaning and any
feature of the steel surface such as weld spatter, scabs, laminations or other
imperfections considered injurious to the coating integrity made visible during blast
cleaning shall be reported to the Company Representative and on permission from
Company Representative, such defects shall be removed by filing or grinding. Pipes
affected in this manner shall be then re-blast cleaned if the defective area is larger
than 50 mm in diameter.
4.1.6 The ends of existing pipe protective coating shall be inspected and chamfered.
Unbounded portions of the coating shall be removed and then suitably trimmed.
Portions where parent coating is removed shall be thoroughly cleaned as specified.
The adjacent chamfered areas of the line pipe coating shall be cleaned and abraded,
to expose a clean uniform fresh surface of uncontaminated factory applied coating.
4.1.7 All steel joint surfaces shall be thoroughly examined before the application of the
coating in order to ensure the surface are free of soil, grease, rust, mud, earth or any
other foreign matter. All these substances shall be removed before coating, to the
procedures herein described.
4.1.8 Protection coating shall be applied on the joints immediately after the completion of
cleaning operation.
4.2 Application of Heat Shrink Wraparound Sleeves
In addition to the general requirements stated above, following shall be taken into
account :
4.2.1 The wrap around sleeves shall be of a size such that a minimum overlap of 50mm is
ensured (after shrinking) on both sides of yard applied corrosion coating of the pipes.
In cases where carrier pipe is installed by direct boring/jacking, the overlap on the mill
coating for the leading edges of the joints shall be minimum 200mm. When this extra
overlap is achieved by providing an additional patch of heat shrink tape/wraparound, it
shall be applied in such a manner that the square edge of the patch on the joint
coating is in the direction opposite to the direction of boring/jacking.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
4.2.2 Before centering the wraparound sleeve, the bare steel surface shall be preheated
with torch moved back and forth over the surface or by induction heating. The
minimum preheat temperature shall be as recommended by manufacturer and shall
be checked by means of contact type temperature recording thermometer (Digital
Pyrometer with flat probe type contract) to check this, approved temperature
indicates shall be used. Temperature indicating crayons shall not be used. Pre-heat
temperature shall be checked on every joint. Care shall be taken to ensure that the
entire circumference of the pipe is heated evenly. Temperature measuring
instruments shall be calibrated immediately before the start of the works and
thereafter at intervals recommended by the manufacturer of the instrument.
4.2.3 Upon pre-heating the pipe surface shall be applied with two pack epoxy primer of wet
film thickness 150 microns or as per manufacturer’s recommendation whichever is
higher, to cover the exposed bare metal of the welded field joint and 10mm min. onto
the adjacent pipe coating if recommended by the manufacturer. The wet film
thickness of the primer shall be checked or every joint with a wet film thickness
gauge prior to installation of sleeve. Thickness gauge shall be calibrated once per
shift.
4.2.4 Immediately after application of epoxy primer, the wraparound sleeve shall be
entirely wrapped around the pipe within the stipulated time recommended by the
manufacturer. Sleeve shall be positioned such that the closure patch is located to
one side of the pipe in 10 or 2 O’clock position, with the edge of the undergoing layer
facing upward and an overlap of min. 50mm. Gently heat by appropriate torch the
backing and the adhesive of the closure and press it firmly into place.
4.2.5 A heat shrinking procedure shall be applied to shrink the sleeve in such a manner to
start shrinkage of the sleeve beginning from the center of the sleeve and heat
circumferentially around the pipe. Continue heating from the center towards one end
of the sleeve until recovery is completed. In a similar manner, heat and shrink the
remaining side. Shrinking has been completed when the adhesive begins to ooze at
the sleeve edges all around the circumference.
The complete shrinking of the entire sleeve shall be obtained without undue heating
of existing pipe coating and providing due bonding between pipe, sleeve and pipe
coating. The installed sleeve shall not be disturbed until the adhesive has solidified.
The coatings mentioned are for undergrounds installations.
For HDD Joint Coating fiber glass reinforced heat shrinkable sleeve certified to
Stress class C60 type CANUSA-TBK or COVALENCE / DlRAX shall be used.
Directional drilling kit, multilayer sleeve system or equivalent to be approved by
Owner / Engineer.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
Only coating material C-60 Class as per EN 12068 and DVGW certified (wrapping
tape and heat shrinkable material) will be accepted for all material to be coated.
For the buried valve station (moulded piece, valves, elbows etc) Thermoset plastic
coatings may be used. They will be of type S50 certified as per DIN 30671 & DIN
30677.
Underground bare valves if any will be coated with above material.
At the point of transition from the aboveground pipe to underground pipe special
coating material FIBAROLL or equivalent to be used over the coated part of U.G.
pipe and painted part of A.G. Pipe end over lapping shall be at least 500 mm inside
the ground and 500 mm on painted AG line. Minimum thickness shall be 1.5 mm.
The application of the material will be as per supplier's specification.
Wherever Thrust Boring (Jacking) method is carried out, for mechanical protection of
coating of carrier pipe extra layer of hard cold applied tapes C-70 class as per DIN
30675-1 or solvent free PUR (1000 microns) as per DIN 3067712 Ep-50 types shall
be applied. Surface preparation (sand blasting) of PE layer shall be appropriate as
per applicator's recommendations. The type & thickness of coating must got
approved by Owner / Engineer prior to coating.
4.3 Application of Cold Applied Tapes
In addition to general requirements stated above following shall be taken care of:-
4.3.1 Cold applied joint protection tapes shall be of the type which can be applied by spirally
wrapping on the pipe.
4.3.2 Immediately after the completion of surface preparation the approved primer of wet
film thickness 150 microns or as per manufacturer’s recommendation whichever is
higher to cover the exposed bare metal of the welded field joint and 10mm min. onto
the adjacent pipe coating if recommended by the manufacturer. Any dirt on the
primed surface shall be removed. If the primer is damaged, the damaged area shall
be cleaned and re-primed.
4.3.3 Approximately 100mm of tape interleaving paper shall be peeled back and tape shall
be applied with the adhesive side to the pipe. Whilst continuously removing the
interleaving paper, the tape shall be spirally applied to provide a minimum of 55%
overlap. Sufficient tension shall be applied to ensure good conformity, avoiding air
pockets and also continuously smooth out as the wrapping proceeds. The wrapping
shall start and finish to give a minimum of 50mm overlap on to the adjoining yard
applied coating. Outer wrap shall also be applied in similar method.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
In the cases where carrier pipe is installed by direct boring/jacking, the overlap on the
mill coating for the leading edges of the joints shall be minimum 200mm. The direction
of spiral wrapping in these cases shall be such that the square edge of the wrapping
with the joint coating is in the direction opposite to the direction of boring/jacking.
4.4 Pre-Qualification of Field Joint Coating System
The field joint coating system materials and the procedures proposed by the Contractor
shall be pre-qualified during the sleeve installation start-up phase. Five joints (5) shall
be coated with the requirements of this specification and then inspected and tested in
accordance with the requirements of this specification with respect to the following :
i) Surface preparation cleanliness, roughness profile and dust contamination

ii) Pre-heat temperature (as applicable)
iii) Primer thickness
iv) As applied coating thickness
v) Holiday detection
vi) Peel test at (+) 23°C & (+) 60°C on pipe surface & factory applied coating and
at over laps (as applicable). If required to achieve the temperature of (+) 60°C,
suitable thermal blanket may be used.
vii) Visual appearance and void after installation on the body, area adjoining the
weld and area adjoining the factory applied coating. (To establish voids
adjoining the weld and factory coating a strip of 50 mm wide and 200 mm long
shall be stripped and examined).
Company Representative shall witness the tests and inspection. Regular application of
field joint coating shall commence only upon successful completion of the pre-
qualification testing.
After successful completion of the pre-qualification testing as above, the entire field
joint coating shall be removed, the pipe surface re-blasted and field joint coating re-
applied as per the requirements of this specification.
5.0 INSPECTION
5.1 A visual inspection shall be carried out for the following :

- Mastic extrusion on either ends of the sleeve shall be examined. (applicable
for heat shrink wraparounds).
- There shall be no sign of punctures or pinholes or bend failure. The external
appearance of the sleeve shall be smooth, free of dimples, air entrapment or
void formation.
- Weld bead profile shall be visible through the sleeve.
- The entire closure patch shall have changed colour uniformly (applicable for
heat shrink wraparounds).
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
5.2 Holiday Inspection
The holiday detector used shall be checked and calibrated daily with an accurate DC
voltmeter. The detector electrode shall be in direct contact with the surface of coating
to be inspected.
The entire surface of the joint section shall be inspected by means of a full circle
holiday detector approved by Company set to a DC voltage of at least 25 kV.
Inspection of the sleeves shall be conducted only after the joint has cooled below 50°C.
(applicable for heat shrink wraparounds).
5.3 No field joint shall be covered or lowered in the trench until it has been approved by the
Company.
5.4 As-applied Coating Thickness
Coating thickness shall be checked by non-destructed methods for each field joint.
Average thickness of the as-applied coating on pipe body shall be established based
on measurement at min. eight locations i.e. four measurement on either sides of the
girth weld at 3, 6, 9, & 12 O’clock positions. To establish the minimum thickness on
the girth weld, four measurement shall be taken on apex on the weld at 3, 6, 9 & 12
O’clock positions. All such measurements shall be recorded. Company
Representative reserves the right to ask for additional measurement at any location
on the field joint coating, whenever doubt arises.
6.0 TESTING
6.1 Company reserves the right to remove and test one out of every 50 joint coatings or
one joint coating out of every day’s production whichever is stringent. Contractor shall
provide all assistance in removing and testing of field joint coatings.
6.2 From each test sleeve, one or more strips of size 25mm x 200 shall be cut
perpendicular to the pipe axis and slowly peeled off.
The required peel strength shall meet the requirements of clause 3.2.4.2 (ii) as
applicable for 23°C or 60°C whichever is feasible. This test shall be conducted
between wrapping & metal and mill coating & between layers at overlap with joint
coating (wherever applicable). After removal of strip the bulk of adhesive shall remain
adhered to the pipe showing on bare metal, otherwise, test shall be considered failed.
The adhesive layer that remains on the pipe surface shall generally be free of voids
resulting from air or gas inclusion. In case the peel strength test at a different
temperature than that specified in warranted due to the ambient site conditions, then
the peel strength shall comply the recommendation of the manufacturer. Manufacturer
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
shall be asked to furnish peel strength values corresponding to various expected

temperatures, prior to start of the works.
6.3 If the sleeve taken away for test does not meet the requirements of clause 6.2 the
adjacent two sleeves shall also be removed and inspected.
If the adjacent two sleeves are acceptable the test rate shall be increased to one
sleeve in every twenty five until Company's Representative is satisfied. The test rate
can then be reduced as per clause 6.1.
If either or both of the adjacent two sleeves do not meet the requirements of clause
6.2, the field coating shall be stopped. (Refer clause 7.0).
6.4 Company Representative reserve the right of 100% removal of sleeves if he is not
convinced that the requirements of clause 6.2 are achieved.
6.5 Coating thickness shall be checked by non-destructive methods for each fields joints.
7.0 REPAIRS
7.1 If a field joint is detected to be unacceptable after testing as per section 6.0 of this
specification the Contractor shall, at his own cost :
- determine the cause of the faulty results of the field coating.
- mobilise the expert of manufacturer, if required.
- test to the complete satisfaction of the Company, already completed field
coatings.
- stop field coating until remedial measures are taken against the causes of
such faults, to the entire satisfaction of the Company.
7.2 Contractor shall replace all joint coating found or expected to be unacceptable a per
section 6.0 of this specification.
7.3 Contractor shall, at his own cost repair all areas where the coating has been removed
for testing by the Company.
7.4 After the coating work on welded joints, fittings and repairs to the coating have been
completed the coating as a whole shall be tested with a spark-tester before lowering or
jacking the pipeline.
7.5 Company shall be entitled to check the coating on buried pipelines or parts of pipelines
with equipment such as the "Pearson Meter" and the resistance meter. If Coating
defects are establish, the Contractor shall be responsible for excavations at such
points, repairing the coating, spark testing and backfilling the excavation without extra
charge.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

(ONSHORE PIPELINES)
EDITION : 1
8.0 DOCUMENTATION
8.1 Prior to procurement of coating materials, Contractor shall furnish the following
information for qualification of the Manufacturer and material :
i. Complete descriptive technical catalogs describing the materials offered

along with samples of corrosion coating materials, its properties and
application instruction as applicable specifically to the project.
ii. Test certificates and results of previously conducted tests, for all properties
listed in clause 3.2.4 of this specification.
iii. Reference list of previous supplies, in last 5 years, of the similar material
indicating the project details such as diameter, quantity, operating
temperature, years of supply, project name, contact person and feed back on
performance.
Once the Company’s approval has been given, any change in material or
Manufacturer shall be notified to Company, whose approval in writing of all changes
shall be obtained before the materials are manufactured.
8.2 Prior to shipment of materials from the Manufacturer’s Works Contractor shall furnish
the following documents :
i. Test certificates/ results as per Manufacturer’s Quality Control Procedure for

each batch of materials.
ii. Specific application instructions with pictorial illustrations.
iii. Specific storage and handling instructions.

Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
VENTS, DRAINS AND WELLS
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE VENTS, DRAINS AND WELLS MEC/S/05/21/15 REVISION : 0
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION OF DRAWING DRAWING NO.
1. Vent & Drain for Line 2” & above MEC/SD/05/21/15/01
2. Wells Installation 1½ Dia Taps MEC/SD/05/21/15/02 (Sheet 1 of 2)
3. Wells Installation 1½ Dia Taps MEC/SD/05/21/15/02 (Sheet 2 of 2)
4. Vent & Drain for lines 1½” & below MEC/SD/05/21/15/03
5. Pressure Tapping MEC/SD/05/21/15/05
(Binita Brahma) (Sunil Kumar) (A.K. Johri) Feb. 2009

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE VENTS, DRAINS AND WELLS MEC/S/05/21/15 REVISION : 0
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Amended
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR
BLASTING
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE BLASTING MEC/S/05/21/18 REVISION : 0
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
Sl.No. Description
1.0 SCOPE
3.0 GENERAL
4.0 MATERIALS
5.0 PERSONNEL
6.0 STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES
7.0 PREPARATION OF EXPLOSIVES
8.0 PREPARATION OF PRIMERS
9.0 CHARGING OF HOLES
10.0 ELECTRICAL FIRING
11.0 VIBRATION RECORDING
12.0 MISFIRES
13.0 DISPOSAL OF DETERIORATED EXPLOSIVES

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
1.0 SCOPE
¾ This specification covers the minimum requirements for materials, personnel, transportation,
storage and use of explosives for grading of Right of Use (RoU) and excavation of trenches
for onshore pipeline installation in rocky terrain.
¾ This specification does not cover the construction or operation of permanent magazines.
Reference has also been made to the latest edition of the following standards, codes and
specifications. The edition enforce at the time of floating the enquiry shall be termed as
latest edition.
a) BS-5607 : Safe use of Explosives in the Construction Industry
b) IS4081 : Safety Code for Blasting and Related Drilling Operations
c) NFPA-495 : Manufacture, Transportation, Storage & Usage of Explosive

Materials.
d) Safety Rules of Chief Controller of Explosives, Nagpur
3.0 GENERAL
¾ The Contractor shall acquaint himself and comply with all the applicable local laws and
regulations concerning storing, handling and the use of explosives. All such laws,
regulations and rules etc., as enforced from time to time shall be binding upon the
Contractor. National / Local Laws and Regulations shall take precedence over this
specification in the event of conflict. All conflicts shall be brought to the notice of the
Company.
¾ The requirements stated herein however in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility of carrying out safe blasting operations. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for damages and claims thereof.
¾ The use of explosives requires an approval from the Chief Controller of Explosives and/or
his authorized Inspector. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain all such
permits and. approvals and comply all requirements regarding the safe storage, handling
and use of explosives. All expenses incurred in this regard shall be to Contractor's account.
¾ Contractor shall inform the Company in writing at least four (4) weeks prior to planned use
of explosives.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
¾ Contractor shall notify the Company prior to any blasting in the proximity of overhead power
lines, roads, communication lines, pipelines, utility services or other services and structures
above and below ground. Before, starting blasting operations, local authorities and owners
of utilities shall be consulted to check on the presence of services, which could be damaged
and their approval obtained to undertake blasting operations. The distances to nearest
structures (houses, offices, factories) or service shall also be taken into consideration when,
planning blasts so that ground vibration and air-over pressure is kept within acceptable
levels as given in section 11.0 of this specification
¾ Contractor shall prepare an Explosives Handling and Usage Procedure for the information of
the Company, which shall include the following:
- Detailed procedure and calculations.

- Nature of blasting operations, including hole diameter, depth and presence of
cavities
- Rock characteristics
- Type of explosives
- Temperature likely to be encountered in use
¾ Unless specified otherwise, blasting shall not be allowed within 20 m of any above ground or
underground structure, pipelines or other facilities. However, in case it is necessary to carry
out blasting operation within 20 m from any under ground or above ground structures,
pipelines or other facilities, the blasting may be allowed, at discretion of Company, subjected
to the following :
a) Minimum clear distance from the facility is 5 m.
b) Contractor demonstrates the blasting technique proposed by him doesn't result in

any damage to the existing facility. (Contractor shall carry out mock demonstration
as per the direction of Company Representative for this purpose).
c) Contractor fulfills the conditions laid out by the Owner of the existing facilities.
d) Contractor fulfills the requirements laid-out by National / Local Laws and Regulations
and other statutory/regulatory Authorities.
In case of presence of overhead power lines/cables, specific approvals shall be obtained by

Contractor from the concerned Authorities having jurisdiction over it.
4.0 MATERIALS
¾ All materials such as explosives, detonators; fuses, tamping materials etc. that are proposed
to be used by the Contractor in blasting operations, shall be as approved for use in the
Country.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
¾ All electric detonators used in the blast shall be of the same electrical sensitivity and be
produced / procured from the same manufacturer.
¾ The detonators used shall be capable of giving effective blasting of the explosives.
Damaged explosive materials shall be destroyed by a responsible person as per
manufacturer's instructions or returned to the manufacturer.
¾ No explosive material shall be abandoned.
¾ All blasting materials and testing equipment shall be regularly tested for correct
performance. The intervals between test shall be decided after consideration of the local
factors, but tests shall always be carried out if the blasting materials and / or test equipment
have been subjected to abnormal conditions, or following any misfires. Guidelines /
recommendations of the manufacturer shall be adhered to.
¾ All packaging and other waste materials gathered together during blasting operation shall be
burnt after the blast has been fired. The burning site shall be chosen at a safe distance with
due respect to prevailing wind strength and direction, at least 100 meters from explosives
stores and other premises. A minimum of two fire extinguishers shall be on hand during
burning activities.
5.0 PERSONNEL
¾ Excavation by blasting will be permitted only under personal supervision of competent and
licensed persons and by trained workmen.
¾ The storage of explosives shall be in the charge of a person approved by the Company.
Company may, if necessary, ask police inquiries being made as to his reliability,
antecedents etc.
6.0 STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES
¾ The Contractor shall build a magazine for storing the explosives. The site of the magazine,
its capacity and design shall be subject to approval by the Company and the Inspector of
Explosives before the fabrication is taken up. As a rule the explosives should be stored in a
clean, dry, well ventilated, bullet proof and fire proof building, at an isolated site. Adequate
security shall be provided to ensure no unauthorized entry into the magazine. A notice shall
be hung next to magazine entrance prohibiting entry of unauthorized persons.
¾ Contractor shall comply with National / Local Regulations and specifications for truck
mounted mobile explosives store. Mobile stores shall only carry ONE DAY's Explosives
requirements and shall be parked overnight inside the compound at the authorized
magazine.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
¾ All safety precautions and necessary equipment for maintenance, operation of mobile
stores, as required by local authorities or regulatory bodies shall also be installed / provided
on the Mobile Store.
¾ A careful and day-to-day account of all explosives shall be kept by the Contractor in a
register and in an approved manner. The register shall be produced by the Contractor, for
the inspection of the Company / Inspector of Explosives when so required by the later.
Any loss, damage or theft shall be reported immediately to the necessary local authorities
and to the Company.
¾ The magazine shall on no account be opened during or on the approach of a thunderstorm

and no person shall remain in the vicinity of the magazine during such period.
¾ Magazine-shoes without nails shall, at all times, be kept in the magazine, and a wood-tub or
cement trough, filled with water shall be fixed near the door of the magazine.
¾ Persons entering the magazine must put on the magazine-shoes and shall comply to
following:
I) not to put their feet on the clean floor unless they have magazine-shoes on.
II) not to allow the magazine-shoes to touch the ground outside the clean floor.
III) not to allow any dirt or grit to fall on the clean floor.
¾ No matches or inflammable material shall be allowed in the magazine. Light shall be

obtained from an electric storage battery lamp.
¾ No person having articles of steel or iron on him shall be allowed to enter the magazine. No
tools or implements other than those of copper, brass, gun metal or wood shall be allowed
inside the magazine.
Oily cotton. rags, waste and articles liable to spontaneous ignition, shall not be allowed
inside the magazine.
¾ Boxes of explosives shall not be thrown down or dragged along the floor and shall be
stacked on wooden trestles. Open boxes of explosives shall never be exposed to the direct
rays of the sun. Empty boxes or loose packing materials shall not be kept inside the
magazine.
¾ The magazine shall have a lightning conductor, which shall be got tested periodically, by an
officer authorized by the Company, the testing fee shall be to the Contractor's account.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
¾ The magazine shall be inspected periodically by an officer representing the Company, who
will see that all the rules are strictly complied with. He will notify all omissions etc. to the
Contractor, who shall rectify the defects within a period of 3 days from the date of receipt of
the notice, failing which the Company may take whatever actions it considers suitable.
7.0 PREPARATION OF EXPLOSIVES
¾ Contractor shall submit the following procedures for INFORMATION of the Company as a
minimum.
- Loading of explosives
- Drilling of new holes and extending existing holes
- Handling of explosives at site
- Tamping explosives into holes,
- Machines, tools and cables required
- Initiation of blasting
- Safety of personnel
- Vibration control
- Blast pattern and shot size establishment
- Misfires
- Emergency procedures
¾ Trial blasts in conjunction with vibration recording shall be carried out for each rock and
trench type, in order to assess rock breakability and vibration levels. These trial blasts shall
be carried out prior to actual trench blasting of the pipeline route. Contractor shall conduct
trial digs as directed by Company in order to check suitability of the blasting pattern and to
measure vibration levels to ensure vibration levels are below the allowable maximum.
¾ "Weight per Distance Tables" shall be drawn up from these trials.
¾ The detonators shall never be forced into the primer cartridge. It shall be inserted in a hole
made by a wooden, copper, brass or aluminum pricker. The detonator shall be firmly
embedded in the primer so that it is not pulled out of place during loading.
¾ Detonators shall be activated electrically. In proximity of electric over-head power lines,

Contractor may use non-electric system with the approval of Company. Fly rock shall be
minimized by the use of approved blast mats and by careful selection of shot size and drill
hole configuration.
¾ Use of explosives is prohibited in areas exposed to flammable gasses or dust.
¾ Explosive and detonators shall be carried in separate boxes, tightly closed, and transported
separately. For the conveyance of primers special containers shall be used.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
¾ Explosives shall be stored and used chronologically to ensure that the ones received earlier
are being used first.
¾ A make-up house shall be provided at each working place in which cartridges shall be made
up by experienced men as required. The make-up house shall be separated from other
buildings. Only electric storage battery lamps shall be used in this house.
¾ No smoking shall be allowed in the make-up house.
8.0 PREPARATION OF PRIMERS
The primers shall not be prepared near open flames or fires. The work of preparation of
primers shall always be entrusted to the qualified and approved personnel. Primers shall be
used as soon as possible after they are ready.
9.0 CHARGING OF HOLES
¾ The work of charging shall not commence before all the drilling work at the site is completed
and the Company has satisfied itself to that effect by actual inspection.
¾ The lead wires shall be kept away from conductors or sources of stray current. While
charging, open lamps/flames shall be kept away.
¾ Only wooden tamping rods without any kind of metal on them shall be used.
¾ Only one cartridge shall be inserted at a time and gently inserted to the required depth with
the tamping rod. The sand, clay or other tamping material used for filling the hole completely
shall not be tamped too hard.
¾ Blasting shall not take place after sunset or before sunrise unless specific approval is first
obtained by Contractor from local authorities and the Company.
¾ The site of blasting operations shall be prominently demarcated by red danger flags. The
order of fire shall be given only by the Supervisor-In-Charge of the work and this order shall
be given only after giving the warning signal three times, so as to enable all the labor,
watchmen etc. to reach safe shelter and after having ascertained that nobody is within the
danger zone.
¾ A buegle with a distinctive note shall be used to give the warning signals. The buegle shall
not be used for any other purpose. All the labor shall be made acquainted with the sound of
the buegle and shall be strictly warned to leave their work immediately at the first warning
signal and to take safe shelters, and not to leave the shelters until the all clear signals have
been given.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
¾ All the roads and footpaths leading to the blasting area shall be watched. All the escape
routes shall have been clearly marked.
10.0 ELECTRICAL FIRING
¾ Only the Supervisor-In-Charge shall keep the key of the firing apparatus and shall keep it
always with himself.
¾ Special apparatus shall be used as source of current for the firing operations. Power lines
shall not be tapped for the purpose.
¾ The firing cable shall have a proper insulating cover so as to avoid short circuiting due to
contact with water, metallic parts or rock.
¾ The use of earth as a return line shall not be permitted.
¾ The firing cable shall be connected to the source of current only after ascertaining that
nobody is in the area of blasting.
¾ Before firing, the circuit shall be checked by a suitable apparatus.
¾ After firing, whether with or without an actual blast, the contact between the firing cable and
the source of current shall be cut off before any person is allowed to leave the shelter.
¾ During storms, charging with electrical detonators shall be suspended. The charges already
placed into the holes shall be blasted as quickly as possible after taking all the safety
precautions and giving necessary warning signals. If this is not possible, the site shall be
abandoned till the storm has passed.
11.0 VIBRATION RECORDING
¾ Contractor shall use Company approved vibration recording system capable of

measurement in three axes (tri-axial). The device shall have an accuracy of 0.0025 mm and
a resonance of2 Hz.
- The device shall measure both frequency and amplitude of vibration.
¾ All the measurement devices shall be calibrated by an APPROVED certification body.
¾ Particle velocity shall not exceed the following:
• Areas beyond 500 m of proposed pipeline centreline

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
- 50 mm/sec at a surface distance of 15 m from trench centerline.
• Areas with existing buried or above ground facilities within 500 m of proposed
pipeline centreline.
- 20 mm/sec at a surface distance from the trench centre line towards the
nearest existing facilities.
¾ The particle velocity levels are provided for the guidance only, Contractor shall be
responsible and liable for any injury to life or damage to property/facilities.
¾ Air-over pressure/sound levels shall be limited to 100 db in inhabited areas.
12.0 MISFIRES
¾ If it is suspected that part of the blast has failed to fire, or is delayed, sufficient time shall be
allowed to lapse before entering the danger zone. When fuse and blasting caps are used, a
safe time should be allowed and then the Supervisor alone shall leave the shelter to see the
misfire.
¾ Drilling near the hole that has misfired shall not be permitted until one of the two following
operations have been carried out by the Supervisor:
I) The Supervisor should very carefully (when the tamping is of damp clay) extract the
tamping with a wooden scraper of jet of water or compressed air (using a pipe of soft
material) and withdraw the fuse with the primer and detonator attached. A fresh
primer and detonator with fuse shall then be placed in this hole and fired.
II) The Supervisor shall get one foot of the tamping cleaned off and indicate the
direction by placing a stick in the hole. Another hole may then be drilled at least 9"
away and parallel to it, this hole should then be charged and fired. The balance of
the cartridges and detonators found in the muck shall be removed.
¾ The Supervisor shall at once report to the office all cases of misfire, the cause of the misfire
and the steps taken in connection therewith.
¾ If a misfire has been found to be due to defective detonator, or explosive, the whole quantity
from the box from which the defective articles were taken must be returned to the
manufacturer for inspection to ascertain whether the whole box contains defective materials.
¾ Re-drilling the holes that have misfired either wholly or partly shall not be permitted.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
13.0 DISPOSAL OF DETERIORATED EXPLOSIVES
All deteriorated explosives shall be disposed off in an approved manner. The Contractor
shall prepare said disposal plan, which shall be approved by Company / Local Authorities /
Controller of explosives. The quantity of the deteriorated explosives to be disposed off shall
be intimated to Company prior to its disposal. All the records of such disposal shall be
maintained by Contractor.
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
GASKETS, BOLTS & NUTS
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE GASKETS, BOLTS & NUTS MEC/S/05/21/19 REVISION : 0
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 GASKETS
2.0 NUTS AND BOLTS

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR GASKETS
1.0 All gaskets shall conform to the codes/standards and specifications given in the requisition.
Vendor shall strictly comply with MR / PR stipulations and no deviations shall be permitted.
2.0 Process of manufacture, dimensions and tolerances not specified in requisition shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer's standards.
3.0 Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests for gaskets as per the standards specified
in the requisition.
4.0 Chemical composition and hardness of RTJ gaskets shall also be furnished in the form of test
reports on samples.
5.0 For Spiral wound material following shall be furnished:
a. Manufacturer's test certificate for filler material and spiral material as per the relevant
material specifications.
b. Manufacturer's test certificate for raw materials and tests for compressibility / seal-
ability & recovery as per the relevant material specifications.
6.0 Full face gaskets shall have bolt holes punched out.
7.0 Filler material for spiral wound gaskets shall not have any colour or dye.
8.0 All spiral wound gaskets shall be supplied with Outer ring. Material of the outer ring shall be
CS unless other wise specified in the MR.
9.0 For spiral wound gaskets, material of Inner Compression ring shall be same as Spiral Strip
material. In addition to the requirements as per code and as specified in the MR, inner rings
shall be provided for the following:
a. Sizes 26" and above.
b. Class 900 and above.
10.0 Hardness of metallic RTJ gaskets shall not exceed the values specified below unless otherwise
specified in MR :
Ring Gasket Material Maximum Hardness (BHN)
Soft Iron 90
Carbon steel 120
5 Cr. ½ Mo 130
Type 304, 316, 321, 347 140
Type 304L, 316L 120
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
11.0 Face finish of metallic RTJ gaskets shall be 32 to 63 AARH.
12.0 Gaskets of different types and sizes shall be placed in separate shipping containers and each
container clearly marked with the size, rating, material specification and item code.
13.0 All items shall be inspected and approved by MECON Inspector or any other agency authorized
by MECON.
14.0 Any additional requirements specified in the requisition, shall be fully complied with.
15.0 Non-metallic ring gaskets as per ASME B16.21 shall match flanges to ASME B16.5 upto 24"
(except 22" size) and to ASME B16.47B above 24" unless specified otherwise. For 22" size, the
matching flange standard shall be MSS-SP44 unless specified otherwise.
16.0 Spiral wound gasket as per ASME B16.20 shall match flanges to ASME B16.5 upto 24" (except
22" size) and to ASME B16.47B above 24" unless specifically mentioned otherwise. For 22"
size, the matching flange standard shall be MSS-SP44 unless specified otherwise.
17.0 The following abbreviations have been used in the Material Requisition for Spiral Wound
Gaskets :
(I) : Inner Ring

(O) : Outer Ring
CAF : Compressed Asbestos Fibre
GRAFIL : Grafoil Filler
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR BOLTS & NUTS
1.0 The process of manufacture, heat treatment, chemical & mechanical requirements and
marking for all stud bolts, m/c bolts, jack screws & nuts shall be in accordance with the codes
/ standards and specification given in the requisition. The applicable identification symbol in
accordance with the material specification shall be stamped on each bolt and nut. Vendor shall
strictly comply with MR / PR stipulations and no deviations shall be permitted.
2.0 Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the relevant material
specifications.
3.0 Material test certificate shall also be furnished. (Heat Analysis, Product Analysis and
Mechanical Requirement)
4.0 Stress Rupture Test as detailed in ASTM A453 shall be carried out for all ASTM A453 bolting
material irrespective of the temperature.
5.0 All bolting shall be as per ANSI B 18.2.1 for studs. M/c bolts and jackscrews and ANSI BI8.2.2
for nuts.
6.0 Threads shall be unified (UNC for 1" dia and BUN for> 1" dia) as per ANSI B.1.1 with class 2A
fit for studs, M/c bolts and jackscrews and class 2B fit for nuts.
7.0 Stud bolts shall be threaded full length with two heavy hexagonal nuts. Length tolerance shall
be in accordance with the requirement as per ANSI B 16.5.
8.0 The nuts shall be double chamfered, semi-finished, heavy hexagonal type and shall be made
by the hot forged process and stamped as per respective material specification.
9.0 Heads of jackscrews and m/c bolts shall be heavy hexagonal type. Jackscrew end shall be
rounded.
10.0 Each size of studs & m/c bolts with nuts and jackscrews shall be supplied in separate
containers marked with size and material specifications. 'CRYO' shall be marked additionally in
case 'CRYO' is specified in the requisition.
11.0 All items shall be inspected and approved (stagewise) by MECON inspector or any other
agency authorized by MECON.
12.0 The heat treatment for stud bolts & nuts shall be as per code unless mentioned otherwise.
13.0 All austenitic stainless steel bolts, nuts, screws shall be supplied in solution annealed condition
unless specified otherwise in the material specification.
14.0 Any additional requirements specified in the requisition shall be fully complied with.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
15.0 Stud bolts, nuts & jackscrews shall be impact tested wherever specified in the material
specification and also where the material specification is indicated as "CRYO". For" S.S. nuts
and bolts minimum impact energy absorption shall be 27 Joules and test temperature shall be
-196°C unless mentioned otherwise. For other materials impact energy and test shall be as per
respective code.
16.0 Bolts / nuts of material of construction B7M / 2HM shall be 100% Hardness tested as per
supplementary requirement S3 of ASTM A 193.
17.0 When specified as galvanized, the studs, m/c bolts and nuts shall be 'hot dip zinc coated' in
accordance with requirements of 'class C' of 'ASTM A 153'. As an alternative, electro-
galvanizing as per IS 1573, 'Service Grade Number 2' is also acceptable.
18.0 All Stud Bolts of Bolt diameter size 1" and above shall be provided with three nuts irrespective
of whatever has been specified elsewhere in the MR.
PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
BHAGYANAGAR GAS
LIMITED
Doc. No. MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092, R0
MECON LIMITED

(BHAGYANAGAR GAS LIMITED)
DOC. NO. MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092, R0
(PROCESS & PIPELINE DESIGN SECTION)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
Page 1 of 10
BHAGYANAGAR GAS
LIMITED
Doc. No. MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092, R0
MECON LIMITED
AMENDMENT STATUS

No. Annexure / Appendix / No.
(Name) (Name)
Exhibit / Drawing
Amended
Page 2 of 10
BHAGYANAGAR GAS
LIMITED
Doc. No. MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092, R0
MECON LIMITED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS
3.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
4.0 CLASS DESIGNATION CODE
5.0 PIPELINE
6.0 PIPING
7.0 FITTINGS
8.0 BENDS
9.0 FLANGES
10.0 GASKETS
11.0 BOLTING
12.0 THREAD SEALANT
13.0 VALVES
14.0 QUICK OPENING END CLOSURE
15.0 HYDROTESTING VENTS AND DRAINS
16.0 PIPELINE SPECIALITY ITEMS
TABLE-1 PIPE WALL THICKNESS DETAILS FOR MAINLINE

TABLE-2 INDEX OF PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX-I PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS AS PER TABLE - 2
PREPARED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: DATE ISSUED:
(P Shekhar) (A.K. Jha) (V.K. Agrawal) March 2010

DE Sr. Manager DGM
Page 3 of 10
BHAGYANAGAR GAS
LIMITED
Doc. No. MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092, R0
MECON LIMITED
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the requirements of various piping materials

used in piping/ pipeline system handling Natural Gas / Regasified Liquid
Natural Gas (RLNG) and associated utilities in the pipeline.
2.1 Pipeline and terminal facilities envisaged as a part of this project shall be
designed and Engineered primarily in accordance with the provision of
ASME B 31.8 – Gas Transmission & Distribution Piping System - Latest
edition and OISD Standard 226-Natural Gas Transmission Pipeline and
City Gas Distribution Networks.
2.2 All codes standards and specifications referred herein shall be the latest
edition of such documents.
2.3 For sake of brevity, the initials of the society to which the codes are
referred are omitted in the specification, for example, B16.5 is a code
referring to ANSI/ ASME, A 105 is a code referring to ASTM.
2.4 In addition, MECON specifications for various piping and pipeline

materials shall also be applicable.
3.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
Piping material specifications are classified for the general purpose of

selection of material for the class of services. The maximum design
pressure and design temperature together with the fluid in line governs the
selection of material specifications. Deviation of materials from class
specifications may occur due to specific design condition. These
deviations are permissible if they are equal or better than the individual
class requirements.
4.0 CLASS DESIGNATION CODE
The piping class designation consist of three digits numbering system

made up of letter, number and letter e. g. A1A, B1A, D1A, etc as follows:
First letter indicates ANSI class rating e. g.

A-Class 150
B-Class 300
D-Class 600
Page 4 of 10
BHAGYANAGAR GAS
LIMITED
Doc. No. MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092, R0
MECON LIMITED
The middle number indicates differences in the specification within the

same rating and material.
The last letter indicates type of material e. g.
A-Carbon Steel
5.0 PIPELINE
The material for linepipe shall be as per the requirements of specification

as indicated in Table-1.
6.0 PIPING
6.1 Carbon steel pipe shall be made by open hearth, electric furnace or basic
oxygen process only. The steel used shall be fully killed and made with
fine grain structure. The grade and wall thickness of various sizes of pipes
shall be as per piping material specification for the applicable class.
6.2 Pipe dimension shall be in accordance with ANSI B 36.10 for carbon steel
pipes and ANSI B 36.19 for stainless steel pipes.
6.3 All pipe threads shall conform to American Standard taper as per ANSI B
1.20.1 NPT, unless otherwise specified.
6.4 For butt weld end, bevel shall be in accordance to ANSI B 16.25/ API 5L
as applicable.
7.0 FITTINGS
7.1 Fully killed carbon steel shall be used in the manufacture of fittings.
7.2 Threaded joints, if used shall conform to American Standard taper as per
ANSI 1.20.1 NPT.
7.3 Dimension of socket weld/ screwed fittings shall conform to ASME B 16.11
7.4 Bore of socket welded fittings shall suit O. D. of pipe and its thickness.
7.5 Dimensions of butt welded carbon steel fittings shall be as per ASME B
16.9 / MSS-SP-75, as applicable.
Page 5 of 10
BHAGYANAGAR GAS
LIMITED
Doc. No. MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092, R0
MECON LIMITED
7.6 Butt welding ends shall conform to ANSI B 16.25/ API 5L. In case of
difference in thickness of matching ends, requirements of ASME B 31.8
shall apply.
7.7 Integrally reinforced forged branch fittings such as sockolet, threadolet,

weldolet, nippolet etc. shall be as per MSS-SP-97. Fittings not covered in
ASME B 16.9 and MSS-SP-97 shall conform to manufacturer’s standard.
7.8 Fittings thickness tolerances shall match pipe thickness tolerance.
8.0 BENDS
8.1 Unless otherwise specified for terminal piping, the elbow of radius R = 1.5
D shall only be used.
8.2 The radius of cold field bends shall not be less than 30 times the nominal
diameter for pipes upto nominal diameter of 16” and shall not be less than
40 times the nominal diameter for pipes of nominal diameter of 18” and
above. Use of long radius bends (R = 3D / R = 6D) may be permitted for
reason of space constraints in city / city like condition.
9.0 FLANGES
9.1 Flange rating shall be same as ANSI B 16.5/MSS-SP-44/ B 16.47 Series

A as specified.
9.2 Dimensions of flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI B 16.5/ B 16.47

Series A, as applicable.
9.3 Neck of Weld Neck (WN) flanges to suit pipe bore and thickness.
9.4 Bore of Socket Welded (SW) flanges shall suit pipe O.D. and its thickness.
9.5 Threads for screwed flanges if used shall conform to American Standard
taper as per ANSI B 1.20.1 NPT.
9.6 Sizes for blind flanges shall be indicated by nominal pipe sizes.
9.7 Carbon steel flanges faces shall have smooth finish as indicated in the
material specification. Flanges faces shall have smooth finish to 125-250
microinches AARH as per MSS-SP-6.
9.8 Butt welding ends of WN flanges shall conform to ANSI B 16.25.
Page 6 of 10
BHAGYANAGAR GAS
LIMITED
Doc. No. MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092, R0
MECON LIMITED
9.9 Spectacle blind/ spacer & blinds shall be in accordance with ASME B
16.48 / Manufacturer’s Standard. Spectacle blind shall be used for sizes
upto 8” NB and spacer & blind for 10” & above shall be used.
9.10 Two jack screws 180° apart shall be provided for all spectacle blind
assemblies. The jack screws shall be as per MECON’s standard.
10.0 GASKETS
10.1 Spiral wound metallic gaskets shall conform to B 16.20 and API 601 shall
be provided with compressed asbestos filler. All spiral wound gaskets
shall be provided with stainless steel centering ring.
11.0 BOLTING
11.1 Nuts for stud bolts shall be American Standard Hexagonal Heavy series
and double chamfered.
11.2 Dimension and tolerances for stud bolts and nuts shall be as per ANSI B
18.2.1 and 18.2.2 with full threading to ANSI B 1.1 Class 2A thread for
bolts and Class 2B for nuts. Diameter and length of stud bolts shall be as
per ANSI B 16.5/ ASME B 16.47 with full threading.
11.3 Threads for nuts shall be as per ANSI B 1.1, as follows:
Nuts for stud dia ¼” to 1” : UNC-2B

Nuts for stud bolts dia 11/8” to 3 ¼” : 8UN-2B
11.4 Threads for stud bolts shall be as per ANSI B 1.1, as follows.
Studs bolts dia ¼” to 1” : UNC-2A

Stud bolts dia 11/8” to 3 ¼” : 8UN-2A
11.5 Heads of jack screws shall be heavy hexagonal type. Jack screw end shall
be rounded. Stud bolts shall be fully threaded with two hexagonal nuts.
12.0 THREAD SEALANT
12.1 Threaded joints shall be made with 1” wide PTFE Jointing tape.
Page 7 of 10
BHAGYANAGAR GAS
LIMITED
Doc. No. MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092, R0
MECON LIMITED
13.0 VALVES
13.1 Valve ends shall be as per piping material specifications (Appendices).
13.2 Flange dimensions and face finish of flanged end valves shall confirm to
clause 9.0 of this specification.
13.3 Butt welding ends of Butt Welded valves shall conform to ANSI B 16.25.
13.4 Face to face and end to end dimensions shall conform to applicable
standards.
13.5 Buried valves on mainline shall be provided with stem extension, sealant,
vent/drain & shall have butt welded ends.
13.6 Sectionalizing Valves (Block valves) installed on the main pipeline shall be
Ball valves with butt welded ends and shall be full bore to allow smooth
passage of cleaning pigs as well as intelligent pigs.
13.7 Unless specified otherwise. Valves shall confirm to the following

standards:
Screwed / Socket welded / Flanged end valves (1 ½” and below)
Ball Valves - BS 5351(latest)

Plug Valves - BS 5353(latest)
Globe Valves - BS 5352(latest)
Gate Valves - API 602(latest)
Flanged / Butt weld end Valves (2” and above)
Ball Valves - API 6D

Plug Valves - API 6D
Check Valves - API 6D
Globe Valves - BS 1873
Gate Valves - API 6D
13.8 Manual Valve operators shall be as indicated below, unless specified

otherwise in the P&ID.
Page 8 of 10
BHAGYANAGAR GAS
LIMITED
Doc. No. MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092, R0
MECON LIMITED
a) Gate and Globe Valves
i) For ANSI class 150 & 300 - Hand Wheel operated for size <12”NB.
Gear operated for size >14” NB.
ii) For ANSI class 600 - Hand Wheel operated for size <10”NB.
Gear operated for size >12” NB.
b) Ball and Plug Valves
i) For ANSI class 150, 300, 600 – Wrench operated for size <4”NB.
Gear operated for size >6”NB.
c) Actuated Valves- Actuated valves shall be as per P & ID.
14.0 QUICK OPENING END CLOSURE
Quick opening end closure to be installed on scrapper traps shall be

equipped with safety locking devices in compliance with section VIII,
division 1, UG-35.2 of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel code.
15.0 HYDRO TESTING VENTS AND DRAINS
High point vents and low point drains required for the purpose of hydro
testing shall be of size 0.75” and consist of sockolet, Plug valve for vent &
drain, flange & blind flange.
16.0 PIPELINE SPECIALITY ITEMS
Pipeline Specialty items viz., Scrapper Traps, Flow Tee, Insulating Joints,
LR bends, QOEC for Venting shall be as per respective data sheets,
specifications and Project Specific drawing showing Mainline & Terminal
materials.
Page 9 of 10
BHAGYANAGAR GAS
LIMITED
Doc. No. MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092, R0
MECON LIMITED
TABLE-1
MAIN LINE PIPE MATERIAL
Sl. Pipe Material Description Size Thickness Length

No. (NB) (mm)
1. API 5L Gr. X-42, PSL-2 10” 6.4 As per SOR Quantity
2. API 5L Gr. B, PSL-2 6” 6.4 As per SOR Quantity
3. API 5L Gr. B, PSL-2 4” 6.4 As per SOR Quantity
TABLE-2
INDEX OF PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
Class Service C.A. Basic Material Design Code Enclosed as

(mm)
B1A Natural Gas 1.5 ASTM A 106 Gr. B ANSI B31.8 Appendix-I
/ API 5L Gr. B / X-
42
Page 10 of 10
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PRE-COMMISSIONING AND COMMISSIONING
OF
PIPELINE PROJECT
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE PRE-COMMISSIONING AND MEC/S/05/21/61 REVISION : 0

COMMISSIONING OF PIPELINE
PROJECT EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 GENERAL
3.0 THE WORK
4.0 PRE-COMMISSIONING
5.0 PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS
6.0 COMMISSIONING
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
(Shalini Singh) (Sunil Kumar) (A.K. Johri) Feb. 2009

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PROJECT EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS
Sl. Clause / Paragraph / Page Rev. Date By Verified

Drawing Amended Name Sig. Name Sig.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PROJECT EDITION : 1
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This specification covers the minimum technical requirements for pre-commissioning and
commissioning of hydrocarbon pipeline, including commissioning activities such as pre-
commissioning checks, flushing of terminal piping, dewatering, swabbing and nitrogen
purging.
2.0 GENERAL
The scope of work for testing and commissioning including pre-commissioning activities
shall include, but not be limited to the manpower, machinery & equipment, detailed
procedures, materials and consumables, communications etc. to perform the work
satisfactorily.
Contractor shall prepare detailed procedures for flushing of terminal piping, dewatering,
swabbing, inertisation and commissioning of the pipeline, covering all aspects of work for
company’s approval. This shall include, but not be limited to, the sequence and description
of all operations, data on materials, equipment, instruments, consumables, communications
systems, necessary calculations, detailed time schedule and organisation chart.
The Contractor shall be responsible for demonstrating the successful completion of all the
activities i.e. flushing of terminal piping, dewatering, swabbing, inertisation and
commissioning of the pipeline. All necessary work to perform the job successfully including
necessary modifications required shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Contractor shall design and supply all temporary line connections, valves, instruments, etc.
as required during the various operations.
In the event of any detail which is not fully addressed, it is warranted by Contractor that work
shall be performed in accordance with company’s specification and the best recognised
practices in the on-shore pipeline industry.
3.0 THE WORK
The work to be performed by the Contractor shall consist of the following activities :
Pre-commissioning : Entire pipeline project shall be checked with respect to latest

P&ID’s and other design specification.
Dewatering : Removal of hydrotest water from the entire pipeline network
system.
Swabbing : Reducing the amount of remaining water in the main pipeline
system which is left behind after completion of the dewatering
operations to make the pipeline free of water.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PROJECT EDITION : 1
Inertisation : Inertising the entire pipeline with nitrogen.
Commissioning : Charging the entire pipeline network with the product and
achieving normal operating conditions of the pipeline.
4.0 PRE-COMMISSIONING
In order to execute and perform pre-commissioning activities, the pipeline contractor shall
be responsible for (but not limited to) the following :
• Carrying out pre-commissioning checks of the pipeline system including Pig

Launchers / Pig Receiver at Despatch Station / Tap-off Stations / Receipt Stations,
Sectionalizing Valve (SV) Stations and their associated facilities under the scope of
work to ascertain that the project has been mechanically completed in all respects.
• Checking of field instruments, laying out survey of pipeline, checking of

communication system, checking of Electrical, Instrumentation system, controls &
interlock etc.
• Dewatering of Pipeline and above ground piping, flushing / air-blowing and leak
testing of piping i.e. piping and equipments under their scope of work.
• Operation of machinery and equipment for pre-commissioning.
• Supply and use of materials / consumables as required for the pre-commissioning

activities.
• Erection of all temporary facilities like pig launcher / receiver, line connections, spool
pieces, pigs and requisite accessories, valves, instruments, manpower etc. as
required during various operations.
• Preparation of detailed pre-commissioning procedures, activity schedules, bar

charts, schemes etc.
This shall include preparation of detailed procedures for dewatering, electronic

geometric pigging / calliper pigging (By other Contractor), idle time preservation (if
applicable), removal of idle time preservers (if applicable, flushing / blowing, leak
testing and shall address the sequence and methodology describing all operations,
data on materials, equipments, instruments. consumables (e.g. Pigs and associated
Items), communication systems, necessary calculations, detailed time schedule and
organization Chart.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PROJECT EDITION : 1
• All necessary work to perform the job successfully including all modifications that
would be required at various stages.
The pipeline contractor shall demonstrate to the OWNER / CONSULTANT (for

approval) the successful completion of all the above-mentioned activities.
5.0 PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS
5.1 The pre-commissioning checks shall be carried out for the pipeline to ascertain that the
pipeline system has been mechanically completed in all respects. These checks shall cover
the main pipeline including distribution network system and sectionalising valve stations.
The pre-commissioning checks shall include the following:
i) System Checks
The entire facilities shall be checked against the latest P&ID’s, Engineering & Vendor
Drawings / Documents and other design specification codes. Any shortcoming
observed shall be listed down in the form of punch lists and these should be duly
attended or liquidated. The pipeline contractor should check the stations systems
from the angle of pre-commissioning and commissioning and spell out any additional
requirement of vents / drains, temporary arrangement / modification etc. that may be
required during the pre-commissioning and commissioning activities and arrange for
the same in consultation with the OWNER / CONSULTANT representative.
ii) Checking of Field Instruments
All the field instruments like control valves, sectionalising valves, transmitters,
solenoid valves, shut down switches, alarms etc. shall be checked physically and
also for their intended application by simulating the operating conditions. It will also
include checking of different meters, gauges action of shutdown valves etc. as
applicable.
iii) Survey of the Pipelines
This shall be performed to confirm that proper fittings/ supports, route markets,
fencing around SV Stations etc. have been installed along the pipeline.
iv) Checking of Communications System
This is to check that there is proper communications with adequate back-up power to
ensure uninterrupted communication.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PROJECT EDITION : 1
v) Checking of Electrical Distribution System
This is to ensure safety and also to ensure an uninterrupted power supply during
startup and normal pipeline operation.
vi) Checking of Instruments, Controls & Interlocks
This is to check that instrument controls and interlocks are functional as per the
normal operating conditions.
vii) Checking of Utilities
This is to check that utilities like power, nitrogen, UPS system instrument air, etc. are
available prior to startup.
viii) Any other checks as may be considered necessary.
5.2 DEWATERING
5.2.1 General
Dewatering of a pipeline section shall be done to facilitate EGP / caliper pigging. During the
dewatering operation the major quantity of hydrotest water shall be removed from the main
pipeline and distribution network. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to develop suitable
dewatering procedure and submit for Company’s approval.
The disposal of the water shall be performed such that no harm is done to the environment.
5.2.2 Operational Requirements
5.2.2.1 Main Pipeline
The dewatering operation shall consist of number of dewatering pig runs when air is used as
propellant for pig trains.
Bi-directional cup pigs shall be used and will be suitable for traversing the entire length of
the pipeline/ pipe segment being dewatered. Contractor shall ensure that all the pigs are
designed to prevent damage to the pipeline internal coating, if any.
The Contractor shall propose the minimum speed and the back pressure of the pigs in order
that continuous operation will be performed without the pig getting stuck. Contractor shall
submit all the calculations regarding this procedure and a contingency plan for
implementation in case the pigs get stuck.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PROJECT EDITION : 1
Contractor shall provide a suitable compressor for oil-free air with sufficient capacity and
pressure.
Upon arrival of the pigs at the receiving end the Contractor in the presence of Company’s
representative shall remove the pigs without delay.
5.2.2.2 Aboveground Piping Terminal
The dewatering operation of the piping work in the stations shall consist of physically draining
the water content in the piping work by opening low point drains and/or end flanges. If
required, air shall be used to push-off water from the pipes, The pipeline contractor shall
arrange suitable compressor for such purposes.
Flushing / Blowing of Aboveground Piping in the Terminal
Flushing / blowing of the above ground piping with water / air to remove debris / dirt / mud from
within the piping has to be performed by the pipeline contractor. Subsequent to water flushing,
to ensure complete cleanliness of the piping work, air blowing / cardboard blasting method has
to be adopted. All Instruments, control valves, plates etc. to be dismantled from the piping
work and any gap produced should be bridged with suitable temporary spool. Proper
supporting of the piping, during such flushing / blowing activities is to be ensured by the
pipeline contractor.
5.2.3 Acceptance Criteria
Before proceeding to the next stage of the inertisation operation Contractor shall ensure that
bulk of the water has been removed from the pipeline. Contractor shall specify when the
dewatering phase if finished and shall obtain approval of the company before proceeding to
the next inertisation phase.
5.3 Swabbing
5.3.1 General
The swabbing operation is meant to reduce the remaining water in the pipeline to bring the
pipeline into touch dry condition.
Swabbing operation shall be carried out to ensure that there is no free water left inside the
pipeline. For swabbing, suitable foam pigs shall be used by pipeline contractor and will be
suitable for traversing the whole length of the pipeline segment being swabbed. Before
starting swabbing operation, the pipeline contractor has to weight the swabbing pigs and
record. On arrival of the pigs at the receiving, the pipeline contractor to judge the weight
gained by the swabbing shall again weight the pigs. This is done by driving number of
swabbing pigs so that the weight increase in pig before and after the swabbing operation is
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PROJECT EDITION : 1
not more then 25%. The Contractor shall submit the detailed procedure along with the
duration of the swabbing operation and obtain approval of the company before starting the
operation.
The Contractor shall ensure that the swabbing operation is considered to be completed
when it is established that there is no free water left in the pipeline and the pipeline has
achieved a touch dry condition requirement of EGP. This shall be subject to company’s
approval.
Note-1: After dewatering and swabbing of the main pipeline segment, other
contractor shall carry out Electronic Geometry Pigging (EGP) / Calliper
pigging of the pipeline.
Note-2: Ideally, EGP / Calliper pigging shall be followed by commissioning activities

of the pipeline. If subsequent to EGP activities, commissioning activities of
the pipeline is taken up after long time delay then adequate measures should
be taken to preserve the pipeline during this idle period so that internal
corrosion does not occur. Suitable preservative fluid should be introduced in
the pipeline and the pipeline should be kept bottled up with this preservative
inside it.
5.4 Internal Cleaning of Equipment
5.4.1 General
Equipments like Scraper Launcher, filters, Corrosion Inhibitor Dosing Tanks, Sump Tanks
and Scraper Receiver are to be checked for Internal cleanliness and shall be ensured by the
pipeline contractor.
The laying contractor has to demonstrate cleanliness of the internals of all equipment to the
satisfaction of the Owner / Consultant and obtain approval for final box up of the equipment.
5.4.3 Trial Run of Rotating Equipments
The pipeline contractor has to arrange for trial run of the sump pump with water for short
duration of time.
The pipeline contractor has to arrange all temporary arrangements required for such trial
runs. The pipeline contractor has to submit procedure / method statement regarding how he
plans to take such trial runs and take approval of the Owner / Consultant, before actually
proceeding for the same. If pump vendor(s) is available for such trial run, the pipeline
contractor has to provide all sorts of assistance to the vendor and help the vendor in
completing the successful trial run.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PROJECT EDITION : 1
5.5 Drying
Unless otherwise stipulated the piping shall be dried with compressed air. The compressors
used for drying shall have an absorption drying units with adequate dew point outlet.
Valves shall be drained as much as possible in the half – open position under air pressure
through the vent pipes under the supervision of and in consultation with the Owner /
Consultant. Manipulation of the valves without the supervision of the Owner / Consultant is
strictly forbidden. The blowing shall be continued until a constant dew point of -8°C (or other
dew point as per TS) is measured. Subsequently, the pipe shall be closed for 24 hours. If
the dew point has not increased after 24 hours, the installation is considered dry.
• The piping to be dried must have the necessary measuring devices to measure
constantly the temperature, pressure and dew point.
• The piping is considered dry if following several measurements in 24 hours and at

several branches of the pipe the dew point measurements are constant and the
desired value is not exceeded.
For faster drying, the Contractor may propose drying with heated Nitrogen. The temperature
shall be limited to + 50°C.
5.6 Inertisation
During the inertisation operation, the air left in the pipeline shall be replaced by nitrogen
before admitting the product hydrocarbon that the pipeline will ultimately carry.
The inertisation operation shall start as soon as possible after the swabbing operation has
been completed and approved by the company. Contractor shall submit the detailed
purging procedure for approval for the company prior to its implementation.
Nitrogen needed for inertisation of the pipeline, shall be provided by the Contractor. The
maximum allowable oxygen content inside the pipeline shall be less than 1% by volume.
Multiple separation pigs with nitrogen slugs in between shall be used for pipeline
commissioning. At least three batches of nitrogen separated by four separation pigs shall
be used for inertisation of the pipeline during charging of gas in it. The combined nitrogen
column length to be used for inertisation should be at least 5% of the total pipeline length.
5.6.1 Safety Review before start of commissioning
A pre-startup safety review shall be carried out of the pipeline system before permitting entry
of hydrocarbon into the new facility. Owner/ Owner’s representative shall also participate in
the pre-startup safety review.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PROJECT EDITION : 1
6.0 COMMISSIONING
6.1 Ready for Commissioning
After completion of pre-commissioning activities and Owner approved safety start-up review
followed by liquidation of review punch list points, the pipeline contractor shall notify the
Owner / Consultant that the pipeline systems in totally are ready in all respects for
hydrocarbon-in. ‘Ready for commissioning status’ shall be jointly assessed by Owner /
Consultant, composite work contractor, pipeline contractor.
After such joint assessment, if all the criteria are met, it will then be declared by the Owner
that the entire pipeline system has reached a stage of 'Ready for Commissioning'.
It should be noted that if the actual commissioning of the stations is taken up after idle time
of sufficient length, then before starting the rotating equipment again, revisioning of the
rotating equipments has to be done in presence of pump vendor(s). The pipeline contractor
has to provide all sorts of assistance during such revisioning activities.
6.2 Commissioning and Stabilization
The pipeline contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary assistance to carry
out commissioning activities under the overall guidance and supervision of Owner /
Consultant for the entire pipeline system.
Commissioning of pipeline shall be considered completed when the line is charged with
product hydrocarbon at operating pressure and the total system operated at normal
operating parameters for a minimum period of 72 hours with all the instruments, controls
and interlocks working satisfactorily at normal operating conditions. Contractor shall submit
a detailed commissioning procedure for company’s approval.
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
Contractor shall submit for approval of the company the complete description, detailed
procedure and time schedule of all the dewatering, swabbing, flushing / blowing, drying
purging and commissioning operations, as applicable.
Documents shall also contain all procedures and safety plans to be followed while carrying
out the activities.
Upon successful completion of the work, Contractor shall prepare a final report of the work
which shall include necessary charts, diagrams, graphs, calculations, recordings, daily logs,
measurements, details of the operation, etc. Report shall also include all certificates of
calibration of instruments required together with records of calibration performed at site prior
to the start of any operation.
7.1 Spares and Consumables
Supply of spares, tools and consumables for start-up & commissioning.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

PROJECT EDITION : 1
7.2 Safety
Follow the safety practice during execution of pre-commissioning/ commissioning works as

detailed in the scope of work. Maintain and follow all safety practices equivalent or better
than those being practiced for the pipeline during pre-commissioning and commissioning
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
HEALTH, SAFETY
AND
ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
MANAGEMENT
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE HEALTH, SAFETY AND MEC/S/05/21/65 REVISION : 0

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
MANAGEMENT EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 REFERENCES
3.0 REQUIREMENT OF HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM TO BE COMPLETED BY BIDDERS.
4.0 DETAILS OF HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR
5.0 RECORDS
ANNEXURE-A
ANNEXURE-B
ANNEXURE-C
ANNEXURE-D
ANNEXURE-E
(Shalini Singh) (Sunil Kumar) (A.K. Johri) Feb. 2009

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the Healthy, Safety and Environment (HSE)

management requirement to be compiled with by the Contractors during
construction.
This specification is not intended to replace the necessary professional judgement

needed to design & implement an effective HSE system for construction activities
and the contractor is expected to exceed requirements given in this specification.
Requirement stipulated in this specification shall supplement the requirement of HSE

management given in relevant Act (S)/ legislations. General Condition of Contract
(GCC) Special Condition of Contract (SCC) and Job Specifications. Where different
documents stipulate different requirements, the most stringent shall be adopted.
2.0 REFERENCES
This document should be read in conjunction with following:
- General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

- Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
- Building and other construction workers (regulation of employment and
condition of service) Act, 1996
- Job Specifications
- Relevant IS Codes (refer Annexure-A)
- Reporting Formats (refer Annexure-B)
- Statutory requirements
3.0 REQUIREMENT OF HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM TO BE COMPLETED BY BIDDERS.
3.1 Management Responsibility
3.1.1 The Contract should have a document HSE policy to cover commitment of the
organization to ensure health, safety and environment aspects in their line of
operations
3.1.2 The HSE management system of the Contractor shall cover HSE requirement
including but not limited to what specified under clause 1.0 & 2.0 mentioned above
3.1.3 Contractor shall be fully responsible for planning and implementing HSE requirement
to the satisfaction of the company. Contractor as a minimum requirement shall
designate/deploy the following to co-ordinate the above:
No. Of workers deployed

Up to 250 - Designate one safety supervisor who will guide
the workers from time to time, as well as impart
training basic guidelines at least weekly once.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
Above 250 & upto 500 - Deploy one qualified and experienced safety
Engineer/ Officer who will guide the workers
from time to time as well as impart basic
guideline & training at least weekly once. He /
She shall possess a recognized Degree in any
branch of engineering or technology or
architecture and had a post qualification
construction experience of minimum two years
or possess a recognized Diploma in any branch
of engineering or technology or Graduate in
Science stream and had a post qualification
construction experience of minimum five years.
Above 500 - One additional safety engineer/Officer

(for every 500 or less) whose function will be as mentioned
above
Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER/ MECON & their
representative’s from any and all liabilities arising out of non fulfillment of HSE
requirements.
Above is the minimum requirement and the Contractor shall ensure physical
presence of a safety personnel at each place where Hot work permit is required. No
work shall be started at site until above safety personnel are physically present at
site. The contractor shall submit a safety organogram clearly indicating the lines of
responsibility and reporting system. He shall furnish Bio-Data/Resume/Curriculum
Vitae of the safety personnel he intends to mobilize, at least 1 month before the
intended mobilization, for MECON/Owner's approval.
3.1.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the Health, Safety and Environment (HSE)
requirements are clearly understood & faithfully implemented at all levels, at each
and every site/ work place.
3.1.5 The Contractor shall promote and develop consciousness for Health, Safety and
Environment among all personnel working for the Contractor. Regular awareness
programs and fabrication shop/work site meeting shall be arranged on HSE activities
to cover hazards involved in various operations during construction.
3.1.6 Arrange suitable first aid measures such as First Aid Box, trained personnel to give
First Aid, Stand by Ambulance or Vehicle and install fire protection measures such
as: adequate number of steel buckets with sand and water and adequate fire
extinguishers to the satisfaction of OWNER/ MECON. In case the number of workers
exceeds 500, the Contractor shall position an ambulance /vehicle on full time basis
very close to the worksite.
3.1.7 The Contractor shall evolve a comprehensive planned and documented system for
implementation and monitoring of the HSE requirements. This shall submitted to
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
OWNER & MECON for approval well in advance, prior to start of work. The
monitoring for implementation shall be done by regular inspection and compliance to
the observations thereof. The Contractor shall get similar HSE requirements
implemented at his sub-contractor (s) work site/ Office. However, compliance of HSE
requirement shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Any review/ approval
by OWNER/ MECON shall not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility/ liability in
relation to all HSE requirements.
3.1.8 Non-Conformance on HSE by the Contractor (including his Sub-contractors) as

brought out during review/ audit by MECON/ OWNER representative shall be
resolved forthwith by Contractor. Compliance report shall be possibility submitted to
MECON/ OWNER at the earliest.
3.1.9 The Contractor shall ensure participation of his Resident Engineer/Site-in-Charge in

the Safety Committee/HSE Committee meetings arranged by OWNER/ MECON.
The compliance of any observation shall be arranged urgently. Contractor shall
assist OWNER/MECON to achieve the targets set by them on HSE during the
project implementation.
The contractor shall ensure that his staff members & workers (permanent as well
casual) shall not be in a state of intoxication during working hours and shall abide by
any law relating to consumption & possession of intoxicating drinks or drugs in force.
Awareness about local laws on this issue shall form part of the Induction Training.
The contractor shall ensure that all personnel working for him comply with No-
smoking requirements of the owner as notified from time to time. Cigarettes, lighters,
auto ignition tools or appliances shall not be allowed inside the plant complex.
Smoking shall be permitted only inside smoking booths expressly designated &
authorized by the Owner/MECON.
3.1.10 The Contractor shall adhere consistently to all provisions of HSE requirements. In
case of non-compliance or continuous failure in implementation of any of HSE
provisions; OWNER/ MECON may impose stoppage of work without any Cost &
Time implication to Owner and/or impose a suitable penalty for non-compliance with
a notice of suitable period, upto a cumulative limit of 1.0% (one percent) of Contract
value with a ceiling of Rs. 10 lakhs.
0.2% (Zero decimal two percent) of the contract value for LSTK, EPC, EPCC or
Package contracts with an overall ceiling of Rs. 1,00,00,000/- (Rupees one crore).
S. Violation or HSE norms Penalty Amount

No.
1. For not using personal protective Rs. 250/- per day / item /
equipment (Helmet, Shoes, Goggles, person
Gloves, Full body harness, Face shield,
Boiler suit, etc.)
2. Working without Work Permit / Rs.5,000/- per occasion
Clearance
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

No.
3. Unsafe electrical practices (not installing Rs.3,000/- per item per day.
ELCB, using poor joints of cables, using
naked wire without top plug into socket,
laying wire / cables
on the roads, electrical jobs by
incompetent person, etc.)
4. Working at height without full body Rs.1,000/ per case per day.
harness, using non-standard / rejected
scaffolding and not arranging fall
protection arrangement as
required like Safety Nets.
5. Unsafe handling of compressed gas Rs. 100/- per item per day
cylinders (No trolley, jubilee clips double
gauge regulator, improper storage /
handling).
6. Use of domestic LPG for cutting Rs.1,000/- per occasion

purpose.
7. No fencing / barricading of excavated Rs.1,000/- per occasion
areas.
8. Not providing shoring / strutting / proper Rs.5,000/- per occasion
slope and not keeping the excavated
earth at least 1.5 M away from
excavated area.
9. Non display of caution boards, list of Rs.500/- per occasion
hospitals, emergency services available
at work locations.
10. Traffic rules violations like over speeding Rs.1,000/- per occasion
of vehicles, rash driving, wrong parking,
not using seat belts, vehicles not fitted
with reverse warning alarms.
11. Absence of Contractor's top most Rs.1,000/- per occasion
executive at site in the safety meetings
whenever called by MECON / Owner
12. Failure to maintain safety records by Rs.1,000/- per month.

Contractor Safety personnel.
13. Failure to conduct daily safety site Rs.1,000/- per occasion
inspection, HSE meeting and HSE audit
at predefined frequencies.
14. Failure to submit the monthly HSE report Rs. 1,000/- per occasion and
by 5th of subsequent month to Engineer- Rs. 100/- per day for further
in-Charge. delay.
15. Poor House Keeping Rs.1,000/- per occasion
16. Failure to report & follow up accident Rs. 10,000/- per occasion
(including Near Miss) reporting system.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

No.
17. Degradation of environment (not Rs.1,000/- per occasion
confining toxic spills oil / lubricants onto
ground)
18. Not medically examining the workers Rs.1,000/- per occasion
before allowing them to work at height,
not providing ear muffs while allowing
them to work in noise polluted areas,
made them to work in air polluted areas
without respiratory protective devices,
etc.
19. Violation of any other safety condition as Rs.1,000/- per occasion
per job HSE plan, work permit and HSE
conditions of contract (using crowbar on
cable trenches, improper welding booth,
not keeping fire extinguisher ready at
hot work site, unsafe rigging practices,
non-availability of First-Aid box, etc.)
20. Any violation not covered above. To be decided by MECON /
Owner
This penalty shall be in addition to all other penalties specified else where in the
contract. The decision of imposing stoppage of work, its extent & monitory penalty
shall rest with MECON/OWNER & binding on the Contractor.
3.1.11 All fatal accidents and other personnel accidents shall be investigated by a team of
Contractor’s senior personnel for root cause and recommend corrective and
preventive actions. Findings shall documented and suitable actions taken to avoid
recurrences shall be communicated to OWNER / MECON. OWNER / MECON shall
have the liberty to independently investigate such occurrences and Contractor shall
extend all necessary help and co-operation in this regard. MECON / Owner shall
have to right to share the content of this report with the outside world.
3.2 House Keeping
3.2.1 Contractor shall ensure that a high degree of house keeping is maintained and shall
ensure the followings:
a. All surplus earth and debris are removed/disposed off from the working site to
identified location (s).
b. Unused/Surplus Cables Steel items and steel scrap lying scattered at

different places within the working areas are removed to identified location
(s).
c. All wooden scrap, empty wooden cable drums and other combustible packing
materials shall be removed from work place to identified location(s).
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
d. Roads shall be kept clear and materials like pipes, steel, sand, boulders,
concrete chips and bricks, etc. shall not be allowed in the roads to obstructs
free movement of men & machineries.
e. Fabricated steel structurals, pipes & piping materials shall be stacked

properly for erection.
f. Water logging on rods shall not be allowed.
g. No parking of trucks/ trolleys, cranes and trailors etc. shall be allowed on of

roads, which may obstruct the traffic movements.
h. Utmost care shall be taken to ensure over all cleanliness and proper up keep
of the working areas.
i. Trucks carrying sand, earth and pulverized materials etc. shall be covered
while moving within the plant areas.
j. The contractor shall ensure that the atmosphere in plant area and on roads is
free from particulate matter like dust, sand, etc. by keeping the top surface
wet for ease in breathing.
k. At least two exits for any unit area shall be assured at all times.
3.3 Healthy, Safety and Environment
a) The Contractor shall provide safe means of access to any working place
including provision of suitable and sufficient scaffolding at various stages
during all operations of the work for the safety of his workmen, and OWNER/
MECON. Contractor shall ensure deployment of appropriate equipment and
appliances for adequate safety and healthy of the workmen and protection of
surrounding areas.
Contractor shall ensure identification of all Occupational Health, Safety &

Environmental hazards in the type of work he is going to undertake and enlist
mitigation measures. Contractor shall carry out Job Safety Analysis (JSA)
specifically for high risk jobs like working at height & in confined space, deep
excavations, radiography jobs, electrical installations, blasting operations,
demolishing / dismantling activities, welding / gas cutting jobs and submit the
findings to MECON / Owner. The necessary HSE measures devised shall be
in place prior to start of an activity by the contractor.
b) The Contractor shall ensure that all their staff workers including their sub-
Contractor (s) shall wear Safety Helmet and Safety shoes. Contractor shall
also ensure use of safety belt, protective goggles, gloves etc. by the
personnel as per jobs requirements. All these gadgets shall conform to
relevant IS specification equivalent.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
The Contractor shall ensure that all their staff, workers and visitors including
their sub-contractor(s) have been issued (records to be kept) & wear
appropriate PPEs like nape strap type safety helmets preferably with head
& sweat band with ¾" cotton chin strap (made of industrial HDPE), safety
shoes with steel toe cap and antiskid sole, full body harness (C∈ marked and
conforming to EN361), protective goggles, gloves, ear muffs, respiratory
protective devices, etc. All these gadgets shall conform to applicable IS
Specifications / C∈ or other applicable international standards.
Owner may issue a comprehensive color scheme for helmets to be used by

various agencies. The Contractor shall follow the scheme issued by the
owner. All Safety / Fire personnel shall preferably wear red colour helmet so
that workmen can approach them for guidance during emergencies.
For shot blasting, the usage of protective face shield and helmets, gauntlet
and protective clothing is mandatory.
For offshore jobs/contracts, contractor shall provide PPEs (new) to MECON &
Owner's personnel, at his (contractor's) cost. All personnel shall wear life
jacket at all time.
An indicative list of HSE standards/codes is given under Appendix-A.
The contractor shall issue height permit for working at height after verifying
and certifying the checkpoints as specified in the attached permit (Format No.
HSE-6). He shall also undertake to ensure compliance to the conditions of
the permit during the currency of the permit including adherence to personal
protective equipments.
The permit shall be issued initially for one week or expected duration of an
activity and extended further for the balance duration. This permit shall be
applicable in areas where specific clearance from Owner's operation Deptt. /
Safety Deptt. is not required. MECON field Engineers / Safety Officers / Area
Coordinators may verify and counter sign this permit (as an evidence of
verification) during the execution of the job.
In case work is undertaken without taking sufficient precautions as given in

the permit, MECON Engineers may cancel the permit and stop the work till
satisfactory compliance is arranged. Contractors are expected to maintain a
register for issuance of permit and extensions thereof including preserving
the used permits for verification during audits etc.
Contractor shall arrange (at his cost) and ensure use of Fall Arrester Systems
by his workers. Fall arresters are to be used while climbing / descending tall
structures. These arresters should lock automatically against the anchorage
line, restricting free fall of the user. The device is to be provided with a double
security opening system to ensure safe attachment or release of the user at
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
any point of rope. In order to avoid shock, the system should be capable of
keeping the person in vertical position in case of a fall.
Contractor shall ensure that Full body harnesses conforming EN361 and
having authorized CC marking is used by all personnel while working at
height. The lanyards and life lines should have enough tensile strength to
take the load of the worker in case of a fall. One end of the lanyard shall be
firmly tied with the harnesses and the other end with life line. The harness
should be capable of keeping the workman vertical in case of a fall, enabling
him to rescue himself.
Contractor shall provide Roof Top Walk Ladders for carrying out activities on
sloping roofs in order to reduce the chances of slippages and falls.
c) Contractor shall ensure that a proper Safety Net System shall be used at
appropriate locations. The safety net shall be located not more than 30 feet
(9.0 metres) below the working surface at site to arrest or to reduce the
consequences of possible fall of persons working at different heights.
d) Contractor shall ensure that flash back arrestors conforming to BS:6158 or

equivalent are installed on all gas cylinders as well as at the torch end of the
gas hose, while in use. All cylinders shall be mounted on trolleys and
provided with a closing key. The burner and the hose placed downstream of
pressure reducer shall be equipped with Flash Back Arrester / Non Return
Valve device. The hoses for acetylene and oxygen cylinders must be of
different colours. Their connections to cylinders and burners shall be made
with a safety collar. At end of work, the cylinders in use shall be closed and
hoses depressurized. All welding machines shall have effective earthing. In
order to help maintain good housekeeping, and to reduce fire hazard, live
electrode bits shall be contained safely and shall not be thrown directly on the
ground.
e) The Contractor shall assign to his workmen, tasks commensurate with their
qualification, experience and state of health for driving of vehicles, handling
and erections of materials and equipment’s. All lifting equipments shall be
tested certified for its capacity before use. Adequate and suitable lighting at
every work place and approach there to shall be provided by the contractor
before starting the actual work/ operation at night.
Contractor shall ensure installation of Safe Load Indicator (SLI) on all cranes
(while in use) to minimize overloading risk. SLI shall have capability to
continuously monitor and display the load on the hook, and automatically
compare it with the rated crane capacity at the operating condition of the
crane. The system shall also provide visual and audible warnings at set
capacity levels to alert the operator in case of violations.
The contractor shall be responsible for safe operations of different

equipments mobilized and used by him at the workplace like transport
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
vehicles, engines, cranes, mobile ladders, scaffoldings, work tools, etc.
f) Hazardous and/or toxic material such as solvent coating or thinners shall be

stored in appropriate containers.
g) All hazardous materials shall be labeled with the name of the materials, the
hazards associated with its use and necessary precautions to be taken.
The work place shall be checked prior to start of activities to identify the
location, type and condition of any asbestos materials which could be
disturbed during the work. In case asbestos material is detected, usage of
appropriate PPEs by all personnel shall be ensured and the matter shall be
reported immediately to MECON / Owner.
h) Contractor shall ensure that during the performance of the work all hazards to
the health of personnel have been identified assessed and eliminated.
i) Chemical spills shall be contained & cleaned up immediately to prevent

further contamination.
j) All personnel exposed to physical agents such as ionizing or non-ionizing

radiation ultraviolet rays or similar other physical agents shall be provided
with adequate shielding or protection commensurate with type of exposure
involved. For ionizing radiation, requirements of Bhabha Atomic Research
Centre (BARC)/ Atomic Energy Regulatory Board (AERB) shall be followed.
k) Where contract or exposure of hazardous materials could exceed limits or

could otherwise have harmful affects, appropriate personal protective
equipment’s such as gloves, goggles, aprons, chemical resistant clothing and
respirator shall be used.
l) Contractor shall ensure the following facilities at work sites:
I) A Crèche where 10 or more female workers are having children below

the age of 6 years.
II) Reasonable Canteen facilities are made available at appropriate location depending
upon site conditions.
m) Suitable facilities for toilet, drinking water, proper lighting shall be provided at
site and labor camps, commensurate with applicable Laws/Legislation.
n) Contractor shall ensure storage and utilization methodology of material that

are not detrimental to the environment. Wherever required Contractor shall
ensure that only the environment friendly material are selected.
Emphasize on recycling of waste materials such as metals, plastics, glass,

paper, oil & solvents. The waste that can not be minimized, reused or
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
recovered shall be stored and disposed of safely. In no way, toxic spills shall
be allowed to percolate into the ground. The contractor shall not use the
empty areas for dumping the wastes.
o) All person deployed at site shall be knowledgeable of and comply with the
environmental laws, rules & regulation relating to the hazardous materials
substance and wastes. Contractor shall not dump, release or otherwise
discharge or dispose off any such materials without the authorization of
OWNER/ MECON.
Suitable scaffoldings shall be provided to workmen for all works that cannot
be safely done from the ground or from solid construction except such short
period work that can be safely done using ladders. When a ladder is used, an
extra workman shall be engaged for holding the ladder.
The contractor shall ensure that the scaffolds used during construction
activities shall be strong enough to take the designed load. Owner / MECON
reserves the right to ask the contractor to submit certification and or design
calculations from his Engineering regarding load carrying capacity of the
scaffoldings.
All scaffolds shall be inspected by a Scaffolding Inspector of the contractor.

He shall paste a GREEN tag on each scaffold found safe and a RED tag on
each scaffold found unsafe. Scaffolds with GREEN tag only shall be
permitted to be used and RED ones shall immediately be removed from the
site.
All electrical installations / connections shall be carried out as per the

provisions of latest revision of following codes/standards, in addition to the
requirements of Statutory Authorities and IE / applicable international rules &
regulations:
- OISO SID 173 : Fire prevention & protection system for

electrical installations
- SP 30 (BIS) : National Electric Code
All electrical installations shall be approved by the concerned statutory

authorities.
• The contractor shall meet the following requirements:
i) Ensure that electrical systems and equipment including tools &

tackles used during construction phase are properly selected,
installed, used and maintained as per provisions of the latest revision
of the Indian Electrical / applicable international regulations.
ii) Shall deploy qualified & licensed electricians for proper & safe
installation and for regular inspection of construction power
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
distribution system / points including their earthing. A copy of the

license shall be submitted to MECON / Owner for records. Availability
of at least one competent licensed electrician shall be ensured at site
round the clock to attend to the normal / emergency jobs.
iii) All switchboards / welding machines shall be kept in well-ventilated &

covered shed. The shed shall be elevated to avoid water logging. No
flammable materials shall be used for constructing the shed. Also
flammable materials shall not be stored in and around electrical
equipment / switchboard. Adequate clearances and operational space
shall be provided around the equipment.
iv) Fire extinguishers and insulating mats shall be provided in all power
distribution centers.
v) Temporary electrical equipment shall not be employed in hazardous

area without obtaining safety permit.
vi) Proper house keeping shall be done around the electrical installations.
vii) All temporary installations shall be tested before energising, to ensure

proper earthing, bonding, suitability of protection system,
adequacy of feeders/cables etc.
viii) All welders shall use hand gloves irrespective of holder voltage.
ix) Multilingual (Hindi, English and local language) caution boards, shock
treatment charts and instruction plate containing location of isolation
point for incoming supply, name & telephone No. of contact person in
emergency shall be provided in substations and near all distribution
boards / local panels.
x) Operation of earth leakage device shall be checked regularly by

temporarily connecting series test lamp (2 bulbs of equal rating
connected in series) between phase and earth.
xi) Regular inspection of all installations (at least once in a month)
• The following features shall also be ensured for all electrical installations
during construction phase by the contractor:
i) Each installation shall have a main switch with a protective device,

installed in an enclosure adjacent to the metering point. The operating
height of the main switch shall not exceed 1.5 M. The main switch
shall be connected to the point of supply by means of armoured cable.
ii) The outgoing feeders shall be double or triple pole switches with fuses
/ MCBs. Loads in a three phase circuit shall be balanced as far as
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
possible and load on neutral should not exceed 20% of load in the
phase.
iii) The installation shall be adequately protected against overload, short

circuit and earth leakage by the use of suitable protective devices.
Fuses wherever used shall be HRC type. Use of rewirable fuses shall
be strictly prohibited. The earth leakage device shall have an
operating current not exceeding 30 mA.
iv) All connections to the hand tools / welding receptacles shall be taken
through proper switches, sockets and plugs.
v) All single phase sockets shall be minimum 3 pin type only. All unused
sockets shall be provided with socket caps.
vi) Only 3 core (P+N+E) overall sheathed flexible cables with minimum
conductor size of 1.5 mm2 copper shall be used for all single phase
hand tools.
vii) Only metallic distribution boxes with double earthing shall be used at
site. No wooden boxes shall be used.
viii) All power cables shall be terminated with compression type cable
glands. Tinned copper lugs shall be used for multistrand wires /
cables.
ix) Cables shall be free from any insulation damage.
x) Minimum depth of cable trench shall be 750 mm for MV & control

cables and 900 mm for HV cables. These cables shall be laid over a
sand layer and covered with sand, brick & soil for ensuring
mechanical protection. Cables shall not be laid in waterlogged area as
far as practicable. Cable route markers shall be provided at every 25
M of buried trench route. When laid above ground, cables shall be
properly cleated or supported on rigid poles of atleast 2 M high.
Minimum head clearance of 6 meters shall be provided at road
crossings.
xi) Under ground road crossings for cables shall be avoided to the extent
feasible. In any case no under ground power cable shall be allowed to
cross the roads without pipe sleeve.
xii) All cable joints shall be done with proper jointing kit. No taped /
temporary joints shall be used.
xiii) An independent earthing facility should preferably be established

within the temporary installation premises. All appliances and
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
equipment shall be adequately earthed. In case of armoured cables,

the armour shall be bonded to the earthing system.
xiv) All cables and wire rope used for earth connections shall be
terminated through tinned copper lugs.
xv) In case of local earthing, earth electrodes shall be buried near the
supply point and earth continuity wire shall be connected to local earth
plate for further distribution to various appliances. All insulated wires
for earth connection shall have insulation of green colour.
xvi) Separate core shall be provided for neutral. Earth / Structures shall
not be used as a neutral in any case.
xvii) ON/OFF position of all switches shall be clearly designated / painted

for easy isolation in emergency.
The contractor shall identify all operations that can adversely affect the health of its
workers and issue & implement mitigation measures.
For surface cleaning operations, sand blasting shall not be permitted even if not
explicitly stated elsewhere in the contract.
To eliminate radiation hazard, Tungsten electrodes used for Gas Tungsten Arc
Welding shall not contain Thorium.
Appropriate respiratory protective devices shall be used to protect workmen from

inhalation of air borne contaminants like silica, asbestos, gases, fumes, etc.
Workmen shall be made aware of correct methods for lifting, carrying, pushing &
pulling of heavy loads. Wherever possible, manual handling shall be replaced by
mechanical lifting equipments.
For jobs like drilling / demolishing / dismantling where noise pollution exceeds the
specified limit of 85 decibels, ear muffs shall be provided to the workers.
To avoid upper limb disorders and backaches, Display Screen Equipments'

workplace stations shall be carefully designed & used with proper sitting postures.
Power driven hand-held tools shall be maintained in good working condition to
minimize their vibrating effects and personnel using these tools shall be taught how
to operate them safely & how to maintain good circulation in hands.
The contractor shall arrange health check up for all the workers at the time of
induction. Health check may have to be repeated if the nature of duty assigned to
him is changed necessitating health check or doubt arises about his wellness.
MECON / Owner reserve the right to ask the contractor to submit test reports.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
Weather Protection
Contractor shall take appropriate measures to protect workers from severe storms, solar
radiations, poisonous gases, dust, etc. by ensuring proper usage of PPEs like Sun glasses,
Sun screen lotions, respirators, dust masks, etc. and rearranging / planning the construction
activities to suit the weather conditions.
Communication
All persons deployed at the work site shall have access to effective means of
communication so that any untoward incident can be reported immediately and assistance
sought by them.
All health & safety information shall be communicated in a simple & clear language easily
understood by the local workforce.
Unsuitable Land Conditions
Contractor shall take appropriate measures and necessary work permits / clearances if work
is to be done in or around marshy areas, river crossings, mountains, monuments, etc.
Under Water Inspection
Contractor shall ensure that boats and other means used for transportation, surveying &
investigation works shall be certified seaworthy by a recognized classification society. It shall
be equipped with all life saving devices like life jackets, adequate fire protection
arrangements and shall posses communication facilities like cellular phones, wireless,
walkie-talkie. All divers used for seabed surveys, underwater inspections shall have required
authorized license, suitable life saving kit. Number of hours of work by divers shall be limited
as per regulations. MECON / Owner shall have the right to inspect the boat and scrutinize
documents in this regard.
TOOL BOX MEETING (TBM)
Contractor shall conduct daily TBM with workers prior to start of work and shall maintain
proper record of the meeting. A suggested format is given below. The TBM is to be
conducted by the immediate supervisor of the workers.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
TOOLBOX MEETING RECORDING SHEET
Date & Time

Subject
Presenter
Hazards involved
Precautions to be taken
Worker’s Name Signature Section
Remarks, if any
The topics during TBM shall include
- Hazards related to work assigned on that day and precautions to be taken.

- Any forthcoming HSE hazards / events / instruction / orders, etc.
The above record can be kept in local language, which workers can read. These records
shall be made available to MECON / Owner whenever demanded.
TRAINING
Contractor shall ensure that all his personnel possess appropriate training to carry out the
assigned job safely. The training should be imparted in a language understood by them and
should specifically be trained about
- Potential hazards to which they may be exposed at their workplace

- Measures available for prevention and elimination of these hazards
The topics during training shall cover, at the minimum;
- Education about hazards and precautions required

- Emergency and evacuation plan
- HSE requirements
- Fire fighting and First-Aid
- Use of PPEs
- Local laws on intoxicating drinks, drugs, smoking in force
Records of the training shall be kept and submitted to MECON / Owner whenever
demanded.
For offshore and jetty jobs, contractor shall ensure that all personnel deployed have
undergone a structured sea survival training including use of lifeboats, basket landing, use
of radio communication etc. from an agency acceptable to Owner / MECON.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
INSPECTION
The contractor shall carryout daily HSE inspection and record observations at a central
location. These inspection records shall be freely accessible to Owner / MECON
representatives. The contractor shall also assist Owner / MECON representatives during the
HSE inspections conducted by them.
ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKING INSIDE A RUNNING PLANT
As a minimum, the contractor shall ensure adherence to following safety requirements while
working in or in the close vicinity of an operating plant :
a) Contractor shall obtain permits for Hot work, Cold work, Excavation and Confined
Space from Owner in the prescribed format.
b) The contractor shall monitor, record and compile list of his workers entering the
operational plant/unit each day and ensure & record their return after completing the
job.
c) Contractor's workers and staff members shall use designated entrances and
proceed by designated routes to work areas only assigned to them. The workers
shall not be allowed to enter units' area, tanks area, pump rooms, etc. without work
authorization permit.
d) Work activities shall be planned in such a way so as to minimize the disruption of

other activities being carried out in an operational plant / unit and activities of other
contractors.
e) The contractor shall submit a list of all chemicals / toxic substances that are intended
to be used at site and shall take prior approval of the Owner.
f) Specific training on working in a hydrocarbon plant shall be imparted to the work

force and mock drills shall be carried out for Rescue operations / First-Aid measures.
g) Proper barricading / cordoning of the operational units / plants shall be done before
starting the construction activities. No unauthorized person shall be allowed to
trespass. The height and overall design of the barricading structure shall be finalized
in consultation with the Owner and shall be got approved from the Owner.
h) Care shall be taken to prevent hitting underground facilities such as electrical cables,
hydrocarbon piping during execution of work.
i) Barricading with water curtain shall be arranged in specific/critical areas where

hydrocarbon vapors are likely to be present such as near horton spheres or tanks.
Positioning of fire tenders (from owner) shall also be ensured during execution of
critical activities.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
j) Emergency evacuation plan shall be worked out and all workmen shall be apprised
about evacuation routes. Mock drill operations may also be conducted.
k) Flammable gas test shall be conducted prior to any hot work using appropriate
measuring instruments. Sewers, drains, vents or any other gas escaping points shall
be covered with flame retardant tarpaulin.
l) Respiratory devices shall be kept handy while working in confined zones where there
is a danger of inhalation of poisonous gases. Constant monitoring of presence of
Gas / Hydrocarbon shall be done.
m) Clearance shall be obtained from all parties before starting hot tapping, patchwork
on live lines and work on corroded tank roof.
n) Positive isolation of line/equipment by blinding for welding/cutting/grinding shall be

done. Closing of valve will not be considered sufficient for isolation.
o) Welding spatters shall be contained properly and in no case shall be allowed to fall
on the ground containing oil. Similar care shall be taken during cutting operations.
p) The vehicles, cranes, engines, etc. shall be fitted with spark arresters on the exhaust
pipe and got it approved from Safety Department of the Owner.
q) Plant air should not be used to clean any part of the body or clothing or use to blow
off dirt on the floor.
r) Gas detectors should be installed in gas leakage prone areas as per requirement of
Owner's plant operation personnel.
s) An experienced full time safety personnel shall be exclusively deployed to monitor

safety aspects in running plants.
HSE PROMOTION
The contractor shall encourage his workforce to promote HSE efforts at workplace by way of
organizing workshops / seminars / training programmes, celebrating HSE awareness weeks
& National Safety Day, conducting quizzes & essay competitions, distributing pamphlets,
posters & material on HSE, providing incentives for maintaining good HSE practices and
granting bonus for completing the job without any lost time accident.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
4.0 DETAILS OF HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR
4.1 On Award of Contract
The Contractor shall prior to start of work submit his Health. Safety and Environment
Manual of procedure and HSE Plans for approval by OWNER/MECON. The
Contractor shall participate in the pre-start meeting with OWNER/MECON to finalize
HSE plans including the following.
- Job procedure to be followed by Contractor for activities covering Handling of

equipment’s, Scaffolding, Electric Installation, describing the risks involved,
actions to be taken and methodology for monitoring each.
- Organizations structure alongwith responsibility and authority records/ reports

etc. on HSE activities.
4.2 During job execution
4.2.1 Implement approved Health, Safety and Environment management procedure

including but not limited to as brought our under para 3.0. Contractor shall also
ensure to:
- Arrange workmen compensation insurance, registration under ESI Act, third

party liability insurance etc. as applicable.
- Arrange all HSE permits before start of activities (as applicable) like her work,
confined space, work at heights, storage of Chemicals/explosives materials
and its use and implement all precautions mentioned therein
- Submit timely the completed check list on HSE activities, Monthly HSE report,
accident report, investigation report, etc. as per OWNER/MECON
requirements. Compliance of instructions on HSE shall be done by Contractor
and informed urgently to OWNER/MECON.
- Ensure that resident Engineers/Site-In-Charge of the Contractor shall amend

all the Safety Committee/HSE meeting arranged by OWNER/ MECON only in
case of his absence from site, a seconds senior most person shall be
nominated by him in advance and communicated to OWNER/MECON.
- Display at site office and work locations caution boards, list of hospitals for
emergency services available.
- Provided posters, banners, for safe working to promote safety consciousness
- Carryout audits/inspection at sub Contractor work as per approved HSE

documents & submit the reports for OWNER/MECON review.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
- Assist in HSE audits by OWNER/ MECON and submit compliance report.
- Generate & submit HSE records/ reports as per HSE Plan.
- Appraise OWNER/MECON on HSE activities at site.
5.0 RECORDS
At the minimum, the contractor shall maintain/ submit HSE records in the following
reporting formats:
1. Monthly HSE Checklist cum compliance report HSE-1

2. Accident / Incident Report HSE-2
3. Supplementary Accident / Incident Investigation report HSE-3
4. Near Miss Incident Report HSE-4
5. Monthly HSE Report HSE-5
6. Permit for working at height HSE-6
7. Permit for working in confined space HSE-7
8. Permit for radiation work HSE-8
9. Permit for demolishing / dismantling HSE-9
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
ANNEXURE-A
A. I.S. CODES ON HSE
SP:53 Safety code for the use, Care and protection of hand operated tools.
IS: 818 Code of practice for safety and health requirements in electric and gas
welding and cutting operations
IS: 1179 Eye and Face precautions during welding, equipment etc.
IS: 1860 Safety requirements for use, care and protection of abrasive grinding wheels.
IS: 1989(Part-I & II) Leather safety boots and shoes
IS: 2925 Industrial Safety Helmets
IS: 3016 Code of practice for fire safety precautions in welding and cutting operations.
IS: 3043 Code of practice for earthing.
IS: 3764 Code of safety for excavation work
IS: 3786 Methods for computation of frequency and severity rates for industrial injuries
and classification of industrial accidents.
IS: 3996 Safety Code of scaffolds and ladders.
IS: 4082 Recommendation on stacking and storage of construction materials and

components at site.
IS: 4770 Rubber gloves for electrical purposes
IS: 5121 Safety code for piling and other deep foundations
IS: 5216 (Part-I) Recommendations on Safety procedures and practices in electrical works
IS: 5557 Industrial and Safety rubber lined boots.
IS: 5983 Eye protectors
IS:6519 Selection, care and repair of Safety footwear
IS: 6994 (Part-I) Industrial Safety Gloves (Leather & Cotton Gloves)
IS: 7293 Safety Code for working with construction Machinery

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
IS: 8519 Guide for selection of industrial safety equipment for body protection
IS: 9167 Ear protectors
IS: 11006 Flash back arrestor (Flame arrestor)
IS:11016 General and safety requirements for machine tools and their operation
IS: 11057 Specification for Industrial safety nets
IS: 11226 Leather safety footwear having direct moulded rubber sole
IS: 11972 Code of practice for safety precaution to be taken when entering a sewerage
system
IS: 13367 Code of practice-safe use of cranes
IS: 13416 Recommendations for preventive measures against hazards at working place
B. INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ON HSE
Safety Glasses : ANSI Z 87.1, ANSI ZZ 87.1, AS 1337, BS 2092, BS 1542, BS 679,
DIN 4646 / 58211
Safety Shoes : ANSI Z 41.1, AS 2210, EN 345
Hand Gloves : BS 1651
Ear Muffs : BS 6344, ANSI S 31.9
Hard Hat : ANSI Z 89.1 / 89.2, AS 1808, BS 5240, DIN 4840
Goggles : ANSI Z 87.1
Face Shield : ANSI Z 89.1
Breathing Apparatus : BS 4667, NIOSH
Welding & Cutting : ANSI Z 49.1
Safe handling of : P-1 (Compressed Gas Association

compressed Gases 1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington VA 22202 – USA)
in cylinders
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
ANNEXURE-B
DETAILS OF FIRST AID BOX
SL.
DESCRIPTION QUANTITY
NO
1. Small size Roller Bandages, 1 inch wide (Finger Dressing small) 6 Pcs.
2. Medium size Roller Bandages, 2 inch wide (Hand and Foot Dressing) 6 Pcs.
3. Large size Roller Bandages, 4 inch wide (Body Dressing Large) 6 Pcs.
4. Large size Burn Dressing (Burn Dressing Large) 4 Pkts.
5. Cotton wool (20 gms packing) 4 Pkts.
6. Antiseptic Solution Dettol (100 ml.) or Savlon 1 Bottle
7. Mercurochrome Solution (100 ml.) 2% in water 1 Bottle
8. Ammonia Solution (20 ml.) 1 Bottle
9. A Pair of Scrissors 1 Piece
10. Adhesive Plaster (1.25 cm x 5 m) 1Spool
11. Eye pads in Separate Sealed Packet 4 Pcs.
12. Tourniqut 1 No.
13. Safety Pins 1 Dozen
14. Tinc. Iodine / Betadin (100 ml.) 1 Bottles
15. Ointment for burns (Burnol 20 gms.) 1 Bottole
16. Polythene Wash cup for washing eyes 1 No.
17. Potassium Permanganate (20 gms.) 1 Pkt.
18. Tinc. Benzoine (100 ml.) 1 Bottole
19. Triangular Bandages 2 Nos.
20. Band Aid Dressing 5 Pcs.
21. Iodex / Moov (25 gms.) 1 Bottole
22. Tongue Depressor 1 No.
23. Boric Acid Powder (20 gms.) 2 Pkt.
24. Sodium Bicarbonate (20 gms.) 1 Pkt.
25. Dressing Powder (Nebasulf) (10 gms.) 1 Bottole
26. Medicinal Glass 1 No.
27. Duster 1 No.
28. Booklet (English & Local Language) 1 No. each
29. Soap 1 No.
30. Toothache Solution 1 No.
31. Eye Ointment 1 Bottle
32. Vicks (22 gms.) 1 Bottle
33. Forceps 1 No.
34. Cotton Buds (5 nos.) 1 Pkt.
35. Note Book 1 No.
36. Splints 4 Nos.
37. Lock 1 Piece
38. Life Saving/Emergency/Over-the Counter Drugs As decided at site
Box size : 14” x 12” x 4”
Note : The medicines prescribed above are only indicative. Equivalent medicines can also be used.
A prescription, in this regard, shall be required from a qualified Physician.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
ANNEXURE – C
TYPE OF FIRES VIS-À-VIS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Fire Fire Extinguishers

Water Foam CO2 Dry Powder Multi Purpose
(ABC)
Originated from paper, √ √ Can control Can control √
clothes, wood minor minor
surface fires surface fires
Inflammable liquids x √ √ √ √
like alcohol, diesel,
petrol, edible oils,
bitumen
Originated from gases x x √ √ √

like LPG, CNG, H2
Electrical Fires x x √ √ √
Legend : √ Can be used

x Not to be used
Note : Fire extinguishing equipment must be checked atleast once a year and after every use by
an authorized person. The equipment must have an inspection label on which the next
inspection date is giver:. Type of extinguisher shall clearly be marked on it.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
ANNEXURE – D
Indicative List of Statutory Acts & Rules Relating to HSE
- The Indian Explosives Act and Rules

- The Motor Vehicle Act and Central Motor Vehicle Rules
- The Factories Act and concerned Factory Rules
- The Petroleum Act and Petroleum Rules
- The Workmen Compensation Act
- The Gas Cylinder Rules and the Static & Mobile Pressure Vessels Rules.
- The Indian Electricity Act and Rules
- The Indian Boiler Act and Regulations
- The Water (Prevention & Control & Pollution) Act
- The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Cess Act
- The Mines & Minerals (Regulation & Development) Act
- The Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act
- The Atomic Energy Act
- The Radiation Protection Rules
- The Indian Fisheries Act
- The Indian Forest Act
- The Wild Life (Protection) Act
- The Environment (Protection) Act and Rules
- The Hazardous Wastes (Management & Handling) Rules
- The Manufacturing, Storage & import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules
- The Public Liability Act
- The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Condition of
service) Act
- Other statutory acts Like EPF, ESIS, Minimum Wage Act.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
ANNEXURE – E
CONSTRUCTION HAZARDS, THEIR EFFECTS & PREVENTIVE MEASURES
ACTIVITY TYPE OF HAZARD EFFECT OF HAZARD PREVENTIVE MEASURES

(A) EXCAVATION ¾ Falling into pit ¾ Personal injury ¾ Provide guard
rails/barricade with
Pit Excavation up warning signal.
to 3.0m ¾ Provide at least two
entries/exits.
¾ Provide escape
ladders.
¾ Earth ¾ Suffocation / ¾ Provide suitable size
Collapse Breathlessness of shoring and
¾ Buried strutting, if required.
¾ Keep soil heaps
away from the edge
equivalent to 1.5m or
depth of pit
whichever is more.
¾ Don’t allow vehicles
to operate too close
to excavated areas.
Maintain at least 2m
distance from edge
of cut.
¾ Maintain sufficient
angle of repose.
Provide slope not
less than 1:1 and
suitable bench of
0.5m width at every
1.5m depth of
excavation in all soils
except hard rock.
¾ Battering/benching
the sides.
¾ Contact with ¾ Electrocution ¾ Obtain permission
buried electric ¾ Explosion from competent
cables authorities, prior to
¾ Gas/ Oil excavation, if
Pipelines required.
¾ Locate the position
of buried utilities by
referring to plant
drawings.
¾ Start digging
manually to locate
the exact position of
buried utilities and
thereafter use
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

mechanical means.
Pit Excavation ¾ Same as ¾ Can cause ¾ Prevent ingress of
beyond 3.0m above plus drowning situation water
¾ Flooding due ¾ Provide ring buoys
to excessive ¾ Identify and provide
rain/ suitable size
underground dewatering pump or
water well point system
¾ Digging in the ¾ Building/ Structure ¾ Obtain prior approval
vicinity of may collapse of excavation
existing ¾ Loss of health & method from local
Building/ wealth authorities
Structure ¾ Use under-pining
method
¾ Construct retaining
wall side by side
¾ Movement of ¾ May cause cave- ¾ Barricade the
vehicles / in or slides excavated area with
equipments ¾ Persons may get proper lighting
close to the buried arrangements
edge of cut. ¾ Maintain at least 2m
distance from edge
of cut and use stop
block to prevent
over-run.
¾ Strengthen shoring
and strutting
Narrow deep ¾ Same as ¾ May cause severe ¾ Battering/benching

excavations for above plus injuries or prove of sides
pipelines, etc. ¾ Frequent fatal ¾ Provide escape
cave-in or ladders
slides
¾ Flooding due ¾ May arise ¾ Same as above plus
to Hydrostatic drowning situation ¾ Bail out accumulated
testing water
¾ Maintain adequate
ventilation
Rock excavation by ¾ Improper ¾ May prove fatal ¾ Ensure proper
blasting handling of storage, handling &
explosives carrying of
explosives by trained
personnel.
¾ Comply with the
applicable explosive
acts & rules.
¾ Uncontrolled ¾ May cause severe ¾ Allow only authorized
explosion injuries or prove persons to perform
fatal blasting operations.
¾ Smoking and open
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

flames are to be
strictly prohibited.
¾ Scattering of ¾ Can hurt people ¾ Use PPE like
stone pieces goggles, face mask,
in atmosphere helmets etc.
Rock excavating by ¾ Entrapping of ¾ May cause severe ¾ Barricade the area
blasting (Contd) persons/ injuries or prove with red flags and
animals. fatal blow siren before
blasting.
¾ Misfire ¾ May explode ¾ Do not return to site

suddenly for at least 20
minutes or unless
announced safe by
designated person.
Piling Work ¾ Failure of pile- ¾ Can hurt people ¾ Inspect Piling rigs
driving and pulley blocks
equipment before the beginning
of each shift.
¾ Noise ¾ Can cause ¾ Use personal
pollution deafness protective
¾ and psychological equipments like ear
imbalance plugs, muffs, etc.
¾ Extruding rods ¾ Can hurt people ¾ Barricade the area

/ casing an install sign boards
¾ Provide first-aid
¾ Working in the ¾ Can cause ¾ Keep sufficient
vicinity of electrocution / distance from Live-
‘Live- asphyxiation Electricity as per IS
Electricity’ code.
¾ Shut off the supply, if
possible
¾ Provide
artificial/rescue
breathing to he
injured.
(B) CONCRETING ¾ Air pollution ¾ May affect ¾ Wear respirators or
by cement Respiratory cover mouth and
System nose with wet cloth.
¾ Handling of ¾ Hand s may get ¾ Use gloves and
ingredients injured other PPE.
¾ Protruding ¾ Feet may get ¾ Use Safety shoes.
reinforcement injured ¾ Provide platform
rods. above reinforcement
for movement of
workers.
¾ Earthing of ¾ Can cause ¾ Ensure earthing of
electrical electrocution / equipments and
mixers, asphyxiation proper functioning of
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

vibrators, etc. electrical circuit
not done before
commencement of
work.
¾ Falling of ¾ Persons may get ¾ Use hard hats
materials from injured ¾ Remove surplus
height material immediately
from work place
¾ Ensure lighting
arrangements during
night hours.
¾ Continuous ¾ Cause tiredness ¾ Insist on shift pattern
pouring by of workers and ¾ Provide adequate
same gang may lead to rest to workers
accident. between subsequent
pours.
¾ Revolving or ¾ Parts of body or ¾ Allow only mixers
concrete clothes may get with hopper
mixer/ entrapped. ¾ Provide safety cages
vibrators around moving
motors
¾ Ensure proper
mechanical locking
of vibrator
Super-structure ¾ Same as ¾ Shuttering / props ¾ Avoid excessive
above plus may collapse and stacking on
¾ Deflection in prove fatal shuttering material
props or ¾ Check the design
shuttering and strength of
material shuttering material
before
commencement of
work
¾ Rectify immediately
the deflection noted
during concreting
¾ Passage to ¾ Improperly tied ¾ Ensure the stability
work place and designed and strength of
props / planks passage before
may collapse commencement of
work
¾ Do not overload and
under the passage.
(C) ¾ Curtailment ¾ Persons may get ¾ Use PPE like gloves,
REINFORCEMENT and binding of injured shoes, helmets, etc.
rods ¾ Avoid usage of shift
tools
¾ Carrying of ¾ Workers may ¾ Provide suitable
rods for short injure their hands pads on shoulders
distance/ at and shoulders and use safety
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

heights gloves.
¾ Tie up rods in easily
liftable bundles
¾ Ensure proper
staging.
¾ Checking of ¾ Rods may cut or ¾ Use measuring
clear distance/ injure the finger devices tape,
cover with measuring rods, etc.
hands
¾ Hitting ¾ Persons may get ¾ Use safety shoes
projected rods injured and fall and avoid standing
and standing down unnecessarily on
on cantilever cantilever rods
rods ¾ Avoid wearing loose
clothes
¾ Falling of ¾ May prove fatal ¾ Use helmets
material from ¾ Provide safety nets
height
¾ Transportation ¾ Protruded rods ¾ Use red flags/lights
of rods by may hit the at the ends
trucks / persons ¾ Do not protrude the
trailers rods in front of or by
the side of driver’s
cabin.
¾ Do not extend the
rods 1/3rd of deck
length or 1.5 m
which is less
(D) WELDING ¾ Welding ¾ Radiation can ¾ Use specified
AND GAS radiates damage eyes and shielding devices
CUTTING invisible skin. and other PPE of
ultraviolet and correct specifications
infrared says ¾ Avoid throated
tungsten electrodes
for GTAW.
¾ Improper ¾ Explosion may ¾ Move out any leaking
placement of occur cylinder
oxygen and ¾ Keep cylinder in
acetylene vertical position
cylinders ¾ Use trolley for
transportation of
cylinders and chain
them
¾ Use flash back
arrestors
¾ Leakage / ¾ May cause fire ¾ Purge regulators
cuts in hoses immediately and
then turn off
¾ Never use grease or
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

oil on oxygen line
connections and
copper fittings on
acetylene lines
¾ Inspect regularly gas
carrying hoses
¾ Always use red hose
for acetylene & other
fuel gases and black
for oxygen.
¾ Opening-up of ¾ Cylinder may ¾ Always stand back
cylinder burst from the regulator
while opening the
cylinder
¾ Turn valve slowly to
avoid bursting
¾ Cover the lug
terminals to prevent
short circuiting.
¾ Welding of ¾ Explosion may ¾ Empty & purge them

tanks, occur before welding
container or ¾ Never attach the
pipes storing ground cable to
flammable tanks, container or
liquids pipe storing
flammable liquids
¾ Never use LPG for
gas cutting
(E) ¾ Ionizing ¾ Radiations may ¾ Ensure safety
RADIOGRAPHY Radiation react with the skin regulations as per
and can cause BARC/AERB before
cancer, skin commencement of
irritation, job.
dermatitis, etc. ¾ Cordon off the area
and install Radiation
warning symbols
¾ Restrict the entry of
unauthorized
persons
¾ Wear appropriate
PPE and film badges
issued by
BARC/AERB
¾ Transportation ¾ Same as above ¾ Never touch or
and Storage handle radiography
of source with hands
Radiography ¾ Store radiography
source source inside a pit in
an exclusive isolated
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

storage room with
lock and key
arrangement. The pit
should be approved
by BARC/AERB
¾ Radiography source
should never be
carried either in
passenger bus or in
a passenger
compartment of
trains.
¾ BARC/AERB have to
be informed before
source movement.
¾ Permission from
Director General of
Civil Aviation is
required for booking
radio isotopes with
airlines.
¾ Loss of Radio ¾ Same as above ¾ Try to locate with the
isotope help of Survey
Meter.
¾ Inform
BARC/AERB(*)
(*) Atomic Energy

Regulatory Board
(AERB), Bhabha
Atomic Research
Centre (BARC)
Anushaktinagar,
Mumbai – 400 094
(F) ELECTRICAL ¾ Short ¾ Can cause ¾ Use rubberized hand
INSTALLATION circuiting Electrocution or gloves and other
AND USAGE Fire PPE
¾ Don’t lay wires under
carpets, mats or
door ways.
¾ Allow only licensed
electricians to
perform on electrical
facilities
¾ Use one socket for
one appliance
¾ Ensure usage of only
fully insulated wires
or cables
¾ Don’t place bare wire
ends in a socket
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

¾ Ensure earthing of
machineries and
equipments
¾ Do not use damaged
cords and avoid
temporary
connections
¾ Use spark-
proof/flame proof
type field distribution
boxes.
¾ Do not allow
open/bare
connections
¾ Provide all
connections through
ELCB
¾ Protect electrical
cables / equipment’s
from water and
naked flames
¾ Check all
connections before
energizing.
¾ Overloading ¾ Bursting of ¾ Display voltage and
of Electrical system can occur current ratings
System which leads to fire prominently with
‘Danger’ signs.
¾ Ensure approved
cable size, voltage
grade and type.
¾ Switch off the
electrical utilities
when not in use.
¾ Do not allow
unauthorized
connections.
¾ Ensure proper grid
wise distribution of
Power.
¾ Improper ¾ Can cause ¾ Do not lay
laying of electrocution and unarmored cable
overhead and prove fatal directly on ground,
underground wall, roof of trees
transmission ¾ Maintain at least 3m
lines / cables distance from HT
cables
¾ All temporary cables
should be laid at
least 750 mm below
ground on 100 mm
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

fine sand overlying
by brick soling
¾ Provide proper
sleeves at crossings/
intersections
¾ Provide cable route
markers indicating
the type and depth of
cables at intervals
not exceeding 30m
and at the diversions
/ termination.
(G) FIRE ¾ Small fires ¾ Cause burn ¾ In case a fire breaks
PREVENTION can become injuries and may out, press fire alarm
AND big ones and prove fatal. system and shout
PROTECTION may spread to “Fire, Fire”
the ¾ Keep buckets full of
surrounding sand & water/fire
areas extinguishing
equipment near
hazardous locations
¾ Confine smoking to
‘Smoking Zones’
only
¾ Train people for
using specific type of
fire equipments
under different
classes of fire
¾ Keep fire doors/
shutters, passages
and exit doors
unobstructed
¾ Maintain good house
keeping and first-aid
boxes (for detail
refer Annex-2)
¾ Don’t obstruct
assess to Fire
extinguishers
¾ Do not use elevators
for evacuation during
fire
¾ Maintain lightening
arrestors for
elevated structures
¾ Stop all electrical
motors with internal
combustion.
¾ Move the vehicles
from dangerous
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

locations.
¾ Remove the load
hanging from the
crane booms.
¾ Remain out of the
danger areas.
¾ Improper ¾ It may not ¾ Ensure usage of
selection of extinguish the fire correct fire
Fire extinguisher meant
Extinguisher for the specified fire
(for details refer
Appendix-C)
¾ Do not attempt to
extinguish Oil and
electric fires with
water. Use foam
cylinders/CO2/sand
or earth.
¾ Improper ¾ Same as above ¾ Maintain safe

storage of distance of
highly flammable
inflammable substances from
substances source of ignition
¾ Restrict the
distribution of
flammable materials
to only min.
necessary amount
¾ Construct specifically
designed fuel
storage facilities
¾ Keep chemicals in
cool and dry place
away from hat.
Ensure adequate
ventilation
¾ Before welding
operation, remove or
shield the flammable
material properly
¾ Store flammable
materials in stable
racks, correctly
labeled preferably
with catchments
trays.
¾ Wipe off the spills
immediately
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

¾ Short ¾ Same as above ¾ Don’t lay wires under
circuiting of ¾ Can cause carpets, mats or
electrical Electrocution door ways
system ¾ Use one socket for
one appliance
¾ Use only fully
insulated wires or
cables
¾ Do not allow
open/bare
connections
¾ Provide all
connections through
ELCB
¾ Ensure earthing of
machineries and
equipments
(H) VEHICULAR ¾ Crossing the ¾ Personal injury ¾ Obey speed limits

MOVEMENT Speed Limits and traffic rules
(Rash driving) strictly
¾ Always expect the
unexpected and be a
defensive drive
¾ Use sat
belts/helmets
¾ Blow horn at
intersections and
during overtaking
operations.
¾ Maintain the vehicle
in good condition
¾ Do not overtake on
curves, bridges and
slopes
¾ Adverse ¾ Same as above ¾ Read the road ahead

weather and ride to the left
condition ¾ Keep the wind
screen and lights
clean
¾ Do not turn at speed
¾ Recognize the
hazard, understand
the defense and act
correctly in time.
¾ Consuming ¾ Same as above ¾ Alcohol and driving

alcohol before do not mix well.
and during he Either choose
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

driving alcohol or driving.
operation ¾ If you have a choice
between hitting a
fixed object or an
oncoming vehicle, hit
the fixed object
¾ Quit the steering at
once and become a
passenger.
Otherwise take
sufficient rest and
then drive.
¾ Do not force the
driver to drive fast
and round the clock
¾ Do not day dram
while driving
¾ Falling objects ¾ May prove fatal ¾ Ensure effective
/ Mechanical braking system,
failure adequate visibility for
the drives, reverse
warning alarm.
¾ Proper maintenance
of the vehicle as per
manufacturer
instructions
(I) PROOF ¾ Bursting of ¾ May cause injury ¾ Prepare test

TESTING piping and prove fatal procedure & obtain
(HYDROSTATIC/ ¾ Collapse of CONSULTANT/
PNEUMATIC tanks Owner’s approval
TESTING ¾ Tanks flying ¾ Provide separate
off gauge for
pressurizing pump
and
piping/equipment
¾ Check the calibration
status of all pressure
gauges, dead weight
testers and
temperature
recorders
¾ Take dial readings at
suitable defined
intervals and ensure
most of them fall
between 40-60% of
the gauge scale
range
¾ Provide safety relief
valve (set at
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

pressure slightly
higher than test
pressure) while
testing with
air/nitrogen
¾ Ensure necessary
precautions,
stepwise increase in
pressure, tightening
of bolts/ nuts,
grouting, etc. before
and during testing
¾ Keep the vents open
before opening any
valve while draining
out of water used for
hydro testing of
tanks
¾ Pneumatic testing
involves the hazard
of released energy
shored in
compressed gas.
Specific care must
therefore be taken to
minimize the chance
of brittle failure
during a pneumatic
leak test. Test
temperature is
important in this
regard and must be
considered when the
designer chooses
the material of
construction
¾ A pressure relief
device shall be
provided, having a
set pressure not
higher than the test
pressure plus the
lesser of 345 KPa
(50 psi) or 10% of he
test pressure. The
gas used as test
fluid, if not air, shall
be nonflammable
and nontoxic.
(J) WORKING AT ¾ Person can ¾ May sustain ¾ Provide guard
HEIGHTS fall down severe injuries or rails/barricade at the
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

prove fatal work place
¾ Use PPE like safety
belts, full body
harness, life line,
helmets, safety
shoes, etc.
¾ Obtain a permit
before starting the
work at height above
3 meters
¾ Fall arrest systems
like safety nets, etc.
must be installed
¾ Provide adequate
working space (min.
0.6 m)
¾ Tie/weld working
platform with fixed
support
¾ Use roof top walk
ladder while working
on a slopping roofs
¾ Avoid movement on
beams
¾ May hit the scrap / ¾ Keep the work place
material stacked neat and clean
at the ground or in ¾ Remove the scrap
between immediately
¾ Material can ¾ May hit the ¾ Same as above plus

fall down workers working ¾ Do not throw or drop
at lower levels material or
and prove fatal. equipment from
height
¾ All tools to be carried
in a toolkit bags or
on working uniform
¾ Remove scrap from
the planks
¾ Ensure wearing of
helmet by the
workers at low level
(K) CONFINED ¾ Suffocation / ¾ Unconsciousness, ¾ Use respiratory
SPACES drowning death devices, if required
¾ Avoid over crowding
inside a confined
space
¾ Provide Exhaust
Fans for ventilation
¾ Do not wear loose
clothes, neck ties,
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

etc.
¾ Fulfill conditions of
the permit.
¾ Check for presence
of hydrocarbons, O2
level
¾ Obtain work permit
before entering a
confined space
¾ Ensure that the
connected piping of
the equipment which
is to be opened is
pressure free, fluid
has been drained,
vents are open and
piping is positively
isolated by a blind
flange
¾ Presence of ¾ Inhalation can ¾ Same as above plus
foul smell and pose threat to life. ¾ Check for
toxic hydrocarbon and
substances Aromatic
compounds before
entering a confined
space
¾ Depute one person
outside the confined
space for continuous
monitoring and for
extending help in
case of an
emergency
¾ Ignition / ¾ Person may ¾ Keep fire

flame can sustain burn extinguishers at a
cause fire injuries or hand distance
explosion may ¾ Remove surplus
occur material and scrap
immediately
¾ Do not smoke inside
a confined space
¾ Do not allow gas
cylinders inside a
confined space
¾ Use low voltage
(24V) lamps for
lighting
¾ Use tools with air
motors or electric
tools with max.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

voltage of 24V
¾ Remove all
equipments at the
end of the day
(L) HANDLING ¾ Failure of load ¾ Can cause ¾ Avoid standing under
AND LIFTING lifting and accident and the lifted load and
EQUPMENTS moving prove fatal within the operating
equipments radius of cranes
¾ Check periodically
oil, brakes, gears,
horns and tyre
pressure of all
moving machinery
¾ Check quality, size
and condition of all
chain pulley blocks,
slings, U-clamps, D-
shackles, wire ropes,
etc.
¾ Allow crane to move
only on hard, firm
and leveled ground
¾ Allow lifting slings as
short as possible
and check gunny
packings at the
friction points
¾ Do not allow crane to
tilt its boom while
moving
¾ Install Safe Load
Indicator
¾ Ensure certification
by applicable
authority.
¾ Overloading ¾ Can cause ¾ Safe lifting capacity

of lifting electrocution and of derricks and
equipments fire winches written on
them shall be got
verified.
¾ The max safe
working load shall be
marked on all lifting
equipments
¾ Check the weight of
columns and other
heavy items painted
on them and
accordingly decide
about the crane
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

capacity, boom and
angle of erection
¾ Allow only trained
operators and
riggers during crane
operation
¾ Overhead ¾ Can cause ¾ Do not allow boom

electrical electrocution and or other parts of
wires fire crane to come within
3 m reach of
overhead HT cables
¾ Hook and load being
lifted shall preferably
remain in full visibility
of crane operator.
(M) ¾ Person can ¾ Person may ¾ Provide guard rails

SCAFFOLDING, fall down sustain severe for working at height
FORMWORK AND injuries and prove ¾ Face ladder while
LADDERS fatal climbing and use
both hands
¾ Ladders shall extend
about 1m above
landing for easy
access and tying up
purpose
¾ Do not place ladders
against movable
objects and maintain
base at ¼ unit of the
working length of the
ladder
¾ Suspended scaffolds
shall not be less than
500 mm wide and
tied properly with
ropes
¾ No loose planks
shall be allowed
¾ Use PPE, like
helmets, safety
shoes, etc.
¾ Failure of ¾ Same as above ¾ Inspect visually all

scaffolding scaffolding materials
material for stability and
anchoring with
permanent
structures.
¾ Design scaffolding
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

for max. load
carrying capacity
¾ Scaffolding planks
shall not be less than
50x250 mm full
thickness lumber or
equivalent. These
shall be cleared or
secured and must
extend over the end
supports by at least
150mm and not
more that 300 mm
¾ Don’t overload the
scaffolds
¾ Do not splice short
ladders to make a
longer one. Vertical
ladders shall not
exceed 6m.
¾ Material can ¾ Persons working ¾ Remove excess

fall down at lower level gets material and scrap
injured. immediately
¾ Carry the tools in a
tool-kit bag only
¾ Provide safety nets
(N) STRUCTURAL ¾ Personal ¾ Can cause injury ¾ Do not take rest

WORKS negligence or casualty inside rooms built for
and danger of welding machines or
fall electrical distribution
system
¾ Avoid walking on
beams at height
¾ Wear helmet with
chin strap and safety
belts when working
at height
¾ Use hand gloves and
goggles during
grinding operations
¾ Cover or mark the
sharp and projected
edges
¾ Do not stand within
the operating radius
of cranes
¾ Lifting / ¾ Same as above ¾ Do not stand under

slipping of the lifted load
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

material ¾ Stack properly all the
materials. Avoid
slippage during
handling
¾ Control longer
pieces lifted up by
cranes from both
ends
¾ Remove loose
materials from height
¾ Ensure tightening of
all nuts and bolts
(O) PIPELINE ¾ Erection / ¾ Can cause injury ¾ Do not stand under
WORKS lowering the lifted Load
failure ¾ Do not allow any
person to come
within the radii of the
side boom handling
pipes
¾ Check the load
carrying capacity of
the lifting tools and
tackles
¾ Use safe Load
Indicators
¾ Use appropriate
PPEs
¾ Other ¾ Same as above ¾ Wear gum boots in

marshy areas
¾ Allow only one
person to perform
signaling operations
while lowering of
pipes
¾ Provide night caps
on pipes
¾ Provide end covers
on pipes for
stoppage of pigs
while
testing/cleaning
operations.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
FORMAT NO. : HSE-1, REV. 0
HSE CHECKLIST CUM COMPLIANCE REPORT (1/6)
Project: _________________________ Contractor :_______________________

Date: _________________________ Owner :________________________
Inspection By:___________________ Report No. :________________________
Frequency : Fortnightly Job No :_______________________
Note: write ‘NA’ wherever the item is not applicable
SL. ITEM YES NO REMARKS ACTION

NO.
1 HOUSEKEEPING
a) Waste containers provided and used
b) Sanitary facilities adequate and clean
c) Passageways and Walkways clear
d) General neatness of working areas
e) Others
2 PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
a) Goggles; Shields
b) Face protection
c) Hearing protection
d) Safety shoes
e) Hand protection
f) Respiratory Masks etc.
g) Safety Belts
h) Safety Helmet/Hard Hat
I) Others
3 EXCAVATIONS/OPENINGS
a) Openings properly covered or barricaded
b) Excavations shored
c) Excavations barricaded
d) Overnight lighting provided
e) Others
4 WELDING & GAS CUTTING
a) Gas cylinders chained upright
b) Cables and hoses not obstructing
c) Screens or shields used
d) Flammable materials protected
e) Fire extinguisher(s) accessible
f) Others
5 SCAFFOLDING
a) Fully decked platforms
b) Guard and intermediate rails in place
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

NO.
c) Toe boards in place
d) Adequate shoring
e) Adequate access
f) Others
6 LADDERS
a) Extension side rails 1m above
b) Top of landing
c) Properly secured
d) Angle + 70 from horizontal
e) Others
7 HOISTS, CRANES AND DERRICKS
a) Condition of cables and sheaves OK
b) Condition of slings, chains, hooks and eyes OK
c) Inspection and maintenance logs maintained
d) Outriggers used
e) Signs/barricades provided
f) Signals observed and understood
g) Qualified operators
h) Others
8 MACHINERY, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
a) Proper instruction
b) Safety devices
c) Proper cords
d) Inspection and maintenance
e) Others
9 VEHICLE AND TRAFFIC
a) Rules and regulations observed
b) Inspection and maintenance
c) Licensed drivers
d) Others
10 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
a) Emergency instructions posted
b) Fire extinguishers provided
c) Fire-aid equipment available
d) Secured against storm damage
e) General neatness
f) In accordance with electrical requirements
g) Others
11 FIRE PREVENTION
a) Personnel instructed
b) Fire extinguishers checked
c) No smoking in Prohibited Areas
d) Hydrants Clear
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

NO.
e) Others
12 ELECTRICAL
a) Use of 3-core armoured cables
b) Usage of 'All insulated' or 'double insulated' electrical
tools
c) All electrical connection are routed through ELCB
d) Natural Earthing at the source of power (main DB)
e) Continuity and tightness of earth conductor
f) Covering of junction boxes, panels and other
energized wiring places
g) Ground fault circuit interrupters provided
h) Prevention of tripping hazards
i) Others
13 HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
a) Properly stored or stacked
b) Passageways clear
c) Others
14 FLAMMABLE GASES AND LIQUIDS
a) Containers clearly identified
b) Proper storage
c) Fire extinguishers nearby
d) Others
15 WORKING AT HEIGHT
a) Erection plan and work permit obtained
b) Safety nets
c) Full body harness and lanyards; chute lines
d) Health Check record available for workers going up?
e) Others
16 CONFINED SPACE
a) Work permit obtained
b) Test for toxic gas and sufficient availability of oxygen
conducted
c) At least one person outside the confined space for
monitoring deputed
d) Availability of sufficient means of entry, exit and
ventilation
e) Fire extinguishers and first-aid facility ensured
f) Lighting provision made by using 24V lamps
g) Proper usage of PPEs ensured
17 RADIOGRAPHY
a) Proper storage and handling of source as per BARC /
AREB guidelines
b) Working permit obtained
c) Cordoning of the area done
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

NO.
d) Use of appropriate PPE's ensured
e) Proper training to workers/supervisors imparted
f) Minimum occupancy of workplace ensured
18 HEALTH CHECKS
a) Workers medically examined and found to fit for
working :
i) At heights
ii) In confined space.
b) Availability of First-aid facilities
c) Proper sanitation at site, office and labour camps
d) Arrangement of medical facilities
e) Measures for dealing with illness
f) Availability of Portable drinking water for workmen &
staff
g) Provision of crèches for children
h) Stand by vehicle available for evacuation of injured.
19 ENVIRONMENT
a) Chemical and other effluents properly disposed
b) Cleaning liquid of pipes disposed off properly
c) Seawater used for hydro-testing disposed off as per
agreed procedure
d) Lubricant Waste/Engine oils properly disposed
e) Waste from Canteen, offices, sanitation etc. disposed
properly
f) Disposal of surplus earth, stripping materials, oily
rags and combustible materials done properly
g) Green belt protection
___________________
Signature of Resident
Engineer with Seal
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
ACCIDENT / INCIDENT REPORT

(To be submitted by Contractor after every Accident / Incident within 24 hours)
Report No:___________________
Date: _______________________
Name of Site:-_______________________
CONTRACTOR______________________
Type of Accident / Incident : Fatal Other Lost Time Non Loss Time First-Aid case
NAME OF THE INJURED………………………………………………………………………………

AGE ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….
FATHER’S NAME………………………………………………………………………………………..
SUB-CONTRACTOR M/S………………………………………………………………………………..
DATE & TIME OF ACCIDENT………………………………………………………………………….
LOCATION ………………………………………………………………………………………………
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF ACCIDENT
CAUSE OF ACCIDENT
NATURE OF INJURY/DAMAGE
MEDICAL AID PROVIDED/ACTIONS TAKEN
INTIMATION TO LOCAL AUTHORITIES (IF APPLICABLE)
DATE: SIGNATURE OF CONTRACTOR

WITH SEAL
To : OWNER………………………….. 1 COPY
: RCM/SITE-IN-CHARGE, MECON 3 COPIES
Divisional Head (Constn.) through RCM

Project Manager MECON, through RCM
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
SUPPLEMENTARY ACCIDENT / INCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT
Supplementary to Report No: _________(Copy enclosed)
Project:_____________________ Site:________________________
Name of Work :____________________ Date:_______________________
Contractor:______________________ Work Order / LOI No. :______________
NAME OF THE INJURED …………………………………………………………………………….

AGE : …………………………………………………………………………………...
SUB-CONTRACTOR M/S……………………………………………………………………………...
DATE & TIME OF ACCIDENT / INCIDENT ……………………………………………………………
LOCATION……………………………………………………………………………………………
BRIEF DESCRIPTION & CAUSE OF A ACCIDENT/ INCIDENT
NATURAL OF INJURY/DAMAGE
COMMENTS FROM MEDICAL PRACTITIONER WHO ATTENDED THE VICTIM/INJURED
SUGGESTED IMPROVEMENT IN THE WORKING CONDITION IF ANY
LOSS OF MANHOURS AND IMPACT ON SITE WORKS
ANY OTHER COMMENT BY SAFETY OFFICER.

WITH SEAL
To : OWNER………………………….. 1 COPY

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
NEAR MISS INCIDENT – SUGGESTED PROFORMA
Report No: ___________________

Name of Site :_____________________ Date :________________________
Name of Work :____________________ Contractor :_______________________
INCIDENT REPORTED BY :
DATE & TIME OF INCIDENT :
LOCATION :
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF INCIDENT
PROBABLE CAUSE OF INCIDENT
SUGGESTED CORRECTIVE ACTION
STEPS TAKEN TO AVOID RECURRENCE YES NO

WITH SEAL
To : OWNER………………………….. 1 COPY

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

MONTHLY HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) REPORT
(To be submitted by each Contractor)
Actual work start Date:________________ For the Month of:__________________

Project:_____________________________ Report No:_______________________
Name of the Contractor:________________ Status as on:_____________________
Name of Work:_______________________ Name of Safety officer:______________
ITEM UPTO THIS CUMU-

PREVIOUS MONTH LATIVE
MONTH
a) Average number of Staff & Workmen (average
daily headcount, not man days)
b) Manhours Worked
c) Number of HSE meeting organized at site
d) Number of HSE awareness programmes
conducted at site
e) Number of Lost Time Accidents Fatal
(LTA) Other LTA
f) Number of Loss time Injuries Fatalities
(LTI) Other LTI
g) Number of Loss Time Accidents
h) Number of First Aid Cases
i) Number of Near Miss Incidents
j) Man-days lost due to accidents
k) LTA Free Manhours i.e. Number of LTA free
manhours from the Lst LTA
l) Compensation cases raised with Insurance
m) Compensation case resolved and paid to
workmen
n) Whether workmen compensation policy taken Y/N
o) Whether workmen compensation policy valid Y/N
p) Whether workmen registered under ESI Act Y/N
Remark
DATE: Safety Officer /Resident Engineer

(Signature and Name)
To : OWNER
: RCM/, MECON (2 COPIES)
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
PERMIT FOR WORKING AT HEIGHT (ABOVE 2 METER)
Project Site : ……………………………………… Sr. No.: ………………………

Name of the work: ………………………………. Date: …………………………
Name of Contractor : …………………………….. Nature of Work : ……………
Total No.of Workers: …………………………….. Exact location of work : ……
Duration of work: from ..………. to …………
The following items have been checked and compliance shall be ensured during the
currency of the permit:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl. ITEM DONE NOT REQD.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. Equipment/Work Area inspected
2. Considered hazard from other routine/non-routine

operations and concerned person alerted
3. ELCB provided
4. Proper lighting provided
5. Area cordoned off.
6. Precautions against public traffic taken
7. Sound Scaffolding provided
8. Adequate protected Platform provided
9. Acces and Exit to the area

(Ladder properly fixed)
10. Floor Openings covered
11. Safety Net provided
12. Heath check of personnel
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A. Following personal protective equipment are provided ( mark) and used as relevant
Safety helmet/Gloves/Goggles/Shoes/Face Shield/Life Line/Safety Belt/Safety Harness.
B. This permit shall be available at the work site at all times.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
C. Permit shall be issued for maximum one week only (Monday to Sunday).
D. This permit shall be applicable in non-operational areas.
E. After completion of the work, used permits shall be preserved for record purposes.
F. Additional precautions, if any ………………………………………………………….
Permission is granted to work (See overleaf) = Yes/No
Name of Contractor’s Supervisor Name of Contractor’s Safety Officer

(Initiator) (Issuing Authority)
GRANT OF PERMIT AND EXTENSIONS
Issuing
Validity Verification
Work time Initiator Authority
Sl. Period by
From …..Hrs. (Supervisor of (Safety
No. From ……… CONSULTANT
To ……….Hrs. Contractor) Officer)
To ……… with date
of Contractor
Additional safety instructions, if any.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT
Project Site : ……………………………………… Sr. No.: ………………………

Name of the work: ………………………………. Date: …………………………
Name of Contractor : …………………………….. Nature of Work : ……………
Exact location of work : ………………………….
Safety Requirements : POSITIVE ISOLATION OF THE VESSEL IS MANDATORY
(A) Has the equipment been ?

Y NR Y NR Y NR
isolated from water flushed &/or radiation sources
power / steam / air steamed removed
isolated from liquid Manways open & Proper lighting
or gases ventilated provided
depressurized &/or cont. inset gas flow
drained arranged
blanked / blinded / adequately cooled
disconnected
(B) Expected Residual Hazards

Y NR Y NR Y NR
lack of O2 combustible gas / H2S / toxic gases
liquid
corrosive pyrophoric iron / electricity / static
chemicals scales
Heat / stream / high humidity ionizing radiation
frost
(C) Protective Measures

Y NR Y NR Y NR
gloves ear plug / muff goggles / face
shield
protective clothing dust / gas / air line personal gas alarm
mask
Grounded air attendant with rescue equipment /
educater / blower / SCBA / air mask team
AC
Fire fighting safety harness & communication
arrangements lifeline equipment
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
Authorization / Renewal (It is safe to enter the confirmed space)
Date No. of Name of Signature Time Signatur

Persons Persons e
Allowed allowed Contractor’s Contractor’s From To Workman
Supervisor Safety
Officer
Permit Closure :
(A) Entry was closed stopped will continue on
(B) Site left in a safe condition

Housekeeping done
(C) Multi lock removed key transferred

Ensured all men have come out Manways barricaded
Remarks, if any :
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
RADIATION WORK PERMIT
Project : Sr. No.:

Name of the work : Date:
Name of Contractor : Job No. :
Location of work :
Source Strength :
Cordoned distance (m) :
Name of Radiographing agency : Approved by Owner / MECON
The following items have been checked & compliance shall be ensured during currency of the
permit :
S. Item Description Done

No.
1. Safety regulations as per BARC/AERB ensured while source in use/ in transit &
during storage.
2. Area cordoned off.
3. Lighting arrangements for working during nights ensured.
4. Warning signs / flash lights installed.
5. Cold work permit taken (if applicable)
6. PPEs like film badges, dosimeters used.
Additional precautions, if any ______________________________________________________
(Radiography Agency’s BARC / AREB authorized Supervisor) (Contractor’s Safety Officer)
Permission is granted.
Permit is valid from _________ AM/PM ____________ Date to ________ AM/PM ____________
Date
(Signature of permit issuing authority)
Name : Designation : Date :

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
Permit renewal :
Permit extended upto Additional precautions Sign of issuing authority

Date Time required, if any. with date
Work completed / stopped / area cleared at ____________ Hrs. of Date _______________
(Sign of permit issuing authority)

Name :
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
RADIATION WORK PERMIT
Project : Sr. No.:

Name of the work : Date:
Name of Contractor : Job No. :
Name of Contractor :
Line No. / Equipment No. /Structure to be dismantled :
Location details of dismantling / demolition with sketch : (Clearly indicate the area)
The following items have been checked & compliance shall be ensured during currency of the
permit :
S. Item Description Done Not

No. Applicable
1. Services like power, gas supply, water, etc. disconnected.
2. Dismantling / Demolishing method reviewed & approved.
3. Usage of appropriate PPEs ensured.
4. Precautions taken for neighboring structures
5. First-Aid arrangements made
6. Fire fighting arrangements ensured
7. Precautions taken for blasting
(Contractor’s Supervisor) (Contractor’s Safety Officer)
Permission is granted.
(Permit issuing authority)

Name :
Date :
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)
Completion Report :
Dismantling / Demolishing is completed on __________ Date at __________ Hrs.
Materials / debris transported to identified location
Tagging completed (as applicable)
Services like power, gas supply, water, etc. restored
(Permit issuing authority)

SPECIFICATION
FOR
QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEMS
REQUIREMENTS

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
C:\Documents and Settings\hcl\Desktop\Specs\WORKS\66 quality assurance system\Specification - Quality Assurance Plan - Reqd. - 66.doc
NEW DELHI
TITLE QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEMS SPECIFICATION NO. PAGE 1 OF 9

REQUIREMENTS MEC/S/05/62/66 REVISION 0
CONTENTS
Sl.No. Description Page No.
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1
2.0 DEFINITIONS 1-2
3.0 CONTRACTORS SCOPE OF WORK 2-4
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 4-7
ATTACHMENTS
TITLE NUMBER
FORMAT FOR QUALITY PLAN FORMAT 00001
FORMAT FOR OBSERVATION ON FORMAT 00002
NEW DELHI

1.0 INTRODUCTION
This specification establishes the Quality Assurance Requirements to be met by

the sub-contractors (including turnkey Contractors) and their sub-vendors.
In case of any conflict between this specification and other provisions of the
contract/ purchase order, the same shall be brought to the notice of MECON,
at the stage of bidding and shall be resolved with MECON, prior to the
placement of order.
2.0 DEFINITION
Bidder
For the purpose of this specification, the word “Bidder” means the person(s),
firm, company or organisation who is under the process of being contracted by
MECON/ Owner for delivery of some products (including service). The word is
considered synonymous to supplier, contractor or vendor.
Correction
Action taken to eliminate the detected non-conformity.
Refers to repair, rework or adjustment and relates to the disposition of an

existing non-conformity.
Corrective Action
Action taken to eliminate the causes of an existing non-conformity, defect or

other undesirable situation in order to prevent recurrence.
Preventive Action
Action taken to eliminate the causes of a potential non-conformity, defect or

other undesirable situation in order to prevent its recurrence.
Process
Set of inter-related resources and activities which transform inputs into

outputs.
NEW DELHI

Special Process
Processes requiring pre-qualification of their process capability.
3.0 CONTRACTORS SCOPE OF WORK
3.1 Prior to award of contract
The bidder shall understand scope of work, drawings, specifications and

standards etc., attached to the tender/ enquiry document, before he makes an
offer.
The bidder shall submit milestone chart showing the time required for each
milestone activity and linkages between different milestone activities alongwith
overall time period required to complete the entire scope of work.
The bidder shall develop and submit manpower and resource deployment
chart.
The bidder shall submit, alongwith the bid, a manual or equivalent document
describing/ indicating/ addressing various control/ check points for the purpose
of quality assurance and the responsibilities of various functions responsible
for quality assurance.
3.2 After the award of contract
The bidder shall submit the schedule for submission of following documents in
the kick-off meeting or within two weeks of the placement of order, whichever
is earlier.
• Detailed Bar Chart

• Quality plan for all activities, required to be done by the bidder, to
accomplish offered scope of work.
• Inspection and test plans, covering various control aspects.
• Job procedures as required by MECON/ Owner.
• Procurement schedule for items to be supplied by contractor covering
inspection of the same.
Various documents submitted by the bidder shall be finalised in consultation

with MECON. Here it shall be presumed that ones a bidder has made an offer,
he has understood the requirements given in this specification and agrees to
NEW DELHI

comply with them in totality unless otherwise categorically so indicated during

pre-award stage through agreed deviation/ exception request. All Quality
Assurance Plan (QAP) documents shall be reviewed by concerned functional
groups of MECON and the bidder shall be required to incorporate all comments
within the framework of this specification at this stage of the contract. It is
also obligatory on the part of the bidder that obtains approval on every Quality
Assurance Plan (QAP) documents, before he starts using a particular document
for delivery of contracted scope of work. Participation of MECON/ Owner in
review/ approval of quality plan/ QAP documents does not absolve the
contractor of his contractual obligations towards specified and intended use of
the product (or service) provided/ to be provided by him under the contract.
3.3 During job execution
During job execution, the bidder shall fully comply with all quality document
submitted and finalised/ agreed against the requirements of this specification.
Approval of MECON on all these documents shall be sought before start of
work.
Bidder shall produce sufficient quality records on controlled/ agreed forms

such that requirements given in this specification are objectively/
demonstrable.
Bidder shall facilitate MECON/ Owner during quality/ technical audits at his
works/ sites.
Bidder shall discharge all responsibilities towards enforcement of this

specification on all his sub-contractors for any part of the scope which is sub-
contracted.
4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
4.1 The bidder shall nominate an overall incharge of the contract titled as “Project
Manager” for the scope of work of agreed contract. The name of this person
shall be duly intimated to MECON including all subsequent changes, if any.
MECON shall correspond only with the project manager of the bidder on all
matters of the project. The project manager of the bidder shall be responsible
for co-ordination and management of activities with bidder’s organisation and
all sub-vendors appointed by the bidder.
NEW DELHI

After award of work, the bidder may review augmentation of manpower and
resources deployment chart (submitted earlier), detail it out, if so consented
by MECON/ Owner and resubmit the same as “issued for effective
implementation of the project”.
4.2 The bidder shall plan the contract scope of work on quality plan format such
that no major variation is expected during delivery of contract scope of work.
These quality plan shall be made on enclosed format complete in all respect.
The quality plan shall be assumed to be detailing bidder’s understanding and
planning for the contract/ offered scope of work. The bidder shall plan the
type of resources including various work methodology which he agrees to
utilize for delivery of contract scope of work.
4.3 The bidder is required to review the contract at all appropriate stages to
evaluate his capabilities with respect to timely and quality completion of all
activities pertaining to contracted scope of work and shall report for
constraints, if any to MECON/ Owner.
4.4 The design activities, if any, performed during delivery of contract scope of
work shall be so controlled that the outputs is reliable enough. It is expected
that during development of design, the bidder shall take recourse to detailed
checking, inter departmental reviews and documented verification methods.
4.5 For all documents which the bidder is likely to utilise for delivery of contract
scope of work, a system must exist which assures that latest/ required
version(s) of the document(s) is available at all location/ point of use.
4.6 In case the bidder decides to sub-contract any part/ full of the contract scope
of work (without prejudice to main Contractual condition), the bidder shall :
• Evaluate the technical and financial capabilities and past performance of

the sub-contractor(s) and their products and/ or services before
awarding them with the sub-contracted scope of work. Selection of a
sub-contractor should meet MECON approval in documented form.
• Requirement of this specification shall be enforced on sub-contracted

agency also. The bidder shall choose sub-contractor based on their
capability to meet requirements of this specification also.
NEW DELHI

Note: It may so happen that, in a given situation, a sub-contractor may not

have a system meeting the requirements of this specification. In all
such eventualities, bidder may lend his system to sub-contractor for the
contract such that sub-contractor effectively meets the requirements of
this specification. In all such cases MECON shall be duly informed.
4.7 Bidder shall establish adequate methodology such that the materials supplied
by the Owner/ MECON shall be adequately preserved, handled and made use
of for the purpose for which they are provided.
4.8 All output delivered against contract scope of work shall be suitably identified
in such a manner that either through identification or some other means,
sufficient traceability is maintained which permits effective resolution of any
problem reported in the outputs.
4.9 Critical activities shall be identified and the bidder is required to have
documented methodologies which he is going to utilize for carrying out such
activities under the contract scope of work. Wherever it is difficult to fully
inspect or verify the output (special process), bidder shall pre-qualify, the
performers and methodologies.
4.10 All inspections carried out by the bidder’s surveillance/ inspection staff shall be
conformity to quality plans and/ or inspection and test plans. All inspection
results shall be duly documented on controlled/ agreed forms such that results
can be co-related to specific product, that was inspected/ tested.
4.11 All inspection, measuring & test equipments (IMTEs) shall be duly calibrated as
per National/ International standards/ codes and only calibrated and certified
IMTEs shall be utilized for delivery of contract scope of work.
4.12 All outputs/ products delivered against contract scope of work shall be duly
marked such that their inspection status is clearly evident during all stages/
period of the contract.
4.13 All non-conformities (NCs) found by the contractor’s inspection/ surveillance

staff shall be duly recorded, including their disposal action. The deficiencies
observed during stage of the product, shall be recorded and resolved suitably.
Effective corrective and preventive action shall be implemented by the bidder
for all repetitive NCs, including deficiencies.
NEW DELHI

4.14 All deficiencies noticed by MECON/ Owner representative(s) shall be recorded

on a controlled form (Format No. 00002). Such deficiencies shall be analysed
by the bidder and effective and appropriate correction, corrective and
preventive actions shall be implemented. Bidder shall intimate MECON/ Owner
of all such corrective and preventive action implemented by him.
4.15 Bidder shall establish appropriate methodologies for safe and effective
handling, storage, preservation of various materials/ inputs encountered
during delivery of contract scope of work.
4.16 Bidder shall prepare sufficient records for various processes carried out by him
for delivery of contract scope of work such that requirements of this
specification are objectively demonstrable. In case MECON/ Owner finds that
enough objective evidence/ recording is not available for any particular
process, bidder shall be obliged to make additional records so as to provide
sufficient objective evidence. The decision of MECON/ Owner shall be final
and binding on such issues.
4.17 The bidder shall arrange internal quality audits at quarterly intervals, to
independently assess the conformance by various performers to the
requirements of this specification. The findings of such assessment shall be
duly recorded and a copy shall be sent to MECON/ Owner for review.
4.18 For all special processes, bidder shall deploy only qualified performers.
Wherever MECON/ Owner observes any deficiency, the bidder shall arrange
the adequate training to the performer(s) before any further delivery of work.
NEW DELHI

OBSERVATION OF QUALITY ASPECTS
FORMAT - 00002
Job No. and Description No. :
Issued to : M/s Date :
Location of Work :
Item of Work :
Details of Observation(Deficiency) Recommended Course of Action
Time Allowed for Correction :
Issued by : _____________________________________
Name of Signature of RCM, MECON Site
Corrective Action taken report by Contractor/ Vendor :
Date : Name and Signature
Distribution (before resolution) :

Project Manager Chief Business Executive MECON Inspection Resident Construction
Owner MECON New Delhi Manager, MECON Site
Verification of Resolution by MECON :
Date : Name of Signature
Distribution (before resolution) :

Project Manager Chief Business Executive MECON Inspection Resident Construction
Owner MECON New Delhi Manager, MECON Site
FORMAT – 00001
Bidder’s Quality Plan Project Name : PO/ Contract Ref:
General Performing Functions Inspection Functions Audit Function
Activity Description Procedure Code of Performer Checker Reviewer/ Sampling Testing and Type of Audit Scope Owner’s/ MECON
Number Conformance Approver Plan Inspection (Approval) Review/ Audit
Code Surveillance Requirement
Note: 1) The bidder ensures that the filled up format conforms to minimum requirements on Quality Plan/ Quality Assurance, specified by MECON on drawings/ standards/ specifications/ write-up.
2) The bidder confirms that document is issued for information/ approval of Owner/ MECON for the project implementation
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
DOCUMENTATION FOR PIPELINE
CONSTRUCTION
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE DOCUMENTATION FOR MEC/S/05/21/69 REVISION : 0

PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 RECORDS
3.0 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND PIPE BOOK

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the minimum requirements of various records, reports and
drawings for all aspects of pipeline construction to be prepared by Contractor and
submitted to the Company at intervals as described in this specification and as
directed by Company.
1.2 All document required to prepared and submitted by Contractor as per this
specification shall be in addition to the various reports, records, methodology
statement, calculation, drawings etc. to be submitted by the Contractor for
Company’s record, review or approval as per the requirements of all other
specification included in the Contract between the Company and Contractor.
and document included in the Contract between Company and Contractor.
2.0 RECORDS
Contractor shall submit daily, weekly, monthly and after completion to the Company,
various records and reports for Company’s documentation purpose during and
immediately after the construction. This shall as minimum include, but not limited to
the following :
2.1 Daily
• Separate progress reports of all crews

• Daily welding results and repairs
• Actual weather conditions
• Application for deviations, if any
• Accidents
• Damages
• Activities required from Company
• Materials Receipts
• Urgently required materials
2.2 Weekly
• Up-to-date list of confirmed site instruction issued by Company

• Materials `taken over’
• Material defects and repairs
• Outstanding activities of Company
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
• List of installed markers, chainage

• Required approval from Company
• Progress planned
• Reports of manning of all crews, equipment and plant
• Report of equipment and plant
• Report of accidents
• Report of damages
• Report of acquired release, permits
• Priced variations
• Required materials for next month
2.3 Monthly
• Progress report for payment, safety report, report of accidents, security

report, health and environment report, material balance, approved deviations.
2.4 Further, Contractor shall supply (for approval if required to the Company with
document such as but not limited :
• Organogram for construction work.

• Bio-data of key personnel (including foremen).
• (Revised) list of address of personnel in particular of medical staff, safety and
security offers.
• (Revised) list of approved coaters.
• (Revised) list of approved sub-contractors.
• Time schedule.
• Acquired permits and/ or approvals from Authorities, if any.
• Minutes of meeting with Company with comments, if any.
• Material certificates, material receipt.
• Guarantee from vendors and sub-contractor.
• Calculations, temporary works, bouyance, blasting.
• Drawings issued by Contractor.
• Vendors drawings.
• As-built of route maps, alignment sheets, details drawings and isometric
drawings.
• Procedures such as surveying, stacking, fencing.
• Welding procedure qualification records, radiographic procedure qualification,
welder qualification.
• Coating procedure.
• Installation of crossings.
• Hydrostatic testing.
• Blasting.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
• Radiographic report alongwith original radiographs

• Pipe and welding book.
• Reports
- Material tests (coating, welding, painting)

- Computerised Potential Logging Test
- Water Samples
- Cleaning, Pigging Report before Hydrostatic Test
- Hydrostatic Test
- Calibration Test
- Blasting Trials
- Equipment certificate (dead weight tester, instruments, vessels,
equipment)
- Manuals
- Major water crossings
- Waste disposal
- Disposal of water after hydrostatic test.
2.5 Contractor shall submit to company colour photographs of various construction

activities/ operations at regular intervals. Size, number and frequency of the
photographs shall be mutually agreed upon at a later stage. Also Contractor shall
make video recordings of all operations right from the start of construction till the
completion of the work, covering to the extent as instructed by Company and submit
to Company. Upon completion of the work, Contractor and submit edited master
tape plus six copies of video recording in VHS formats or any format ordered by the
Company. The duration of video recording shall be of ½ hour and shall cover all
aspects of the job.
3.0 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND PIPE BOOK
3.1 General
Contractor shall prepare “as-built” drawings of all by or on behalf of Company issued

drawings and of all Contractor work drawings including vendor drawing, such as but
not limited to :
For Pipeline Section :
- Route Maps
- Alignment Sheets
- Detail Drawings (road, railway, minor water crossings, major water crossings,
valley crossings)
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
- Isometric drawings of installations

- Special installation
Further Contractor shall prepare a pipe Weld Book.
If required by the Company, Contractor shall update the diskettes for drawings
issued for construction of the job.
3.2 “As-Built” Drawings
Contractor shall prepare a complete set of “as-built” drawings. From the start of
construction, Contractor shall on daily basis process any changes in two sets of
drawings. Deleted parts shall be indicated in red, new parts in blue, remarks in
green and unchanged parts in yellow. Said drawings shall be kept at site and be
available to Company at all times. Contractor shall prepare “as-built” drawings
based on these data. On completion of the work, one revised film transparency of all
drawing made “as-built” by Contractor containing the “as-built” information shall be
handed over to Company as well as one complete set of CD ROM/ floppy diskettes
as specified by Company.
Contractor shall prepare and submit a specimen of the layout of the drawings for
Company’s approval.
The required measurement for “as-built” drawing shall be executed by Contractor by

experienced, qualified surveyors.
The surveyors shall daily take care of all measurement required such as but not
limited to:
- Horizontal location of pipeline with regard to deviations and Permanent Grid

Pillars.
- Vertical Level with regard to Mean Sea Level of pipeline and grade.
- Location and type of bends, fittings etc. and grades, points of intersection.
- Change of wall thickness, materials.
- Location and details of valves, insulating flanges, fencing.
- Location and details of crossing pipes, vents.
- Location and type of coating.
- Location and type of weighting, anchoring.
- Location and type of markers.
- Location of further appurtenance (Pig-Signallers)
- Location of ROU and of pipeline with respect to ROU.
- Type of soil.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
- Type of rock
- Type of blasting and ripping.
- Sand padding.
- Type of road pavement.
- Details of bank protection, number of insulators, seals.
Contractor shall also prepare isometric drawings of all installation (facilitates) etc. for
which the data as mentioned in or required for the Pipe and Welding Book can be
identified and these drawings can also be used for material accounting.
3.3 Nameplates of Equipment
All permanent equipment supplied and installed by Contractor shall be provided with
plates by Contractor. All texts shall be submitted to Company for approval before
plates may be manufactured.
3.4 Pipe Book
Every page of the pipe and Welding Book shall mention:
- Data relevant to the project and section there of.

- Sequential number.
- Length brought forward (for pipes and other materials).
- Length to bring forward (for pipes and other materials).
Alignment sheet number and atleast the location thereon of two welds on every page
of the pipe Book.
Further,
- Diameter of pipeline
- Length of each pipe
- Wall thickness
- Pipe number
- Heat number, certificate number
- Cut and re-numbered pipe ends
- Coating type
- Date of stringing
- Date of welding
- Weld number
- Welder number
- Direction of working
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
- Type of welding, electrodes, diameter of electrode etc.

- Heat treatment
- Equipment used for radiography
- Limits of water crossings
- Test pressure and date of test.
In order to achieve this, Contractor shall identify all pipe elements. Sample format of
Pipe Book shall be submitted for Company approval.
3.5 As-Built Documents
Contractor shall prepare all documents in the prescribed format as indicated below.
In addition to the hard copies, softcopies of final documents shall also be submitted
in electronic media i.e. CD / DVD format.
Software used for the preparation of these documents shall be as follows:
Type document Software

a) Reports/ Documents MS Office
b) Drawings Auto CAD
For the purpose of preparation of as-built drawings, Contractor shall update the
“Issued for construction” drawings issued by the Company. It shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility to covert the drawings furnished by the Company in hard
copy into CAD drawings including scanning, digitising and converting the drawings
into a suitable format compatible with the AutoCAD and above. As-built drawings
shall be prepared only on AutoCAD drawings.
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
FIELD JOINT COATINGS OF PIPELINE
FOR HDD CROSSING

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 01 - 01
2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 01 - 02
3.0 SPECIFICATION FOR FIELD JOINT COATING MATERIAL 02 - 07
4.0 APPLICATION PROCEDURE 08 - 11
5.0 INSPECTION 11 - 12
6.0 TESTING 12 - 12
7.0 REPAIR OF FIELD JOINT COATING 13 - 13
8.0 REPAIR OF PIPE COATING DEFECTS 14 - 14
9.0 DOCUMENT 14 - 14

1.0 SCOPE
1.1 General
This specification covers the minimum requirement for application of anti-

corrosion field joints coating on welded pipe section and field tie-in joints
referred to here in after as Joint(s). The contractor shall perform all work in
accordance with this specification, latest pipeline coating practices and to
the full satisfaction of the Owner. The anti-corrosion pipe joint coating shall
be compatible with yard applied, Ultra Violet (UV) radiation protected, 3
layer side extruded polyethylene coating conforming to DIN-30670. The
sleeve width shall be suitable for cut back of 120 ± 20 mm to be left at
both the ends of coated pipes. The job includes supply of all materials
equipment, consumables, labour, supervision, quality control, inspection
repairs.
1.2 Manpower, Material & Equipment
1.2.1 The Contractor shall supply wrap around heat shrinkable sleeves which is
composed of two parts such as adhesive coated wrap around and a
curable modified epoxy primer alongwith applicator pads.
1.2.2 The supply of wrap around heat shrinkable sleeve shall be under
Contractor’s scope.
1.2.3 The Contractor shall provide all skilled/ unskilled personnel required for
execution of this work.
1.2.4 The joint coating operation starting from cleaning and surface preparation
till application of joint coating and wrapping of the pipe joints shall be
performed under the supervision of skilled personnel who are well versed
in the work.
1.2.5 Contractor shall at his own cost provide a fully equipped laboratory and
test facilities with adequate inventory to carry out tests required for
procedure qualification and during regular production, for testing of joint
coating system.
2.1 Provision of the following documents/ codes shall generally be followed for
standard of specification and workmanship.
a) DIN – 30672 : Corrosion protection tapes and Heat Shrinkable

Sleeves.
C:\Documents and Settings\hcl\Desktop\Specs\WORKS\74 field joint for HDD crossing\074 - Field Joint Coating for HDD Crossing.doc Page 1 of 14
b) SIS – 055900 : Pictorial surface preparation standard for painting
steel surfaces.
c) SSPC – SP1 : Steel structure painting council – Solvent Cleaning.
2.2 In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and that
of above referred documents/ codes, the requirements of this
specifications shall govern.
3.0 SPECIFICATION FOR FIELD JOINT COATING MATERIAL
3.1 General
This scope covers the minimum requirement of materials, equipment

required for installation of field joint coating by wraparound fibre-
reinforcement heat-shrinkable sleeve used for corrosion protection and
sealing of field joints in pipelines that are forced through the soil by
Horizontal Directional Drilling technique. The sleeves shall be suitable for
3LPE/FBE coated pipes operating up to 60°C continuously.
3.1.1 Each Joint Coating System shall consist of :
a) A wraparound heat shrinkable sleeve reinforced with fibre-glass.

The sleeve shall be coated with a higher- shear- strength
thermoplastic hot-melt adhesive.
b) A solvent-free, two component liquid epoxy primer
c) A specifically designed wear cone
d) A clamping belt
3.1.2 Sleeve Backing
The heat shrinkable sleeves shall be manufactured from minimum 1.0 mm

thick radiation cross linked, thermally stabilized, UV -resistant heat-
shrinkable fabric, composed of a fibre glass reinforcement and polyolefin
fibres, embedded in a polyolefin matrix.
3.1.3 Sleeve Adhesive
The inner surface of the sleeves shall be coated with a controlled

thickness of minimum 1mm of adhesive which in combination with the
modified epoxy primer, will bond to and seal to the steel pipe and common
yard applied medium temperature yard coatings.
3.1.4 Epoxy Primer
The Epoxy primer shall be a solvent free, modified two components liquid
epoxy type primer, which is applied to cleaned and dry steel surface.
When the sleeve coatings, comes in contact with the liquid primer during
installation, a strong bond is formed upon full curing of the system.
3.2 Properties of Field Joint Coating Material
The pipe sleeves furnished under this specification shall be tested and
shall meet the requirements specified in the table below:-
3.2.1 Heat-Shrinkable Sleeve Material
Property Test Condition Requirement

Method
Cold Crack ISO 4675 Below 40°C
Chemical ISO 175 168 hrs. immersion on either
resistance 0.1 N
NaCl @ 23°C, 0.1N H2 SO4 @
23°C, 0.1 N NaOH @ 23°C,

Fuel oil @ 23°C. Petroleum jelly
@ 70°C
Followed by test for ISO 3303 23°C 1100 N Min.
bursting strength
Thermal ageing ISO 188 150°C 168 hrs. 1700 N Min.
Followed by test for ISO 3303 23°C

bursting strength
3.2.2 Adhesive material

Method
Softening point ASTM E28 85°C minimum
Peel Strength DIN 30672 23°C. CHS* 200 N/cm minimum

100 mm/ min.
60°C 60 N/ cm
Method
Peel Strength DIN 30672 23°C. CHS* 200 N/cm minimum
After immersion for 4 weeks 100 mm/ min.
at 23°C~NaOH pH12 H2SO4
pH2 ground water solution:-
1.2% H3PO4
1.6% KOH
1.2NaCl
1.0% Fe2O3
Peel Strength after DIN 30672 23°C. CHS* 60 N/cm minimum
conditioning for 30 100 mm/ min.
cycles from -30°C to 60°C
Shear strength ISO 4587 23°C. CHS* 200 N/cm2 minimum

50 mm/ min.
Corrosive effect ASTM D 120°C. No corrosion
2671 16 hrs.
3.2.3 Primer Material

Property Test Method Condition Requirement
Density ASTM D1084 23 +/- 0.50 C Part A: 60+/- 30 Pas

Part A: 2 rpm, spindle #6 Part B: 1.55+/-0.55 Pas
Part B: 20rpm, spindle #3
Mixing ratio By weight 23°C 100:40

By volume 100:60
Shear strength ISO 4587 23°C. CHS* 1000 N/cm2 minimum
50 mm/ min.
* CHS = Cross Head Speed
3.2.4 Functional Properties

Sl. Property Test Method Condition Requirement
No.
a) Impact DIN 30672 23°C. No holidays when tested
resistance Class C at 20 KV
b) Penetration DIN 30672 60°C. Minimum 70% of original
resistance Class C resistance thickness left;
no holidays when tested
at 20 KV
c) Specific coating DIN 30672 23°C. 108 Ohm sq. m minimum;
resistance no oxidation on pipe
surface
d) Cathodic ASTM G42 60°C. 15 mm increase in radius
disbondment 30 days of disbondment max.
resistance
e) Resistance to TEST METHOD- No cut propagation
split 1*
propagation
No.
f) Resistance to TEST METHOD- 50 KN minimum
circumferential 2*
edge loading
g) Resistance to TEST METHOD- 6 KN minimum
local edge 3*
loading (chisel
test)
*Test Methods
3.3 Test Methods
3.3.1 Resistance to split propagation (Test Method -1)
A rectangular piece of 50mm width by 150 mm length shall be cut from the
material as delivered. A 5mm long, clean cut shall be made mid-way in the
piece along once of the long edges perpendicular to this edge. The
sample shall be mounted on a clamp that holds it securely and avoids any
shrinking during testing.
The assembly shall be placed in an air-circulating oven present at 1700C.
After 15 minutes, the sample shall be removed from the oven, allowed to
cool down to room temperature and examined for cut propagation.
This test simulates the unlikely event when the sleeve gets cut during the
installation phase. Sleeves based upon extruded polyelfin show a distinct
tendency to propagate the cut along the total width of the sleeve. Sleeves
suitable for HDD works shall not exhibit this behaviour.
3.3.2 Resistance to circumferential edge loading (Test method -2)
The sleeve shall be installed on a DN 200 three -layer PE coated steel

pipe piece. A thick wall steel ring that fits a DN 200 three-layer PE coated
steel pipe with a tolerance of 0.2+-0.2 mm shall be positioned against the
front edge of the wear cone sleeve and then pushed towards the sleeve
system at a constant speed of 5 mm/ min over a distance of 50 mm. The
forces necessary shall continuously be registered. The minimum required
force shall be less than 50 KN.
During the pushing or pulling operation, any obstacle protruding from the
smooth pipe surface is loaded by the surrounding soil that passes by. This
test simulates the shear forces that are exerted on to the sleeve by rigid
soil type.
3.3.3 Resistance to local edge loading (Chisel test: Test Method -3)
The sleeve shall be installed on a DN 200 three-layer-PE coated steel
pipe piece.
A chisel as depicted in Figure -1 shall be positioned against the front

edge of the wear cone sleeve and, pushed parallel to the pipe surface
towards the sleeve system at a constant speed of 5mm/ min over a
distance of 50 mm. The forces necessary shall continuously be
registered. The minimum required force should not be less than 6 KN.
During the pushing or pulling operation, the pipe may traverse soil area
containing solid particles, such as stones, pebbles or crushed rock. These
particles tend to rip away the pipe coating locally. Any obstacle protruding
from the smooth pipe surface is lifted, leading to soil undercutting. This
test determines the resistance of sleeve against this type of abuse.
I5mm
35mm
View AA
Figure- 1 Chisel
3.4 Qualification for Contractor’s supplied Materials and their
Manufacturer
3.4.1 Prior to procurement of coating materials, Contractor shall furnish the

following information for qualification of the Manufacturer and material:
a. Complete descriptive technical catalogs describing the materials

offered along with samples of corrosion coating materials, its
properties and application instruction as applicable specifically to
the project.
b. Reference list of previous supplies, in last 5 years, of the similar

material or manufacturer shall be notified to Company, whose
approval in writing of all charges shall be obtained before the
materials are manufactured.
3.4.2 Contractor shall ensure that the coating materials supplied by him are
properly packed and clearly marked with the following :-
- Material Qualification Certificate Number
- Batch Number
- Date of Manufacturing and date of expiry
3.4.3 Prior to shipment of materials from the Manufacturer’s Works. Contractor

shall furnish the following documents:
a. Test certificate/results as per Manufacturer’s Quality Control

Procedure for each batch of materials complying with the
requirements of relevant sub-clauses of clause no. 3.2 of the this
specification.
b. Specific application instructions with pictorial illustrations.
c. Specific storage and handling instructions.
3.4.4 All documents shall be in English language only.
3.5 Storage of Materials
Material shall be stored in sheltered storage by the Contractor in the

manufacturer’s original packing and away from direct sunlight and in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
4.1 General
a) The application procedure shall be in accordance with

manufacturer’s instruction and the minimum requirements required
below whichever are the most stringent and shall be demonstrated
to and approved by the Owner.
b) Contractor shall provide and maintain mobile facilities which

contains all necessary tools, propane torches, epoxy primer pumps,
silicon rollers, testing instruments, equipment, and spares for
cleaning, coating, repairs, inspection and testing.
c) Contractor shall furnish sufficient number of the following

equipment and the required spares as a minimum for inspection
and testing purpose for each crew :
- Fully automatic full circle adjustable holiday detector with

audio and visual output signal for inspection of coating.
- Portable Tensile Strength Tester
- Digital Thermometer
- Solid state digital thickness gauge for measuring thickness
of joint coating.
4.2 Pipe Surface Preparation
a) The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and dry the joint surface by
power tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP1. The complete
procedure and details of equipment used shall be prepared by the
Contractor for Owner’s approval prior to commencement of joint
coating work.
b) Prior to cleaning operation, Contractor shall visually examine the

joint surface area and shall ensure that all defects, flats and other
damages have been repaired or removed.
c) Where oil, grease or other materials detrimental to the finished

coating is present, it shall be removed with a continuous removal
solvents cleaning system to remove completely all such materials in
accordance with SSPC-SP1.
d) The standard of finish for cleaned pipe surface shall conform to SA

2½ of Swedish Standard SIS-055900 latest edition. The degree of
preparation required to obtain an end product that fulfil the
requirements of this specification may not be sufficiently covered
and is not limited by SIS-055900. Surface of pipe after shot blasting
shall be have an anchor pattern of 50 to 70 microns. This shall be
measured by a suitable instrument such as Elecometer.
e) Piper temperature immediately prior to blasting shall be minimum

20°C. At no time shall be blast cleaning be performed when the
relative humidity exceeds 85%. Surface temperature must be at
least 3°C above the dew point temperature.
f) The abrasive blast material shall be free of impurities and

inclusions, water and oil. All abrasives shall be removed after blast
by brush or vacuum type cleaner prior to applying joint coating.
The abrasive shall be stored in a dry condition and maintained dry
during use.
g) The compressed air for blasting shall be free of water and oil.
Contractor to verify air cleanliness at the start of the work and every
four hours thereafter. Separators and the traps shall be provided at
the compressor and blasting station. Separators and traps shall be
checked daily for effective moisture and oil removal during coating
operations.
h) The ends of existing line pipe protective coating shall be inspected

and chamfered. Unbonded portions of the coating shall be
removed and then suitably trimmed. Portions where parent coating
is removed shall be thoroughly cleaned as specified.
i) Pipe shall be visually inspected by Contractor immediately after

blast cleaning for surface defects such as slivers, laminations,
leafing, scores, indentation slugs or any other defects considered
injurious to the coating integrity. Such defects shall be reported to
Owner and on permission from Owner, such defects shall be
removed by filling or grinding in such a way as not to “blue” the
steel.
4.3 Procedure
a) The application procedure shall be in accordance with

manufacturers instruction and the minimum requirements specified
below whichever are the most stringent and shall be demonstrated
to and approved by the owner.
b) Applicators for coating application shall be given necessary

instructions and training before start of work by the
CONTRACTOR. To verify and qualify the application procedures,
all coating applied during the qualification test, shall be removed for
destructive testing until the requirements stated in sections
‘Inspection’ and ‘testing’ of this specification are met.
c) Prior to surface cleaning, the surface shall be completely dry. An

effective heating equipment which shall not give rise to deposits
shall be used. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to existing
coating.
d) All pipe joint surfaces shall be thoroughly examined before the

application of the coating in order to ensure that the surfaces are
free of oil, grease, rust, mud, earth or any other foreign matter.
e) Liquid epoxy primer shall be applied on the joints immediately after

the completion of heating operation.
f) The heat shrink sleeve is then wraparound the joint while the primer
is still wet and shall overlap the existing pipe coating by minimum
100 mm on each side.
g) The wraparound sleeve is shrunk on pipe joint with a propane torch

moved back and forth over the surface when heated above 125°C,
the sleeve shall shrink tightly around the substrate on to the wet-
primer. At the time of application of the primer, th pipe surface
temperature shall be at least 60°C at every point. To check this,
approved temperature indicators shall be used . temperature
indicating crayons shall not be used.
h) The wraparound sleeve shall be entirely wrapped around the pipe

positioning the closure patch off to one side of the pipe in 10m or 2
O’clock position, with edge of the undergoing layer facing upward
and an overlap of min. 100 mm.
i) Heat shrinking shall be procedure shall be applied to shrink the

sleeve in such a manner that all entrapped air is removed using
gloved hands and hand rollers. The complete shrinking of entire
sleeves shall be obtained without undue heating of existing pipe
coating and providing due bonding between pipe, sleeve and pipe
coating. A thermochrome paint shall be applied a an closure patch
to indicate that sufficient heat/ temperature has been obtained. The
joint coating shall have wear cone applied over the leading edge of
the sleeve and the clamping belt tightened over it.
j) Application of Wear Cone - The leading edge will be given an extra

wear cone. Start by heating the leading edge area of the main
sleeve to 700C. Wrap the leading edge sleeve over the transition
Mill coating. Ensure that the closure is placed away from the main
sleeve closure Shrink the leading edge sleeve.
k) Application of Metal Belt - The metal belt shall be applied over the
wear cone sleeve. The metal belt will be tightened using the
strapper tool supplied by the manufacturer.
l) Sufficient manpower working on opposite sides of each pipe joint

are required for installation of the sleeve.
m) The installed sleeve shall not be disturbed until the adhesive has
solidified.
5.0 INSPECTION
5.1 For wraparound coating, a visual inspection shall be carried out for the
following :
- Mastic extrusion on either ends of the sleeves shall be examined

- There shall be no sign of punctures or pinholes or bond failure.
The external appearance of the sleeves shall be smooth, free of
dimples, air entrapment or void formation.
- Weld bead profile shall be visible over the sleeves.
- The entire closure patch shall have changed colour uniformly.
5.2.1 The Holiday Detector used shall be checked and calibrated daily with an
accurate D.C. voltmeter. The detector electrode shall be in direct contact
with the surface of coating to be inspected.
5.2.2 The entire surface of the joint section shall be inspected by means of a full
circle Holiday Detector approved by OWNER set to DC Voltage of at least
25 kV for wraparound sleeves. Inspection of the heat shrink sleeve coating
shall be conducted only after the joint has cooled below + 50°C.
5.2.3 All the coated joints shall be subjected to Holiday Detection test.
5.2.4 An installed sleeve with more than two holiday shall be stripped and a new
one be installed.
6.0 TESTING
a) OWNER reserves the right to test one out of every 30 joint coating
subject to a minimum of 2 joints. CONTRACTOR shall provide all
assistance in removing and testing of field joint coatings. From
each test sleeve, one or more strips of size 25 mm x 200 mm shall
be cut one perpendicular to the pipe axis and slowly peeled off.
This test shall be conducted between either sleeve and metal or
sleeve and mill coating as per direction of Owner/ Engineer-in-
charge.
b) The required peel strength shall be 60 N/cm (min.) at 23°C. The

system shall fail only in the adhesive layer. No failure either in
adhesion to steel or adhesion to backing shall be permitted. The
adhesive layer that remains on the pipe surface shall be free of
voids resulting from air or gas inclusion.
c) If the sleeve taken away for test does not meet the requirement of
clause 6.0 (b), the adjacent two sleeves do not meet the
requirements of clause 6.0 (b) the field joint coating shall be
stopped until OWNER is satisfied with application methods.
d) For the test tensile strength, two parallel incisions spaced 1 CM.
Apart are made right down to the surface of the steel. A further
incision shall then be at right angles to the first angles to the first
two incisions. With the aid of a 1 cm. Wide knife the coating is lifted
over a length of about 2 cm. And clamped into the tensile tester,
where upon a uniform pull is exerted at an angle of 90 degree. The
tensile strength shall be more than a 2500psi.
e) Coating thickness shall be checked by non destructive method for

each field joint.
7.0 REPAIR OF FIELD JOINT COATING
7.1 If a field joint is detected to be unacceptable after inspection and testing

as per clause no. 6.0 of this specification. The CONTRACTOR shall , at
his own cost :
- determine the cause of the faulty results of the coatings.
- mobilise the services of expert of manufactures, if required.
- test to the complete satisfaction of the OWNER, already completed

field joint coatings.
- stop joint coating until remedial measures are taken against the
causes of such failures, to the complete satisfaction of the
OWNER.
7.2 CONTRACTOR shall replace all the joints coating found or expected to be
unacceptable as per clause no. 6.0 of this specification.
7.3 CONTRACTOR shall, at his own cost repair all areas where the coating
has been removed for testing by the OWNER or by the CONTRACTOR
to the complete satisfaction of the OWNER.
7.4 The upright edges of the damaged areas shall be chamfered, in addition
to the steel shall be free from rust, dirt, oil and grease. The coating around
the damaged area shall be roughened. After thorough mixing (in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer) the filler shall
be applied, to sufficient Thickness with the aid of stooping knife, whilst
observing ample overlap hardening. The material will require the approval
of OWNER.
7.5 After the coating work on welded joints and repairs to the coating have
been completed, The coating area as a whole shall be tested with spark-
tester before pull back/ lowering/jacking the pipeline.
7.6 Company shall be entitled to check the coating on buried pipelines or

parts of pipelines with equipment such as the “Pearson meter” and the
resistance meter. If the coating defects are established, the Contractor
shall be responsible for excavation at such points, repairing the coating,
spark testing and backfilling the excavations without extra charge.
8.0 REPAIR OF PIPE COATING DEFECTS
8.1 Any defect or damage in pipe coating observed till incorporation on

permanent works shall be rectified by the Contractor at his risk and cost.
However, for repair of damaged coating observed during taking over of
Owner supplied pipe, if any, shall be paid extra in accordance with the
relevant items of Schedule of Rates.
8.2 Field repair of coated pipes shall be carried out by using same type of
wraparound sleeves used for joint coating.
8.3 The repair procedure shall be same as specified herein above for
application of anti-corrosion field joint coating on welded pipe.
9.0 DOCUMENTATION
9.1 Prior to start the coating works at site Contractor shall furnish following
Owner/ Consultant’s approved documents in addition to that mentioned in
clause no. 3.4 of this specification.
- Procedure for field joint coating & their repair

- Procedure for repair of pipe line coating defects
- Procedure qualification record
- Inspection test plan
- Inspection format
9.2 Final submission of all documents after finish the work shall be as per
relevant specification & SCC enclosed with the tender or as per direction
of Engineer-in-charge.
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
FIELD JOINT COATINGS OF PIPELINE
FOR HDD CROSSING
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE FIELD JOINT COATINGS OF MEC/S/05/21/074 REVISION : 0

PIPELINE FOR HDD CROSSING
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
5.0 INSPECTION
6.0 TESTING
9.0 DOCUMENT
(Binita Brahma) (Sunil Kumar) (A.K. Johri) May 2009

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 General
This specification covers the minimum requirement for application of anti-corrosion

field joints coating on welded pipe section and field tie-in joints referred to here in
after as Joint(s). The contractor shall perform all work in accordance with this
specification, latest pipeline coating practices and to the full satisfaction of the
Owner. The anti-corrosion pipe joint coating shall be compatible with yard applied,
Ultra Violet (UV) radiation protected, 3 layer side extruded polyethylene coating
conforming to DIN-30670. The sleeve width shall be suitable for cut back of 120 ±
20 mm to be left at both the ends of coated pipes. The job includes supply of all
materials equipment, consumables, labour, supervision, quality control, inspection
repairs.
1.2 Manpower, Material & Equipment
1.2.1 The Contractor shall supply wrap around heat shrinkable sleeves which is composed
of two parts such as adhesive coated wrap around and a curable modified epoxy
primer alongwith applicator pads.
1.2.2 The supply of wrap around heat shrinkable sleeve shall be under Contractor’s scope.
1.2.3 The Contractor shall provide all skilled/ unskilled personnel required for execution of
this work.
1.2.4 The joint coating operation starting from cleaning and surface preparation till
application of joint coating and wrapping of the pipe joints shall be performed under
the supervision of skilled personnel who are well versed in the work.
1.2.5 Contractor shall at his own cost provide a fully equipped laboratory and test facilities
with adequate inventory to carry out tests required for procedure qualification and
during regular production, for testing of joint coating system.
2.1 Provision of the following documents/ codes shall generally be followed for standard
of specification and workmanship.
a) DIN – 30672 : Corrosion protection tapes and Heat Shrinkable Sleeves.
b) SIS – 055900 : Pictorial surface preparation standard for painting steel

surfaces.
c) SSPC – SP1 : Steel structure painting council – Solvent Cleaning.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
2.2 In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and that of above
referred documents/ codes, the requirements of this specifications shall govern.
3.1 General
This scope covers the minimum requirement of materials, equipment required for
installation of field joint coating by wraparound fibre-reinforcement heat-shrinkable
sleeve used for corrosion protection and sealing of field joints in pipelines that are
forced through the soil by Horizontal Directional Drilling technique. The sleeves shall
be suitable for 3LPE/FBE coated pipes operating up to 60°C continuously.
3.1.1 Each Joint Coating System shall consist of :
a) For HDD Joint Coating fiber glass reinforced heat shrinkable sleeve certified
to Stress class C60 type CANUSA-TBK or COVALENCE / DlRAX shall be
used. Directional drilling kit, multilayer sleeve system or equivalent to be
approved by Owner / Engineer.
b) Only coating material C-60 Class as per EN 12068 and DVGW certified
(wrapping tape and heat shrinkable material) will be accepted for all material
to be coated.
c) A solvent-free, two component liquid epoxy primer
d) A specifically designed wear cone
e) A clamping belt
3.1.2 Sleeve Backing
The heat shrinkable sleeves shall be manufactured from minimum 1.0 mm thick
radiation cross linked, thermally stabilized, UV -resistant heat-shrinkable fabric,
composed of a fibre glass reinforcement and polyolefin fibres, embedded in a
polyolefin matrix.
3.1.3 Sleeve Adhesive
The inner surface of the sleeves shall be coated with a controlled thickness of
minimum 1mm of adhesive which in combination with the modified epoxy primer, will
bond to and seal to the steel pipe and common yard applied medium temperature
yard coatings.
3.1.4 Epoxy Primer
The Epoxy primer shall be a solvent free, modified two components liquid epoxy type
primer, which is applied to cleaned and dry steel surface. When the sleeve coatings,
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
comes in contact with the liquid primer during installation, a strong bond is formed
upon full curing of the system.
3.2 Properties of Field Joint Coating Material
The pipe sleeves furnished under this specification shall be tested and shall meet the
requirements specified in the table below:-
3.2.1 Heat-Shrinkable Sleeve Material

Method
Cold Crack ISO 4675 Below 40°C
Chemical ISO 175 168 hrs. immersion on either
resistance 0.1 N
NaCl @ 23°C, 0.1N H2 SO4

@
23°C, 0.1 N NaOH @ 23°C,
Fuel oil @ 23°C. Petroleum
jelly @ 70°C
Followed by test ISO 3303 23°C 1100 N Min.
for bursting
strength
Thermal ageing ISO 188 150°C 168 hrs. 1700 N Min.
Followed by test ISO 3303 23°C

for bursting
strength
3.2.2 Adhesive material

Method
Softening point ASTM 85°C minimum
E28
Peel Strength DIN 23°C. CHS* 200 N/cm minimum
30672 100 mm/ min.
60°C 60 N/ cm
Peel Strength DIN 23°C. CHS* 200 N/cm minimum
After immersion for 4 30672 100 mm/ min.
weeks
at 23°C~NaOH pH12
H2SO4
pH2 ground water
solution:-
1.2% H3PO4
1.6% KOH
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1

Method
1.2NaCl
1.0% Fe2O3
Peel Strength after DIN 23°C. CHS* 60 N/cm minimum

conditioning for 30 30672 100 mm/ min.
cycles from -30°C to 60°C
Shear strength ISO 4587 23°C. CHS* 200 N/cm2
50 mm/ min. minimum
Corrosive effect ASTM D 120°C. No corrosion

2671 16 hrs.
3.2.3 Primer Material
Property Test Method Condition Requirement
Density ASTM 23 +/- 0.50 C Part A: 60+/- 30 Pas

D1084 Part A: 2 rpm, spindle Part B: 1.55+/-0.55
#6 Pas
Part B: 20rpm, spindle
#3
Mixing ratio By weight 23°C 100:40
By volume 100:60
Shear ISO 4587 23°C. CHS* 1000 N/cm2 minimum
strength 50 mm/ min.
* CHS = Cross Head Speed
3.2.4 Functional Properties

No.
a) Impact DIN 30672 23°C. No holidays when
resistance Class C tested at 20 KV
b) Penetration DIN 30672 60°C. Minimum 70% of
resistance Class C original resistance
thickness left; no
holidays when tested at
20 KV
c) Specific DIN 30672 23°C. 108 Ohm sq. m
coating minimum; no oxidation
resistance on pipe surface
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1

No.
d) Cathodic ASTM G42 60°C. 15 mm increase in
disbondment 30 days radius of disbondment
resistance max.
e) Resistance to TEST No cut propagation
split METHOD-1*
propagation
f) Resistance to TEST 50 KN minimum
circumferentia METHOD-2*
l edge loading
g) Resistance to TEST 6 KN minimum
local edge METHOD-3*
loading
(chisel test)
*Test Methods
3.3 Test Methods
3.3.1 Resistance to split propagation (Test Method -1)
A rectangular piece of 50mm width by 150 mm length shall be cut from the material
as delivered. A 5mm long, clean cut shall be made mid-way in the piece along once
of the long edges perpendicular to this edge. The sample shall be mounted on a
clamp that holds it securely and avoids any shrinking during testing.
The assembly shall be placed in an air-circulating oven present at 1700C.
After 15 minutes, the sample shall be removed from the oven, allowed to cool down
to room temperature and examined for cut propagation.
This test simulates the unlikely event when the sleeve gets cut during the installation
phase. Sleeves based upon extruded polyelfin show a distinct tendency to propagate
the cut along the total width of the sleeve. Sleeves suitable for HDD works shall not
exhibit this behaviour.
3.3.2 Resistance to circumferential edge loading (Test method -2)
The sleeve shall be installed on a DN 200 three -layer PE coated steel pipe piece. A
thick wall steel ring that fits a DN 200 three-layer PE coated steel pipe with a
tolerance of 0.2+-0.2 mm shall be positioned against the front edge of the wear cone
sleeve and then pushed towards the sleeve system at a constant speed of 5 mm/
min over a distance of 50 mm. The forces necessary shall continuously be
registered. The minimum required force shall be less than 50 KN.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
During the pushing or pulling operation, any obstacle protruding from the smooth
pipe surface is loaded by the surrounding soil that passes by. This test simulates the
shear forces that are exerted on to the sleeve by rigid soil type.
3.3.3 Resistance to local edge loading (Chisel test: Test Method -3)
The sleeve shall be installed on a DN 200 three-layer-PE coated steel pipe piece.
A chisel as depicted in Figure -1 shall be positioned against the front edge of the
wear cone sleeve and, pushed parallel to the pipe surface towards the sleeve
system at a constant speed of 5mm/ min over a distance of 50 mm. The forces
necessary shall continuously be registered. The minimum required force should not
be less than 6 KN.
During the pushing or pulling operation, the pipe may traverse soil area containing
solid particles, such as stones, pebbles or crushed rock. These particles tend to rip
away the pipe coating locally. Any obstacle protruding from the smooth pipe surface
is lifted, leading to soil undercutting. This test determines the resistance of sleeve
against this type of abuse.
35mm I5mm
View AA
Figure- 1 Chisel
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
3.4 Qualification for Contractor’s supplied Materials and their Manufacturer
3.4.1 Prior to procurement of coating materials, Contractor shall furnish the following
information for qualification of the Manufacturer and material:
a. Complete descriptive technical catalogs describing the materials offered

along with samples of corrosion coating materials, its properties and
application instruction as applicable specifically to the project.
b. Reference list of previous supplies, in last 5 years, of the similar material or

manufacturer shall be notified to Company, whose approval in writing of all
charges shall be obtained before the materials are manufactured.
3.4.2 Contractor shall ensure that the coating materials supplied by him are properly
packed and clearly marked with the following :-
- Material Qualification Certificate Number
- Batch Number
- Date of Manufacturing and date of expiry
3.4.3 Prior to shipment of materials from the Manufacturer’s Works. Contractor shall
furnish the following documents:
a. Test certificate/results as per Manufacturer’s Quality Control Procedure for

each batch of materials complying with the requirements of relevant sub-
clauses of clause no. 3.2 of the this specification.
b. Specific application instructions with pictorial illustrations.
c. Specific storage and handling instructions.
3.4.4 All documents shall be in English language only.
3.5 Storage of Materials
Material shall be stored in sheltered storage by the Contractor in the manufacturer’s

original packing and away from direct sunlight and in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
4.1 General
a) The application procedure shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

instruction and the minimum requirements required below whichever are the
most stringent and shall be demonstrated to and approved by the Owner.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
b) Contractor shall provide and maintain mobile facilities which contains all
necessary tools, propane torches, epoxy primer pumps, silicon rollers, testing
instruments, equipment, and spares for cleaning, coating, repairs, inspection
and testing.
c) Contractor shall furnish sufficient number of the following equipment and the
required spares as a minimum for inspection and testing purpose for each
crew :
- Fully automatic full circle adjustable holiday detector with audio and
visual output signal for inspection of coating.
- Portable Tensile Strength Tester
- Digital Thermometer
- Solid state digital thickness gauge for measuring thickness of joint
coating.
4.2 Pipe Surface Preparation
a) The Contractor shall thoroughly clean and dry the joint surface by power tool
cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP1. The complete procedure and details
of equipment used shall be prepared by the Contractor for Owner’s approval
prior to commencement of joint coating work.
b) Prior to cleaning operation, Contractor shall visually examine the joint surface
area and shall ensure that all defects, flats and other damages have been
repaired or removed.
c) Where oil, grease or other materials detrimental to the finished coating is

present, it shall be removed with a continuous removal solvents cleaning
system to remove completely all such materials in accordance with SSPC-
SP1.
d) The standard of finish for cleaned pipe surface shall conform to SA 2½ of

Swedish Standard SIS-055900 latest edition. The degree of preparation
required to obtain an end product that fulfil the requirements of this
specification may not be sufficiently covered and is not limited by SIS-
055900. Surface of pipe after shot blasting shall be have an anchor pattern of
50 to 70 microns. This shall be measured by a suitable instrument such as
Elecometer.
e) Piper temperature immediately prior to blasting shall be minimum 20°C. At

no time shall be blast cleaning be performed when the relative humidity
exceeds 85%. Surface temperature must be at least 3°C above the dew
point temperature.
f) The abrasive blast material shall be free of impurities and inclusions, water
and oil. All abrasives shall be removed after blast by brush or vacuum type
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
cleaner prior to applying joint coating. The abrasive shall be stored in a dry
condition and maintained dry during use.
g) The compressed air for blasting shall be free of water and oil. Contractor to
verify air cleanliness at the start of the work and every four hours thereafter.
Separators and the traps shall be provided at the compressor and blasting
station. Separators and traps shall be checked daily for effective moisture
and oil removal during coating operations.
h) The ends of existing line pipe protective coating shall be inspected and
chamfered. Unbonded portions of the coating shall be removed and then
suitably trimmed. Portions where parent coating is removed shall be
thoroughly cleaned as specified.
i) Pipe shall be visually inspected by Contractor immediately after blast cleaning

for surface defects such as slivers, laminations, leafing, scores, indentation
slugs or any other defects considered injurious to the coating integrity. Such
defects shall be reported to Owner and on permission from Owner, such
defects shall be removed by filling or grinding in such a way as not to “blue”
the steel.
4.3 Procedure
a) The application procedure shall be in accordance with manufacturers

instruction and the minimum requirements specified below whichever are the
most stringent and shall be demonstrated to and approved by the owner.
b) Applicators for coating application shall be given necessary instructions and

training before start of work by the CONTRACTOR. To verify and qualify the
application procedures, all coating applied during the qualification test, shall
be removed for destructive testing until the requirements stated in sections
‘Inspection’ and ‘testing’ of this specification are met.
c) Prior to surface cleaning, the surface shall be completely dry. An effective

heating equipment which shall not give rise to deposits shall be used. Care
shall be taken to avoid damage to existing coating.
d) All pipe joint surfaces shall be thoroughly examined before the application of
the coating in order to ensure that the surfaces are free of oil, grease, rust,
mud, earth or any other foreign matter.
e) Liquid epoxy primer shall be applied on the joints immediately after the
completion of heating operation.
f) The heat shrink sleeve is then wraparound the joint while the primer is still
wet and shall overlap the existing pipe coating by minimum 100 mm on each
side.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
g) The wraparound sleeve is shrunk on pipe joint with a propane torch moved
back and forth over the surface when heated above 125°C, the sleeve shall
shrink tightly around the substrate on to the wet-primer. At the time of
application of the primer, th pipe surface temperature shall be at least 60°C at
every point. To check this, approved temperature indicators shall be used .
temperature indicating crayons shall not be used.
h) The wraparound sleeve shall be entirely wrapped around the pipe positioning
the closure patch off to one side of the pipe in 10m or 2 O’clock position, with
edge of the undergoing layer facing upward and an overlap of min. 100 mm.
i) Heat shrinking shall be procedure shall be applied to shrink the sleeve in

such a manner that all entrapped air is removed using gloved hands and
hand rollers. The complete shrinking of entire sleeves shall be obtained
without undue heating of existing pipe coating and providing due bonding
between pipe, sleeve and pipe coating. A thermochrome paint shall be
applied a an closure patch to indicate that sufficient heat/ temperature has
been obtained. The joint coating shall have wear cone applied over the
leading edge of the sleeve and the clamping belt tightened over it.
j) Application of Wear Cone - The leading edge will be given an extra wear
cone. Start by heating the leading edge area of the main sleeve to 700C.
Wrap the leading edge sleeve over the transition Mill coating. Ensure that the
closure is placed away from the main sleeve closure Shrink the leading edge
sleeve.
k) Application of Metal Belt - The metal belt shall be applied over the wear cone
sleeve. The metal belt will be tightened using the strapper tool supplied by
the manufacturer.
l) Sufficient manpower working on opposite sides of each pipe joint are

required for installation of the sleeve.
m) The installed sleeve shall not be disturbed until the adhesive has solidified.
5.0 INSPECTION
5.1 For wraparound coating, a visual inspection shall be carried out for the following :
- Mastic extrusion on either ends of the sleeves shall be examined

- There shall be no sign of punctures or pinholes or bond failure. The external
appearance of the sleeves shall be smooth, free of dimples, air entrapment or
void formation.
- Weld bead profile shall be visible over the sleeves.
- The entire closure patch shall have changed colour uniformly.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
5.2.1 The Holiday Detector used shall be checked and calibrated daily with an accurate
D.C. voltmeter. The detector electrode shall be in direct contact with the surface of
coating to be inspected.
5.2.2 The entire surface of the joint section shall be inspected by means of a full circle
Holiday Detector approved by OWNER set to DC Voltage of at least 25 kV for
wraparound sleeves. Inspection of the heat shrink sleeve coating shall be conducted
only after the joint has cooled below + 50°C.
5.2.3 All the coated joints shall be subjected to Holiday Detection test.
5.2.4 An installed sleeve with more than two holiday shall be stripped and a new one be
installed.
6.0 TESTING
a) OWNER reserves the right to test one out of every 30 joint coating subject to
a minimum of 2 joints. CONTRACTOR shall provide all assistance in
removing and testing of field joint coatings. From each test sleeve, one or
more strips of size 25 mm x 200 mm shall be cut one perpendicular to the
pipe axis and slowly peeled off. This test shall be conducted between either
sleeve and metal or sleeve and mill coating as per direction of Owner/
Engineer-in-charge.
b) The required peel strength shall be 60 N/cm (min.) at 23°C. The system shall
fail only in the adhesive layer. No failure either in adhesion to steel or
adhesion to backing shall be permitted. The adhesive layer that remains on
the pipe surface shall be free of voids resulting from air or gas inclusion.
c) If the sleeve taken away for test does not meet the requirement of clause 6.0
(b), the adjacent two sleeves do not meet the requirements of clause 6.0 (b)
the field joint coating shall be stopped until OWNER is satisfied with
application methods.
d) For the test tensile strength, two parallel incisions spaced 1 CM. Apart are
made right down to the surface of the steel. A further incision shall then be at
right angles to the first angles to the first two incisions. With the aid of a 1 cm.
Wide knife the coating is lifted over a length of about 2 cm. And clamped into
the tensile tester, where upon a uniform pull is exerted at an angle of 90
degree. The tensile strength shall be more than a 2500psi.
e) Coating thickness shall be checked by non destructive method for each field
joint.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
7.1 If a field joint is detected to be unacceptable after inspection and testing as per
clause no. 6.0 of this specification. The CONTRACTOR shall , at his own cost :
- determine the cause of the faulty results of the coatings.
- mobilise the services of expert of manufactures, if required.
- test to the complete satisfaction of the OWNER, already completed field joint
coatings.
- stop joint coating until remedial measures are taken against the causes of
such failures, to the complete satisfaction of the OWNER.
7.2 CONTRACTOR shall replace all the joints coating found or expected to be
unacceptable as per clause no. 6.0 of this specification.
7.3 CONTRACTOR shall, at his own cost repair all areas where the coating has been
removed for testing by the OWNER or by the CONTRACTOR to the complete
satisfaction of the OWNER.
7.4 The upright edges of the damaged areas shall be chamfered, in addition to the steel
shall be free from rust, dirt, oil and grease. The coating around the damaged area
shall be roughened. After thorough mixing (in accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer) the filler shall be applied, to sufficient Thickness with the aid of
stooping knife, whilst observing ample overlap hardening. The material will require
the approval of OWNER.
7.5 After the coating work on welded joints and repairs to the coating have been
completed, The coating area as a whole shall be tested with spark-tester before pull
back/ lowering/jacking the pipeline.
7.6 Company shall be entitled to check the coating on buried pipelines or parts of
pipelines with equipment such as the “Pearson meter” and the resistance meter. If
the coating defects are established, the Contractor shall be responsible for
excavation at such points, repairing the coating, spark testing and backfilling the
excavations without extra charge.
8.1 Any defect or damage in pipe coating observed till incorporation on permanent works
shall be rectified by the Contractor at his risk and cost. However, for repair of
damaged coating observed during taking over of Owner supplied pipe, if any, shall
be paid extra in accordance with the relevant items of Schedule of Rates.
8.2 Field repair of coated pipes shall be carried out by using same type of wraparound
sleeves used for joint coating.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
8.3 The repair procedure shall be same as specified herein above for application of anti-
corrosion field joint coating on welded pipe.
9.0 DOCUMENTATION
9.1 Prior to start the coating works at site Contractor shall furnish following Owner/
Consultant’s approved documents in addition to that mentioned in clause no. 3.4 of
this specification.
- Procedure for field joint coating & their repair

- Procedure for repair of pipe line coating defects
- Procedure qualification record
- Inspection test plan
- Inspection format
9.2 Final submission of all documents after finish the work shall be as per relevant
specification & SCC enclosed with the tender or as per direction of Engineer-in-
charge.
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PIPELINE CROSSINGS USING HORIZONTAL
DIRECTIONAL DRILLING METHOD
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE PIPELINE CROSSINGS USING MEC/S/05/21/75 REVISION : 0

HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL
DRILLING METHOD EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE
3.0 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING
4.0 CONSTRUCTION
5.0 DOCUMENTATION

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Drawing Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the minimum requirements for various activities to be
carried out by the Contractor for the engineering and construction of pipeline
crossing using directional drilling method.
1.2 This specification shall be read in conjunction with the requirements of specification
and other documents included in the CONTRACT between owner and Contractor.
1.3 Contractor shall, execute the work in compliance with laws, by laws, ordinance and
regulations. Contractor shall provide all services, labour, inclusive of supervision
thereof, supply of all materials (excluding “Owner supplied Material), equipment ,
appliances etc..
1.4 Contractor shall take full responsibility for the stability and safety of all operation and
methods involved in the work.
1.5 Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the work area and its
surroundings and to have satisfied himself as far as practicable with the surface
conditions, hydrological and climatic conditions, the extent and nature of the work
and materials necessary for the completion of the work, and the means of access to
the work area.
1.6 Contractor shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information with regard
to risks, contingencies and all other circumstances, which may influence the work.
1.7 Contractor shall, in connection with the work, provide and maintain at his own costs
all lights, guards, fencing, as necessary or directed by Owner or their representative.
1.8 For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall hold.
- The words `Shall’ and `Must’ are mandatory.
- The words `Should, May and Will’ are non mandatory, advisory, or
recommendatory.
1.9 Contractor shall provide free of charge reasonable facilities to Owner’s personnel to
witness all stages of construction.
Reference has been made in this specification to the latest edition (edition enforce at
the time of issue of enquiry) of the following codes, standards and specifications :
a. ASME B 31.4 : Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquid

Hydrocarbons and Other Liquids.
b. ASME B 31.8 : Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

c. OISD 226 : Natural Gas Transmission Pipeline and City Gas

Distribution Network.
d. MECON’s Standards : Navigable Waterway Pipeline Crossing Warning Sign

MEC/S/05/21/10
e. MECON’s Standards : Standard Specification for Pipeline Construction

MEC/S/05/21/01
In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and the above
referred documents, the requirements of this specification shall govern.
3.0 DESIGN AND ENGINEERING
3.1 The limits of each crossing shall be determined by the Contractor on the basis of
crossing profile based on survey drawings, design, equipment, installation technique
and site condition. Contractor shall furnish all engineering design calculation and
crossing drawings etc. to owner for their approval prior to execution of the work.
3.2 Within the entire limits of crossing, the minimum cover to top of coated pipe shall be
as specified in the Special Conditions of Contract (SCC).
However, wherever the drilled length for a crossing includes the crossings of
obstacles such as roads, railroads, cannals, streams, etc. The following minimum
requirements of cover to the pipe shall be satisfied unless specified otherwise in the
scope of work in SCC.
For Road Crossing : 1.4 m from top of road to top of pipe.
For railroad crossing : 1.7 m from base of Rail to top of pipe.
For canal crossing : 1.5 m from lowest bed level to top of pipe.
In case the pipeline crosses other utilities, viz., other pipelines, sewers, drain pipes,
water mains, telephone conduits and other underground structures, the pipeline shall
be installed with at least 500 mm free clearance from the obstacle or as specified in
the drawing or such greater minimum distance as may be required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Also in all cases, the minimum covers specified above shall be
maintained within the entire limits of crossing.
3.3 The entry and exit points of the pipeline at ground level shall not come within the
limits of crossing as defined in the crossing drawings.
3.4 Contractor shall carry out calculations for determining the maximum permissible
overburden on pipe, to check that the empty pipeline is safe from collapse at any
point along the drilled crossing section. Contractor shall submit these calculations to
Owner for approval.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

3.5 Pipeline Axis
The plane containing the pipeline route axis shall be perpendicular to the horizontal
plane. There shall be no bending of the pipeline route axis at depths shall lower
than 2 meters below ground level.
3.6 Back-reamed hole and Pipeline Interface
3.6.1 Contractor shall derive combination of:
- Back-reamed hole diameter

- Bentonite density
- Pipeline submerged weight in bentonite (and means to achieve that weight)
to optimise the crossing design in terms of pipeline stresses and power requirement
3.6.2 Contractor shall indicated what maximum shear stress in the pipeline coating will
result from his choice of above parameters and other characteristics described in this
section.
3.6.3 Contractor shall furnish all calculations for Owner’s approval. If shear stress in pipe
coating is, in the opinion of Owner, beyond the permissible limits, Contractor shall
revise his choice of parameters to reduce shear stress on pipe coating to permissible
value.
3.7 Contractor shall determine in the minimum allowable elastic bend radius for pipe
from the following consideration:
3.7.1 Maximum Longitudinal Stress During Installation
Total maximum longitudinal stress in the pipeline due to tension and bending at any
location shall not exceed 90% of the SMYS of the pipe material.
Contractor shall, in order to check this requirement, evaluate the maximum tensile
forces to which the pipeline is subjected to at any phase of its installation during the
pulling operation.
3.7.2. Maximum Equivalent Stress During Final Hydrostatic Test
After installation, the pipeline shall be hydrostatically tested to a minimum test

pressure equal to 1.4 times the design pressure or at a pressure stipulated in the
Special Conditions of Contract whichever is higher. However, during hydrostatic
testing, the combined equivalent stress in the pipeline due to bending and test
pressure shall not exceed 90% of the SMYS of pipe material.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

3.7.3 Maximum Equivalent Stress During Service
Permissible values of maximum equivalent stress during services shall be governed

by the requirements of ANSI B 31.8/B 31.4 as applicable. The details of pipeline
operating parameters are provided in the Special Conditions of Contract.
3.7.4 The minimum allowable radius of curvature for the pipeline shall be the highest value
of the minimum pipeline elastic radius as computed from the considerations outlined
in clause 2.7.1 to 2.7.3 above after correction for drilling inaccuracies or
multiplication by the factor 1.85. whichever results in the highest permissible value
of minimum elastic bend radius.
3.7.5 Contractor shall submit all calculations for Company’s approval alongwith procedure.
3.8 Pipeline Configuration along the Support String Before Entry Point
3.8.1 Contractor shall determine the required pipeline configuration in order to allow
smooth pull in the crossing entry point and admissible stress in the supported
pipeline string. Pipeline combined stress shall not exceed 95% of the specified
minimum yield strength for line pipe material.
3.8.2 Contractor shall furnish all calculation and specify the number of required supports,
description of the supports, their co-ordinates and capacity in metric tons.
3.8.3 Contractor shall also furnish a drawing of the launching ramp indicating the pipeline
configuration.
3.8.4 The distance between each roller shall also be specified and justified.
3.9 Contractor shall, based on result of design and engineering carried out by him,
prepare construction drawings for the crossing and shall submit the same for
Owner’s approval. Construction drawings shall indicate the pipeline profile with levels
furnished at sufficient intervals for proper control during construction. Other relevant
details viz., entry and exit angles, radius of bends, etc. shall also be indicated.
Contractor shall also calculated the total length of pipeline required as well as the
maximum tension required on the pull head of the rig.
3.10 All construction works shall be carried out in accordance with the construction
drawings approved by Owner.
3.11 Before commencement of any field work, Contractor shall furnish for Owner’s
approval all design calculations and construction drawings as stipulated in the above
clauses.
4.0 CONSTRUCTION
Contractor shall comply with all the conditions and requirements issued by
Authorities having jurisdiction in the area where the work is to be performed.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

If no public road exists, Contractor shall arrange on his own for access to his work
area at no extra cost to owner.
4.1.0 Installation Procedure
4.1.1 Contractor shall, before commencing any work at site, submit for Owner’s approval a
detailed installation procedure.
4.1.2 The installation procedure as a minimum shall include the following:
a) Project Organisation Chart:
This shall indicate Contractor’s organisational set-up at site and manpower

deployment.
b) Details of fabrication yard and launching areas.
c) Details of Equipment :
Contractor shall furnish the complete list of all equipment to be deployed for
preparation of pipe string and installation of crossing. Technical
characteristics and capacity of each equipment including instrumentation,
monitoring and control equipment shall be furnished in details.
d) Pipeline string preparation details (hauling, stringing, welding etc.)
e) Hydrostatic test procedure (pre and post installation)
f) Disposal methodology of bentonite slurry.
g) Method of installation covering all steps of construction, viz. Rig up, Pilot
hole, Back-Reaming, Pulling Down, Backfilling etc.
h) Calculation for maximum pulling force on the rig and recommended

maximum pulling velocity.
i) Time schedule for construction.
4.1.3 The time schedule shall be in accordance with overall time schedule for the project.
4.1.4 Approval by Owner of the methods used by Contractor shall in no way relieve
Contractor from the sole responsibility for safe and satisfactory installation, working
and operational use of the pipeline crossing.
4.2 Pipe String Preparation
Complete pipe string shall be prepared as a single string for pulling. Welding,
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

radiographic inspection of joints and joint coating of the string shall be performed in
accordance with the respective applicable specifications included in the Contract
document.
4.3 Pre-testing
4.3.1 Contractor shall hydrostatically pre-test the complete pipe string of each crossing
before installation as per approved procedure for a minimum period of 24 hours.
4.3.2 After pre-testing, joint coating of the welds shall be done as per specification for
specific field joint coating of pipeline for HDD crossing included in the contract
document
4.3.3 The section of the pipeline corresponding to the crossing shall, before installation, be
subjected to hydrostatic test pressure as stipulated in the Special Conditions of
Contract. During the test, Contractor shall check all welds for leakage. Failure, if any,
during the test shall be rectified by the Contractor.
4.4 Gauging
4.4.1 Before pre and post installation hydrostatic testing, Contractor shall prove the
diameter of the pipeline by passing a gauging pig through the pipeline. The gauging
pig shall have a diameter equal to 95% of the nominal internal diameter of the pipe.
Contractor shall supply and install all temporary scraper launchers/ receivers and
other equipment, piping and materials and consumables required for the purpose.
4.5 Installation
4.7.1 Installation shall be done in accordance with approval installation procedure.
4.7.2 The lateral offset of the actual exit point of the pilot hole from the calculated and
theoretical exit point shall not exceed half per cent (0.5%) of the length of the
crossing.
4.7.3 The length tolerance shall not exceed one per cent of the crossing length, subject to
the condition that the actual exit point shall not be within the limits of crossing as
defined in the approved drawings.
4.7.4 Back reaming shall be done separately from the pipeline pulling operation. The size
of the back-reamed hole shall be adequate (approximately 1.5 times the pipeline
diameter) to allow enough clearance for a smooth pull-back of the pipeline.
4.7.5 Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the drilled hole till such time the
pipeline is pulled in.
4.7.6 During pulling operation, the buoyancy of the pipeline shall be controlled by suitable
approved methods so as to maintain the buoyancy as close as possible to zero
during pull-back in order to reduce friction forces of the pipeline in the hole.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

4.7.7 Bentonite slurry of specified viscosity shall be pumped into the hole, preventing the
wall from collapsing and protecting the pipeline coating.
4.6 Contractor shall be responsible for the integrity of the corrosion coating.
4.6.1 Before pull-back operation, megger test shall be done for the entire pipeline
(externally corrosion coated) string made for crossing by HDD method.
4.6.2 After pull-back operation to ensure the integrity of pipeline coating, again megger
test shall be done for the bored string before tied-in to the mainline pipe. The
megger value before & after pulling operation of the pipeline string shall be nearly
same and acceptable to Owner.
4.6.3 However, if, in Owner’s opinion, the integrity of external corrosion coating of bored
pipeline string is not established by above (Clause No. 3.6.1 & 3.6.2), then further in
order to ensure the integrity of coating of the bored pipeline string, megger test of
the coating shall be carried out in accordance with the following steps:
a) The test must be carried out before the bored pipe is tied-in to the mainline
pipe
b) Measure the natural potential of the bored pipe at both ends.
c) Set up the temporary impressed current system with a digital multimeter

connected to measure the output current. Position the test electrode anode
as far from the bored pipe as interconnecting cable will allow and no closer
than 10 meters.
d) Place the reference electrode at the remote end (opposite to impressed

current system) to monitor the bored pipe potential
e) Impress a current into the bored pipe start at Zero amp. and increase slowly
until the bored pipe potential is depressed to 1.5 V with respect to the
reference electrode.
f) Note the current from the digital multimeter and calculate the current
density.
g) The desirable value of calculated current density should be less than 70 micro
ampere per square meter of drilled pipe surface in contact with the soil.
4.6.4 If Contractor again fails to establish the integrity of coating of the bored pipeline
string and the same is not acceptable to Owner, the above works shall not be
continued further until the cause analysed and rectified by the Contractor to the
entire satisfaction of Owner.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

4.7 Final Hydrostatic Test
4.7.1 The complete crossing section shall be tested after installation. The test pressure
shall be as stipulated in the Special Conditions of Contract. After temperature
stabilisation, pressure shall be retained in the pipeline for a period of 6 hours and
recorded by manothermograph. The hydrostatic testing shall be carried out in
accordance with approved procedures and specification detailed elsewhere in the
document.
4.7.2 Test Procedure
Contractor shall prepare for Company's approval a hydrostatic test procedure manual
for pre-testing and post-installation testing of pipeline. The test procedure manual
shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following items:
a. For the pipe section to be tested, a diagram indicating all fittings, vents,
valves, temporary connections, relevant elevations and ratings. The diagram
shall also indicate injection locations and intake and discharge lines.
b. Estimated amount of test water, water source, including required

concentration of corrosion inhibitors and additives, procedure for inhibitor
injection and control of concentration.
c. Filling and flushing procedures, including a complete description of all

proposed equipment and instruments (including spares), their location and
set-up.
d. The type and sequence of pigs and the pig tracking system for cleaning and
removal of air pockets, pig inspection procedures, including procedure to be
followed in case the gauging pig indicates damage.
e. Procedures for levelling and stabilization after filling and for pressurization
and to allow for temperature stabilization.
f. Pressure testing procedure including a complete description of all proposed

equipment and instruments (including spares), their location and set-up, and
proposed system for observation and recording of data during the pressure
test.
g. All calculations including air-volume calculations and pressure change due to

temperature change calculations.
h. Procedure for detection and location of leaks.
i. Procedure for safe dewatering the pipeline section after testing, including a
complete description of all proposed equipment and instruments (including
spares), their location and set-up, the type and sequence of pigs and the pig
tracking system along with the pig specifications.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

j. Forms for recording the testing data.
4.7.3 Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment & instrumentation for performing
the work including all temporary piping, hydro test header and scraper launcher /
receiver etc.
4.7.4 The test medium shall be fresh water to be arranged by the Contractor. The water to
be used shall be filtered, shall not be contaminated, and free from sand of silt.
Contractor shall submit laboratory test reports of water used for testing. Contractor
shall provide Company approved corrosion inhibitors, oxygen scavengers and
bactericides to be added to the test water. Contractor shall furnish and install all
temporary piping, which may be necessary to connect from source of water to its
pumps and manifolds / tankage.
4.7.5 Before filling operation, Contractor shall clean the pipeline by air driven pigs provided
with spring loaded brushes and cups to remove all mill scale, rust / sand from the
internal of pipe sections.
4.7.6 The hydrostatic test shall be considered as positive if pressure has kept a constant
value throughout the test duration, except for changes due to temperature effects,
and there is no abrupt pressure drop throughout the test duration.
If test section fails to maintain the specified test pressure after isolation, Contractor
shall determine by search the location of leakage or failure. All leaks and failures
within the pipe wall or longitudinal seam shall be repaired by replacement of entire
joint or joints in which leakage or failure occurs. In those cases where leaks occur in
circumferential welds the method of repair shall be determined by Company.
Contractor shall comply with instructions of the Company whether to replace a
section of the line pipe that includes the line leak or whether to repair the
circumferential weld. This repair should, however, meet the requirements of welding
specification contained herein. Where failures occur in pipeline field bends, bends
shall be replaced with same degree of bends. After completion of repairs, the
hydrostatic test shall be repeated in full, as per the approved procedures.
All work of reinstating line pipe, to replace failures, shall be done in accordance with
the specifications contained herein.
Contractor shall haul and stockpile all damaged and defective pipes to storage
locations designated by the Company. All cracks and splits resulting nom failures
shall be coated with an application of grease to preserve the characteristics of
failures nom corrosion. Joints of failed pipes shall be marked with paint, with a tag
indicating failure details, date and location of failure and pressure at which failure
occurred.
4.7.7 After completion of successful hydrotest of the above portion, the pipeline shall be
capped and buried. Pipeline end position on the banks shall be marked on the
ground by installing location markers on both banks approved by Company.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

4.8 Permanent Pipeline Markers
On both banks of each river crossing, Contractor shall install a Navigable Waterway
Pipeline Crossing Warning Sign in accordance with Std. No. MEC/S/05/21/05.
Contractor shall supply all materials and fabricate and install the markers as per
reference drawing. Wherever feasible, the pipeline markers shall be installed on the
embankments, however, exact location shall be decided based on site conditions and
as directed by Company.
4.9 Fencing
Wherever specified, Contractor shall supply all materials and install G.I. Wire Chain
link security fencing of size 10 m x 10 m x 25 m high with lockable steel gate around
the pipe ends and test stations for temporary C.P. on both sides of each river
crossing.
4.10 Idle Time Preservation of Pipeline
When so stated in the Contract, Contractor shall supply all materials and consumable
including water and inhibitor and shall install all piping connections, valves,
instrumentation, etc., and perform all works for preservation of pipeline by
pressurization with inhibited water. Contractor shall use approved inhibitors and shall
determine the required dosages of inhibitors and pressure for idle time preservation
of the pipeline for a period of maximum six months nom the date of completion of
construction. Corrosion inhibitors and dosages shall be subject to Company's
approval prior to use.
4.11 Final Clean up
4.11.1 After completion of construction, Contractor shall clear the site of all balance material
and debris and bentonite slurry. All balance pipe lengths shall be returned to Owner’s
designated stock yard(s). Site/ ROW shall be cleared to the complete satisfaction of
the land owner’s and authorities having jurisdiction. All such works shall be done at
no extra cost to Owner. The Owner shall be indemnified against any/ all claims
arising as a result thereof.
4.11.2 Contractor shall arrange for safe disposal of all surplus soil and bentonite slurry &
corrosion inhibited test water so as to avoid any harm to the environment /
occupants at locations duly approved by authorities and pollution control boards
having jurisdiction and/or as instructed by Company without any extra cost.
5.0 DOCUMENTATION
5.1 In additional to the documents specified elsewhere in this specification. Contractor

shall submit to the Owner the following documents/ records.
• Copies of the permits obtained from authorities having jurisdiction.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

• Records of pre and post installation hydrostatic testing.

• Record of non-destructive testing of welds.
• Detailed drilling log and downhole data, including, but not limited to, the
following :
i) Torque and pulling/pushing force
ii) Data on drilling fluid.
- Density
- Type of mud and additive employed.
- Mixing, pumping and cleaning.
• Wash and drill pipe data, viz.,

i) Dimension and material properties.
ii) Data on API classification.
iii) Age of and type of inspection previously carried out on these pipes.
• Permits obtained from authorities having jurisdiction for the various works.
• Plan & profile of the drilled hole along with the water level variations.
• Records of hydrostatic pre-testing and final testing.
• Record of Non Destructive Testing of welds.
• Clearance certificates form the landowners and Authorities having jurisdiction
regarding satisfactory clean-up and restoration of pipeline RoU and work areas.
• Clearance certificate from the land owners and authorities having jurisdiction
regarding satisfactory clean-up and restoration of the pipeline ROW and work
sites.
5.2 After completion of construction, Contractor shall prepare and furnish six sets of
copies and two sets of reproducible of Às-built’ for the crossings. As built drawings
shall , as a minimum include the following information
• True profile of the crossing along the pipeline.

• True profile of the pipeline as installed and the depth of cover to top of pipe at
regular intervals.
• Location of entry and exit point and angles of entry and exit alongwith lateral
offset of exit point from the original pipeline alignment.
• Location and angle of field bends
• Location of pipeline markers.
• All As-Built drawings shall be prepared using software AutoCAD Release 2000 or
above. Manually drafted drawings are not acceptable to Company. In addition,
to the hard copies, as-built drawings shall also be submitted in electronic media
i.e. CD / DVD.
5.3 All documents shall be in English language.

MECON LIMITED PROCESS & PIPING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Delhi DESIGN SECTION FOR
WARNING MATS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/042 REV-1 Page 1 of 4
PROCESS & PIPING DESIGN SECTION

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
WARNING MATS
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/042, Rev-1

WARNING MATS
SPECIFICATION FOR PE ANTI RODENT WARNING MATS

FOR PIPELINE
Purpose : For using as a warning sign for Underground Pipeline
Width : D + 300 mm, D – Dia of Line Pipe
Thickness : 1.0 mm thick
Material of the mat : The material shall be of high density Polyethylene of

virgin quality and non Biodegradable type. It shall have
Non Hazardous, Non Toxic and Anti – Rodent
properties.
Colour of the mat : Golden Yellow with letters printed in RED of non-
deletable type with high abrasion resistant.
Art Work : A sample piece of 30mm wide and 200mm long of

every batch shall be checked by immersing in 20%
solution of Ammonium Sulphide for period of 2 weeks at
a temperature of 15°C for colour intactness of the strip.
Copy of Art work is enclosed at Page 4.
The Art work shall be printed in English and local
language alternatively at every 1 mtr distance.
Mechanical Properties of HDPE

2
Tensile Strength : Minimum 200 kg/cm
Elongation at Break : Minimum 175%
Bundle Length : 1.0 mm thick warning mat shall be supplied as 100 mtrs
length in each bundle packed in PE Woven sack
material.
Tests : Minimum following test has to be done with each batch

of warning mat
¾ Tensile Strength test
¾ Elongation test
¾ Impact Strength test
¾ Color fastness test
¾ Heat Stability test
¾ Print Stability test
WARNING MATS
¾ Oxidation Induction test

¾ ESCR test
¾ Melt Flow Rate test
¾ Anti-Rodent Test.
¾ UV Stabilizer Test
¾ DSC Scan Test of Raw Material & Finish
Goods.
Test Certificates : Vendor has to submit the all test certificates to

Purchaser
Inspection : The manufacturer has to submit the QAP before

commencement of production. Inspection of the
material will be done at vendor‘s works by Client /
MECON Representative. Vendor has to submit all test
reports before inspection call. Any test failed during
the inspection for the offered lot, the total lot will be
rejected.
Documentation : Vendor shall submit all test reports including document

regarding Toxicology data & ROHS compliance,
documentary evidence regarding Non-biocide product,
value of Lethal Dosage (LD), value of % dermal
toxicity, details of active ingredient in the product and
final inspection reports along with the supply of
materials.
WARNING MATS
HIGHLY INFLAMMABLE GAS PIPELINE BELOW

GAIL
GAIL GAIL LOGO
IN EMERGENCY PLEASE CONTACT

PHONE NOS. …………………………….
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
FOR
LONG RADIUS BENDS
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/015, Rev-1
D:\TS\Lond Redius Bends - 015-R1.doc

DELHI DESIGN SECTION
TITLE LONG RADIUS BENDS SPECIFICATION NO. PAGE 1 OF 8
MEC/TS/05/62/015 REVISION 1
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
3.0 MATERIAL
4.0 MANUFACTURE
5.0 INSPECTION AND TESTS
6.0 MARKING, PACKING AND SHIPMENT
7.0 WARRANTY
8.0 DOCUMENTATION
Revision No. Date Revised by Checked by Approved by
PREPARED BY : CHECKED BY : APPROVED BY :

1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers long radius steel pipe bends to be manufactured in

accordance with the requirements of MSS-SP (Manufacturers Standardisation
Society – Standard Practice) – 75, latest edition, to be used in pipeline system
handling Natural Gas. The selection of options permitted by MSS-SP-75 shall be
as described below. All applicable requirements contained in the MSS-SP-75
shall be fully valid unless cancelled, replaced or amended by more
requirements as stated in this specification. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this specification and MSS-SP-75, the requirements of this
Reference has also been made in this specification to the latest edition of the
following codes, standards and specifications.
a) ANSI B31.8 : Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping

System.
b) ASME – Sec. VIII : Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

Div. 1
c) ASME – Sec IX : Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code

Welding and Brazing Qualifications
d) API Spec. 5L : Line Pipe
e) ASTM Part-I : Steel – Piping, Tubing, Fittings
In case of conflict between the above reference documents and this

specification, the requirements of the specification shall prevail.
3.0 MATERIALS
3.1 Bends shall be fabricated from bare steel line pipe (to be issued as free issue
item by Purchaser). The details of free issue line pipe material is given
separately in LR Bend Data Sheet & Purchase Requisition.

3.2 All mechanical properties of the bends after finishing shall be same as pipe
specification as referred in section 3.1. The following tests shall be conducted
on finished bends and test procedures shall be as per pipe specification as
referred in para 3.1.
3.2.1 One transverse tensile test will be conducted to establish the yield strength,
ultimate tensile strength and elongation of :
a) Base material at inside radius of the bend.

b) Base material at outside radius of the bend.
3.2.2 One all weld tensile test will be conducted (wherever applicable) to establish
yield strength, ultimate tensile strength and elongation of weld material on
bend.
3.2.3 Three transverse Charpy-V-notch impact tests shall be conducted on full sized
specimen of the same heat in accordance with ASTM A370 at 0°C for each of
the following :
a) Base material at outside radius of the bend.

b) Weld material of bend
3.2.4 Guided Bend Tests
One face and one root guided bend weld test shall be performed on samples
cut from one bend per heat of steel. The dimensions À’ in guided bend test
shall not exceed 4.0 times the nominal wall thickness and dimension `B’ shall
be equal to A + 2t + 3.2mm.
4.0 MANUFACTURE
4.1 Bends shall be manufactured by hot bending of pipe applying induction heating
only.
The adopted procedure shall be completed by suitable heat treatment to

achieve the required mechanical and chemical properties of the finished bends
and is accepted only after written approval of the Purchaser. The procedure
shall ensure uniform bending without any defects other than those allowed in
this specification and pipe specification as referred in para 3.1.

4.2 When bending, the weld wherever applicable shall be located at approx. 10° from
the neutral zone, measured at outside of the bend as indicated in figure below.
10°
W E LD H ER E B E N D IN G P L A N E
OR
HERE
BEND
10°
4.3 Bevels at the ends shall be as specified in MSS-SP-75 unless otherwise specified
differently in the material/ purchase requisition.
4.4 Bends shall not have any circumferential joint.
4.5 No repair by welding is allowed on any part of the bends.
4.6 The cooling of the bend immediately after bending shall be an interval cooling,
alternatively with water and air at a minimum pressure of 2 atmospheres.
4.7 The procedure shall be such which shall not require any additional heat –
treatment after bending. If such a heat treatment is required, it is permitted only
after the written approval of purchaser and shall be carried out at Manufacturer’s
expense.
4.8 Bulges, dents and flat areas shall not appear within 100mm from end of the bend.
For the remaining part of the bend these deviations from the original contour of
the pipe are permitted but the same shall be repaired, provided these deviations
shall not exceed 6.5% of nominal wall thickness in height/ depth and the same
shall not extend (in any direction) over a distance of more than 25% of nominal
diameter.
4.9 The excess weld material wherever applicable at the inside of the bend shall be
removed over a distance of 100mm at both ends.
4.10 Tolerances
The dimensions of bends shall be controlled to make sure that they are
manufactured according to the tolerances indicated below over and above the
requirements of MSS-SP-75

4.10.1 Minimum Inside Diameter : -2.5% of inside nominal
diameter except 200mm from ends
Bend Angle : ±1°
Bend Radius : ± 1% of bending nominal

Diameter
4.10.2 The manufacturer shall check the wall thickness of the pipe before and after
bending along the outside radius either at distances approximately equal to
pipe diameter or 300mm whichever is less. The measured wall thickness shall
be atleast equal to :
tmin = 0.95 (tnom. - t)
tnom = nominal wall thickness as specified in the

material/ purchase requisition.
t = 0.35mm for a wall thickness smaller than

10mm.
t = 0.50mm for a wall thickness 10mm or more.
4.10.3 Ovality may be defined as :
OD max. – OD min
OD nom.
The above value shall be < 1% within 100mm from each end and < 6% for
remaining part of the bend. The measurement shall be made over the
circumference of the bend either at distance approximately equal to pipe
diameter or 300mm whichever is less.
4.10.4 Wrinkles
Measurements of the outside diameter shall be taken in the plane of the bend
at locations where wrinkles are present (OD max.) and at locations where
wrinkles are not present (OD min,). The acceptance limit shall be as defined
below.
OD max. – OD min
------------------------- < 1%
OD nom.

5.1 The manufacturer shall perform all inspection and tests as per the
requirements of this specification and MSS-SP-75 prior to shipment at his
works. Such inspection and tests shall be, but not limited to, the following :
a) Verify that the unfinished product arriving at manufacturer’s shop is in

full compliance with the pipe specification as referred in para 3.1.
b) Visual Inspection.
c) Dimensional and tolerances check as per MSS-SP-75 and requirements
of section 4.0 of this specification.
d) Check heat treatment, if carried out, as required and maintain its
records.
e) Temperature against time recorder charts for each induction heating.
f) Material properties shall be checked to meet the requirements of section
3.0 of this specification.
g) The non-destructive inspection on the finished bend shall be carried out
as given below :
• All longitudinal seam welds shall be fully radiographed and

acceptance limits shall be as per pipe specification as referred in
para 3.1.
• The full circumference of both ends of each bend after bevelling
shall be ultrasonically tested for laminations over a length of 25mm
and acceptance limits shall be as per pipe specification as referred in
para 3.1.
5.2 Purchaser’s Representative reserves the right to perform stagewise inspection

and witness tests on all bends as indicated in para 5.1 at Manufacturer’s
works, prior to shipment.
Manufacturer shall give reasonable notice of time and shall provide without
charge reasonable access and facilities required for inspection, to the
Purchaser’s Representative. Inspection and test performed or witnessed by
Purchaser’s Representative shall in no way relieve the Manufacturer’s
obligation to perform the required inspection and tests. Under no
circumstances any action of the Purchaser’s Representative shall relieve the
Manufacturer of his responsibility for the material, design, quality and
operation of the equipment.

5.3 Test Certificates
The Manufacturer shall produce the Certificates (in original) for all, but not
limited to, the following :
a) Certificates of chemical analysis and mechanical tests carried out on

pipe and bends separately.
b) Certificates of required non-destructive test inspection.
c) Certificates of heat treatments, if any.
d) Certificates of all other tests as required in this specification.
In case any of the above said certificates are not available during the final
inspection, the supply shall be considered incomplete.
6.0 MARKING, PACKING AND SHIPMENT
6.1 All bends shall be marked as per MSS-SP-75.
6.2 All loose and foreign material i.e. rust, grease, etc. shall be removed from
inside and outside of the bends.
6.3 All bends except bevelled ends shall be coated internally and externally with a
thin film of zinc chromate red oxide paint for protection against corrosion
during transit and storage. The coating shall be easily removable in the field.
Manufacturer shall furnish the details for the same.
6.4 Both ends of all bends shall be suitably protected to avoid any damage during
transit by means of metallic bevel protectors.
6.5 Package shall be marked legibly with suitable marking to indicate the
following:
a) Order Number
b) Package Number
c) Manufacturer’s Name
d) Size (Inches) and wall thickness (mm)

7.0 WARRANTY
Purchaser will be reimbursed by Manufacturer for any bend furnished on this

order that fails under field hydrostatic test if such failure is caused by a defect
in the bend which is outside the acceptance limits of this specification. The
reimbursement cost shall include bend cost, labour cost and equipment rental
for searching, excavation, cutting out and installation of replaced bend in
position. The field hydrostatic test pressure will not exceed that value which
will cause a calculated hoop stress equivalent to 100% of specified minimum
yield strength of the attached pipe.
8.0 DOCUMENTATION
8.2 At the time of bidding, bidder shall submit the following documents :
a) Reference list of previous supplies of bends of similar specifications.
b) Clause-wise list of deviation from this specification, if any.
c) Brief description of manufacturing and quality control facilities of the

Manufacturer’s works.
8.3 Within one week of placement of order the Manufacturer shall submit four
copies, of the manufacturing process and quality assurance plan for pipe and
bends.
Once the approval has been given by Purchaser any change in material and
method of manufacture and quality control shall be notified to Purchaser
whose approval in writing of all such changes shall be obtained before the
bends are manufactured.
8.4 Within four weeks from the approval date Manufacturer shall submit one
reproducible and six copies of the documents as stated in para 8.3 of this
specification.
8.5 Prior to shipment, the Manufacturer shall submit one reproducible and six
copies of test certificates as listed in para 5.3 of this specification.

Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
SEAMLESS FITTINGS & FLANGES
[SIZE UPTO DN 400 mm (16”) NB]
SPECIFICATION NO.: MEC/TS/05/21/025
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE SEAMLESS FITTINGS & MEC/TS/05/21/025 REVISION : 0

FLANGES [SIZE UPTO DN 400
mm (16”) NB] EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL.NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE
3.0 MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATION
4.0 MATERIALS
5.0 DESIGN AND MANUFACTURE
7.0 TEST CERTIFICATES
8.0 PAINTING, MARKING AND SHIPMENT
9.0 DOCUMENTATION

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements for the design, manufacture and
supply of following carbon steel flanges and fittings of size upto DN 400 mm (16") to
be installed in onshore pipeline systems handling non-sour hydrocarbons in liquid or
gaseous phase including Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG) :
- Flanges such as welding neck flanges, blind flanges, spectacle blinds,

spacers and blinds etc.
- Seamless fittings such as tees, elbows, reducers, caps, outlets etc.
2.1 Reference has been made in this specification to the latest edition (edition enforce at
the time of issue of enquiry) of the following Codes, Standards and Specifications :
ASME B31.4 - Pipeline Transportation Systems for Liquid

Hydrocarbons and Other Liquids
ASME B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems
ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B16.9 - Factory Made Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings
ASME B 16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded
ASME B 16.48 - Steel Line Blanks
ASME Sec VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Rules for
Construction of Pressure Vessels
ASME Sec IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and

Brazing Qualifications
ASTM A 370 - Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical

Testing of Steel Products.
MSS-SP-25 - Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges

and Unions
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

MSS-SP-97 - Forged Carbon Steel Branch Outlet Fittings - Socket

Welding, Threaded and Butt welding Ends.
2.2 In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification and the
requirements of above referred Codes and Standards, the requirements of this
3.0 MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATION
Manufacturer who intends bidding for fittings must possess the records of a
successful proof test, in accordance with the provisions of ASME B16.9 / MSS-SP-75
as applicable.
4.0 MATERIAL
4.1 The Carbon Steel used in the manufacture of flanges and fittings shall be fully killed.
Material for flanges and fittings shall comply with the material standard indicated in
the Purchase Requisition. In addition, the material shall also meet the requirements
specified hereinafter.
4.2 Each heat of steel used for the manufacture of flanges and fittings shall have Carbon
Equivalent (CE) not greater than 0.45 calculated from check analysis in accordance
with the following formula:
Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
CE = C + ------- + --------------------- + ---------------
6 5 15
Carbon contents on check analysis shall not exceed 0.22%.
4.3 For flanges and fittings specified to be used for Gas service or LPG service, Charpy
V-notch test shall be conducted on each heat of steel. Unless specified otherwise,
the Charpy V-notch test shall be conducted at 0°C in accordance with the impact test
provisions of ASTM A 370 for flanges and fittings.
The average absorbed impact energy values of three full-sized specimens shall be
27 joules. The minimum impact energy value of any one specimen of the three
specimens analysed as above, shall not be less than 22 Joules.
When Low Temperature Carbon Steel (LTCS) materials are specified for flanges and
fittings in Purchase Requisition, the Charpy V-notch test requirements of applicable
material standard shall be complied with.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

4.4 For flanges and fittings specified to be used for Gas service or LPG service,
Hardness test shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM A 370. Hardness testing
shall cover at least 10% per item, per size, per heat, per manufacturing method. A
full thickness cross section shall be taken for this purpose and the maximum
hardness shall not exceed 248 HV10.
4.5 In case of RTJ (Ring Type Joint) flanges, the groove hardness shall be minimum 140
BHN. Ring Joint flanges shall have octagonal section of Ring Joint.
5.0 DESIGN AND MANUFACTURE
5.1 Flanges such as weld neck flanges and blind flanges shall conform to the
requirements of ASME B16.5.
5.2 Spectacle blind and spacer & blind shall conform to the requirements of ASME B
16.48.
5.3 Fittings such as tees, elbows, reducers, etc. shall be seamless type and shall
conform to ASME B16.9 for sizes DN 50 mm (2") to DN 400 mm (16") (both sizes
included) and ASME B 16.11 for sizes below ON 50 mm (2").
5.4 Fittings such as weldolets, sockolets, nippolets, etc. shall be manufactured in

accordance with MSS-SP-97.
5.5 Type, face and face finish of flanges shall be as specified in Purchase Requisition.
5.6 Flanges and fittings manufactured from bar stock are not acceptable.
5.7 All butt weld ends shall be bevelled as per ASME B 16.5 / ASME B 16.9 / MSS-SP-
97 as applicable.
5.8 Repair by welding on flanges and fittings is not permitted.
5.9 Stub-in or pipe to pipe connection shall not be used in the manufacture of tees.
Tees shall be manufactured by forging or extrusion methods. The longitudinal weld
seam shall be kept at 90° from the extrusion. Fittings shall not have any
circumferential joint .
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

6.1 The Manufacturer shall perform all inspections and tests as per the requirement of
this specification and the relevant codes, prior to shipment at his works. Such
inspections and tests shall be, not but limited to the following :
a) All flanges and fittings shall be visually inspected. The internal and external surfaces
of the flanges and fittings shall be free from any strikes, gauges and other
detrimental defects.
b) Dimensional checks shall be carried out on finished products as per ASME B16.5 for
flanges, ASME B16.48 for spacers and blinds and ASME B16.9 / MSS-SP-97 as
applicable for fittings and as per this specification.
c) Chemical composition and mechanical properties shall be checked as per relevant

material standards and this specification, for each heat of steel used.
d) All finished wrought weld ends subject to welding in field, shall be 100% tested for
lamination type defects by ultrasonic test. Any lamination larger then 6.35 mm shall
not be acceptable.
6.2 Purchaser's Inspector reserves the right to perform stage wise inspection and
witness tests, as indicated in clause 6.1 of this specification at Manufacturer's Works
prior to shipment. Manufacturer shall give reasonable notice' of time and shall
provide, without charge, reasonable access and facilities required for inspection, to
the Purchaser's Inspector.
Inspection and tests performed / witnessed by Purchaser's Inspector shall in no way

relieve the Manufacturer's obligation to perform the required inspection and tests.
Manufacturer shall furnish the following certificates:
a) Test certificates relevant to the chemical analysis and mechanical properties

of the materials used for manufacture of flanges and fittings as per relevant
standards and this specification.
b) Test Reports on non destructive testing.
c) Certificates for each fitting stating that it is capable of withstanding without

leakage a test pressure, which results in a hoop stress equivalent to 100 % of
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

the specified minimum yield strength for the pipe with which the fitting is to be
attached without impairment of serviceability.
8.1 After all inspection and tests required have been carried out; all external surfaces
shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove grease, dust and rust and shall be applied
with standard mill coating for protection against corrosion during transit and storage.
The coating shall be easily removable in the field.
8.2 Ends of all fittings and weld neck flanges shall be suitably protected to avoid any
damage during transit. Metallic or high impact plastic bevel protectors shall be
provided for fittings and flanges. Flange face shall be suitably protected to avoid any
damage during transit.
8.3 All flanges and fittings shall be marked as per applicable dimension / manufacturing
standard.
9.0 DOCUMENTATION
Documentation to be submitted by Manufacturer to Company is summarized below.

Number of Copies (Hard copies / soft copies etc.) shall be as indicated in
CONTRACT document / Material Requisition.
9.1 At the time of bidding, Manufacturer shall submit the following documents:
a) Reference list of previous supplies of similar fittings of similar specification.

b) Clausewise list of deviations from this specification, if any.
c) Brief description of the manufacturing and quality control facilities at
Manufacturer's works.
d) Manufacturer's qualification requirement as per clause 3.0 of this specification.
e) Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) enclosed with this tender duly signed, stamped
and accepted.
9.2 Prior to shipment, the Manufacturer shall submit test certificates as listed in clause
7.0 of this specification.

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
FOR
ASSORTED PIPES
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/59A, R-0
\\Akjha\work contrac\standard TS for Pipe Line WC (Vol-II) MASTER FOLDER\59A assorted pipe spec\Specification for Assorted Pipes 59A.doc
ASSORTED PIPES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/TS/05/62/59A REV-0 PAGE 1 OF 9
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 2
2.0 IBR PIPES 4
3.0 HYDROSTATIC TEST 5
4.0 MARKING & DESPATCH 5
ANNEXURE-I : HYDROSTATIC TEST 7
Prepared By : Checked By : Approved By :
ASSORTED PIPES
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 All pipes and their dimensions, tolerances, chemical composition, physical
properties, heat treatment, hydrotest and other testing and marking
requirements shall conform to the latest codes and standards specified in
the Material Requisition (MR). Deviation(s), if any, shall be clearly
highlighted in the offer.
1.2 Testing
1.2.1 Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the applicable
material specifications. Test reports shall also be furnished for any
supplementary tests as specified in the MR & Clauses 1.10 & 1.11.
1.2.2 Material test certificates (physical property, chemical composition &

treatment report) shall also be furnished for the pipes supplied.
1.3 Manufacturing Processes
1.3.1 Steel made by Acid Bessemer Process shall not be acceptable.
1.3.2 All longitudinally welded pipes other than IS:3589 should employ
automatic welding.
1.4 Pipe shall be supplied in single or double random length of 4 to 7 and 7 to

14 meters, respectively.
1.5 a) Seamless and E.R.W. pipes shall not have any circumferential seam
joint in a random length. However, in case of E.FS.W. pipe, in one
random length one welded circumferential seam of same quality as
longitudinal weld is permitted. This weld shall be at least 2.5 m
from either end. The longitudinal seams of the two portions shall
be staggered by 90°. Single random length in such cases shall be 5
to 7m.
b) Unless otherwise mentioned in the respective material code,

E.FS.W. pipes < 36” shall not have more than one longitudinal
seam joint and E.FS.W. pipes ≥ 36” shall not have more than two
longitudinal seam joints.
ASSORTED PIPES
1.6 Pipe with screwed ends shall have NPT external taper pipe threads
conforming to ASME/ ANSI B1.20.1 upto 1.5” NB & IS:554 for 2” to 6” NB.
1.7 Pipe with bevelled ends shall be in accordance with ASME B16.25. Weld
contours shall be as follows:
Material Wall Thickness Weld Contour

Carbon Steel (Except Low Upto 22mm Figure 2 Type A
Temp. Carbon Steel) > 22mm Figure 3 Type A
Alloy Steel Stainless Steel & Upto 10 mm Figure 4
Low Temp. Carbon Steel >10 mm & Upto 25 mm Figure 5 Type A
> 25 mm Figure 6 Type A
1.8 Gavanished pipes shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming
to IS:4736/ ASTM A 153.
1.9 All austenitic stainless steel pipes shall be supplied in solution annealed
condition.
1.10 I.G.C. Test for Stainless Steels
1.10.1 For all austenitic stainless steel pipes, intergranular corrosion test shall
have to be conducted as per following:
ASTM A262 practice “ B “ with acceptance criteria of “60 mils/ year

(max.)”
OR
ASTM 262 practice “ E’’ with acceptance criteria of “ No cracks as

observed from 20X magnification” & “Microscopic structure to be observed
from 250X magnification”.
1.10.2 When specifically asked for in MR for high temperature application of

some grades of austenitic stainless steel (eg.SS 309, 310, 316, 316H etc.),
ASTM A262 practice “C” with acceptance criteria of “15 mils/ year (max.)”
shall have to be conducted.
1.10.3 For the IGC test as described in 1.10.1 & 1.10.2, two sets of samples shall
be drawn from each solution annealing lot; one set corresponding to
highest carbon content and the other corresponding to the highest pipe
ASSORTED PIPES
thickness. When testing in is conducted as per Practice “E”, photograph of

microscopic structure shall be submitted for record.
1.11 All welded pipes indicated as ‘CRYO’ & ‘LT’ in MR shall be impact tested
per requirement and acceptance criteria of ASME B31.3. The impact test
temperature shall be –196° C & -45° C for stainless steel and carbon
steel, respectively, unless specifically mentioned otherwise in MR.
1.12 Pipes under ‘NACE’ category shall meet the requirements given in
MR-01-75.
1.13 Specified heat treatment for carbon steel & alloy steel and solution
annealing for stainless steel pipes shall be carried out after weld repairs.
Number of weld repairs at the same spot shall be restricted to maximum
two by approved repair procedure.
1.14 For black or galvanised pipes to IS:1239, the minimum percentage of

elongation shall be 20%.
2.0 IBR PIPES
2.1 IBR Documentation
2.1.1 Pipes under purview of IBR shall be accompanied with IBR certificate
original in Form IIIA, duly approved and countersigned by IBR authority/
local authority empowered by the Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy
of the original certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where
the supplier is located is the minimum requirement for acceptance.
2.1.2 For materials 1 ¼ Cr- ½ Mo (ASTM A335 Gr. P11/ A691 Gr. 1 ¼ Cr) & 2
¼ Cr-1Mo (ASTM A335 Gr.P22/ A691 Gr. 2 ¼ Cr.), from III-A approved
by IBR shall include the tabulation of Et , Sc & Sr values for the entire
temperature range given below. Et , Sc & Sr values shall be such that
throughout the temperature range
Et / 1.5 ≥
Sr / 1.5 ≥ Sa
Sc ≥
where,
SA : Allowable stress at the working metal temperature.
Et : Yield point (0.2% proof stress at the working metal
temperature).
ASSORTED PIPES
Sc : The average stress to produce elongation of 1% (creep) in

1,00,000 hrs at the working metal temperature.
Sr : The average stress to produce rupture in 1,00,000 hrs. at
the working metal temperature and in no case more than
1.33 times the lowest stress to produce rupture at this
temperature.
SA (psi) Temperature (°F)

Material 500 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100
A335 Gr. P11 17200 16700 16200 15600 15200 15000 14500 12800 9300 6300 4200 2800
A 691 Gr. 1½ Cr 18900 18300 18000 17600 17300 16800 16300 15000 9900 6300 4200 2800
A335 Gr. P2/ 17900 17900 17900 17900 17900 17800 14500 12800 10800 7800 5100 3200
A691 Gr. 2 ¼ Cr
Note: SA values given above are as per ASME B31.3-1999. Values shall be as per
the latest edition prevailing.
2.2 For carbon steel pipes under IBR, the chemical composition shall conform
to the following;
Carbon (max.) : 0.25%

Others (S, P, Mn) : As prescribed in IBR regulation.
The chemical composition as indicated in this clause is not applicable for

pipes other than IBR services.
3.0 HYDROSTATIC TEST
Refer Annexure – I.
4.0 MARKING AND DESPATCH
4.1 All pipes shall be marked in accordance with the applicable codes,
standards and specifications. In addition, the purchase order number, the
item code & special conditions like “IBR”, “ CRYO”, “NACE”, etc., shall also
be marked.
4.2 Pipes under “IBR”, “CRYO”, & “NACE” shall be painted in red stripes, light
purple brown stripes & canary yellow stripes, respectively, longitudinally
throughout the length for easy identification.
4.3 Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metallic
salts such as zinc, lead or copper which cause corrosive attack on heating.
ASSORTED PIPES
4.4 Pipes shall be dry, clen and free from from moisture, dirt and loose
foreign materials of any kind.
4.5 Pipes shall be protected from rust, corrosion and mechanical damage
during transportation, shipment and storage.
4.6 Rust preventive used on machined surfaces to be welded shall be easily

removable with a petroleum solvent and the same shall not be harmful to
welding.
4.7 Both ends of the pipe shall be protected with the following material:
Plain end : Plastic cap

Bevel end : Wood, Metal or Plastic cover
Threaded end : Metal or Plastic threaded cap
4.8 End protectors to be used on bevelled ends shall be securely and tightly
attached with belt or wire.
4.9 Steel end protectors to be used on galvanised pipes shall be galvanised.
ASSORTED PIPES
ANNEXURE–I
3.0 HYDROSTATIC TEST
3.1 All pipes shall be hydrostatically tested.
3.2 The mill test pressure shall be as follows:
3.2.1 Seamless, E.R.W. & Spiral Welded
a) Carbon Steel
Material Standard Test Pressure Standard

ASTM A 106 Gr. B ASTM A 530
API 5L Gr. B, Seamless API 5L
API 5L, E.R.W. API 5L
API 5L, Spiral API 5L
ASTM A333 Gr.3 & 6, Seamless ASTM A 530
ASTM A 333 Gr. 3 & 6, E.R.W. ASTM A 530
b) Seamless Alloy Steel

ASTM A335 GR.P1, P12, P11, P22, P5, ASTM A 530
P9
ASTM A268 TP 405, TP410 ASTM A530
c) Seamless Stainless Steel

ASTM A312 Gr.TP304, 304L, 304H, 316, ASTM A 530
316L, 316H, 321, 347
d) Seamless Nickel Alloy

ASTM B161 UNS No.2200 ASTM B161
ASSORTED PIPES
e) Welded Nickel Alloy
ASTM B725 UNS No.2200, 4400 ASTM B725
3.2.2 Electric Fusion Welded
a) Carbon Steel & Alloy Steel E.FS.W. (16” & above)
API 5L Gr.B P=2ST/ D

ASTM A 671 Gr.CC65, 70 (Cl.32) S=90% of SMYS (except for API 5L
ASTM A 672 Gr.C60, 65, 70 (Cl.12,22) Gr.B)
ASTM A 671 Gr.CF60, 65, 66, 70 (Cl.32) S=85% of SMYS for API 5L Gr.B
ASTM A 691 Gr. ½ Cr, 1Cr, 1 ¼Cr, 2 T=Nominal Wall Thickness
¼Cr, 5Cr, 9Cr (Cl.42) D=O.D. of Pipe
b) Stainless Steel E.FS.W. (2” to 6”)
The hydrostatic test pressure in kg/ cm2 for the following materials
shall be as given below:
Material Gr.1: ASTM A312 TP304/ 304H/ 316/ 316H/ 321/

347 welded
Material Gr.2: ASTM A312 TP 304L/ 316L welded
Pipe Schedule: S10 Pipe Schedule : S40 Pipe Schedule : S80

Size Material Material Material Material Material Material
Gr.1 Gr.2 Gr.1 Gr.2 Gr.1 Gr.2
2” 100 80 155 130 230 190
3” 80 60 155 130 230 190
4” 80 50 155 130 230 190
6” 65 35 90 75 155 130
ASSORTED PIPES
c) Stainless Steel E.FS.W. (8” and above).

ASTM A358 TP 304L, 304, 304H, P = 2ST/D
316L, 316, 316H, 321, 347 S = 85% of SMYS
(Classes 1, 3 & 4) T = Nominal Wall Thickness
D = O.D. of Pipe
ASTM A358 TP 304L, 304, 304H, P = 2ST/D
316L, 316, 316H, 321, 347 S = 72% of SMYS
(Classes 2 & 5) T = Nominal Wall Thickness
D = O.D. of Pipe
3.2.3 Carbon Steel Pipes to IS Standards

IS :1239 IS :1239
IS :3589 IS :3589
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
BALL VALVES
SPECIFICATION NO.: MEC/TS/05/21/002
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
TITLE BALL VALVE MEC/TS/05/21/002 REVISION : 0
EDITION : 1
ABBREVIATIONS :
ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials
API : American Petroleum Institute
BHN : Brinell Hardness Number
DN : Nominal Size
HAZ : Heat Affected Zone
LC : Lock Close (valve locked in full close position)
LO : Lock Open (valve locked in full open position)
MSS-SP : Manufacturers Standardization Society – Standard Practice
NDT : Non Destructive Testing
NPS : Nominal Pipe Size
RTJ : Ring Type Joint
SSPC : Steel Structures Painting Council
Pipeline Engineering Standards Committee
Convenor :
Members :
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
3.0 MATERIALS
4.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
6.0 EXTENT OF INSPECTION & TESTING
9.0 SPARES AND ACCESSORIES
10.0 DOCUMENTATION
11.0 GUARANTEE
(SHALINI SINGH) (GURDEEP SINGH) (A.K. JOHRI) Oct. 2008

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS
Sl. Clause / Paragraph / Page Rev. Date By Verified

Drawing Amended Name Sig. Name Sig.
1. Cl. No. 4.6 4 1 April 09 Gurdeep KK De

Singh
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum requirements for design, manufacture, testing
and supply of carbon steel ball valves of size DN 50mm (2”) and above and ANSI
class 150 to 900 to be used in on-shore pipeline systems handling non-sour
hydrocarbons in liquid or gaseous phase, including Liquid Petroleum Gas (LPG).
This specification does not cover ball valves for sour hydrocarbon (liquid/ gas)
service as defined in NACE standard MR-01-75.
2.1 All valves shall be manufactured and supplied in accordance with the Twenty Second
Edition, January,2002, or the latest edition of American Petroleum Institute (API)
Specification 6D / ISO 14313 : 1999, with additions and modifications as indicated in
the following sections of this specification.
2.2 Reference has also been made in this specification to the latest edition of the
following Codes, Standards and Specifications :
ASME B 16.5 : Pipe flanges and flanged fittings
ASME B 16.25 : Butt welding ends
ASME B 16.34 : Valves – Flanged, threaded and welding end
ASME B16.47 : Large diameter steel flanges
ASME B 31.3 : Chemical & process plant piping system
ASME B 31.4 : Liquid transportation systems for hydrocarbons and

other liquids
ASME B 31.8 : Gas transmission and distribution piping systems
ASME Sec.VIII/IX : Boiler and pressure vessel code
ASTM A 370 : Standard test methods and definitions for mechanical

testing of steel products
ASTM B 733 : Autocatalytic nickel phosphorous coating on metals
API 6FA : Fire test for valves
API 607 : Fire test for soft-seated quarter-turn valves
API 1104 : Welding of pipelines and related facilities

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
BS:6755 (Part-II) : Testing of valves – Specification for fire type - testing

requirements
MSS-SP-6 : Standard finishes for contact faces of pipe flanges and

connecting-end flanges of valves and fittings
MSS-SP-44 : Steel pipeline flanges
SSPC-VIS-1 : Steel structures painting council-visual standard
ASMEB 16.10 : Face-To-Face and End-To-End Dimensions of valves.
2.3 In case of conflict between the requirements of this specification, API 6D and the
Codes, Standards and Specifications referred in clause 2.2 above, the requirements
of this specification shall govern. Order of precedence shall be as follows :
• Data Sheets
• This Specification
• API 6D Specification
• Other Referred Codes & Standards
• Manufacturer’s Standard
3.0 MATERIALS
3.1 Material for major components of the valves shall be as indicated in Valve Data
Sheet. Other components shall be as per Manufacturer’s standard (suitable for the
service conditions indicated in Data Sheet) and shall be subject to approval by
Purchaser. In addition, the material shall also meet the requirements specified
hereinafter.
3.2 Carbon steel used for the manufacture of valves shall be fully killed.
3.3 The Carbon Equivalent (CE) of valve end connections which are subject to further
field welding by Purchaser, shall not exceed 0.45% (as calculated by the following
formula) on check analysis for each heat of steel used:
Mn Cr + Mo + V Ni + Cu
CE = C + -------- + ---------------------- + ---------------
6 5 15
3.4 For Valves specified to be used for Gas service or LPG service, Charpy V-notch test,
on each heat of base material shall be conducted as per API 6D Clause 7.5, for all
pressure containing parts such as body, end flanges and welding ends as well as
bolting material for pressure containing parts. Unless otherwise, the Charpy V-notch
test shall be conducted at 0 °C. Test procedure shall conform to ASTM A370. The
average absorbed energy value of three full sized specimens shall be 27 J. The
minimum impact energy value for any one specimen of the three specimens analysed
as above, shall not be less than 22 J.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
When Low Temperature Carbon Steel (LTCS) materials are specified in Valve Data
Sheet or offered by Manufacturer, the Charpy V-notch test requirements of applicable
material standard shall be complied with.
3.5 For all such valves where carbon steel is used as ball material, the ball shall have 75
micrometer (0.003 inch) thick Electroless Nickel Plating (ENP) as per ASTM B733 with
following classification : SC2, Type II, Class 2. The hardness of plating shall be
minimum 50 RC.
3.6 When specified in Valve Data Sheet, hardness test shall be carried out on each heat
of base material for all pressure containing parts of the valve. A full thickness cross-
section shall be taken for this purpose and the maximum hardness shall not exceed
248 HV10 based on minimum four measurements representing the entire thickness.
3.7 All process-wetted parts, metallic and non-metallic, shall be suitable for the fluids and
service specified by the Purchaser. The service gas composition shall be as given in
Annexure-I.
3.8 Non-metallic parts of the valves (including O-rings, soft seals etc.) intended for
hydrocarbon gas service shall be resistant to explosive decompression.
4.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
4.1 Valve design shall meet the requirements of API 6D and other referred codes and
shall be suitable for the service conditions indicated in Valve Data Sheet. The ASME
Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, shall be used to design the
valve body. Allowable stress requirements shall comply the provisions of ASME
B31.3. In addition, corrosion allowance indicated in Valve Data Sheet shall be
considered in valve design. However, the minimum wall thickness shall not be less
than the minimum requirement of ASME B16.34. The Manufacturer shall have a valid
license to use API 6D monogram for manufacture of ball valves.
4.2 Valve body shall be either fully welded or bolted. Valve body joints with threads are
not permitted.
4.3 Ball shall be of single piece, solid type construction.
4.4 Valves shall be Full Bore (FB) or Reduced Bore (RB) as indicated in Valve Data Sheet.
Full bore valves shall be suitable for the passage of all types of pipeline scraper and
inspection pigs on regular basis without causing damage to either the valve
component or the pig. The full bore valve shall provide an unobstructed profile for
pigging operations in either direction. Full bore valves shall be designed to minimize
accumulation of debris in the seat ring region to ensure that valve movement is not
impeded. In case of reduced bore valves, the nominal valve size indicated in Valve
Data Sheet corresponds to the end connection. Nominal valve size of reduced bore
shall be as per Table below:
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
Nominal Valve Nominal Valve Nominal Valve Nominal Valve

Size Size for Reduced Size Size for Reduced
Bore Bore
DN mm (NPD inches) DN mm (NPD inches) DN mm (NPD inches) DN mm (NPD inches)
50 (2) 50 (2) 600 (24) 500 (20)
80 (2) 50 (2) 650 (26) 550 (22)
100 (4) 80 (3) 700 (28) 600 (24)
150 (6) 100 (4) 750 (30) 600 (24)
200 (8) 150 (6) 800 (32) 650 (26)
250 (10) 200 (8) 850 (34) 700 (28)
300 (12) 250 (10) 900 (36) 750 (30)
350 (14) 250 (10) 950 (38) 800 (32)
400 (16) 300 (12) 1000 (40) 850 (34)
450 (18) 350 (14) 1050 (42) 900 (36)
500 (20) 400 (16) 1200 (48) 1050 (42)
550 (22) 450 (18)
4.5 Ball mounting shall be trunnion/ pivot type or as indicated in Valve Data Sheet. Valve
design shall minimize the possibility of debris ingress into the trunnion as far as
practicable. Ball mounting either trunnion or floating may be as follows :
Sl. No. Rating Floating Ball Design Trunnion Mounted

Design
1. 150 Up to 8” More than 8”
2. 300 Up to 4” More than 4”
3. 600 Nil 2” & Above
4.6 Valve seats shall have metal to metal contact. O-rings or other seals, if used for drip
tight sealing, shall be encased in a suitable groove in such a manner that it can not
be removed from seat ring and there is no extrusion during opening or closing
operation of valve at maximum differential pressure corresponding to valve class
rating. The seat rings shall be so designed as to ensure sealing at low as well as high
differential pressures. Seat design with PTFE insert is not acceptable.
4.7 Valves shall have double block and bleed feature to facilitate complete flushing,
draining and venting of the valve body cavity.
4.8 For valves to be used in liquid service, the body cavity over-pressure shall be
prevented by self relieving seat rings/assemblies. A pressure relief hole in the ball is
not permitted. Self relieving seat rings shall relieve at a body cavity differential
pressure not exceeding 50% of the valve class rating pressure.
4.9 When specified in Valve Data Sheet, valves shall be designed to withstand a
sustained internal vacuum of at least 1 (one) milli-bar in both open and closed
positions.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
4.10 Full Bore Valves of nominal size DN 200mm(8”) & above and Reduced Bore Valves of
nominal size DN 250mm(10”) & above shall have provision for secondary sealant
injection under full line pressure for seat and stem seals. All sealant injection
connections shall be provided with a needle valve, a grease fitting and non-return
valve. Valve design shall have a provision to replace the sealant injection fitting
under full line pressure. Location and arrangement of sealant points shall be as per
Figure-1 (Annexure-II).
4.11 Valves shall be provided with vent and drain connections. Location and arrangement
of vents and drains alongwith provision of valves shall be as per Figure-1 (Annexure-
II).
4.12 Valve design shall ensure repair of stem seals / gland packing under full line
pressure.
4.13 a) Valve ends shall be either flanged or butt welded or one end flanged and one end
butt welded as indicated in Valve Data Sheet. Flanges of the flanged end cast/
forged body valves shall be integrally cast/forged with the body of valve. Face-to-
face/ end-to-end dimensions shall conform to API 6D. Face-to-face and end-to-end
dimensions for valve sizes not specified in API 6D shall be in accordance with ASME
B 16.10. Face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions not shown in API 6D or in ASME B
16.10 shall be as per Manufacturer Standard and shall be subject to approval by
Company.
b) Flanged end shall have dimensions as per ASME B16.5 for valve sizes upto DN
600mm (24 inches) excluding DN 550mm (22 inches) and as per MSS-SP-44 / ASME
B 16.47 series A for valve sizes DN 550mm (22 inches) & for DN 650mm (26 inches)
and above. Flange face shall be either raised face or ring joint type as indicated in
Valve Data Sheet. Flange face finish shall be serrated or smooth as indicated in Valve
Data Sheet. Smooth finish when specified shall be 125 to 200 AARH. In case of RTJ
flanges, the groove hardness shall be minimum 140 BHN.
c) Butt weld end preparation shall be as per ASME B16.25. The thickness of the pipe to
which the valve has to be welded shall be as indicated in Valve Data Sheet. Valves
shall be without transition pups. In case significant difference exists between
thickness of welding ends of valve and connecting pipe, the welding ends of valve
shall have bevel preparation as per ASME B31.4 or ASME B31.8, as applicable.
4.14 Design of weld end valves shall be such that during field welding operations, the soft
seals or plastic components of the valve (where ever used) are not liable to be
damaged. The manufacturer shall furnish necessary field welding instructions and
post-weld test procedure to demonstrate integrity and leak-tightness of valves after
field welding operations.
4.15 Valves shall be provided with ball position indicator and stops of rugged construction
at the fully open and fully closed positions.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
4.16 Full Bore Valves of nominal size ≥ DN 200mm(8”) and Reduced Bore Valves of
nominal size ≥ DN 250mm(10”) shall be equipped with support foot and lifting lugs.
Tapped holes and eye bolts shall not be used for lifting lugs. Height of support foot
shall be kept minimum. The location and size of support foot / lifting lugs shall
ensure unrestrictive operation of vent / drain valves.
4.17 Valve design shall be such as to avoid bimetallic corrosion between carbon steel and
high alloy steel components. Suitable insulation shall be provided as required.
4.18 When indicated in Material Requisition, valves shall have locking devices to lock the
valve either in full open (LO) or full close (LC) positions. Locking devices shall be
permanently attached to the valve operator and shall not interfere with operation of
the valve.
4.19 Valves shall be of fire resistant design as per API 607/BS:6755 (Part-II)/API 6FA, as
indicated in Valve Data Sheet.
4.20 Valves shall be provided with anti-static devices to ensure electrical continuity
between stem / ball and valve body. Valve design shall be such as to avoid bimetallic
corrosion between carbon steel and high alloy steel components. Suitable insulation
shall be provided as required.
4.21 Valves shall be suitable for either buried or above ground installation as indicated in
Valve Data Sheet.
4.22 When stem extension requirement is indicated in Valve Data Sheet, the valves shall
have the following provisions :
a) Valves provided with stem extension shall have water proof outer casing.
Length of stem extension shall be as indicated in Valve Data Sheet. The
length indicated corresponds to the distance between centreline of the valve
opening and the top of mounting flange for valve operating device (gear
operator / power actuator as applicable).
b) Vent and drain connections and sealant injection lines shall be terminated
adjacent to the valve operator by means of suitable piping anchored to the
valve body. Pipe used shall be API 5L Gr. B/ ASTM A 106 Gr. B, with Sch.
160. Fittings shall be ASTM A 105/ ASTM 234 Gr. WPB, Socket Welded, ANSI
class 6000.
c) Stem extension and stem housing design shall be such that the complete
assembly will form a rigid unit giving a positive drive under all conditions with
no possibility of free movement between valve body, stem extension or its
operator.
d) Outer casing of stem extension shall have 3/8” or ½” NPT plugs at the top
and bottom, for draining and filling with oil to prevent internal corrosion.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
4.23 Operating Devices
a) Valves shall have a power actuator or manual operator as indicated in Valve Data
Sheet. In case of manual operator, valve sizes < DN 100mm (4 inches) shall be
wrench operated and valve sizes ≥ DN 150mm (6 inches) shall be gear operated.
Each wrench – operated valve shall be supplied with wrench. Valve design shall be
such that damage due to malfunctioning of the operator or its controls will only
occur in the operator gear train or power cylinder and that damaged parts can be
replaced without the valve cover being removed.
b) The power actuator shall be in accordance with the Purchaser specification issued for
the purpose and as indicated in Valve and Actuator Data Sheet. Operating time shall
be as indicated in Valve Data Sheet. Valve operating time shall correspond to full
close to full open/full open to full close under maximum differential pressure
corresponding to the valve rating. For actuated valves, the actuator torque output
shall be 1.25 times the break torque required to operate the ball valve under the
maximum differential pressure corresponding to the valve class rating.
c) For manual operator of all valves, the diameter of the hand wheel or the length of
operating wrench shall conform to API 6D requirements and be such that under
maximum differential pressure, the total force required to operate the valve does not
exceed 350 N. Manufacturer shall also indicate the number of turns of hand wheel
(in case of gear operators) required for operating the valve from full open to full
close position.
d) Direction of operation of hand wheel or wrench shall be in clock-wise direction while

closing the valve. Hand wheels shall not have protruding spokes.
e) Gear operators, when provided, shall have a self locking provision and shall be fully
encased, in water proof/ splash proof/ dust proof/ weather proof enclosure and shall
be filled with suitable grease.
f) Operating devices shall be designed for easy operation of the valve under maximum
differential pressure corresponding to the valve rating.
4.24 All welds shall be made by welders and welding procedures qualified in accordance
with the provisions of ASME Section IX. The procedure qualification shall include
impact test and hardness test and shall meet the requirements of clauses 3.4 and
3.6 of this specification, respectively.
4.25 All welds shall be stress relieved in accordance with ASME Section VIII.
4.26 Repair by welding is not permitted for fabricated and forged body valves. However
repair by welding as per ASME B16.34 is permitted for cast body valves. Such repairs
shall be carried out at casting supplier’s care only. Repair shall be carried out before
any heat treatment of casting is done. Repair welding procedure qualification shall
include impact test and hardness test and shall meet the requirements of clauses
3.4, 3.5 & 3.6 of this specification, respectively.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
4.27 The tolerance on internal diameter and out of roundness at the ends for welded end
valves shall be as per applicable connected pipe specification as indicated in Valve
Data Sheet.
4.28 When indicated in Material Requisition, valves shall have locking device to lock the
valve either in full open (LO) or full close (LC) positions. Locking devices shall be
permanently attached to the valve operator and shall not interfere with operation of
the valve.
4.29 Valve stem shall be capable of withstanding the maximum operating torque required
to operate the valve against the maximum differential pressure corresponding to
applicable class rating. The combined stress shall not exceed the maximum allowable
stresses specified in ASME Section VIII, Division I. In case of power actuated valves,
the valve stem shall be capable of withstanding maximum output of the power
actuator.
5.1 The Manufacturer shall perform all inspection and tests as per the requirements of
this specification and the relevant codes, prior to shipment, at his works. Such
inspection and tests shall be, but not limited to, the following:
5.1.1 All valves shall be visually inspected. The internal and external surfaces of the valves
shall be free from any strikes, gouges and other detrimental defects. The surfaces
shall be thoroughly cleaned and free from dirt, rust and scales.
5.1.2 Dimensional check on all valves shall be carried out as per the Purchaser approved
drawings.
5.1.3 Chemical composition and mechanical properties shall be checked as per relevant
material standards and this specification, for each heat of steel used.
5.1.4 a) Non-destructive examination of individual valve material and components consisting

of, but not limited to castings, forgings, plate and assembly welds shall be carried
out by the Manufacturer.
b) Body castings of all valve shall be radiographically examined on 100% of the surface
of critical areas as per ASME B16.34. Procedure and acceptance criteria shall be as
per ASME B16.34. The extent of radiography shall be as follows:
ANSI class 150 - All sizes - Nil
ANSI class 300 - < DN 400mm (16”) - Nil

> DN 450mm (18”) - 100%
ANSI class 600 - All sizes - 100%

and above
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
All castings shall be wet magnetic particle inspected 100% of the internal surfaces.
Method and acceptance shall comply with ASME B.16.34.
c) All valves, with body fabricated from plates made or by forgings, shall be
ultrasonically examined in accordance with the procedure and acceptance standard
of Annexure E of ASME B16.34. All forgings shall be wet magnetic particle inspected
100% of the internal surfaces. Method and acceptance shall comply with ASME B
16.34
d) Bodies and bonnets made by welded assembly of segments of castings, forgings,

plates or combinations thereof shall be examined, as applicable, by methods of
clause 5.1.4 b) for cast components or clause 5.1.4 c) for forged components and
plates.
5.1.5 Full inspection by radiography shall be carried out on all welds of pressure containing
parts. Acceptance criteria shall be as per ASME B 31.4 or ASME B31.8, as applicable,
and API 1104.
5.1.6 Welds which in Purchaser’s opinion cannot be inspected by radiographic methods,

shall be checked by ultrasonic or magnetic particle methods and acceptance criteria
shall be as per ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 12 and Appendix 6,
respectively.
5.1.7 a) All finished wrought weld ends subject to welding in field shall be 100%
ultrasonically tested for lamination type defects for a distance of 50mm from the
end. Laminations shall not be acceptable.
b) Weld ends of all cast valves subject to welding in field shall be 100% radiographically
examined and acceptance criteria shall be as per ASME B16.34.
c) After final machining, all bevel surfaces shall be inspected by dye penetrant or wet
magnetic particle methods. All defects longer than 6.35 mm are rejected, as are
defects between 6.35 mm and 1.59mm that are separated by a distance less than 50
times their greatest length. Rejectable defects must be removed. Weld repair of
bevel surface is not permitted.
5.1.8 All valves shall be tested in compliance with the requirements of API 6D. During
pressure testing, valves shall not have sealant lines and other cavities filled with
sealant, grease or other foreign material. The drain, vent and sealant lines shall be
either included in the hydrostatic shell test or tested independently. Test pressure
shall be held for at least 30 minutes. No leakage is permissible during hydrostatic
testing. The body cavity self-relieving feature meeting the requirements of clause 4.8
of this specification shall also be checked.
5.1.9 A supplementary air seat test as per API 6D shall be carried out for all valves. A
bubble tight seal is required without the use of any sealant. No leakage is allowed.
Test pressure shall be held for at least 15 minutes.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
5.1.10 Manufacturer who intends bidding, must submit at bid stage, certificate and report
for successful fire type-tests for valves in accordance with API-607/ BS EN – 10497 /
API 6FA, as applicable in Valve Data Sheet.
Failure to comply with this requirement shall be a cause of rejection of the offer.
5.1.11 Valves shall be subjected to Operational Torque Test as per supplementary test
requirement of API 6D (Appendix C, para C.3.3 Type-II) under hydraulic pressure
equal to maximum differential pressure corresponding to the valve rating.
For manually operated valves, it shall be established that the force required to
operate the valve does not exceed the requirements stated in clause 4.20(c) of this
specification.
5.1.12 Power actuated valves shall be tested after assembly of the valve and actuator at the
valve Manufacturer’s works. At least five open-close-open cycles without internal
pressure and five open-close-open cycles with maximum differential pressure shall be
performed on the valve actuator assembly. The time for full open to full close shall
be recorded during testing.
If required, the actuator shall be adjusted to ensure that the opening and closing
times are within the limits stated in Actuator Data Sheet issued for the purpose.
Hand operator provided on the actuator shall also be checked after the cyclic testing,
for satisfactory manual over-ride performance.
These tests shall be conducted on minimum one valve out of a lot of five(5) valves
of the same size, rating and the actuator model/ type. In case the tests do not meet
the requirements, retesting / rejection of the lot shall be decided by Purchaser’s
Inspector.
5.1.13 Subsequent to successful testing as specified in clause 5.1.11 and 5.1.12 above, one
(1) valve out of the total ordered quantity shall be randomly selected by the
Company Representative for cyclic testing as mentioned below :
a) The valve shall be subjected to at least 100 Open-Close-Open cycles with

maximum differential pressure corresponding to the valve rating.
b) Subsequent to the above, the valve shall be subjected to hydrostatic test and
supplementary air seat test in accordance with clause 5.1.8 and 5.1.9.
In case this valve fails to pass these tests, the valve shall be rejected and two more
valves shall be selected randomly and subjected to testing as indicated above. If
both valves pass these tests, all valves manufactured for the order (except the valve
that failed) shall be deemed acceptable. If either of the two valves fails to pass these
tests, all valves shall be rejected or each valve shall be tested at the option of
manufacturer.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
Previously carried out test of similar nature shall be considered acceptable if the
same has been carried out by Manufacturer in last two years. Valves of two sizes
below and two sizes above the size of valve previously tested, and rating similar or
one rating lower of valve tested previously, shall be qualified.
5.1.14 Checks shall be carried out to demonstrate that the dissimilar metal used in the
valves are successfully insulated as per the requirement of clause 4.17 of this
specification.
5.1.15 When indicated in Valve Data Sheet, valves shall be subjected to anti-static testing
as per supplementary test requirement of API 6D.
5.2 Purchaser reserves the right to perform stage-wise inspection and witness tests as
indicated in clause 5.1 above at Manufacturer’s works prior to shipment.
Manufacturer shall give reasonable access and facilities required for inspection to the
Purchaser’s Inspector.
Purchaser reserves the right to require additional testing at any time to confirm or
further investigate a suspected fault. The cost incurred shall be to Manufacturer’s
account.
In no case shall any action of Purchaser or his Inspector relieve the Manufacturer of
his responsibility for material, design, quality or operation of valves.
Inspection and tests performed/ witnessed by the Purchaser’s Inspector shall in no

way relieve the Manufacturer’s obligation to perform the required inspection and
tests.
6.0 EXTENT OF INSPECTION & TESTING
6.1 Purchaser’s Inspector shall perform inspection and witness tests on all valves or as
indicated in the Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) attached with this specification.
6.2 The hydrostatic testing and cyclic opening and closing of the valves with the
operator shall be witnessed by Purchaser’s Inspector.
7.1 Manufacturer shall submit the following certificates :
a) Mill test certificates relevant to the chemical analysis and mechanical

properties of the materials used for valve construction as per the relevant
standards.
b) Test certificates on hydrostatic and pneumatic tests complete with records of

timing and pressure of each test.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
c) Test reports on radiograph and ultrasonic inspection.
d) Test report on operation of valves conforming to clause 5.1.11 and 5.1.12 of

this specification.
e) All other test reports and certificates as required by API 6D and this
specification.
The certificates shall be valid only when signed by Purchaser’s Inspector. Only those
valves which have been certified by Purchaser’s Inspector shall be despatched from
Manufacturer’s works.
8.0 PAINTING, MARKING & SHIPMENT
8.1 Valve surface shall be thoroughly cleaned, freed from rust and grease and applied
with sufficient coats of corrosion resistant paint. Surface preparation shall be carried
out by shot blasting to SP-6 in accordance with “Steel Structures Painting Council –
Visual Standard SSPC-VIS-1”. For valves to be installed underground, when
indicated in Valve Data Sheet, the external surfaces of the buried portion of valves
shall be painted with three coats of suitable coal tar epoxy resin with a minimum dry
film thickness of 300 microns.
8.2 Manufacturer shall indicate the type of corrosion resistant paint used, in the
drawings submitted for approval.
8.3 All valves shall be marked as per API 6D. The units of marking shall be metric
except Nominal Diameter which shall be in inches. Marking shall be done by die-
stamping on the bonnet or on the housing. However, for buried valves the marking
shall be done on the above ground portion of the stem housing only.
8.4 Valve ends shall be suitably protected to avoid any damage during transit. All
threaded and machined surfaces subject to corrosion shall be well protected by a
coat of grease or other suitable material. All valves shall be provided with suitable
protectors, for flange faces, securely attached to the valves. Bevel ends shall be
protected with metallic or high impact plastic bevel protectors.
8.5 All sealant lines and other cavities of the valve shall be filled with sealant before
shipment.
8.6 Packaging and shipping instructions shall be as per API 6D.
8.7 On packages, following shall be marked legibly with suitable marking ink :
a) Order Number
b) Manufacturer’s Name
c) Valve Size and Rating
d) Tag Number
e) Serial Number
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
9.0 SPARES & ACCESSORIES
9.1 Manufacturer shall furnish list of recommended spares and accessories for valves
required during start-up and commissioning and supply of such spares shall be
included in the price quoted by Manufacturer.
9.2 Manufacturer shall furnish list of recommended spares and accessories required for
two years of normal operation and maintenance of valves.
9.3 Manufacturer shall quote for spares & accessories as per Material Requisition.
10.0 DOCUMENTATION
10.1 At the time of bidding, Manufacturer shall submit the following documents :
a) General arrangement/assembly drawings showing all features and relative

positions and sizes of vents, drains, gear operator / actuator, painting,
coating and other external parts together with overall dimensions.
b) Sectional drawing showing major parts with reference numbers and material
specification. In particular, a blow-up drawing of ball-seat assembly shall be
furnished complying the requirement of clause 4.5 of this specification.
c) Reference list of similar ball valves manufactured and supplied in last five
years indicating all relevant details including project, year, client, location,
size, rating, service etc.
d) Torque curves for the power actuated valves along with the break torque and
maximum allowable stem torque. In addition, sizing criteria and torque
calculations shall also be submitted for power actuated valves.
e) Descriptive technical catalogues of the Manufacturer.
f) Installation, Operational and Maintenance Manual.
g) Copy of valid API 6D certificate.
h) Details of support foot, including dimensions and distance from valve centre
line to bottom of support foot.
i) Quality Assurance Plan enclosed with this tender duly signed, stamped and
accepted.
j) Clause wise list of deviations from this specification, if any.
k) List of recommended spares required during start-up and commissioning.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
l) List of recommended spares required for 2 years of normal operation and

maintenance.
IMPORTANT
The drawings to be submitted alongwith the bid shall be in total compliance

with the requirement of technical specification and data sheets of the
valves with no exception & deviation.
10.2 Within two weeks of placement of order, the Manufacturer shall submit six copies of,
but not limited to, the following drawings, documents and specifications for
Purchaser’s final approval :
a) Detailed sectional arrangement drawings showing all parts with reference

numbers and material specifications as referred to in clause 10.1 above.
b) Assembly drawings with overall dimensions and features. Drawing shall also
indicate the number of turns of hand wheel (in case of gear operators)
required for operating the valve from full open to full close position and the
painting scheme. Complete dimensional details of support foot (where
applicable) shall be indicated in these drawings as referred to in clause 10.1
above.
c) Welding, heat treatment and testing procedures.
d) Details of corrosion resistant paint to be applied on the valves.
e) Design calculation for Pressure containing parts.
f) Procedure for cyclic testing.
Manufacture of valves shall commence only after approval of the above

documents. Once the approval has been given by Purchaser, any changes in
design, material and method of Manufacture shall be notified to Purchaser
whose approval in writing of all changes shall be obtained before the valve is
manufactured.
10.3 Within 30 days from the approval date, Manufacturer shall submit to Purchaser one
reproducible and six copies of the approved drawings, documents and specifications
as listed in clause 10.2 above.
10.4 Prior to shipment, Manufacturer shall submit one reproducible and six copies of the
following:
a) Test certificates as per clause 7.0 of this specification.

b) Manual for installation, erection, maintenance and operation instructions,
including a list of recommended spares for the valves.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
EDITION : 1
11.0 GUARANTEE
11.1 Manufacturer shall guarantee that the materials and machining of valves and fittings
comply with the requirements in this specification and in the Purchase Order.
11.2 Manufacturer is bound to replace or repair all valve parts which should result
defective due to inadequate engineering or to the quality of materials and
machining.
11.3 If valve defect or malfunctioning cannot be eliminated, Manufacturer shall replace

the valve without delay,
11.4 Any defect occurring during the period of Guarantee shall be attended to by making
all necessary modifications and repair of defective parts free of charge to the
Purchaser as per the relevant clause of the bid document.
11.5 All expenses shall be to Manufacturer’s account.

SPECIFICATION
FOR
CIVIL WORKS - TERMINALS
(CIVIL ENGINEERING SECTION)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
E:\BINITA\PROJECTS\2009\GAIL\BNPL\Laying Tender\Vol III\Civil\01 Civil Works MEC-S-05-11-01.doc

MECON LIMITED CIVIL ENGINEERING STANDARD SPECIFICATION
DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
TITLE CIVIL WORKS – TERMINALS SPECIFICATION NO. Page 1 of 177
MEC/S/05/11/01 REVISION 0
INDEX
PART - I - MATERIALS
PART - II - WORKMANSHIP
PART - III - NORMS OF CEMENT CONSUMPTION
PART - IV - DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
PART - I
MATERIALS

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Standard
1.3 Approval and Tests
1.4 Codes
1.5 Rejection of Materials
2.0 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE

2.1 Aggregates
2.2 Coarse Aggregates
2.3 Fine Aggregates
2.4 Lime
2.5 Surkhi
2.6 Cement
2.7 Water
2.8 Admixtures for Concrete
2.9 Interval of Routine Test
3.0 STEEL
3.1 For Reinforcement
3.2 For Binding Works
3.3 For Light Structural Work and Insert
3.4 Steel Tubes
3.5 Foundation Bolts
3.6 Steel tubes for Non-structural use
3.7 Threaded Fasteners
3.8 Testing
3.9 Cast Steel
3.10 Conduits
4.0 ASBESTOS CEMENT PRODUCTS

4.1 General
4.2 Building Boards
4.3 Flat Sheets
4.4 Pipes and Fittings
4.5 Corrugated and Semi-corrugated sheets & Specials
5.0 BRICK AND STONES

5.1 Bricks
5.2 Handling
5.3 Samples and Inspection
5.4 Brick Bats

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
5.5 Exposed Bricks

5.6 Laterite Stone Blocks
5.7 Stones
5.8 Hollow and Solid Concrete Blocks
5.9 Cement, Lime and Water
5.8 Sand for Masonry Mortar
6.0 SAND FOR PLASTERING
7.0 FLOORING & PAVING

7.1 Cement & Binders
7.2 Aggregates
7.3 Tiles
7.4 Natural Stones
7.5 Adhesives
7.6 Pigments
7.7 Hardening Agents
7.8 Dividing Strips
7.9 Marble Chips
8.0 TIMBER
8.1 General
8.2 Hollock (Terminalia Myriocarpa)
8.3 Country Wood
8.4 Teak Wood
8.5 Storage & Inspection
8.6 Moisture Content
8.7 Allowance for Bulk Timber
8.8 Flush Door Shutters, Shelves
8.9 Unveneered Particle Board
8.10 Veneered Particle Board
8.11 Plywood
8.12 Block Board
8.13 Wire Mesh Shutters
9.0 FITTINGS FOR DOORS, WINDOWS ETC.

9.1 General
9.2 Hinges
9.3 Sliding Door Bolts
9.4 Door Latch
9.5 Tower Bolts
9.6 Door Handles
9.7 Mortice Lock
9.8 Floor Door Stopper
9.9 Hooks and Eyes

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
9.10 Casement Window Fasteners

9.11 Casement Brass Stays
9.12 Quadrant Stays
9.13 Fan Light Pivots
9.14 Fan light catch
9.15 Chain with Hook for Fan Light
9.16 Hasp and Staple
9.17 Cupboard Lock
9.18 Hydraulic Door Closer
9.19 Steel Frames
10.0 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS,COLLAPSIBLE GATES & ROLLING

SHUTTERS
10.1 General
10.2 Steel doors, Windows, Ventilators and Collapsible Gates
10.3 Aluminium Doors, Windows & Ventilators
10.4 Steel Rolling Shutters, Rolling Grills
10.5 MS Bolts etc.,
10.6 Hardware
10.7 Mastic
11.0 GLASS
11.1 General
11.2 Plain Transparent Glass
11.3 Ground or Frosted Glass
11.4 Wired Glass
11.5 Thickness
11.6 Inspection
12.0 PAINT
12.1 General
12.2 Sampling & Testing
12.3 Storage
12.4 Paints for Priming
12.5 Paints for Finishing
12.6 White Wash
12.7 Colour Wash
12.8 Cement Paint
12.9 Distemper
12.10 Varnish
12.11 Polish
12.12 Plastic (Acrylic) emulsion Paint
12.13 Floor Polish – Paste
13.0 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
13.1 Integral Cement water proofing compounds

13.2 Bitumen
13.3 Bitumen Primer
13.4 Bitumen Felt
13.5 Bitumen Mastic
13.6 Bituminous Compounds
13.7 Surface Application Materials
13.8 High Polymer, based Admixtures & Epoxy Based Emulsion & Paints
14.0 WATER BAR

14.1 General
14.2 Jointing
15.0 LEAD
15.1 General
16.0 BUILDING PAPER

16.1 Gypsum Building Materials
17.0 FILLING MATERIAL

17.1 General
17.2 Mastic Bitumen
17.3 Flexible Boards
18.0 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION (INTERNAL)

18.1 General
18.2 P.V.C Waste Pipe
18.3 Stoneware Pipes
18.4 HCI Pipe
18.5 Cast Iron Pipes : Rainwater pipe
18.6 Water Closet (Indian & European)
18.7 Wash Hand Basin
18.8 Sink
18.9 Flat Back Lipped Urinal
18.10 Mirror Frames
18.11 Toilet Shelf
18.12 Towel Rail
18.13 Toilet Paper Holder
18.14 Soap Container
18.15 C.P. Flush valve - 15 litre for EWC
18.16 C.P. Flush valve - 5 litre for Urinals
18.17 Gully Trap
18.18 C.I. Manhole Cover
18.19 Polycrete Sanitary Fittings
18.20 Fibre Glass Sink

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
19.0 WATER SUPPLY & PLUMBING (INTERNAL)

19.1 General
19.2 Galvanised Iron Pipes and Fittings
19.3 PVC Pipes
19.4 R.C.C Asbestos, Prestressed Pipes and Fittings
19.5 Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings
19.6 Steel Pipes
19.7 Bib Tap and Stop Tap
19.8 Valves
19.9 Storage Tank
20.0 EXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY, DRAINAGE

20.1 C.I. Pipes
20.2 Washers
20.3 Gaskets
20.4 Caulking Lead
20.5 S.W. Pipes
20.6 C.I. Pipes
20.7 Steel Pipes
20.8 CI Manhole Cover
20.9 Steel Reinforcement
20.10 RCC Pipes
21.0 ROAD MATERIALS

21.1 General
21.2 Soling Stones
21.3 Coarse Aggregate for Water Bound Macadam
21.4 Screenings
21.5 Stone Chips for Bituminous Surfacing
21.6 Sand
21.7 Binder
21.8 Materials for Cement Concrete Floor
21.9 Kerbs
22.0 MATERIALS NOT SPECIFIED

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This part deals with the requirements of materials for use in permanent work with regard
to quality, testing, approval and storage, before they are used on work. This part is
supplementary to Part-II: Workmanship and Other Parts of the Technical Specifications
for civil works.
1.2 Standard
A high standard of quality is required for all materials used in permanent work. They
shall be the best of the kind obtainable indigenously in each case and shall be procured
from manufacturers of repute in order to ensure uniformity of quality and assurance of
timely supply.
1.3 Approval and Tests
1.3.1 All materials to be used in permanent construction shall be subject to approval of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall apply sufficiently in advance with samples of the
materials including the supporting test results from the approved laboratory and other
documentary evidence from the manufacturer wherever applicable and indicating the
types of materials and their respective sources. The delivery of materials at site shall
commence only after the approval of the quality, grading and sources of the materials.
1.3.2 The quality of all materials once approved shall be maintained throughout the period of
construction and periodical tests shall be carried out to ensure that it is maintained. Such
routine tests shall be listed under the different materials and/or as may be ordered by the
Engineer from time to time.
1.3.3 Where a particulars "Brand" or "Make" of material is specified in the Schedule of Items
or Technical Specifications, such "Brand" or Make" of material alone shall be used on
the work. Should it become necessary for any reason such as non-availability, to use
any material other than the specified "Brand" or "Make", the Contractor shall submit
sample of the same to the Engineer for approval together with test certificates and other
documents necessary for examining and giving approval thereof. Should such change
or substitution of material subsequently approved result in use of material of price lower
than that of the material specified in the Schedule of Items or Technical Specifications,
the rates for the appropriate items of work affected by the substitution shall be
proportionately reduced. In case the substitution results in use of material of price higher
than that specified in the Schedule of Items or Technical Specifications, no upward
revision of the rates will be allowed.
1.4 Codes
1.4.1 Unless mentioned otherwise, current versions of all codes, specifications and standards
issued by the Indian Standards Institution and Indian Roads Congress shall be fully
applicable to these specifications. In the absence of appropriate publication by ISI or
IRC, adaptable specification of the International Organization for Standardization shall
apply.
1.4.2 In case of any conflict in meaning between these specifications and those of ISI or IRC,
the provisions of these specifications shall prevail.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
1.5 Rejection of Materials
1.5.1 Any material brought to site which, in the opinion of the Engineer is damaged,
contaminated, deteriorated or does not comply with the requirement of this specification,
shall be rejected.
1.5.2 If the routine site tests or random site tests show that any of the materials, brought to site,
do not comply in any way with the requirements of this specification, then that material
shall be rejected.
1.5.3 The Contractor shall remove from site any and all such rejected material within the time
specified by the Engineer.
2.0 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE
2.1 Aggregates
2.1.1 Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of IS: 383, "Coarse and Fine Aggregates
for Concrete". They shall be hard, strong, dense, durable, clean and free from veins and
adherent coating, vegetable matter and other deleterious substances; and shall be
obtained from approved sources. Aggregates shall not contain any harmful material
such as pyrites, coal, lignite, shale or similar laminated material, clay, alkali, soft
fragments, sea shells and organic impurities in such quantity as to affect the strength or
durability of concrete. Aggregates which are chemically reactive with alkalis of cement
shall not be used. Aggregates which are not sufficiently clean shall be washed in clean
fresh water to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.1.2 Testing
All aggregates shall be subject to inspection and testing. The Contractor shall submit
samples for testing as may be required by the Engineer. Sampling and testing shall be
carried out in accordance with IS: 2386, "Methods of Test for Aggregates for concrete".
2.1.3 Grading
The Contractor shall ensure that the full range of aggregate used for making concrete is
graded in such a way as to ensure a dense workable mix. The delivery of aggregates
will commence only when the Engineer has approved the samples and the quality and
grade shall be maintained consistent and equal to the approved sample. Before
construction commences, the Contractor shall carryout a series of tests on the
aggregates and on the concrete made therefrom to determine the most suitable grading
of the available aggregates. Once the most suitable grading has been found, the grading
shall be adopted for the construction of the works and periodic tests shall be carried out
to ensure that it is maintained.
2.1.3.1 Size and grading of fine aggregates
The grading shall conform to IS: 383 and shall be within the limits of Grading Zone-III.
The maximum size of particle shall be 4.75mm and shall be graded down. Sand
containing more than 10% of fine grains passing through 76 mesh sieve or having the
fineness modulus less than 2 shall not be used for concrete work.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
2.1.3.2 Size and grading of coarse aggregates
The nominal maximum size of the aggregates for each mark of concrete or for each type
of work shall depend upon the description of the particular item in the Schedule of Items
and/or according to relevant clauses of IS: 456. The aggregates shall be well-graded
and the grading shall conform to relevant requirements of IS: 383 depending upon the
maximum nominal size as specified or as required.
2.1.3.3 Fine aggregate for mortar and grout

The grading of fine aggregate for mortar and grout shall be within the limits of grading
zone III and IV as defined in IS: 383.
2.1.4 Storage & stacking
Care shall be taken in the storage to avoid intrusion of any foreign materials into the
aggregates and where two types of aggregates are stored close to each other, they shall
be separated by a wall or plate. When stock piling care shall be taken to avoid forming
pyramids resulting in segregation of different sized materials. The height of the stacks
shall be generally limited to 150 cm.
2.2 Coarse Aggregates
2.2.1 Types
The type of coarse aggregate viz., stone chips, gravel or broken brick shall be as
described in the Scheduled of Items. Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of
Items, stone chips shall be used as coarse aggregate.
2.2.2 Stone chips
It shall be crushed or broken from hard stone obtained from approved quarries of
igneous or metamorphic origin. The stone chips shall be hard, strong, dense, durable
and angular in shape. It shall be free from soft, flyable, thin, flat, elongated or laminated
and flaky pieces and free from dirt clay lumps, and other deleterious materials like coal,
lignites, silt, soft fragments, and other foreign materials which may affect adversely the
strength & durability of concrete. The total amount of deleterious /foreign materials
shall not exceed 5% by weight according to relevant clause of IS: 383. If found
necessary the stone chips shall be screened and washed before use.
2.2.3 Gravel
It can be either river bed shingle or pit gravel. It shall be sound, hard, clean, irregular in
shape and suitably graded in size with or without some broken fragments. It shall be free
from flat particles, powdered clay, silt, loam and other impurities. Before using, the gravel
shall be screened and washed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. However, the
foreign/deleterious materials shall not exceed 5% by weight.
2.2.4 Broken bricks
These shall be obtained by breaking well burnt or over burnt dense brick bats. They
shall be homogenous in texture, well graded in size, roughly cubical in shape, clean and
free from dirt, clay, silt or any other deleterious matter. Before use, these shall be
screened.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
2.3 Fine Aggregates
2.3.1 Unless specified otherwise it shall either natural river sand or pit sand.
2.3.2 Sand shall be clean, sharp, strong, angular and composed of hard siliceous material. It
shall not contain harmful organic impurities in such form or quantities as to affect
adversely the strength and durability of concrete. Sand for reinforced concrete shall not
contain any acidic or other material which is likely to attach steel reinforcement. The
percentage of all deleterious materials including silt, clay etc., shall not exceed 5% by
weight. If directed, sand shall be screed or washed before use to the satisfaction of
Engineer.
2.3.3 Crusher dust
Crusher stone dust that is retained on 300 micron sieve may be used as replacement for
certain quantum of sand aiming to improve the fineness modulus of fine aggregate. The
quantum of replacement for sand shall be arrived at by suitable trial mixes. The
Engineer will decide the final usage of crusher dust having regard to the circumstances.
2.4 Lime
Lime for mortars and concrete shall conform to IS: 712. The total of CaO and Mgo
content in quick lime shall not be less than 85% (MgO shall not exceed 5%). Quicklime,
after slaking, shall leave a residue of not more than 5% by weight on IS sieve 85.
2.5 Surkhi
Surkhi used in lime concrete for flooring, terracing etc., shall conform to IS: 1344.
2.6 Cement
Ordinary Portland cement complying with the requirements of IS:8112 shall be used for
making plain and reinforced concrete. cement grout and mortar.
Other types of cement may be used depending upon the requirements of certain jobs
with the approval of the Engineer. These shall conform to the following standards:-
Portland Pozzolana Cement IS:1489
Rapid Hardening Portland Cement IS:8041
53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement IS:12269
Hydrophobic Portland Cement IS:8043
Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement IS:12330

`
2.6.1 Testing of samples
The Contractor shall supply a copy of the manufacturer's test certificate for each
consignment of cement supplied by him and consignments shall be used on work in the

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
order of delivery. The Contractor shall supply samples of cement to the Engineer as
frequently as he may require for testing. The sampling of cement for testing shall be
according to IS: 3535. All tests shall be in accordance with the relevant clauses of IS:
4031 & IS: 4032.
2.6.2 Contractor's responsibility
From the time that a consignment of cement is delivered at site and tested and approved
by the Engineer until such time as the cement is used on the works, the Contractor shall
be responsible for keeping the same in sound and acceptable condition. Any cement
which deteriorates while in the Contractor's charge and is rejected as unsuitable by the
Engineer, shall be removed from the site and outside the limits of work within two days of
ordering such removal by the Engineer.
2.6.3 Stock of cement
In order to ensure due progress, the Contractor shall at all times maintain on the site
atleast such stock of cement as the Engineer may from time to time consider necessary.
No cement shall be used upon the works until it has been accepted as satisfactory by
the Engineer.
2.6.4 Storage of cement
The cement shall be stored in such manner as to permit easy access for proper
inspection and in a suitable weather tight, well ventilated building to protect it from
dampness caused by ingress of moisture from any source. Different types of cement
shall be stored separately. Cement bags shall be stacked at least 15 to 20 cm clear of
the floor bearing a space of 60 cm around the exterior walls. The cement shall not be
stacked more than 10 bags high. Each consignment of cement shall be stacked
separately to permit easy access for inspection.
2.7 Water
Water used for mixing concrete and mortar and for curing shall be clean and free from
injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, salts, sugar, organic materials or other substances
that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. The pH value of water shall generally be
not less than '6'. Water has to meet the requirements mentioned in clause 4.3 of IS: 456.
Water shall be obtained from an approved source. Where it is obtained from a source
other than a supply main, it shall be tested to establish its suitability.
2.8 Admixture for Concrete
2.8.1 Approval
Admixtures to concrete shall not be used without the written consent of the Engineer.
When permitted, the Contractor shall furnish full details from the manufacturer and shall
carryout such test as the Engineer may require before any admixture is used in the work.
2.8.2 Usage
2.8.2.1 Admixtures may be used to modify one or more of the following properties of FRESH
CONCRETE.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
a) To increase workability without increasing water content or to decrease the

water content at the same workability.
b) To retard or accelerate both initial and final setting times.
c) To reduce or prevent settlement.
d) To create slight expansion in concrete and mortar.
e) To modify the rate or capacity for bleeding or both.
f) To reduce segregation of concrete, mortars and grouts.
g) To improve penetration and or pumpability of concrete, mortars and grouts.
h) To reduce rate of slump loss.
2.8.2.2 Admixtures may also be used to modify one or more of the following properties of
HARDENED CONCRETE.
a) To retard or reduce heat generation during early hardening.
b) To accelerate the rate of strength development.
c) To increase the strength of concrete or mortar (Compressive, tensile or flexural).
d) To increase the durability or resistance to severe conditions of exposure

including the application de-icing salts.
e) To decrease the capillary flow of water.
f) To decrease the permeability to liquids.
g) To control the expansion caused by the reaction of alkalis with certain aggregate
constituents.
h) To produce cellular concrete.
i) To increase the bond of concrete to steel reinforcement.
j) To increase the bond between old and new concrete.
k) To improve impact resistance and abrasion resistance.
l) To inhibit the corrosion of embedded metal.
m) To produce coloured concrete or mortar.
While modifying any particular property, care shall be taken to ensure that other
properties are not affected adversely.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
2.8.3 Types
2.8.3.1 Integral water proofer
Admixtures used as integral water proofer shall be free of chlorides and sulphates and
shall conform to IS: 2645. The application and dozes shall be as per manufacturer's
specification.
2.8.3.2 Finely Divided mineral admixtures
1) CEMENTITIOUS - Natural cements like hydraulic lime, slag cements (mixtures

of blast furnace slag and lime) and granulated blast furnace slag.
2) POZZOLANIC - A siliceous or siliceous and aluminium material which in itself

possesses little or no cementitious value, but will in finely divided form and in
presence of moisture, chemically react with calcium hydroxide at ordinary
temperatures to form compounds possessing cementitious properties, e.g. Fly
ashes, volcanic glass, diatomaceous earth and certain shales and clays either
heat treated or natural.
3) OTHER - Finely divided quartz, silica sands dolomite and calcite limestone,
marble, granite and other rocks, asbestos waste hydrated lime.
These being extremely fine powders, their mineral admixtures will influence the fresh
paste in a manner similar to cement. They can be used to augment the cement in
mixtures deficient in fines. Many concrete contain large amount of portland cement than
necessary for strength requirements to provide workability or pumpability. A portion or all
of this excess cement may be replaced with a suitable mineral admixture. They are
usually used in the proportion of 15-35% by weight of the cement and in proportioning
the concrete should be considered as part of the cementing medium, provided they are
uniformly blended with cement.
The placeability of concrete containing blast furnace slag is generally greater than
indicated by static slump test or water/cement ratio. In medium or rich concrete, the
increase in water requirements caused by their use may reduce strength. Pozzolanic
admixtures usually increases the strength of concrete especially at later ages. The
addition of fly-ash, natural pozzolana and granulated slag in sufficient quantities will
increase the sulphate resistance of concrete.
2.8.3.3 Accelerating admixtures
1) Calcium Chlorides will also affect the following properties;
a) may increase drying, shrinkage and creep. The longer the concrete is
allowed to cure, the less will be the effect on shrinkage and creep.
b) may lower the resistance of concrete to freezing and thawing and to

attack by sulphates and other injurious solutions.
c) may increase the rate of temperature residue to the heat of hydration

and in large sections may therefore increase the stresses caused by
thermal contraction.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
d) can cause corrosion of adequately embedded reinforcing steel in the

concrete. Where large concentrations of stray currents are present,
such as in concrete used in structures for electric railroads, power
houses or electrolytic reduction plants.
e) galvanized metal embedded in concrete containing calcium chloride

may be expected to corrode at an accelerated rate.
f) combinations of metals such as aluminium alloy, conduit and steel

reinforcing should not be used in concrete containing calcium chloride
as electrolytic corrosion may take place.
For allowable limits of calcium chloride refer ACI Committee 201.
Calcium Chloride will not increase the flexural strength of concrete to the same degree
as the compressive strength and decreases in the flexural strength are generally
obtained at or after 28 days. The total chloride content in the concrete should be limited
as specified in IS: 456.
2) Calcium aluminate cement blended with portland cement:
Strength will be reduced significantly, shrinkage and swelling on immersion will

increase drastically and durability will be poor.
2.8.3.4 Air-entraining admixture
a) The water reduction is possible due to entrained air. The volume of this water
reduction is less than the volume of entrained air, therefore to compensate for
the volume of entrained air, the fine aggregate volume must also be reduced.
b) Despite reduction in the water/cement ratio usually obtained by the use of air-
entrainers, it may reduce strength, particularly, in concretes of high or moderate
cement content.
2.8.3.5 Water reducing and set controlling admixtures
a) Admixtures of the hydroxylated carboxylic acid type may tend to increase the
bleeding rate and segregation in concrete deficient in fines (aggregate fines of
cement).
b) When prolonged retardation is employed care must be taken to prevent the

drying of the concrete.
c) The water reducing admixture should be added at the same time in the mixing
cycle, in order to obtain a uniform setting time among the batches.
d) Then admixtures in many cases will increase the slump loss.
e) Increases in the flexural strength of concrete containing water reducing

admixtures are usually attained but they are not proportionately as great as the
increase in the compressive strength.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
2.8.4 General
2.8.4.1 Suitable remedial measures as recommended by the manufacturers and approved by

the Engineer shall be taken to eliminate any disadvantages arising from the mix of
admixtures.
2.8.4.2 While using the admixtures the maximum amount of chloride and sulphate expressed
either in percentage of cement or concrete shall not exceed the limit as specified in the
relevant I.S. codes.
2.9 Interval of Routine Test
2.9.1 The routine tests of materials, delivered at site, shall be at the following intervals :
Aggregates - Fortnightly or for every 200 m3 for each aggregate whichever is

earlier.
Cement - Fortnightly or for each consignment, with-in 4 days of delivery.
Water - Once in two months for each source of supply.
Reinforcement - For each consignment within 4 days of delivery.
3.0 STEEL
3.1 For Reinforcement
Reinforcing bars for concrete shall be round steel bars of the following types as may be
shown on the drawing:
i) Plain mild steel bars conforming to Grade-I of IS:432 "Mild Steel and Medium
Tensile Steel and Hard Drawn Steel wire for Concrete Reinforcement:".
ii) Deformed mild steel bars conforming to IS:1139 "Hot Rolled Mild Steel, Medium
Tensile Steel and High Yield Strength Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement".
iii) High Yield strength deformed bars conforming to IS:1786 "Cold Worked Steel
High Strength Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement".
iv) Reinforcement fabrics conforming to IS: 1566 "Hard Drawn Steel Wire Fabric for
Concrete Reinforcement.
All reinforcement bars shall be of uniform cross sectional area and be free from loose mill
scales, dust, loose rust, coats of paint, oil or other coatings which may destroy or reduce
bond. Unit weight of reinforcement bars shall be according to IS:1786-1985.
3.2 For binding works
Binding wire for reinforcement shall be annealed steel wire 18-20 BWG or not less than
0.9 mm diameter conforming to z IS:280 - "Specification for Mild Steel Wire".

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
3.3 For light structural work and inserts
Steel for light structural work and for preparation of inserts and embedments shall
conform to IS: 2062-1992 - "Steel for general structural purposes - Specifications".
3.4 Steel Tubes
Steel tubes for use in light structural work and inserts shall be of light or medium class
(as may be specified on drawings or the schedule of items) and of grade YST 25
conforming to IS:1161 - "Specification for Steel Tubes for Structural Purposes".
3.5 Foundation Bolts
3.5.1 Bolts to be embedded in concrete shall, unless otherwise detailed in drawings, conform
to IS:5624 - "Specification for Foundation Bolts". Material for bolts, shall, unless
otherwise mentioned on drawings or the schedule of items, be of mild steel conforming to
IS: 2062.
3.5.2 Nuts and locknuts shall conform to IS: 1363 - "Specification for Black Hexagon Bolts,
Nuts and Lock Nuts (diameter 6-39 mm) and Black Hexagon Screws (diameter 6 - 24
mm)" and to IS: 3138 - "Specification for Hexagon Bolts and Nuts (M-42 to M-150)".
3.5.3 Plain washers shall conform to IS: 2016 - "Specification for Plain Washers and spring
wasters shall conform to IS: 3063 "Spring washers for Bolts, Nuts and Screws".
3.6 Steel Tubes for Non-structural Use
3.6.1 Steel tubes for non-structural use shall conform to IS: 1239 (Part-I) "Specification for Mild
Steel Tubes, Tubular and Other Wrought Steel fittings, Part-I : Mild Steel Tubes".
3.6.2 Fittings for steel tubes used for non structural purposes shall conform to IS: 1239 (Part-II)
"Specification for Mild Steel Tubular and Other Wrought Steel Pipe Fittings".
3.7 Threaded Fasteners
Bolts and nuts for fastening shall conform to IS: 1367 - "Technical Supply Conditions for
Threaded Fasteners".
3.8 Testing
Test certificates from manufacturer shall be submitted for each consignment. Any
additional test which the Engineer may require shall be done according to the relevant IS.
3.9 Cast Steel
3.9.1 Quality
Cast steel shall conform to IS: 1030 "Cast Steel for General Engineering Purpose".
Unless otherwise specified, it shall conform to Grade-2.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
3.10 Conduits
3.10.1 Steel for electrical wiring
Rigid steel conduits for electrical use shall conform to IS: 1653 for rigid pipes and to IS:
3480 for flexible conduits. Fittings for conduits shall conform to IS: 2667.
All conduit pipes shall be finished with galvanized or stove-enameled surface. All
accessories shall be of threaded type and pipes shall be jointed by means of screwed
couplers only. Bend in conduits shall be made to the dimension shown in drawing, but a
minimum of 12 times the diameter. Where shown in drawing they shall be treated with
anticorrosive preservative as specified.
3.10.2 Non-metallic for electrical wiring
Non-metallic conduits for electrical use shall conform to IS:2509 for rigid pipes and to IS:
6946 for flexible pipes. Fittings shall conform to IS: 3419.
Bends shall be achieved by bending the pipe by inserting suitable solid or inspection type
normal bends, elbows or similar fittings.
4.0 ASBESTOS CEMENT PRODUCTS
4.1 General
Asbestos cement products shall be free from visible defects, uniform in colour, of
required density, length, thickness and diameter within the allowable tolerance. They
shall be obtained from an approved source of manufacture and stored safely. Methods
of test shall be according to IS: 5913 - 'Method of Test for Asbestos Cement Products".
4.2 Building Boards
Building boards shall conform to IS:2098 - "Asbestos Cement Building Boards". They
shall, when tested in two perpendicular directions, take a lead of not less than 15 kg for
Class-A and 10 kg for Class-B boards. The boards shall show water absorption of not
more than 40% of their dry weight.
4.3 Flat Sheets
Flat sheets shall conform to IS: 2096 - "Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets". They shall have
a bending stress of not less than 225 kg/cm2 and a density of 1.6 kg/cm3 for
compressed sheets and a bending stress of not less than 160 kg/cm2 and a density of
1.2 kg/cm3 for uncompressed sheets.
4.4 Pipes and fittings
Pressure pipes shall conform to IS: 1592 - "Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes and to
IS: 9627 - "Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes (Light Duty)". Pipes for sewerage and drai-
nage shall conform to IS: 6908 - "Asbestos Cement Pipes and Fittings for Sewerage and
Drainage". Building pipes gutters and fittings shall conform to IS: 1626 - "Asbestos
Cement Building Pipes and Pipe Fittings".
Pressure pipes shall satisfy hydraulic testing test and transverse crushing test as per IS.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.5 Corrugated and Semi-Corrugated Sheets and Specials
These shall conform to IS: 459 - "Unreinforced Corrugated and Semi-Corrugated

Asbestos Cement Sheets". Unless otherwise stated the sheets shall be corrugated and
not less than 6mm thick. The sheets shall have a lead bearing capacity of not less than
5 N/mm width of specimen and shall not absorb more water than 28% of its dry weight.
5.0 BRICKS
5.1 Bricks
Bricks for masonry in foundations, walls and other locations shall be common burnt clay
building bricks having minimum crushing strength of 50 kg/cm2, or such other strength
as may be described in the Schedule of Items, when tested in accordance with IS: 1077 -
"Common Burnt Clay Building Bricks". They shall be sound, hard and thoroughly well
burnt, but not over-burnt, with uniform size having rectangular, faces with parallel sides
and sharp straight right angled edges and be of uniform colour with fine compact uniform
texture. Bricks shall be of uniform deep red cherry or copper colour. They shall be free
from flaws, cracks and nodules of free lime. Water absorption after 24 hours immersion
in cold water shall be not more than 20% by weight. They shall not absorb more than
10% by weight of water after immersion for six hours. They shall emit a clear metallic
ringing sound when struck by a mallet and shall not break when dropped on their face,
from a height of 60 cm. Fractured surface shall show homogenous, fine grained uniform
texture, free from cracks, air holes, laminations, grits, lumps of lime, efflorescence or any
other defect which may impair their strength, durability, appearance and usefulness for
the purpose intended. Under-burnt or vitrified bricks shall not be used. Samples of
bricks brought to the site shall be tested periodically for compression and other tests
according to IS: 3495, Parts-I, II & III - "Method of Test for Burnt Clay Building Bricks".
Where the size of bricks is not specifically mentioned , it shall be taken to mean
conventional sizes as is commonly available in the area. The bricks shall be classified on
the basis of average compressive strength as given in table – I of IS:1077-1992.
5.2 Handling
Bricks shall be unloaded by hand and carefully stacked and all broken bricks shall be
removed from the site.
5.3 Samples and Inspection
Representative samples shall be submitted by the Contractor and approved samples

retained by the Engineer for comparison and future reference. Bricks shall be obtained
from approved manufacturer. All bricks shall be subject to inspection on the site and
approval of the Engineer who may reject such consignments as are considered by him to
be inferior to the quality specified. The Contractor shall provide all labour and plant
required for the inspection and conduct such test as shall be required by the Engineer
with out additional charges.
5.4 Brick Bats
Brick bats shall be obtained from well burnt bricks.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
5.5 Exposed Bricks
5.5.1 Facing Bricks

The facing bricks made from suitable soils shall be free from cracks, flaws, nodules of
free lime warpage and organic matter. These shall be thoroughly burnt and shall have
plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and sharp straight right angled edges. Facing
bricks shall have uniform colour and even texture. Unless otherwise specified, facing
bricks shall be machine moulded. Selected hand moulded bricks may also be used as
facing bricks where specified. As far as possible, total requirement of facing bricks for a
work shall be arranged from the same kiln. Bricks with chipped edges and broken
corners shall not be used.
5.5.2 Dimensions and Tolerances
The standard sizes of machine moulded facing bricks shall be as specified.
5.5.3 The permissible tolerances shall be as under :
Dimensions Tolerance (For Machine moulded

bricks)
Mm mm
Length 190 or 225 ±3
Width 90 or 111 ± 1.5
Thickness 40 or 44 ± 1.5
Note: Tolerance and Dimensions for selected hand moulded bricks ± 4mm in length and
± 3mm in width and thickness).
5.6 Laterite Stone Blocks

These shall conform to IS : 3620 - "Laterite Stone Blocks for Masonry". The laterite
stone blocks shall have a minimum crushing strength of 20 kg/cm2. The blocks shall be
minimum 15 cm thick and not exceeding 30 cm thick. They shall be dressed to the
desired sizes and shapes with an axe. Laterite stones shall be well seasoned by
exposure to air before dressing and using on work.
5.7 Stones
5.7.1 Stones used shall be strong, durable, dense, compact, close grained, homogeneous,
fire resistant and shall be obtained from sources approved by Engineer. Stones shall
additionally be hard, sound, free from cracks, decay and other flaws or weathering and
shall be easily workable. Stones with round surfaces shall not be made use of.
5.7.2 Stones shall have a crushing strength of not less than 200 kg/cm2. Stones with lesser
crushing strength may be used in works with prior approval of the Engineer. Stones
shall be non-porous and when tested in accordance with IS : 1124 - "Method of Test for
Determination of Water Absorption Etc.," shall show water absorption of less than 5%
of its dry weight when soaked in water for 24 hours. Tests for durability and weathering
shall be done in accordance with IS : 1126 and IS : 1125 respectively. The working of
stones to required sizes and their dressing shall be as per IS : 1127 Recommendations
for dimensions and workmanship of natural building stones for Masonry work and IS:
1129. Dressing of Natural Building Stones". Stones especially limestone and sand
stones shall be well seasoned by exposure to air before use in construction works.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
5.7.3 Size
Normally stones shall be of size that could be lifted and placed by hand, between 20 to
30 kg per piece. The length of stones shall not exceed 3 times the height and the
breadth on base shall not be greater than 3/4 of the thickness of wall nor less than 15
cm. The height of stone may be upto 30 cm.
5.7.4 Dressing
5.7.4.1 Random rubble

Stones shall be hammer dressed on the face, the sides, and the beds to enable it to
come into close proximity with the neighbouring stone. The bushings in the face shall
not project more than 4 cm on all exposed faces and 1 cm on a face to be plastered.
5.7.4.2 Coursed rubble - First sort

Face stones shall be hammer dressed on all beds, and joints, so as to give them
approximately rectangular block shape. These shall be squared on all joints and beds.
The bed joint shall be rough chisel dressed for atleast 8 cm back from the face, and
side joints for at least 4 cm such that no portion of the dressed surface is more than 6
mm from a straight edge placed on it. The bushing on the face shall not project more
than 4 cm as an exposed face and one cm on a face to be plastered. The hammer
dressed stone shall also have a rough tooling for a minimum width of 2.5 cm along the
four edges of the face of the stone, when stone work is exposed.
5.7.4.3 Coursed rubble - Second sort

Dressing shall be as specified in 5.7.4.2 except that no portion of dressed surface shall
exceed 10 mm from a straight edge placed on it.
5.7.4.4 Stone for veneering

Stone lining upto 8 cm shall be treated as veneering work. The stone shall be cut into
slabs or required thickness along the planes parallel to the natural bed. Every stone
shall be cut to the required size and shape so as to be free from any waviness and to
give truly vertical and horizontal joints. Adjoining faces shall be fine chisel dressed to a
depth of a 6 mm, so that when checked with a 60 cm straight edge, no point varies from
it by more than 1 mm. All edges shall be chisel dressed to be true, square and free
from chippings. Top and bottom faces shall be dressed to within 3 mm tolerance and
vertical faces to within 6 mm tolerance, when checked with a 60 cm straight edge.
Dressing at the back shall not be done.
5.8 Hollow and Solid Concrete Blocks
5.8.1 Cement concrete blocks used in the construction of concrete masonry load bearing as
well as non-load bearing walls shall conform to the requirements of IS : 2185. Physical
properties such as density, compressive strength, water absorption etc., shall be
determined in accordance with the procedure laid down in IS : 2185 and shall conform
to the requirement laid therein. When inspected visually all blocks shall be sound, free
from cracks, broken edges, honey combing and other defects which would interfere with
the proper placing of blocks or impair strength or permanence of construction.
5.8.2 Dimensions and tolerances

The blocks shall be made in sizes and shapes to suit the particular job and shall include
stretcher, corner, double corner or pier, jamb, header, bullnose and floor units.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
5.8.2.1 The nominal dimensions of concrete block shall be as follows:-

Length : 400, 500 or 600 mm
Height : 200 or 100 mm
Width : 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250 or 300 mm
In addition, blocks shall be manufactured in half lengths.
5.8.2.2 The maximum dimensional tolerances shall plus or minus 5 mm in length and plus or minus 3
mm in height and width.
5.8.3 Hollow blocks (open and closed cavity)
5.8.3.1 Grade-A blocks used as load bearing units shall have a minimum block density of 1500
kg/m3 and shall have minimum average compressive strength of 3.5, 4.5, 5.5 or 7.0
N/mm2 at 28 days as specified.
5.8.3.2 Grade-B blocks used as load bearing units shall have block density less than 1500 kg/m3, but
not less than 1000 kg/m3 and shall have compressive strength of 2.0, 3.0, or 5.0 n/M3
or as specified.
5.8.3.3 Grade-C blocks used as non load bearing units shall have block density less than 1500 kg/m3,
but not less than 1000 kg/m3 and compressive strength of 1.5 N/mm2 at 28 days.
5.8.4 Solid blocks

Solid blocks Grade-D used as load bearing units shall have a block density of not less
than 1800 kg/m3 and compressive strength of 4.0 or 5.0 N/mm2 as specified.
5.8.5 Mix proportion

he concrete mix used for blocks shall not be richer than one part by volume of concrete
six parts by volume of combined aggregates.
5.8.6 Surface texture and finish

Surface texture, that is, very fine close texture or coarse open texture and finish,
whether coloured or not shall be according to the drawing, description in the Schedule
of Items or Instructions of the Engineer.
5.8.7 Marking and certificate

The blocks shall be marked permanently with the Grade of each. Manufacturers test
certificate shall be supplied with the delivery of each lot.
5.9 Cement, Lime and Water
Cement, lime and water shall conform to the specification in this series under the Section
- 'Concrete'.
5.10 Sand for Masonry Mortar
Sand for masonry mortars shall be natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed gravel
and shall comply with IS : 2116 - "Sand for Masonry Mortars". The maximum size of
sand particle for brick work shall be 2.5 mm and for rubble masonry 4.75 mm.
6.0 SAND FOR PLASTERING

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Sand for use in mortars for internal wall, ceiling and external plastering and rendering
shall conform to 'A' grade of IS : 1542 - "Sand for Plastering". The maximum size of sand
particle shall be 1.2 mm.
7.0 MATERIALS FOR FLOORING & PAVING
7.1 Cement and Binders
7.1.1 Cement
Cement, fine aggregates, reinforcement and water used shall comply with the
requirements of concrete in series.
7.1.2 Lime
Lime wherever specified for mortar shall conform to IS: 712.
7.1.3 Surkhi
Surkhi used for lime concrete flooring shall conform to IS 1344.
7.1.4 Water
Water for construction shall be clean, soft, free from loam, salt and organic materials.
Hard water shall not be used.
7.2 Aggregates
7.2.1 Brick Aggregate
Brick aggregates for lime concrete shall be obtained from well burnt or slightly over burnt
brick bats. It shall be homogenous in texture, roughly cubical in shape, clean and free
from dirt or any other foreign matter. Aggregate size shall be 40 mm to 10 mm graded.
7.2.2 Coarse Aggregate
7.2.2.1 Coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of this series.
7.2.2.2 For granolithic floor the screed bed shall comprise of aggregates size 15 mm and down
graded and topping shall comprise of clean fine stone chippings, size 4 mm and down.
For concrete floor with hardener treatment the topping shall comprise of stone chippings,
size 6 mm and down and for in-situ terrazzo flooring, chippings shall be within sizes 12
mm to 6 mm graded. The marble chips for topping of terrazzo floor shall be of 3 - 6 mm
size and shall conform to Grade-I of IS : 2114 "CP for laying in-situ terrazzo floor finish".
7.2.3 Common burnt clay bricks
Common burnt clay bricks shall conform to IS: 1077 and comply with requirements of
specification - Masonry of this series.
7.2.4 Rubble
Rubble of approved quality shall be used and shall be clean and free from dirt. The loose

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
and weathered sections shall be removed before use. Rubble used as hard core shall
have a least lateral dimension (thickness) between 100mm and 225 mm, depending on
the thickness of hardcore.
7.3 Tiles
7.3.1 Terrazzo Tiles
Terrazzo tiles shall be machine made under a minimum pressure of 140 kg/cm2. It shall
have a minimum total thickness of 20 mm including a minimum of 6 mm thick topping. It
shall be of size, texture, colour, shade and pattern as specified in schedule of item and
as approved by the Engineer.
7.3.2 White Glazed Tile
White glazed tiles shall be of approved manufacture and quality and shall conform to IS:
777 - "Glazed Earthenware Tiles. They shall be true in shape, free from haircracks,
crazing spot chipped edges and corners and surface shall be perfectly flat without warps
and of uniform colour. The top surface shall be glazed either gloss or matt as specified.
The tiles shall be 150 mm x 150 mm or 100 mm x 100 mm size and shall not be less
than 6 mm thick or as specified. The tolerance on facial dimension value shall be plus or
minus 1.0 and plus or minus 0.5 mm on thickness. The specials such as coves, internal
and external angles, beads, cornices and their corner pieces shall be of specified sizes
and of thickness not less than the thickness of tiles.
7.3.3 Coloured tiles
Only Glaze shall be coloured as specified. The size and specification of tiles shall be
same as for the white glazed tiles.
7.4 Natural stone
7.4.1 Natural stone slabs and tiles
The natural stone slabs shall be from selected quarry/ stock as specified in schedule of
items which are hard, sound, dense and of homogenous texture free from cracks,
decay, weathering and flaws. They should be hand or machine cut to the requisite
thickness, size and be of colour indicated in schedule of items/drawing. Unless
otherwise specified the slabs shall be minimum 300 mm x 300 mm and 20 mm thickness
and tolerance of plus and minus 5 mm in dimensions and plus or minus 2 mm in
thickness will be allowed. The stone slabs shall be brought from specific region as
mentioned and of specific quality with top surfaces mentioned and specific quality with
top surfaces finished smooth. All sides shall be fine chisel dressed to the full depth to
allow finest possible joint.
The slabs shall be delivered to the site well protected against damage and stored in dry
place under cover.
7.5 Adhesives
The adhesives used for laying linoleum, shall conform to IS: 1198 and for runner & PVC
flooring it shall be as per manufacturer's recommendations of tiles for respective types of
floors on which tiles are to be laid.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
7.6 Pigments
Pigments incorporated in mortar or used for grouting shall be subject to approval of

Engineer and as per table I of IS:2114
7.7 Hardening Agents
Hardening agents such as ironite used for "Cement Concrete Flooring with Hardener
Treatment", shall be of quality approved by the Engineer for every work.
7.8 Dividing Strips
Dividing strips shall be of aluminium, glass or similar materials and of quality approved by
the Engineer. Aluminium or other metal strips shall be 1.5 mm thick and glass 4 mm
thick penetrating to the full depth of the flooring.
7.9 Marble Chips

It shall be in sizes varying from 1mm to 25mm and in different colours as per
requirement. Marble chips shall be hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in texture with
crystalline and coarse grains. It
8.0 TIMBER
8.1 General
All timber used for permanent works shall be new. It shall be well seasoned by a suitable
process conforming to IS: 1141 before being planed to the required sizes. It shall be
sound, straight, free from sap, radial cracks, decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch
pockets, borer holes, splits, loose knots, flaws or any other defects and shall show a
clean surface when cut. Timber shall conform to the requirements of IS:1003. The
finished components shall be given suitable preservative treatment wherever necessary.
8.2 Hollock (Terminalia Myriocarpa)
Hollock is not a durable wood unless properly treated. It can be readily treated with wood
preservatives. It can be finished to fairly good surface, but needs careful filling before it is
polished.
8.3 Country Wood
Country wood shall be belonging to the species or trade names as described in the
Schedule of Items or drawing or otherwise directed by the Engineer. It shall be the best
procurable.
8.4 Teak Wood
Teak wood shall be superior, first class or second class as specified and the best
procurable, having uniform grains and free from any defect likely to impair the
appearance of finished work.
8.4.1 Superior teak shall be Malabar, Dandeli or Balarshah teak in which no knot shall be
larger than 1 cm diameter and the total area of knots not more than one percent. There

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
shall be not less than six growth rings per 2.5 cm width.
8.4.2 First class teak shall be Balarshah or M.P. teak in which no knot shall be larger than 2.5
cm diameter and the total area of knot not more than one percent. There shall be not
less than five growth rings per 2.5 cm width.
8.4.3 Second class teak shall be similar to first class teak except that knots upto 4 cm diameter
and total area of knots not exceeding one and a half percent will be permitted. The
number of growth rings per 2.5 cm width shall be not less than four.
8.5 Storage and Inspection
Timber shall be carefully stored and subject to inspection on site, piece by piece. The
Engineer may reject such pieces as are considered by him not of the quality or meeting
the requirements specified herein.
8.6 Moisture Content
Timber shall be accepted as well seasoned if its moisture content does not exceed the
permissible limit as per IS:287.
8.7 Allowance for Bulk Timber
For bulk timber an allowance on the scantling specified 2% above or below the specified
dimensions will be allowed.
8.8 Flush Door Shutters, Shelves
Flush door shutters, shall be wooden, solid core or cellular and hollow core type, as may
be shown in drawing or described in the Schedule of Items or directed by Engineer. They
shall be obtained from an approved source of manufacture covered on face with
commercial ply, wood veneer or other finish as may be necessary. Solid core shutters
shall conform to IS: 2202 and cellular or hollow core shutters to IS: 2191. The resin used
shall be phenol formaldehyde. A full size sample door shall be offered for inspection and
approval.
Shelves and vertical partitions of cupboards shall be of timber planks fibre board, particle
board, block board or veneered particle board as specified. Thickness and type of planks
or boards shall be as specified. Each shelf shall be a single piece and vertical partitions
between two consecutive shelves shall be without any joint. Exposed edges of boards
having particle board core shall be sealed with 3 mm thick single piece hardwood strips
of width equal to the thickness of board with headless pins. The arrangement of shelves
and vertical partitions shall be as per drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.9 Unveneered Particle Board
Unveneered particle board shall conform to IS: 3087 for medium density and to IS: 3478
for high density.
8.10 Veneered Particle Board
Veneered particle board shall conform to IS: 3097.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
8.11 Plywood
Plywood for permanent work such as in partitions etc., shall conform to IS: 303 having
commercial, teak, rose wood or other desired finish.
8.12 Block Board
8.12.1 Block boards have a solid core made up of uniform strip of wood each not exceeding
25mm in width, laid separately, or spot glued, or otherwise joined to form a slab which is
glued, between two or more outer veneers, with the direction of the grain of the core
block running at right angles to that of adjacent veneers. In any one blocks boards, the
core strips shall be of one species of timber only. Face veneers may be decorative or
commercial on both faces or decorative on one face and commercial on the other block
boards shall be Grade-I (Exterior Grade) as per IS:1659-1990.
Both surfaces of the boards shall be sanded to a smooth finish.
8.12.2 Adhesives
The adhesives used for bonding shall be BWP type synthetic resin conforming to IS:848-
4974 for Grade-I block boards.
8.12.3 Thickness and Tolerance
Block boards are available in thickness ranging from 12 to 50mm. Tolerance in thickness
shall be ± 5% for boards upto and including 25mm thick and ± 2.5% for boards above
25mm thickness. Each board shall be of uniform thickness.
8.12.4 Testing
One sample for every 100 sqm or part thereof shall be taken and testing done as per
IS:1659-1990. However, testing may not be done if the total requirement of block boards
in a work is less than 30 sqm. All the samples tested shall meet the requirements of
physical and mechanical properties of block boards specified in the relevant B.I.S. code.
8.12.5 Type of face veneers, thickness and grade of block boards shall be as specified. Unless
otherwise stated, grade-I (exterior grade) block board bonded with BWP grade be used.
8.13.1 Specified timber shall be used, and it shall be sawn in the direction of the grains. Sawing
shall be truly straight and square. The timber shall be planned smooth and accurate to
the full dimensions, rebates, roundings and mouldings as shown in the drawings made,
before assembly. Patching or plugging of any kind shall not be permitted except as
provided.
8.13.2 Stile and Rails
The specifications shall be as described. The stiles and rails shall be given a rebate to
receive the wire gauze which shall from the panels.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
8.13.3 Wire Gauze
This shall be unless specified otherwise conform. The wire gauze shall be bent at right
angles in the rebates of stiles and rails, turned back and fixed tight with blue tacks at
about 75mm centre, fixed alternately in the two faces of the rebates. Over this, wooden
heading shall be fixed with brads or small screws at about 75mm centres.
The space between the beading and rebates, where the wire gauze is bent, shall be
nearly finished with putty, so that the end of the wire gauze may not be visible.
8.13.4 Fixing fittings, wooden cleats, blocks and measurement shall be as specified.
8.13.5 Rate
This includes the cost of materials and labour involved in all the operations described
above.
9.0 FITTINGS FOR DOORS, WINDOWS ETC.
9.1 General
Fittings shall be of iron, brass, aluminium or as specified. These shall be well made,
reasonably smooth and free from sharp edges, corners, flaws and other defects. Screw
holes shall be countersunk to suit the head of specified wood screws. All hinge pins shall
be of steel and their riveted heads shall be well formed.
Iron fittings shall be finished bright or black enameled or copper oxidized or painted as
specified. Brass fittings shall be finished bright, oxidized or chromium plated and
aluminium fittings shall be finished bright or anodized as specified. Fittings shall be got
approved by the Engineer before fixing. Screws used for fittings shall be of the same
metal and finish as the fittings. However, anodized cadmium/chromium plated MS
screws of approved quality shall be used for fixing aluminium fittings.
9.2 Hinges
9.2.1 Butt hinges
These shall be mild steel butt hinges (medium), brass butt hinge (light/ ordinary). brass
but hinge (heavy), brass oxidized butt hinges (light/ ordinary),brass oxidized butt hinges
(heavy) extruded aluminium alloy butt hinges as specified. Brass and MS butt hinges
shall conform generally to Indian Standard Specification for butt hinges IS: 205 and IS:
1341 respectively.
9.2.2 Parliament hinges
These shall be of mild steel or cast brass or as specified and shall generally conform to
IS: 362.
9.2.3 Spring hinges
These shall be made of iron or brass casing with steel spring and shall conform generally
to IS: 453. Hinges shall work smoothly and hold the door shutters truly vertical in closed
position. The size of spring hinge shall be taken as length of its plate.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
9.2.4 Piano hinges
These shall conform to IS: 3818 and shall be made of mild steel or aluminium alloy
sheets. Mild steel hinges shall be finished with anticorrosive treatment or plating of brass
of nickel as specified. Piano hinges shall be fixed in the entire length of the cupboard
shutters.
9.2.5 Tee hinges
These shall be made of MS sheets and finished bright. They shall conform to IS: 206.
9.3 Sliding Door Bolts
These shall be of aluminium and conform to IS: 2681. They shall be capable of smooth
sliding action. Alternative materials may be adopted on the approval of the Engineer for
specific locations.
9.4 Door Latch
This shall be mild steel, brass or as specified and shall be capable of smooth sliding
action.
9.5 Tower Bolts
Tower bolts may be of one of the following types:_
i) Brass barrel tower bolt with cast brass barrel and rolled or drawn brass bolt.
ii) Brass barrel tower bolts with brass sheet barrel and rolled or drawn brass bolt.
iii) Anodized aluminium barrel tower bolt with barrel and bolt of extruded sections of
aluminium alloy (12 mm dia shoot).
These shall generally conform to IS: 204 steel spring and ball shall be provided between
the bolt and the barrel.
9.6 Door Handles
These shall be cast brass or of aluminium of specified size and of the shape and pattern
as approved by the Engineer. These shall generally conform to IS: 208. The size of the
handle shall be determined by the inside grip of the handle. Door handles shall be of 100
mm size and window handles of 75 mm size unless otherwise specified. These shall be
fixed with 25 mm long wood screws.
9.7 Mortice Lock
Mortice lock with latch and pair of lever handles shall have steel casing and brass bolts
and shall be right or left handed as shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer.
It shall be of the best Indian make of approved quality and shall conform to IS: 2209. The
shape and pattern shall be approved by the Engineer. The size of the lock shall be
determined by its length. The lock for single leaf door shall have plain face and that for
double leaf door a rebated face lever handles with springs shall be mounted on plates

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
and shall weigh not less than 0.5 kg per pair. These shall be of brass, finished bright
chromium plated or oxidized.
9.8 Floor Door Stopper
This shall be made of cast brass and shall have a rubber cushion. The type and pattern
will be as approved by the Engineer.
9.9 Hooks and Eyes
These shall be of hard drawn brass and shall generally conform to IS: 207.
9.10 Casement Window Fasteners
These shall be made of cast brass. Casement fasteners for single leaf window shutter
shall be left or right handed as specified. These shall not weigh less than 0.20 kg per
fastener.
9.11 Casement Brass Stays
These shall be made of cast brass. The stay shall be made from a channel section and
shall not weigh less than that indicated below :-
200 mm ....... 0.24 kg each

250 mm ....... 0.28 kg each
300 mm ....... 0.33 kg each
The shape and pattern of stays shall be approved by the Engineer.
9.12 Quadrant Stays
These shall be made of cast brass. The shape and pattern shall be approved by the
Engineer. It shall not weigh less than 0.20 kg each.
9.13 Fan Light Pivots
These shall be made of cast brass and shall generally conform to IS: 1837. The base
and socket plate shall be made from minimum 3.15 mm thick brass plate and projected
pivot shall not be less than 12 mm diameter and 12 mm length cast in single pieces with
the base plate.
9.14 Fan light catch
These shall be made of cast brass and shall generally conform to IS : 364. Steel springs
of the catch shall be 0.90 mm dia 6 coils 12 mm internal diameter and 20 mm long. The
pattern and the shape of the catch shall be as approved by the Engineer.
9.15 Chain with Hook for Fan Light
This shall be made of hard drawn brass or cast brass welded or twisted as specified and
shall conform generally to IS: 3828. One end of the chain shall be provided with an eye
and the other end with a staple. The minimum thickness of plates shall be 2.24 mm and
the chain shall be 300mm long made from minimum 4 mm hard drawn wire.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
9.16 Hasp and Staple
Hasp and staple (safety type) shall be made of cast brass and generally conform to ;IS:
363. The hinge pin which in all cases shall be of mild steel, shall be firm and its riveted
head well formed. The movement of the hasp shall be free, easy and square and shall
not have any play or shake. The hasp shall fit the staple correctly. The size shall be
determined by the length of the bigger leaf of the hasp.
9.17 Cupboard Lock
These shall be made of cast brass conforming to IS:729 and shall be of the best Indian
make. The lock shall be easy in working, having duplicate keys.
9.18 Hydraulic Door Closer
These shall conform to IS: 3564 and be of brand approved by the Engineer for both left
and right hand openings.
9.19 Steel Frames
Steel sections used for door frames, windows and ventilators shall conform to the IS
Specification.
10.0 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS, COLLAPSIBLE GATES & ROLLING

SHUTTERS
10.1 General
Materials used in the fabrication of doors, windows, and ventilators shall be the best
procurable and conforming to relevant Indian Standards.
10.2 Steel Doors, Windows, Ventilators & Collapsible Gates
Steel sections used for fabrication of doors, windows ventilators & collapsible gates shall
be standard rolled steel sections specified in IS: 1038, IS: 1977, IS: 1361 or IS: 7452 as
appropriate or as specified in drawing and Schedule of Items. Rivets shall conform to IS:
1148.
10.3 Aluminium Doors, Windows & Ventilators
Aluminium sections used for fabrication of doors, windows ventilators partitions etc. shall
be extruded sections specified in IS: 1948-1961 & 1949-1961 or as manufactured by
Indian Aluminium Company Limited or approved equivalent. The alloy used shall
conform to designation HE9 – WP of IS:733-1983.
10.4 Steel Rolling Shutters, Rolling Grills
These shall conform to IS:6248-1979.
10.5 MS Bolts etc.,

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
MS bolts, nuts, screws, washers, peg stays and other mild steel fittings shall be treated
for corrosion as recommended by the relevant Indian Standards. Putty for glazing shall
conform to IS: 419. Glass panes and glazing shall conform to the specification detailed
under this series.
10.6 Hardware and fixtures shall be as specified in the drawings or Schedule of Items. All
hardware and fixtures shall be able to withstand repeated use. Door closers shall be
suitable for doors weighing 61 - 80 kg, unless otherwise stated. Each closer shall be
guaranteed against manufacturing defect for one year and any defect found within this
period shall be rectified or the closer replaced free of charge. Concealed door closers
shall be either floor mounted or transom mounted, suitable for installation with metal
doors. It shall conform to the performance requirements and endurance test stated in IS:
3564 - Appendix-A.
10.7 The mastic for caulking shall be of best quality from a manufacturer approved by the
Engineer. In general, the mastic for fixing of metal frames shall conform to IS: 1081
and/or as approved by the Engineer.
11.0 GLASS
11.1 General
Plain, ground, frosted or rough cast wired glass shall be used as shown on the drawing
or as specified in the Schedule of Items. It shall be procured from a reputed source of
manufacture such as Hindustan Pilkington Glass Works Limited and be of the best
quality. All glass panes shall be free from flaws, specks, bubbles etc., All the panes
shall weigh not less than 7.5 kg per sqm. The tolerance of glass panes in length and
width shall be plus or minus 2 mm.
11.2 Plain Transparent Glass
Plain transparent glass for glazing and framing shall conform to IS: 1761. It shall be free
from flaws, specks, bubbles or distortions.
11.3 Ground and Frosted Glass
Glare reducing or heat absorbing glass shall be "Calorex" of Hindustan Pilkington or

approved equivalent and special care shall be taken to grind smooth and round off the
edges before fixing.
11.4 Wired Glass
Wired glass shall be thick rolled glass with centrally embedded 24 g. Wire mesh of
Georgian type. This may be clear or coloured, as shown in drawings or specified in
Schedule of Items.
11.5 Thickness
Glass shall have the following thickness, unless otherwise stated in the Schedule of
Items or drawings:-
Upto 60 cms x 60 cms ... 3 mm

-do- of larger size ... 4 mm

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Plate glass for doors ... 5.5 mm

Rough cast wired ... 6 mm
11.6 Inspection
All glass shall be subject to inspection on the site. Glass found to suffer from defects
shall be rejected. Samples submitted for inspection shall be selected so as to be
representative of the consignment.
12.0 PAINTS
12.1 General
All paints, varnishes, distemper or other surface coating materials shall be of approved
quality conforming to the appropriate Indian Standard, wherever such standard is
available, and be obtained from a manufacturer of repute.
12.2 Sampling and Testing
The Engineer may, at his discretion, require samples of paint to be tested. In such cases
testing will be according to IS: 101.
12.3 Storage
Paints, primers, distempers and varnishes shall be delivered in sealed containers. They
shall be stored in cool dry condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
12.4 Paints for Priming
Ready mixed paints for priming coats of steel and iron work shall comply with IS: 2074 -
"Ready Mixed Paint", "Red Oxide Zinc Chrome Priming".
12.5 Paints For Finishing
Ready mixed oil gloss paint where specified shall comply with IS: 129 "Ready Mixed
Paint, Brushing, Finishing Semi- gloss, for General Purpose to IS Colours". Aluminium
paints where specified on the drawings or ordered by Engineer shall comply with IS:
2339 - "Aluminium Paint for General Purposes in Duel Containers". Plastic Emulsion
paint where specified for plastered surfaces of masonry and concrete work shall comply
with IS: 5411 (Part _ I) and (Part _ II) for interior use and exterior use respectively.
12.6 White wash
White was shall be prepared from lime slaked on spot, mixed and stirred with sufficient
water to make a thin cream.
12.7 Colour wash
Colour was shall be prepared by adding mineral colours, not affected by lime, to white
wash.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
12.8 Cement Paint
Cement paints shall comply with IS: 5410 and shall be of approved brand and
manufacture. The shade shall be approved by the Engineer before its application.
12.9 Distemper
Dry/oil bound distemper of approved brand and manufacture shall be used. The shade
shall be approved by the Engineer before application of the distemper.
12.10 Varnish
Varnish for the finishing coat shall be copal finish or super quality spar varnish of
approved brand. Varnish for the under coat shall be flatting varnish of the same make as
the top coats and shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
12.11 Polish
French spirit polish shall be of an approved make conforming to IS: 348. If it has to be
prepared on site, the polish shall be made by dissolving 0.7 kg of best, shellac in 4.5
litres of methylated spirit without heating. To obtain required shade pigment may be
added and mixed.
12.11.1 Where wax polishing is specified, it shall be prepared by heating two parts of "Bee Wax"
and two parts of boiled linseed oil over a slow fire. When dissolved but still warm, one
part of turpentine is to be added.
12.12 Plastic (Acrylic) emulsion Paint
Plastic emulsion paint of approved manufacturers like Jenson & Nicholson, Goodlass
Nerolac, Shalimar, Berger, Asian and Garware paints only shall be used unless
otherwise specified and shall comply with IS:5411(Part 1) – 1974 & (Part 2) – 1972 as
applicable. Cement primer used for priming work both for oil bound distemper and plastic
emulsion paint shall be of the same manufacture as that of distemper or plastic emulsion
paint used. For dry distemper priming, whiting of approved quality shall be used.
12.13 Floor Polish – Paste
The polish shall consist mainly of waxes and organic solvents with or without water.
The paste of floor polish shall be of smooth consistency, homogeneous, semi solid mass
and free from gritty material. It shall not flow at ordinary temperature. It shall be so
constituted and prepared that on application by means of a clean cloth, it shall spread
easily and evenly and shall give with minimum buffing a firm and glossy surface free from
greasiness or tackiness. The polish film after spreading with a cloth shall not take more
than 10 minutes to dry. The polished floor shall be neither slippery nor show any
resistance to easy walking.
Floor polish paste shall conform to IS:8591-1977.
13.0 WATER PROOFING MATERIALS
13.1 Integral Cement Waterproofing Compounds

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Integral cement waterproofing compounds, i.e. admixture for waterproofing purposes

shall fully comply with the requirements of IS: 2645. Properties like permeability, setting
time, compressive strength shall be in accordance with the requirements of this code
when tested as per procedure laid therein. Calcium chloride content of the product used
shall be made known to Engineer before use.
13.2 Bitumen
The bitumen bonding material for waterproofing shall conform to the requirements laid
down in IS: 702, or IS: 73 or IS: 217 or IS: 454 depending upon whether industrial
bitumen, paving bitumen or cutback bitumen is used. For selecting the particular type
and grade of bitumen to be used the relevant item in Schedule of Items shall be referred
to.
13.3 Bitumen Primer
Bitumen primer used for application to concrete and masonry surfaces and bitumen for
the purpose of waterproofing shall conform to requirements given in IS: 3384 and pass
tests in accordance with the procedure laid down in appropriate IS mentioned in Table-I
of IS: 3384. Bitumen primer should be free from water and shall preferably ;be made
from the same grade of bitumen as used in bonding.
13.4 Bitumen Felt
Bitumen felts used for water proofing purposes shall be as specified in IS: 1322. Physical
properties shall conform to the requirements and tests shall be carried out as per
procedure laid down in IS: 1322. Base, (whether fibre or Hessian), type and grade of felt
shall be as mentioned in the relevant items under Schedule of Items. Unless otherwise
stated, hessian base felt Type-3, Grade-2 shall be used.
13.5 Bitumen Mastic
Bitumen mastic used for water proofing of roofs shall have the physical properties as
mentioned in IS: 3037 when tested with the procedure laid down in appropriate IS
mentioned in IS: 3037.
13.6 Bitumen Compounds
Bituminous compounds when used for waterproofing of porous masonry, concrete floors,
walls and roofs shall conform to the requirements of IS: 1580. Physical properties shall
be governed by the requirements of this code when tested in accordance with the
procedure laid therein.
13.7 Surface Application Materials
Waterproofing material for application on mortar or concrete surface shall conform to IS:
9862. The primer shall be suitable for spray or brush application. It shall have properties
enabling it to penetrate through pores or cracks and fill them up, making the surface
impervious.
13.8 High Polymer, based Admixtures & Epoxy Based Emulsion & Paints

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The materials used shall be high polymer based chloride and sulphide free cement and
waterproofing additions and epoxy based waterproofing paints as per manufacturer's
specification and approved by Engineer.
14.0 WATER BAR
14.1 General
Water bar for use in construction/expansion joints in concrete and reinforced concrete
structures shall be of copper sheet, galvanized steel sheet, rubber or PVC as shown in
drawing or described in the Schedule of Items. It shall be subject to approval of
Engineer.
14.2 Jointing
The water bar shall have dimensions as shown in drawing. Where water bars are
required to be lengthened or otherwise jointed the joining shall be done in such a way as
to achieve a perfectly water-tight joint.
15.0 LEAD
15.1 General
Lead for joints in cast iron spigot and socket pipes shall be melted from pure soft pig lead
conforming to Type-I of IS: 782. "Caulking Lead" where lead wool is allowed for
caulking, it shall be equal to or better than Type-II of IS: 782. Lead flashing shall conform
to IS: 405, "Lead Sheet".
16.0 BUILDING PAPER
Building paper shall be bitumen impregnated paper conforming to IS: 5134, or such other
as may be approved by the Engineer.
16.1 Gypsum Building Materials
i) Non load Bearing Gypsum Partition Block (Solid or hollow type
The materials to be used for non load bearing construction (solid or hollow type)
in the interior of building, protection of columns, elevated shafts etc. against fire
shall conform to IS : 2489
ii) Gypsum Plaster Boards
These are intended to be used as vertical or horizontal lining in buildings. The

boards manufactured conforming IS : 2095 and suitable to receive either direct
surface decoration or gypsum plaster finishes shall be used for above work.
Boards subjected to secondary manufacturing operation shall not be used for
this work.
iii) Fibrous Gypsum Plaster Boards
These boards are manufactured as a composition of gypsum plaster and sisal or

coconut or any other suitable fibre body of regular dimensions. These are used

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
for covering walls, ceilings, partitions in normal dry environments in buildings.

These have high fire- resisting properties. These boards shall conform to
IS:8273.
17.0 FILLING MATERIAL
17.1 General
Filling material shall conform to what is shown in drawing, described in the Schedule of
Items or otherwise directed by the Engineer. Earth or sand for filling under floors shall
correspond to those described elsewhere in these specifications.
17.2 Mastic Bitumen
Mastic Bitumen shall conform to IS: 3037 or IS: 5871 as appropriate.
17.3 Flexible Boards
Flexible boards for use in expansion joints shall correspond to the description given in
drawing or the Schedule of Items or instructions of the Engineer.
18.0 DRAINAGE & SANITATION (INTERNAL)
18.1 General
All materials, pipes, specials, fittings, fixtures etc., to be used in the works shall be of
best quality and class specified in relevant IS Code. Where specified these shall be of
specific manufacture and quality and shall be procured from manufacturer or their
accredited stockists and be marked with manufacturers' names and trade mark.
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer samples of all materials, pipes, specials, fittings
fixtures for approval before use in the works. Such approved samples shall be retained
by the Engineer until completion of works. Pipes and specials may be any or
combination of following types:-
i) PVC Pipes
ii) Stone Ware Pipes
iii) HCI Pipes for soil waste & Ventilation
iv) CI Pipes for rain water
v) AC Pipes for rain water
vi) R.C.C Pipes
18.2 PVC Waste Pipe
This shall conform to relevant IS unless otherwise specified.
18.3 Stoneware Pipes & Fittings
All stoneware pipes, bends, gully traps and sewer traps shall be of the best salt glazed
variety inside and outside, hard burnt dark grey colour, perfectly sound, free from fire
cracks and imperfection of glaze, truly circular in cross section, perfectly straight, of
standard nominal length and depth of socket and barrel. These shall be of approved
manufacture and shall comply with the requirement of IS: 651.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
18.4 HCI Pipe
All soil waste and vent pipes and fittings used in the work shall be cast iron and shall
conform to IS: 1729. The pipes shall have spigot and socket ends, with bead on spigot
end and shall be with or without ears. The pipes shall be free from cracks and other
flaws. The interior of the pipe and fittings shall be clean, smooth painted inside and
outside with PR Angus smith’s solution or other anti-corrosive paint.
The standard weights and thickness of pipe shall comply with the requirements of IS:
1729. The tolerance on wall thickness and weight shall be minus 15 percent and minus
10 percent respectively. Pipes weighing more than the nominal weight given below
may be accepted provided they comply in every other respect.
Weight per piece in Kg. excld. ears

Nominal
Overall length
size
1500 mm 1800 mm 2000 mm
50 9.56 11.41 12.65
75 13.83 16.52 18.37
100 18.14 21.67 24.15
150 26.70 31.92 35.66
Specials and Fittings shall include bends, offsets, branches of various types, junctions
etc., as required for the work which shall be provided according to drawings and
directions of the Engineer.
The specials and fittings shall be provided with access doors where so specified or
directed by the Engineer. The access door fittings shall be of proper design so as not to
form cavities in which the filth may accumulate. Doors shall be provided with 3 mm
thick rubber insertion packing, and when closed and bolted they shall be water tight.
The access doors shall have MS studs and bolts or screws or bolts and nuts.
18.5 Cast Iron Pipes : Rainwater pipe

Pipes shall be of approved manufacture, true, smooth and cylindrical, their inner and
outer surfaces being as nearly as practicable concentric. These shall be sound and
uniform casting, free from laps, pin holes or other imperfections and shall be neatly
finished and carefully fitted with inside and outside. The ends of pipes shall be
reasonably square to their axis.
Dimensions
CI rain water pipes shall be of the dia specified in the description of the item and shall
be in full lengths of 1.8 meters including socket ends of the pipes, unless shorter
lengths are required at junctions with fittings. The pipe lengths shall in each case be
with sockets. The pipes shall be supplied without ears unless otherwise specifically
mentioned.
The pipes supplied shall be factory painted with a tar based composition both inside
and outside which shall be smooth and tenacious.
Every pipe shall ring clearly when struck all over with a light hand hammer. When

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
shorter pipes are cut from full lengths they shall be cut with a hacksaw.
Where the pipes are to be embedded in masonry they shall be of Class of pipes as are
used for soil and vent pipes. For the weights of different sizes of these pipes, the
specifications under SCI and vent pipes may be referred to.
18.6 Water Closets
18.6.1 European Pattern W.C.

These shall be of Hindustan Sanitary-ware make A class equivalent or of approved
Indian make and quality. Unless otherwise specified, these shall comprise of :-
a) White glazed earthenware wash down closet set with 'S' or 'P' trap.
b) 'Duco' spray painted 12.5 litres mosquito proof low level MS flushing cistern with
valveless siphon, 15 mm ball cock, C.P. brass unions and couplings for the 32 mm dia
flush pipe, 20 mm dia overflow PVC pipe with mosquito proof cover etc.,
c) 'Duco' spray painted 1 1/4" (32 mm) dia GI telescopic flush pipe with buffer clamp,
holder bat clamp and 38mm dia PVC pipe.
d) 'BESTOLITE' or equivalent white solid plastic W.C. seat and cover C.F. brass bar
hinges, screws bolt, rubber buffers.
e) 15 mm PVC connection pipe with brass couplings at both ends and 15 mm brass
CP cock.
f) Teak wood wooden blocks or other suitable fixing arrangement with screws and
detofix for fixing WC in floor and putty joint with flush pipe and soil pipe.
18.6.2 Indian Pattern W.C.

These shall be of Hindustan Sanitary Ware make 'A' class or equivalent approved
Indian make and quality. Unless otherwise specified these shall comprise of :-
a) White glazed earthenware WC pan back entry type.
b) White glazed earthenware 'P' or 'S' trap with or without vent.
c) 12.5 litres or approved make mosquito proof MS high level flushing cistern with
valveless siphon, 15 mm ball cock, galvanised iron chain with with handle, cast iron
brackets with wall plugs, brass unions and couplings for flush pipe, 20 mm dia overflow
PVC pipe with mosquito proof cover etc.,
d) 32 mm dia GI telescopic/40 mm C.D high density PVC flush pipe with holder bat
clamps.
e) One pair of white glazed earthen ware feet set in one cement mortar 1:3.
f) 15 mm PVC connection pipe with brass couplings and at both ends and 15 mm
brass stop cock.
18.7 Wash Hand Basin

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
These shall be of Hindustan Sanitaryware make 'A' class or equivalent approved

Indian make and quality. Unless otherwise specified these shall comprise of :-
a) White glazed earthenware basin with 2 nos. Concealed Cast Iron Brackets with wall plugs.
b) 1 no. 15 mm C.P. brass pillar taps.
c) 32 mm C.P. brass waste fittings, C.P. brass chain and rubber plug.
d) 32 mm PVC waste pipe with brass couplings/32 mm CP bottle trap.
e) 15 mm PVC connection pipes with brass couplings and 15 mm brass stop cock.
18.8 Sinks
These shall be of Hindustan Sanitaryware make 'A' class or equivalent approved Indian
make and quality or grey mosaic sink of approved design with reinforcement etc.,
complete. Unless otherwise specified these shall comprise of the following:-
a) White glazed fire clay sink/mosaic as specified with outlet water overflow at end with 2
nos. cast iron brackets with wall plugs.
b) 38 mm C.P. brass waste fittings, C.P. brass chain and rubber plug.
c) 38 mm PVC waste pipe, with brass couplings complete/ 32 mm CP bottle trap.
18.9 Flat Back Lipped Urinal
These shall be of 'Hindustan Sanitaryware' or equivalent approved Indian make and

quality. Unless otherwise specified these shall comprise of:-
a) White glazed earthenware urinal basin (back type).
b) CI/M.S mosquito proof high level automatic flushing cistern of capacity as specified in
the Schedule of Quantities with all accessories, cast iron brackets with wall plugs,
brass Unions and coupling for flush pipe, 20 mm dia overflow pipe with mosquito
proof cover.
c) 25 mm dia GI flush pipe and spreaders with wall clips and brackets.
d) 15 mm PVC connection pipe with brass couplings joint at both ends and 15 mm brass
stop cock.
e) 32 mm C.P. brass outlets complete with PVC waste.
18.10 Mirror Frames:
Mirror frame where specified shall be of fibre glass of approved shape, size, colour and
make.
18.10.1 Mirror shall be of superior glass with edges rounded off or levelled as specified. It shall
be free from flaws, specks or bubble and its thickness shall not be less than 5.5 mm.
The glass for the mirror shall be uniformly silver plated at the back and shall be free

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
from silvering defects. Silvering shall have a protective uniform covering of red lead
paint.
18.11 Toilet Shelf
18.11.1 Glass shelf unit shall consist of an assembly of glass shelf, CP brass guard rail and
supporting brackets. The shelf shall be of glass of best quality with edges rounded of
and shall be free from flaws, specks, bubbles and of thickness not less than 5.5 mm.
The shelf shall have guard rail, resting on rubber washers on glass plate.
18.11.2 Ceramics shelf shall be of shape, size and design as specified in the Schedule of Items.
18.12 Towel Rail
Towel rail shall be of CP brass/anodized aluminium with two brackets of same material,
diameter and length as specified.
18.13 Toilet Paper Holder
Toilet paper holder shall be of CP brass, PVC with CP brass brackets, of approved
made and designs.
18.14 Soap Container
Soap container shall be of CP brass, PVC with CP brass brackets of approved make
and design.
18.15 CP Flush Valves 15 Litres for EWC
The CP flush valve (15.0 litres) for EWC shall be of 'ACCO' brand of Asia Continental
Metallware Fabric or equivalent quality.
18.16 CP Flush Valve 5 Litres for Urinals
CP flush valve for urinal shall be of 'ACCO' brand of Asian Continental Metalware fabric
or of equivalent quality.
18.17 Gully Trap
Each gully trap shall have one C.I. grating 150 mm x 150 mm and one water tight
precast R.C. cover 300 x 300 x 40 mm thick with 1:1 1/2:3 mix concrete (one cement:
one and half sand : 3 stone chips 20 mm down) including neat cement finish.
18.18 CI Manhole Cover
Manhole cover shall be CI type 450mm dia (internal) light duty 25 kg weight (cover and
frame), heavy duty 128kg weight (cover & frame), 560 mm dia (internal) and shall be
either single seal or double seal as specified in the Schedule of Items.
18.19 Polycrete Sanitary Fittings
Where specifically mentioned polycrete sanitary fittings manufactured by Gujarat

Polycrete Pvt. Ltd., shall be used The pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be of the

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
description mentioned in for glazed vitreous fitting.
18.20 Fibre Glass Sink
Fibre glass sink where specified shall be of heavy duty (4 ply) of approved
manufacturer, shape and size. The pipes and other appurtenances shall be of the
description mentioned for the glazed vitreous sinks.
19.0 WATER SUPPLY & PLUMBING (INTERNAL)
19.1 General
This section deals with the specification of material for pipes, fittings, fixtures etc., to be
used in water supply works.
All materials, pipes, fittings, fixtures to be used in the works shall be of the best quality
of the class specified in relevant IS Code. Where specified these shall be of specific
manufacture and quality and shall be procured from the manufacturer or their
accredited stockist and be marked with manufacturers name and trade marks. The
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer samples of all pipes, fittings, and fixtures for
approval before being used in the works. Such approved samples shall be retained by
the Engineer until completion of works.
Pipes and pie fittings may be of any or combination of following types:
i) Wrought iron galvanised pipe
ii) PVC pipes
iii) Cast iron pipes
iv) Steel pies coated with bitumen composition inside and galvanised
outside.
v) Reinforced concrete pipes
vi) Asbestos cement pipes
vii) Prestressed concrete pipes
viii) Lead (not to be used for potable water)
19.2 Galvanised Iron Pipes and Fittings
Generally pipes for installations in buildings shall be medium quality malleable steel
galvanised pipe 'B' class for cold water supply and 'C' class for hot water supply, having
threaded ends with socket at one end.
The details of standard pipes and sockets regarding nominal bore thickness and weight
in kg/m are given below:-

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
DIMENSION OF ORDINARY
DIMENSION OF PIPE
SOCKETS
Wt. OF PIPE
PIPE DIA MAXIMUM THICKNESS OUTSIDE
MINIMUM PLAIN END
(OUTSIDE MINIMUM DIA
LENGTH
DIA) (APPROX)
mm mm mm Mm mm mm Kg/m
15 21.8 21.0 2.65 26.9 34 1.21
20 27.3 26.5 2.65 33.7 36 1.57
25 34.2 33.5 3.25 42.0 43 2.42
32 42.9 42.0 3.25 51.0 48 3.11
40 48.8 47.9 3.25 57.0 48 3.59
50 60.8 59.7 3.65 70.0 56 5.07
65 76.6 75.3 3.65 88.0 65 6.49
80 89.5 88.0 4.05 101.6 71 8.43
Note :- Manufacturing tolerances shall be permitted on tubes and sockets in addition to above.
The galvanised iron pipes shall be of approved make and conform to IS and of tested
quality. The GI pipes shall be of threaded ends with a socket at one end only. The
fittings for GI pipes shall be either galvanised wrought iron or galvanised malleable iron.
19.3 PVC Pipes

Polythene unplasticised pipes be procured from reputed and approved manufacturer
and shall have marking in colour in accordance with relevant Indian Standards.
19.3.1 Fittings for PVC Pipes

These fittings shall be special flange compression fittings such as Alka Fan Fittings
manufactured by ICI or other equivalent. Tee's, elbows, cross and reducers shall be
provided with male & female joints.
19.3.2 Fittings for unplasticized PVC pipes
The fittings shall be injection mould and/or fabricated type.
19.4 R.C.C Asbestos, Prestressed Pipes and Fittings
These shall be of approved manufacture and quality and shall conform to relevant IS.
19.5 Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings
The cast iron pipes and fittings shall be of approved manufacture and quality and shall
conform to IS: 1537 for pipes and IS: 1538 for fittings.
19.6 Steel Pipes

This shall conform to IS: 1239 & 3589. Steel pipes shall be coated with bituminous

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
composition inside and galvanised outside.
19.7 Bib Tap and Stop Tap

Bib tap and stop tap for water services shall be of brass screw down type and shall
conform to IS: 781. Minimum finished weight of bib and stop taps shall be as given
below:
No. of size Bib tap Stop tap

(mm) (kg) (kg)
10 0.30 0.35
15 0.40 0.40
20 0.75 0.75
25 1.25 1.30
32 - 1.80
40 - 2.25
50 - 3.85
The taps shall be tested under internal hydraulic pressure of at least 20 kg/cm2 and
maintained at the pressure for a period of at least two minutes during which period it
shall neither leak nor sweat.
19.8 Valves
Unless otherwise mentioned in the Schedule of Quantities these shall be of gun metal
fullway valves of medium type and shall be of approved manufacture. These shall
conform to relevant Indian Standard Specifications.
19.9 Storage Tank

Storage tank shall be either pressed steel, Galvanised iron, R.C.C or PVC of specified
sizes, capacities, make, manufacture as specified in Schedule of Items. It shall have
facilities for connecting inlet, outlet overflow and washout pipes and a top cover. Where
tanks are to be fabricated by the Contractor the fabrication/R.C.C detailed drawings
shall be got approved by Engineer.
20.0 EXTERNAL WATER SUPPLY, SEWERAGE & DRAINAGE
20.1 C.I. Pipes

Unless otherwise specified CI Pipe and specials, caulking lead, SW Pipe, RCC pipe
shall conform to the following:-
i) CI pipe shall conform to IS: 1536 to 1537
ii) CI pipe fittings shall conform to IS: 1538.
iii) CI specials shall be of similar specification as specified for fittings in IS: 1538.
iv) Bolts and nuts shall be hexagonal bolts and nuts conforming to IS: 1363.
20.2 Washers
Spring washers conforming to latest edition of IS: 3063 shall be used near the pumps to
take care of vibration. In other places plain washers conforming to IS: 2016 shall be
used.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
20.3 Gaskets
Gaskets shall be reinforced rubber sheet conforming to IS: 638.
20.4 Caulking Lead

All the spigot and socket joints shall be caulked by lead conforming to IS: 782.
20.5 Salt glazed stoneware pipes shall conform to IS: 651 and shall be laid as per IS: 3114.
20.6 CI pipes used for sewerage, under roads and other places shall conform to IS: 1536, and
shall be laid as per IS: 31.
20.7 Steel pipes used for encasing shall conform to IS: 1239 and IS: 3589.
20.8 Cast iron manhole covers shall conform to IS: 1726.
20.9 Steel reinforcements shall conform to IS: 432.
20.10 RCC pipes used shall conform to IS: 458 and shall be laid as per IS: 783.
21.0 ROAD
21.1 General
Roads shall be understood to include road bed, the wearing surface, berms, foot-paths,
kerbs, culverts and bridges.
21.2 Soling Stones
Material for soling shall be natural stone boulders or crushed blast furnace slab. Stone
boulders shall consist of materials of uniform quality in sizes between 150 mm to 230
mm with total length not exceeding 300 mm. No stone shall weigh less than 3.5 kg.
Stones shall be tough, angular, durable and generally free from flat, elongated, soft and
disintegrated particles. They shall also be free from dirt or other objectionable matter
and be obtained from quarries approved by the Engineer.
Crushed slag obtained from air-cooled blast furnace slag shall be angular, of reasonably
uniform quality and density and generally be free from any thin, elongated, and soft
pieces, dirt or other objectionable matter. The density of slag should not be less than
6.12 gm/cc and glassy material shall not exceed 20%. Water absorption when
determined in accordance with IS: 2386 (Part-III). "Methods of Tests for Aggregates for
Concrete: Specific Gravity, Density Voids, Absorption and Bulking", shall not exceed
10%.
21.3 Coarse Aggregate for Water Bound Macadam
Coarse aggregate for water bound macadam shall be natural gravel, crushed stone
obtained from approved quarries or crushed blast furnace slag. Crushed stone shall be
hard, durable, tough and of uniform quality, generally free from flat, elongated, soft and
disintegrated particles. It shall have sharp edges and also not have excess of dirt and
other objectionable matter. When tested as per IS: 2386 (Part-IV) for Los Angeles
Abrasion Value or Aggregate Impact Value, the limiting values shall be 50% and 40%
respectively for base course and 40% and 30% respectively for surfacing course. The
flakiness index shall not exceed 15% when tested in accordance with IS: 2386 (Part-I)

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
"Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete : Particle size and Shape". Crushed slag
aggregates shall meet the requirements given for soling stones from blast furnace slag.
Size and grading requirements of coarse aggregates shall be as specified in Table-2 of

IRC 19, "Standard Specification and Code of Practice for Water Bound Macadam". The
grading number of the table shall correspond to the following layer thicknesses :-
Grading Number Size Range Layer Thickness
1. 90 mm to 40 mm More than 90 mm
2. 63 mm to 40 mm 90 mm to 75 mm
3. 50 mm to 20 mm 75 mm to 50 mm
21.4 Screenings
Screenings used for filling voids in coarse aggregates for water bound macadam shall
generally be of the same material as the coarse aggregate. Non-plastic materials such
as Kankar nodules, moorum or gravel (other than river bore rounded aggregates) may
be used, provided that the liquid limit and plasticity index are below 20 and 6
respectively. The fraction passing 75 microns sieve shall not exceed 10%. Size and
grading of screenings shall be as specified in Table-3 of IRC-19. Type-A screening shall
be used for grade number 1 coarse aggregate. Type-B screenings shall be used for
grade number 3. Either Type-A or Type-B screenings may be used for grade number 2.
21.5 Stone Chips for Bituminous Surfacing
Course aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed gravel
(Shingle) retained on 2.36 mm sieve. The aggregates shall be clean, strong, durable
and fairly cubical fragments free from disintegrated pieces, organic and other
objectionable matter. The aggregates shall preferably by hydrophobic and of low
porosity. The mechanical properties and grading shall be in accordance with IRC-29
"Tentative Specifications for 4 cm Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course", having aggregate
inspect value 30%, Flakiness Index 25% and graded between 20mm and 2.36 mm.
21.6 Sand
Sand for use as fine aggregate in bituminous surfacing shall consist of crushed
screenings, natural sand or a mixture of both, passing a 2.36mm sieve and retained on
75 micron sieve. It shall be clean, hard, durable, uncoated and dry, free from injurious,
soft or flaky pieces and organic deleterious substances.
21.7 Binder
Binding material for water bound macadam shall consist of fine grained material such as
stone dust, kankar modules or moorum. The plasticity index shall be between 4 to 9
when water bound macadam is to be used as surface course and upto 6 when used as
sub/base or base course. Binder for bituminous surfacing shall be bitumen conforming to
IS: 73, of grade 80/100 for tack coat and grade 30/40 for premixing.
21.8 Materials for Cement Concrete Roads

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Materials for cement concrete in concrete roads shall conform to the relevant
specifications under "Concrete" of this series, with the additional requirement that the Los
Angeles Abrasion Value of Coarse Aggregates Shall not exceed 35%. The size and
grading of aggregates shall conform to the requirements of IRC : 15.
21.9 Kerbs
Kerbs may be of stone, concrete or brick as may be shown in drawing or otherwise

directed by Engineer.
21.9.1 Stone kerbs
Stones shall conform to the dimensions and shapes given in drawing. Exposed faces
shall be dressed two lines.
21.9.2 Concrete kerbs
Shape and dimension shall conform to the drawing. They shall be precast and the road
side top corner shall be given a chamfer.
22.0 MATERIALS NOT SPECIFIED
Any materials not fully specified in these specification and which may be offered for use
in the works shall be subject to approval of Engineer, without which it shall not be used
anywhere in the permanent works.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
PART-II
WORKMANSHIP

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Standard
1.2 Supervision
1.3 Temporary Works
1.4 Codes
1.5 Base Lines and Bench Marks
1.6 Setting Out
1.7 Dewatering
1.8 Safety of Existing Work
1.9 Protection of Existing Services
1.10 Handing Over of Work Site
2.0 EARTH WORK
2.1 Scope
2.2 General
2.3 Setting Out
2.4 Site Clearance and demolition
2.5 Classification of Soil
2.6 Method of Excavation
2.7 Excavation of Soils Other than Hard Rock
2.8 Excavation in Hard Rock
2.9 Cutting and Filling for Site Leveling
2.10 Excavation for Trenches
2.11 Excavations for Foundations
2.12 Excess Excavation
2.13 Disposal of Excavated materials
2.14 Backfilling of Trenches
2.15 Backfilling of Foundations
2.16 Filling Under Floors
2.17 Load Bearing Fills
2.18 Turfing
3.0 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT
3.1 Scope
3.2 Execution
3.3 Acceptance Criteria
4.0 CONCRETE (PLAIN & REINFORCED)

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.1 Scope
4.2 Materials
4.3 Grades of Concrete
4.4 Mix Design
4.5 Water/Cement Ratio
4.6 Workability
4.7 Durability
4.8 Trial Mixes
4.9 Nominal Mix Concrete
4.10 Volumetric Mix concrete
4.11 Batching of Concrete
4.12 Water
4.13 Mixing and Transportation of Concrete
4.14 Preparatory Works/Surface Preparation
4.15 Placing and Compaction of Concrete
4.16 Construction Joint & Cold Joints
4.17 Requirements for Concreting in Special cases
4.18 Finishes to Exposed Surfaces of Concrete
4.19 Curing of Concrete
4.20 Testing of Concrete
4.22 Shuttering
4.23 Damp Proof Course Concrete
4.24 Grout
4.25 Concreting in Water Retaining Structures
4.26 Application of Live Load
5.0 MASONRY
5.1 General
5.2 Materials
5.3 Selection of Mortars
5.4 Lime Mortar
5.5 Cement Mortar
5.6 Brick work
5.7 Stone Masonry
6.0 PILING
6.1 General
6.2 Materials & Workmanship
7.0 PLASTERING AND POINTING
7.1 Materials

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
7.2 Plastering
7.3 Cement Pointing
7.4 Rough Cast Concrete Facing
7.5 Punning with Lime or Plaster of Paris
8.0 FLOORING, PAVING & FACING
8.1 Scope
8.2 Materials
8.3 General
8.4 Sub-base
8.5 Subgrade
8.6 Brick Flooring
8.7 Cement Concrete Flooring with Integral Finish
8.8 Concrete Flooring with Granolithic Finish (Artificial Stone Flooring)
8.9 Dado & Skirting Work (Grey Cement Skirting/Dado)
8.10 Terrazzo Flooring & Facing
8.11 Glazed Tile Finished Flooring & Facing
8.12 Chemical Resistant Tiles Flooring/Facing
8.13 Chemical Resistant in Situ Finished Flooring/Facing
8.14 Mastic Asphalt Flooring
8.15 P.V.C. Sheet/Tiles Flooring
9.0 WOOD WORK
9.1 General
9.2 Joinery
9.3 Shrinkage & Tolerance
9.4 Fixing
9.5 Tarring
9.6 Fittings
9.7 Doors, Windows and Ventilators
9.8 Paneled Shutters
9.9 Glazed Shutters
9.10 Flush Door Shutters
9.12 Hand Rails
9.13 Cupboard Shelves etc.
9.14 Hardware Fittings for Doors, Windows & Ventilators
9.15 Inspection
10.0 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS & COLLAPSIBLE GATES
10.1 General

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
10.2 Fixing
10.3 Fittings
10.4 Normal Steel Plate Doors
10.5 Sliding Doors
10.6 Pressed Steel Doors
10.7 Steel Windows, Sashes, Ventilators, etc.
10.8 Gate (Steel)
10.9 Aluminium Doors, Windows, Frames
11.0 GLAZING
11.1 General
11.2 Doors, Windows, Ventilators, etc.
11.3 Fixed Glazing
12.0 WHITE WASHING, COLOUR WASHING AND PAINTING
12.1 Scope
12.2 Materials
12.3 White Washing, Colour Washing
12.4 Cement primer coat
12.5 Water proof cement paint
12.6 Oil bound distemper
12.7 Dry Distemper
12.8 Plastic emulsion paint
12.9 Silicate paint
12.10 Bitumen painting
12.11 Tarring
12.12 Painting to Timber & Steel Surface
13.0 INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY PLUMBING, DRAINAGE & SANITATION
13.1 Scope of Work

13.2 Water Supply & Plumbing
13.3 Drainage and Sanitation (Internal)
14.1 Scope of Work

14.2 Materials
14.3 Water Supply (External)
14.4 Sewerage & Drainage (External)
15.0 ROAD WORK

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
15.1 General
15.2 Trenching and Preparation of Subgrade
15.3 Ash Carpet
15.4 Boulder Soling
15.5 Kerbs
15.6 Water Bound Macadam Surfacing
15.7 Preparation of Base and Shoulders
15.8 Spreading Coarse Aggregate
15.9 Rolling
15.10 Application of Screenings
15.11 Sprinkling and Grouting
15.12 Application of Binding Material
15.13 Setting and Drying
15.14 Surface Evenness
15.15 Bituminous Pavements
15.16 Cement Concrete Roads
15.17 Berms
15.18 Kerbs
15.19 Bridges and Culverts
15.20 Boulder Pitching
15.21 Scarifying & Dismantling
15.22 Diversions
16.0 WATERPROOFING TO ROOFS & BASEMENTS & WATERPROOFING PAINTS
16.1 Scope
16.2 Material
16.3 General Workmanship
16.4 Painting with Hot Bitumen
16.5 Painting with Bitumen Emulsion
16.6 Waterproofing of Roof
16.7 Waterproofing for Basement
16.8 Surface Application
16.9 Water Proofing by Self Adhesive HDPE Membrane System
16.10 Guarantee
17.0 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 False Ceiling

17.2 Expansion and Isolation Joints
17.3 Rubber Pad
17.4 Barbed Wire Fencing

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Standard
A high standard of workmanship in all trades will be required. The Contractor shall
ensure that only skilled and experienced workmen are employed.
1.2 Supervision
The Contractor's supervising staff shall be fully qualified and experienced in the types of
work being carried out under the supervision and shall be capable of ensuring that they
are done well and efficiently.
1.3 Temporary works
Where required, the Contractor shall furnish such details of his temporary works as may
be called for by the Engineer and the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer as to their
safety and efficiency. The Engineer may direct that temporary works, which he
considers unsafe or insufficient, shall be removed and replaced in a satisfactory manner.
1.4 Codes
Unless mentioned otherwise, current versions of all codes, specifications and standards
issued by the Indian Standards Institution and Indian Roads Congress, wherever
mentioned, shall be fully applicable to these specifications. Where standards are not yet
published by the ISI or IRC, adaptable British Standards or Specifications of the
International Organization for standardization shall apply.
In case of any conflict in meaning between these specifications and those of ISI or IRC,
the provisions of these specifications shall prevail.
1.5 Base lines and bench marks
The Contractor shall establish and maintain, to the satisfaction of Engineer, the base
lines and bench marks, based on which the works are set out. Where such base lines
and bench marks are provided by the Engineer, the Contractor shall maintain these
throughout the period of construction without causing any disturbance to them.
1.6 Setting out
The Contractor shall set out all the works to be executed by him, in line with the
standard base lines, levels, position and bench marks and truly as per drawings within
the accepted tolerance limits at no extra cost to Owner. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the setting out of all the works, to be executed by him and the approval of
such setting out by the Engineer shall in no way absolve the Contractor his responsibility
for carrying the work to the true lines, levels and positions as per drawings.
1.7 Dewatering
The Contractor shall carryout all the works, in dry and workable condition and maintain
the same in dry condition till the final handing over of works at no extra cost to the
Owner. For this the Contractor shall make all the necessary provisions of dewatering,
wherever necessary, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
1.8 Safety of existing work
Before taking up any construction adjoining other property or existing work, the
Contractor shall take all steps necessary for the safety and protection of such property or
work.
1.9 Protection of existing services
The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent damage to or interference
with underground or overground services such as cables, drains, piping or piles, whether
shown on drawings or not. Equipment etc., mounted in position shall be protected
against falling debris etc., by means of tarpaulin or such other material.
1.10 Handing over of work site
On completion of work, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris, surplus materials,
temporary work etc., from the site. The site shall be handed over in a tidy and
workmanlike manner.
2.0 EARTH WORK
2.1 Scope
This chapter deals with earth work and excavation for civil works in site,
formation/oversite leveling, foundations, cutting and grading for roads/pavement and
railways, canals, embankments other than water retaining embankments trenching for
drainage and other buried services and the like.
2.2 General
The Contractor shall carry out the excavation strictly to the lines and levels, in conformity
with the drawings or instructions of the Engineer.
2.3 Setting out
Before commencement of earthwork block levels of existing ground shall be taken by the
Contractor jointly with the Engineer plotted and signed in token of acceptance of ground
levels. Excavation shall not be commenced until the initial ground levels have recorded
and accepted. Reference lines, bench marks and base lines shall be set out by the
Contractor for control of earthwork operation. Setting out shall be done with pegs, blocks,
bamboo poles or rails marking boundaries or center lines, as the case may be, and the
same maintained for reference and future checking Chainage stones at regular intervals
shall be set up for embankments. All setting out operations shall be got checked and
approved by Engineer. However, such checking and approval by the Engineer shall in
no way absolve the Contractor of his responsibilities for carrying out the work to the true
lines, levels and positions as per drawing, and in case any error is noticed at any stage in
the contractor's work, it shall be corrected/rectified by him without any cost to the Owner.
2.4 Site clearance and demolition
The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, roots, brush wood, bushes and other
objectionable materials. Useful and saleable material shall be the property of the Owner

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
and shall be stacked properly as directed by the Engineer. The areas to be covered with
embankments shall be stripped of top soil to required depths to expose acceptable
founding strata. Top soil unsuitable for use in embankment construction and other fills
shall be disposed off as directed. All combustible materials shall be stacked and burnt in
locations sufficiently remote to eliminate all danger of fire hazards. All old concrete, brick
works and drains which interfere with construction works shall be dismantled with the
approval of the Engineer taking all necessary precautions prescribed in safety
specification. Top soil which is suitable for use in construction work shall be stockpiled
for later use. Other objectionable materials such as trash, debris, stones, brick, broken
concrete, scrap metal etc., shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer. Payment
for cutting and removal of trees, stumps, dismantling existing structures and stripping
shall be regulated by the description in the Schedule of Items or Part V of these
specifications.
2.5 Classification of soil
The Engineer will decide the classification of any particular soil. Classification of soil
shall be as under:
A) Ordinary Soil
Soils which yield to ordinary application of pick and shovel, phawra rake or other
ordinary digging implements without offering much resistance, shall be classified
as ordinary soil. This includes organic soil, turf, sand, gravel, loam clay, mud,
peat, black cotton soil, soft shale and loose mourn.
B) Hard Soil
This comprises of all soils that cannot reasonably be excavated by the above
mentioned digging implements, but can be excavated with close application of
pick axe or scarifiers or jumpers to loosen. This includes compact moorum, stiff
clay, hard shale, cobble stone etc.,
C) Soft, Rock/Decomposed Rock
This comprises of rock or boulders which may be quarried or split with crow
bars, pavement breakers etc., This include lime stone, sand stone, weathered
rocks and hard conglomerates, and existing structures embedded in earth and
tarred macadam roads, pavements, met in the excavation. The fact that
contractor resorts to blasting for his own reasons shall not mean that the rock is
hard and classified as hard rock.
D) Hard Rock
This comprises of rocks which require blasting for excavation, but where blasting
is prohibited and excavation has to be carried out by chiseling, wedging or such
other agreed methods.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
2.6 Method of excavation
The Contractor may carry out excavations, filling and compaction by any method
considered most suitable, and befitting the site conditions subject to any stipulations
contained in the contract and the specifications. All excavations shall be required to be
kept completely free from water, from whatever source it may come, for all during the
construction. No foundation work shall be taken up until the surfaces are properly
drained.
2.7 Excavation of soils other than hard rock
Excavation shall be carried out in the most expeditious and efficient manner to the lines
and levels as indicated in drawings or as directed by Engineer. Prior approval of the
Engineer shall be taken for the method to be adopted for excavation including
dimensions, side slopes, dewatering, shoring etc., Such approval shall not make the
Engineer responsible for any consequent damage or loss caused. All precautions shall
be taken to preserve the material below and beyond line of excavation in soundest
condition. All damages done beyond limits of excavation shall be made good by the
Contractor at his own cost in a manner approved by the Engineer. All excavated
materials shall be removed to spoil heaps, dumping yards or transported for filling as
may be necessary. When soil heaps are formed for future use, heaps shall be protected
from washing away due to rain or surface run off. The sides of excavation shall be
maintained in stable condition by adequate steppings and batter. To prevent entry of
surface water and accumulation of subsoil water in excavated areas, suitable drainage
arrangements as may be needed and directed by Engineer, shall be provided and
maintained. Pumped out water shall be drained off properly avoiding damage to other
existing works. If any pipelines, cables or service lines are likely to exposed, excavation
around these services shall be carried out manually and all such services shall be
adequately supported and protected.
Excavation shall be carried out in any material encountered including road surfaces,
pavements, buried parts of old foundations, pits or other structures. Excavated materials
shall be placed beyond 1.5 meters of the edge of the excavation pit/trench or half the
depth of the pit/trench whichever is more or further away as directed by the Engineer.
Sumps made for dewatering must be kept clear of the foundations.
2.8 Excavation in hard rock
Where hard rock is met and blasting is considered necessary for its excavation, the
Contractor shall intimate the Engineer in writing. Excavation in hard rock shall be done
either blasting or chiseling or by such other agreed methods as may be required. Levels
of hard rock surface shall be taken and got approved by Engineer before start of
excavation. Blasting shall be permitted only when proper precautions are taken for
protection of persons, works and property. The Contractor shall obtain the necessary
license for procuring, storing and using explosives.
Blasting operations shall be carried out by a licensed Blaster. The quality and quantity of
explosives, size and spacing of holes depth of holes etc., shall be such that they will
neither open seams nor damage or shatter the rock beyond the specified lines of
excavation. A tolerance of 150 mm will however be allowed beyond the excavation lines.
As excavation approaches final stages, the depth of holes and the amount of explosives
used shall reduced progressively to avoid over breakage or damage to founding strata.
Any fissures, cracks and voids below prescribed depth of excavation shall be corrected

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
by removing loose pieces, shattered or affected rock and replaced by lean concrete of
M-5 grade in the case of foundations. Where excavated surface is to receive structural
concrete, the surface shall be cleaned of dust and other objectionable materials.
In cases where blasting, though otherwise required, is prohibited because of any reason,
the excavation shall be carried out by chiseling, wedging or such other agreed methods.
All materials excavated from blasting, chiseling or any such methods shall be stacked for
measurement as directed by Engineer.
2.9 Cutting and filling for site leveling
Excavation and filling operations for site leveling shall be so planned and executed, that
transportation and re-handling are minimized. The sides of excavation and fills shall be
maintained in stable condition by adequate batters, steppings and dewatering. Materials
not desirable shall be disposed off in area indicated by Engineer. When it is required to
blend the material, it shall be done by selective excavation and filling operation. Wells,
ponds, cesspools and water logged areas shall be emptied of water and de-slushed
before filling. Filling shall be done in horizontal layers not exceeding 150 mm in
thickness. All clods shall be broken before placing the fill. Earth moving equipment shall
be allowed to ply over the fill to permit compaction. Adequate allowance shall be made
for subsidence of fill material. Levels shall be taken and excess or shortfall shall be
made good by appropriate cutting or filling.
2.10 Excavation for trenches
Excavation for trenches shall be carried out in materials excavated to enable laying of
service lines or drainage channels or any other desired purpose. Excavation shall be
done to lines and levels shown in drawings and shall be done providing adequate
measures for stability. Vertical wooden reapers or light rails shall be erected at uniform
levels at places where changes of direction and gradients occur. Center lines shall be
marked on horizontal repress or rails, laid across the trenches. Depths of excavation and
pipe invert levels shall be checked by means of boning rods of appropriate lengths.
Trench beds shall be trimmed and rammed with sprinkling of sand or moorum to required
gradients for continuously supporting the pipelines. Trenches shall be locally deepened
and widened to receive sockets and permit joints to be inspected.
2.11 Excavations for foundations
Excavation for foundation shall be done to the lines and levels indicated in the drawings.
Excavated material shall be transported and stored at convenient spots for reuse in back
filling of foundations and other fills. Surplus material shall be spread and levelled at
dumping areas. Side slopes of excavation and/or shoring shall be adequate from
consideration of stability and working space. When so required and authorized by
Engineer, the sides of excavation shall be protected with proper shoring, strutting,
sheeting and sand bags etc., These shall be removed only when work in the pit is
completed, with the approval of the Engineer. When it is felt that removal of supports
may result in side collapse or settlement of adjoining ground or endanger adjoining
structures and foundations, they shall be left permanently in position. The last 150 mm of
excavation shall be done and the bottom trimmed to the required levels only when
concreting is imminent. If at any point the natural ground is disturbed or loosened for any
reason, it shall be consolidated by tamping or rolling or made up with concrete of M-5
grade, if so ordered by the Engineer. Where the soil encountered at depths indicated in
drawings is loose or weak, it shall be further excavated to levels of firm strata as may be

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
directed by the Engineer and filled with lean concrete of M-5 grade. If the bottom of
excavation has been left exposed not through neglect or fault of the Contractor and it has
become deleteriously affected by atmospheric action and water, such portion of
deteriorated foundation material shall be removed and made good by lean concrete of
grade M- 5, such extras will be paid for.
2.11.1 For deep excavation in the proximity of existing buildings, foundations, streets, railway
tracks, underground cabling, gas piping, water and drainage lines, and the like, adequate
appropriate precautions shall be taken to protect such structures or works from damage,
displacement or settlement, either as an immediate result of the excavation or as after
effect, discernable with the passage of time. The method of protection of existing
structures and services may include sheet piling, shoring, strutting slinging or any other
method including dewatering. Payment for such protective work shall be governed by
the description given in the Schedule of Items for the particular work.
2.11.2 For excavation adjoining existing piles care shall be taken to ensure that no pile under
any circumstances is exposed from the top for a height exceeding 2 meters. No strutting
shall be done against exposed piles, nor exposed piles ever used for tying guy ropes or
supports either temporarily or permanently.
2.12 Excess excavation
All excavation done beyond the specified limits or directions of Engineer shall be
considered as excess excavation. They shall be made good as prescribed below by the
Contractor at his cost:
i) Excess excavation in case of site leveling shall be made good by filling and
compacting with material same as the surrounding material. Degree of
compaction shall be at least the same as the surrounding material.
ii) Excess excavation in case of trenches shall be made good by filling and
compacting with selected earth to the same compaction as the surrounding
material or as directed by Engineer. This shall be done in layers not exceeding
150 mm thick, moistened and thoroughly compacted by tamping.
iii) Excess excavation in case of foundation beyond required depths shall be made
good by filling with lean concrete of M-5 grade.
2.13 Disposal of excavated materials
Excavated materials that are unsuitable for use in construction works or in excess of
construction requirements shall be disposed off in dumping yards or in locations
indicated by Engineer. Waste piles/heaps shall be located in such places where they will
not interfere with natural flow of rain water access or transport or with the access to
nearby structures. When required, they shall be levelled and trimmed to such lines and
levels as indicated by Engineer.
2.14 Back filling of trenches
Trenches shall be backfilled after pipes or service lines are tested and approved. Filling
shall be done with earth in 150 mm thick layers free from unwanted material and well

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
rammed. Soft material shall be used in bottom of trenches upto a level of 150 mm above
the top of pipes before backfilling with other fill materials. All clods and lumps shall be
broken before placement. Care shall be taken not to disturb, break or damage the pipes
during backfilling and compaction process.
2.15 Backfilling of foundations
Backfilling of foundations shall be done using suitable soils from excavations. Soil shall
be free from organic matter and other materials which would affect the stability of the fill
and shall be free from boulders, brick bats wood pieces and other injurious materials,
lumps and clods. Before commencement of backfilling of foundations, all shoring and
formwork, bits of timber, cement bags and all other rubbish shall be removed.
Hydro-insulation, Bitumen painting or application of anti-corrosive protective and
anti-termite treatments shall have been completed. Backfilling operation shall not
commence without approval of Engineer. Backfilling shall be carried out in well
compacted layers of 150 mm thickness. Each layers shall have near optimum moisture
content. Layers will extend to the entire width of excavation and shall be sprinkled with
water during compaction process. Ramming shall be done to achieve firm compaction.
Backfill shall be trimmed and finished to lines and levels indicated in the drawings and/or
as directed by the Engineer.
2.16 Filling under floors
Material for filling under floors shall be soil free from harmful minerals, vegetable matter
etc., and shall not be expansive soils. Filling shall be done in well compaction layers not
exceeding 150 mm in thickness. Each layer shall be compacted to 95% Standard
Procter Density. Sufficient soaking shall be done before compaction. The entire area to
be covered by flooring shall be finally dressed and trimmed to required levels.
2.17 Load bearing fills
Load bearing fills include embankments for roads and railways and such other earth fills
above ground levels provided for protection of fuel oil tanks, pads for storage tanks, drain
bunds and the like.
Fill materials shall either be selected earth obtained from excavations for site leveling,
trenches and foundations or from selected borrow areas as may be required. Soils
selected for filling in embankments shall be of uniform quality and free from boulders,
organic materials and other objectionable matter. Soils having high silt and clay content
and having laboratory maximum dry density less than 1.44 gms per c.c. shall not be used
for load bearing fills. For fills greater than 3 m in height soils shall have laboratory density
not less than 1.52 gms per c.c. Soils for top 500 mm of fills for roads and railways shall
have laboratory density not less than 1.65 gms per c.c. and shall not have marked selling
and shrinkage properties.
Foundation preparation for embankments shall be done as prescribed under site

clearance. The founding strata shall be compacted as much as possible by rolling or
tamping before placement of fill material. The water content of founding strata should be
same as that specified for embankment fill. Any pockets of loose material or depressions
left in founding strata as a result of clearing operation shall be filled and compacted with
the same material as the surrounding founding strata. When an embankment is to be
placed on steep sloping ground the surface of the ground shall be trenched in steps or
trenched or broken up in such a manner that the new materials bonds well with the

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
founding strata.
Fill material shall not be placed until foundation has been inspected and approved by
Engineer. Material shall be placed in even, continuous, horizontal layers over full width
of embankment in well compacted layers not exceeding 200 mm thickness. Each layer
shall be compacted by means of smooth rubber tyred rollers, sheep-foot rollers, tractors,
tampers or other mechanical means as may be found suitable for the location. Before
rolling the water content shall be checked and corrected by sprinkling with water or
adding dry material or aeration as may be required. This shall be followed by mixing and
the layer left for soaking before compaction. The water content shall be within plus or
minus 2% of Standard Proctor Optimum. Density of compacted layers shall be
determined by sand replacement method. Average compacted density shall be at least
95% of Standard Proctor Density. The number of tests to be conducted for
determination of moisture content and density shall be as provided by the Engineer.
Side slopes of embankments shall be formed alongwith the main embankment. No side
dumping shall be done for the formation of slopes. When required the width of each
layer shall be constructed slightly in excess of required width and slopes trimmed to
remove loose edge materials and completed to lines shown in drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.
Subgrade for road works shall be thoroughly wetted sufficiently in advance of placing of
any base course and it shall be ensured that it is firm and moist for at least 50 mm below
the surface. Should the subgrade for any reason be loose or have density less than
required, it shall be re-compacted and refinished. Excessive loss of moisture in the
subgrade shall be prevented by sprinkling and/or scaling. No traffic or hauling equipment
shall be permitted to play on finished subgrade and any damage caused to such portion
shall be made good by the Contractor at his own cost.
2.18 Turfing
The slopes of embankment shall be dressed to line and slightly roughened to bond and
hold a surface dressing consisting of 150 mm humus layer of soil. The entire surface
shall then be covered with turf consisting of blocks or strips of grass of approved species.
The sod shall include a net of roots and earth at least 75 mm thick. The sod shall be laid
on slope in close contact and then tamped in place so as to close and fill the joints
between blocks.
Immediately after placing the turfed slope shall be thoroughly wetted and kept wet for a
sufficient period to assure plant growth. Watering shall be continued until the grass
taken root firmly and the whole area presents a uniform appearance. In the event that
the plant growth has not taken place within the period of maintenance such areas or
patches shall be redone by the Contractor at his own cost.
3.0 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT
3.1 Scope
The scope of work includes setting up a chemical barrier against attack by subterranean

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
termites while the building is under construction.
3.2 Execution
3.2.1 General
All work shall in general be executed as specified in IS: 6313 Part-II and as per approved
specification of the agency having special know-how for the job.
All necessary work to ensure uniform distribution and proper penetration of treating
solution shall be done according to the instruction of the Engineer.
Soil treatment shall not be done when it is raining or when the soil is wet with rain or
subsoil water. Once formed, the treated soil barrier shall not be disturbed.
3.2.2 Chemicals and rate of application
Any of the following chemicals (conforming to relevant Indian Standards) in water

emulsion shall be applied by pressure pumps, uniformly over the area treated.
Chemicals Concentration by weight, percentage
Dieldrin 0.5
Heptachlor (IS:6439 -1972) 0.5
Aldrin (IS: 1308 -1964) 0.5
Chlordane (IS: 2632 -1966) 1.0
3.2.2.1 Treatment of pits, trenches and basement excavations
Foundations, basements etc., may either be fully enveloped by the chemical barrier or
the treatment may start 500mm below ground level. The bottom surface and sides of
excavation (upto a height of about 300 mm) for column pits, walls, trenches and
basements shall be treated with chemicals at the rate of 5 litres per sqm of surface area.
Backfill around columns, walls, etc., shall be treated at the rate of 15 litres per sqm of the
vertical surface. Chemical treatment shall be done in stages following the compaction of
earth in layers. The treatment shall be carried out after the ramming operation is done by
rodding the earth at 150mm centres close to the wall surface and spraying the chemicals
in the specified dose.
3.2.2.2 Treatment of top surface of plinth filling
Holes 50 mm to 75 mm deep at 150 mm centres both ways shall be made with

crow-bars on the surface of compacted plinth fill. Chemical emulsion at the rate of 5
litres per sqm of surface shall be applied prior to laying soling or subgrade. Special care
shall be taken to maintain continuity of the chemical barrier at the junction of vertical and
horizontal surfaces.
3.2.2.3 Treatment of doors, windows & soil surrounding pipes, Wastes and conduits
Special care shall be taken at the points where pipes and conduits enter the building and

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
the soil shall be treated for a distance of 150 mm and a depth of 75 mm at the point
where they enter the building. All the wooden door/window frames on the ground floor of
the buildings shall be treated with the insecticide solution.
3.2.2.4 Treatment of expansion joints
These shall receive special attention and shall be treated in a manner approved by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall give a 10 year service guarantee in writing supplemented by a

separate and unilateral guarantee from the specialized agency for the job to keep the
building free of termites for the specified period at no extra cost to the Owner.
4.0 CONCRETE PLAIN & REINFORCED
4.1 Scope
This chapter covers the workmanship, special requirements & regulations with which the
contractor must comply to achieve the following two objectives :
(a) The provision, at all locations on the site, of dense workable concrete, having
the specified characteristic strength.
(b) The placing of concrete at all elevations, well compacted by vibrations, in well
aligned and well fixed formwork ensuring the internal and external dimensions of
structures as per drawings and maintaining the size, shape number and
locations of reinforcements, inserts etc., as specified in the drawings providing
the surface finish after stripping off the formwork to ensure the structural
configurations as per drawings as well within the specified tolerance limits,
curing and guaranteeing the characteristic strength, all as specified.
4.1.1 The mixing, placing, compacting, curing and finishing of concrete shall be done
according to IS: 456 "Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete".
4.2 Materials
For materials reference to Part-I (Materials) shall be made.
4.3 Grades of Concrete
The grades of concrete shall be in accordance with the following table. The grade of
concrete to be used in each section of work will be shown in the drawings or in the
schedule of items :
GRADE OF CHARACTERISTIC STRENGTH i.e. NOMINAL MAX.

CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 15 AGGREGATE SIZE
CMS CUBES AT 28 DAYS (N/mm2) (mm)
M-5A 5 63
(Lean Concrete)

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
GRADE OF CHARACTERISTIC STRENGTH i.e. NOMINAL MAX.

CONCRETE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 15 AGGREGATE SIZE
CMS CUBES AT 28 DAYS (N/mm2) (mm)
M-5B 5 40
(Lean Concrete)
M-7.5A 7.5 63
(Lean Concrete)
M-7.5B 7.5 40
(Lean Concrete)
M-10 A 10 63
M-10 B 10 40
M-10 C 10 20
M-10 D 10 12
M-15 A 15 63
M-15 B 15 40
M-15 C 15 20
M-15 D 15 12
M-20 A 20 63
M-20 B 20 40
M-20 C 20 20
M-20 D 20 12
M-25 C 25 20
M-25 D 25 12
M-30 C 30 20
M-30 D 30 12
M-35 C 35 20
M-35 D 35 12
Notes: A,B,C,D mentioned along with grade of concrete correspond to the maximum
size of coarse aggregates being 63mm, 40mm, 20mm and 12mm respectively.
Unless otherwise specified in the drawings or schedule of items the maximum nominal
size of coarse aggregates for different grades of concrete shall be as under :
(a) For concreting in very narrow space or

in very small thickness .. 12 mm
(b) For all reinforced concrete work except

in massive foundations .. 20 mm

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
(c) For all ordinary plain concrete and

massive reinforced foundations .. 40 mm
4.4 Mix Design
4.4.1 General
At the commencement of the contract the Contractor shall make preliminary tests to
determine the proportions by weight of cement, fine aggregates, coarse aggregates and
water necessary to produce required grades of concrete. The mix proportions shall be
selected to ensure that workability of the fresh concrete is suitable for the conditions of
handling and placing and when concrete hardens, it shall have the required strength,
durability and surface finish. The Contractor shall get approval of Engineer to such
proportions before he starts concreting. However, such approval shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to produce concrete having compressive strengths as laid
down in the foregoing Table.
No departure from the approved proportions will be permitted during the works unless
and until the Engineer gives written authorization for any change in proportion. The
Engineer shall have authority at any time to check whether the mixing of concrete is
being carried out according to the approved proportions.
4.4.2 For the all major and important R.C. works and for all special works, the design of mixes
shall be made by the Contractor at his own cost, for each grade of concrete as well as for
various workability. The design of mixes shall be made according to relevant I.S. codes
or to approved standard methods.
4.4.3 The concrete made by designing the mix is termed hereinafter as "Design Mix Concrete".
4.5 Water/Cement Ratio
4.5.1 Where a particular water/cement ratio is stipulated in the design or drawing alongwith the
characteristic grade of concrete the design of mix shall be carried out by adjusting the
other variable factors to obtain the characteristic strength of concrete with stipulated
water/cement ratio.
4.5.2 In the structures where the impermeability and shrinkage of concrete have an important
bearing on the durability and serviceability of the structures, such as water retaining
structures, basements, underground premises, tunnels, pump houses, exposed
structures near sea side or deserts, prestressed structure, thin precast members etc., the
water cement ratio shall be kept low and preferably not exceeding 0.45.
4.5.3 The water cement ratio, as achieved in the Mix Design, or as specified in the drawings
shall be adhered to strictly and shall not be varied without the permission of the Engineer.
4.6 Workability
4.6.1 The workability of fresh concrete shall be such that the concrete is just suitable for the
conditions of handling & placing so that after compaction if becomes completely
consistent and homogeneously surrounds all the reinforcement and completely fills the
formwork.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.6.2 The workability of fresh concrete at the place of batching/mixing shall be measured by
compacting factor test and at the place of disposition by means of slump test. During the
finalization of Trial Mixes, the relationship between compacting factor and slump test
shall be established for each grade of concrete as well as for various levels of workability.
4.6.3 Normally, in the condition of low water cement ratio as well as for medium/high
workability, the workability shall be achieved by increasing the cement content.
4.6.4 In cases where the cement content is to be limited to reduce the heat of hydration, and
the water/cement ratio is also to be kept low to reduce the permeability or due to other
requirements the desired workability may be achieved with use of limited doses of
platiciser or air entraining agent. In such cases the method of mixing and dosage of the
plasticiser/air entraining agent shall be according to the manufacturer's specification and
with the approval of the Engineer.
4.7 Durability
The durability of concrete, depending on the exposure condition, is to be taken into

account while designing the mix. For given aggregates, the cement content should be
sufficient to make sufficiently low water cement ratio and Appendix A of IS: 456 shall be
taken as guideline for durability considerations.
4.8 Trial Mixes
4.8.1 After approval of the Mix Design by the Engineer, the Contractor shall make in presence
of Engineer the Trial Mixes for each grade of concrete as well as for required workability.
4.8.2 Before starting the trial mixes, necessary preparatory works like determination of sieve
analysis of the aggregates, densities of different ingredients, moisture contents in the
aggregates, shall be completed according to the relevant I.S. Codes.
4.8.3 Each trial mix shall be handled and compacted by the method which the Contractor
proposes to use for that mix in the works and the mixes shall not show tendency of
inadequate compaction by the method proposed.
4.8.4 The compacting factor and the slump of each trial mix shall be determined immediately
after mixing and the values shall not exceed the maximum value obtained in the mix
design.
4.8.5 Five numbers of 150 mm test cubes shall be made from each trial mix. These shall be
cured and tested in accordance with relevant I.S. codes. In order to have the specified
characteristic strength in the field, the concrete mix as designed in the Design Mix shall
have higher average compressive strength depending on the degree of quality control at
site.
4.8.6 Before commencement of the concreting works of particular grade of concrete, the
Contractor must complete the work of trial mixes and subsequent testing of the test
cubes obtained therefrom and the desire of the Approved Mix for that particular grade of
concrete.
4.8.7 The entire cost of all the trial mixes including all the preparatory works for trial mixes,
preparation of test cubes and their testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.9 Nominal Mix Concrete
4.9.1 Nominal mix concrete may be used for all concrete of Grade M-10 and below. If design
mix concrete cannot be used for any reason for Grade M-15 & M-20, nominal mix
concrete may be used with the permission of Engineer, Nominal mix concrete shall not
be used, in any case for Grade of concrete above M-20.
4.9.2 The proportioning of materials for nominal mix concrete shall be in accordance with
Table-3 of clause 8.3 of I.S. 456. The stipulations of Clauses 8.3.1 & 8.3.2 of IS: 456
shall also be taken into consideration.
4.10 Volumetric Mix Concrete
Where concrete is specified in volumetric proportions such as 1:4:8, 1:3:6, 1:2:4, 1:1
1/2:3, 1:1:2 etc., in the schedule of items, coarse and fine aggregates shall be measured
by volume and cement by weight. The water cement ratio shall be within 0.45 to 0.70
depending upon the workability.
4.11 Batching of Concrete
4.11.1 Cement
Cement shall always be batched by weight. A separate weighing device shall be

provided for weighing cement. Where the weight of cement is determined by accepting
the weight per bag, number of bags shall be weighed separately to determine the
average net weight of cement per bag and the same shall be checked regularly.
4.11.2 Aggregates
4.11.3 For both Design Mix concrete and Nominal Mix concrete, the aggregates (coarse and
fine) shall be batched by weight.
4.11.4 In particular cases, or where weight-batching is not possible proportioning by volume

batching may be allowed by the Engineer, provided the Contractor guarantees the
uniformity of aggregates through out the period of construction. For this purpose, the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer sufficient data indicating the weight/volume
relationship of aggregates for different types of concrete and after such approval,
periodic checks on the weight/volume relationship of the aggregates shall be made by
the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where aggregates are moist and
volume batching is adopted, allowance shall be bulking in accordance with I.S. 2386
(Part-III).
4.11.5 Suitable adjustments shall be made for the variation in the weight of aggregates due to
variation in their moisture contents.
4.12 Water
4.12.1 Water may be measured either by weight or by volume. When measured by volume, it
shall be by well calibrated conical shaped jar or vessel or from a calibrated tank filled to
the mixer.
4.12.2 Adjustment of water due to moisture contents in coarse and fine aggregates

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
It is very important to maintain the water cement ratio constant at its correct value. For
the correct determination of amount of water to be added in the concrete mix, to maintain
the water cement ratio constant, the amount of moisture content in both coarse and fine
aggregates shall be taken into consideration, be as frequently as possible, the frequency
for a given job being determined by the Engineer according to weather conditions.
4.12.3 Determination of moisture content in the aggregates
Determination of moisture content in the aggregates shall be according to I.S. 2386

(Part-III). Where tests are not conducted, the amount of surface water may be estimated
from the following table :
Aggregates Surface water carried by Aggregates
% by weight Lir/m3
Very wet sand 7.5 120
Moderately wet sand 5.0 80
Moist sand 2.5 40
Moist gravel stone chips. 1.25 - 2.5 20-40

+Coarser the aggregate, less the water it will carry.
4.12.4 Admixtures
Any solid admixture, to be added, shall be measured by weight, but liquid or semi-liquid
admixture may be measured by weight or volume.
4.12.5 Accuracy of batching
The accuracy of batching shall be within the following tolerance:
Cement within plus or minus 2% by weight.
Aggregate within plus or minus 5% by weight.
Water within plus or minus 0.5% by weight.
4.13 Mixing & Transportation of concrete
4.13.1 Mixing of Concrete
4.13.1.1 Machine mixing
Concrete shall always be mixed in mechanical mixer. Water shall not, normally, be
charged into the drum of the mixer until all other ingredients are already in the drum and
mixed for atleast one minute. Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution
of materials and the mass is uniform in colour and consistency. The mixing time from the
time of adding water shall in accordance with IS: 1791 but in no case less than 2 minutes
or atleast 40 revolutions.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.13.1.2 Hand mixing
When hand mixing is permitted by the Engineer it shall be carried out on a water tight
platform and care shall be taken to ensure that mixing is continued until the mass is
uniform in colour and consistency. In case of hand mixing 10% extra cement shall be
added to each batch at no extra cost to the Owner.
4.13.2 Transportation of concrete
4.13.2.1 Concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the place of placing concrete as
rapidly as practicable by means which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the
ingredients and maintain the required workability. No water shall be mixed with the
concrete after it has left the mixer.
4.13.2.2 Where concrete is transported over long distances, the Contractor shall provide suitable
means by which different grades of concrete are readily indentifiable at the place of final
deposit.
4.14 Preparatory Works/Surface Preparation
4.14.1 For concrete directly on earth foundation
4.14.1.1 Earth foundation on which direct placement of concrete is specified, shall be rammed
and consolidated as directed by the Engineer such that it does not crumble and get
mixed with concrete during or after placement. If the foundation is quite wet, the same
shall be kept dry and then sufficiently consolidated, if necessary, a thin top layer of the
wet soil shall be removed and replaced by sand or other suitable materials as directed by
the Engineer without any cost to the Owner. Care shall also be taken that earth from the
sides also does not get mixed with the concrete, during or after placement, before it has
sufficiently set and hardened.
4.14.1.2 The earth foundation, over which concrete is to be placed direct, shall not be kept
abandoned at the specified level and concrete shall be placed immediately following the
final preparation of the formation otherwise suitable measures shall be taken, as directed
by the Engineer without any cost to the Owner.
4.14.2 For construction joints
All such joints shall have continuous square bond grooves to produce a substantial and
waster-tight key. Where the placement of concrete has to be resumed on a surface
which has hardened, it shall be roughened, cleaned by wire or bristle brushing,
compressed air, water jet etc., and thoroughly wetted. For vertical construction joints a
neat cement slurry shall be applied on the surface immediate before the placement of
concrete. For horizontal joints the surface shall be covered with a layer of mortar about
10 to 15 mm thick composed of cement and sand in the same proportion as the cement
and sand in the concrete mix freshly mixed and applied immediately before placing of the
concrete. On this surface (i.e. on the surface of joints) a layer of concrete not exceeding
150 mm in thickness shall first be placed and shall be well rammed against old work,
particular attention being paid to corners and close spots. To ensure water tightness,
care shall be taken to punn concrete properly against the old surface.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.14.3 On vertical surfaces of masonry
When the concrete is placed on the vertical surface of masonry (as in the case of thin
concrete fins projected from the vertical masonry surface), a groove of dimension as
directed by the Engineer shall be cut in the masonry to ensure a proper bond and the
surface shall be cleaned thoroughly. Before the placement of concrete, the surface shall
be kept moist by spraying water at least for the period of 2 hours and a thick coat of
cement slurry shall be applied immediately before the placement of concrete.
4.14.4 Inside the formwork (cleaning, surface preparation etc.,)
The interior of the form works, where the concrete is to be placed, shall be thoroughly
washed by high pressure water jet or air jet to completely clean the entire volume from all
sort of dirt, grease/oil, foreign and deleterious materials etc. The reinforcement shall be
completely clean and free from all sorts of dirt, grease/oil, rust, foreign/deleterious
materials etc., Before placement of concrete, the form works coming in contact with
concrete, shall be coated highly with form oil or raw linseed oil material or provided with
any approved material to prevent adhesion of concrete to the form work, but utmost care
shall be taken so that such oily material do not come in contact with the reinforcement.
4.15 Placing and Compaction of Concrete
4.15.1 The concrete shall be placed and compacted before setting commences and should not
be subsequently disturbed. No water shall be mixed with the concrete after it has left the
mixer. Method of placing should be such as to preclude segregation. Approved
mechanical vibrator shall be used for compacting concrete, and concrete shall not be
non-vibrated or under vibrated. No concrete shall be placed until the place of deposit
has been thoroughly inspected and approved by the Engineer. all inserts and
embedments properly secured in position and checked and forms properly oiled. No
concrete shall be placed in the absence of the Engineer.
4.15.2 Concrete shall be placed on clean bed having the designed level. The bed shall be
cleaned of all debris and other objectionable materials. Seepage water, if any, shall be
controlled or diverted.
4.15.3 Concreting shall not be carried on during rains unless all precautions have been taken by
the Contractor and necessary permission has been given by the Engineer. Suitable
measures shall be taken to control the temperature of concrete.
4.15.4 Where plums are permitted is massive concrete, they shall be washed and carefully
placed. No stone shall be closer than 30 cm to an exposed face, nor nearer than 15 cm
to an adjacent stone.
4.15.5 Concrete shall not be dropped from a height of more than 2m except through a chute,
the design and type of which shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
4.15.6 The concrete shall be placed, spread and compacted by approved mechanical vibrator.
Vibrators shall not be used for pushing concrete to adjoining areas.
4.15.7 For members involving vertical placing of concrete (e.g. columns, walls etc.,), each lift
shall be deposited in horizontal layer extending for the full width between shuttering and
of such depth that each layer can be easily and effectively vibrated and incorporated with
the layer below by means of compaction being employed.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.15.8 For members involving horizontal placing of concrete (e.g. slabs, beams etc.,) the
concrete shall be placed along the line of starting point in such quantities as will allow
members to be cast to their full depth along the full width between side shuttering and
then gradually brought towards the finishing point along its entire front parallel to the
starting line. Vibration and surface finish shall follow behind the placement as closely as
possible.
4.15.9 Utmost care shall be taken to avoid the displacement of reinforcements/embedded parts
or movement of formwork or damage to faces of the form work or transmission of any
harmful vibration/shocks to the concrete which has not yet hardened sufficiently.
4.15.10 All members shall be concreted at such a rate that no cold joint is formed and fresh
concrete is placed always against green concrete which is still plastic and workable.
4.15.11 Should any unforeseen occurrence result in a stoppage of concreting for one hour or
such other time as might allow the concrete, already placed, to begin to set before the
next batches can be placed, the Contractor shall make at his own cost, suitable tongue,
and groove construction joint, as approved by the Engineer. Any additional
reinforcement required as directed by the Engineer shall also be provided by the
Contractor at his own cost. Before placement of new batches of concrete over that
construction joint, the surface preparation according to this specification stipulated
earlier, shall be done by the Contractor.
4,15.12 The concrete shall be worked well up against whatever surface it adjoins and compacted
to such a degree that it reaches its maximum density as a homogeneous mass, free from
air and water holes and penetrates to all corners of moulds and shuttering and
completely surrounds the reinforcement. All measures shall be taken to make the shape,
size, and location of the finished concrete including its embedments, holes, openings
etc., well within the accepted tolerance limit.
4.16 Construction Joint & Cold Joints
4.16.1 Construction joints
4.16.1.1 Normally, the construction joints including crank inducing joints shall be constructed as
per locations and details indicated on the drawings.
4.16.1.2 Where the location of the joint is not specified in the drawings, it shall be in accordance
with the following guide lines :
(a) In Columns
(i) In case of Projection from basement slab
300 mm from the top of base slab or 75 mm from the top of the
haunches whichever is higher
(ii) In framing of beam at different elevation, 75 mm below the lowest soffit

of the beam and in case of projection from beams and slabs 75 mm
from the top surface of the beam/slab or at the top surface of beam/Slab
whichever facilities formwork.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
(iii) For columns below flat slabs 75 mm below the lowest soffit of the slab.
(b) In walls (horizontal construction joints)
(i) Walls projecting from base slab
300 mm from top of base slab.
(ii) Walls supporting the suspended slab
75 mm from the lowest soffit of the slab.
Note:- In the case of water retaining structures and structures under the influence of
ground water, approved water bars of suitable size shall be provided to make the
joint completely water-tight.
(c) In beams
Beams shall be cast, as a rule, without a joint. But if provision of a joint is

unavoidable, the joint from simply supported beam shall be vertical and at the
middle of the span in continuous beam, the same shall be at the point of
minimum shear force.
(d) In suspended slabs
(i) In slab of small span, there shall be no construction joints.
(ii) In slabs of large span and continuous slabs, construction joint, if allowed
by the Engineer shall be vertical at the middle of span and at the right
angles to the principal reinforcement.
(e) In walls (Vertical construction joint)
As a rule, walls shall be cast monolithically without any vertical construction joint,
unless specified in the drawing. However, for a long wall, the Engineer may
allow vertical construction joint and the same shall be at the place of minimum
shear force. In water retaining structures and in structures under the influence of
ground water approved water bars of suitable size shall be provided to make
the joints completely water tight.
(f) In slabs resting on ground
(i) For Plain concrete
Concreting shall be done in alternate panels not exceeding 10 sqm in

area. The largest panel dimension shall be 5 m.
(ii) For nominally reinforced slab
The area of pour shall not exceed 40 sqm and the maximum panel
dimension shall not exceed 8m.
(iii) For the basement slabs which act as structural member

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
There shall be no construction joint.
(g) In ribbed beam
The beams shall be cast monolithically with the slab in one continuous
operation.
4.16.1.3 In all construction joints the reinforcements shall pass through as per drawings and the
same shall not be disturbed in any way.
4.16.1.4 The vertical construction joints shall be provided by insertion of board keeping
provision for passage of reinforcement/fixtures/embedments. All construction joints shall
be made to form a tongue and groove joint.
4.16.2 Cold joint
An advancing face of a concrete pour, which could not be covered before expiry of initial
setting time for unexpected reasons, is called a cold joint. The Contractor shall remain
always vigilant to avoid cold joints. If however, a cold joint is formed due to unavoidable
reasons, the following procedures shall be adopted for treating it:
(a) If the concrete is so green that it can be removed manually and if vibrators can
penetrate the surface without much effort, fresh concrete can be placed directly
over the old surface and the fresh concrete alongwith the old concrete shall be
vibrated systematically and thoroughly.
(b) In case the concrete has hardened a bit more than (a), but can still be easily
removed by a light hand pick, the surface shall be raked thoroughly and the
loose concrete removed completely without disturbing the rest of the concrete in
depth. Then a rich mortar layer of 12 mm thickness, shall be placed on the cold
joint and then the fresh concrete shall be placed on the mortar layer and vibrated
thoroughly, penetrating deep in to the layer of concrete.
(c) In case the concrete at the joint has become so stiff that it cannot be remoulded
and mortar or slurry does not rise inspite of extensive vibration, a tongue and
groove joint shall be made by removing some of the older concrete and the joint
shall be left to harden at least for 12-24 hours. It will then be treated as regular
construction joint and the surface preparation of the same, before placement of
concrete, shall be as described in the appropriate clauses of these
specifications.
4.17 Requirements for Concreting in Special Cases
4.17.1 Concreting in deep lifts
Placing of concrete in lifts exceeding 3 M in columns & 2 M in walls is in the category of

deep lifts.
4.17.1.1 Before commencement of work, the contractor shall submit for the approval of the
Engineer, the details of the methods he propose to adopt for concreting.
4.17.1.2 The placement of concrete shall preferably be by tremie chute or any other approved

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
method.
4.17.1.3 In structures of heavy/complicated reinforcement or in complicated form works, the

contractor shall provide sufficient number of windows in the form works as directed by
the Engineer to check the placement and compaction of concrete in different stages.
Such windows shall be closed as soon as the concreting reaches the bottom level of the
same.
4.17.2 Concreting under water
When it is necessary to deposit concrete under water, the special requirements, over and
above those of this specification shall be in accordance with Clause 13.2 of IS: 456.
4.17.3 Cold weather concreting
When conditions are such that the ambient temperature may be expected to be 4.5 C
degree or below during the placing and curing period, the work shall conform to IS: 7861
(Part-II).
4.17.4 Hot weather concreting
When concreting in very hot weather the Contractor shall take all precautions as
stipulated in IS: 7861 (Part-I) and stagger the work to cooler parts of the day to ensure
that the temperature of wet concrete used, specially in massive structure, does not
exceed 38 degree 'C'.
Positive temperature control by methods like pre-cooling, post cooling or cooling of

concrete by circulating cold water through small embedded pipe lines inside concrete, if
required, shall be specified and shall be undertaken.
4.17.5 Concreting in the area exposed directly along sea coast
The special requirements, over and above those of this specification shall be in
accordance with clause 13.3 of IS: 456.
4.17.6 Concreting in large pours (mass concrete)
4.17.6.1 The aim of controlling the concreting in large pours is to reduce cracking caused by
shrinkage due to heat of hydration. The Contractor shall submit detailed proposal to the
Engineer for approval about the method of pouring and the measures to reduce heat of
hydration, which he proposes to adopt.
4.17.6.2 The maximum height of lifts will depend on the type of cement used. The use of cement
having low heat of hydration, could allow greater lifts.
4.17.6.3 The Contractor shall provide all the necessary arrangements like precooling of
aggregates, cooling of fresh concreting by passing cold water through pipes placed
inside the concrete or such other measures at least 48 hours before the placement of
concrete and also provide the facility for recording of temperature at least 24 hours prior
to placement of concrete.
4.17.6.4 The minimum interval between concreting of successive lifts, separated by horizontal
construction joint, shall be six days or as directed by the Engineer.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.17.6.5 The minimum interval between the concreting of adjacent pours separated by vertical
construction joints shall be three (3) days, or as directed by the Engineer.
4.18 Finishes to Exposed Surfaces of Concrete
The Contractor is to include his quoted rate for concrete, the provision of normal finishes
in both formed & unformed surfaces as and where required by the Engineer without any
extra cost to the owner. Some common finishes are indicated below:
4.18.1 Surface which do not require plastering
Surface in contact with casings shall be brought to a fair and even surface by working the
concrete smooth against casings with a steel trowel while it is being deposited and also
by working over the surface with a trowel immediately after the removal of the casings or
centerings, removing any irregularities and stopping air holes, etc. Use of mortar plaster
is not permissible for correcting levels, removing unevenness etc. However, if, in the
opinion of the Engineer, such plastering is unavoidable then the thickness of plaster shall
in no case exceeds 5 mm and the plastering shall be in cement mortar.(1:3).
4.18.2 Faces of foundations which will be back filled
Neither the smoothness of the surface not the positions of the joints in the form work are
important. Small blemishes caused by entrapped air are permitted. No special surface
finish is required.
4.18.3 Exposed surfaces which need plastering
Surfaces of beams/columns flushing with the block work or other structures where is
intended to plaster, shall be hacked adequately as soon as the shuttering is stripped off
so that proper bond with the plaster can develop.
4.18.4 Surface for non-integral finish
Where a non-integral finish such as floor finish is specified or required, the surface of the
concrete shall be struck off at the specified levels shall be finished and finished rough.
4.18.5 For monolithic finish
Where no more finishing course is to be applied as in the case of basement floor,

industrial flooring or the screed concrete flooring etc, the concrete shall be completed
and struck off at the specified levels and slopes with a screed, board and then floated
with a wooden float. Steel trowelling is then started after the concrete has hardened
enough to prevent the excess of fines and water to rise to the surface but not hard
enough to prevent proper finishing. Trowelling shall be such that the surface is flat,
smooth and neatly finished.
4.19 Curing of Concrete
4.19.1 General
The purpose of curing is either to provide sufficient water at optimum temperature or to

prevent loss of moisture from the concrete itself so that the cement inside the concrete is

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
sufficiently hydrated which of course in slow and prolonged process. As soon as the
concrete has hardened sufficiently the curing shall be started.
4.19.2 Different methods of curing
Any one of the following may be used for curing as approved by the Engineer.
(a) Curing by direct water.
(b) Curing by covering the concrete with absorbent material and kept damp.
(c) Covering the concrete with an impervious sheet.
(d) Curing by providing protective membrane.
(e) Curing by chemical coating.
4.19.3 Curing by direct water
This is done either by ponding or spraying water.
(a) Ponding
Ponding is widely used for curing slab and pavements. Earth bunds are formed
over the slabs and water is pumped or poured into them and the same is
replenished at interval to make up for the loss of evaporation. As this type of
curing is one of the best methods, 10 days of curing after final setting is
sufficient.
(b) By spraying water
Curing is done by spraying water by suitable means at approved time intervals.

While spraying it shall be ensured that the complete area is covered. In order to
avoid cracking, cold water shall not be applied to massive members immediately
after striking the form work, while the concrete is still warm. Alternate wetting
and over drying shall be avoided.
Curing by spraying water shall be continued at least for 18 days.
4.19.4 Curing of concrete with absorbent material kept damp
The entire concrete surface is covered either with hessian, burlap, sawdust, sand,
canvas or similar material and kept wet continuously for atleast 12 days after final setting.
4.19.5 Curing by covering concrete surface with an impervious sheet
This is achieved by covering the entire concrete surface with water proof paper or plastic
sheets specially manufactured for this purpose. The waterproof papers are stuck
together by adhesive compound and the plastic sheets can be welded at site.
Such type of covering shall be kept at least for 24 days after the final setting. It is
preferable to have sheet as white in appearance since the white colour will reflect hot
sunrays and keep the concrete temperature at reasonable level.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.19.6 Curing by providing protective membrane by applying a curing compound
This is achieved by applying a membrane forming compound (curing compound) over

the concrete surface. Generally these are available in emulsion form, liquid. The
application of the curing compound should be started immediately after stripping off the
shuttering in case of formed surface and after the surface has hardened in case of
unformed surface.
The curing compound membrane forming emulsion dry up within 3 to 4 hours after
application and forms a continuous coherent adhesive membrane over the concrete
surface. Such membrane serves as a physical barrier to prevent the loss of moisture
from the concrete itself. Membrane forming emulsions are generally coloured black or
white to improve visibility for ensuring uniform application. Black colour shall never be
used for curing in very hot weather. In order to prevent glare, a colouring pigment may
be added to white compounds.
(a) Black curing compounds are either Bituminous or Asphaltic emulsions and shall
be used to the surface which are to be covered by back filling or on the floor
which is to be covered with tiles and linoleum.
(b) White curing compound shall be used to the surfaces of tall structures under
exposure of hot sun where other method of curing cannot be properly ensured.
4.19.7 Curing by chemical coating
For chemical curing sodium silicate or calcium chloride is used. The use of calcium
chloride shall be done without the approval of the Engineer. Normally the sodium silicate
mixed with water is applied over concrete surface and when it dries up it forms a thin
varnish like film which fills up the pores and surface voids and prevents evaporation of
water. This also acts like curing compound but only difference is that curing compounds
are available in ready mixed emulsion forms while sodium silicate is to be mixed with
water at site.
4.19.8 Limitation to use of different methods of curing
(i) Curing by the processes as indicated in 4.19.3 and 4.19.4 give very good
results in normal warm climate for maturity of concrete.
(ii) In cold weather, the process as indicated in 4.19.4 gives very good result for
maturity of concrete.
(iii) Where water cement ratio is less than 0.5 the methods indicated in 4.19.6 and
4.19.7 shall not be used.
(iv) In warm climate also, where the methods of curing as indicated in 4.19.3 or
4.19.4 cannot be properly ensured, any suitable method of curing as indicated in
4.19.5 to 4.19.7 as approved/directed by the Engineer shall be adopted.
4.20 Testing of Concrete

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.20.1 General
The Contractor shall carryout, entirely at his own cost, all sampling and testing in
accordance with the relevant I.S. standards and as supplemented herein. The
Contractor shall get all tests done in approved Laboratory and submit to the Engineer,
the test result in triplicate within 3 days after completion of the test.
4.20.2 Consistency test (tests of fresh concrete)
4.20.2.1 At the place of deposition/pouring of the concrete, to control the consistency, slump tests
and/or compacting factor tests shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with
I.S. 199 as directed by the Engineer.
4.20.2.2 The results of the slump tests/compacting factor tests shall be recorded in a register for
reference duly signed by both the Contractor and the Engineer. That register shall be
considered as the property of the Owner and shall be kept by the Contractor at site in
safe custody.
4.20.2.3 The results of the slump tests/compacting factor tests shall tally, within accepted variation
of plus or minus 12% with the results in the respective design mix, in case of mix design
concrete and with the values indicated in the table under clause 6.1 of IS: 456 in case of
nominal mix concrete.
4.20.2.4 For any particular batch of concrete, if the results do not conform to the requirements as
specified in 15.2.3 or do not conform to any requirement of this specification, the
Engineer has the right to reject that batch and the Contractor shall remove the same
immediately from the site, at no cost to the Owner.
4.20.3 Strength test of concrete
4.20.3.1 While placing concrete, the Contractor shall make 6 nos. of 15 cm test cubes from
particular batches of concrete as desired by the Engineer. The frequency of taking test
cubes shall be either according to clause 14.2 of IS: 456 or as directed by the Engineer.
4.20.3.2 The cubes shall be prepared, cured and tested according to IS: 516. Out of 6 nos. of test
cubes 3 shall be tested for compressive strength at 7 days after casting and the
remaining 3 at 28 days after casting.
4.20.3.3 A register shall be maintained at site by the Contractor with the following details entered
and signed by both the Contractor and the Engineer. That register shall be considered
as the property of the Owner.
(a) Reference to the specific structural member
(b) Mark on cubes
(c) The grade of concrete
(d) The mix of concrete
(e) Date and time of casting
(f) Crushing strength at 7 days

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
(g) Crushing strength at 28 days
(h) Any other information directed by the Engineer.
4.20.4 Acceptance criteria for test cubes
The acceptance criteria of concrete on strength requirement shall be in accordance with

the stipulations under clause 15 of IS: 456.
4.20.5 Non-destructive tests on hardened concrete
4.20.5.1 If there is doubt about the strength or quality of a particular work or the test results do not
comply with the acceptance criteria as stipulated under clause 15 of IS: 456,
non-destructive tests on hardened concrete like core test and/or load tests or other type
of non destructive tests like ultrasonic impulse test etc. shall be carried out, as may be
directed by the Engineer, by the Contractor at entirely his own cost.
4.20.5.2 The core tests and load tests shall comply with the requirements of clause 16.3 and 16.5
of IS: 456 respectively. In case of other types of special tests like ultrasonic impulse test
etc., the stipulation of clause 16.6 of IS: 456 shall be applicable.
4.20.6 Concrete below specified strength
In case of failure of test cubes to meet the specified requirements the Engineer may take
one of the following actions:-
1) Reject the work and instruct that section of the works to which the failed cubes
relate shall be cut out and replaced at Contractor's expense.
2) Instruct the Contractor to carryout additional test and/or works to ensure the
soundness of the structure at Contractor's expense.
3) Accept the work with reduction in the rate in appropriate item.
4.20.7 Concrete failed in non-destruction tests
In case the test results of the core tests or load tests in a particular work do not comply
with the requirements of respective clause (16.3 for core test and 16.5 for load tests) of
IS: 456 the whole or part of the work concerned shall be dismantled and replaced by the
Contractor as may be directed by the Engineer at no extra cost to the Owner and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. No payment for the dismantled concrete including relevant
form work, reinforcement, embedded fixtures etc. shall be made. In the course of
dismantling if any damage occurs to the adjacent structure or embedded item, the same
shall be made good, free of charge by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.21.1 Material
Material shall be as specified in the respective schedule of Items. The specifications of

materials shall be as per Part-I.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.21.2 Storage
Steel reinforcement shall be stored in such a manner that they are not in direct contract
with ground. Bars of different classifications and sizes shall be stored separately. In
cases of long storage or in coastal areas, reinforcement shall be stacked above ground
level by atleast 15 cm, and a coat of cement wash shall be given to prevent scaling and
rusting.
4.21.3 Bending and placing
Bending and placing of bars shall be in conformity with IS: 2502 "Code of Practice for
Bending and Fixing of Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" and IS: 456 - "Code of Practice
for Plain and Reinforced Concrete".
4.21.4 Welding of Reinforcement
Welding of mild steel reinforcement bars conforming to IS:432 (Part-I) shall be done in
accordance with IS: 2751 - "Code of Practice for Welding of Mild Steel Bars used for
Reinforced Concrete construction" with additional precaution that for lap welded joints the
throat thickness of weld beads shall be atleast 3 mm or 0.6 times the nominal size of
weld (which is the radius of bar) whichever is more.
Welding of cold worked high strength deformed bars conforming to IS: 1786 shall be
done using electric arc welding process using low hydrogen electrodes (Ferro Weld- I or
Ferro Weld-II or equivalent). Oxyacetylene welding shall not be used.
Butt welding of bars upto 32 mm diameter for vertical splices shall be done either by
single bevel grove weld or double bevel groove weld, with bevel angle 45 degree. Butt
welding of bars upto 32 mm diameter for horizontal splices shall be done either by single
Vee-grove weld or double Vee grove weld with chamfered angle of 45 degree to 60
degree. The diameter of welded joint shall be 1.2 times the diameter of bar. Edge
preparation for butt welding shall be done by shearing, machining and grinding.
Oxyacetylene flame shall not be used for cutting. Chamfered faces shall be smooth
finished by hand file if required.
Lap welding of bars upto 20 mm diameter shall have a minimum bead length of 12 times
the diameter of bar or 200 mm whichever is more arranged on one or both sides. The
throat thickness of weld beads shall be 5 mm or 0.75 times the nominal size of weld
(which is the radius of bar) whichever is more. In case of unsymmetrical lap weld with
weld bead on one side only, the maximum length of each weld bead shall be 6 times the
diameter of bar or 100 mm (whichever is more), separated by an equal length in between
weld beads. Splice bars used in symmetrical weld joint shall have same diameter as the
parent bars. Lap joint with single splice bars shall have weld beads on both sides.
Lap welding of bars above 20 mm shall be done using splice plate or splice angle.
Thickness of splice plate shall not be less than 0,65 times the diameter of bar and width
shall not be less than twice the diameter of bar. The size of splice angle shall be such
that its area of cross section is atleast 1.62 times the area of bar being spliced.
More than one third of the bars shall not be welded at any one section and welded joints
shall be staggered at a distance of 50 times the diameter of bars. Welding shall not be
done at bends or curved parts of bars and it shall be located atleast at a distance of 50
times the diameter of bar from bends.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Tests
Test pieces of welded bars shall be selected and tested in accordance with the
provisions of IS: 2751. The number of tests will be as laid down in IS: 2751 or such
larger number as the Engineer may decide having regard to the circumstances.
4.21.5 Cleaning
All steel for reinforcement shall be free from loose scales, rust coatings oil, grease, paint
or other harmful matters immediately before placing the concrete. To ensure this
reinforcements with rust coatings shall be cleaned thoroughly before bending/placement
of the same.
4.21.6 Placing in position
All reinforcements shall be accurately fixed and maintained in positions as shown on the
drawings and by adequate means like mild steel chairs and/or concrete spacer blocks
irrespective of whether such supports are payable or not. Bars intended to be in contact
at crossing points, shall be securely tied together at all such points by annealed soft steel
wire or by tack welding in case of bars larger than 25 mm dia, as may be directed by the
Engineer. Binders shall tightly embrace the bars with which they are intended to be in
contact and shall be securely held. The vertical distance between successive layers of
bars shall be maintained by provision of mild steel spacer bars. They should be spaced
such that the main bars do not sag perceptibly between adjacent spacers.
4.21.7 Clear cover
Clear cover shall be as specified in the drawings. If nothing is specified in the drawing
the clear cover shall be in accordance with the relevant clause of IS: 456.
4.21.8 Light structural work and embedded metallic parts, conduits,
4.21.8.1 Fabrication of metallic parts & light structural works
Fabrication of all structural steel work shall be done in accordance with IS: 800 - "Code of
Practice for use of Structural Steel in General Building Construction". All workmanship
shall be equal to the best practice in modern structural shops. Greatest accuracy shall
be observed in the manufacture of every part and all identical parts shall be strictly
inter-changeable. Steel work shall be shop fitted and shop assembled as far as
practicable to minimize on site work and to meet transport restrictions. All materials shall
be straight and if necessary before being worked shall be straightened of flattened by
pressure and shall be free from twists. Shearing or flame cutting may be used and the
resulting edges shall be clean and straight. Flame cut edges shall be planed/cleaned by
chipping or grinding. Sheared members shall be free from distortion at sheared edges.
Welding and welded work shall conform to IS: 816 - "Code of Practice for use of metal
arc welding for General Construction in Mild Steel". Mild steel electrodes conforming to
IS: 814 "Specification for covered electrodes for metal arc welding of mills steel (third
revision) shall be used.
4.21.8.2 Transportation and Storage

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
All pieces shall be properly identified and bundled for transportation to work site. Care
shall be exercised in the delivery, handling and storage of material to ensure that material
is not damaged in any manner. Materials shall be kept free of dirt, grease and foreign
matter and shall be stored properly on skids or any other suitable supports to avoid
contact with ground, damage due to twisting, bending etc.
4.21.8.3 Erection of light structural work
Erection of light structural work shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of
IS: 800. No component which is bend or twisted shall be put in place until the defects are
corrected. Components seriously damaged during handling shall be replaced. No
riveting, permanent bolting or welding shall be done until proper alignment has been
completed. Whenever field welding is to be done it shall be in accordance with the
requirements of shop fabrication. Shop paints shall be removed before field welding for a
distance of atleast 50 mm on either side of the joints.
4.21.8.4.1 Erection of embedded metallic parts, inserts, conduits
Bolts and inserts shall be securely fixed in position as shown in the drawings, before
commencement of concreting. Bolts shall be checked for accuracy in alignment on both
the axes. Limits of tolerance in alignment and level shall be as shown in the drawing or
described elsewhere in these specifications.
Where bolts are housed in sleeves, special care shall be taken after concreting is over
and has partly set to ensure that the bolts move within the sleeves. The annular space of
the sleeve shall be plugged with suitable stoppers to prevent the ingress of water, grit,
dust, rubbish or other foreign material into it, both during and after concreting. Opened
conduits shall be plugged similarly. Where channels, U-shaped profiles or other similar
inserts are required to be placed in concrete, special care shall be taken to keep the
grooves of such profiles free from the ingress of concrete, slurry etc., by suitable packing
material, if necessary. All threads for bolts and inserts shall be greased at intervals and
kept covered to prevent damage.
4.21.8.4.2 Necessary templates, jigs, fixtures, supports shall be used as may be specified or
required or directed by the Engineer free of cost to the Owner.
Exposed surfaces of embedded materials shall be painted with one coat of anticorrosive
paint or bituminous paint, as desired, without any extra cost to the Owner.
4.22 Shuttering
4.22.1 General
All shuttering, formwork, supports and staging shall be designed by the Contractor and
be subject to approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit drawings and
calculations to the Engineer for scrutiny when called upon to do so. The shuttering shall
be designed for a live load of 400 Kg/Cm2 in addition to the weight of the green concrete,
or such other load as the Engineer may specify. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the correctness and strength of the formwork including its supports and centering and
approval by the Engineer will not relieve him of his responsibilities.
4.22.2 Material

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The staging and supports may be of round or sawn timber or tubular or other shapes in
steel. Round timber shall preferably extend over the full height in one piece. These shall
be securely jointed or otherwise fastened and spaced at suitable intervals as the design
may warrant. They shall be suitably braced at regular intervals horizontally and
diagonally.
The form work shall be of steel plate on steel frame, wooden boards with steel sheet
lining, or plywood or season timber board. Where ornamental and curved surfaces are
required the material shall be very good seasoned timber or plywood which can be
shaped correctly.
4.22.3 Fixing
The shuttering shall conform to the shapes, lines, levels and dimensions shown in the
drawing. It shall be fixed in perfect alignment and securely braced so as to be able to
withstand, without appreciable displacement, deflection of movement of any kind, the
weight of all construction, movement of persons and plant. It shall be so constructed as
to remain rigid during the placing and compacting of concrete without shifting or yielding
and shall be sufficiently water tight to prevent loss of slurry from the concrete.
All props shall be supported on sole plates and double wedges. At the time of removing
props these wedges shall be gently eased and not knocked out. The form work shall be
so designed that the sides are independent of the soffit and the side forms can be
removed easily without any damage or shock to the concrete.
4.22.4 Wrought shuttering
Wrought shuttering shall be such as to produce a first class fair face on the concrete free
from board marks or any other disfigurements. This shall be used for exposed surfaces
where specified or directed by the Engineer. It may be made of heavy quality plywood or
steel sheets having smooth, plain surface.
The joints in shuttering shall be arranged in a regular pattern approved by the Engineer.
Wrought shuttering shall be aligned within a tolerance of 3 mm.
4.22.5 Rough shuttering
Rough shuttering shall be used for all surface of concrete walls, footings etc., which are
not exposed in the finished work or which are to receive plaster and as directed by the
Engineer. It may be made of timber, ordinary plywood or steel sheets.
4.22.6 Slipform shuttering
Slip forms, where used, shall provide a smooth, even surface true to dimensions and
alignment. The concrete surface produced by such shuttering shall be free from fines,
bulges and unseemly off-sets. Slipforms shall have prior approval of the Engineer and
the Contractor shall submit complete information required in this regard.
4.22.7 Special provision
4.22.7.1 Wherever concreting of narrow member is required to be carried out within shutters of
considerable depth, temporary openings in the sides of the shutters shall, if so directed
by the Engineer, be provided to facilitate cleaning, pouring and consolidation of concrete.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.22.7.2 In liquid retaining structures and structures below ground water level, through bolts for
the purpose of securing and aligning the form work shall not be used.
4.22.7.3 Forms shall be given an upward camber, if so desired by the Engineer, to ensure that
long beams do not have any sag. The camber may be 1 in 250 or as the Engineer may
direct.
4.22.7.4 The joints in form work shall be sealed by adhesive tapes or by other means, to prevent
any leakage of slurry or mortar.
4.22.8 Preparation for concreting
Before any concreting is commenced the shuttering shall be carefully examined for
dimensional accuracy and safety of construction. The space to be occupied by concrete
shall be thoroughly cleaned out to remove rubbish, debris, shavings and saw dust. The
surface in contact with concrete shall be coated with an approved substance such as
mould oil or other non-staining mineral oil to prevent adhesion. Where necessary the
surface shall be wetted to prevent absorption of moisture from concrete. Care shall be
taken to avoid the reinforcements coming in contact with shutter oil.
4.22.9 Removing
4.22.9.1 Removal of forms shall never be started until the concrete has thoroughly set and aged
to attain sufficient strength to carry twice its own weight plus the live load that is likely to
come over it during construction.
4.22.9.2 Removal of forms shall not entail chipping or disfiguring of the concrete surface.
Shuttering shall be removed without shock or vibration and shall be eased off carefully in
order to allow the structure to take up its load gradually.
4.22.9.3 Under normal circumstances (generally where temperatures are above 21 degree 'C'),
and where ordinary portland cement is used shuttering may be struck after the expiry of
the following periods :-
i) Walls, columns and vertical

faces .. 24 to 48 hours as may be directed by
the Engineer.
ii) Bottom of slab upto 4.5 m

span .. 7 days
iii) Bottom of slab above 4.5 m

span, bottom of beam and
arch, rise upto 6 m span .. 14 days
iv) Bottom of beam and arch

rise over 6 m span .. 21 days
These periods may be increased at the discretion of the Engineer. Special care shall be
taken while striking the shuttering of cantilevered slabs and beams, portal frames etc.,

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.22.9.4 Before removing the form work, the Contractor must notify the Engineer to enable him to
inspect the condition of the finished concrete immediately after the removal of the form
works.
4.22.10 Contractor's responsibility
Any damage resulting from faulty preparation, premature or careless removal of

shuttering shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense.
4.22.11 Irrecoverable shuttering
In cases where the shuttering cannot be removed without damaging the structure itself or
where removal of shuttering is rendered impossible due to the nature of construction or
where the Engineer may so instruct, such shuttering shall be classified as irrecoverable
shuttering. However, such abandoning of shuttering will be permitted only in situations
where it will not remain exposed or otherwise cause damage of any kind.
4.22.12 Metal Forms
Where permanently left-in-place metal forms or deck are shown in drawings or otherwise
ordered to be provided by the Engineer, they shall satisfy the requirements with regard to
load carrying capacity. The metal forms shall be obtained from a reputed manufacturer,
whose performance guarantee shall be obtained and submitted to the Engineer.
Designs and drawings giving full details shall be submitted to the Engineer in advance for
approval.
4.23 Damp Proof Course Concrete
4.23.1 Thickness
It shall be as specified in the drawings/ schedule of items.
4.23.2 Mix
The grade of mix shall be as specified in the drawing or schedule of quantities. If nothing
is specified, the mix shall be 1 part of cement : 1 1/2 part of coarse sand : 3 parts of stone
chips. The stone chips shall be 12 mm down graded.
Approved water proofing admixture shall be mixed with cement as per manufacturer's
specifications. The water cement ratio shall be as low as possible to increase the
impermeability of concrete and in no case more than 0.5.
4.23.3 Preparation of base surface
The base surface shall be well roughened by chipping and brushing with steel brush and
shall be cleaned of all dirt, dust, grease, oil and all other foreign & deleterious materials.
Then the surface shall be well moistened with water.
4.23.4 Placing and compaction
Just prior to placement of D.P.C. Concrete, a thick coat of cement slurry shall be applied
on the base surface. The placement shall be as specified for the concrete in beams.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The concrete shall be well compacted to make at dense.
4.23.5 Finishing
When the concrete has set enough but remains still green, the top surface shall be
marked in regular pattern by steel trowel so as to have proper bond with the future work.
4.23.6 Curing
The D.P.C. coarse shall be kept continuously moist at least 10 days.
4.24 Grout
4.24.1 Scope
The scope covers the grouting under base plates, grouting between the joints of precast
concrete, grouting the pockets/holes/opening etc.
4.24.2 Grouting under base plates
Grouting under base plates of equipment/structures shall be of cement mortar 1:2 for
thickness upto 25 mm. For thickness exceeding 25 mm, concrete of grade specified in
the drawing or minimum M-20 grade using 10 mm down graded aggregates shall be
used. The grout shall be placed in position well rammed until the whole space is
completely filled with concrete. No vibrators shall be used. Quick setting cements shall
be used in the preparation of mortar or concrete, where so specified.
The grout shall either be "dry" concrete or mortar or "wet expanding" concrete or mortar
as the Engineer may direct. A dry grout shall have a slump not exceeding 6 mm. It shall
be rammed under the horizontal surface with the aid of suitable tools. A "wet expanding"
grout shall have a slump of atleast 125 mm but not exceeding 225 mm. To this shall be
added an expanding admixture approved by the Engineer and according to the
Manufacturer's instructions.
4.24.3 Grouting the joints of precast members
The requirements are same as that described in 4.24.2 except that the slump shall be
much less (the slump in this case shall be within 75 mm to 125 mm as per the
requirements) and in the case the thickness of the joint is 30 mm or less the mix shall be
1 part of quick setting cement and 1 1/2 parts of coarse sand. Some times dry mortars
i.e. mortar with slump less than 6 mm is used for grouting the joints of precast members.
4.24.4 Grouting pockets/holes in concrete
Depending upon the size of the pockets/holes in the concrete, the mix of the grout shall
be either of concrete or of cement sand mortars. Normally the grade of such
concrete/mortar shall be M-20 unless specified otherwise. In filling the holes of
foundation bolts and expanding admixture of approved type shall be used as per
manufacturer's specification.
4.24.5 Workmanship

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.24.5.1 The surface of the concrete over which grouting is to be applied shall be thoroughly
prepared to provide a clean rough surface. If necessary, chipping shall be carried out on
such surface to make it completely rough. Then the surface shall be wetted. Bolt
pockets shall be cleaned immediately before the base plate is placed in position.
4.24.5.2 Before placement of grout, the surfaces (except in the case of bolt holes) shall be wetted
with cement slurry. In case of bolt holes/pockets water from such pockets shall be
thoroughly removed by some suitable means and no cement slurry shall be applied.
4.24.5.3 Hand mixing is not permitted and the grout shall always be machine mixed. If however in
some special cases where the quantity of grout is so small that it cannot be machine
mixed, hand mixing may be allowed but the same shall be done under the strict
supervision of an experienced supervisor of the Contractor.
4.24.5.4 The grout shall be placed within 30 minutes of being mixed. The grout shall be poured
and then worked into position by suitable means until the space is completely filled. The
Contractor shall take all possible measures during grouting so that the grout fills the
space completely and thoroughly. Where the gap is very small or unapproachable for
the placement of concrete, the Contractor shall grout by pressure grouting and in that
case the mix may be of cement sand mortar of the appropriate grade but in any case the
water cement ratio shall be as low as possible.
4.24.6 Curing
After 10 hours of grouting, the same shall be covered with wet gunny bags and the
surface shall be kept continuously moist atleast for 10 days.
4.25 Concreting in Water Retaining Structures
The basic specifications as regards 'mix' design, placing, compacting, curing etc. shall
conform to the requirements as specified herein before of this Chapter. Over and above
the materials and workmanship shall conform to the stipulations of IS: 3370 (Part-I & II) to
make dense and impervious concrete. As specified herein before all the construction
joints shall be provided with approved water bars. The expansion and construction
joints, if any, shall be provided with the requirements as specified in the drawing or as
directed by the Engineer.
4.26 Application of Live Load
The designated live load shall be allowed on any structure only after 28 days, after
proper curing is carried out on the last concrete poured in structure.
5.0 MASONRY
5.1 General
This specification deals with masonry and allied works in foundation, plinth and
superstructure.
5.2 Materials
For specifications of materials Part-I shall be referred.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
5.3 Selection of Mortars
Mortar for masonry shall conform generally to IS: 2250, "Code of Practice for Preparation
and Use of Masonry Mortars", and proportion shall be as specified in the drawing or in
the Schedule of Items.
5.4 Lime Mortar
Field slaking of lime shall be done in accordance with IS: 1635, "Code of Practice for
Field Slaking of Lime, and Preparation of Putty".
5.4.1 Hydrated lime mixed with water to form putty shall be stored at least for 24 hours before
used well covered and protected against evaporation. For quick lime, sufficient water
shall be added for slaking and forming a cream and the same screened through a No. 10
sieve and stored for at least 7 days before use.
5.4.2 Lime putty and sand of proper proportion, with addition of necessary water, shall be
mixed on a water-tight platform and then thoroughly ground in a mortar mill. It shall then
be stored ready for use, well covered and protected to avoid evaporation and drying of
mortar. In case cement is needed to be added to the lime-sand mortar, required quantity
of cement shall be added and again mixed for at least three minutes preferably in a
mechanical mixer, with addition of minimum quantity of water to achieve workable
consistency. Lime mortar shall be used within 72 hours of mixing.
5.5 Cement Mortar
5.5.1 Cement and sand of requisite quantity shall be mixed dry, preferably in a mechanical
mixer and further mixed after adding the required quantity of water to achieve workable
consistency and uniform colour.
5.5.2 Fresh mixed mortar shall be used for masonry work. Subsequent thinning by addition of
water shall not be permitted.
5.5.3 Cement sand and cement lime mortars or lime mortar with hydraulic lime shall be used
as soon as possible after addition of water, but in no case later than 2 hours.
5.5.4 Old and stale mortar and mortar picked up from droppings in masonry work shall
generally be not used.
5.6 Brick Work
5.6.1 Storage and handling bricks
Bricks shall not be dumped at site. They shall be carefully handled and carefully stacked
in regular tiers to avoid breakage and defacement of bricks and prevent contamination by
mud or other materials. The supply of bricks shall be so arranged that as far as possible
at least two days' requirement of bricks is available at site at any time. Bricks selected
for different situations of work shall be stacked separately.
5.6.2 Soaking & Cleaning bricks
Bricks required for masonry shall be cleaned to be free from dirt, dust and sand and fully
soaked in clean water by submerging in vats before use, till air bubbling ceases. The

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
bricks shall not be too wet at the time of use. After soaking they shall be removed from
the tank sufficiently early so that at the time of laying they are skin dry and stacked on a
clean space.
5.6.3 Setting out
The building lines shall be set out by the Contractor as per clause 7 of IS: 2212 and got
checked by the Engineer.
5.6.4 Laying of bricks
5.6.4.1 Bricks shall be laid in English bond, unless otherwise specified, with frogs upward over a
full bed of evenly laid mortar, and slightly pressed and tapped into final position to the
lines levels and shape as shown in the drawing fully embedded in mortar. All joints
including inside faces shall be flushed and packed. No more than 8 courses shall
generally be laid in a day. The first course itself shall be made horizontal by providing
enough mortar in the bed joint to fill up any undulations. The horizontalness of courses
and the verticality of wall shall be checked very often with spirit level and plumb bob
respectively.
5.6.4.2 Mortar joints shall be such that the height of four courses of brick laid in mortar shall not
increase by more than 25 mm the height of the same bricks laid dry. Horizontal joints
shall be truly horizontal and vertical joints shall line up in every alternate course. The
joints shall not exceed 10 mm in thickness and shall be well finished and neatly struck.
The joints shall be kept uniform throughout the brick work. All the brick joints of the face
works shall be neatly raked out to a minimum depth of 15 mm with the help of raking
tools and the faces of brick wall cleaned with wire brush to remove any splashes of
mortar before the close of the day's work, while the mortar is still green and the last brick
layer shall be cleaned with wire brush and the frogs free from mortar.
5.6.4.3 Walls coming in contact with R.C.C. structures shall perfectly be bonded with MS inserts
or lugs where shown on drawings and the sides butting against the R.C.C structures
neatly and efficiently flashed and packed with rich mortar & cement slurry at no extra
cost (cost of MS inserts or lugs used shall be measured and paid separately under
relevant items). Where such lugs are not required to be provided, brick work shall be
built tightly against columns, slabs or other structural parts, around door and window
frames with proper distance to permit caulked joint. Where drawings indicate structural
steel column or beam to be partly or wholly covered with brick work, bricks shall be built
closely against all flanges and webs, with all spaces between steel and brick work filled
solid with mortar not less than 10 mm thick.
5.6.4.4 Damaged or broken brick or brick bats shall not normally be used in brick work. Cut
bricks may be used to complete bond or as closures or around irregular openings.
5.6.4.5 Bricks shall not be thrown from heights to the ground, but shall be handled carefully and
put gently in position to avoid damaging their edges.
5.6.4.6 Selected bricks of regular shape and dimension shall be used for face work.
5.6.4.7 Making of grooves, sleeves and chases shall be done during the construction to the
lines, levels and position as shown in the drawing or as instructed by the Engineer. Such
sleeves shall slope outward in external walls so that their surface cannot form channels

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
for the easy passage of water inside.
5.6.4.8 Fixtures, plugs, frames etc., if any, shall be built in at the right places to the lines & levels
as shown in the drawings while laying the course and not later by disturbing the brick
work already laid.
5.6.4.9 Brick walls of one brick thick or less shall have one selected face in true plane and walls
more than one brick thick shall have both the faces of wall in true plane.
5.6.4.10 All connected brick work shall be carried out simultaneously with uniform heights
throughout the work, and in exceptional cases, with the approval of the Engineer, the
brick work built in any part of the work may be lower than another adjoining
wall/connected wall by a maximum of 60 cm and the difference in height of adjoining
wall/connecting wall shall be raked back according to bond by stepping at an angle not
steeper than 45 degree, without sacrificing the necessary bond, horizontalness of layers,
verticality of joints and the wall. Toothing shall not be allowed in brick work, for raking
back.
The top layer just below the R.C.C slab or beam shall be laid with frogs down over a
layer of mortar on full width.
5.6.4.11 Openings in brick work
Openings shall be made in brick work, which may be of any shape, size, at all levels,
heights or depths, including round openings, as shown in the drawing or as directed by
the Engineer, maintaining the necessary bond using a minimum of cut bricks. Openings
in external face walls, the sills, jambs, soffit of opening may be rebated and the sill shall
be sloped slightly for drainage of rain water.
5.6.4.12 Architectural features
All projecting architectural features such as in plinth projections, string courses or

cornices shall be effectively bonded into the brick work to ensure stability. Such
architectural features shall be set straight and true with the finished joints. Where such
features are not to be plastered over, they shall be built with bricks of even size, good
shape and quality, which have durability, resistance to abrasion and moisture
penetration.
5.6.4.13 Sun shades and such projecting features which depend on the weight of brick masonry
over them for stability, shall be kept supported till such time as the brick masonry above
is built and hardened sufficiently.
5.6.4.14 All exposed brick work shall be rubbed down, thoroughly washed, cleaned and pointed
as specified. Where face bricks of specific quality are used the same shall be rubbed
with carborundum stone.
5.6.5 Half-brick masonry
5.6.5.1 The work of half-brick work shall be done in the same manner as for brick work except
that all courses shall be laid in stretchers. Both faces shall be true to plane and the joints
raked on both faces.
Where reinforcement is considered necessary or shown in drawing, MS bars shall be

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
provided as stipulated in the Schedule of Items. The reinforcement shall be cleaned of

rust and loose scale with a wire brush, and shall be laid straight on the mortar and lapped
with the dowel bars provided in the column, securely anchoring them at their ends where
the half-brick wall butts. The batching of mortar usually shall be in the proportion of 1:4
or as stipulated in the Schedule of Items. Half of the mortar for the joints shall first be laid
and the other half laid after the reinforcement is laid in position, so that the reinforcement
is fully embedded in position.
5.6.6 Brick on edge masonry
The work brick on edge masonry wall in superstructure shall be done in the same
manner as mentioned for brick work except that it shall always be reinforced with a mesh
of 18 gauge netting of approved variety and embedded in cement mortar at interval as
specified in the Schedule of Items. The wire netting shall be continuously laid and
securely anchored with the dowel bars provided & projecting from the walls/RCC
structure or steel structures at their ends where the 75 mm thick brick wall butts. The
batching of mortar usually shall be in the proportion of 1:3 or as stipulated in the
Schedule of Items.
5.6.7 Protection of brick work
The brick wall shall be protected and covered with gunny bags or water proof sheets
from the effects of inclement weather, rain, frost, etc., during the construction and until
the mortar sets. Care shall be taken during construction that the edges of jambs, sills
and soffit of openings are not damages.
5.6.8 Exposed Brick Work
5.6.8.1 Physical Requirements
Facing bricks shall be of class designation 75 unless otherwise specified. Average

compressive strength shall not be less than 7.5 N/mm2 water absorption shall not exceed
20 per cent by weight and efflorescence rating shall be nil when tested in accordance
with the procedure laid down and tolerance in dimensions shall be checked as per the
laid down procedure.
Mortar, Soaking of Bricks and laying shall be as follows :
Mortar
The mortar for the bricks work shall be as specified, and conform to accepted standards.
Lime shall not be used where reinforcement is provided in brick work.
Soaking of Bricks
Bricks shall be soaked in water before use for a period for the water to just penetrate the
whole depth of the bricks. Alternatively bricks may be adequately soaked in stacks by
profusely spraying with clean water at regular intervals for a period not less than six
hours. The bricks required for masonry work using mud mortar shall not be soaked.
When the bricks are soaked they shall be removed from the tank sufficiently early so that
at the time of laying they are skin-dry. Such soaked bricks shall be stacked on a clean
place where they are not again spoiled by dirt earth etc.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
5.6.8.2 Joints in the exposed brick work shall be truly horizontal and vertical and kept uniform
with the help of wooden or steel strips. The thickness of joints shall be as follows.
5.6.8.2.1 Joints
The thickness of all types of joints including brick wall joints and cross joints shall be such
that four course and three joints taken consecutively shall measures as follows :
i) In case of modular bricks conforming to IS:1077-1986 specification for common

burnt clay buildings bricks, equal to 39 cm.
ii) In case of non-modular bricks, it shall be equal to 31 cm.
Note: Specified thickness of joints shall be of 1 cm deviation from the specified thickness
of all joints shall not exceed one-fifth of specified thickness.
5.6.8.2.2 Finishing of Joints
The face of brick work may be finished flush or by pointing. In flush finishing either the
face joints of the mortar shall be worked out while still green to give a finished surface
flush with the face of the brick work or the joints shall be squarely raked out to a depth of
1 cm while the mortar is still green for subsequently plastering. The faces of brick work
shall be cleaned with wire brush so as to remove any splashes of mortar during the
course of raising the brick work. In pointing, the joints shall be squarely raked out to a
depth of 1.5 cm while the mortar is still green and raked joints shall be brushed to
remove dust and loose particles and well wetted, and shall be later refilled with mortar to
give ruled finish. Some such finishes are `flush’, `weathered’, ruled. etc.
5.6.9 Curing
All brick works shall be kept moist for 10 days after laying.
5.6.10 Scaffolding
5.6.10.1 Necessary and suitable scaffolding shall be provided at all heights to facilitate the
construction of brick wall. Scaffolding shall be sound, strong and all supports and other
members shall be sufficiently strong and rigid, stiffened with necessary bracings and
shall be firmly connected to the walls securing them against swing or sway. Planks shall
be laid over the scaffolding at required levels. Scaffolding shall preferably be of tubular
steel, although the Engineer may permit other material, depending upon the
circumstances.
5.6.10.2 Scaffolding shall be double, having two sets of vertical supports, particularly for the face
wall and all exposed brick work. Single scaffolding may be used for buildings upto two
storeys high or at other locations, if permitted by the Engineer. In such case the inner
ends of horizontal members shall rest in holes provided in header course only. Such
holes shall not be allowed in pillars under one meter in width, or immediately near the
skew backs or arches. The holes thus left in masonry shall be filled with bricks set in rich
mortar and the surface made good on removal of scaffolding.
5.6.10.3 If for any reason the Contractor is required to erect scaffolding in property other than that
belonging to the Owner, including municipal corporation or local bodies, necessary
permission shall be obtained by the Contractor from the appropriate authorities and

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
necessary licensing fees shall have to be borne by him.
5.6.10.4 All scaffoldings once erected shall be allowed to remain in position, efficiently maintained
by the Contractor, till all the finishing works required to be done are completed and shall
not be removed without the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall allow workmen of other trades to make reasonable use of the
scaffolding without any extra cost.
5.6.10.5 Fixing of wooden frames
Unless otherwise specified, wooden door and window frames shall be fixed in the
openings generally with MS holdfasts of adequate size and strength securely
embedded in the brick work for sufficient length, during the progress of work, or chases
shall be made in the brick work and the frames may be fitted later on and subsequently
fixed by filling the opening with cement concrete not less than 1:2:4 by volume.
5.6.11 Cavity walls
Cavity walls shall be made in accordance with Clause 10.12 of IS: 2212. A cavity wall
comprises of two leaves, each leaf being built of masonry units and separated by a cavity
and tied together with metal ties or bonding units to ensure that the two leaves act as one
structural unit, the space between the leaves being either left a continuous cavity or filled
with a non-load bearing insulating and water proofing material.
Thickness of each leave of a cavity wall shall not be less than 75 mm. Where the outer
leaf is half masonry unit in thickness, the uninterrupted height and length of this leaf shall
be limited so as to avoid undue loosening of ties due to differential movements between
the two leaves. The outer leaf shall therefore be supported at least at every third storey
or at every 10 m of height whichever is less and at every 10 m or less along the length.
5.6.12 Arches
Small arches/flat arches shall be made as shown in the drawings with selected good
bricks of approved quality over timber centering or templates generally in rings of half
brick length. For face brick work the bricks shall be specially selected and sought to
shape to get radial joints uniform. Necessary allowance shall be made for any slight
settlement or to correct any apparent sagging. The mortar to be used for arches shall be
as specified in the Schedule of Items. The joints shall be raked out and treated as
required in general brick work. The centering and shuttering shall be retained in position
till the brick work in arch ring is completely set and strength achieved, and shall not be
removed without the approval of the Engineer.
5.6.13 Honey-Comb brick work
The work shall be as mentioned for general brick work. Bricks shall be laid in cement
mortar 1:4. All edges shall be struck flush to give an even surface on both faces. Joints
shall be raked and pointed or plastered as specified in the Schedule of Items. The
thickness of the brick honey-comb work shall be usually half brick or as specified in the
Schedule of Items. The openings of the hone-comb brick work shall be equal and
alternate with half bricks laid with a minimum bearing of 2.5 cm on either side.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
5.7 Stone Masonry
5.7.1 General
All aspects of the work shall be in conformity with the "Code of Practice for Construction
of Stone Masonry, IS:1597 (Part-I & II) - 1992. Relevant clauses under brick work, such
as setting out, making chases, openings, fixing frames and plugs, protection curing,
scaffolding etc., shall apply to stone masonry and concrete block masonry.
5.7.2 Mortar
The mortar used shall be as specified in the Schedule of Items or drawing.
5.7.3 Holes and Plugs
Holes in stone walls shall be left for water supply, plumbing, sanitation, electrification,
etc., where shown on drawings or ordered by the Engineer as the work proceeds. These
holes shall, on completion, be made good to match with the adjoining wall. The
Contractor shall provide and fix wooden plugs, water supply piping and electric conduit
pipes etc. where so specified.
5.7.4 Random Rubble Masonry
5.7.4.1 Laying
All stones shall be wetted and cleaned of all dust and loose materials before laying,
Stones shall be laid on their natural beds, fitted carefully to the adjacent stones to form
neat and close joints fully packed with mortar and chips and spalls of stone may also be
used wherever necessary to avoid thick mortar bed or joints. Walls shall be carried to
plumb or to the specified batter. Stones may be brought to level courses at plinth,
window sills and roof levels and the leveling shall be done with concrete comprising of 1
part of the mortar as used for the masonry and 2 parts of 20mm down graded hard stone
chips at no extra cost. Bond shall be provided by fitting in closely the adjacent stones and
by using bond stones running through the thickness of wall in a line from the face to back
with at least one bond stone, or a set of bond stones, for every 0.5 sq.mm of the wall
surface. Face stones shall extend and bond well into the backing. These shall be
arranged to break joints as much as possible, and to avoid long vertical lines of joints.
5.7.4.2 Quoins
Quoins shall be of selected stones, neatly dressed with hammer or chisel to form the
required angle and laid header and stretcher alternately. No quoin stone shall be smaller
than 0.25 cum (25 dcum in volume and it shall also not be less than 300mm in length,
25% of them being not less than 500mm in length).
5.7.4.3 Joints
The stones shall be so laid that the joints are fully packed with mortar and chips and face
joints shall not be more than 20mm thick. When plastering or pointing is not required to
be done, the joints shall be struck flush and finished at the time of laying, otherwise the
joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 20mm by raking tool during the progress of
work, when the mortar is still green.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
5.7.5 Coursed Rubble Masonry – First Sort
5.7.5.1 Laying
All stones shall be wetted before use. The walls shall be carried up truly plumb or to
specified batter. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints shall be
truly vertical. The height of each course shall not be less than 15cm nor more than 30cm.
Face stones shall be laid alternate headers and stretchers. No pinning shall be allowed
on the face. No face stone shall be less in breadth than its height and at least one third of
the stones shall tail into the work for length not less than twice their height.
The hearting or the interior filling of the wall shall consist of stones carefully laid on their
proper beds in mortar, chips and spalls of stone being used where necessary to avoid
thick beds of joints of mortar and at the same time ensuring that no hollow spaces are left
anywhere in the masonry. The chips shall not be used below the hearting stone to bring
these upto the level of face stones. The use of chips shall be restricted to the filling of
interstices between the adjacent stones in heating and these shall not exceed 10% of the
quantity of stone masonry. The masonry in a structure shall be carried up regularly but
where breaks are unavoidable, the joints shall be raked back at an angle not steeper
than 45 degree. Toothing shall not be allowed.
5.7.5.2 Bond Stones
Bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be inserted 1.5 to 1.8 metres apart, in every
course.
5.7.5.3 Quoins
The quoins, shall be of the same height as the course in which these occur. These shall
be at least 45 cm long and shall be laid stretches and headers alternately. These shall be
laid square on the beds, which shall be rough-chisel dressed to a depth of at least 10cm.
In case of exposed work, these stones shall have a minimum of 2.5 cm wide chisel drafts
at four edges, all the edges being in the same plane.
5.7.5.4 Joints
All bed joints shall be horizontal and all side joints vertical. All joints shall be fully packed
with mortar, face joints not be more than one cm thick.
When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be struck flush and
finished at the time of laying. Otherwise, the joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of
20mm by raking tool during the progress of work, when the mortar is still green.
5.7.6 Coursed Rubble Masonry – First Sort
5.7.6.1 Laying
Shall be as specified in 5.7.5.1 except that the use of chips shall not exceed 15% of the
quantity of stone masonry, and stone in each course need not be of the same height but
more than two stones shall not be used in the height of a course.
5.7.5.2 Bond Stones, Quoins

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Shall be as specified for first sort respectively.
5.7.5.4 Joints
All be joints shall be horizontal and all side joints vertical, All points shall be fully packed
with mortar, face joints shall not be more than 2 cm thick.
When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be struck flush and
finished at the time of laying. Otherwise, the joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of
20mm by raking tool during the progress of work, when the mortar is still green.
6.0 PILING
6.1 General
This specification deals with the requirements regarding workmanship of bored and
driven, cast-in-situ reinforced concrete piles.
The workmanship shall conform with the provisions of the following codes and standard
specifications in particular:
IS: 456 - Code of Practice for Plain Reinforced Concrete.
IS: 2911 - Code of Practice for Design Construction of Pile Foundations, Part I & IV.
6.2 Materials & Workmanship
6.2.1 Concrete
Concrete shall conform to the specification "Concrete Plain and Reinforced" in this
series.
6.2.2 Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall conform to the specification "Concrete" in this series.
6.2.3 Sequence
In case of bored piles, boring shall proceed by alternately driving the casing and
extracting the bored material with the boring tools. While boring in soft material liable to
cavitation, boring tools shall not be operated at level below the toe of the casing. Care
shall be taken to ensure that the volume of water added to the bore is no more than the
minimum necessary for the operation of the boring tools. The casing shall be driven
down through the soft material to penetrate a hard stratum not subjected to cavitation
and shall be sealed in this material as far as possible. Thereafter the boring shall be
continued by means of the boring tools until the approved bearing layer is reached. The
bearing layer shall consist of sound materials capable of safely sustaining the load
imposed by the pile and shall be consistent in quality for a depth of minimum 300 mm.
in the pile bore.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The piles shall be driven with due consideration for safety of adjacent structure by a
method which leaves their strength unimpaired and which develop and retain the
required bearing resistance.
Where the soil is such that driving of a pile causes previously installed pipes to heave,
load test shall be conducted.
6.2.4 Jetting
When jetting is used, it shall be carried out in such a manner that the carrying capacity
of the piles already in position and the safety of the existing structures are not impaired.
Jetting shall be stopped not less than one meter above the final expected bottom of the
pile and the pile shall be carried down until the required resistance is obtained. If there
is evidence that the jetting has disturbed the load carrying capacity of previously
installed piles, those piles which have been disturbed shall be rejected.
6.2.5 Jacking
If sufficient overhead space is not available due to the existing structures which cannot
be removed, driving of piles by jacking or other similar methods without impact shall be
adopted. The carrying capacity of a pile installed by such methods shall taken to be not
more than 50% of the load or force used to install the pile.
6.2.6 Spacing
All piles shall have minimum spacing on centres of 2 d for bored piles and 2.5 d for
driven piles (where d is the diameter of the pile), subject to a minimum of 100cm.
No pile of uniform section shall have diameter of less than 200 mm upto 12 m long piles
& not less than 300 mm for length between 12 m and 15 m. For piles longer than 15 m,
the minimum diameter shall be 400 mm. The longitudinal reinforcement shall be a
minimum of 0.8% of the pile cross- section or 6 rods of 16 mm dia whichever is more.
The transverse reinforcement shall not be less than 0.2% of the gross volume of the pile
in the form of helical binders.
6.2.7 Cast-in-situ piles
Immediately before concreting the bore hole shall be cleaned of all the loose material,
debris etc. Concrete shall be so placed as to fill the entire volume of the bore hole
without the formation of voids caused by the faulty compaction or entrapped air. Great
care shall be taken to ensure that the fluid alluvial soil does not penetrate between
batches of the concrete.
Concrete shall not normally be placed through water and in unavoidable cases such
concreting shall be done with necessary precautions. The ground water shall be
balanced by adding fresh water to the bore and the concreting shall be placed by
means of an enclosed placer or by tremie pipe. In case of bored piles after the uncased
portion of the bottom of the bore has been concreted, further concrete is to be added.
The sequence of placing concrete and withdrawing the casing shall be so arranged that
the head of concrete above the bottom of casing is never less than 3 meters. Once the
concreting of the pile is commenced the work shall proceed without interruption until the
pile is completed.
Concreting of the pile shall continue until the pile is fully formed upto a level not less

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
than 600 mm above the soffit of the pile cap. Extraction of casing shall be done in such
a way that no necking or shearing of the concrete in the shaft takes place.
6.2.8 Trimming of Piles
Completed piles shall be trimmed to the cut-off levels as shown on the drawings when
sound concrete has been formed. In the event of trimming being carried below the
cut-off level, the pile shall be made up to the correct cut-off level with concrete of the
same quality as used in the piles. Reinforcement shall be exposed for the full bond
length appropriate to the diameter of the bar and projected in the pile-cap. The
minimum distance of keying of the pile into the pile cap shall be 50 mm. All concrete
and cement shall be removed from the bars, which shall also be wire-brushed to
remove any loose rust, dirt and scale.
6.2.9 Lengthening of piles
Where it is necessary to increase the length of any pile after it has been driven, the
head of the pile shall be cut-off to expose the reinforcement for a full bond length of the
bars to lap with the new bars. The exposed surface of the concrete shall be hacked to
from a key, brushed to remove loose material and covered with 25 mm. thick cement
mortar (1:2 mix) immediately before the new concrete is placed.
6.2.10 Load test
Atleast 1% of the piles driven shall be tested to an overload of 50% above the working
load of the pile and 0.1% of the piles driven shall be tested to an overload of 100%
above the working load of the pile.
The longest practicable time shall be allowed to escape between driving and testing to
allow the recovery of soil conditions around the pile and it shall not be less than two
weeks.
The gross settlement under test load of any pile shall not exceed 12 mm in case of
150% working load tests, and 20 mm in case of 200% working load tests.
6.2.11 Standard of acceptance
The piles shall be accepted as satisfactory only when the work has been executed in
accordance with this specification and the Standards stated hereinafter.
(a) The head of the pile shall be within 65 mm of the specified position on the drawings.
(b) The pile shall not be out of plumb by more than 1 in 100.
(c) The toe of the pile shall be at the approved bearing level in each case.
(d) The total volume of concrete shall not be less than 10% and not more than 40% greater
than the calculated volume. The calculated volume for this purpose shall be the
cross-sectional area inside the casting multiplied by the length of the shaft. The
concrete shall show the specified strength as indicated by the cube test results.
(e) The results of the load tests carried out in accordance with the contract and with the
specifications for load testing shall satisfactory.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
6.2.12 Defective piles
If an individual pile fails to meet the requirements specified in clause above such pile
may be deemed to be defective.
When any pile is found defective, one or more of the following remedial measures shall
be carried out :
(a) Replacement of defective piles

(b) Driving additional piles.
(c) Alteration in design of pile caps.
6.2.13 Recording
For each pile, a record of the following data shall be kept:
(1) The date and time of commence & finishing of the driving operation.
(2) The particulars of the equipment and method of driving.
(3) The location and type of the pile, with a reference to approved drawings.
(4) The diameter of the pile.
(5) The length and cut-off level of the pile.
(6) The quantities of concrete, reinforcement, cement and w/c ratio used.
(7) The sequence of the driving in pile groups.
(8) The final set for the last ten blows.
(9) The test load and settlement for test piles as required under clause of load testing.
7.0 PLASTERING AND POINTING
7.1 Materials
The specification of materials shall conform to the requirements as specified in Part-I.
7.2 Plastering
7.2.1 General
Plastering shall be done in accordance with provisions of IS: 1661. Mix proportions of
mortar for plastering and thickness of plaster shall be as given either in the drawing, or as
per Schedule of Items or as directed by the Engineer. For special plaster work,
necessary admixtures shall be added to mortar in required proportion as per
manufacturer's specifications or as specified herein.
7.2.2 Preparation of surface

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The surface to be plastered shall be cleaned of all extraneous matter and rubbish. In
masonry the joints shall be raked to a minimum depth of 12 mm and cleaned with wire
brush. Concrete surfaces to be plastered shall be roughened and hacked to form key for
plastering. All plastered surfaces shall be finished smooth with a wooden float in one
plane and all internal angles shall be finished slightly rounded. If desired by the
Engineer, any unevenness shall be rubbed down by carborundum stones. The surface
to be plastered shall be wetted evenly before the application of plastering.
For one coat plastering the plaster shall be laid slightly thicker than the specified
thickness and the surface then levelled with flat wooden float to the required thickness.
For two coat plaster work, the first coat (usually half of total thickness) shall be applied
as detailed above except that the surface shall be left rough and keys formed for the
application of second coat. The second coat shall be laid on with a wooden float to the
specified thickness and shall be applied a day or two after the first coat has set, but has
not dried up.
Cement mortar for plastering work shall be used within 30 minutes after adding water to
cement and should be kept agitated at intervals of 20 minutes.
Unless otherwise specified cement punning shall be done over the plastered surface by
sprinkling neat cement powder evenly on the surface and rubbed smoothly with a trowel
to give a fine coating, at no extra cost. The plaster shall be kept wet for atleast seven
days and protected from extremes of temperature and weather during this period.
The arrises of doors and windows shall have richer mortar 1:3 in a width of 75 mm on
either side or as required at respective location.
7.3 Cement Pointing
7.3.1 Where shown on drawing, Schedule of Items, or as directed by the Engineer, exposed
brick faces shall be cement rule pointed. The mortar shall be raked out of the joints to a
depth of 12 mm. The dust shall be brushed out of the joints and the wall well wetted.
Unless otherwise specified the pointing shall be made with cement and sand mixed in
proportion 1:3 with water proofing compound. The joints of the pointed work shall be
neatly finished truly vertical and horizontal or as directed and the lines shall be kept wet
till the cementing material has set and become hard. If required, the whole brick face
shall be rubbed and polished with fine grade of carborundum stones. Particular care
shall be taken to see that no brick face or brick edge is damaged during this work.
7.3.2 Flush Pointing
The mortar shall be pressed into the joints and shall be finished flush and levelled. The
edges shall be neatly trimmed with trowel and straight edges.
7.3.3 Ruled Pointing
The joint shall be initially formed as for flush pointing and then, while mortar is still green ,
a groove of required shape and size shall be formed by running a forming tool straight
along the centre line of the joint till a smooth and hard surface is obtained. The vertical
joints shall also be finished in similar way. The pointing line shall be uniform in width and
truly horizontal in case of floors and ceilings.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
7.4 Rough Cast Concrete Facing
7.4.1 The surface shall be prepared as for Cement plaster and then 2 cm backing coat of
cement sand mortar 1:3 shall be applied. Subsequently, a top coat 12 mm average thick
cement and stone chips mixture in proportion 1:3 (stone chips 10 mm size and below)
shall be applied by throwing the mixture on top with trowel to produce uniform rough
texture. The surface shall afterwards be cured for 10 days. After curing, the surface
shall be brushed with hard wire brush to remove loose chips from the surface. A coat of
cement was shall then be applied.
7.4.2 Rendered sand faced cement plaster
The surface shall be cleaned of all dust and dirt and the brick work thoroughly watered.
The backing coat shall be 12 mm thick of cement plaster proportion 1:4 (1 cement and 4
sand) and keys shall be formed on the surface. After curing this coat sufficiently, the
finishing coat 6 mm thick consisting of grey cement and screened coarse sand to
required gradation (1:3) shall be applied and finished to the desired texture to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
7.4.3 Plaster moulding
Where specified, plaster moulding shall be strictly as per drawings and details, and shall
run clean and true from proper templates and moulds, to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer. Rates shall include for brick or concrete cores and for any necessary dubbing
in cement mortar or brick or metal lath curing and final finish as desired. Where desired,
all angles in internal moulding work shall be covered to a radius of 50 mm or as directed
without any extra charges.
7.5 Punning with Lime or Plaster of Paris
7.5.1 Lime Punning
Lime punning shall be carried out with best quality approved lime. Lime shall be properly
stirred, tempered with water to form a homogeneous mass and strained through fine
cloth. The punning shall be laid and rubbed and trowelled to an uniform smooth even
finish using special trowels. Any unevenness shall be rubbed down with fine sand paper.
The plaster must be dry before the lime punning is applied.
The lime paste shall be kept wet until use and no more quantity than can be consumed in
10 days shall be prepared at a time.
7.5.2 Plaster of paris punning
This shall be provided by using the best quality of plaster of paris from approved
manufacturer. Unless otherwise specified same procedure of lime punning shall be
followed for getting uniform smooth finish.
8.0 FLOORING, PAVING & FACING
8.1 Scope
Flooring Paving and facing includes flooring, skirting and dado of various types
encountered in plants, buildings, pavements etc. as described under respective heads.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
8.2 Materials
Materials shall conform to Part-I of this series.
8.3 General
Flooring, skirting & dado may have to be done in discontinuous strips or areas to suit the
needs of erection and commissioning of equipment. Flooring shall be done in close
co-ordination with erection of equipment or other services and shall keep pace with the
demands in respect of commissioning of individual equipment. No claims for extra shall
be tenable for reasons of discontinuity of work or delay in having areas available for
work.
Unless otherwise specifically included in the Schedule of Quantities or stated in the

description of work, no extra shall be payable for works such as forming coves at internal
angles, nosing at plinths, steps, window sills and stair treads, dishing in bath rooms and
toilet and cutting to line and fair finish to top edge of skirting and dado. Thickness
mentioned shall be the minimum.
8.4 Sub-base
Flooring at ground level having sub-base of sand or earth as specified shall be laid in
layers of 15 cm, watered and consolidated by rolling with hand roller or ramming with iron
rammer and with butt ends of the crow bars. When filling reaches the required level, the
surface shall be flooded with water for 24 hours, allowed to dry and then rammed and
consolidated to avoid any settlement later. The thickness of the sub-base shall be as
specified either in the drawing or in the Schedule of Items.
8.5 Subgrade
The surface shall be brought to the desired level before subgrade is laid.
8.5.1 Hard core subgrade
Where hardcore subgrade is specified, stone/slag boulders/laterite boulders shall be laid

closely stacked together, the longer edge being laid vertically. All interstices shall be
filled with smaller particles of the same material or with gravel or red earth. The top
surface shall be spread with loose moorum sufficient to cover the gap and to achieve
uniform top surface. The surface shall then be adequately watered and rolled by roller.
Hard core shall be laid to form the desired slope in the finished floor.
8.5.2 Brick Khoa subgrade
Over burnt bricks shall be used for getting brick khoa as per sizes described in Schedule
of Items. The khoa shall be laid uniformly and rammed in dry and wet conditions so as to
get a uniform compact surface.
8.5.3 Concrete subgrade
The concrete subgrade shall be allowed to set for seven days and the flooring shall be
laid in the next three days.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The flooring shall be commenced within 48 hours if the subgrade is of lean cement
concrete, failing this the surface of the subgrade shall be lightly brushed with steel wire,
wetted and smeared with a coat of cement slurry @ 2 kg/sqm. to get a good bond
between subgrade and flooring. The subgrade shall be provided with slope as specified.
8.6 Brick Flooring
Laying and finishing of brick flooring shall, in general conform to IS : 5766. Where dry
brick paving is specified the bricks shall be laid on their long edges on prepared
subgrade or on rammed earth formed to desired slope in floor. Bricks shall be laid with
gaps of about 6 mm, lightly tamped and brought to proper level and fall as indicated. The
joints shall then be filled with sand.
Where bricks are specified to be laid in cement mortar, mortar mix shall be 1:6 (1 cement
: 6 sand) unless otherwise shown on the drawings/Schedule of Items. When lime mortar
is specified, mix proportions shall be 1:5 (1 lime : 5 surkhi) unless otherwise shown in
drawings. Mechanical mixing shall be employed for preparing mortar unless otherwise
permitted by Engineer. Cement mortar shall be consumed before initial setting has taken
place. Bricks shall be sufficiently soaked in water before use.
Unless otherwise directed, the bricks shall be laid in herring-bone pattern with their long
axes at 45'C to the length of the paving.
8.7 Cement Concrete Flooring with Integral Finish
Cement concrete shall be mixed, laid, consolidated and cured as described in Chapter
"Concrete". Laying of concrete shall be done in alternate panels. The size and division
of panels shall be as per direction of Engineer. The mix or grade of concrete shall be as
specified in Schedule of Items.
The finished surface may be rendered smooth using 2 mm thick neat cement slurry using
2.2 kg of cement per square meter area of flooring or may be trowel finished to provide
an appearance of fine and smooth textured surface and in panels or in geometric pattern
as specified in Schedule of Items or as directed by Engineer.
8.8 Concrete Flooring with Granolithic Finish (Artificial Stone Flooring)
Granolithic finish shall either be laid monolithically over base concrete or separately over
hardened base concrete. The subgrade shall be either brick khoa/lime concrete/cement
concrete, as specified. Flooring shall be laid & finished according to IS : 5491.
8.8.1 Thickness
Unless otherwise mentioned the thickness of flooring including topping shall be either 25
mm or 40 mm or 50 mm as shown on drawing. The net thickness of topping shall be 6
mm for 25 mm thick floor, 10 mm for 40 mm and 12 mm for 50mm thick floor.
An additional allowance of 2mm in thickness of topping shall be made for cutting and
grinding margin wherever polishing is specified in the item. The rate of item will be
inclusive of this.
8.8.2 Mix

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
For base or under bed course, the mix shall be 1:2:4 concrete, unless specified
otherwise. The mix of the topping shall consist of 1 part cement :1 part coarse sand : 2
parts coarse aggregated by volume. The coarse aggregate shall very hard like granite
and well graded between 6 mm and 12 mm. Minimum quantity of water to get workability
shall be added.
8.8.3 Laying
a) Laying of monolithic topping
The concrete base or under bed shall be laid as per specification "Cement
Concrete" and levelled upto the required grade. The surface shall remain
sufficiently rough to take the finish.
For large areas the laying shall be in panels of maximum 2.5 sqm. area. The
panels shall be laid in chequered board pattern. Within about 3 hours of laying
the base while it is still fully 'green' the topping shall be laid evenly to proper
thickness and grade. The tapping shall be pressed firmly and rigorously to form
full board with the base/under bed.
The laitance brought to the surface during compression shall be removed

carefully without disturbing the stone chips. The surface shall then be lightly
trowelled to remove all marks. When sufficiently set, hand trowelling shall be
done to secure a smooth surface without disturbing the stone chips. The
trowelling of flooring shall be such that a fine smooth textured appearance
comes.
(b) Laying of topping separately on hardened base
The base concrete shall be prepared as stated in Clause 2.4 and a slurry of neat
cement applied just prior to laying the granolithic concrete mix (1:1:2). The
method of compaction etc., shall be same as for monolithic topping.
8.8.4 General
The junction of the floors with all plaster dado or skirting shall be rounded of with 1:1
cement sand mortar & polished.
8.8.5 Curing
Immediately after laying, the finish shall be protected against rapid drying. As soon as
the surface had hardened sufficiently, it shall be kept continuously moist for atleast 10
days by means of wet gunny bags or pounding of water on the surface. The floor shall
not be exposed to use during this period.
8.8.6 Grinding & finishing
Where grinding is specified, it shall start only after the finish has fully set. The grinding
shall be done with carborundum stone of No. 60, then No. 80 and then 120 as per the
method as specified in in-situ mosaic flooring. After final polishing, the floor shall be
rubbed with oxalic acid and then wax polished.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
8.9 Dado & Skirting Work (Grey Cement Skirting/Dado)
A backing coat of 12 mm thick and 15 mm thick shall be applied on walls after proper
dabbing of the surface for a finished thickness of 18 mm and 21 mm thick respectively,
with cement plaster of proportion 1:4 (1 cement and 4 approved quality sand). Over this
a top coat 6 mm thick consisting of one cement to one stone chips 3 mm nominal size
shall be applied. If grinding and polishing specified, the same shall be done as per
granolithic flooring with carborundum stones.
8.10 Terrazzo Flooring & Facing
General
The terrazzo work shall be done by an approved firm or specialists. Marble clips used for
facing coat of terrazzo work shall be of best quality (from Dehradun or other approved
source and of uniform tint and colour and shall be approved by the Engineer before using
in the work. All terrazzo work shall be polished on completion followed by a final wax
polish of approved quality.
Terrazzo work shall be done either cast-in-situ or with precast tiles as specified in the
Schedule of Quantities Unless otherwise specified thickness for cast-in-situ terrazzo
work shall be 25 mm including base course and for tiles 20 mm excluding mortar bed.
The rate for terrazzo work shall include any coving of internal angles, nosing at plinth,
steps and sills, set backs, mitres, flashing as per direction of the Engineer.
8.10.1 Cast-in-situ terrazzo flooring
It shall consist of an underbed and a tapping laid over an already matured concrete
subgrade.
8.10.1.1 Thickness
Unless specified otherwise, the total thickness of the finished flooring shall be either 25
mm or 40 mm of which the tapping shall be minimum 6 mm (net) for 25 mm and
minimum 10 mm for 40 mm flooring. A minimum allowance of 2 mm in the tapping shall
be kept for grinding and polishing so as to achieve the minimum specified thickness of
tapping.
All junctions of vertical with horizontal planes shall be rounded neatly to uniform radius of
25 mm.
8.10.1.2 Mix
i) Underbed course
The underbed for floors and similar horizontal surface shall consist of a mix of 1
part cement, 2 parts sand and 4 parts stone chips by volume. The sand shall be
coarse. The stone chips shall be 10 mm down well graded. Only minimum
water to be added to give a workable consistency.
ii) Topping

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Topping shall consist cement (grey or white) as specified with or without colour
pigment, marble powder and marble chips. The proportion of cement and
marble powder shall be 3 parts of cement to one part of marble powder by
weight.
The proportion of marble chips to 4 parts of cement marble powder mix mixed
by volume. For grey chocolate or similar shades ordinary cement with approved
colouring pigments may be used instead of coloured cements. Care shall be
taken to ensure an even and uniform disposition of the marble chips.
8.10.1.3 Laying
i) Laying of underbed
The underbed shall be laid in alternate lays of chequered pattern. The panels
shall not be more than 2 sqm. in area of which no side shall be more than 2.0 m
long. For exposed locations the maximum area of a panel shall be 2.0 sqm.
The panel shall be laid in alternate bays or chequered board pattern. No panel
shall be cast in contact with another already laid until the latter has contracted to
the full extent. Cement slurry @ 2 kg/sqm. shall be applied before laying over
cement concrete/RCC surface/plastered surface.
Dividing strips made of aluminium or glass shall be used for forming the panels.
The strips shall exactly match the total depth of underbed plug toping. In case
of in-situ dado work, the sections shall not be more than 60 cm x 60 cm and the
aluminium, glass or any other material strips provided similarly. (The cost of
these strips shall be held covered by the rate for terrazzo work unless otherwise
specified).
ii) Laying of topping
After laying, the underbed shall be levelled compacted and brought to proper
grade with screed or float. The topping shall be laid after about 24 hours while
the underbed is still somewhat 'green' but firm enough to receive the topping. A
slurry of the mixture of cement and pigment already made shall be spread
evenly land brushed in just before laying the toppling. The topping shall be
rolled for horizontal areas and thrown and pressed for vertical areas to extract all
superfluous lcement and water and to achieve a compact dense mass fully
bonded with the underbed. The surface of the topping shall be trowelled over,
pressed and brought to a smooth dense surface showing a minimum 75% area
covered by marble chips in an even pattern of distribution.
8.10.1.4 Curing
The surface shall be left for curing for about 12 to 18 hours and then cured by allowing
water to stand on the surface or by covering with wet sack for four days.
8.10.1.5 Grinding & polishing
After 48 hours of laying of floor when floor is hardened, first cutting shall be done with
special rapid cutting grit of coarse grade (no. 60) till the marble chips are evenly exposed
and floor is smooth. The floor shall then be washed and cleaned to remove mud and
grindings, a grout of cement and colouring pigment in same proportion of the topping

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
shall be applied to cover the pin holes. The surface shall be cured for 5 to 7 days and
then ground with machine fitted fine grit blocks (No. 120). The surface shall be again
cleaned and repaired as mentioned above and shall be cured for 3 to 5 days. Finally the
third grinding shall be done with machine fitted with fine/grade clocks (No. 320) to get
even and smooth surface without pin holes. The finished surface should show the
marble chips evenly exposed.
Where use of machine for polishing is not feasible/possible rubbing and polishing by
hand shall be done in the same manner as specified for machine polishing except that
carborundum of coarse grade (No. 60, 80 and 120) for first, second & final polishing.
After the floor is polished to the satisfaction of the Engineer, it shall be rubbed with oxalic
acid and finally wax polished with 'Mansion' or similar approved floor polish to the entire
satisfaction of Engineer.
8.10.2 Terrazzo cast-in-situ facing, skirting and dado
The work shall be carried out in the same manner as that for terrazzo cast-in-situ floors
except that the base or bedding course shall consist of 1:3 cement mortar (1 cement & 3
medium sand) of 12 mm or 15 mm or 19 mm thickness or total thickness 18 mm or 21
mm or 25 mm respectively. As specified earlier, the bedding course shall be laid in panel
(not more than 60 cm x 60 cm) divided by glass/ aluminium strips minimum thickness.
The topping shall be of 6 mm thick finished and shall be laid when the backing plaster is
still green. Special care shall be taken to see that the surface are properly cured.
8.10.3 Terrazzo tile finished flooring/facing
The work will consist of manufactured terrazzo tile and an underbed.
8.10.3.1 Thickness
The total (net) thickness including the underbed shall be 40 mm for flooring and other
horizontal surface and 32 mm for vertical surfaces like dado/skirting. The necessary
allowance for cutting and grinding shall be kept to have the specified finished thickness.
8.10.3.2 Tiles : terrazzo
The tiles shall, unless specifically permitted in special cases be machine made under
quality control in a shop. The tiles shall be pressed hydraulically to a minimum of 140 kg.
per sqcm.
The tiles shall be composed of a backing and topping. The topping shall be of uniform
thickness not less than 8 mm (net) for flooring & 6 mm (net) for vertical surface. The total
thickness including the topping shall be as specified but not less than 20 mm in any case.
The backing shall be composed of 1 part ordinary grey cement and 3 parts of stone chips
by weight mixed with water.
The ingredients for topping shall be same as cast-in-situ terrazzo. The thickness of the
topping, as specified above, shall be net after grinding & polishing. First grinding shall be
given to the tiles at the shop before delivery.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The manufacturer shall supply along with the tiles the grout mix containing cement and
pigment in exact proportions as used in topping of the tiles.
8.10.3.3 Mix : underbed
The underbed for floor and similar horizontal surfaces shall be 1 part lime putty : 1 part
surkhi : 2 parts coarse sand by weight mixed with sufficient water to form a stiff workable
mass. For skirting and dado and all vertical surface it shall be about 12 mm thick and
composed of 1 part cement 3 parts coarse sand by weight.
8.10.3.4 Laying
The underbed mortar shall be evenly spread and brought to proper grade and
consolidated to a smooth surface. The base surface shall be roughened for better bond.
Before laying the underbed, over the base/subgrade a coat of cement slurry shall be
applied over the subgrade. Before the underbed has time to set and while it is still fairly
moist but firm, cement shall be hand dusted over it or a cement slurry applied and the
tiles shall immediately be placed upon and firmly pressed by wooden mallet on to the
underbed until it achieves the desired level. The tiles shall be kept soaked for about 10
minutes just before laying. The joints between tiles shall be as close as possible and not
more than 1.5 mm wide.
Special care shall be taken to check the level of the surface and the lines of the joints
frequently so that they are perfect. When tiles are required to be cut to match the
dimensions these shall be sawn and edges rubbed smooth. The location of cut tiles shall
be planned in advance and approval of the Engineer taken.
At the junction of horizontal surface with vertical surface the tiles on the former shall enter
at least 12 mm under the latter.
After fixing, the floor shall be kept moistened allowed to mature undisturbed for 7 days.
Heavy traffic shall not be allowed.
If desired dividing strips as specified under Cl may be used for dividing the work into
suitable panels.
8.10.3.5 Grinding and polishing
Procedure shall be same as in-situ terrazzo finished flooring. Grinding shall not
commence earlier than 14 days after laying of tiles.
8.11 Glazed Tile Finished Flooring & Facing
This finish shall be composed of glazed earthen coarse tiles with an underbed laid over a
concrete or masonry base.
8.11.1 Thickness
Unless specified the total thickness shall be 21 mm for flooring & 18 mm for dado/skirting
the underbed.
The necessary cutting into the surface receiving the finish, to accommodate the specified
thickness shall be done.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
8.11.2 Tiles : Glazed
The tiles shall be of earthenware, covered with glaze white or coloured, plain or with
designs, of 150 mm x 150 mm nominal sizes and 6 mm thick unless otherwise specified.
The tolerance shall be plus or minus 1.5 mm for length and breadth and plus or minus
0.5 mm for thickness specials like internal and external angles, beads, covers, cornices,
corner pieces etc., shall match. The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed with a gloss
or matt unfading stable finish as desired by the Engineer. The tiles shall be flat and true
to shape. The colour shall be uniform, and fractured section shall be fine grained in
textures, dense and homogeneous.
The coloured tiles, when supplied, shall preferably come from one batch to avoid
difference in colour.
8.11.3 Mix : underbed
The mix for the underbed shall consist of 1 part cement and 3 parts coarse sand by
weight mixed with sufficient water of any other mix if specified.
8.11.4 Laying & finishing
The underbed mortar shall be evenly spread and brought to proper grade and
consolidated to a smooth surface. Before laying the underbed, over the base/subgrade
of coat of cement slurry shall be applied over the subgrade. Before the underbed has
time to set and while it is still fairly moist but firm, cement shall be hand dusted over it
and the tiles shall immediately be placed upon and firmly pressed by wooden mallet on to
the underbed until it achieves the desired level. The joints shall be practically invisible
and filled with non-staining white cement/white cement mixed with pigment for coloured
tiles. Internal angles shall be provided with 'specials' and a 75 mm high border of
approved colour shall be provided at the top of dado. Drains shall be provided with
'specials'. The tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned after completion. The tiles shall be laid
to the slope specified in the drawings and truly vertical on walls when used as skirting.
8.11.5 Curing & cleaning
After flushing painting the treatment cured for 7 days by keeping it wet. The surface shall
be then cleaned with soap or suitable detergent, washed fully and wiped with soft cloth to
prevent scratching before handling over.
8.12 Chemical Resistant Tiles Flooring/Facing

(Either of natural stone or prepared tiles)
This shall include all verieties of special tiles used for specific chemical resistance
function and an underbed over already laid concrete or masonry. The Contractor shall
get it done by specialised manufacturer & get guarantee of performance.
8.12.1 Tiles
The chemical resistant tiles as detailed in the Schedule of Items shall be of the best
indigenous manufacture unless otherwise specified and shall be resistant to the chemical
described in the Schedule of Items. The tiles shall have straight edges, uniform
thickness, plain surface, uniform nonfading colour and textures.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Usually the chemical resistant tiles shall not absorb water more than 2% by weight. The
tiles shall have atleast compression strength of 700 kg/cm2. The surface shall be
abrasion resistant and durable.
8.12.2 Laying
The mortar used for setting or for underbed the tiles shall be durable and strong. The
grout which shall be to the full depth of tile shall have equal chemical resistant
properties. Joints shall be pointed if so desired. The setting and fixing shall be according
to the manufacturer's specification approved by the Engineer.
8.13 Chemical Resistant in Situ Finished Flooring/Facing
Chemical resistant in situ finish shall be as called for in the Schedule of Items. About its
performance the Engineer shall have to be fully satisfied by test results and examination
of similar treatment already in existence. The Contractor shall get it done by a
specialised manufacturer, get guarantee of performance from the organisation and pass
it on to the owner in addition to his own guarantee.
8.14 Mastic Asphalt Flooring
8.14.1 General
The type and thickness of flooring, viz., heavy duty, acid resisting etc., the treatment of
the sub-floor and the type of finish shall be as per Schedule of Items or as shown on
drawings or otherwise directed by the Engineer. The flooring shall be laid to the levels or
slope shown on drawings, skirtings and channels and outlets for drainage shall similarly
be provided, and the floor shall be laid and finished in accordance with the Indian
Standard Code of Practice for laying Mastic Asphalt Flooring IS : 1196. The work shall
be done by a firm of specialists approved by the Engineer.
The flooring shall be done with Asphalt concrete in heated condition at temperature
range of 180'C to 205'C and the workmanship should be in such a manner that the
finished floor shall be quite hard, resilient, heavy duty abrasion resistant and impervious.
The weight of the asphalt concrete shall be aproximately 2.2 T/M3 and the hardness
number of the mastic asphalt, without coarse aggregates, at 35'C shall remain within 4 to
10.
8.14.2 Material
Binder : It shall be blown grade bitumen conforming to IS : 702

and preferably 85/25 or 95/15 grade bitumen shall be
used.
Fine Aggregates : Asphalt concrete when used forflooring, the fine

aggregates shall be specifically graded silica powder or
any approved inert material graded suitably. If lime
stone powder is used the calcium carbonate content
shall not beless than 80% by weight. For any floor
where no acids or alkalies come in contact the lime
stone powder can also be used.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The gradation of the fine aggregates shall conform to Table-II of IS : 1195.
Coarse Aggregate : It shall be either siliceous sand or crushed silicious

stone suitably graded and the gradation shall conform
to Table-III of IS : 1195.
8.14.3 Composition for asphalt concrete
The percentage of coarse aggregates shall approximately conform to table-IV of IS :

1195.
However, average proportion will be as under by weight.
Bitumen - 18 to 22%
Cement - 5%
Fine Aggregates - 35% to 45%
Coarse Aggregate - 30% to 40%
8.14.4 Preparation of mastic asphalt
(i) Fine aggregates and coarse aggregates to be fried on different container upto a
temperature of 170'C to 205'C.
(ii) The bitumen shall be heated to a temperature of 180'C.
(iii) Then the beated bitumen shall be mixed with the fired aggregates (both fine &
coarse) and cement and the whole thing shall be cooked in a cooking plant or in
any approved form for a period of 5/6 hours until the materials are thoroughly
mixed and the temperature at no time shall exceed 205'C.
8.14.5 Laying of asphalt concrete
(i) Cleaning surface to make free from all the foreign materials upto the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
(ii) Applying of one coat of primer in form of emulsion consisting of not less than
50% of bitumen in weight.
(iii) Providing one coat of hot bitumen (for vertical face blown grade is essential) for
fixing the underlay over it.
(iv) Providing one layer of "underlay" over item (iii) above and that underlay shall be
made of hassian saturated in bitumen.
(v) Providing one coat of hot bitumen over the "Underlay" (the bitumen shall
conform to either IS : 73 or IS : 702 as desired by the Engineer).
(vi) The prepared asphalt concrete is then put in position and laid with hot trowels
(temp. of trowels not less than 200'C) by continuous rubbing with constant
pressure.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
(vii) The finishing coarse: Applying one coat of hot bitmen of low penetration and
high softening point. The surface should be finished by continuous rubbing to
give a glazy finished surface upto the full satisfaction of the Engineer.
8.14.6 Sampling and testing
Before commencing the works the Contractor shall make at site sufficient nos. of
samples of different compositions as specified in sub-head 20.3 for testing of the mastic
asphalt as specified in the relevant IS codes and for approval of the Engineer.
After approval of the sample by the Engineer, the Contractor shall start the work and that
will be carried on the basis of the composition of the approved sample. The work shall
be checked and tested at regular intervals. The Contractor shall supply at least 10 nos.
of properly made samples per 1000 M2 of the works for testing and the test results of the
samples must tally with the result of approved sample.
All the costs regarding sampling, testing etc., shall be borne by the Contractor.
8.15 P.V.C. Sheet/Tiles Flooring
8.15.1 Base
It shall be laid on a base that is finished even and smooth such as concrete, metal lor
timber boarding.
8.15.2 Materials
The P.V.C. flooring material shall conform to IS : 3462-1966. It shall consist of a

thoroughly blended composition of thermoplastic binder, filler and pigments.
8.15.3 Adhesive
Rubber based adhesives are suitable for fixing PVC flooring over concrete, wooden and
metal sub-floors, PVA based adhesives may be used for concrete and wooden
sub-floors. PVA based adhesives are not suitable for metallic surfaces and also for
locations where there is constant spillage of water.
8.15.4 General
Sheets can be used for flooring. But for skirting only the tiles shall be used. The colour &
texture shall be as approved by the Engineer.
8.15.5 Preparation of base/sub grade
Before laying PVC sheets/tiles, it is essential to ensure that the base is thoroughly dry
and damp-proof. In case of new work a period of 4 to 8 weeks shall be allowed for drying
the sub-floor under normal conditions.
In concrete sub-floors the same shall be painted with two coats of bitumen (conforming to
IS : 1580-1969) applied at the rate of 1.5 kg/sq.m.
Over that a levelling course of specified thickness (if not specified the same maly be of

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
average thickness of 15 mm) with 1 : 4 cement course sand mortar shall be provided
with a finish just suitable to receive the flooring sheets/line. After that, the same shall be
cured and then made dry.
8.15.6 Laying and fixing
Before commencing the laying operations, the sub-floor shall be examined for evenness
and dryness. The sub-floor shall then be cleaned with a dry cloth.
The adhesive shall be applied by using a notched trowel to the sub-floor and to edge and
to the back side of the PVC sheet or tile flooring. When the adhesive is just tack free
the PVC flooring sheet/tiles shall be carefully laid in position the air will be completely
squeezed out between the sheet and the background surface. After laying in position, it
shall be pressed with suitable roller to develop proper contact with the sub-floor. The
sheets shall be laid edge to edge so that there is minimum gap between joints. The
alignment should be checked after laying of each row of sheet is completed. If the
alignment is not perfect, the sheets may be trimmed by using a straight edge.
Any adhesive which may squeeze up between sheets or tiles should be wiped off
immediately with a wet cloth before the adhesive hardens. If, by chance, adhesive dries
up and hardens on the surface of the sheet or tile, it should be removed with a suitable
solvent.
8.15.7 Protection and finish
A minimum period of 24 hours shall be given after layiing the flooring for developing
proper bond of the adhesive. During this period, the flooring shall not be put to service.
It is preferable to lay the PVC flooring after the completion of plastering, painging and
other decorative finish works so as to avoid any accidental damage to the flooring.
When the flooring has been securely fixed, it shall be cleaned with a wet cloth soaked in
warm soap solution (two spoons of soap in 5 litres of warm water).
The Contractors shall satisfy the Engineer specially for the workmanship of the following
finished floor :-
(a) Level, slope, plumb as the case may be

(c) Alignment of joints, dividing strip etc.
(d) Colour, texture
(e) Surface finish
(f) Thickness of joints including the workmanship in joints.
(g) Details at edges, junctions etc.
(h) Performance
(i) Precautions specified for durability.
9.0 WOOD WORK
9.1 General
Wood work shall be neatly and truly finished to exact dimensions and details as per
drawings, without patching or plugging of any kind and rebates, roundings and mouldings
as shown in drawings made before assembling. Exposed work shall be finished smooth

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
with well planed faces.
All assembly of shutters of doors, windows, ventilators and frames thereof shall be
exactly at right angles. In the case of frames, the right angle shall be checked from the
inside surfaces of the respective members.
All door and window frames shall be clamped together so as to be square and flat at the
time of delivery. Door frames without sills shall be fitted with temporary stretchers.
Horns of frames and other parts that go into or butt against the masonry, shall be
protected against moisture and decay with two coats of coal tar or other approved
protective material.
All surfaces of the door, window and ventilator frames and shutters which are required to
be painted ultimately shall be covered evenly by brush painting with a priming coat of a
white lead based primer. In the case of doors to be polished or varnished, a priming coat
of approved polish or varnish shall be given before delivery. No primer shall be applied
to the wood work until it has been inspected and passed by the Engineer.
9.2 Joinery
All heads, posts, transoms and mullions etc., of doors, windows and ventilators shall be
made out of single pieces of timber only. The heads and post shall be through- tenoned
into the mortices of the jamb posts to the full width of the latter and the thickness of the
tenon shall be not less than 1.25 cm. The tenons shall be close fitting into the mortices
and pinned with corrosion resisting metal pins not less than 8 mm diameter or with wood
dowels not less than 10 mm diameter. The depth of rebate in frames for housing the
shutters shall in all cases be 1.25 cm and the rebate in shutters for closing in double
shutter doors or windows shall be not less than 2 cm.
Unless otherwise specified, all joints shall be mortice and tenon joints with the ends of
the tenons exposed to view. Joints shall fit truly and fully without fillings. The contact
surfaces of tenons and mortices shall be treated, before putting together, with an
approved adhesive conforming to the relevant IS specifications.
9.3 Shrinkage & Tolerance
The arrangement, joining and fixing of all joinery work shall be such that shrinkage in any
part and in any direction shall not impair the strength and appearance of the finished
work.
The tolerance on overall dimensions shall be within the limits prescribed in IS:1003.
9.4 Fixing
Door and window frames shall generally be built in at the time the walls are constructed.
Alternatively, where permitted by the Engineer, the frames may be subsequently fixed
into prepared openings for which purpose holes to accommodate the hold fasts shall be
left at the time of construction. The method of fixing shall be as described elsewhere in
these. Where the frames are subsequently fixed into prepared openings in the wall
such openings should be 25 mm more than the overall width of the door, window or
ventilator frame to allow minimum 12.5 mm plaster on each jamb. The height of the
unfinished opening shall depend upon whether a threshold is required or not. While

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
fixing the door care shall be taken to see that at least 6 mm space is left between the
door and the finished floor. The MS clamps fixed to the frame shall be inserted in the
holes and jammed in cement concrete M-15 with 10 mm down graded stone chips after
holding the frame in proper position to the line level and plumb.
9.5 Tarring
Timber in contact with earth, concrete, plaster or masonry shall be treated with one coat
of coal tar before fixing in position.
9.6 Fittings
on each side of a door frame, one at the center point, and the other two at 30 cm from
the top and the bottom of the door frames. In the case of windows and ventilators, a pair
on each side shall be fixed at quarter points of the frames. Unless otherwise specified
the hold-fasts shall be of mild steel plate 40 x 3 x 250 mm long, fish tailed at one end and
screwed to the frame in the formed rebates.
Generally, each door shutter shall be fixed to the frame with three hinges of approved
manufacture, one at the center and the other two approximately 24 cm from the top and
bottom of the shutter. Each window shutter shall be fixed to its frame with two hinges at
the quarter points.
Locks, handles, door closers, stoppers etc., shall be fitted as shown in drawing or
described in the Schedule of Items.
9.7 Doors, Windows and Ventilators
Dimensions of the various components of doors, windows and ventilators shall be in

accordance with IS : 1003, Table- III or as shown on the drawings.
9.8 Paneled Shutters
Solid wood panels shall be made of one or more pieces of timber, preferably not less
than 12.5 cm nor more than 20 cm. in width, as specified in IS : 1033. When made from
more than one piece, the piece shall be joined with a continuous tongue and groove
joint, glued together and reinforced with metal dowels. Unless otherwise specified, the
thickness of the panels for 4 cm thick shutters shall be 2 cm and that for 2.5 cm thick
shutters, 1.25 cm.
9.9 Glazed Shutters
The openings for glazed shutters shall be rebated and moulded out of solid timber, and
shall be provided with mitered glazing beads, loosely fixed in position. Plain sheet glass
for panels shall be of approved quality as specified earlier. Wherever specified, ground
glass or frosted glass of approved quality shall be used in place of plain sheet glass.
9.10 Flush Door Shutters
Unless otherwise specified, flush door shutters shall be not less than 4 cm thick, with a
solid/cellular core, a teak wood frame, and faced with approved quality of plywood on
both faces. The core and stock shall be made from well seasoned approved timber and
treated with approved preservatives. The plywood faces shall be glued on to the

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
solid/cellular core with waterproof glue under pressure. The construction of flush doors
shall be such that no difficulty should arise in fixing mortice locks, hydraulic door closers
etc. The shutters shall be rebated in the case of the double leaf doors.
The wire gauze shall be bent in angles in the rebates of stiles and rails, turned and fixed
tight with blue tacks at about 75mm fixed alternately in the two faces of the rebates. Over
this, wooden heading shall be fixed with brads or small screws at about 75mm centres.
9.12 Hand rails of width and depth as specified in the item shall be measured in running
meters upto two places of decimal.
9.13 Cupboard Shelves etc.
Planks for shelves shall be planed on all faces and edges. In case of boards they shall
be sawn to the required size truly straight and square. Timber battens 25 x 40 mm unless
otherwise specified shall be planed smooth and fixed inside the cupboard with wooden
plugs and screws. Shelves shall be fixed to the battens and vertical portions shall be held
in position by fixing them to the battens and shelves using screws. hardwood strips for
edge sealing of the boards shall be planed smooth and fixed with headless nails.
Tolerance in width shall be ± 1.5mm and in thickness 1 mm.
9.14 Hardware Fittings for Doors, Windows & Ventilators
All mortice or rim locks, latches, cabinet and wardrobe locks, hydraulic door closers, floor
springs etc. shall be of Godrej, Everite make or of similar approved make. The rate shall
include for all necessary screws, other adjuncts, fixing in position and is for the
completed work. The finish shall be as specified in the schedule of quantities. Door ,
window and ventilator fittings shall be as per specifications already described. The rates
for doors, windows and ventilator shutters shall include the cost of fixing the fittings, with
the necessary screws to the shutters and the frame. The cost of fittings only shall be paid
separately. Where specified in the schedule of quantities, the cost of fittings shall be
included in the rates for doors , windows and ventilator shutters. In such case the
contractor shall supply and fix the various fittings strictly to the standard laid down in the
schedule of hardware fittings and no separate payment for this shall be made.
9.15 Inspection
The Contractor shall provide all facilities to the Engineer for the inspection of the goods at
his premises. No primer shall be applied to wood work until it has been inspected and
passed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall have the option of rejecting any article or
asking for replacement of any article found to be defective or not complying with the
requirements of this specification and the relevant Indian Standards.
10.0 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS & COLLAPSIBLE GATES
10.1 General
Doors, windows and ventilators etc., shall be truly square and flat, i.e. free from twist and
warp. The general fabrication shall conform t IS : 1038 and IS : 1361 as appropriate.
10.1.1 Frames shall be constructed of sections which have been cut to length and mitered.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
They shall be morticed, reinforced, drilled and tapped for hinges and lock and bolt
strikes. Where necessary, frames shall be reinforced for door closers. Flash butt welded
construction with mitered corners shall be used. Rubber door silencers shall be
furnished for the striking jamb. Loose "T" masonry anchors shall be provided. Frames
shall finish flush with floor and adjustable floor anchors shall be supplied. Frames shall
be brought to site with floor ties/weather bars installed in place. All frames shall be
square and flat. Door thresholds shall be provided as shown on drawing. Doors without
threshold shall have bottom tie of approved type.
10.1.2 The Contractor shall obtain doors, windows, ventilators etc., from an approved
manufacturer. The Contractor shall first submit for the approval of the Engineer, the
name and address of the manufacturer whose metal casements and doors and windows
he intends to use, together with typical drawings and specifications, describing the details
of construction for each type of door/window/ventilator etc.
10.1.3 All steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be either galvanized or painted. All steel
surfaces shall first be thoroughly cleaned free of rust, scale or dirt and mill scale by
pickling or similar process and they shall be painted with one coat of an approved primer
conforming to IS : 102 before despatch. Alternatively they may be galvanized by the "Hot
Dip" zinc spray or electro- galvanizing process as described in IS : 1361.
10.2 Fixing
Doors, windows and ventilators shall not be built in at the time the walls are constructed
but shall be subsequently fixed into prepared openings, as laid down in IS : 1081. Holes
to accommodate the fixing lugs are to be left or cut, and the casements fixed after all the
rough masonry and plaster work have been finalised. The lugs of the casement shall be
jammed in cement concrete (15C Mark) after holding the casement in proper position,
line and level.
The width of the clear unfinished opening in the wall should be 25 mm more than the
overall width of the door frame to allow for 12.5 mm plaster on each jamb. The height of
the unfinished opening shall depend upon whether a threshold is required or not. While
fixing the door, care shall be taken to see that at least 6 mm space is left between the
door and the finished floor.
10.3 Fittings
Hardware shall be fixed as late as possible, preferably just before the final coat of paint is
applied. It shall be fitted in a workmanlike manner, so that it may not work loose and in
such a way that screws and pins are not marked and mutilated by hammers and screw
drivers. It shall be tested for correct operation. Where specified, doors shall be fitted
with a three-way bolting device which can be operated from outside as well as inside,
and a locking system, which can similarly be operated from either side. Solid steel bolt
handles shall be provided, one on the outside and one on the inside of each shutter. In
case of doors provided with a service door, the lock shall be fitted on the service door.
All materials shall be the best procurable and shall conform to the relevant IS
specifications.
10.4 Normal Steel Plate Doors
Steel doors may be of the hinged type or sliding/folding type, single shutter or double
shutter, and of single- walled or double walled construction, as specified on the drawings

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
or Schedule of Items. All doors shall be provided with a sturdy frame and hold fasts for
fixing into the wall. Unless otherwise specified, the frame shall be prepared from mild
steel angles of size not less than 65 x 65 x 6 mm electrically welded at the corners and
the shutter shall be made from flat steel sheet of 18 gauge thickness with a frame of mild
steel angles not less than 50 x 50 x 6 mm all round, suitably braced. The whole shutter
shall be of welded construction and shall be hung at the sides by means of three or four
hinges as specified.
10.4.1 Double Plate flush door shutters
Door shutters shall be 45 mm thick, completely flush design and shall comprise of two
outer sheets or 18G steel sheets, rigidly connected and reinforced inside with continuous
vertical 20G stiffeners, spot welded in position at not more than 150 mm on centres.
Both edges of doors shall be joined and reinforced full height by steel channels placed
immediately inside and welded to the door faces. Top and bottom of doors shall be
reinforced horizontally by steel channels running full width of door. Doors shall not have
more than 2.5 mm clearance at jambs and head, shall have proper level on lock stiles
and rails and shall be reinforced at corners to prevent sagging or twisting. Spires or
double doors shall have meeting style edges beveled or rebated. Where shown on
drawing, or in the Schedule of Items, the doors shall be sound-deadened by filling the
inside voids with mineral wool or other suitable approved materials. Doors shall be
mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped in shop for hinges, locks and bolts. They shall
also be reinforced for closers, push-plates and other surface hardware where necessary.
Any drilling and tapering required for surface hardware shall be done at site. Where
shown in drawing, provisions, shall be made for fixing glazing, vision panels, louvers etc.
Glazing mouldings shall be of 18 g steel or extruded aluminium sections with profiles
shown in drawing and suitable for fixing 6 mm glass. Louver blades shall be V or Z
shaped sections.
10.4.2 Single sheet door shutters
Single sheet doors shall be made from best quality 18g mild steel sheets, and shall
present a flush surface on the outside. The inside shall be stiffened with a semitubular
edge and central stiffening rail which shall convey the lock and other fixture. The frames
shall be made from best quality steel sections. Wherever required or shown on
drawings, provision for fixing glass panes, louvers etc., shall be made.
The manufacturing shall done as specified in "Double Plate Flush Door Shutters".
10.5 Sliding Doors
Shall be either double plate or single plate construction as shown in drawings and
Schedule of Items, made out of 18 gauge steel sheets with adequate stiffeners. The
Contractor shall specify the weight of the door in his shop drawing and submit the
manufacturer's catalogue of the sliding gear he proposes to use. Where shown in
drawings or in the Schedule of Items, the Contractor shall make provision for openings
in the door for mono-rail beams. Doors when closed shall effectively exclude rain water
from seeping in. When called for in schedule, sliding doors shall withstand specified
wind loads without buckling or jamming. The door shall slide freely under all ambient
conditions.
10.6 Pressed Steel Doors

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
All pressed steel doors shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer. The frame
and shutters shall be fabricated from cold rolled or pressed steel sections. Unless
otherwise specified, the thickness of all sheets used for frames shall be not less than 5
mm. The shutters shall be made of sheet steel of 2 mm thickness for single shutter
doors and double shutter doors with or without service door. The plates shall be
adequately stiffened with suitably placed stiffeners.
The double-walled door shutter shall consist of two plates each 2.5 mm thick, separated
by a gap of 33 mm in between making an overall thickness of 38 mm or as shown in
drawing. The plates shall be adequately stiffened by means of suitably spaced horizontal
steel stiffeners.
10.7 Steel Windows, Sashes, Ventilators, etc.
These shall conform to IS : 1038 and IS : 1361 as appropriate and as shown in drawings.
The details as called for in the above codes shall be applicable for coupling mullions,
transoms, weather bars, pivot arrangements for ventilators, etc.
10.7.1 Where composite unit openings are shown in drawings, the individual window units shall
be joined together with requisite transoms and mullions. Where aluminium glazing
beads are specified, they shall be extruded aluminium channel 9.5 mm x 1.6 mm (Indal
Section No. 2209) unless otherwise shown in drawings. Aluminium beads shall be given
one coat of zinc chromate primer before fixing to windows.
All welds at the corner of casement shall be done by flash butt welding process and
dressed flush on all exposed and contact surfaces.
10.8 Collapsible Gate (Steel)
Mild steel collapsible gates shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer. These
shall be of mid bar type made out of double channels each 20 x 10 x 2 mm with 20 x 5
mm diagonals and shall be top hung with roller bearings, and fitted with locking
arrangement.
Collapsible gates under 3.0 meter height shall generally have 3 sets of lattices and those
over 3.0 meter height, 4 sets of lattices. Guide tracks shall be fitted at the top and
bottom, of T-iron 40 x 40 x 6 mm with 40 mm dia bearings in every fourth double
channel.
10.9 Aluminium Doors, Windows, Frames
10.9.1 Anodised tubular aluminium doors shall be of approved make and shall be of size and
design as per relevant drawing. Unless otherwise specified, the door frame shall be of
101.4mm x 44.6mm and shutter of 50mm tubular extrusions, 3mm thick. The opening
arrangement shall be single action or double action as shown in drawings with spring
hinges in floor. The glazing shall be 5.5mm thick plain glass panes fixed with necessary
gaskets and aluminium beading strip. The door shall be provided with one security lock.
The shutters shall be provided with 1.6mm thick 300 x 150mm push plates and 1.6mm
thick 300mm wide kick plate of anodised aluminium for full width of door inside and
outside.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The door frames shall be polished and anodised with approved colour. The average
thickness of anodic coating shall not be less than 15 microns as per IS:1868-1982. Door
frame shall be provided with approved anchors @ 90cm c/c maximum for fixing.
10.9.2 Aluminium Windows
Alimunium windows and ventilators shall conform to IS:1948-1961 or equivalent as

approved by the Engineer. Fixed frame shall be manufactured from aluminium alloy
conforming to ISS-HE-9 WP. The fixtures like handles, stoppers, stays, etc., shall also be
anodized aluminium and shall be of approved make. Glazing shall be 4mm thick plain
glass and shall be fixed with glazing clips and metal putty. It shall conform to IS:1081-
1960. Average anodizing coating to windows ventilation and fixtures shall not be less
than 15 microns as per IS:1868-1982.
10.9.3 All work shall be fitted and shop assembled to a first job, and ready for erection. Shop
joins shall be made to hair lines and then welded or braced by such method as will
produce a uniform colour througout the work. Wherever possible, joints shall be made in
concealed locations and on edges of doors. Field connections of all work may be made
with concealed screws or other approved type of fasteners. Glazing beads shall be shap
fit type without visible screws and shall be of sizes to accommodate glazing. All work
shall be adequately braced and reinforced as necessary for strength and rigidity.
11.0 GLAZING
11.1 General
Glazing shall be done with plain, frosted or ground glass or wired cast glass as shown on
drawings, described in the Schedule of Items or approved by the Engineer. The method
of glazing adopted shall be such that movement of the structure, to which the securing is
done, does not transmit strain to windows, doors or ventilators as the case may be. The
work shall generally conform to IS : 1081, Code of Practice for Fixing and Glazing of
Metal Doors, Windows & Ventilators. The material for putting shall consist of whiting and
linseed oil, raw-mixed in such proportion as to form a paste conforming to IS : 419.
11.2 Doors, Windows, Ventilators, etc.
Windows and ventilators shall be designed for putty glazing fixed from outside and
glazed doors for fixing from inside. In addition, spring type glazing clips shall be provided
at intervals of 30 cm, or as shown otherwise on drawings or described in the Schedule of
Items. These shall be inserted into holes drilled in the shutters or frames as the case
may be.
All glazing shall be puttied to the shutters or frames with good quality putty in addition to
glazing clips. Glass panes shall not be placed directly against the metal/timber. A thin
layer of putty shall be evenly spread over the glazing rebate and the glass pressed firmly
against it. It shall be secured in position by means of teak wood beds for wooden
shutters. Glass panes shall be sent without spraining and shall be bedded in putty and
back puttied, except where moulding or gasket are specified. Putty, mastic cement etc.,
shall be smoothly finished to even lines. Figured glass shall be set with smooth side out.
After completion of glazing work, all dirt stains, excess putty etc., shall be removed and
the glass panes shall be left in perfectly acceptable condition. All broken cracked or
damaged glass shall be replaced by new ones at the Contractor's cost.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
11.3 Fixed Glazing
This shall consist of steel glazing bars as shown on drawings or described in the
Schedule of Item and be subject to approval of Engineer. The glazing parts shall be
securely fixed in their frame and shall be weather-proof. All glazing shall be flashed to
the surrounding so as to be weather-proof. Glass shall be fixed to the a strangles with
glazing clips and putty.
12.0 WHITE WASHING, COLOUR WASHING AND PAINTING
12.1 Scope
This chapter deals with white washing, colour washing, distempering, cement washing,
emulsion painting, silicate painting etc., to concrete and masonry surfaces and painting
to the wood works and steel works.
12.2 Materials
Materials shall conform to Part-I of this series.
12.3 White Washing, Colour Washing
12.3.1 General
Wherever scaffolding is required/necessary, it shall be erected on double support tied

together by horizontal pieces, over which the scaffolding planks shall be fixed. No part of
it shall rest on or touch the surface which is being washed. Where ladders are used,
pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their tops to avoid damage or scratches to
walls. For white washing the ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected. The
surface on which wash is to be applied shall be thoroughly brushed free from mortar
droppings and foreign matter.
12.3.2 White wash
The wash shall be prepared from fresh stone white lime of approved quality and shall be
thoroughly slaked on the spot mixed and stirred with sufficient water to make a thin
cream. This shall be allowed to stand for 24 hours and then shall be screened through a
clean course cloth. 4 Kg of gum dissolved in hot water shall be added to each cubic
meter of the cream.
The approximate quantity of water to be added in making the cream will be 5 litres of
water to 1 kg of lime. Indigo upto 3 gm per kg of lime dissolved in water shall then be
added and wash stirred well. Water shall then be added at the rate of about 6 litres per
kg of lime to produce a milky solution. The white wash shall be applied with approved
brushes to the specified number of coats. The operation for each coat shall consist of
stroke of brush given from the top downwards, another from the bottom upwards over the
first stroke and similarly one stroke horizontally from the right and another from the left
before it dries.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next-one is applied and shall subjected to
inspection and approval by the Engineer. No portion of the surface shall be left out
initially to be patched up later on.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The finished dry surface shall not show any signs of cracking and peeling nor shall it
come off readily on the hand when rubbed. Doors, windows, floors and such other parts
of the building not to be white washed shall be protected from being splashed upon.
12.3.3 Colour wash
A priming coat of white wash with lime shall be applied before applying two or more coats
of the colour wash (as specified). Entire surface should represent a smooth and uniform
finish. Sample of colour wash shall be duly approved by the Engineer before
application. Same specification as that of white wash shall be followed for colour wash
also using necessary amount of colouring ingredient of approved tint.
12.3.4 White washing with whiting
Whiting (ground white chalk) shall be dissolved in sufficient quantity of hard water and
thoroughly stirred to form a thin slurry which shall then be screened through a clean
coarse cloth. 2 Kg of gum and 0.4 kg of copper sulphate dissolved separately in hot
water shall be added for every cum. of slurry which shall then be diluted with water to the
consistency of milk so as to make wash ready for use. Other specification remains
same as per white washing with lime.
12.4 Cement primer coat
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust etc., and shall be allowed to dry for at
least 48 hours. It shall then be rubbed thoroughly be sand paper to give a smooth and
even surface. Any unevenness shall be made good by applying putty, made of plaster of
paris mixed with water on the entire surface including filling up the undulation and then
sand papering the same after it is dry. The cement primer shall preferably be applied by
brushing and not by spraying. Horizontal strokes shall be given first and vertical strokes
shall be applied immediately, afterwards. This entire operation will constitute one coat.
The surface shall be finished as smooth as possible, leaving no brush marks.
12.5 Water proof cement paint
The prepared surface shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water before water proof
cement paint is applied. The paint shall be prepared strictly as per manufacturer's
specifications, in the absence of which it shall be mixed in two stages. The first stage
shall comprise of 2 parts of water proof cement paint and one part of water stirred
thoroughly and allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care shall be taken to add the paint
gradually to the water and not vice versa. The second stage shall comprise of adding
further one part of water to the mix and stirring thoroughly to obtain a liquid of workable
and uniform consistency. The paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up
within an hour of its mixing.
Paint shall be applied with brushes or spraying machine. The solution shall be kept well
stirred during the period of application. It shall be applied on the surface which is on the
shady side of the building so that direct heat of the sun on the surface is avoided.
Method of application shall be similar to oil bound distemper. The completed surface
shall be watered, after the day's work. Before application of the second or subsequent
coats, the surface of the previous coat shall not be wetted and a uniform shade should
be obtained after application of paint. Cement paint shall not be applied on surfaces
already treated with white wash, colour wash, distemper, varnish paint etc., and on

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
gypsum, wood and metal surfaces.
12.6 Oil bound distemper
The surface shall be prepared as for 'Cement Primer Coat'. A primer coat of cement
primer or distemper shall be applied as specified in the description of the item. After the
primer coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered to
make it smooth, taking care not to rub the priming coat out. All loose particles shall be
dusted off. One coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner, shall be applied with
brushes/rollers in horizontal strokes followed immediately by vertical ones which together
constitute one coat. The subsequent coats shall be applied in the same way. Two or
more coats of distemper as are found necessary shall be applied to obtained an even
shade. A time interval of at least 24 hours shall be allowed between consecutive coats.
The brushes shall be of 15 cm. double bristled type. They shall be maintained in proper
condition and those that are dirty or caked will not be allowed to be used.
12.7 Dry Distemper
The surface shall be prepared in the same manner as for oil bound distemper. A primer
coat using approved primer or sizes shall be applied. Distemper prepared as per
manufacturer's direction shall be applied and each coat shall be allowed to dry before
subsequent coat is applied. The finished surface shall be free from chalking when
rubbed, even, uniform and shall show no brush marks.
12.8 Plastic emulsion paint
The surface on which plastic paint has to be laid must be thoroughly cleaned and
prepared and all defects rectified. The surface shall be dry and rubbed smooth by
means of sand paper to the satisfaction of the Engineer. One coat sealer and two coats
of plastic emulsion paint are to be applied. The work is to be carried out under direct
guidance and instructions from the manufacturers whose expert advise and supervision
are to be made available in order to achieve the high grade finish. The painters
employed for this work must be capable of producing the highest standard of
workmanship required. If the finish is of doubtful nature, the contractor shall have to
rectify at his own cost to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
Plastic emulsion paint of 'Jenson Nicholson' or equivalent quality and of approved colour
and shade shall only be used.
12.9 Silicate paint
Silicate paint shall consist of two parts mixed in the ratio of 1 : 1 by volume.
a) Liquid part consisting of liquid glass whose density has been reduced to 1.15 to
1.20 by addition of water.
b) Solid part consisting of a pigment and chalk in the ratio of 1 : 9 by weight.

Pigment shall be selected on the basis of colour requirement and shall have the
approval of the Engineer.
The two parts shall be mixed thoroughly and the paint passing through a sieve of 600
mesh per sq.cm. only shall be used for painting. The paint shall be used within 12
hours after mixing and the painting shall not be carried out in open sunlight or under

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
moist conditions.
12.10 Bitumen painting
Bitumen painting to concrete surface shall be done as follows :
i) Hot application
The surface shall be cleaned of all mud etc., before painting. The honey-combs
and other defects of concrete surfaces to be painted shall be rectified properly.
Any projection of binding wire shall be cut to keep it 10 mm inside the concrete
surface and then filled with mortar. Before application the surface shall be
absolute dry.
Bitumen of standard quality of 20/30 or equivalent shall be heated to the

temperature specified by the maker and then applied hot with brushes on the
prepared surface. The surface shall be allowed to cool before applying the
second coat.
ii) Cold application
The surface shall be prepared in the same way as for hot application. The
bitumen emulsion of approved quality shall be applied with special brushes.
Where acid resistant treatment is specified such surface shall be covered with
approved acid resisting coating to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Before the
coating is applied, the surface shall be properly cleaned and prepared in the
manner described above.
12.11 Tarring
i) Timber surfaces in contact with earth/ concrete/plaster shall be treated with one
coat of hot tar mixture before fixing as specified in schedule.
ii) If required steel work in holdfasts and the like shall be treated as above and
sanded in addition before being fixed in position.
12.12 Painting to Timber & Steel Surface
12.12.1 General
The priming coat for steel/wood work shall be applied after the surface has been
prepared. After the priming coat has dried, all nails, screw holes and cracks shall be
filled with putty and surface smoothened with sand paper.
All stains of paint to glasses, walls, fittings and fixtures etc. shall be cleaned thoroughly
by applying required turpentine or thinner. The contractor's rate shall include all these.
12.12.2 Painting to timber
i) Unless otherwise specified, all timber surfaces shall be treated with one priming
coat, one under coat and one finishing coat. Under coat and finishing coat shall
be synthetic enamel and priming coat shall be of pink primer or as specified in

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
schedule of quantities and as approved. In case the surface are to be polished

or varnished, a priming coat of approved polish or varnish shall be given. No
primer shall be applied to wood work until it has been inspected and passed by
the Engineer.
ii) Polishing
The surface to be polished shall be prepared in the same manner as specified

under painting.
The number of coats to be applied shall be as specified.
The polish shall be applied with a pad consisting of cotton wool inside a clean
white cloth. Several coats shall be applied with light sand papering from time to
time and cleaning the dust before applying next coat except the final coat. The
final coat of the polish shall be rubbed thoroughly until the wood feels perfectly
dry when touched and gives a satisfactory smooth shining.
12.12.3 Painting to steel surfaces
12.12.3.1 General
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, rust and mill scale. Areas
which become inaccessible after assembly shall be painted before assembly after
cleaning the surfaces as described above. The surfaces shall be perfectly dry before
painting.
Wherever shop primer painting is damaged, the surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned
and touched up with corresponding primer.
Site painting shall not be done in frosty or foggy weather or when humidity is such as to
cause condensation on the surface to be painted.
12.12.3.2 Steel structures
Unless otherwise specified all structures shall be painted with two coats of primer as
specified and approved. One coat shall be applied at shop and the second coat at site.
All structures after erection shall be given two coats of finishing paint and shall be of
synthetic enamel of approved colour. The under coat shall have different tint to
distinguish from the finishing coat.
12.12.3.3 Galvanized iron sheets
All plain and CGI sheets requires surface pre-treatment or use of other patented primer
to ensure adhesion of paint to zinc coated surfaces. Such pre-treatment shall be as per
manufacturer's specifications. Where pre-treatment is adopted one coat of primer paint
of suitable quality shall be applied. Unless otherwise specified the finishing coats shall
consist of an under-coat of an aluminium paint having blue tint and a second coat of
aluminium paint having aluminium colour.
12.12.3.4 Structures exposed to corrosion
Structures exposed to corrosive atmosphere, acid fumes, chemical action etc., shall be

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
given two coats of primer, one at shop and one at site and two coats of finishing
anticorrosive paint of reputed manufacturer. Red lead primers are not permitted. The
finishing coats shall be of specified colour. The type and procedure of such painting shall
be as per manufacturer's specification and the same shall be subject to Engineer's
approval.
12.12.3.5 Structures exposed to heat
Structures exposed to heat shall be given two coats of primer, one at Shop and one at
Site and two finishing site coats of heat resistant paint of suitable commercial type in
accordance with relevant standards or manufacturer's specification, and shall be subject
to the Engineer's approval.
12.12.3.6 Structures embedded
Exposed surfaces of embedded parts shall be given two coats of read lead graphite
primer at shop and finished with two coats of anti-corrosive paint at site after
embedment. Type of paint and procedure of painting shall be as per relevant standards
or as per manufacturer's instructions. Surfaces to be field welded shall have no paint
applied within 100 mm of the welding zone.
13.0 INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY PLUMBING, DRAINAGE & SANITATION
13.1 Scope of Work
The work comprises supply, laying testing, commissioning etc. of water supply,
plumbing, drainage & sanitation.
The work includes the following activities connected with the job :
i) Supply and delivery of all required pipes and other materials.
ii) Earthwork in excavation for trenches, pits/ chambers/ manholes etc.
iii) Civil works connected with the laying/erection of pipe lines such as making holes in the
wall etc. and repairing them after pipe erection, construction of pipe supports, valve
chambers, manholes, bedding and covering of pipe laying wherever required.
iv) Laying and jointing of pipe lines as per relevant IS codes.
v) Testing of pipe lines after laying as per IS or any other standard test.
vi) Back filling of trenches after successful & satisfactory testing.
vii) Disinfection of the complete piping system in the case of water supply.
viii) Commissioning of entire network.
ix) Safe custody of the pipes/materials/equipment/work and other obligation stated

elsewhere in the specification.
x) Any other activities which are not mentioned above but essential and required.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
13.1.1 Materials
The materials shall conform to Part-I of this series.
13.2 Water Supply & Plumbing
13.2.1 General
13.2.1.1 General requirements
The Contractor shall lay all the pipes and fittings in the best workman like manner by
skilled workmen and licensed plumbers in conformity with the regulations and
requirements of the local appropriate authorities and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified water supply works in buildings shall be carried out in
accordance with IS : 2065 "Code of Practice for Water Supply in Buildings".
13.2.2 Installation
All works like earth work, masonry, concrete, steel work, cutting holes, chases in brick
or in concrete works, cutting of roads, repairs and rectifications associated directly with
the installation of water supply system shall come under the scope of the contractor and
shall be governed by the specification of the relevant chapter.
13.2.3 Laying
Before lowering down the pipes for laying the trenches shall be checked against crack
by means of light hammering and for any other damage. All fixing shall be carefully
aligned and spaced at a distance from the main structure to give reasonable all round
access for maintenance and inspection and laid true to line plumb and level. Any
deviation shall need approval of the Engineer. Meticulous care shall be taken to avoid
chances of airlock and water hammer.
Pipes shall be laid on continuous unyielding surface holder or on reliable supports at

least one near each joint and spacing as directed by the Engineer. The support must
be strong, neat and shall have provisions for securing the pipes in every direction and
easy maintenance. Pipes shall be encased or concealed in masonry or concrete if
shown on drawing or directed by the Engineer. Pipes embedded in floors and wall
shall be securely bound with bituminous impregnated type and so fixed as to allow for
any movement due to expansion and contraction. Adequate width shall be provided to
lay the pipes as per standard practice.
Excavation below the required level is not permitted. The contractor shall make good
any excess excavation as directed by the Engineer.
Soft spots in the bottom of beds for pipe lines in rock shall be levelled with sand or soft
soil or concrete as approved by the Engineer and the thickness of the layer shall not be
less than 100 mm.
13.2.4 Excavation for pipe lines in trenches
Excavation shall comply with chapter 2. The sides of pits and trenches shall be
adequately supported at all times, except where otherwise directed by the Engineer.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
13.2.5 Underground piping in and around building
Underground piping shall be laid at such a depth that it is not likely to be damaged by
traffic and other loads and frost, where applicable, and as shown in the drawing and
instructed by the Engineer. The thrust blocks shall be provided wherever required.
The size and depth of the trench shall be as approved by the Engineer. Backfilling in
trenches shall be done with selected fine earth, unless otherwise permitted, in 150 mm
layers and carefully consolidated and well treated so that it does not set as a drainage
channel. Special care shall be taken while filling in the vicinity of the pipe to avoid
damages. Before backfilling the laid pipe shall be fully tested and approved.
13.2.6 Concealed piping
Where desired by the Engineer or shown on the drawings the pipes shall be concealed
in masonry or concrete of the adjoining structure by making chases in walls/floors and
these shall be secured by hooks and the chases filled with concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement, 2
sand and 4 aggregate). The contractor will rectify if required the chases, openings and
conduits, supplement and make good after laying and testing of the concealed
pipelines.
13.2.7 GI Piping
13.2.7.1 The pipes shall be fixed in longest lengths possible with all necessary bends, tees,
couplings, reducing sockets and tees etc. in perfect straight lines both vertically and
horizontally.
13.2.7.2 All exposed GI pipes shall be fixed at least 15 mm clear of wall face with holder bat clamps at
suitable places not exceeding (2.5 meters) center to center. Where the pipes are laid in
chases in walls as shown in the drawing, these shall be secured to walls by hooks.
Cases in walls and floors shall be filled in with cement concrete 1:2:4. Where the
pipes are to be run underground these may be laid at least 60 cm below ground level.
13.2.7.3 The joints of pipes and fittings shall be sealed with red lead paint and fine spun yarn.
Joints must be perfectly water tight when put under maximum test pressure.
13.2.7.4 Unless otherwise specified the exposed portion of pipes and fittings shall be given two
coats of approved paint over a coat of approved priming. For pipes laid underground,
these shall be treated with two coats of bituminous paint.
13.2.8 Jointing of pipes
The interior of all pipes and joints shall be cleaned before jointing commences. Jointing
of pipes shall be done in such a manner as to render them completely leakproof and
durable. Instruction of the manufacturer shall be followed unless desired otherwise by
the Engineer. However, the general norms and recommended practice for different
types of pipes are given below for guidance :
(a) Cast Iron
i) Spigot and socket joints :

Interior surface of bells and exterior surface of smooth ends of pipes shall be cleared of
redundant insulting cover and other foreign materials particularly of oil, burning off

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
materials from bells and smooth pipe ends is not permitted. Sharp rises on interior bell
surface shall be smoothed out.
Bells should be lined up, in compliance with direction of pipe. Laying work shall be
started from lower points.
Lead Joint :
The joint is made by first caulking in with packing material hemp, resin of bituminous
strand or rubber rings upto half depth and filling the remainder by running in molten lead
taking care that no dross enters the joint and then thoroughly caulking the lead. The
lead need not extend into the joint further than the back of the groove formed in the
socket. After completing the joint it shall not be allowed to move. For rectification the
joint shall be completely redone.
ii) Flanged joints :

Flanged joints shall be made by jointing rings of good quality, smooth and hard
compressed fibre material of thickness not less than 1.5 mm and of such width as to fit
inside the circle of bolt. Diagonally opposite bolts shall be tightened in pairs and in
stages so that degree of all bolts in a joint are similar. Damaged gaskets shall be
replaced.
(b) For Steel Pipes

Plain ended steel pipes may be jointed by welding. Screwed and socket joints shall be
carefully tightened. Care shall be taken to remove any burring from the ends of the
pipes. Jointing compound, if used, shall be lead free and approved by the Engineer.
(c) For GI Pipes

Threads shall be cut with sharp tools, and before jointing all scale shall be removed
from pipes by suitable means. The screw threads of the pipe shall be cleaned out and
the joint made by screwing the fitting after treating the threads with approved pipe
jointing compound. Once a joint has been screwed up it shall not be backed off unless
threads are re-cleaned and new compound applied.
(d) For Asbestos cement pipes

Socket and spigot ended pipes shall be jointed by caulking with tarred gaskets and
grouted with 1:3 cement sand mortar.
(e) For Lead Pipe

Lead and lead alloy pipes shall be jointed with wiped solder joints.
(f) For Concrete Pipe

Concrete pipes may be socket and spigot ended, collar or bend jointed. Joint shall be
effected by caulking with tarred rope yarn and the socket completely filled in with 1:3
cement sand mortar. A fillet being worked round the socket extending for a length not
less than 50 mm from the face of the socket.
(g) For PVC pipe

The joint shall be either solvent weld joints or of loose collar type with two rubber rings.
The fittings, joints and installation shall be done as per recommendations of
manufacturer.
(h) Tyton joint

The manufacturer's instruction shall be strictly followed in making such joints. Tyton
joints shall be made by push-on type 'tyton' rubber gasket and such rubber gasket shall

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
conform to the specification stipulated by the pipe manufacturer. The tools specified by
the pipe manufacturer shall be used to secure the joint fully.
13.2.9 Precautions
(a) All water supply pipes shall be so laid and so fixed and maintained as to be and remain
completely water tight.
(b) During installation open ends of each pipe shall be protected by suitable covers or plugs
so that the ends, thread, sockets or spigot are not damaged and no foreign materials
can make its way into the pipe line.
(c) Due care should be taken to ensure that there shall be no cross connection whatsoever
between a pipe or fitting for conveying or containing wholesome water and a pipe or
fitting containing impure water or water liable to contamination or of an uncertain quality
of water which has been used for any other purpose.
(d) Fittings and fixtures liable to be stolen shall be fitted and fixed just before testing and
handing over.
13.2.10 Painting
When mentioned in the schedule of item underground steel and cast iron pipes shall be
treated with 2 coats of anticorrosive bituminous paint on the outside surface after
cleaning the surface from soil, dust, moisture, rust, scales soot etc. When painting is to
be done for pipes above ground GI pipes shall be given a coat of zinc chromate primer,
C.I. & MS pipes shall be given one coat of red lead or zinc chromate primer over which
at least 2 coats of best quality and manufacture as approved by the Engineer shall be
provided or as specified in the schedule of item.
13.2.11 Water meters
Water meter shall be installed in the building at suitable location on the main supply line
to the building/dwelling units.
13.2.12 Ferrule and stop cock box with chamber :
Square cast iron surface box 15 cm square and 22.5 cm deep weighing not less than
4.54 kg with hinged lid shall be provided in masonry chamber. Top of box shall be
made flush with the finished level of the chamber. The chamber 25 cm x 25 cm inside
shall be with half brick wall in cement mortar 1:4 over a bed concrete of 75 mm thick in
proportion 1:4:8 with stone chips. The inside wall faces shall be plastered with 12 mm
thick cement mortar 1:4 finished smooth with a floating coat of neat cement.
The exposed surfaces of cast iron box and cover shall be treated with two coats of
bituminous paint.
13.2.13 Inspection, Testing and Acceptance
13.2.13.1 Pipes, fittings and fixtures before laying
All pipes, fittings and appliances shall be inspected, before delivery at the site to see
whether they conform to accepted standards. The pipes and fittings shall be inspected
on site before laying and shall be sounded to disclose cracks. Any defective items

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
shall be clearly marked as rejected and forthwith removed from the site.
13.2.13.2 Testing of pipes after laying
a) The contractor shall ensure the safety of the pipework under test and provide all
necessary stoppers, testing apparatus etc, that are required for testing.
b) The contractor shall be responsible for any damage done to pipework and ancillary work
while testing and shall replace any pipe or fitting which does not satisfactorily withstand
the test.
c) The contractor shall give written notice of the times at which tests are to take place. On
completion of each test two copies of the complete records shall be given to the
Engineer.
d) The work will not be considered complete until the tests have proved satisfactory and a
certificate issued by the Engineer.
After laying and jointing, the main shall be slowly and carefully charged with water, so
that all air is expelled from the main by providing a 25 mm inlet with a stop-cock,
allowed to stand full of water for a few days if time permits and then tested under
pressure. The test pressure shall be 6kg/cm2 or double the maximum working
pressure, whichever is greater. The pressure shall be applied by means of a manually
operated test pump, or in the case of long mains or a large diameter, by a power driven
test pump, provided that pump is not left unattended. In either case due precaution
shall be taken to ensure that the required test pressure is not exceeded. Pressure
gauges shall be accurate and shall preferably have been recalibrate before the test.
The pump having been stopped, the test pressure shall maintain itself without
measurable loss for at least five minutes. The end of the main shall be closed by fitting
a water-tight expanding plug and the plug shall be secured by struts to resist the end
thrust of the water pressure in the mains.
13.2.13.3 Testing of service pipes and fittings
The service pipes shall be slowly and carefully charged with water allowing all air to
escape avoiding all shock or water hammer. The service pipe shall then be inspected
under working conditions of pressure and flow. When all draw-off tape are closed, the
service pipes shall be absolutely watertight. All piping, fittings and appliance shall be
checked for satisfactory support and protection from damage, corrosion and frost.
13.2.14 Storage Tank
13.2.14.1 Pressed steel tank
Pressed sheet water storage tanks shall be of nominal size and capacity as mentioned
in the Schedule of Item and fabricated with all flanges external/internal or bottom flange
internal and side flanges external, as shown on drawings or schedule of items. Inlet,
overflow vent pipes manholes shall be arranged and provided as shown in drawing or
mentioned in the schedule. Unless otherwise specified, the outlet pipe shall be 50 mm
above the bottom of the tank and there shall be 150 mm free board at the top of the
tank. The fabricator shall supply 5 prints of fabrication drawing to the Engineer for prior
approval showing thickness of plates, method of jointing the plates, all supports, stays,
gussets etc. Pads, cleats etc., required for supporting the tanks shall also be supplied

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
by the manufacturer.
All tanks shall be supplied with mosquito-proof top with manhole not less than 450 mm
diameter. Tanks deeper than 1.00 Meter shall be provided with MS internal access
ladder adjacent to the manhole. Meter level indicator shall be provided if asked for.
Two coats of anticorrosive paint over a suitable primer shall be applied to both internal
a external surface of tanks. The paint shall be so selected as not to impart any taste or
odour of water and be of lead free composition.
13.2.14.2 GI water tank
GI water tanks shall be procured from a reputed manufacturer. The design shall be
good enough to withstand the loads safely Galvanized iron water storage tank shall be
made of minimum 16 gauge galvanized iron sheet. Plain sheets shall be fixed at the
corner to angle iron frames by means of 6 mm rivets at 40 mm pitch for tanks upto 1000
litres capacity and 8 mm rivets at 35 mm pitch for tanks above 1000 litres capacity.
Tanks above 1000 litres shall have 20 mm dia. galvanised iron stays, one fixed to angle
framing at top and two in the body of the tank for extra strength. Holes for riveting shall
be drilled and not punched. White lead shall be applied to the joints before riveting.
Tanks shall have 400 mm dia. holes at the top with hinged covers. The covers shall be
made of galvanised iron sheet with angle iron frame. The cover shall be just loose but
close fitting to keep out dust and mosquito and will not be airtight. It shall be complete
with lockable arrangement.
Tanks unless otherwise specified shall be provided with rising main inlets of 40 mm dia
galvanised iron pipe or as shown on drawing and 25 mm dia GI overflow pipe and 25
mm washout with plug. The rising main shall be connected to the tank with a ball valve
near the top which disconnects the supply when tank is full up to the point of
overflowing.
The ball valve shall permit the entry of water when the tank is empty and disconnect the
supply when the tank is full. It consists of a hollow floating ball made of copper plastic
or hard rubber, 110 mm in diameter attached to an arm which is so pivoted that the end
near the pivot close the orifice of the main when the ball is raised to the required height
of water in the tank and opens the main as soon as the ball drops with the fall of water
level as it is drawn off through the distribution. The ball valve shall be fixed to the tank
independent of the pipe and set in such a position that the body of the ball valve
submerge when the tank is full upto the water line. The ball valve shall be so adjusted
as to limit the level of the water in the tank below the lip of the overflow pipe, and above
the maximum water filled level shall be as per the standard norms for GI water tanks.
13.2.14.3 Water reservoirs made of concrete or masonry shall be governed by the specification of
the relevant chapter. It shall have, inlet, outlet, overflow and wash out with plug and a top
MS/CI cover as per schedule of items and drawings.
13.3 Drainage and Sanitation (Internal)
13.3.1 Scope
This section covers the layout and construction of drains for waste water, surface water
and sewage together with all fittings and fixtures inclusive of ancillary works, such as
connections, manholes and inspection chambers used within and around the building
and the connection to a public sewer upto treatment work, septic tank and soak pit. All
sewerage and drainage works shall be executed in accordance with specifications

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
given for different works. All sewerage and drainage works shall be executed by a
licensed plumbing supervisor or a licensed plumber and in accordance with IS : 1742
"Code of Practice for Building Drainage " unless otherwise specified.
13.3.1.1 Installation
All pipe lines, locations of fittings and fixtures, etc. shall be as per drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. Correctness of lines, plumb, orientation, symmetry and levels
shall be strictly ensured. All items shall be fully secured against movement in any
direction and shall be located so as to allow easy maintenance.
All pipelines, fittings and fixtures shall be installed leakproof when the works under
scope of this specification linked up with works executed by others, the connections
shall be such as to prevent any splashing or spilling or emission of foul odour and
gasses.
13.3.2 Rainwater downcomers
Rainwater downcomers shall be standard cast iron or asbestos cement pipes. In case
where specifically desired, MS pipes may also be used. MS pipes shall be painted
outside with two coats of anticorrosive paint over a coat of primer. Rainwater
downcomers shall run along and be secured to walls columns, etc. Where desired by
the Engineer these may have to be installed in chases cut in the structure. All pipes
shall be well secured and supported by adequately strong brackets. The brackets may
be wrought iron clamp type, split ring type or perforated strap iron type as approved by
the Engineer. For vertical runs each pipe shall hang freely on its brackets fixed just
below the socket. Suitable spacer blocks shall be provided against the vertical surface
to which the pipe is fixed. Roof and floor drains and yard gullies shall be installed, if
required, by cutting into the structure and grouted with 1:2:4 cement concrete. All
gutters shall be provided with removable gratings. All horizontal pipes shall have a
minimum fall in 1 in 100.
13.3.3 Gutter
The gutters shall be made of GI or A.C., gutters shall be supplied by reputed

specialised firms. Each section shall be sufficiently rigid, edges and corners straight
and the sloes perfectly uniform. GI gutters shall have the edges strengthened by
suitable means.
Unless noted otherwise the gutters shall have a minimum fall of 1 in 120. Adequate
number of string supports shall be provided so that there is no deflection even when the
gutter is full. Each joint must have a support. Unless otherwise specified the supports
shall be fabricated of MS brackets. All junctions shall be thoroughly watertight. The
joints may be made by riveting, bolting or soldering. All joints between successive
lengths of gutters shall have an overlap of at least 5 cm. The drop in the overlap shall
always be in the direction of the fall of the gutter. Ends of gutters shall be closed
watertight. Junction with rainwater down comers shall be made fully watertight and
secured.
13.3.4 Soil and drainage pipes
13.3.4.1 Gradients:
If not specified the minimum gradients of soil and drainage pipe line shall be as follows :

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
100 mm nominal dia : 1 in 35

13.3.4.2 Relation with water supply pipe lines :
Unless specifically cleared by the Engineer, under no circumstances shall special

drainage and soil pipes be allowed to come close to water supply pipelines.
13.3.4.3 Laying
Each separate pipe shall be individually set for lines and for level. Where lengths of
sewer or drain pipes are laid in trench, properly painted sight rails shall be fixed across
the trench at a height, equal to length of the boning rod to be used, above the required
invert level of the drain or sewer at the point where the sight is fixed. More sight rails
shall be required at manholes, change of gradient and intermediate positions if the
distance for sighting is more than 16 m apart. The excavation shall be boned in at least
one in every 2 m. The foot of the boning rod shall be set on a block of wood of the
exact thickness of the wall of the pipe. Each pipe shall be separately and accurately
boned between sight rails.
13.3.4.4 Support and protection on pipelines :
All pipes shall be laid with sockets leading uphill. Preferably the pipe shall rest on solid
and even foundations for the full length of the barrel. However, the pipe manufacturer's
instruction as approved by the Engineer shall be followed in the matter of support and
jointing.
Where pipes are not bedded on concrete, the bed shall be left slightly high and carefully
placed so that the pipe barrels rest on undisturbed ground. If anywhere the excavation
has been carried too low packing shall be done in concrete. Where laid on rock or very
hard ground which cannot be easily excavated to a smooth surface, the pipes shall be
laid on a cradle of sand or gravel as desired by the Engineer. PVC or similar pipes shall
be laid directly on stable soil and packed with selected soil.
The minimum support and protection for glazed stoneware pipes shall be as follows :
a) When cover is less than 1 meter and where pipes are unavoidably exposed above
ground surface, the pipes shall be completely encased surrounded with concrete as per
relevant IS.
b) Where pipes are laid on soft soil with the maximum water table laying at the invert of the
pips, the sewer shall be bedded on concrete 1:4:8 mix with 20 mm aggregates down.
c) Where the pipes have to be laid on soft soil with the maximum water table rising above
the invert of the pipe, but below the top of the barrel, the pipe sewer shall be haunched
with concrete of 1:4:8 mix with 20 mm down aggregates.
d) Where maximum water table is likely to rise above the top of the barrel or wherever the
pipe is laid on soft soil the pipe sewers shall be completely encased/surrounded
with 1:4:8 concrete 20 mm down aggregate.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Vitrified clay pipes shall be laid on a bed of 150 mm thick cement concrete (1:3:6)
nominal mix by volume.
Cast iron pipes and concrete pipes may be supported on suitable concrete or brick
support, where specified. The support shall be unyielding and strong enough. Atleast
one support shall be located close to ends. Spacing of intermediate support shall be as
decided by the Engineer. Pipes shall be secured to the supports by approved means.
Anchoring of pipes where necessary shall be achieved by suitable concrete encasing
designed for the expected thrust.
13.3.4.5 Entry into structures
For entry of the pipe lines into any building or structure suitable conduits under the
structure or sleeves shall be used. The conduits and sleeves shall be such as to allow
easy repairs and replacement of the pipes. Where openings or chases are required to
be made in the structure for entry of pipe lines, locations and sizes shall be marked and
checked by the Engineer. After laying of the pipeline the openings and chases shall be
mended.
13.3.4.6 Ducts
Where soil, waste and ventilating pipes are accommodated in ducts, access to cleaning
areas shall be provided. Connecting waste water drain shall be through a gully with
sealed cover to guard against ingress of sewer gas, vermin or backflow
13.3.4.7 Traps and Ventilating pipes
Pipes carrying the sewage from water closets and waste water and overflow water from
baths, wash basins, sinks to drains shall be trapped immediately beneath such fixtures.
Traps shall have minimum water seal of 50 mm and shall be ventilated whenever such
ventilation is necessary to maintain water seal of the trap. Ventilating pipes shall be
carried up vertically from the drain to a height of at least 600 mm above the outer
covering of the roof top of the building or as shown on drawings. All vertical ventilating,
antisyphonage and similar pipe shall be covered on top with a cowl. The cowl shall be
made of C.I. unless desired otherwise by the Engineer.
Connecting to existing sewer lines shall be through a manhole. Manholes shall be
provided with standard covers, usually C.I or as desired by the Engineer. The covers
shall be close fitting so as to prevent gases from coming out.
13.3.4.8 Cutting of pipes
Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed for cutting of pipes where necessary.

Suitable and approved tools shall be used for the cutting so as to leave surface clean
and square to the axis of the pipe.
13.3.4.9 Jointing
Jointing of laid pipes shall be so planned as to avoid completely any movement or

strain to the joints already made. If any joint is suspected to be damaged it shall be
opened out and redone.
All joints between pipes, pipes and fittings and manholes shall be gastight when above
ground and watertight when underground. Method of jointing shall be as per
instructions of the pipe and fitting manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer.
However, in the absence of any instruction available from the manufacturer the

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
methods as detailed hereunder shall be used.
a) Cast Iron Pipes

Socket and spigot pipes shall be jointed by cast lead joints. The spigot shall be
centered in the socket of the next pipe by tightly caulking in sufficient turns of tarred
gasket or hemp yarn to have unfilled half the depth of socket. When the gasket or
hemp yarn has been caulked tightly a jointing shall be placed round the barrel and
tightened against the face of the socket to prevent airlock. Molten lead shall then be
poured into fill the reminder of the socket and caulked with suitable tools right round the
joint to make up for shrinkage of the molten metal on cooling and shall be finished 3 mm
behind the socket face.
Joints in cast iron pipes with special jointing arrangements like "Tyton" joints etc. shall
follow the instructions of the manufacturers.
In special cases if flanged joint are accepted by the Engineer the joints shall be made
leakproof by inserting approved type of rubber gaskets. The bolts shall be secured in
stages to avoid uneven strain.
b) Concrete pipes :
Care shall be taken to place the collar centrally over the joint.
c) Glazed stoneware pipes

Tarred gasket or hemp yarn soaked in thick cement slurry shall first be placed round the
spigot of each pipe and the spigot shall then be placed into the socket of the pipe
previously laid. The pipe shall then be adjusted and fixed in the correct position and
the gasket caulked tightly so as not to fill more than 1/4 of the socket. The reminder of
the socket shall be filled with a stiff mixture of cement mortar of 1:1 proportion. When
the socket is filled, a fillet shall be formed round the joint with a trowel, forming an angle
of 45 degree with the barrel of the pipe. The newly made joints shall be protected, until
set, from sun and rain and shall be covered with damp sacking or other suitable
materials.
d) Vitrified clay pipes :

These shall be made from refractory clay mixed with crushed pottery and stone and
burnt at a high temperature. These shall be hard, compact and glazed to make them
acid resistant and impervious, and shall be obtained from approved manufacturer.
Special care shall be taken in handling these pipes. The pipes shall not be jointed until
the earth has been partly refilled over the portion of the pipe between the joint holes.
Before laying the second pipe, the socket of the first pipe laid shall be thinly painted all
round on the inside with cement slurry (1 part of cement and 2 parts of clean, sharp
sand). A ring of rope yarn (closely twisted hemp or jute) dipped in neat cement paste or
tar or bitumen, shall be inserted in the socket of pipe and driven home with caulking
tools. The rope shall fully encircle the spigot with a slight overlap and shall not occupy
more than one-fourth of the total depth of the socket. Where the spigot end of the pipe
is made for receiving the gasket, it shall be wrapped with two or three turns of tarred
spun, as close to the end as possible, before inserting into the socket. The joint shall
then be completely filled with cement mortar (1:1) which shall have very little water and
levelled to form a splayed fillet at an angel of 45 degrees with the outside pipe. Special
care shall be taken so that any excess mortar etc. left inside the pipe joints is neatly
cleaned off immediately after each joint is made. A semicircular wooden scrapper or a
rubber disc to which a long handle is fixed could be used for this purpose.
e) Lead pipes :
The joints in lead pipes shall be made as wiped solder joint. The minimum and the

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
maximum length of the wiped solder joints shall be 8 cm and 9 cm respectively. The
solders shall generally consist of two parts of lead and one part of tin.
f) Polyethylene pipes :
The joints shall be thermowelded or bolted as per manufacturer's instructions.
g) Jointing cast iron pipes with stoneware pipes :

Where any cast iron soil pipe, ventilating pipe or trap is connected with a stoneware or
semi-vitrified waste pipe or drain communicating with a sewer the beaded spigot end or
such cast iron soil pipe, waste or ventilating pipe or trap shall be inserted into a socket
of such stoneware pipe or drain and the joint made with mortar consisting of one part of
cement and one part of clean sharp sand after placing a ratted gasket or hemp yarn
soaked in neat cement slurry round the joint and inserted in it by means of caulking tool.
h) Jointing stoneware with cast iron pipes :

Where any water closet pan or earthenware trap connected to such a pan is to be
jointed with a cast iron soil pipe, the joint between the stoneware spigot and the cast
iron socket shall always be of a flexible nature. Such joint shall be made with a mixture
of bitumen and chopped asbestos fibre.
13.3.5 Trenches and other excavations
Excavation shall be carried out according to chapter 2, Earthwork.

Width of the trench at the bottom shall be such as to provide 200 mm clearance on
either side of the pipe for facility of laying and jointing.
Excavated material shall be stacked sufficiently away from the edge of the trench and
the side of the spoil bank shall not be allowed to become such as endanger the stability
of the excavation. Spoil may be carted away and used for filling the trench behind the
work.
Turf, top soil or other surface material shall be set aside turf being carefully rolled and
stacked for use in reinstatement. All excavations shall be properly timbered, where
necessary. Efficient arrangements for dewatering during excavation and keeping it dry
till back filling shall be made to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Sumps for dewatering
shall be located away from the pipe layout.
Where the excavation proceeds through roads necessary permissions shall be secured
by the contractor from the appropriate authorities.
Special care shall be taken not to damage underground services, cables etc. These
when exposed shall be kept adequately supported till the trench is backfilled.
The backfilling shall be done only after the pipeline has been tested and approved by
the Engineer. Special care shall be taken under and sides of the pipe for packing with
selected material. At least 300 mm over the pipe shall also be filled with soft earth or
sand.
Consolidation shall be done in 150 mm layers. The surface water shall be prevented
from getting into the filled up trench. Traffic shall not be inconvenienced by heaping up
unduly the backfilling material to compensate future settlement. All settlements shall be
made good regularly to minimize inconvenience or traffic where applicable.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
13.3.6 Installation of fittings & fixtures
13.3.6.1 General
All fitting & fixtures shall be laid out as per drawings in proper line, level and shall be
firmly secured to floors with screws and ditto fix and to walls with wall plugs and screws.
Unless otherwise specified only C.P. Brass screws shall used for fixing sanitary fittings
to wall plugs and floors.
13.3.6.2 European pattern WC
Water closet shall be fixed with floor with ditto fix and screw and soil, vent pipe with
putty.
13.3.6.3 Indian Pattern WC
The water closet pan shall be sunk into the floor and embedded in a cushion of
average 150 mm cement concrete 1:4:8 (1 cement, 4 sand and 8 broken brick ballast of
40 mm size). The concrete shall be left 125 mm below the top level of the pan so as to
allow for flooring and its bed concrete. The joint between the pan and trap shall be
made with cement mortar 1:1 and joint between trap and CI soil and waste pipe to be
made with lead. All the joints shall be leak proof. The WC floor shall slope towards the
pan.
The cast iron cistern, brackets and flush pipe etc. shall be painted with two coats of
approved paint, over a coat of approved paint, over a coat of approved priming.
13.3.6.4 Wash basin and sink
Wash basin and sink shall be fixed to C.I. concealed brackets. The brackets shall be
fixed to teak wood wall plugs with screws.
13.3.6.5 Urinals
The urinal shall be fixed to the walls with C.P. Brass screws fixed to teak wood wall
plugs. Urinal partitions shall be fixed to walls by making chases in walls and grouting
the same in 1:2:4 concrete.
13.3.6.6 Mirror
Fixed type mirror shall be screwed to wall plugs with CP brass screws and shall have a
backing of asbestos or similar material.
Swivel type mirror shall be fixed with C.P. brackets which shall be fixed to wall plugs
with CP brass screws.
13.3.6.7 Soap tray/toilet paper holder
This shall be of flush mounting design and shall be housed in walls by making chases
and grouting the same in cement mortar 1:3. All other fittings shall be fixed with screw
or as per manufacturer's specification.
13.3.6.8 Towel rail

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
This shall be fixed with CP Brass screws which shall be fixed to wall plugs.
13.3.6.9 The gully trap shall be fixed on 100 mm thick bed and encased to the full height of trap (and of
square base of 600 mm) with cement concrete or proportion 1:4:8 with 40 mm broken
stone aggregate. The gully outlet shall be jointed to the branch drain as specified or
13.3.6.10 Masonry chamber for Gully Trap - After fixing and testing gully and branch drain, a brick
masonry chamber 300 mm x 300 mm x 450 mm deep or as specified (internal
dimensions) in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement and 4 sand) shall be built with half brick
thick wall round the gully trap from the top of the concrete. The internal faces of the
chamber shall be finished smooth with 15 mm thick cement plaster (1:4) and neat
cement finish. The outside of brick wall exposed to outside shall be finished with 12 mm
thick cement plaster 1:4. The precast R.C. cover shall be fixed in groove made in 100
mm thick concrete base of proportion 1:2:4 and made water tight by providing suitable
beading in the band.
13.3.7 Septic tank and effluent disposal
13.3.7.1 Septic tank
Septic tank shall consist of the tank itself with inlet and outlets therefrom complete with
all necessary earthwork and backfilling. The details of septic tank shall be as shown on
drawing. This item shall also include ventilating pipe of at least 100 mm dia whose top
shall be provided with a suitable mosquito proof wire mesh and cowl. Ventilating pipe
shall extend to a height of about 2 meters when the septic tank is at least 15 meters
away from the nearest building and to a height of 2 meters above the top of building
when it is located closer than 15 meters. Ventilating pipes can be connected to the
normal soil ventilating system of the building where allowed.
13.3.7.2 Effluent disposal
The effluent from the septic tank shall be disposed by allowing it into an open channel
or a body of water if the concerned authority approved or into a neck pit for absorption
by soil or shall be allowed to be absorbed by soil through open jointed S W pipes laid in
a trench filled with broken bricks.
13.3.7.3 The soak pit shall be complete as shown on drawing. In absence of a detailed drawing
it shall consist of a 900 mm dia pit 1000 mm in depth below the invert level of the inlet
pipe. The pit shall be lined with stone, brick or concrete blocks set in comment mortar
(1:6) and filled with brick bats. Inlet pipe shall be taken down to a depth of 900 mm from
the top as an anti-mosquito measure.
13.3.7.4 Open jointed S W pipes
Minimum dia of the S W pipes shall be 200 mm nominal. The trench for laying the
pipes shall be minimum 600 x 600 mm. The joints of the pipes shall be left unsealed.
13.3.7.5 Commissioning septic tank
After the septic tank has been proved watertight and the sewage system is checked the
tank shall be filled with water to its outlet level before the sewage is let into the tank. It
shall be seeded with well digested sludge obtained from septic tank or sludge digestion

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
tank. In the absence of digested sludge a small quantity of decaying organic matter
such as digested cowdung may be introduced.
13.3.8 Manhole/Inspection chambers
Necessary excavation as required for the manhole shall be done true to dimensions
and levels as shown in the drawing. The manhole chamber shall be built with brick
work in cement mortar 1:4 on a base of 100 mm thick cement concrete 1:4:8 with 40
mm down aggregate or as specified. The concrete bed shall extend beyond the
external face of brick work on all sides by at least 75 mm. The thickness of wall shall be
as indicated. The brick work shall be carefully built in English bond, the jointing faces of
each brick being well buttered with cement mortar before laying so as to ensure a fully
joint.
The inside of the walls shall be plastered with 15 mm thick cement mortar 1:4 and
finished with a floating coat of neat cement and outside shall be plastered with 12 mm
thick C.M. 1:4.
The channels and benching shall be done in cement concrete 1:2:4 with 20 mm down
stone aggregate and finished with 12 mm thick cement plaster in C.M. 1:3. The
channels shall be semicircular in the bottom half and of diameter equal to the sewer.
Above the horizontal diameter and the top edge shall be suitably rounded off. The
Branch channels shall also be similarly constructed with respect to benching but at their
junction with the main channel it shall be suitably rounded of in the direction of flow of
the main channel. The benching at the sides shall be carried up in a slope of 1 in 3.
The branch channels shall be similarly constructed with respect to benching but at their
junction with the main channel, an appropriate fall suitably rounded off in the direction of
the main channel shall be given.
All angles shall be rounded to 75 mm radius with cement mortar 1:4 and shall be
rendered smooth. The internal surfaces shall have a hard impervious finish obtained by
using a steel trowel.
The manhole chamber shall be covered on top with RCC (1:2:4) slab with necessary
reinforcement as per drawings. Unless otherwise specified circular type light duty M.H.
cover with single seal weighing 25 kg. will be provided in each RCC cover.
13.3.9 Testing and acceptance
13.3.9.1 Inspection before installation
All pipes, fittings and fixtures shall be inspected, before delivery at the site to see
whether they conform to accepted standards. The pipes shall again be inspected on
site before laying by sounding to disclose cracks. All defective items shall be clearly
marked and forthwith removed from the site.
13.3.9.2 Testing of pipelines
Comprehensive tests of all pipe lines shall be made by stimulating conditions of use.
The method of actual test shall be decided by the Engineer. All test data shall be
recorded and submitted to the Engineer for review and instruction. The Engineer's
discretion regarding tolerance shall be final.
General guidance for the tests are given below :
13.3.9.3 Smoke Test

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
All soil pipes, waste pipes and vent pipes and all other pipes when above ground shall
be approved gastight by a smoke test conducted under a pressure of 25 mm of water
and maintained for 15 minutes after all trap seals have been filled with water. The
smoke is produced by burning oily waste or tar paper or similar material in the
combustion chamber of a smoke machine. Chemical smokes are not satisfactory.
13.3.9.4 Water test
For pipes other than cast iron

Glazed ware and concrete pipes shall be subjected to a test pressure of at least 1.5 m
head of water at the highest point of the section under tests. The tolerance figure of two
litres per centimeter of diameter per kilometer may be allowed during a period of 10
(ten) minutes. The test shall be carried out by suitably plugging the low end of the drain
and the ends of connections, if any, and filling the system with water. A knuckle bend
shall be temporarily jointed in at the top end and a sufficient length of the vertical pipe
jointed to it so as to provide the required test head or the top end may be plugged with a
connection to a hose ending in a funnel which could be raised or lowered till the
required head is obtained and fixed suitably for observation.
Subsidence of test water may be due to one or more of the following causes :
a) Absorption by pipes and joints.

b) Sweating of pipes or joints.
c) Leakage at joints or from defective pipes.
d) Trapped air.
Allowance shall be made for (a) by adding water until absorption has ceased and after
which the test proper should commence. Any leakage and the defective part of the
work shall be cut and made good.
13.3.9.5 For cast iron pipes
Cast iron sewers and drains shall be tested as for glazedware and concrete pipes. The
drain plug shall be suitably strutted to prevent their being forced out of the pipe during
the test.
13.3.9.5.1 For straightness
i) By inserting at the high end of the sewer or drain a smooth ball of a diameter 13 mm less
than the pipe bore. In the absence of obstruction, such as yarn or mortar projecting
through the joints, the ball will roll down the invert of the pipe and emerge at the lower
end and ;
ii) By means of a mirror at one end of the line and lamp at the other. If the pipe line is
straight, the full circle of light may be observed. The mirror will also indicate obstruction
in the barrel if the pipeline is not straight.
13.3.9.6 Testing septic tank
The septic tank shall be tested for water tightness. It shall be filled up with water and
allowed to soak for 24 hours. Then, it shall be topped up and allowed to stand again
for 24 hours and loss of level recorded. The fall shall not be more than 15 mm.
13.3.9.7 Fixtures etc.,

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
All fixtures and fittings shall be connected by watertight joints. No dripping shall be
accepted.
14.1 Scope of Work
The work comprises supply, laying, testing, commissioning etc., of water supply
sewerage & drainage network as specified.
The work includes the following activities connected with the job.
i) Supply and delivery of all required pipes and other materials.
ii) Earth work in excavation for trenches and pits/ manholes.
iii) Civil works connected with the laying/erection of pipe lines such as making holes in the
walls etc., and repairing them after pipe erection, construction of pipe supports, valve
chambers, concrete manholes, preparation of concrete bedding and covering for pipe
laying wherever required etc.
iv) Laying and jointing of the pipelines as per relevant IS codes.
v) Testing of the pipelines after laying as per IS or any other standard test.
vi) Back filling of the trenches after successful and satisfactory completion of tests for the
pipeline laid.
vii) Disinfection of the complete piping system in the case of water supply.
viii) Commissioning of entire network laid.
ix) Safe custody of types/material/equipment/work and other obligations stated elsewhere

in the specification.
x) Any other activities which are not mentioned above but essential and required.
14.2 Materials
The materials shall conform to part-I of this series.
14.3 Water Supply (External)
14.3.1 Excavation of trenches & pits
Excavation shall be carried out according to Chapter-2, Earthwork.

Before starting earth work in excavation, temporary drainage arrangement shall be
provided to prevent surface water entering the trenches and pits at the cost of
Contractor.
Excavation of trenches and pits for pipelines shall be carried out in shortest possible
time so as to avoid sinking of ground and consequent damage to the pipelines.
Excavation of trenches for pipelines and surface drains, shall be in exact accordance

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
with the plans and section, alignment, levels and gradients as indicated on the drawings
or as directed at site by the Engineer. The final bed must be dressed, levelled or
trimmed to proper gradient and rammed with sprinkling of sand and got passed by the
Engineer before laying blinding concrete of pipes. No excavation shall be made below
the specified levels without written permission of the Engineer. Should any excavation
be taken below the specified level due to carelessness of the Contractor, he will fill in
such excavation at his own expense with lean cement concrete (1:5:10) well rammed in
position.
14.3.2 Back filling
For the purpose of back filling, the depth of the trench shall be considered as divided
into the following three zones from the bottom of the trench to its top.
ZONE-"A" From the bottom of the trenches to the level of the center line of the pipe.
ZONE-"B" From the level of the center line of the pipe to a level 300 mm above the
top.
ZONE-"C" From a level 300 mm above the top to the top of the trench.
Trenches shall not be back filled until the pipe joints have been tested, alignment and
gradient passed by the Engineer but back filling shall be done atleast from the bottom of
the trench to the level of the centerline of the pipe (ZONE "A") leaving 450 mm on
either side of the joints uncovered with earth till testing is completed. These joints
should however be kept covered with mats, gunny, straws etc., to avoid damage to
joints by temperature effects.
While back filling care should be taken to ensure that no damage shelled be done to the
pipeline. All back fill materials shall be free from cinders, ashes, slag, refuse, rubbish,
vegetables or organic material, lumpy or foreign material, boulders, rocks or stones or
other materials which in the opinion of the Engineer is unsuitable or deleterious.
However, materials containing stones upto 20 cm as the greatest dimension may be
used in Zone-"C" unless specified otherwise herein.
Backfilling in Zone-"A" shall be done by hand with sand, fine gravel or other approved
material placed in layers of 80 mm and compacted by tamping. The back filling material
shall be deposited in the trench for its full width of each side of the pipe, fitting and
appurtenances simultaneously.
Backfilling in Zone-"B" shall be done by hand or approved mechanical methods.

Special care being taken to avoid injuring or moving the pipes. The type of back fill
materials to be used and the method of placing and consolidating shall be prescribed by
the Engineer to suit individual locations.
Back filling in Zone-"C" shall be done by hand or approved mechanical methods. The
type of back fill materials and method of filling shall be as prescribed by the Engineer.
Paving and metalling shall be reinstated in as good order as before removal and the
Contractor shall do adequate ramming and watering of under layers to guard against
subsequent settlement.
14.3.3 Custody of pipes
The Contractor shall remain responsible for the safe custody of pipes, special and other
materials supplied by him/issued to him either free or on cost recoverable basis till

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
these are laid installed, tested, back filled etc., and handed over to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall verify the conditions of the pipes, specials etc., at the time of
receipt from sources and shall be responsible for all damages during handling,
transporting, laying, installing, testing etc., and the cost of such damages shall be borne
by the Contractor.
14.3.4 Erection/laying of pipelines
i) Erection of all equipment shall be carried out with highly skilled workers.
ii) The pipelines shall be laid and supported properly and it shall be deemed as a
contractual obligation that the lines are not thrown out of alignment or lifted off during
commissioning and subsequent operation.
14.3.5 Pipeline erection
a) Overhead pipelines
i) Suitable slopes , draining arrangements and air vents/air release valves shall be
provided.
ii) Sliding and fixed supports shall be provided, wherever necessary.
iii) As far as possible joints shall be located at 1/3 span of supports.
b) Underground pipelines
All the underground pipelines shall be laid in accordance with IS : 3114 and the
following shall be included in the scope of work of the Contractor.
14.3.5 Pipe jointing
The type of jointing will be defined in the details working and tender schedule i.e.
whether they should be (i) socket and spigot with molten lead or lead wool joint or (ii)
flanged joint.
14.3.6.1 Socket & spigot joints
a) Molten lead joints

Unless otherwise specified, socket and spigot joints shall be done with molten lead.
The spigot shall be cleaned of the coating, carefully entered in the socket of the
adjacent pipe by one or more laps of white damp spun yarn, sufficient yarn only being
driven into the socket to leave the depth of the lead specified. The proper depth of
each joint shall be tested before running the lead by passing completely round it a
wooden gauge, notched out to the correct depth of lead, the notch being held close up
against the face of the socket. The pipes shall be carefully packed underneath so that
they shall bear properly throughout their whole length.
The lead shall be carefully skinned of all scale when melted in a cast iron pot or patent
melting machine. The joints must be perfectly dug before being run with lead. The
pipes shall again be examined for line and level and the space left in the socket shall
be filled in generally by pouring in melted lead. This may be done best by using proper
loading rings or if these are not available, by wrapping a ring or hamp rope. Covered
with clay round the pipe at the end of the sockets leaving a hole into which lead shall be
poured. For large pipes, it is also necessary to leave one or more air vents around

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
lower half of the joints. The lead shall be rendered thoroughly fluid and each joint shall
be filled at one pouring. If the pipe is too large for the joint to be filled from one ladle,
two or more ladles shall be used. It is to be noted that the lead should be heated to
such a temperature as will ensure that it flows completely around the joint. Overheating
of lead shall be avoided.
After a section of convenient length has been leaded, caulking shall be commenced.
The lead shall be freed from the loading pipe outside the socket of the other pipe with a
flat chisel, and then caulked around 3 separate times, with proper caulking tools of
increasing thickness and a hammer 2 to 3 kg in weight in such a manner as to make the
joints sound and water tight. After being well and evenly set, the joint is to be left flush
neat and even with the socket. The approximate weight of lead and spun yarn for
different size of cast iron pipe socket and spigot joints, as per IS : 3114 are given in the
following Table-I.
TABLE-I
QUANTITY OF LEAD AND SPUN YARN FOR DIFFERENT SIZES OF PIPES
Nominal size Lead/Joint Spun yarn/

of pipe mm kg Joint kg.
80 1.8 0.10
100 2.2 0.18
125 2.6 0.20
150 3.4 0.20
200 5.0 0.30
250 6.1 0.35
300 7.2 0.48
350 8.4 0.60
400 9.5 0.75
450 14.0 0.95
500 15.0 1.00
600 19.0 1.20
700 22.0 1.35
750 25.0 1.45
800 31.5 1.53
900 35.0 1.88
1000 41.0 2.05
1100 46.0 2.40
1200 50.0 2.60
1500 66.5 2.80
b) Lead wool joint

In the event of the Engineer specifying or permitting the use of lead wool the joint shall
be made as follows :-
While hampen spun yarn shall be driven into the socket and thoroughly caulked with
suitable caulking tools. Lead wool shall then be introduced and this caulking shall be
repeated with each turn of lead wool under which the socket is fully within 3 mm and the
wool of the lead wool uncompressed into dense mass. The joint shall then be finally
pressed with finishing tool. The table giving the quantity of lead wool and yarn to be

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
used in different sizes of pipes is given in the following Table-2.
TABLE-2
Nominal Internal Lead Wool Weight Spun Yarn Weight

dia in mm in kg in Kg.
80 1.30 0.17
100 1.70 0.23
150 2.41 0.34
175 2.89 0.37
200 3.37 0.57
225 3.63 0.64
250 4.11 0.74
300 4.82 0.82
350 6.04 1.17
375 6.52 1.25
400 7.00 1.33
450 9.64 1.84
500 10.86 1.99
600 12.79 2.83
750 5.68 3.52
825 17.12 3.88
900 18.80 4.25
1200 28.44 6.01
Note : Higher tolerance may be permitted under special circumstances depending upon
site condition for quality of lead wool and spun yarn.
14.3.6.2 Flanged joints
Flanged joints should be made by painting the facing of the flanged with graphite or red
lead freely. Packing should be of rubber insertion cloth 3 ply and of approved
thickness. The packing should be of full diameter of the flange with proper pipe hole
and bolt holes cut out and even at both the inner and outer edges. All the bolts shall be
tightened up evenly on all sides keeping the longitudinal axes of adjoining pipe in
exactly the same straight line.
The interior of the pipe must be carefully free from all dust and/other foreign matters as
the work proceeds. For this purpose a disc plate or brush sufficiently long to pass two
or more joints from the end of the pipe last laid shall be continuously drawn forward as
the pipes are laid.
The ends of the pipes must be securely protected preferably with wooden plugs during
the process of the work. The pipes laid must not be made receptacles either for tools,
cloth or any other matter during progress of the work.
14.3.7 Fixing specials and fittings

All fittings shall be fixed carefully and the heavy pieces shall be suitably supported at
the time of erection on wooden pieces and after erection on suitable masonry supports.
a) Fixing of sluice valves

The sluice valves to be fixed on the pipeline shall be examined, cleaned and placed in
the position indicated by the Engineer. The valves shall be placed on the pipelines in
valve chambers constructed according to the drawings furnished to the Contractor.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The depth at which the valve is to be laid shall vary where necessary under the orders
in writing of the Engineer. The dimensions of the concrete and masonry shall also vary
where necessary on receipt of written orders from the Engineer. The valves shall be
supported in the valve chamber so that no stress or strain occurs at the flange or other
joints of the valve. The valves shall be carefully protected from lime or other dust by a
suitable covering and the pit itself shall be cleaned of lime mortar and other refuse.
b) Fixing of non-return valves

The non-return valve to the fixed on the delivery line of the pump shall be examined,
cleared and placed in position indicated by the Engineering. The non-return valve shall
be fixed with proper alignment.
c) Fixing of foot valves

The foot valve to be fixed on the suction line of the pump shall be examined, cleaned
and placed in position indicated by the Engineer.
14.3.8 Inspection & testing
a) If required all materials shall be inspected by the Engineer before despatch to site. All
the tests shall be carried out in the manufacturer’s works and necessary test certificates
shall be furnished as proof of such testing. The Contractor shall intimate the Engineer
atleast two weeks in advance for any such inspection/testing. All facilities for
inspection/ testing shall be provided by the Contractor.
b) After completion of erection all pipelines shall be inspected by the representative of the
Contractor and the Engineer. Any discrepancy, defect pointed out during this inspection
shall be made good by the Contractor to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer without
additional cost.
c) All pipes with valve and fittings shall be tested to 1.5 times maximum working pressure.
The pressure should remain constant for a period of 8 hours. All arrangements for
testing shall be done by the Contractor. Any defect found during testing shall be made
good by the Contractor to the entire satisfaction of Engineer and the test shall be
repeated till acceptable results are achieved. Any special tools, instrument or
equipment required for these tests shall be provided by the Contractor for tests only.
d) All oils, lubricants and other consumables required during tests and trials of different
equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor.
14.3.9 Painting
i) All equipment, valves and other exposed steel parts shall be given a cost of red oxide,
zinc chromate or red lead and two coats of final paint according to the colour scheme of
the Purchaser.
ii) All the exposed pipes and fittings shall be painted with two coats of paints of approved
quality.
14.3.10 Commissioning
The system shall be commissioned after all necessary tests have been conducted
successfully. All lubricants, oils, and other consumables required for commissioning of
the system shall be supplied by the Contractor. Commissioning of the equipment to be

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
supplied, if any, by the Owner, shall be carried out by the Contractor under guidance of
the representatives of the supplier of these equipment and Engineer. Any adjustment
and/or changes/rectifications that may be found necessary during commissioning of
these equipment shall be carried out by the Contractor.
14.4 Sewerage & Drainage (External)
14.4.1 Excavation of trenches & pits & excavated materials
Same specification as for "Water Supply" shall be followed in respect of excavation of

trenches and pits.
14.4.2 Stoneware pipelines
14.4.2.1 Back filling
Trenches shall not be back filled until the pipe joints have been tested, alignment and
gradient passed by the Engineer, but back filling shall be done at least for equal depth
of the diameter of the pipe or 300 mm whichever is greater over the pipes leaving 450
mm on either side of the joints uncovered with earth till the testing is completed. These
joints should however be kept covered with mats, gunny bags, straws etc., to avoid
damage to joints by temperature effects.
While back filling care should be taken to ensure that no damage is done to the
pipelines. The first 300 mm of filling material immediately over and around the pipe
should be of soft material free from clods and stones etc. The remainder of the filling
materials shall be watered and rammed in layers not exceeding 250 mm at a time.
Paving and metalling shall be reinstated in as good order as before laying of the
pipelines.
Unless otherwise required by the Engineer, there shall be a minimum cover of 700 mm
over the pipes and at road crossing etc., it shall not be less than 1000 mm.
Unless otherwise specified in the schedule of items the cost of the work involved under
this clause shall be held to be inclusive in the contract rate for supplying and/or laying of
the pipes.
14.4.2.2 Laying of pipes
The laying of the pipelines shall commence only after the levels of the bottom of the
trench at various points have been checked by the Engineer. Cracked pipes whether at
the socket or in the body shall be rejected. All SW pipes shall be fitted together on the
surface of the ground to ensure a proper fit before they are lowered. The bowels
spigots and sockets shall be properly cleaned and brushed, if necessary, then lowered
by hand to the bottom of the trench.
The pipes shall be carefully laid to the alignment, levels and gradients shown on the
plans and sections, and great care shall be taken to prevent, sand, earth or other matter
from entering the pipes during laying. As it is not permitted to rectify errors of grade by
packing up underneath with earth, care should be taken in excavating and slight
scraping, if necessary, done to bring to grade. The pipes between manholes shall be
laid truly in straight lines without vertical or horizontal undulations.
Encasing of the pipes during laying shall be in accordance with IS : 4127 (latest
revision) and shall be done with mass concrete in proportion (1:4:8) to prevent ground
water from entering the pipelines.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
All inverts shall be laid from site rail fixed at the true levels, with proper boning rod. The
sight rails and boning rods shall be provided, fixed and maintained by the Contractor at
his own expense.
The pipes shall be laid, sockets facing up the gradient, beginning at the lower end, and
with the sockets, resting in the socket rest holes out in the trench bottom. Each pipe
shall be laid singly and no pipe shall be laid until the trench has been excavated to its
required depth to a distance of twenty yards in front of the pipes to be laid.
No pipes of any description shall be covered until they have been passed by the
Engineer.
14.4.2.3 Jointing of pipes
In each joint, a gasket of tarred yarn shall be passed round the joint and inserted in it by
means of suitable jointing tools. Strings of white hampen spun yarn shall then be added
and well rammed home. The yarn shall be moistened to avoid its absorbing moisture
from cement mortar.
The yarn should be so placed as to center the spigot of one pipe within the socket of the
other and shall prevent the jointing mortar penetrating inside the pipe where it might set
and interfere with the flow of sewage.
The cement shall be thoroughly mixed with medium sand in the proportion of 1:1 (1
cement : 1 sand) and then just enough water shall be added to make the mix plastic.
On no account, the mortar shall be made soft or sloppy. The mix shall then be carefully
inserted by hand into the joint.
Special care shall be taken for inserting the mortar into the portion of the joint
underneath the pipe. When the cement mortar has been inserted, it shall be punched
or caulked into the joint with wooden caulking tools, and more cement mortar shall be
added until the space of the joint has been filled completely with tightly caulked cement.
No fillet of cement shall be added.

No mortar which is older than 30 minutes shall be permitted.
The inside of each pipe shall be carefully wiped out with a mop or scrapper sufficiently
long to pass two joints from the end of the pipe and any projecting cement shall be
removed.
All pipes entering the manholes should be set in cement mortar 1:3 and a completely
watertight junction effected.
14.4.2.4 Testing of pipes
Testing of pipes shall be done wholly at contractor's expense inclusive of apparatus,

provision of water etc., and/or as per IS : 4127.
After cement has had time to set, the pipes shall be tested in lengths between
manholes in the following 'manner'. In the lowest manhole a plug shall be inserted in
the pipe. The disc in the pipe and at the upper manhole shall be fitted with a filling pipe
with a right angle bend and an air cock. The length of pipe shall then be filled with
water by means of the pipe shall then be filled with water by means of the pipe
connection on the upper disc. The air cock in the upper disc shall be kept open, while
the pipeline is being filled to permit the escape of air.
When the pipes have been filled with water and air excluded, the air cock shall be shut
and water shall be poured into a conical "Filler" attached to the testing and filling pipe of

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
the disc in the upper manhole until water remains in the filler. The testing or filling pipe
shall then be raised and fastened so that the height of the pipe is six feet, which will be
the usual test pressure for stone ware pipe joints.
The test will be for an hour or such longer period as may be set by the Engineer. If the
water level does not fall more than 25 mm in the length of 90 meter, the test may be
considered satisfactory.
If it is found that certain pipe joints are leaking, the water shall be run off and joints
recaulked with cement mortar and the test repeated till it is proved by the Contractor
that the joints are leak-proof.
14.4.2.5 Concrete bedding & cover
Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Quantities, all SW pipes shall be laid on a
bed of cement concrete, space being left under each joint for making the joints. After
successful completion of tests the spaces left shall be covered with cement concrete,
and the pipe shall be covered with cement concrete on either side of slope away
towards the side of the concrete bed. The proportion of cement concrete as well as the
dimensions of concrete bedding and covering shall be as per Schedule of Items and
drawing.
Where sewers have less than 1.2 m cover at places of heavy traffic, these shall be
surrounded with mass concrete if desired by the Engineer.
14.4.3 RCC pipeline
14.4.3.1 Handling & laying of pipes
Reasonable care shall be exercise in loading, transporting and unloading of concrete

pipes. Handling shall be such as to avoid impact. Gradual unloading by inclined plane
or by chain block is recommended.
All pipe sections and connections shall be inspected carefully before being laid. Broken
or defective pipes or connections shall not be used.
If the sides of the trench are not vertical, the toes of side slopes shall end at the top of
the pipe, and practically vertical sided trench shall be dug from these down to the
subgrade.
Trench shall be of sufficient width to provide free working space on each side of the
pipe. The free working space shall be, preferably, not more than one third of the
diameter of the pipe and not less than 15 cm on either side.
Pipes shall be lowered into the trenches carefully. Mechanical appliances may be
used.
Pipes shall be laid true to line and grade as specified. Laying of pipes shall always
proceed upgrade of a slope. Where pipes have spigot the socket joints, the socket
ends shall face upstream. In the case of pipes with joints to be made with loose collars,
the collars shall be slipped on before the next pipe is laid. Adequate and proper
expansion joints shall be provided, wherever necessary.
The sections of the pipe shall be jointed together in such a manner that there shall be
as little unevenness as possible along the inside of the pipe.
In cases where the foundation conditions are unusual such as in the proximity of trees
or poles, under existing or proposed tracks under manholes etc., the pipe shall be
encased in low strength concrete bedding or compacted sand or gravel.
In places where the natural foundation is inadequate, the pipes shall be laid either in a

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
concrete cradle supported on proper foundations or on any other suitably designed

structure.
Pipes laid in trenches in earth shall be bedded evenly and firmly and as far up the
haunches of the pipes as to safely transmit the load expected from the backfill through
the pipe to the bed. This shall be done either by excavating the bottom of the trench to
fit the curve of the pipe or by compacting the earth under the around the curve of the
pipe to form an even bed. Necessary provision shall be made for joints wherever
required.
When the pipe is laid in a trench in rock, hard clay, shale or other hard material and
space below the pipe shall be excavated and replaced with an equalizing bed of
concrete, sand or compacted earth. In no place shall the pipe be laid directly on such
hard material.
Bedding of the pipes in trench shall follow the specifications as per IS : 783.
Trenches shall be kept free from water until the material in the joints has hardened.
When the pipe is closed and the trench liable to be flooded by rain, care shall be taken
to prevent the pipe from floating.
Walking on the completed pipe shall not be permitted until the trench has been back
filled to a height atleast 30 cm over the pipe, except as may be necessary in tamping or
backfilling.
Trenches shall be backfilled immediately after the pipe has been laid, to a depth of 30
cm above the pipe (subject to the condition that the jointing material has hardened).
The backfill material shall be selected and deposited with reference to the future safety
of the pipe. Only suitable soils, clean, free from boulders, large roots, excessive
amounts of sods or other vegetation and free from lumps, shall be used and care shall
be taken where back filling not to injure or disturb the pipe or the joints.
The tamping around the pipe shall be done by hand or other hand operated mechanical
means. The water content of the soil shall be as near to the optimum moisture content
as possible.
Filling of the trench shall be carried on simultaneously on both sides of the pipe in such
a manner that unequal pressure does not occur.
14.4.3 Jointing of pipes
The joints shall be either spigot and socket joint or collar joints. The joints may be rigid
or flexible type. Specification of joints shall follow IS : 783.
In case of rigid joint, the caulking material shall be slightly dampened mix of cement and
sand (1:2), rammed with caulking irons.
Every joint shall be kept wet for about ten days for maturing. The section of the pipeline
laid and jointed shall be covered immediately to protect it from weather effects. A
minimum coat of 10 cm is considered adequate. The joints may be left exposed for
observation.
Expansion joint shall be provided for buried lines at maximum interval of 45 m, but for
exposed pipes, the joint interval shall not exceed 15 m, cast iron or steel collar, and lead
caulking conforming to IS : 782 shall be used for expansion joints. In the case of spigot
and socket joint an adopter piece and a collar for making an expansion joint shall be
provided. Where flexible rubber joints are used, expansion joints need not be provided.
14.4.4 Testing of pipes

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
When testing a pipeline hydraulically the line shall be filled completely with water and
kept filled for a week. In testing pipelines, a seepage allowance of 2.5 litres per
kilometer per hour per centimeter diameter of the pipe shall be permissible. The
pipelines can be tested similar to stoneware pipes.
14.4.5 Manholes
All manholes shall be of the size and type as given in the Schedule and shall be
provided as per drawing or as desired. All the manholes shall be circular in shape. The
bed shall be in cement concrete of Mark-100B (Size of coarse aggregate 40 mm and
down) of 100 mm thickness or as shown in the drawing and shall be projected out 75
mm from the outside face of the wall all round. The working part including channeling,
benching etc., made of P.C.C. shall be of grade-15C. All manholes shall be plastered
inside 20 mm thick in 1:3 cement plaster and finished with a floating coat of neat
cement.
Concrete used for precast RCC cover slabs shall be of grade 20C and shall be
constructed as per drawing.
The top level of manholes shall be generally 100 mm above the surrounding ground
levels or as directed by the Engineer. Channeling inside the manhole shall be done in
smooth bends.
The end of pipe shall be neatly built in and finished in cement mortar 1:3.
Cast iron water sealed manhole cover and frames, 560 mm clear opening and nominal
weight 128 kg shall be provided for each manhole and shall be in accordance with
IS:1726. Manhole covers with double seals shall be provided within compound near the
buildings.
Step irons shall be provided with two coats of bituminous paint and shall be as per
drawing.
In cases where branch pipe sewers enter the manhole or main pipe sewer at a level
more than 1m, from the main sewer, a drop connection shall be provided. The extra
pipe length required for this connection will be paid under item for pipelines. No other
extra payment will be allowed.
All exposed surfaces of cast iron frame and cover shall be painted with two coats of
bituminous painting.
The rate of manholes shall be inclusive of excavation in all kinds of soil, dewatering,
shorting, planking, back filling in layers of 150 mm, watering, consolidating and top
dressing, removal of surplus soil, bricks, masonry, cement concrete work, RCC cover
slabs, CI manhole cover and step iron providing all connections, channels, benching,
painting etc., and is for complete work.
14.4.6 Marker plates
Marker plate indicating the particular service installed shall be provided along the routes
of pipes laid below ground. These shall be of mild steel, with the type of service and
direction of flow painted on it. The markers shall sit firmly in a concrete base and
installed at all corners and turning points. Over straight runs markers shall be spaced at
100 m intervals generally.
15.0 ROAD WORK

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
15.1 General
Road works in general shall be constructed according to the requirements to the various
specifications and codes of practices of the Indian Roads Congress.
Works such as earthwork, masonry, concreting and the like, wherever they occur in
association with construction of roads, shall be governed by the respective specifications
of these series.
15.2 Trenching and Preparation of Subgrade
The surface of the formation of width equal to that of soling coat shall first be cut to a
depth below the proposed finished level equal to the combined depth of soling and
wearing coat, (due allowance being made for consolidation), and dressed parallel to the
finished profile. Any roots of bushes, trees etc., shall be taken out to the full depth and
the cavities thus formed shall be filled up and rammed. The subgrade shall then be
consolidated with a road roller true to proper camber and grade, and surplus earth shall
be disposed off as directed by the Engineer.
15.3 Ash Carpet
Wherever the ground is soft and slushy, ash carpet consisting of common boiler ash
shall be laid to 5 cm thickness over the subgrade and then rolled. In firm ground no ash
carpet is necessary and boulder soiling shall be laid directly over the soling.
15.4 Boulder Soling
Boulders shall be hand packed true to camber and grade and shall be of the thickness
specified. The boulders shall be laid in such a manner that the gap in between them is
reduced to a minimum.
It shall then be rolled with a power roller of not less than 10 tons, so that the boulders are
well locked together and the top surface of the soling is perfectly true to camber and
grade. Any disturbance in grade or camber shall be rectified. The top surface shall then
be blinded with atleast 5 cm of moorum of approved quality or any other approved
material, and rolled wet to obtain proper compaction. The Contractor shall supply
camber board, spirit level, straight edge etc., at site for checking the camber and grade at
any time during the execution of work.
15.5 Kerbs
Concrete or stone kerbs, where shown in drawings, shall be fixed in position after laying
and consolidation of soling. They shall be fixed true to line and level and secured and
position by approved means.
15.6 Water Bound Macadam Surfacing
The construction of water bound macadam shall be carried out according to IRC:19,
"Standard Specification and Code of Practice for Water Bound Macadam".
15.7 Preparation of Base and Shoulders
The subgrade shall be reshaped to the required grade and camber. Where water bound

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
macadam is to be laid over an existing black top surface, 50 mm x 50 mm furrows shall

be cut in the existing surface at 1 m intervals inclined 45 degree to the center line of the
carriageway, before laying of coarse aggregates. Necessary arrangements shall be
made for the lateral confinement of aggregates by constructing shoulders in advance.
15.8 Spreading Coarse Aggregate
The coarse aggregates shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the prepared base in
required quantities from stock piles along the roadside or directly from vehicles. In no
case shall these be dumped in heaps directly on the base. The aggregates shall be
spread to proper profile by using templates placed across the road about 6 mm apart.
Where possible, mechanical devices shall be used to spread the aggregates uniformly.
The water bound macadam layer shall be constructed in layers of not more than 75 mm
thickness. However, the Engineer may permit courses of 100 mm compacted thickness
to be constructed in a single layer. Each layer shall be tested by depth blocks. No
segregation of large or fine particles shall be allowed.
15.9 Rolling
The coarse aggregates spread as described above shall be compacted to full width by
rolling with either three wheel power roller of 6 to 10 tonnes capacity or an equivalent
vibratory roller. The weight of roller shall depend on the type of coarse aggregate.
The rolling shall begin from edges and after the edges have been compacted, progress
gradually towards the center, parallel to the center line of the road, uniformly lapping
each proceeding rear wheel track by one half width. On super elevated portions, rolling
shall commence from the lower edge. Where screenings are to be applied, rolling shall
be discontinued when the aggregates are partially compacted with sufficient voids to
permit application of screenings. Where screenings are not to be applied, as in the case
of crushable aggregates compaction shall be continued until the aggregates are
thoroughly keyed, with no creeping of stones ahead of the roller. Slight sprinkling of
water may be done during rolling, if necessary.
Rolling shall not be done when the subgrade is soft or yielding nor when it causes a
wave like motion in the base course. If irregularities develop during rolling, which exceed
12 mm when tested with a 3m straight edge, the surface shall be loosened and
aggregates added or removed before rolling again. The surface shall be checked by
template for camber. In no case shall screenings be used to make up depressions.
15.10 Application of Screenings
After coarse aggregates have been rolled, screenings to fill the interstices shall be
applied gradually over the surface in thin layers. Dry rolling shall be done when the
screenings are being spread, so that the jarring effect of roller causes them to settle into
the voids of the coarse aggregates. Damp and wet screenings shall not be used and the
spreading, rolling and brooming of screenings shall be taken up on sections which can
be completed within one day's operation.
15.11 Sprinkling and Grouting
After application of screenings, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, swept

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
and rolled. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling operations shall be continued and
additional screenings applied where necessary until the coarse aggregates are well
blended and firmly set and a grout of screenings and water form ahead of the wheels of
the roller.
15.12 Application of Binding Material
After the application of screenings, binding material, where it is required to be used, shall
be applied at a uniform and slow rate in two or more successive thin layers to a thickness
of 2.5 cm. After each application of binding material, the surface shall be copiously
sprinkled with water and the resulting slurry swept in with brooms, so as to fill the voids
properly. This shall be followed by rolling with a 6-10 tonne roller, during which, water
shall be applied to the wheels to wash down the binding material that may get stuck to
them. The spreading of binding material, sprinkling of water, sweeping with brooms and
rolling shall continue until the slurry of binding material and water forms a wave ahead of
the wheels of moving roller.
15.13 Setting and Drying
After final compaction the road shall be allowed to cure overnight. Next morning, hungry
spots shall be filled with screenings or binding material, lightly sprinkled with water and
rolled. No traffic shall be allowed till the macadam sets.
15.14 Surface Evenness
The surface evenness of completed water bound macadam course in longitudinal

direction shall be within 12 mm when tested with a 3 m straight edge and in cross profile
within 8 mm when checked with a template.
15.15 Bituminous Pavements
15.15.1 Bitumen premix carpet
15.15.2 Surface preparation
Waterbound macadam surface on which black topping is to be provided shall be

thoroughly cleaned of dust, loose materials, caked mud and other foreign material with
the help of wire brush, chisel, picks etc. Cleaning shall be such as to expose the stone
metal to a depth of 1 to 2 mm without dislodging the interlock of the metal. All dust and
other materials thus removed shall be thrown away at a suitable place as directed by the
Engineer.
Any potholes, depressions and undulations found after cleaning shall be made good with
premixed chippings, and well rammed.
15.15.3 Tack coat
Just before the application of tack coat, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by gunny
bags.
Bitumen heated to 177 degree to 188 degree 'C' shall be spread on the prepared surface
uniformly at the rate of 1 kg/sqm. by means of sprayers. It shall be applied just ahead of
and keeping pace with, laying of premix carpet.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
15.15.4 Premix carpet
In preparing premix carpet the following method shall be adopted.
Bitumen heated to a temperature of 177 degree 'C' to 188 degree 'C' shall be first mixed
in an asphalt mixer with hot metal chips at the rate of 60 kg/cbm of metal and thoroughly
mixed, till chips are completely coated with bitumen. Sand shall then be added and a
further quantity of hot bitumen at the rate of 110 kg/cbm of sand shall be added to the
mixer and mixed till complete coating of aggregate with bitumen is obtained.
The Premix shall be emptied on to wheel barrows or stretchers and carried to the site of
work. It shall then be spread uniformly on the prepared surface with rakes, to the desired
thickness and camber. When the premix has been laid for a length of 15-20 meters it
shall be rolled. Rolling shall commence from edges and proceed towards the center.
The roller wheels shall be moistened continuously so as to prevent metal chips sticking
to it. After preliminary rolling, all honeycombs shall be filled up with smaller size
precoated chips, and rolled again. Camber and grade shall be checked at every stage to
ensure correctness, and any defect found shall be rectified.
The following quantities of materials shall be used per 100 sqm. of bituminous macadam.
Sl. Description 4cm thick 5 cm thick

No. carpet carpet
1. Slag/ stone chips 4 cbm 4.8 cbm

2. Sand 2 cbm 2.4 cbm
3. Binder for premixing the sand @ 60 240 kg 288 kg
kg/cbm of chips
4. Binder for premixing the chips @ 120 240 kg 288 kg

kg/cbm of sand
5. Binder for tack coat @ 1 kg/sqm of road 100 kg 100 kg

surface
15.15.5 Asphaltic concrete
Asphaltic concrete surface course shall be prepared, laid and finished in accordance with
the Indian Roads Congress "Tentative Specification for 4 cm Asphaltic Concrete Surface
Course", IRC : 29.
15.15.6 Surface evenness
The finished surface of premix carpet and asphaltic concrete shall be tested with a
straight edge 4.5 m long and any irregularity greater than 6 mm shall be corrected.
15.16 Cement Concrete Roads
Cement concrete roads shall be constructed in accordance with IRC : 15, "Standard
Specification and Code of Practice for Construction of Concrete Roads".

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
15.17 Berms
Shoulders and berms shall be prepared as shown on the drawings. Work on making
berms shall not lag more than 100 meters behind the water bound macadam
consolidation. Suitable drains shall be cut on the berms so that the water bound
macadam surface is kept drained till bituminous macadam is laid.
15.18 Kerbs
Kerbs shall be laid and set in place before completing the bituminous or concrete
wearing surface as well as the wearing surface of footpath sitting shall be done in mortar
where so specified with Schedule of Items. They shall be laid and set in such a way as
to obtain straight lines in the finished work, the top surface matching with the finished
surface of footpath.
Where the road edge forms a curve, the kerbs shall follow such curve.
Gaps shall be left as shown in drawings or as may be required to provide for drainage.
15.19 Bridges and Culverts
Bridges and culverts shall be constructed according to the specifications of Indian Roads
Congress. Relevant chapters of earthwork, concrete, masonry etc., of these series shall
apply.
15.20 Boulder Pitching
Wherever specified, boulder pitching shall be provided at the inlet and outlet of pipe
culverts, or for embankments of bridges. The subgrade shall first be dressed to level or
slight slope as indicated. The transverse slope of the pitching shall be made strictly in
accordance with the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
15.21 Scarifying & Dismantling
Where a new carriageway abuts or includes an existing carriageway and the Engineer so
directs, the surface of the latter shall be scarified, adjusted and reshaped to conform with
the existing and new camber or crossfall. Materials from the existing road shall be used
or disposed off as directed by the Engineer.
Where dismantling of the existing road has been specified, the various layers of the road
viz., bituminous macadam, waterbound macadam and soling shall be scarified
separately. Scarifying can be done either by hand picks, or by means of scarifiers fixed
to the roller. When a roller is used for scarifying, crushing of the metal shall be avoided
by moving the metal clear of roller wheels after the scarifier has passed over it. The
loosened material shall then be combed by means of rakes to bring out most of the
larger stone. If necessary, the larger stones thus collected shall be screened to separate
fine particles if any.
The remaining metal shall then be removed and screened to recover reusable metal.
Different grades of metal shall be stacked separately and measured.
15.22 Diversions

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Where the construction of the road or culvert or bridge is in progress, the road shall be
closed to traffic and a suitable diversion shall be provided for traffic by the Contractor, as
The road shall be closed by the erection of barriers and suitable sign boards at both ends
which shall be provided with lights at night. Both during night and during day, one man
shall be posted at each barrier to suitably divert the traffic and to keep the light burning
during the night. night.
16.0 WATERPROOFING TO ROOFS & BASEMENTS & WATERPROOFING PAINTS
16.1 Scope
This chapter deals with different types of waterproofing on roof and different types of
damp proofing treatment in basement.
16.2 Material
The materials shall conform to Part-I.
16.3 General Workmanship
The waterproofing to roofs and basements being specialized works the Contractor shall
get these done by specialized firms/agencies.
16.4 Painting with Hot Bitumen
The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly dried and shall be cleaned, with wire
brushes and cotton or gunny cloth of all loose materials and scales. The surface shall
further be cleaned with a piece of cloth lightly soaked in kerosene oil. Bitumen shall be
brought to the site in its original container and this shall not be removed from site till the
painting job is completed. Before applying the main coatings of hot bitumen paints, one
coat of bituminous primer shall be applied. The number of coats of hot bitumen shall
either two coats or as specified in the Schedule of Items. The bitumen of approved
quality (either of grade 80/100 or 30/40) shall be applied to the surface after heating it to
the manufacturer's specifications. Care shall be taken to see that no blank patches are
left and the quality of bitumen to be spread shall be as specified and shall be to the
satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
16.5 Painting with Bitumen Emulsion
Before applying, the surface shall be cleaned thoroughly. Generally two coats of
Bitumen Emulsion are provided over a coat of emulsion primer. Since the painting is with
emulsion, the surface need not be made dry.
16.6 Waterproofing of Roof
16.6.1 With Mud Phuska
Prior to laying of mud phuska preparation of surface by removing loose materials from
the roof top shall be done. Mud phuska shall be laid in layer of minimum 100mm thk.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
(average) of damped brick consolidated and plastered with 25mm thick mud mortar (soil
shall be cohesive) mixed with bhusa (wheat straw) @10 kg per cum of earth. Brick tiles
of class designation 100 are properly laid over mud phuska. Gaps between tiles are
grouted with 1:3 cement mortar mixed with integral waterproof compound @ 2% by
weight of cement. The surface of the finished roof shall be kept wet for a period of not
less than 7 days. For better result a layer of hot bitumen over the finished roof shall be
done. Care shall be exercised while doing the roof finish work to compact the mud
phuska layer to the maximum density. Refer IS : 2115 – 1980 for application of mud
phuska over flat roof.
16.6.2 With bitumen felt
Prior to laying the insulation, roof gradient shall be checked. If necessary, the roof shall
be regarded by screed to ensure everywhere a run off gradient of not less than 1 in 120.
The screed shall consist of one part cement and four parts medium to coarse sand by
volume. The screed shall be cured for 7 days. The surface shall then be cleaned of all
foreign matter by wire brushing and dusting.
Waterproofing unless specified otherwise in drawings shall be the "heavy treatment type"
with primer coat as described in IS : 1346. The method of laying roofing treatment,
surface finishing with pea gravels, special mode of treatment for drain outlets, projecting
pipes, parapet walls, expansion joints, gutters, timber roofs etc., shall conform to IS :
1346. The number of layers of felts shall be as specified in the drawing or Schedule of
Items. The bonding bituminous material shall be of grade 30/40 and the minimum
quantity of hot bitumen to be applied, shall be 1.2 kg/m2. Unless specified otherwise, the
bituminous felts shall be hessian bases of Type-3 Grade-2. Pea gravel finish may be
substituted by a coat of bituminous aluminium paint, where so specified in the Schedule
of Items.
The cement mortar used for filling the chases shall be of mix 1:4 and the cement
concrete for fillets shall be of the same grade as the roof slab.
Where special surface finish with precast concrete or clay tiles is specified, it shall be in
accordance with the relevant chapter of this series.
16.6.3 With bitumen mastic
The work shall be carried out generally in accordance with IS : 4365 "Code of Practice
for Application of Bitumen Mastic for Waterproofing of Roofs" or according to the
manufacturer's specifications. The work shall be carried out by a firm of specialists in the
trade.
The type of underlay or primer, thickness of application, surface finish etc., shall be as
shown on drawing or described in the Schedule of Items. Melting shall be done in a
mechanical mixer by gradually heating to about 200 degree 'C'. Coarse aggregate
where required shall be added to the hot bitumen and stirred.
Each coat shall be spread evenly and uniformly by means of a float to the required
thickness. Timber gauges shall be used to regulate the thickness. Particular care shall
be taken to tuck the mastic into grooves on vertical surfaces, at joints, around pipes or
other projections and at junction of adjoining bays.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
16.7 Waterproofing for Basement
16.7.1 The specification covers the requirements of waterproofing of basements, tunnels, ducts,
pits, bunkers, etc.
The material used shall be bitumen felt type-3 of grade-2 conforming to IS:1322, together
with the specified bonding material and primer.
Waterproofing shall be provided on the outside of walls and top of the floors and shall be
carried 150 mm above ground level.
The number of layers of bitumen felt to be used for walls and floor unless otherwise
shown in the drawing shall be :
i) For depths upto five meters below ground .. 2 layers.

ii) For depths beyond five meters .. 3 layers.
The method of laying the bitumen felts and workmanship shall be general conform to IS :
1609.
Waterproofing work shall be taken in hand only when the sub-soil water level is at its
lowest the site shall be kept dry by adequate arrangements for pumping out water till the
work has been completed. For this purpose drains shall be formed along the edges of
the excavation but beyond the building line, with suitable collecting sumps. In case of
large excavation areas where it is necessary to dewater under the floor, additional land
drains shall be formed across the excavation, to adequately drain the area. Adequate
arrangements shall be made to prevent the sides of excavation from slipping while the
work is in progress.
The base concrete of mud-mat shall be rendered smooth by a 20 mm thick sand-cement

plaster (6:1). Any sharp corner over which the waterproofing course is to be laid shall be
eased out by means of cement mortar fillets 7.5 cm in radius.
The surface must be dry before the next operation is carried out. Blown bitumen
conforming to IS : 702 shall be applied hot over the prepared surface at the rate of 1.5
kg/m2 for the first layer and for every other subsequent layer(s). The laying of felt over
the bitumen so applied shall always commence on the floor, and shall be carried to the
walls only after treatment of the floor is complete. The minimum overlapping of joints at
sides and ends of felts shall be 10 cm. Joints for subsequent layers of felt shall be
staggered. All joints shall be completely sealed by blow lamp.
A protective flooring of either brick flat in cement mortar 1:3 or 6 cm thick cement
concrete type 150B or a coat of cement plaster (1:3) 4 cm thick shall be constructed over
the waterproofing treatment to prevent damage to the latter during subsequent
construction of the structural floor.
The walls shall be treated in a similar way, the bitumen felts joining at the base with the
projecting felt laid over the mud-mat. The wall surface shall be made smooth, where
necessary with a coat of cement plaster 1:5, the felts laid as for the floor ensuring that the
surface to be treated is dry and then a protective brick wall, 12.5 cm nominal thickness
shall be built in cement mortar 1:6 over the projecting mud-mat, the space between the
wall and felt being grouted with cement slurry. Sufficient care shall be taken to ensure a
perfect bond between the waterproofing on the floor and that on the walls.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
The treatment on the wall shall be carried 150 mm above the surface of ground and
tucked into a grove 6.5 cm. wide and 7.5 cm deep, the chase being filled with cement
mortar (1:4).
Where waterproofing is done to the roof of an underground structure, such as a tunnel, it

shall be done in a similar way. The structural concrete shall be rendered smooth, hot
bitumen and bitumen felts applied in the same way as for the floor and walls, and over
this shall be laid a protective layer of cement concrete mark-100, 7.5 cm thick.
16.7.2 With epoxy based emulsion
Over the mud-mat a 20 mm plaster is to be provided to make the surface even.
On the plastered surface of the mud-mat, three coats of epoxy based leakproof emulsion
shall be applied with reasonable gap between each coat in order to permit sufficient
drying time.
After the painting is over a 20 mm thick plaster is again to be provided before placement
of R.C.C. in order to protect the film surface of the paint from the positive damage which
may occur during the process of rod binding of R.C.C. The protective layer of plaster can
be eliminated but precaution should be taken that during the process of rod binding if
any, damages happen should be immediately rectified by making patch painting only on
the affected portion and as such a complete vigilance is to be kept to rectify the defect.
After the rod binding is over the concreting should be done with high polymer based
chloride and sulphide free cement waterproofing additive/admixtures @ 2% by weight of
cement althrough the floor area and althrough the vertically raised walls of four sides
which shall remain underground upto a depth of 8 meter and above from ground level.
After the concreting and immediately after de-shuttering cleaning of the concrete surface
on the external faces of the walls are to be done and then three coats of epoxy based
leakproof emulsion shall be applied with a reasonable gap between the each coat before
back filling. If the back filling is with hard material again a protective layer of plaster shall
also be applied on the external faces of walls in order to avoid damages on the painted
surface.
If the back filling is with soft sandy or alluvial soil there is no necessity for protective layer
of plastering as mentioned above.
Epoxy based paint can be applied on the wet surface hence there shall be no stoppage
of the normal progress of the project works.
16.8 Surface Application
Waterproofing done by surface application of bitumen based or epoxy based material

shall conform strictly to the recommendations of the manufacturer. The work shall be
carried out by a firm of specialists in the trade.
16.9 Water Proofing by Self Adhesive HDPE Membrane System
16.9.1 The material used shall be HDPE film cross laminated to a bitumen backed compound

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
for self adhesion on concrete/ masonry surface, together with specified primer for
achieving a high level of water proofing.
The entire work shall be executed as an effective and manufacture – such as “Bituthene
– 1000 X-HC” of Grace Construction Products, UK; “SUPERTENE – 5000X” of
STP Ltd., India; or any other make of standard and proven performance.
16.9.2 The following specifications shall be followed (Generally the specification shall be the line
with recommendations of the manufacturer/ supplier of HDPE based waterproofing system.
On Horizontal Surfaces
Make the surface smooth, even and free from loose dust, cement particles standing
water, sharp protrusions and hollows etc. first by cleaning and then by applying two coats
of cement slurry with plaster mix (in specified proportion) of approved quality and
manufacture.
An approved quality bituminous primer shall be applied (as per recommendations of the
manufacture/ supplier of water proofing system ) in two coats.
Apply the approved quality and manufacture self adhesive membrane having cross
laminated HDPE film of 100 micron thickness impregnated in designated bituminous
compound having an overall thickness of 1.5mm (weighing not less than 1.5 kg/m2 ) on
prepared surfaces using approved methodology of application.
RC concrete/ concrete screed shall be laid using an approved make and quality
waterproofing admixture in recommended proportions as per specifications.
On Vertical Surfaces
Make the surface smooth, even and free from loose dust, cement particles standing
water, sharp protrusions and hollows etc. first by cleaning and then by applying two
coats of cement slurry with plaster mix (in specified proportion) of approved quality
and manufacture.
At specified locations a 20mm thick waterproofing plaster in CM 1:3 shall be applied

before next phase of work. The waterproofing admixture shall be mixed at specified
rate.
An approved quality bituminous primer shall be applied (as per recommendations to

the manufacture/ supplier of water proofing system) in two coats.
Apply the approved quality and manufacture self adhesive membrane having
laminated HDPE film of 100 micron thickness impregnated in designated bituminous
compound having an overall thickness of 1.5mm (weighing not less than 1.5 kg/m2)
on prepared surfaces using approved methodology of application.
Construct a protective lining of 230mm thick brick masonry using CM 1:4. Apply two
coats of cement slurry with plaster mix (in specified proportions) of approved quality
and manufacture.
Apply 20mm thick waterproof plaster in CM 1:3 mixed (in recommended mix) with
water-repelling admixture of approved quality and manufacture.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
16.9.2 The sheets used shall be of maximum practicable length and width so as to keep the
number of joints to a minimum. Membrane shall be properly anchored at edges/ ends
by pressing or heating. The joints to have panels of approved length and width
generally as per recommendations of the manufacturer.
16.9.3 The work shall be carried out by a company of specialists, completely in line with the
specifications; product/ manufacturers specification to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-charge.
16.10 Guarantee
For the waterproofing on the roof as well as for underground basements the Contractor
shall give guarantee in writing for the period of 7 to 10 years as specified in the Schedule
of Item. For such guarantee the Contractor shall get guarantee from the manufacturer/
specialized firms and forward the same to the Engineer. However, the Contractor shall
be fully responsible for the serviceability of the waterproofing treatment throughout the
guarantee period and any leakage during that guarantee period shall be stopped by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner and without disturbing working facility of the Owner.
17.0 MISCELLANEOUS
17.1 False Ceiling
17.1.1 Scope
This chapter deals with the specification for various types of false ceiling as listed below :
a) Wooden ceiling (solid wood) and decorative ply.
b) Ceiling with insulating Building Board/ Particle Boards etc.
c) AC Sheet and ply wood ceiling.
d) Plaster of Paris (Gypsum Anhydrous) ceiling over wooden frame.
e) Plaster of Paris (Gypsum Anhydrous) Tiles ceiling.
f) Wooden cover, fillets, beading for ceiling.
17.1.2 General
17.1.2.1 Materials
All materials shall be in accordance with the general specifications of materials, Part-I,
Schedule of Items and as shown in drawings.
Special finishing materials as specified in schedule of item shall be procured from the
specified source and got fixed by employing skilled worker in the trade under direct
supervision of the manufacturer.
17.1.3 Openings for Installation of Light Fittings

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Openings in the ceiling for installation of A/C grills, light fittings shall be provided as per
drawings.
17.1.4 Recess for Pelmet
Recess for the installation of pelmets shall be provided where shown in drawings along
the windows/ doors.
17.1.5 Grills
Grills made of wooden, M.S. Aluminium, PVC or any other material as necessary shall
be provided as indicated in the drawing.
17.1.6 Frame Work
The type of frame to receive the ceiling material may be of wood, aluminium or M.S. as
specified in the schedule of item and as mentioned in the drawing.
17.1.7 Wooden Framing for False Ceiling
Unless otherwise specified in schedule of items the wooden frame work shall be of
following description :-
The frame work of false ceiling shall be of approved quality teak wood scantlings, the
runners shall be 75 x 50mm size and shall be spaced at 1200mm c/c and the battens
shall be 50 x 50mm size spaced at 600mm c/c (approx.) forming a grid of 600 x 600 mm
of any other grid suitable for fixing the false ceiling material and its size. The runner and
battens shall be joined by halving joint using counter sunk 6mm bolt with washer of
required length with soffit of runner and batten in perfect level. The heading joints
between runners shall be made with lap joins using 2 nos. 6mm dia counter sunk bolts
with washer. Heading lap joints between batten shall be made with suitable size screws.
The wall ends of the runner shall be embedded in the wall (50mm deep) and shall be
grunted with 1:2:4 cement concrete. The soffit of frame work shall be made perfectly
horizontal. The teak wood frames shall be treated with 2 coats of wood preservations
treatment before fixing the tiles/ boards as the case may be.
The main runners of frames shall be suspended by M.S. flat 40 x 3 mm/ 12mm dia M.S.
round/ T.S. hangers placed at 1200mm c/c (approx.), the top end of the hanger shall be
hocked to R.C.C. reinforcement of slab or fixed to M.S. flat cleats installed in slab for the
purpose or hooked to purlins of the trusses. The hangers may be twisted or ends of M.S.
round/ T.S. hanger flattened to allow for fixing the same with T.W. frame or M.S. cleats
with bolts of suitable size.
For teak wood framings of shaped ceilings the spacings of frames and hangers levels of
false ceiling etc., shall be required to obtain the shapes/ drops and profile of the ceiling
and to the requirement of ceiling material. The frames shall be locally adjusted to create
openings of required sizes for installation of light fittings, grills of air conditioning system.
17.1.8 Metal Framing
17.1.8.1 Galvanised pressed steel framing system
Galvanised pressed steel framing system for false ceiling shall be procured from reputed

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
manufacturer and installed by specialist agencies under technical guidance of the

manufacturer and strictly as per their specifications. Unless specified otherwise these
shall consist of G.I. rectangular pipes at 900mm c/c suspended by M.S. hanger fixed to
R.C.C. slab with M.S. cleats and cross channels fixed to rectangular pipes at 450mm c/c
as per “Galvolock” system of M/s Eastern Interior Pvt. Ltd. or equivalent. Ceiling
materials shall be fixed to cross channels as per specifications of the manufacturer.
Framing shall be adjusted to provide openings for the light fittings and air-conditioning
grills but these shall be supported independently and not on the framing.
17.1.8.2 Aluminium Grid Ceiling Framing System
Framing for Aluminium grid false ceiling system shall be of reputed manufacturer Bestlok,
Eezilock or equivalent. It shall consist of aluminium main tee and cross tee’s suspended
by adjustable hangers fixed to R.C.C. floor with cleats. The grid may be 600 x 600mm,
1200 x 600mm or as per drawings. Ceiling materials, shall be fixed to frames strictly as
per manufacturers specification.
17.1.9 Fixing of Ceiling
17.1.9.1 Wooden Ceiling with Planks
These shall be of class of wood and thickness as specified in schedule of items. Unless
specified otherwise the width of the ceiling board shall be 100mm to 150mm and shall be
planed true on the exposed surface. The maximum length of the finished board shall be
1800mm. The boards/ strips shall be joined with tongue and grove joints and heading
joints in adjacent board of the same strip shall be square butt type neatly finished. These
joints shall be staggered in alternate strip or line. The boards shall be fixed to T.W.
battens by headless brass pins. Moulding beads at junctions with walls and other
locations as per drawings shall be provided. Necessary opening for installation of light
fittings and A/C grill shall be provided and junctions if required shall be finished with
moulded beads.
17.1.9.2 Decorative Ply Ceiling
These shall be with decorative selected group matched ply to Teak Ply, white cedar ply
or any other approved class of veneer ply in strips, square or rectangular panel matching
the ply of wall panelling, if any, in the same room and of thickness as per schedule of
item and drawings. The strip ply, square/ rectangular panels shall be fixed to T.W. frame
work with panel pins. Moulded beads of same wood as that of ply of matching shade
shall be provided at junctions with walls and as specified in drawings.
Where specific pattern of grains and shade in required the ply cut into shapes as per
design may be pasted on a backing ply with adhesive and such made panels shall be
fixed to framing.
The ceiling shall be checked for line, and levels and exposed surfaces shall be sand
papered and finally polished with colourless polish to achieve matt satin natural finish.
17.1.9.3 Ceiling with insulation board/ particle boards
Insulation boards shall be of approved manufacturer, shade, design and thickness as

specified in schedule of items and drawings. These may be plain, textured, perforated

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
with natural finish or with white finished surface.
The boards shall be cut to suit the panel sizes of ceiling with special tools and by skilled
workmen strictly as per manufacturers specifications. The board shall be fixed to T.W.
frames with brass screws or as per manufacturers recommendation and in case of metal
frames as per recommendations of the manufacturer of the ceiling system. The joints
where exposed shall be of uniform thickness (3mm to 6mm) and pattern as shown in
drawings.
The ceiling shall be checked for line and level and exposed surfaces prepared
appropriately to receive the paint as specified in schedule of item and drawings.
17.2 Expansion and Isolation Joints
17.2.1 General
Expansion and isolation joints in concrete structures shall be provided at specific places
as per details indicated on the drawings. The materials and types of joints shall be as
specified hereinafter. In case of liquid retaining structures, additional precautions shall
be taken to prevent leakage of liquids as may be specified on the drawings or as directed
by the Engineer. All materials are to be procured from reliable manufacturers and must
have the approval of the Engineer. Where it is the responsibility of the Contractor to
supply the material, the Engineer may demand test certificates for the materials and/or
instruct the Contractor to get them tested in an approved-laboratory free of cost to the
Owner. Joints shall be formed true to line, level, shape, dimension and quality as per
drawings and specifications. Prior to approval of the method of forming the joints should
be obtained from the Engineer before starting the work.
17.2.2 Bitumen impregnated board
Bitumen impregnated fibre board of approved manufacturer as per IS: 1838 may be used
as fillers for expansion joints. It must be durable and waterproof. It shall be
compressible and possess a high degree of rebound. The dimensions of the board
should be equal to that of the joint being formed. At the exposed end, the joint shall be
sealed with approved sealing compound to a depth of at least 25 mm after application of
an approved primer. The sealing compound and the primer shall be applied as specified
by the manufacturer.
17.2.3 Joint sealing strips
17.2.3.1 General
Joint sealing strips may be provided at the construction, expansion and isolation joints as
a continuous diaphragm to contain the filler material and/or to exclude passage of water.
The sealing strips will be either metallic like GI, Aluminium or Copper, or Non-metallic
like rubber or PVC
Sealing strips will not have any longitudinal joint and will be procured and installed in
largest practicable lengths having a minimum number of transverse joints. The jointing
procedure shall be as per the manufacturer's recommendations revised if necessary, by
the Engineer. If desired by the Engineer, joints in rubber seals; may have to be
vulcanised.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
17.2.3.2 Metal sealing strips
Metal sealing strips shall be either GI, Aluminium or Copper and formed straight,
U-shaped, Z-shaped or any other shape and of thickness as indicated in the drawing and
schedule of items and/or as instructed by the Engineer.
The transverse joints will be gas welded using brass rods and approved flux. In case it
is found that the joints cannot be made leakproof, longer lap lengths and different method
of brazing which will render it leak proof, will be adopted by the Contractor without any
additional cost to the Owner. The edges shall be neatly crimped and bent to ensure
proper bond with the concrete.
a) GI Strips
GI strips shall be minimum 1.5 mm thick and 150 mm in width unless specified
otherwise. The Strips shall be strong, durable, without any rust or crease. At the
joints, the overlapping should be for a minimum length of 50 mm.
b) Aluminium strips
Aluminium strips shall be minimum 18 SWG thick and 300 mm wide unless
specified otherwise and shall conform to IS: 737. A minimum lap of 50 mm
length is required at the joints.
c) Copper strips
The copper strips shall be minimum 18 SWG in thickness and 300 mm width
unless specified otherwise and shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards.
It should be cleaned thoroughly before use to expose fresh surface, without any
reduction in gauge. A minimum lap of 50 mm in length is required at the joints.
17.2.3.3 Non-metallic sealing strips
These will be normally in Rubber or PVC Rubber or PVC joint seals can be of shape
having any combination of the following features :
a) Plain
b) Central bulb
c) Dumb-bell or flattened ends
d) Ribbed and corrugated wings
e) V-shaped
Transverse joints will be allowed only under unavoidable circumstances and with the
specific approval of the Engineer. The actual size and shape; shall be as shown in
drawings/Schedule of Items and or as directed by the Engineer.
The method of forming these joints, laps etc., shall be as specified by the Manufacturer
and/or as approved by the Engineer taking particular care to match the central bulbs and
the edges accurately.
a) Rubber sealing strips
The minimum thickness of rubber sealing strips shall be 3 mm and the minimum
width 100 mm. The material will be natural rubber and the resistant to corrosion,

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
abrasion and to attacks from the acids, alkalis and chemicals normally
encountered in service. The physical properties will be generally as follows :
Specific Gravity : 1.1 to 1.15
Shore Hardness : 65A to 75A
Tensile Strength : 25 - 30 N/mm2
Maximum Safe Continuous

Temperature : 75 Degree 'C'
Ultimate Elongation : Not less than 350%
b) PVC sealing strips
The minimum thickness of P.V.C sealing strips will be 3 mm and the minimum
width 100 mm. The material should be of good quality Polyvinyl Chloride highly
resistant to tearing, abrasion and corrosion as well as to chemicals likely to
come in contract with during use. The physical properties will generally be as
follows:
Specific Gravity : 1.3 to 1.35
Shore Hardness : 60A to 80A
Tensile Strength : 10 - 15 N/mm2
Maximum Safe Continuous

Temperature : 70 Degree 'C'
Ultimate Elongation : Not less than 275%
17.2.4 Bitumen compound
When directed, the gap in expansion joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and bitumen
compound laid as per manufacturer's specifications. The compound to be used shall be
approved manufacture and shall conform to the requirements of IS: 1834.
17.2.5 Isolation joints
Strong and tough alkathene sheet or equivalent, about 1 mm in thickness and as

approved by the Engineer shall be used in isolation joints. It shall be fixed by an
approved adhesive compound on the cleaned surface of the already set concrete, to
cover it fully. Fresh concrete shall be laid against the sheet, care being taken not to
damage the sheet in any way.
17.3 Rubber Pad
Hard foundation quality rubber pads of required thickness and shapes shall be put below
machine or other foundations as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The rubber shall have a unit weight of 1500 kg/m3, a shore hardness - 65A to 70A and
be of best quality of approved manufacture, durable, capable of absorbing vibration and

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
must be chemically inert in contact with moist or dry earth or any other deleterious
material expected under normal conditions.
17.4.1 Materials
17.4.1.1 Galvanized barbed wire
Barbed wire shall be 2.24 mm dia 2 ply lines with 4 points barbes 7.5 cm apart and shall
be properly galvanized and shall be obtained from the approved manufacturer.
17.4.1.2 Other materials
The specifications of materials, for angle iron posts, concrete works, plasters, if any, and
for other works, shall conform to the requirements as specified in Part-I.
17.4.2 Workmanship
The work shall comprise of the following :
a) Excavation in ground of required dimensions with all sides vertical in any type of
soil including soft rock and removing the soil dressing it neatly.
b) Filling the holes in full with cement concrete 1:3:6 mix, well packed, after erecting
the posts in correct line, level and plumb. In case of any post coming at local
depression, the hole may not be of full depth but the depth of concrete will
always be made 60 cm raising it above ground level with necessary shuttering.
c) Where the angle iron posts are specified in the item these shall be 50 mm x 75
mm x 6 mm unless mentioned otherwise, 10 mm dia holes with saw cuts for
inserting the wires shall be made as per the spacing of barbed wire shown in
drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The foot of the post shall be provided
with base plate for anchorage. The spacing shall be 2.5 m or as per drawing.
After inserting the wire into holes the socket is to be pressed back.
d) Straining bolts are to be provided 15 m apart from each row of wire for
maintaining proper tension in the wire and without any sag or looseness.
e) Posts are to be painted as directed by the Engineer.
f) Complete fenced length will not be measured for payment. Any gate openings
will be deducted. There should not be any misunderstanding that each wire row
will be paid separately.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
PART-III
NORMS OF CEMENT CONSUMPTION

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
1.0 CONCRETE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
. No. Item Cement requirement
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(kg/M3)
1. Concrete Grade M5A 164
M5B 196
2. Concrete Grade M7.5A 194

M7.5B 226
3. Concrete Grade M10A To be mutually agreed based on

M 10B mix design to be prepared by the
M 10C Contractor and approved by the
Engineer
4. Concrete Grade M15B -do-

M15C
M15D

M20C
M20D

M25C
M25D
7. Concrete Grade M30C -do-

M30D
8. Grouting with M15D 359

Concrete Grade M20D 422
M25D 496
M30D 591
9. Grouting with 1:2 (by volume) 718

Cement and sand 1:3 (by volume) 540
mortar
10. Jhama Brick Jelly Concrete 1:71/2 180

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: A,B,C & D mentioned along with grade of concrete correspond to the maximum
size of coarse aggregate being 75 mm, 40 mm, 20 mm, and 10 mm respectively

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
2.0 MASONRY
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(kg/M3)
1. Random rubble masonry with cement sand mortar

(a) 1:4 125.40
(b) 1:5 102.30
(c) 1:6 82.50
2. Brick work in Cement sand mortar

(a) 1:4 95.00
(b) 1:5 77.50
(c) 1:6 62.50
3. Half brick thick brick work in cement sand mortar

(a) 1:3 14.30
(b) 1:4 10.60
(c) 1:5 8.70
4. Half brick thick honey combed brick work in cement mortar

(a) 1:3 8.60
(b) 1:4 6.40
(c) 1:5 5.20
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
3.0 FLOORING
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Kg/m2)
1. (a) 25 mm thick granolithic layer
with 10 mm down graded chips
i) 150 Grade 9.50
ii) 200 Grade 11.50
(b) Extra for each additional

thickness of 5 mm granolithic
layer
i) 150 Grade 1.90
ii) 200 Grade 2.30
2. (a) 100 B Grade PCC rubbed smooth

i) 100 mm thick 26.00
ii) 75 mm thick 19.50
(b) Extra over above for each addi-

tional 10 mm thickness 2.50
3. (a) 75 mm thick with 20 mm stone RCC floor

i) 150 Grade 24.50
ii) 200 Grade 28.00
(b) Extra over above for additional

25 mm thickness
i) 150 Grade 8.10
ii) 200 Grade 9.20
4. Cast in situ terrazzo floor 40 mm thick with

top layer of 50% grey & 50% white cement 13.00
5. Precast terrazzo tile floor 20 mm thick

jointing with 50% white cement and under
layer of 1:3 cement mortar 12 mm thick 11.50
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
4.0 FINISHING
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Kg/m2)
1. Cement plaster 10 mm thick
i) 1:6 3.00
ii) 1:5 3.70
iii) 1:4 4.30
iv) 1:3 5.70
2. Cement plaster 15 mm thick

i) 1:6 4.50
ii) 1:5 5.40
iii) 1:4 6.50
iv) 1:3 8.80
3. Ceiling plaster 6 mm thick

i) 1:4 2.80
ii) 1:3 3.70
4. Flush/Rule/Tuck/Weather Struck/Pointing
i) 1:3 1.50
ii) 1:2 2.00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
PART-IV
DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCE

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
1.0 GENERAL
The materials used in construction shall, besides conforming to the specifications and
standards mentioned, be the best of the existing kinds obtainable. Where a particular
'Brand' or 'Make' of material is specified such 'Brand' or 'Make' of material alone shall be
used.
A high standard of workmanship and accuracy shall be achieved in all sections and parts
of the work. The workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest and the best civil
engineering practice.
The Contractor shall ensure that all sections of the work are carried out with utmost care
to achieve the dimensions shown in drawings or specifications. Where special and close
tolerances are required in any particular section of work, these will be shown in the
drawing and such tolerances shall be met. In the absence of such specific mention in
drawings the following dimensional deviations may be tolerated, provided they do not
impair the appearance or render the particular section of work unacceptable to the
purpose for which it is intended.
Description Permissible tolerance
Building bricks, in length width and height : As per IS 1077
Laterite stone, in length, width & height : Plus or minus 5 mm
Concrete and reinforced concrete pipes
Length : Plus or minus 1%

of standard length
Internal diameter, upto 300mm : Plus or minus 3 mm

Minus 1.5 mm
Internal diameter, upto 400mm : Plus 6 mm Minus 3 mm
Over 400 mm : Plus 1.5% Minus 0.75%
Barrel wall thickness upto 25mm : Plus or minus 1.5mm
Over 25 to 35 mm : Plus or minus 2 mm

Over 35 to 50 mm : Plus or minus 3 mm
Over 50 mm : 1 mm for every 15mm
thickness over 50 mm,
but limited to maximum of
5 mm
Cast iron pipes and fittings
Length : Plus or minus 13mm
Thickness : Plus or minus 1 mm
Internal dia of socket : Plus or minus 3 mm

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Depth of socket : Plus or minus 10mm
External dia, upto 75 mm : Plus or minus 3mm
100 mm to 125 mm : Plus or minus 3.5mm
150 mm : Plus or minus 4mm
Stoneware pipes, in lenth upto 75 cm : Plus or minus 10mm
Upto 90 cm : Plus or minus 15mm
Glazed tiles, length of all 4 sides : Plus or minus 0.8mm
Individual dimensions and thickness : Plus or minus 0.5mm
Metal doors, windows and ventilators

In overall dimension : Plus or minus 1.5 mm
Wooden doors, windows, ventilators : Plus or minus 3 mm

Overall dimension of frame and shutter : Minus 0 mm
All components of shutter except glazing bar
Width : Plus or minus 3mm
Thickness : Plus or minus 1mm
Glazing bar, width & thickness : Plus or minus 1 mm
Earthwork
Finished level of site levelling : Plus or minus 50mm

except for hard rock
Finished level of site levelling : Plus or minus 100mm

except for hard rock
Level of pits, trenches foundations : Plus or minus 50mm
Concrete & Reinforced concrete
Footings, plan dimension : Plus or minus 50 mm\

Minus 12 mm
Eccentricity : 0.02 times the dimension of

footing in the direction limited
to 50 mm
Thickness : Plus or minus 0.05 times the

specified thickness
Foundations

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Diviation of planes and lines of their : Plus or minus 20mm

intersection from vertical or inclination
along full height
Deviation of horizontal plane from : Plus or minus 5mm

horizontal linec for 1m of the plane
in any direction
For the whole plane : Plus or minus 20 mm
Sizes of cross section : Plus or minus 8 mm
Surfaces of inserts to support loads : Plus or minus 5 mm
Length of elements : Plus or minus 20 mm
Equipment foundations
Top level of bolt : Plus 20 minus 0 mm
Top level of foundation before : Minus 30 mm

grouting Plus 0 mm
Axes of anchor bolts in plan : Plus or minus 5 mm
Axis of foundation in either direction : Plus or minus 20 mm
Deviation in vertical line along height : Plus or minus 20 mm
Sizes of pits in plan : Plus or minus 20 mm
Sizes of steps in plan : Plus 0 mm Minus 20 mm
Levels of steps, benches and pits : Plus 0 mm Minus 20 mm
Axes of inserts in plan : Plus or minus 10 mm
Basic dimensions in plan : Plus or minus
Deviation of horizontal plan from horizontal line
For 1 m of plane in any direction : Plus or minus 5 mm
For the whole plane : Plus or minus 20 mm
Local deviations of top surface when : Plus or minus 8 mm

checked with a 2 m long straight edge
Buildings
Surfaces when checked with a : Plus or minus 8 mm

2 m long straight edge

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Sizes of cross section : Plus 8mm Minus 0 mm
Length of elements : Plus or minus 20 mm
Deviation from horizontal plane, for whole : Plus or minus 10 mm

Building
Deviation of planes and lines of their intersection

from vertical or design slope along height
For columns supporting floor beams : Plus or minus 15mm
For framed columns linked with : Plus or minus 10mm

crane girders and beams
Reinforced concrete walls

Length : Plus or minus 20 mm
Flatness of surface when checked : Plus or minus 20 mm

with a 2 m long straight edge
Level of top surface to support : Plus or minus 5mm

assembled elements
Deviation in planes and lines of : Plus or minus 15mm

intersection from vertical
Size of cross section : Plus or minus 8 mm
Placing of reinforcement
Length of bar upto 75 cm long : Plus 3 mm Minus 5 mm
75 - 150 cm long : Plus 5 mm Minus 10 mm
150 - 250 cm long : Plus 6 mm Minus 15 mm
250 cm long : Plus 7 mm Minus 25 mm
Straight bars, all lengths : Plus or minus 25 mm
Spacing of bars : Plus or minus 5 mm
Anchor bolts
Shift in location in plan : Plus or minus 5 mm
Same, when bolts are located : Plus or minus 10 mm

outside of structural columns
Top level : Plus 20 mm Minus 0 mm

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
Threaded length : Plus 30 mm Minus 0 mm

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
For Walls For Pillars
Masonry
Width Plus or minus 10 mm Plus or minus 10 mm

Shift in axes Plus or minus 10 mm ----
Deviation in row from Plus or minus 15 mm ----

Horizontal line for very
10m length
Flatness of surface when Plus or minus 10 mm Plus or minus 5 mm

checked with a 2 m long
straight edge
Deviation in lines Plus or minus 15 mm Plus or minus 15 mm

Separating storeys
Deviation of surface from Plus or minus 10 mm Plus or minus 10 mm

vertical and at angles and
corners for 1 storey
For whole building Plus or minus 30 mm Plus or minus 30 mm
Dimensions of openings Plus 15 mm

for doors, windows etc. Minus 0 mm
Flooring, skirting, dado and plastering
Insitu concrete floor 4 mm
Concrete tile and mosaic, 3 mm
in any 3 m length in large 15 mm

open area
Marble and such superior work,
in any 2 m length 1.5 mm
in any row 3 mm
Plastered surfaces, flatness when checked
with a 2 m long straight 3 mm

edge
Vertical surfaces, upto 10 mm

1-storey Over full heights
Metallic Inserts
On assembled components Plus or minus 3 mm

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
length and width

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATION,
ERECTION AND PAINTING OF STEEL STRUCTURES,
GATES AND MISCELLANEOUS WORK
SPECIFICATION NO.: MEC/S/05/12/01 (Rev-0)

MECON Limited, STRUCTURAL SECTION, STANDARD
Regd. Office: RANCHI NEW DELHI. SPECIFICATION
FABRICATION, ERECTION AND PAINTING MEC/S/05/12/01 (Rev.-0) Page 1 of 29

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
1. General Page - 2
2. Section – 1 Fabrication of steel structures Page – 3
3. Section – 2 Erection of steel structures Page - 11
4. Section - 3 Fabrication and erection of miscellaneous structures Page - 16
5. Section – 4 Painting of Steel Structures Page - 20
LIST OF ANNEXURES
Annexure - A Permissible Deviation in pitch and gauge of holes or bolts of normal accuracy
Annexure – B Tolerance of assembled components of steel structures
Annexure – C Tolerance in erected steel structures
Annexure – D Material of Construction


OF STEEL STRUCTURES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATION, ERECTION AND PAINTING OF

STEEL STRUCTURES AND CHAIN LINK FENCING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 This specification shall apply to general steelwork, chain link fencing and gates in natural gas pipeline
terminals. The structures shall include platforms, crossovers, ladders, staircases, pipe supports, skid
supports, canopies, sheds, stockades/trestles, Boundary wall MS Gate etc.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
SECTION-1: FABRICATION OF STEEL STRUCTURES
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
2.1 The scope of work under fabrication includes, but not limited to, the following:
a) Preparation and supply of material indents, bolt lists, bought out items list, etc.
b) Procurement and collection of all material from stockyards/stores, including loading,

transportation, unloading and stacking and storing on skids or supports.
c) Procurement and collection of all consumables like bolts, nuts, washers, electrodes,
paints, shims, packs, etc., including allowance for spares and wastage.
d) Preparation and submission of modification/rectification sketches, As-Built drawings,

erection drawings, bill of materials, and shipping documents for approval of CLIENT.
e) Cold straightening of section and plates, whenever they are bent and kinked.
f) Fabrication of all steel structural components covered under tender drawings, design
drawings and generally described under the scope of the project.
g) Making arrangements for and conducting tests such as chemical analysis, physical
and mechanical tests on raw materials where specified/as directed by CLIENT.
h) Control Assembly of steel structural components at shop, wherever required.
i) Preparation of steel structural surfaces for painting as provided in the

specifications/drawings.
j) Application for one primer coat of painting at shop, as specified in the design
drawing/specifications.
k) Loading, transportation from fabrication workshop to site of erection and unloading of

all steel structural components/units/assemblies.
l) Preparation of ‘As-built’ drawings.


OF STEEL STRUCTURES
3.0 MATERIALS
3.1 Structural Steel
3.1.1 Structural steel and other related materials for construction shall conform to Annexure-F.
3.1.2 Due to non-availability of specified materials, suitable substitutions may be provided with the
consent of CLIENT. Such substitution shall be incorporated in the “As-built” drawings.
3.1.3 All the items are to be cut as per requirements of the drawing. If joints are to be provided in
any item in order to meet requirements of size and shape, cutting plan showing locations of
joints shall be prepared for consideration of purchaser. Joints provided shall be incorporated
in “As-built” drawings.
3.1.4 Rolling and cutting tolerances shall be as per IS:1852-1985.
3.1.5 Only tested materials shall be used unless use of untested materials for certain secondary
structural members is permitted by CLIENT. If test certificate for the material is not available
from the main producer, the following tests shall be carried out at the discretion of CLIENT:
a) Chemical Composition
b) Mechanical Properties
c) Weldability test
3.2 Bolts and Nuts
3.2.1 Black hexagonal bolts, nuts and lock nuts shall conform to IS:1363-1992.
3.3 Electrodes
3.3.1 Electrodes shall conform to IS:814-1991.
4.0 STORING OF MATERIALS
4.1 Materials shall be stored and stacked properly ensuring that place is properly drained and is
free from dirt. It shall be ensured that no damage is caused due to improper stacking.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
5.0 MATERIAL PREPARATION
5.1 Cut edges shall be finished smooth by grinding or machining wherever necessary. Sufficient
allowance (3mm to 5mm) should be kept in the items incase machining is necessary.
5.2 Cutting may be effected by gas cutting, shearing, cropping or sawing.
5.3 Straightening and bending shall be done in cold condition as far as practicable.
5.4 If required, straightening and bending may be done by application of heat between 900ºC and
1100ºC. Cooling down of the heated item shall be done slowly.
6.0 DRILLING AND PUNCHING OF HOLES
6.1 Drilling and punching of holes for bolts shall be done as per clause no.11.2.4 of IS:800-1984,
unless otherwise specified by CLIENT.
6.2 Drifting of holes for bolts during assembly shall not cause enlargement of holes beyond
permissible limit or damage the metal.
6.3 Holes for bolted connection should match well to permit easy entry of bolts. Gross mismatch
of holes shall be avoided.
6.4 Permissible deviation in holes for mild steel bolts of normal accuracy and high strength bolts
are given in the Annexure-A.
7.0 ASSEMBLY FOR FABRICATION
7.1 Fabrication of all structural steelwork shall be in accordance with IS:800-1984 and in
conformity with various clauses of this Specification, unless otherwise specified in the
drawings.
7.2 Fabrication of structures shall preferably be taken up as per the sequence of erection.
7.3 All erection units shall bear reference drawing no. at a prominent location on the structures for
easy identification at site.
7.4 Fabricated structures shall conform to tolerance as specified in this Specification and in
IS:7215-1974. In case of contradiction, tolerance specified in this Specification shall prevail.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
7.5 All the components of structures shall be free from twist, bend, damage, etc.
7.6 Splice joints shall generally be of full strength butt weld and wherever possible, shall be
located at zones of minimum or substantially lesser stress.
7.7 Splice joints of flange and web should preferably be staggered.
7.8 Where necessary, washers shall be tapered or otherwise suitably shaped to give the heads of
nuts and bolts satisfactory bearing.
7.9 The threaded portion of each bolt shall project through the nut at least by one thread.
7.10 Tolerance of assembled components of structures are given in Annexure-B.
7.11 Permissible deviations from designed (true) geometrical form of the despatch elements shall
be in accordance with IS:7215-1974.
8.0 WELDING
8.1 The Contractor shall work out welding procedure for CLIENT’s approval, considering the
following factors:
i) Specification and thickness of steel.

ii) Specification of electrode or/and base wire.
iii) Welding process (manual arc welding, submerged arc welding).
iv) Type of structures to be welded (thickness of components meeting at a joint).
v) Sequence of welding.
vi) Weather condition.
vii) Inspection procedure to be followed
viii) Design requirements of the joints.
8.2 All metal arc welding shall be carried out as per IS:9595-1980.
8.3 Electrode shall conform to Clause no. 3.3 of this Specification.
8.4 Electrodes shall be stored in a dry place. Electrodes whose coatings are damaged due to
absorption of moisture or due any other reason shall not be used.
8.5 Recommendations of electrode manufacturer are to be strictly followed.


OF STEEL STRUCTURES
8.6 Welding surface shall be smooth, uniform, free from fins, tears notches or any other defect
which may adversely affect welding.
8.7 For multi-run weld deposit, the next run should be done only after thorough removal of slag
and proper cleaning of surface.
8.8 Fillet weld shall have the correct profile with smooth transition into parent metal. Dressing of
welds, if specified, shall be done by such method which does not cause grooving and other
surface defects on the weld or on the parent metal.
8.9 Fillet welds shall not be stopped at corners but shall be returned round them.
8.10 Welding shall not be done under such weather conditions which might adversely affect the
efficiency of the welding.
8.11 Ends of structural members and portions of gussets receiving welding at site shall be left
unpainted.
8.12 Permissible deviation in assembly of weld joints shall be in accordance with Annexure-C.
9.0 INSPECTION & TESTING
9.1 CLIENT/Inspector shall have free access at all times to those parts of Contractor’s or his
Sub-contractor’s works which are concerned with the fabrication of steel works and shall be
afforded all reasonable facilities at all stages of preparation, fabrication and trial assemblies
for satisfying himself that the fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with the provisions
of relevant specification.
9.2 All gauges and templates, tools, apparatus, labour and assistance for checking shall be
supplied by the contractor free of charge. CLIENT/Inspector may, at his discretion, check the
test results obtained at the Contractor’s works, by independent test at the Government Test
House or elsewhere, and should the material so tested be found to be unsatisfactory, the cost
of such test shall be borne by the Contractor.
9.3 Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for stage inspection by CLIENT/Inspector
during the fabrication at shop and incorporate all on-the-spot instructions/ changes conveyed
in writing to the Contractor.
9.4 Material improperly detailed or wrongly fabricated shall be reported to CLIENT/Inspector and
shall be made good as directed. Minor misfits which can be remedied by moderate use of drift
pins, and moderate amount of reaming and slight chipping may be corrected in that manner, if

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
in the opinion CLIENT/Inspector, the strength or appearance of the structure will not be
adversely affected. In the event CLIENT/Inspector directs otherwise, the items will be rejected
and a completely new piece shall be fabricated. The cost of correcting errors shall be to the
account of the Contractor.
9.5 i) CLIENT/Inspector shall have the power:
a) To certify, before any structure is submitted for inspection, that the same is not in
accordance with the contract, owing to the adoption of any unsatisfactory method of
fabrication.
b) To reject any structure as not being in accordance with Specification and drawings.
c) To insist that no structure or parts of the structure once rejected is resubmitted for
inspection/test, except in cases where CLIENT/ Inspector considers the defects as
rectifiable.
ii) If, on rejection of structure by CLIENT/Inspector, the Contractor fails to make

satisfactory progress within the stipulated period, CLIENT/Inspector shall be at liberty
to cancel the contract and fabricate or authorize the fabrication of the structures at
any other place he chooses, at the risk and cost of the Contractor, without prejudice
to any action being taken in addition to terms of General Conditions of Contract.
iii) CLIENT/Inspector’s decision regarding rejection shall be final and binding on the
Contractor.
iv) The Specifications prescribe various tests at specified intervals for ascertaining the
quality of the work done. If the tests prove unsatisfactory, CLIENT/Inspector shall
have liberty to order the Contractor to re-do the work, done in that period and/or to
order such alterations and strengthening that may be necessary at the cost of the
Contractor and the contractor shall be bound to carryout such orders failing which the
rectification/redoing will be done by CLIENT through other agencies and the cost
recovered from the Contractor.
v) Notwithstanding any inspection at the workshop, CLIENT/Inspector shall have the

liberty to reject, without being liable for compensation any fabricated members or
materials brought to site that do not conform to specifications/drawings.
vi) All rejected materials shall be removed from the site of fabrication by the Contractor at
his own cost and within the time stipulated by CLIENT/Inspector.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
10.0 CONTROL IN WELDING
10.1 The extent of quality control in respect of welds for structural elements shall be as follows and
shall be conducted by the contractor at his own cost:
a) Visual Examination - All welds shall be 100% visually inspected to check the
following:
i) Presence of undercuts
ii) Visually identifiable surface cracks in both welds and base metals
iii) Unfilled craters
iv) Improper weld profile and size
v) Excessive reinforcement in weld
vi) Surface porosity
Before inspection, the surface of weld metal shall be cleaned of all slag, spatter matter, scales
etc. by using wire brush or chisel.
b) Dye Penetration Test (DPT) - This shall be carried out for all important
fillet welds and groove welds to check the following :
i) Surface cracks
ii) Surface porosity
Dye Penetration Test shall be carried out in accordance with American National Standard
ASTM E165.
11.0 ACCEPTABLE LIMITS OF DEFECTS IN WELD
11.1 The limits of acceptability of defects detected during visual inspection and Dye Penetration
Test shall be in accordance with clause 8.15.1 American National Standard ANSI/AWS
D1.1-96.
12.0 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS IN WELDS
12.1 In case of detection of defects in welds , the rectification of the same shall be done as follows :
i) All craters in the weld and breaks in the weld run shall be thoroughly filled with weld.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
ii) Undercuts, beyond acceptable limits, shall be repaired with dressing so as to provide
smooth transition of weld to parent metal.
iii) Welds with cracks and also welds with incomplete penetration, porosity, slag inclusion
etc. exceeding permissible limits shall be rectified by removing the length of weld at
the location of such defects plus 10 mm from both ends of defective weld, and shall
be re-welded. Defective weld shall be removed by chipping hammer, gouging torch or
grinding wheel. Care shall be taken not to damage the adjacent material.
13.0 DESPATCH INSTRUCTIONS
Each despatchable structure shall bear mark no. along with reference drawing number at two
prominent locations.
13.1 “As-built” drawings shall be prepared after fabrication is completed to indicate

additions/alterations made during the process of fabrication. (Refer clause 3.1.2 & 3.1.3.)
13.2 Center lines of column flanges and both sides of web shall be punched, preferably at top and
bottom to facilitate alignment after erection.
14.0 COMPLETION DOCUMENTS
14.1 On completion of work, the Contractor shall submit to CLIENT the following documents:
a)The technical documents according to which the work was carried out.
b)Copies of the “As built” drawings showing thereon all additions and alterations made during
fabrication.
c)Manufacturer’s test certificates
d)Certificates/documents on control checking
e)Test of welds
14.2 Inspection Certificates shall be issued to the contractor for the structures found acceptable in
all respects by CLIENT/Inspector.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
SECTION-2: ERECTION OF STEEL STRUCTURES
15.0 SCOPE OF WORK
In addition to provision of erection and transport equipment, the scope of work includes supply
of tools and tackles, consumables, materials, labour and supervision and shall cover the
following:
a) Storing and stacking of all fabricated structural components/units/ assemblies at site

storage yards till the time of erection.
b) Transportation of structures from storage yard to site of erection, including multiple

handling, if required.
c) All minor rectification/modifications such as:
i) Removal of bends, kinks, twists etc. for parts damaged during transportation
and handling.
ii) Reaming of holes which do not register or which are damaged, for use of next
higher size bolt.
iii) Plug welding and re-drilling of holes which do not register and which cannot
be reamed for use of next higher size bolt.
iv) Drilling of holes which are either not drilled at all or are drilled in incorrect
position during fabrication.
d) Fabrication of minor missing items as directed by CLIENT.
e) Verification of the position of embedded anchor bolts and inserts w.r.t. line find levels,
installed by others based on Geodetic Scheme/Bench mark/ Reference co -ordinates
taken by the Contractor.
f) Rectifying at site damaged portions of shop primer by cleaning and application

touch-up paint.
g) Erection of structures including making connections by bolts/welding as per drawing.
h) Alignment of all structures true to line, level plumb and dimensions within specified
limits of tolerance.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
i) Application at site after erection, required number of coats of primer and finishing
paint as per specification and drawing.
j) Rectification of structures as per instructions of the Engineer-Incharge.
16.0 STORING AND HANDLING
16.1 Storage of structures shall be preferably be done in such a manner that erection sequence is
not affected.
16.2 While storing, care shall be taken so that structures do not come in direct contact with the
earth surface and accumulated water.
16.3 Stacking of the structures shall be done in such a way that, erection marks are visible easily
and handling does not become difficult. Wherever required, wooden sleepers/grillage may be
used.
16.4 Handling and storage of materials shall be as per IS:7969-1975, to ensure safety.
17.0 ERECTION
17.1 General
17.1.1 Erection shall be carried out in accordance with IS:800-1984 and other relevant standards
referred to therein.
17.1.2 For safe and accurate erection of structural steelwork, staging, temporary support, false work,
etc. shall be erected as required.
17.1.3 The fabricated materials received at erection site shall be verified with respect of marking on
the key plan/marking plan or shipping list.
17.1.4 Any material found damaged or defective shall be stacked separately and the damaged or
defective portions shall be painted in distinct colour for identification and the same shall be
brought to the notice of CLIENT.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
17.2 Erection Drawings
17.2.1 The approved erection drawings and any approved arrangement drg, specification or
instruction accompanying them shall be followed in erecting structures.
17.3 Erection of Structures
17.3.1 Erection work shall be taken up after receipt of clearance from CLIENT.
17.3.2 For safety requirements during erection, provisions in IS:7205-974, IS:7969-1975 and other
relevant Indian standards shall be followed.
17.3.3 Erection shall be carried out with the help of maximum mechanization possible.
17.3.4 Prior to commencement of erection, all the erection equipment, tools, tackles, ropes, etc. shall
be tested for their load carrying capacity. Such tests may be repeated at intermediate stages
also if considered necessary and frequent visual inspection shall be done of all vulnerable
areas and components to detect damages or distress in the erection equipment, if any.
17.3.5 Following shall be taken care of during erection, whenever necessary:
17.3.5.1 Erected members shall be held securely in place by bolts to take care of dead load, wind load
and erection load.
17.3.5.2 All connections shall achieve free expansion and contraction of structures wherever provided.
17.3.5.3 No final bolting or welding of joints shall be done until the structure has been properly aligned.
17.3.5.4 Instrumental checking of correctness of initial setting out of structures and adjustment of
alignment shall be carried out in sequence and at different stages as required. The final
levelling and alignment shall be carried out immediately after completion of each section.
17.3.5.3 The Contractor shall design, manufacture, erect and provide falsework, staging temporary
support etc. required for safe and accurate erection of structural steelwork and shall be fully
responsible for the adequacy of the same.
17.3.5.4 The Contractor shall also provide facilities such as adequate temporary access ladders,
gangways, tools & tackles, instruments, etc. to CLIENT/Inspector for his inspection at any
stage during erection.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
17.4 Field Connections
17.4.1 Assembly by permanent bolts.
17.4.1.1 The numbers of washers on permanent bolts shall not be more than two (and not less than
one) for the nuts and one for the bolt head.
17.4.1.2 Wooden rams or mallet shall be used in forcing members into position in order to protect the
metal from injury or shock.
17.4.1.3 Where bolting is specified on the drawing, the bolts shall be tightened to the maximum limit.
The threaded portion of the each bolt shall be project through the nut by at least one thread.
Tapered washers shall be provided for all heads and nuts to achieve uniform bearing on
sloping surface.
17.4.1.4 To prevent loosening of nuts, spring washers or lock nuts shall be provided as specified in the
design/shop drawings.
17.4.1.5 All machine-fitted bolts shall be perfectly tight and the ends shall be checked to prevent nuts
from becoming loose. No unfilled holes shall be left in any part of the structures.
17.4.2 Assembly by welding.
17.4.2.1 All field assembly by welding shall be executed in accordance with the requirements for shop
fabrication. Where the steel has been delivered painted, the paint shall be removed before
field welding for a distance of at least 50mm on either side of the joints to be welded.
17.4.2.2 All other requirements in welding shall be in accordance with clauses specified under
Section-1 of this Specification
18.0 ACCEPTANCE STANDARD OF WELDING
18.1 Acceptance standard of welding shall be as specified in Section-1 of this Specification.
19.0 BEDDING AND GROUTING
19.1 Base plates shall be set to elevations shown on the drawings, supported aligned and levelled
using steel wedges and shims or by other approved methods. Plates shall be levelled
properly, positioned and the anchor bolts tightened.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
20.0 PAINTING AFTER ERECTION
20.1 The painting shall be as per painting specification (Section-4) of this Specification) and
instruction given on drawings.
20.2 Site painting shall not be done in frosty or foggy weather or when humidity is such as to cause
condensation on the surface to be painted.
21.0 ERECTION TOLERANCE
Maximum permissible tolerance in erected steel structures shall be as given in Annexure-D.
22.0 ACCEPTANCE OF WORK
22.1 Acceptance of erected steel structures shall be either after completion of erection of all the
structures or in blocks.
22.2 Preliminary Acceptance will be done in the following cases:
i) Any steelwork or part thereof embedded in concrete.
ii) Steel structures which are to be covered in the process of carrying out further work.
23.0 DOCUMENTATION
23.1 The following documents shall be prepared at the time of acceptance of erected structures:
i) Documents showing actual deviations made during execution of erection work and
approval of competent authority.
ii) Documents showing acceptance of embedded structures.
iii) Certificate/documents on control checking and test of materials (if any) and weld.
iv) Data and result of geodetic measurements obtained while checking the erection of
the structures.
23.2 Copies of “As-Built” drawing showing thereon all additions and alternations which took place
between approval of drawing and erection of structures.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
SECTION-3: FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES
24.0 SIDE & ROOF CLADDING OF GALVANISED CORRUGATED STEEL (GCS) SHEETS
The scope of work shall cover:
a) Procurement and supply of GCS sheets of all sizes, flashing and any other
accessories, cutting of sheets wherever required, drilling of holes, all as per
specifications and drawings.
b) Procurement and supply of hook bolts and nuts, stitch bolts and nuts, clips, bitumen
washers, GI diamond or limpet washers.
c) Loading, transportation, unloading and delivery of sheeting material from place of

procurement to erection site.
d) Provision of all tools, tackles, equipment, labour, supervision and services required for
the satisfactory completion of the work specified herein and on the drawings.
e) Erection in position of all GCS sheets at all locations; all work as per specification and
drawings.
24.1 Fixing
24.1.1 All fixing of the roof and side sheeting to purlins and rails shall be by 8mmØ galvanized hook
bolts. All bolts are to pass through the crown of the corrugation and are to be provided with GI
flat washers and bitumen washers of approved quality.
24.1.2 GI seam bolts with GI Flat washers and bitumen washers are to be used for fixing corners,
barge boards and other accessories wherever necessary.
24.1.3 The spacing of GI hook bolts is to be not more than four corrugations apart and GI seam bolts
not more than 600 mm.
24.2 Holing
All holes for sheeting and accessories to be drilled. Punching of holes will not be permissible
under any circumstances.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
24.3 Laps
24.3.1 All roof sheets shall be provided with a minimum end lap of 150 mm along the slope and
minimum side lap of 44 mm measured horizontally. Where four sheets meet at a lap the
corners of two sheets shall be suitably mitered.
24.3.2 Over hang of the sheets on the roof and side cladding shall not exceed 300mm.
24.4 Erection
24.4.1 Erection is to be carried out with the lay of the side laps such that under the prevailing wind,
rain is not driven into the lap.
25.0 CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATE
The scope of work shall cover:
a) Procurement and supply mesh, line wire, stretcher bar, barbed wire (if shown in the
drawings) and other accessories for chain link fencing and gate all as per
specifications and drawings.
b) Loading, transportation, unloading and delivery of material for fencing and gate from
place of procurement to erection site.
c) Provision of all tools, tackles, equipment, labor, supervision and services required for
the satisfactory completion of the work specified herein and on the drawings.
d) Erection in position of the fencing and gate at all locations, all work as per
specification and drawings.
25.1 Erection
25.1.1 The height of barbed wire shall be 2m top of vertical post. Where barbed wire is to be
provided, the height shall be an extra 500mm to the top line of barbed wire attached to the
cranked top.
25.1.2 Straining posts shall be provided at all ends and corners of fences, at changes in direction or
acute variations in levels and at intervals not exceeding 66m on straight lengths of the fence.
Intermediate posts shall be spaced at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
25.1.3 Struts shall be fitted to all straining posts behind the chain link fabric in the direction of the
fence.
25.1.4 There shall be four evenly spaced rows of line wire. The top wire shall be doubled, making five
line wires in all. The bottom wire shall be close to the ground. Each line wire shall be strained
lightly by means of eyebolt strainer at each straining point. The eyebolt strainer shall consist of
bolt with welded eye. The bolt shall be sufficiently threaded and fitted with a nut and washer.
Each line wire shall be secured to each of the intermediate posts by a wire stirrup passing
through holes in the posts and secured to the line wire by three complete turns on each side
of the post. Two-way eyebolt strainers shall have suitable ring nuts fitted after wires have
been strained on one side.
25.1.5 The mesh shall be strained between each pair of straining posts and shall be secured to each
straining post by means of a stretcher bar. One of the top line wires shall be threaded through
the appropriate adjacent rows of mesh, care being taken that no meshes in the rows are by-
passed by the line wire except where deviation is necessary at the straining posts. The
second top line wire shall be strained in front of the fencing. The mesh shall be attached to top
and bottom line wires by wire ties spaced 150mm apart and to other line wires by wire ties
spaced 450mm apart. Bottom row of the mesh shall be threaded to the foundation concrete
using staples spaced 500mm apart and set in concrete to a depth of 150mm. The top of
concrete shall be 50mm above G.L. and 50mm below the fencing.
25.1.6 Four lines of barbed wire shall be provided where specified in the drawing. The wire shall be
attached by eyebolts to the cranked tops of the straining posts. On all the intermediate posts,
they shall be secured to cranked tops with stirrup wires. The barbed wire shall be fitted with
one dropper at the center of each bay and secured to the wires to prevent them from bunching
together.
25.2 Gate
25.2.1 A gate of suitable width shall be provided in the direction of the chain link fabric. The mesh
and barbed wire used for the fabrication of gate shall be identical in all respects to that of
chain link fencing. The door may be single leaf or double leaf depending on the width of the
gate.
25.2.2 The gate frame shall be an angle frame with stiffeners at mid-height and mid-width. The mesh
shall be welded to the gate frame/stiffeners.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
25.2.3 Each leaf of the gate shall be supported on a pivot in the foundation for the straining post and
shall be laterally held at two points, one near the top of the straining post and second near the
middle of the straining post. The free end of each leaf shall be provided with a tower bolt at
the base of the frame. An aldrop shall be provided at the mid-height of the frame.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
SECTION-4: PAINTING OF STEEL STRUCTURES
25.0 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR PAINTING
25.1 General
The steel surface which is to be prepared shall be cleaned of dirt and grease and the heavier
layers of rust shall be removed by grinding prior to actual surface preparation to a specified
grade.
Surface preparation to be followed prior to painting shall be based on the requirement of a

particular painting system as per Clause 27.0.
25.2 Mechanical Cleaning
Manual/ power tool cleaning shall be done as per grade St-2 or St-3, of Swedish Standard
Institution SIS 055900.
i) Grade St-2: Thorough scraping and wire- brushing, machine brushing, grinding etc.
This grade of preparation shall remove loose mill scale, rust and foreign matter.
Finally the surface is to be cleaned with a vacuum cleaner or with clean compressed
air or with clean brush. After preparation, the surface should have a faint metallic
sheen. The appearance shall correspond to the prints designated St-2.
ii) Grade St-3: very thorough scraping and wire brushing, machine brushing, grinding
etc. The surface preparation is same as for grade St-2 but to be done much more
thoroughly. After preparing the surface, it should have a pronounced metallic sheen
and correspond to the prints designated St-3.
25.3 If no grade of surface preparation is specified, Grade St-2 shall be followed.
26.0 PAINTS AND PAINTING
26.1 For use of specific painting system as mentioned in the Specification, the paint manufacturer’s
specification shall prevail.
26.2 General compatibility between primer and finishing paints shall be established through the
paint manufacturer supplying the paints.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
26.3 Before buying the paint in bulk, it is recommended to obtain sample of paint and establish
“Control Area of Painting”. On control area surface preparation and painting shall be carried
out in the presence of manufacturer of paint.
26.4 In order to ensure that the supplied paint meets the stipulation in design drawing/specification,
if required, samples of paint shall be tested in laboratories to establish quality of paint with
respect to viscosity, adhesion/bond of paint in steel surfaces, adhesion/simulated salt spray
test, chemical analysis (percentage of solids by weight), normal wear resistance as
encountered during handling & erection, resistance against exposure to acid fumes, etc.
26.5 Whole quantity of paint for a particular system of paint shall be obtained from the same
manufacturer.
26.6 Thinners, wherever used, shall be as per recommendation of the paint manufacturer.
26.7 Areas which become inaccessible after assembly of structures shall be painted before
assembly, after cleaning the surfaces as specified.
26.8 Wherever shop primer painting is scratched, abraded or damaged, the surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned using emery paper and power driven wire brush wherever warranted, and
touched up with corresponding primer. Touching up paint shall be matched and blended to
eliminate conspicuous marks.
26.9 If more than 50% of the painted surface of an item requires repair, the entire item shall be
mechanically cleaned and new primer coats shall be applied followed by finishing coats as per
painting specification.
All field-welded areas on shop painted item shall be mechanically cleaned (including the weld
area proper, adjacent areas contaminated by weld spatter or fumes and areas where existing
primer. intermediate / finishing paint is burnt). Subsequently, new primer and finishing coats of
paint shall be applied as per painting specification.
26.10 Application of paint shall be by spraying or brushing as per IS:487-1985 and in uniform layers
of 50% overlapping strokes. Painting shall not be done when the temperature is less than 5°C
or relative humidity more than 85%, unless manufacturer’s recommendations permit. Also
painting shall not be done in frosty or foggy weather. During application, paint agitation must
be provided wherever such agitation is recommended by the manufacturer.
26.11 Paint shall be applied at manufacturer’s recommended rates. The number of coats shall be
such that the minimum dry film thickness (DFT) specified is achieved. The dry film thickness

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
of painted surfaces shall be checked with elcometer or measuring gauges to ensure

application of specified DFT.
26.12 All structures shall receive appropriate number of primer and finishing coats in order to
achieve overall DFT as per design drawings/specifications. First coat of primer paint shall be
applied not later than 2-3 hours after preparation of surface, unless specified otherwise.
26.13 The finishing paint as specified shall be of approved colour and quality. The under coat shall
have different tint to distinguish the same from the finishing coat.
26.14 Edges, corners, crevices, depressions, joints and welds shall receive special attention to
ensure that they receive painting coats of the required thickness.
26.15 Parts of surfaces embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of grease, rust, mill scale
etc. and shall be given a protective coat of Portland cement slurry immediately after
fabrication. No paint shall be applied on this part.
26.16 Zinc-rich primer paints, which have been exposed several months before finishing coat is
applied, shall be washed down thoroughly to remove soluble zinc salt deposits. In similar
circumstances, the surfaces of paint based on epoxy resin should be abraded or lightly blast
cleaned to ensure adhesion of next coat.
26.17 Surfaces which cannot be painted but require protection shall be given a coat of rust inhibitive
grease according to IS:958-1975 or equivalent international standard.
27.0 PAINTING SYSTEM
The recommended painting system for general service requirement of steel structures
covering surface preparation, application of primer coats, intermediate coats (if necessary)
and final coats to develop the required minimum dry film thickness on steel surface is
indicated as below
a. Surface preparation: St 2 according to Swedish Standard SIS055900.
b. Primer paint: Two coats of redoxide zinc chromate in phenolic alkyd medium (DFT
25µ/coat) of single pack type with 30-35% solids and covering capacity 12-13
m²/lit/coat.
c. Finishing paint: Two coats of synthetic enamel in alkyd medium with superior quality
water and weather resistant pigments (DFT 25µ/coat) of single pack type with 30-40%
solids and covering capacity 16-18 m²/lit/coat.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
28.0 MEASUREMENTS
28.1 Structural Steel
Structural steelwork will be measured by the metric tonne and as per IS:1200(Part-8)-1993
and IS:1200(Part-9)-1973 subject to provisions outlined below:
a) The calculation of quantities shall be based on unit weights for structural sections as
given in IS Handbooks. In the case of mild steel plates, the calculated weights shall
be based on 78.5 kg/m2/centimeter thick plate. The payments will be made on the
basis of weights of members as per drawings. However, any changes on the above
weights during fabrication erection, payment shall be based on sketches approved by
CLIENT.
b) In the event the IS does not specify any mode of measurement for a particular item of
work, the same shall be measured as per any other relevant international standard or
as directed by CLIENT.
c) The weight of all plates and sections shall be calculated from the approved drawing
using the minimum overall square or rectangular dimensions and theoretical weight,
no deduction being made for skew cuts, holes etc. In the case of plates, other than
gussets, the actual dimensions shown on approved drawings will apply unless
approved otherwise by the purchaser based on cutting diagram of mother plates.
d) The weight of all welding runs, bolt, stanchion base packing, cuttings to waste and
rolling margins, and coatings of paint, will be excluded from the measured weight and
shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the rates for structural steelworks quoted
by the Contractor.
e) Temporary works and all other materials not included in the permanent works shall be
excluded from any measurement for payment.
f) Chain link fencing shall be measured in running meter basis, as specified and shown
on the drawings.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
28.2 GCS & AC Sheets
28.2.1 Asbestos Cement Corrugated sheets for roofing and side cladding shall be measured by the
square meter of net laid area, as specified and shown on the drawings.
28.2.2 No allowance shall be made for wastage, cutouts, overlaps, etc., in the measurement.
28.2.3 The unit rate shall include all fasteners, flashing and fitting such as ridges corners, aprons and
other accessories.
28.2.4 No deduction will be made for openings for area less than a single sheet. Also no extra
payment will be made for making openings.
29.0 ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS
29.1 After completing the erection of a unit or portion thereof, the Contractor shall give a notice in
writing stating that the job is complete in all respects and ready for preliminary
acceptance.The job shall be jointly inspected visually by representatives of Contractor and
CLIENT. All observed defects and omissions as per drawing and specification shall be noted
down.
29.2 The Contractor shall make good all these defects, deficiencies and omissions and shall inform
in advance CLIENT/Inspector for inspection. The Engineer-Incharge shall satisfy himself that
all the defects, deficiencies and omissions noted down during preliminary acceptance have
been rectified.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Annexure-A
Permissible deviations in pitch and gauge of holes for bolts of normal accuracy
Permissible deviations in
Permissible
each group of holes
Hole Diameter deviations in
Sl. No. Description
(mm.) spacing Low
(mm.) Carbon steel alloy
steel
a. Deviation in hole diameter. Upto 17 +1.0 No limits
Above 17 +1.5
b. Ovality (Difference between the biggest Upto 17 +1.0 No limits
and the smallest diameters). Above 17 +1.5
c. Curves exceeding 1mm. and cracks on- - Not permissible
the hole edges.
d. Non-coincidence of holes in separate
details of the assembled unit:
Upto 1mm. - - Upto 50% Upto

50%
Above 1mm. upto 1.5mm. - - Upto 10% Upto
10%
e. Slope of axis. - Upto 30% the No limits No limits
thickness of
unit.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Annexure-B
Tolerance of Assembled Components of Structures
Deviation ( ± ) mm. for elements of structures

Sl. Description of components in
Upto 1m. to 5m. to 10m. to 15m. to 20m. to Over
No. structures
1m. 5m. 10m. 15m. 20m. 25m. 25m.
1.
i. Deviations from the dimensions
assembled.
Length and width of the details cut:
a. Manual gas cutting as per marking 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 - -
b. With shears or with saw as per 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 - -
marking.
c. With shears or with a saw with a 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 - -
stop.
d. Machine gas cutting. 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 - -
ii. Length and width of planed 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 - -
processed on edge planing
machine.
2.
i. Distance between centers of the
end holes:
a. Drilled according to marking. 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 - -
b. Drilled according to a gauge with 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 - -
bushing.
ii. Distance between centers of
adjacent holes:
a. Drilled according to marking or a 1.5 - - - - - -
gauge..
b. Drilled according to a gauge with 0.5 - - - - - -
bushing.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Annexure-C
Tolerances in Erected Steel Structures
Sl. No. Description Tolerance

1. Deviation of structure at foundation top level w.r.t. true axis
a. in longitudinal direction. ± 5mm.
b. In lateral direction. ± 5mm.
2. Deviation in the level of bearing surface of structures at foundation top w.r.t. ± 5mm.
true level.
3. Out of plumb of structure from true vertical axis and measured from structure± H/1000 or ±25mm.
top. Whichever is less.
Note: ‘H’ above is the structure height in mm.
Notes:
1. The tolerances do not apply to steel structures where deviations from true positions are intimately
linked or directly influenced by technological processes. In such cases, tolerances on erected steel
structures shall be as per recommendations of process technologists/equipment suppliers.
2. The observed or calculated values of deviations of steel structures from their true positions shall be
rounded off in accordance with IS:2-1960 for comparison with permissible tolerances specified in
this table. The number of significant places retained in the rounded off value shall be the same as
that specified in this table.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Annexure-D
Material of construction (as applicable)
1.0 Unless otherwise specified in the drawing, all rolled sections and plates shall conform to
Grade-A as per IS: 2062-1992.
2.0 Steel sheets shall conform to IS:1079-1988.
3.0 Steel tubes for structural purposes shall conform to IS: 1161-1979 (Grade YST-240).
4.0 ACC sheets shall be 6mm. thick with corrugation conforming to IS: 459-1992.
5.0 Gutters and down comers shall be of copper bearing steel conforming to IS: 2062-1992.
6.0 Crane rails shall conform to IS: 3443-1980.
7.0 All black hexagonal bolts, nuts and lock nuts shall conform to IS: 1363-1984 and IS: 1364-1983
(for precision and semi-precision hexagonal bolts). Washers shall conform to IS: 1148-1982.
8.0 Covered electrodes for arc welding shall conform to IS: 814-1991. Coding of electrodes shall be
as follows:
a. ER 421 'C' x for mild steel of Grade A and Grade B as per IS: 2062-1992.
b. EB 542 'C' x H3X for:
mild steel of Grade B as per IS: 2062-1992 for dynamically loaded structures (arising out of
crane, vibratory screen, equipment, etc.),
SAIL-MA micro alloyed steel 350 HYA/HYB and
when combined thickness (CT) for steel conforming to IS:2062-1992 exceeds 40mm.
where ‘C’ is the value of current as recommended by the electrode manufacturer.
9.0 Material for chain link fencing shall conform to IS:2721-1979. Mesh for chain link fencing shall
be of 3.15mm hot dip galvanized steel mesh wire, the diameter being measured over zinc
coating. The diameter of mesh wire shall not vary from the specified diameter by more than
0.05mm. The material for mesh wire and line wire of chain link fencing shall conform to
IS:280-1978. Stretcher bar for erection of mesh shall consist of mild steel flats
25mmx4.75mm. The stirrup wire for securing the line wires to the intermediate post shall be of
2.5mm mild steel wire. Hairpin staples for fastening the bottom line wire to the foundation
concrete shall be of 6mmÖ mild steel wire with ends of staples bent outwards for adequate
anchorage. The cleats for eyebolts shall be of mild steel plate 10mm thick.

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
10.0 Material for barbed wire shall conform to IS:278-1978. Line wire for the barbed wire shall be
made from two strands of galvanized steel wire of nominal dia 2.5mm twisted together. Barbs
shall be made of point wire of galvanized steel of nominal dia 2.5mm in such a way that four
points of the barbs are set and located or locked as far as possible at right angles to each
other. Droppers for barbed wire shall be of mild steel flat 25mmx4.75mm with 38mmx4.85mm
half round staples for fastening the barbed wire.
GAIL (India) Limited
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ANTI BUOYANCY MEASURES
(CONCRETE WEIGHT COATING &
SADDLE WEIGHT)
(CIVIL ENGINEERING SECTION)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
E:\BINITA\PROJECTS\2009\GAIL\BNPL\Laying Tender\Vol III\Civil\03 Anti Buoyancy Measures - CWC&SW MEC-S-05-11-03.doc

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
TITLE ANTI BUOYANCY MEASURES SPECIFICATION NO. PAGE 1 OF 14
CONTENTS
1. SCOPE
2. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3. MATERIALS
4. COATING REQUIREMENTS
5. APPLICATION METHOD
6. EQUIPMENT
7. MEASUREMENTS & LOGGING
8. PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
9. APPLICATION OF REINFORCEMENT & CONCRETE COATING
10. TOLERANCES
11. WEIGHING
12. INSPECTION & TESTS
13. COATING OF FIELD WELDS
14. REPAIRS
15. MARKING
16. UNLOADING, TRANSPORT, STORING & HAULING
17. CONCRETE SADDLE WEIGHT

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
CONCRETE WEIGHT COATING MEC/S/05/11/03 REVISION
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers requirements for the materials, workmanship, quality

assurance and handling for anti buoyancy measures covering the external
concrete weight coating of pipelines and concrete saddle weight installation.
1.1 PART-A : EXTERNAL CONCRETE WEIGHT COATING
1.2 This specification shall be read in conjunction with the conditions of all
specifications and documents included in the CONTRACT between COMPANY and
CONTRACTOR.
1.3 CONTRACTOR shall, execute the work in conformity with all standard practices,
specifications, drawing and direction by the COMPANY and provide all services,
labour, supervision, all materials, excluding the materials indicated as COMPANY
supplied materials in the CONTRACT, equipment, appliances etc. required in or
about the execution of the work, whether of a temporary or permanent nature.
1.4 All relevant specifications shall be referred to as per requirement, whether

specifically mentioned or otherwise.
2.1 Reference has been made in this specification to the following codes and
standards :
a) IS:8112 : Indian Standard Specification for

Ordinary Portland Cement.
b) IS:8112 : Indian Standard Specification for high

strength Ordinary Portland Cement.
c) IS:383 : Indian Standard Specification for

Coarse and Fine Aggregates from
Natural Sources for Concrete.
d) IS:2386 (Parts-I : Indian Standard Methods of Test for

to VIII) Aggregates for Concrete.
e) IS: 12330 : Indian standard specification for sulphate

resisting portland cement.

DELHI SECTION
NEW DELHI
f) IS:456 : Indian standard code of practice for plain and

reinforced concrete .
g) IS:3370 : Indian standard Code of practice for

concrete structures for storage of
liquids.
h) IS:1566 : Indian standard for Hard-drawn steel wire

fabric for concrete reinforcement.
i) IS:432 (Part II) : Indian Standard for Mild steel and medium
tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire
for concrete Reinforcement.
In case of conflict between the requirements of specification and that of the

above referred codes standards, the requirements of this specification govern.
2.2 For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions shall hold:
- the words `Shall’ and `Must’ are mandatory;
- the words `Should’, `May’ and `Will’ are non-mandatory advisory
or recommended.
- 3.0’ and `Will’ are non-mandatory advisory or recommended.
3.0 MATERIALS
The CONTRACTOR shall supply all the materials necessary for the performance of
the work.
Materials for concrete coating shall comply with following requirements. All
materials supplied by the CONTRACTOR which in the opinion of COMPANY, do
not comply with the appropriate specifications shall be rejected and immediately
removed from site by CONTRACTOR at his expense.
3.1 Cement
Portland cement (conforming to IS:269), or High Strength Ordinary Portland
Cement (conforming to IS:8112) shall be used. Cement which has hardened or
partially set or has become lumpy shall not be used. Test certificates from the
cement Manufacturer shall be supplied to the COMPANY for all cement delivered
to site.

MECON LIMITED STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL ENGINEERING
DELHI
SECTION
NEW DELHI
3.2 Aggregates
3.2.1 Aggregate shall comply with the requirements of IS:383 and shall be tested in
accordance with IS:2386.
3.2.2 Fine Aggregates

`Fine Aggregates’ shall mean any of the following, as defined in IS:383:
i) Natural sand;
ii) Crushed stone sand;
iii) Crushed gravel sand.
Sand shall be well-graded from fine to coarse in accordance with Table-4 of
IS:383.
3.2.3 Coarse Aggregates

Use of coarse aggregates shall be subject to COMPANY approval.
3.2.4 Aggregates shall be clean and free from injurious amount of salt, alkali, deterious
substances or organic impurities.
3.3 Water
The water shall preferably be clean, fresh and shall be free from non-permissible
amounts of oils, acids, salts, sugar, organic materials or other substances that
may be deleterious to concrete or steel. It shall not contain chlorides, sulphates,
and magnesium salts. Water from doubtful sources shall be tested by the
CONTRACTOR at his expense and approved by COMPANY before use.
3.4 Reinforcement
Concrete coating shall be reinforced by a layer or layers of steel reinforcement

according to the provisions described here.
3.4.1 Reinforcement shall consist of welded steel wire fabric manufactured in flat
sheets or in rolls (ribbon mesh) and shall conform to IS:1566-1995. Wires shall
conform to IS:432, Part-II.
3.4.2 Steel wires shall be galvanized at finished size. The diameter of the wire and
spacing of wires (mesh dimensions) shall be selected according to the following
criteria.
3.4.2.1Wire fabric manufactured in flat sheets shall be 50 x 100mm max. steel wire mesh, 13
gauge 2.5mm thickness.

CIVIL ENGINEERING
DELHI
SECTION
NEW DELHI
3.4.2.2Wire fabric manufactured in rolls (ribbon mesh) shall be 25 x 50mm of 14 gauge(2mm

thickness). The above dimensions will be applied unless otherwise specified by
designs. As a rule wire fabric (sheets) shall be used when concrete coating is
applied by casting method, while ribbon mesh (rolls) shall be used when concrete
coating is applied by guniting method.
4.0 COATING REQUIREMENTS
Pipes shall be concrete coated to a thickness as specified in the drawings and

documents supplied/ approved by the COMPANY. The concrete unit weight shall
be minimum 2245 kg/m3 and the compressive strength shall not be less than 350
kg/cm2 in 28 days and 235 kg/cm2 in 7 days.
CONTRACTOR shall be permitted to select any proportioning of materials to
achieve the specified requirements of concrete density and weight by doing mix
design and trial tests.
5.0 APPLICATION METHOD
Concrete coating shall be applied either using casting or guniting method. Any
alteration or modifications to the methods described in this specification shall be
submitted to the COMPANY for approval. The application method shall however
ensure the basic characteristics of concrete coating in compliance with the
minimum requirements of this specification.
CONTRACTOR shall submit to the COMPANY, prior to commencement of work,

the procedure/ method of application for approval.
Wherever practical, the total thickness of coating shall be applied in a single pass.
6.0 EQUIPMENT
The equipment used for the concrete coating shall be capable of giving a
reasonable degree of uniformity with respect to thickness, density and strength.
The proportioning equipment and procedure shall be of the type to assure
consistently proportioned materials by weight. Concrete shall be mixed in a
mechanical mixer, which shall ensure thorough mixing of all materials. Any
equipment that tends to separate the in gradients shall not be used.

CIVIL ENGINEERING
DELHI
SECTION
NEW DELHI
7.0 MEASUREMENTS & RECORDS
7.1 All measurements as mentioned below shall be taken during the work stages and
clearly recorded in a proper log-book. A special log-book shall be used for
recording tests and trial results. A log-book shall refer to pipe lengths having the
same nominal diameter, and steel wall thickness.
7.2 The following shall be subject to measurement and recording for each pipe
length.
a) Line Pipe
1) Field identification number

2) Mill serial number
3) Length
4) Weight
5) Average outside diameter
b) Concrete Coating
6) Batch identification number

7) Date of placing of concrete coating
8) Average concrete coating thickness
9) "Dry weight" of concrete coated pipe
10) "Unit dry weight" of concrete coated pipe
11) "Negative buoyancy" (unit) of concrete coated pipe
7.3 No concrete placing shall be allowed before items 1 through 5 listed at clause
7.2, have been recorded and approved by COMPANY.
8.0 PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
Before commencement of the work, CONTRACTOR shall perform all tests, either
in laboratory or in field and trials necessary to properly select type of mix which
meets the requirements of section 4.0 of this specification.
8.1 The type of mix, i.e. the correct combination of the cement, aggregates and
water which results in the desired properties of concrete shall be at first
determined. For each mix the following shall be accurately checked and
recorded:

CIVIL ENGINEERING
DELHI
SECTION
NEW DELHI
• proportions and weights of the respective materials used

• the water/ cement ratio;
• the grading of the aggregates.
8.2 Samples shall be prepared and tested in accordance with IS:456 to determine the
dry specific gravity of the concrete.
Test for concrete specific gravity at intermediate time (7 days after coating) shall
be performed.
8.3 When the results of the above tests do not meet the requirements, the mix shall
be modified and concrete samples tested until a proper mix has been
determined.
8.4 The mix so determined, shall then be used for sampling of concrete to be
submitted to compressive strength tests as per IS:456.
8.5 Frequency of sampling for tests for density and compressive strength of concrete
shall be as follows :
`Quantity' of Concrete in the Work(m3) Number of Samples
Upto 25 3
26 to 50 4
51 and above 4 plus one additional sample for each
additional 50m3 or part thereof.
`Quantity' means the volume of concrete to be used.
9.0 APPLICATIONS OF REINFORCEMENT AND CONCRETE COATING
9.1 Two test cubes each per day shall be obtained from batches and tested at the
end of 7 days after coating, for compressive strength and specific gravity.
9.2 The moisture content of the aggregates used shall be such as to maintain a
satisfactory control on the water/ cement ratio of the concrete mix.
To maintain the water/ cement ratio constant at its correct, value, determination
of moisture contents in both fine and coarse (if used) aggregates shall be made
as frequently as possible.

CIVIL ENGINEERING
DELHI
SECTION
NEW DELHI
9.3 Pipe Length Preparation
Prior to placing of reinforcement, the protective coating of each pipe length shall
be carefully inspected visually and by holiday detectors and, if damages are
found, they shall be repaired before start of the work. Foreign materials, if any,
shall be removed from the surface of the protective coating.
9.4. Reinforcement Application
9.4.1 Reinforcement shall be placed around the pipe in such a way as to cover the
whole pipe length or sections to be concrete coated. The reinforcement shall
protrude a minimum 5 cm from the finished concrete coating.
9.4.2 Reinforcement shall rest on PVC spacers forming a "Crown" whose number shall
be such as to avoid any contact with the pipe's protective coating. Spacing
between the two consecutive "crown" centers shall be 500 C/C and a minimum of
4 Nos. shall be provided at each `Crown’ center.
9.4.3 Splices and attachments shall be done by binding with steel wire having 1.5 mm
diameter. Circular and longitudinal joints of wire fabric in sheets shall be lapped
at least for one mesh. When wire fabric in rolls (ribbon mesh) is used, the spiral
lap shall be one mesh while the spliced lap shall be three meshes.
9.4.4 One layer of reinforcement steel shall be provided for concrete thickness less
than 50mm and the same shall be embedded approximately midway in the
concrete coating thickness. For concrete thickness 50mm and above two layers
of reinforcing steel shall be provided. If application method requires more than
one pass concrete, one reinforcement layer for each pass is to be applied
independently from concrete coating thickness.
9.5 Concrete Placing
9.5.1 Concrete shall be placed within a maximum of 30 minutes from the time of
mixing (adding water to mix) and shall be handled in such a way so as to prevent
aggregate segregation and excessive moisture loss. Concrete containers shall
continuously be kept clean and free from hardened or partially hardened
concrete.

CIVIL ENGINEERING
DELHI
SECTION
NEW DELHI
9.5.2 If casting method is used, once reinforcement and mould have been applied
around the pipe, concrete mixture shall be poured through an opening on the
upper section of the same mould. Concrete shall not be deposited from a height
greater than 1 metro. During pouring of concrete, vibrator sets applied inside of
pipe or outside the mould shall vibrate the mix so as to obtain the best possible
compactness.
9.5.3 If guniting method is used, placement of concrete shall be upto the specified
thickness in one continuous course, with allowance for splices of reinforcement
and providing reinforcement in the right location.
9.5.4 No casting shall be interrupted or passes shall be stopped for more than 30
minutes. Before placing fresh concrete against the joint, the contact surfaces
shall be carefully cleaned and wetted to obtain a good bond between the fresh
material and the previously placed material.
9.5.5 Suitable means shall be provided to ensure that the temperature of the concrete,
when placed, does not exceed 32°C.
9.5.6 All pipes shall be kept clean and free from cement concrete and grout either
inside or outside of the uncoated sections.
9.5.7 Bevel protectors shall be kept in place throughout the coating application and
after.
9.5.8 The coating at each end of the pipe shall be beveled to a slope of approximately
two-to-one (2:1). It shall terminate about 50mm short of the end of the corrosion
coating applied on the pipe surface.
9.6 Curing
9.6.1 Immediately after concreting, the exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be
protected during `setting’ from the effects of sunshine, drying winds, rain, etc.
and then after the initial set has taken place, the concrete coating shall be
properly cured. The coated pipe sections shall be handled gently by suitable
means to prevent undue distortion.

CIVIL ENGINEERING
DELHI
SECTION
NEW DELHI
9.6.2 Curing shall be done by sprinkling water at regular intervals on gunny cloth
wound around the concrete coated pipes.
Alternatively, curing may be done by application of an approved curing

membrane using sealing compounds and shall meet the basic requirements of
IS:456 and shall generally be of very high quality of manufacture and approved
make. The material shall be stored, prepared and applied in strict conformity with
the instructions of the manufacturer. The ingredients of any such compound shall
be non-toxic and non-inflammable and shall not react with any ingredient of the
concrete, the reinforcement, the protective coating or pipe. The application of the
curing compound shall take place immediately after the coating is completed and
preferably before the pipe is removed from the concrete coating apparatus. The
surface of the concrete shall be lightly sprayed with water before applying the
curing compound. The membrane curing period shall not be less than 4 days,
during which period the freshly coated pipes shall not be disturbed. The pipe
surface shall be kept wet during daylight hours for seven days after application of
the concrete coating. The concrete coating shall not be allowed to dehydrate.
9.6.3 Before handling and hauling the concrete coated pipes, a check shall be made to
make sure that the concrete coating is properly cured. Stacking and shipment of
the coated pipes shall be initiated only after seven days provided that the
concrete coating suffers no damage.
10.0 TOLERANCES
10.1 CONTRACTOR shall maintain a surface tolerance of 8mm maximum for the
radial distance between high and low areas of the surfaces. The diameter of each
coated pipe shall be obtained at three (3) or more points, spaced at equal
intervals between the end points.
10.2 The acceptance weight tolerance for any single pipe shall be limited to plus five
(5) or minus two (2) percent of the calculated theoretical weight. The theoretical
weight shall be calculated using total weight of the pipe with concrete and
corrosion coating.
11.0 WEIGHING
11.1 The test specimen shall be selected at equal intervals during the course of
production.

CIVIL ENGINEERING
DEHLI
SECTION
NEW DELHI
11.2 CONTRACTOR shall weigh each pipe when dry prior to shipment and 28 days
after placing of concrete and mark the weight with paint on the inside of the
pipe. The weight mark shall be followed with letters "DW" meaning Dry Weight.
12.1 After curing, every length of concrete coated pipe shall be non-destructively
tested by means such as "ringing" to determine if any suspected defects are
present. In case this indicates faulty coating, cores shall be removed from coating
and inspected. When defective coating appears from cores, the concrete coating
shall be removed from the pipe lengths.
12.2 Every length of concrete coated pipe shall be checked to verify insulation
between steel reinforcement and pipe by means of a megger or equivalent
device. To this purpose provisions should be made during placing of concrete
such as to leave at-least a point of exposed steel reinforcement whenever the
latter shall terminate inside of concrete coating.
12.3 During the tests as per clause 12.2 above, and before transporting of concrete
coated pipes, every pipe length shall be visually inspected to detect whether any
damages and/ or defects are present. Possible damages and/ or defects with
their allowable limits are described at following clause 13.0. Repairable concrete
coatings shall be clearly marked while the non-repairable ones shall be removed
from the pipe lengths.
13.0 THE COATING OF FIELD WELDS
13.1 The CONTRACTOR shall coat the uncoated pipe surface at field welds in
accordance with methods approved by COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall submit a
detailed procedure for joint coating for COMPANY's approval.
13.2 The reinforcement for the field welds shall be same as that for line pipe coating
with the same number of layers and the same space between layers as for the
existing coating. The edges of this meeting must be carefully secured with
galvanized wire to the reinforcement extending from the existing coating.
The reinforcement shall not make direct or electrical contact with the pipe.
Synthetic resin spacer blocks may be used to keep the reinforcement free from
the pipe coating as mentioned in cl. 9.4.2.

CIVIL ENGINEERING
DELHI
SECTION
NEW DELHI
The moulds used for applying the concrete coating shall be supplied by the
CONTRACTOR.
13.3 The composition of the concrete shall be the same as that of the concrete
coating of the pipe.
When using moulds, the CONTRACTOR shall prevent air being trapped by
applying mechanical vibrators or by striking the outside of the moulds with sticks.
13.4 If the moulds remains around the pipe, e.g. in the case of submerged pipes
floated into position, the CONTRACTOR shall take appropriate measures to
prevent too much water entering the mould. This can be achieved by clamping
strips of burlap between the ends of the mould and the existing concrete coating.
After the mould has been filled with concrete the filling opening must also be
closed off by clamping a strip on burlap under the sealing cover.
14.0 REPAIRS
The following are repairs that will be permitted to coating due to unavoidable
damage in handling and in storage (This applies only to concrete that has set).
14.1 Spalling due to compression or shearing caused by impact against other objects.
Spalling is defined as damage which causes a loss in concrete of more than 25
percent of the total thickness of the coating at the point of damage.
14.2 Damage due to spalling of a local area shall be repaired by removing loose
concrete and exposing the reinforcing steel throughout the damaged area. Edges
of the spalled area shall be undercut so as to provide a key lock for the repair
material. A stiff mixture of cement, water and aggregate shall be trowelled into
and through the reinforcement and built up until the surface is level with the
coating around the repair. The pipe shall then be carefully laid with the repaired
area at the top and shall be moist cured for a minimum of thirty six (36) hours
before further handling.

CIVIL ENGINEERING
DELHI
SECTION
NEW DELHI
14.3 Should the damaged area be more than 0.3m2, coating shall be removed around
the entire damaged area. A repair shall be made by satisfactorily restoring the
reinforcement, forming the area with a metal form and pouring a complete
replacement of materials similar to that from which the coating was made. The
mixture shall be one (1) part of cement to three (3) parts of aggregate and the
necessary water to produce a slump not to exceed 100mm. The resulting coating
shall be equal in weight, density, uniformity, thickness, strength and
characteristics to the originally applied coating. The pipe shall then be carefully
laid in a position where it shall be moist cured for a minimum of 36 hours before
further handling.
15.0 MARKING
15.1 Every concrete coated pipe length shall be clearly marked by a suitable type of
paint (i.e. red and/ or white lead paint). Markings out of concrete coating shall be
made inside of pipe close to bevel end, in such a way that the area involved by
welding operations is not affected by paint.
15.2 For each concrete coated pipe length, at one of the two ends, the field
identification number and the date of concrete placing shall be marked, while the
dry as well as the net weight along with number of days after coating shall be
marked at the other end.
16.0 UNLOADING, TRANSPORT, STORING AND HAULING
16.1 Once the pipe sections have been taken on charge, the CONTRACTOR,
complying with provisions of the CONTRACT, shall execute their transport
together with other material, either supplied by him or by the COMPANY, from
the site of receipt to the coating yard and after concrete coating completion and
acceptance, to delivery point at laying field or storage areas as previously
established providing each time the necessary storage.
16.2 Materials other than pipes and which are susceptible of deteriorating or suffering
from damages especially due to humidity or other adverse weather conditions,
shall be suitably stored and protected.
16.3 During loading, transport, unloading and hauling of inert aggregates, any contact
and mixing with mud, earth, grease and any other foreign material shall be
carefully avoided. Precautions shall be taken to prevent contamination, to
maintain the cleanliness and against effects of hot or cold weather.

CIVIL ENGINEERING
DELHI
SECTION
NEW DELHI

CONCRETE SADDLE WEIGHT
16.4 During the operations of loading, unloading and stock-piling, the pipe sections
shall be handled in such a way so as to avoid dents, cuts, cracks and other
damages especially at beveled ends or damages to protective and/ or concrete
coating.
16.5 Stacks shall consist of a limited number of layers such that the pressure exercised
by the pipes own weight does not cause damages to coating. Stacking with more
number of layers shall be agreed upon with the COMPANY provided that each
pipe section is separated by means of spacers suitably spaced so as to avoid
stresses and compressed points of contact on the coated surfaces.
17.0 PART-B : CONCRETE SADDLE WEIGHT
17.1 This specification deals with the work of supply, precasting, and placement of
concrete saddle weights of specified design and construction. Refer Standard
Drawing No. MEC/05/S/11/SK-03, Rev-0 Sheet 15 of 15)
17.2 This specification shall be read in conjunction with the conditions of all
specifications and documents included in the CONTRACT between COMPANY and
CONTRACTOR.
17.3 CONTRACTOR shall, execute the work in conformity with all standard practices,
specifications, drawing and direction by the COMPANY and provide all services,
labour, supervision, all materials, excluding the materials indicated as COMPANY
supplied materials in the CONTRACT, equipment, appliances etc. required in or
about the execution of the work, whether of a temporary or permanent nature.
17.4 All relevant specifications shall be referred to as per requirement, whether

specifically mentioned or otherwise. Reference may generally be made to the cl.
2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS (PART-A) of this document.
17.5 For materials and workmanship the reference shall be made to respective items
as per specification no. MEC/S/05/11/01.

ELECTRICAL & INSTRUMENTATION SECTION
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
SPECIFICATION
FOR
INSTALLATION OF INSTRUMENTS
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
INSTRUMENTATION SECTION INSTALLATION OF
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
SPECIFICATION NO. : MEC/S/05/26/01 REV-0 Page 1 of 19
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS
3.0 INSTALLATION OF INSTRUMENTS
4.0 TESTING
5.0 CALIBRATION OF INSTRUMENTS
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
INSTALLATION, TESTING AND CALIBRATION OF

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 The purpose of this specification is to define the general requirements for the installation,
installation materials, testing and calibration of instruments and control system.
1.2 The work shall be carried out in accordance with the codes, standards and recommended
practice listed in this specification and in accordance with local `Statutory regulations'.
1.3 For installation of instruments and control system, of the new material where quality is of
the prescribed standards and which is in every way fit for its intended purpose shall be
used.
1.4 Unless otherwise specified all the materials shall be indicated in this specification except
where it is not compatible with fluids being handled. In such cases the selection of the
material shall be approved by MECON.
1.5 Only the best trade practices shall be used. All the work shall be carried out in a neat,
workman like manner and to the satisfaction of MECON.
2.0 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS
2.1 Instrument process piping/tubing upto and including the first block valve and ìn-line'
instrument equipment shall conform to the line class or vessel rating concerned
instrument piping or tubing after the first lock valve may use alternate materials
consistent with service conditions. In general they shall conform to the following
specification as a minimum.
2.1.1 Stainless tubes shall be fully annealed and cold drawn seam less as per ASTM A 269
TP316 with size 1/2"OD x 0.65" WT (wall thickness).
2.1.2 Monel tubing shall be fully annealed seamless as per ASTM B165 with size 1/2"OD x
0.35"WT.
2.1.3 Carbon steel pipe shall be 1/2" seamless and shall be as per ASTM A106 Gr B min of sch
80 & dimensions as per ANSI B36.10.
2.1.4 Seamless stainless steel pipes shall be as per ASTM A 312 Gr TP 316L Sch 80S,
dimensions as per ANSI B 36.19.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
2.1.5 Instrument air supply piping from the main instrument air header shall be galvanised
heavy class pipes to IS 1239.
2.2 Individual pneumatic signal and air supply tubing shall conform to the following
specifications.
2.2.1 Stainless tubes shall be used in general and shall be fully annealed and cold drawn
seamless as per ASTM A269 TP 316 with 6mmOD x 1mmWT.
2.2.2 Copper tubing where specified shall be seamless 6mmOD x 1.0mmWT soft annealed as
per ASTM 868.74a Cd No. 122 (DHP) sheathed with PVC 1.0mm thick coloured Black.
2.3 All fittings shall be as a minimum of 100 rating except for tube fittings. The fittings shall
have threading as per B2.1 and socketweld connections as per B 16.11. These shall
conform to the following specifications in general.
2.3.1 Tube fittings shall be flare type compression fittings Swagelok or equilvalent make double
ferrule and pressure seat type.
All tube fittings in impulse lines shall be rated to 5000 PSIG at 38oC.
2.3.2 Carbon steel pipe fittings shall be forged as per ASTM A105 stainless steel pipe fittings
shall be as per ASTM –182 GrF 316L.
2.4 Valve shall have normally Globe body and shall be fabricated out of Bar-stock and rated
to min. of 1500. These shall be screwed bonnet type with 13% GSS trim and plug shall
be integral with the stem. Face to face dimensions shall be approx. 80mm. End
connections shall be socketweld to ANSI 16.11 and threaded to B2.1.
2.5 Multibore tubing shall have a maximum 19 single polyethylene tubes, 6mmODx1mm
numbered for easy identification. The bundle shall be marked with inner and outer fire
resistance PVC sheath. They shall carry a pair of telephone wire 0.6mm diameter
flexible.
2.6 Single pair and multi pair extension cables for Thermocules shall be matched and
calibrated in accordance with ISA MC 96.1. Conductor size shall be AWG for single pair
and 20 A for Multipair.
The cable shall be armcured, each twisted pair shall be individually shielded with
aluminium Mylar tape and a tinned copper drain wire. The wires and the cable shall be
colour coded as per ISA recommended practices.
2.7 Instrument Electrical cables shall conform to the following specifications:
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
2.7.1 Instrument electronic signal cables single pair/ Multipair shall have copper conductor,
twisted in pair and individually shielded with Aluminium Mylar tape with drain wire. In
multipair cables, each pair shall be armoured with inner and cut PVC sheath. Minimum
conductor size shall be 1.5 mm2.
2.7.2 Control Cables for control signal, alarms actuating devices and solenoid valves of the
interlock and shutdown valves shall generally be 1.5 mm2 copper conductor, armcured
with inner and cut PVC sheath.
2.7.3 All power supply cables shall have copper/Aluminium conductor depending upon the
conductor size. The cables shall be armoured with inner and cut PVC sheath. The cables
shall be sized adequately . Minimum conductor size shall be 2.5 mm2.
2.7.4 2-core armcured cable shall be used for illuminator on level gauges.
2.7.5 The material and construction of all electrical cables shall conform to IS- 1554 part I or
appropriate equivalent code and standard.
3.0 INSTALLATION OF INSTRUMENTS
3.1 Instrument Mounting
3.1.1 No instrument shall be installed in such a way that it bends for support on the impulse
piping or electrical connection on it.
3.1.2 Pressure gauges and temperature indicator shall normally be mounted directly on line.
However direct on line mounting shall be avoided where vibrations are likely to be
present.
3.1.3 Local mounted instruments shall be mounted on brackets, panels or placed on a suitable
pedestal. Transmitters shall be mounted on 2” pipe supports where practical.
Instruments to be mounted on steel columns, masonary structure etc. These shall not be
mounted on heating equipments, pipelines and structures.
3.1.4 Blind transmitters shall be mounted at 130mm above graded platform. Local controllers,
indicating transmitters and indicating instruments shall be mounted at approximately
1500 mm.
3.1.5 All the instruments shall be accessible from grade, ladder or platform etc. Pressures
gauges and other local indicating instruments shall be readable from grade or operating
level and if used for manual control shall be visible from the related valve.
All the instruments shall be located such that they dont impede the process operation.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
3.1.6 Local mounted instruments which are not available in weather proof housing shall be
mounted inside a weather proof case.
3.1.7 Items such as pilot valves, solenoid valves etc. shall be located local to its point of
application or near to the device being actuated by them.
3.1.8 For blind transmitters output meters shall be mounted on instrument supports.
3.1.9 Filter regulators shall be mounted on the instrument supports below pneumatic
transmitter or on the control valve yoke.
3.1.10 Instruments or instrument lines shall not be supported on hand rails, in general.
3.1.11 The use of process piping to support instrument lines shall be avoided as far as possible.
3.1.12 The instrument impule piping shall be kept as short as possible.
3.1.13 Instruments and impulse lines shall be protected against mechanical damage.
3.1.14 In case of capillary tube instruments, capillary tube is to be supported and protected
against mechanical damage.
3.1.15 Orifice meters shall not be installed on the top of orifice fittings. On horizontal lines
orifice pressure taps shall be located as follows:
a) On top for air and gas service

b) Horizontal for liquid and condensible vapour service.
3.2 Instrument Piping & Tubing.
3.2.1 Impulse Piping/tubing
3.2.1.1 The primary instrument block valves for all instruments shall be as per piping
specifications.
3.2.1.2 3-Valve manifold in general shall be integral type.
For pressure gauges, 2-valve manifolds shall also be acceptable instead of isolation
valve, drain valve and pipe fittings.
3.2.1.3 Differential or static pressure sensing lines shall not exceed 6 Mtrs (20 feet) in general for
direct connected or locally mounted instruments.
3.2.1.4 All impulse lines shall be run with a slope not less than 1 in 12 except where otherwise
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
specified. Direction of slope is to be downward from the process for liquid service and
upward from the process for gas service.
3.2.1.5 Tubing shall be joined by compression fittings.
3.2.1.6 Piping shall be joined by pipe fittings/flanges as per the piping specifications.
3.2.1.7 All instruments pipes and tubes shall run in horizontal and vertical planes only and shall
run with minimum number of changes in direction, consistent with good engineering
practices and neat appearance.
3.2.1.8 Tubing shall be bent with correct size tube bender as far as possible to avoid use of
fittings. Hot bending shall be totally avoided.
Tube cutter shall always be used to cut tubings. The use of short lengths of tubings in
long runs shall be avoided in order to avoid the fittings.
3.2.1.9 All tubing shall run in such a manner as to give the maximum protection against
mechanical damage. Tubing runs shall be grouped together and clamped.
3.2.1.10 Tubing shall be arranged so that the unions can be tightened without distorting lines.
3.2.1.11 Instrument tubing or piping shall not run on trays intended for cables and shall not share
the same transit.
3.2.1.12 No pipe or tube shall be left with mechanical strain on them.
3.2.1.13 A mechanical ferrule seater shall be used on tubing for 140 kg/cm2 (2000 psi) or more.
3.2.1.14 Pipe bushings shall not be used.
3.2.1.15 Pipe plugs shall be fabricated out of bar stock and shall have hex-head.
3.2.2 Air/Signal Tubing
3.2.2.1 Signal Transmission tubes shall be laid on perforated trays prefabricated out of min 2.5
mm. thick steel plate. The width of the tray shall be selected as per the number of tubes
to be laid.
3.2.2.2 Where tubing is run in permanent enclosures, it should be ensured that entry and exit of such
enclosures is clean and smooth.
3.2.2.3 Tubing run in permanent enclosures shall not have joints, except at special junctions
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
boxes provided for this purpose.
3.2.2.4 Where permanent enclosures are left with space for instrument tubing to be laid at some later
date, a galvanised pull wire of adequate size shall be left in the tray.
3.2.2.5 Where the length of transmission tubing exceeds 60 mtrs (200ft) necessity of installing
signal booster relays shall be considered.
3.2.2.6 In case of `Skidded' equipment or vessels with instrumentation, where off- skid alarms shutdown
or control functions are provided the signal tubes shall be terminated on the control bulk
head near the skid boundary.
3.2.3 All threaded pipe joints shall be joined after applying teflon tape. It should be applied in
a manner to ensure that the tape does not spill over the end of the male fitting. No
other pipe joining compound shall be used except on high temperature service where
graphite sealing compounds shall be used.
3.2.4 All reasonable precautions shall be taken to prevent foreign materials entering pipe lines
or tubing before and during erection.
3.2.5 Pipes and tubes installed but not connected, shall have the ends clad in approved
fashion to prevent the entry of foreign material. For a period upto one week adhevise
tape may be used, for longer periods, caps or plugs shall be used.
3.2.6 Piping/Tubing supports
3.2.6.1 Piping and tubing shall be adequately supported and fixed at a distance not exceeding
that in the following table:
Table
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Single tubing/Piping Max. distance between supports
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3/8" OD or less Continuous
1/2" to 3/4" Nom. size 2 meters (6ft.)
3/4" to 1" Nom. size 3 meters (9ft.)
Multitube bundle 3 meters (9ft.)

---------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.6.2 All field mounted instrument air tubing shall be supported with galvanised steel angles or
channels of minimum 1/8" thickness fabricated to present neat appearance.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
3.2.6.3 All instruments tubing supports shall be galvanised prior to installation
3.2.6.4 Trays shall be properly supported either from any rigid steel structure or concrete
member. In case of non-availability of above, a suitable support shall be fabricated.
3.3 Instrument Air Supply Distribution
3.3.1 Piping material for instrument main and branched air headers upto the isolation valve at
each take-off from main or branch header shall conform to piping specification.
3.3.2 The air header size shall be established in accordance with the table below, unless
otherwise specified, for a header pressure of 4 to 8.5 kg/cm2
Table – 2
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Max number of users Nominal pipe size
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
upto 5 1/2"
upto 10 3/4"
upto 25 1"
upto 80 1-1/2"
upto 150 2"
upto 500 3"
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.3 All take off for branch lines are to be from the top of the main header with block valves
equal in size to the branch line. All low point shall have a 1/2" valve installed as a drain
and blow down point.
3.3.4 A minimum size of ½”" pipe shall be run to the instrument with a ½” valve for each
user. Tubing from the isolation valve to the instrument shall be 6.0 mm.
3.2.5 Union shall be provided at convenient location in the air header.
3.3.6 Filter regulator shall be provided for individual field mounted consumer and shall be
complete with an output gauge.
3.3.7 In case of skid mounted equipments or vessels which incorporate instrumentation

requiring pneumatic supply, on skid supply piping shall terminate at the skid boundary
location and size of the supply connections shall be noted on the vendor approval
drawings.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
3.4 Installation of multitude and Multicore cables.
3.4.1 Multicore/Multitube cables shall generally be installed on trays or ducts and properly
clamped. At bends minimum radius shall be maintained as per cable manufacturers
standards.
3.4.2 All cables shall be rigidly supported on structural steel and masonary. Drilling of steel
member should normally be avoided. However, if the drilling of steel must be resorted
to, it must be drilled where minimum of weakening of structure will result cables shall be
support at every 500 mm. At every vertical drop these shall be clamped at more
frequent intervals max of 300 mm.
3.4.3 Directly buried cables shall be laid underground in excavated cable trenches. Trenches
shall have sufficient depth and width to accommodate all cables correctly spaced and
arranged with a view of heat dissipation and economy of design construction of trenches
laying of cables and filling up of trenches shall be as per relevant standard.
3.4.4 Each underground cable shall be provided with identifying tag of load securely fastened
every 30 M of its underground length with at least one tag at each end before the cable
enters the ground.
Before cables are placed, the trench bottom shall be filled with a layer of sand. The
cables shall be covered with 150 mm of sand on the top of the largest dia cable tube and
sand shall be lightly pressed. A protective covering of 75 mm thick second class red
bricks shall be laid flat and the balance portion of the trench shall be filled with soil,
compacted and levelled.
3.4.5 At each road crossing and other places where cables enter pipe sleeves, adequate bed of
sand shall be given so that the cables don’t slack and get damaged by pipe ends after
back filling.
3.4.6 At the entry into concrete blocks loops shall be provided at either end to prevent any
damage to cable.
3.4.7 The cable entry to control room shall be suitably filled and sealed after laying of cables so
as to achieve a positive sealing against the entry of gas/water.
3.4.8 All wiring, tubing, cables, junctions boxes and auxiliary equivalent shall be suitably
identified as per applicable codes and practices. All pipings and tubing shall be tagged
with slip-on or clip on wire marker at both ends.
3.4.9 Jointing of cables are generally not permitted. Cables shall be cut after the exact site
measurements at the cable drums shall be so selected before cutting the lengths as to
avoid any unnecessary wastage.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
3.4.10 Low signal cables like alarms, analysers cables, special cables for turbine meter,
thermocouple compensating cables etc. shall be layed separated from power supply
cables in ducts/trenches/trays.
3.4.11 Electric signal lines for electronic transmitters to receive and to final control element shall
be continuously shielded with the shield grounded at the same point as the signal circuit
generally at the control instrument.
3.4.12 Separate junction boxes shall be used for intrinsically sage cables.
3.4.13 Different intrinsically safe system e.g., systems having different rounds shall not be run in
the same multicore cable, in general.
Recommended minimum separation distance between twisted pair signal leads and AC
Power Lines.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AC Power Cable Minimum Distance to
Signal Lead
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Voltage (Volts) Current (Am) in (cm)
0 to 125 0 to 10 12" (30)
125 to 250 0 to 50 15" (38)
250 to 440 0 to 200 18" (46)
5KV & Up 200 Amp. & Up24" (61)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Different intrinsically safe circuits e.g., circuits having different voltage levels, of the same
intrinsically safe system shall not be run in the same cable unless each conductor
insulation is at least 0.25mm or no hazard can result from interconnection.
3.4.14 The physical separation of power and signal cables shall be as per API 550 Part I Section
VII. Cable in intrinsically safe circuits shall preferably be not run in the same tray where--
on intrinsically safe circuits cables are being run. If these are being run in the same tray,
a metallic earthed separately shall be provided.
3.4.15 For temperature controllers, single pair thermocouple extension cable or cable for
resistance thermometer, shall be layed directly from the element to the transducer in the
control room without intermediate terminal blocks.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
3.4.16 In case of skid mounted equipment or equipment which incorporate skid instrumentation
like alarms, shutdown or control function shall terminate signals or control junction box
near skid boundary for connection of off skid equipment.
3.4.17 No wire shall be terminated or left with mechanical strain within any conductor.
3.4.18 Splices shall be made only at terminals, in instruments or approval equipment/ junction
boxes using lugs and screwed connections. No intermediate splices shall be made in
cable trays or in conduct. Number of junction boxes in any cable path shall be limited to
only one.
3.5 Installation of Zener barriers
3.5.1 Zener barriers shall be installed in the circuit to make the system intrinsically safe
provided:
a) There is no energy storage system in excess to the minimum permitted by the

barrier design on the hazardous side of the barrier. The same shall be met by
taking intrinsically safe transmitters and selecting the cable electrical parameters
like inductance L/R ratio & capacitance in accordance with the maximum
parameters given in barrier specifications.
b) No power source exceeding the voltage rating of Zener barrier shall be
connected on safe side of the Zener barrier.
c) No outside power source including other intrinsically safe circuits shall be
connected to the hazardous side of the barrier.
3.5.2 Zener barriers shall be located as close as possible to the field wiring entry point in the
control room.
3.5.3 Single barrier are bolted directly to copper bus bar and multiple barriers on the barrier
mounting plates. Copper bus or barriers mounting plates shall be isolated from the panel
frame.
3.5.4 The signal ground system for intrinsically safe system shall be separate from power
ground system and shall be connected to the signal ground reference point. The
maximum resistance allocable between the farthest point on intrinsically safe barrier
ground bus and signal ground reference point shall be less than 1 ohm.
3.5.5 Field wires shall directly terminate at the barriers and not through intermediate
terminals.
3.6 Installation of Analyser / Gas Chromatograph
3.6.1 Installation of all analyser shall be in general, as per APIP 550 Part II.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
3.6.2 The analyser housing at its installation shall meet all safety requirements as per --
classifications.
3.6.3 Sampled process fluid, if not returned to the process shall be disposed to a safe location.
Piping shall be provided so that vapors can be vented to a safe location and liquids shall
be drained in a clean and orderly fashion to a safe place. Toxic vapors shall not be
vented to atmosphere.
3.6.4 Analyser shall be located as near to the sampling point as possible.
3.6.5 Analyser equipment must be protected from the following:
a) hot equipment
b) severe ambient temperature changes
c) shock
d) Mechanical damage
e) Vibration
3.6.6 If a separate vent for the analyser is used, the location of that vent shall be in area of
minimum air Turbulence. If the vent of different analysers are vented into a common
vent, a back pressure regulator shall be used.
3.6.7 Vent piping shall be designed to prevent condensate from accumulation in low point and
obstruct a free vent flow.
3.7 Ducts, Trays and Supports.
3.7.1 Main cable duct shall be of bottom open type with flat/angle --- construction with side
sheet and top cover of 3.2 mm thickness.
3.7.2 The ducts and trays shall be properly supported at regular intervals. Wherever insert
plates are not available, support on concrete structure or ceiling shall be fixed with a
minimum of 10 mm expansion bolts Angle supports for ducts shall be fabricated from
minimum of 40 mm angle.
3.7.3 All supports shall be neatly cut with hacksaw only and not with gas cutting. Free ends of
angle supports shall not have sharp ends and shall be properly rounded off.
3.7.4 Ducts and supports shall be painted with one coat of Red oxide Zinc chromate primer
conforming to to IS-2074 after cleaning to remove scale and then painted with 2 coats of
final enamel paint as given below:
a) Duct - Dark admirately Grey as per IS0632.

b) Supports - Black.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
3.8 Instrument Steam Tracing
3.8.1 Steam for Tracking of instruments shall be taken from main steam header take of valve
through carbon steel pipes supported at regular intervals.
3.8.2 Steam tracing around individual instrument shall be by copper tube of 1/8" diameter.
3.8.3 Piping or tubing for steam tracing shall be installed in such a way as to avoid condensate
pockets.
3.8.4 After steam tracing, the line is connected to drain funnel through steam trap.
3.9 Identification of Lines and Instruments
3.9.1 All site mounted instruments, junction boxes, air headers, tubing and wiring terminations
shall be labelled or tagged.
3.9.2 Instruments shall be furnished with stainless steel name tags containing Tag no.,
manufacturers name, model no. serial number. This tag number shall be approximately
3"x1" size and shall be attached to the instruments with -- gauge stainless steel wire.
3.9.3 Unused cable entries in junction boxes and field instruments are to be plugged.
4.0 TESTING
4.1 Instrument Impulse piping/Tubing
4.1.1 All process impulse lines shall be disconnected both from the instrument and
vessel/piping end and flushed with water.
4.1.2 After thorough flushing the impulse lines shall be isolated from the instruments and
pressurised hydraulically to 1.5 times the maximum working pressure corrected for
ambient temperature. They shall then be isolated from the pressure source and the
pressure reading on a test pressure gauge shall not fall at a rate exceeding one
psig/hour.
In case no isolation valve is provided near the instrument, impulse piping/tubing shall be
pressurised along with the instrument to the maximum pressure of scale in case of
pressure transmitter and max. operating pressure in case of differential pressure
instrument with equalising valve open.
4.1.3 In special conditions where hydrotesting is not permissible due to service requirements,
testing shall be carried out by using compressed air/nitrogen.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
4.1.4 The external displacer type instruments and cage type level switches shall be tested to
1.5 times the operating pressure using air/nitrogen after thorough flushing.
4.2 Instrument Air lines/signal tubing.
4.2.1 Instrument air lines/signal tubing shall not be hydrostatically tested.
4.2.2 Instrument air tubing shall be disconnected upstream of all filter regulators and blown
down to remove water, slag and mill scale, from lines at 7.0 kg/cm2 G for fifteen minutes.
Air filter shall be taken in line and tubing shall be disconnected at instrument end, and
blown for 3 minutes to remove traces of dirt.
4.2.3 Testing of instrument air shall be carried out with instrument air at 7 kg/cm2G upto the
upstream of the filter regulator after thorough flushing. All lines shall be checked with
soap solution and bubbler unit for possible leak at joints.
4.2.4 All signal tubing shall be checked with 1.5 kg/cm2 after proper flushing. After pressuring,
source shall be cut off and rate of fall in pressure shall be less than IPSL for each 100
feet of tubing for a test period of 2 minutes as per instrument society of American RP 7.1
`Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test'
4.3 Cables
4.3.1 All wiring shall be checked to ensure that it is correctly connected and properly grounded.
4.3.2 All cables shall be checked for continuity proper connection and insulation testing.
Insulation test shall be carried out on all wiring with a certified megger after
disconnecting the cables at both ends.
4.4 All the results of the above mentioned testing shall be recorded and submitted for check.
4.5 All the in line instruments like orifice plates, turbine meters, Rotameters, Target meters,
vortex meters, control valves, safety valves etc. shall be removed and spool pieces shall
be provided prior to the flushing of the lines.
5.0 CALIBRATION OF INSTRUMENTS
5.1 All instruments shall be calibrated strictly as per manufacturers instructions prior to the
installation. In addition to calibration of instruments, setting of safety devices like
process switches, safety valves etc. and simulation testing of all interlock and shutdown
system shall be carried out.
5.2 In general, all tests shall simulate, as closely as possible, design process condition by the
use of manometers, potentiometers, deadweight testers, test pressure gauges etc. Pour
point callibration shall refer to the input signal to an instrument equivalent to
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
0,25,50,75,100% of instrument range upscale (rising) and 75,50,25,0% of instrument

(downscale) (falling).
All instruments unless otherwise noted shall be calibrated in upscale and downscale
direction and if necessary, adjusted until their accuracies conform to those limits state by
the manufacturer.
Upon completion of these tests, the instruments shall be drained, completely.
5.3 Temperature Instruments
5.3.1 Temperature Gauges Filled type and Bi metallic dial type Thermometers shall be four
point bench checked for proper operation and calibration using a temperature bath prior
to installation.
5.3.2 Temperature Elements and Temperature Transmitters.
Temperature Elements and Transmitter shall be four point bench calibrated using a
temperature bath precision meter or precision gauge prior to installation.
5.4 Pressure Instruments
5.4.1 Pressure Gauges
5.4.1.1 Direct connected bourdan type pressure gauges shall be dead weight tested or tested
against a test gauges prior to installation.
5.4.1.2 Receiver type pressure gauges shall be four point calibrated using a precision gauge and
precision air regulator.
5.4.1.3 Pressure and Differential Pressure Transmitters.

Pressure and differential pressure transmitters shall be four point calibrated using a
hydraulic or dead weight tester or a precision pneumatic calibrator prior to the
installation. A precision output meter or gauge shall be used to monitor the output.
5.5.1 Orifice plates shall be checked visually for the name plate and for an upstream sharp
edge. Bore dia. Shall be checked for compliance with the specification.
5.5.2 Differential pressure type of flow instruments shall be four point callibrated using
precision pneumatic callibrator or a manometer and precision regulator. A precision
output meter or gauge shall be used to monitor the output of the transmitter.
5.5.3 a) Rotameters shall be installed as received. A check shall be made to confirm that
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
shipping stops have been removed and float has been installed.
b) Where rotameters have transmitting mechanism, the float shall be raised and
lowered mechanically and output shall be checked. Vendor calibration data/
curve shall be checked.
c) A check shall be conducted with plumb for a vertical installation.
5.5.4 Turbine meters, Annubar, positive displacement meters, vortex meter, ultrasonic flow
meter, etc. shall be installed as received.
5.5.5 Target meters shall be checked for calibration using calibration weights. Output shall be
monitered using precision output meter.
5.6 Level Instruments
5.6.1 Level Gauge Glasses
Gauge glasses shall be installed as received installation of illuminators, frost protectors

and other accessories shall be checked.
5.6.2 Displacer Type, Level Transmitter
- Displacer type level transmitter shall be checked by raising and lowering

mechanically the displacement and checking the pilot or transmitter action.
Check transmitter with out put gauge or meter for smooth and full output change.
- A check shall be conducted with plumb for a vertical installation.
5.6.3 Differential pressure type level transmitter Defferential pressure type level transmitter
shall be calibrated with pneumatic calibrater at four points prior to installation. A
precision meter or gauge shall be used to monitor the output of the transmitter.
5.6.4 Tank level gauges

a) Tank level gauges shall be checked by raising and lowering mechanically the
displacer and checking the indicator on the gauge board.
b) Check for proper liquid seal prior to installation in case of liquid seal tank gauges.
c) In case of servo type gauges, the displacer is hoisted from the tank into the
calibration chamber.
5.7 Control Valves, shutdown valves and self actuated valves
5.7.1 All diaphragm and piston operated control valve shall be stroked pneumatically using a
pressure regulator and pressure gauge against the spring range specified on the name
plate of the valve.
5.7.2 Mechanical seating and travel of the valve stem shall be checked against the side
indicator and the name plate
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
5.7.3 Valve positioner shall be calibrated with the control valve in accordance with the name
plate data and specifications with the help of pneumatic calibrator or gauge with
precision regulator. Zero position or fully close position of the valve shall be a live zero
i.e., the plug shall be just off the seat at the minimum setting.
5.7.4 Volume bottles, where used shall be checked for proper filling. The signal line shall be
bled to zero pressure and failure action shall be confirmed.
5.7.5 Control valve accessories such as handwheels, boosters, relays etc. shall be checked
operationally. Declutchable handwheel shall be operable both with and without an air
signal to the diaphragm.
5.7.6 Self actuated control valves shall be installed as received, checking inlet and outlet points
and name plate data. Regulators with external pressure connections shall be inspected
for proper installation.
5.7.7 Butterfly shall be checked carefully to see that the vane moves freely into the upstream
and down stream piping. Proper vane movement to stroke shall be confirmed.
5.7.8 All control valves and regulators shall be removed from the line prior to flushing and
during hydrotesting.
5.8 Safety Relief Valves
5.8.1 Safety relief valves shall be installed as received after carefully checking the name plate
data. Pilots, if used, shall be checked carefully for installation on the proper safety valve.
5.8.2 Valves, which are installed in such a manner as to permit on line testing, shall be
pressure tested after installation to determine proper operation and setting. Compressed
air or nitrogen shall be used for testing of safety relief valves.
5.9 Switches
5.9.1 Level Switches shall be actuated mechanically for switch operation but shall not be
calibrated for level setting.
5.9.2 Pressure switches shall be calibrated using hydorlic or dead weight tester or precision air
regulator and gauge. The setting/trip point shall be checked using a continuity tester.
5.9.3 Temperature switches shall be calibrated using a temperature both prior to installation
and set to the required alarm/ trip point using a continuity tester.
5.10 Receiver Instruments
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
5.10.1 Receiver Indicator/Recorders
5.10.1.1 Pneumatic indicators/ Recorders shall be calibrated using pneumatic calibrator/ precision
pressure regulator and gauge.
5.10.1.2 Electronics indicators/ Recorders shall be calibrated using a current generator and a
precision meter.
5.10.1.3 Chart drive assembly shall be checked for proper operation.
5.10.2 Controllers
5.10.2.1 Proper balancing of the controller shall be checked as per the manufacturers catalogues.
5.10.2.2 Controllers shall be checked for manual and Auto operation and Transfer. The transfer
from manual to Auto and vice versa shall be bumpless and smooth.
5.10.3.1 Manual loader station Output of the manual loader shall be checked with a precision
meter.
5.10.4.1 Multipoint Temperature Recorders
Each point shall be calibrated using a temperature simulator/ decade box for RTD /
voltage generator and precision meter for the thermocouples.
5.10.4.2 Point synchronisation shall be checked.
5.10.5 Pneumatic receiver switches shall be calibrated using precision air regulator and gauge.
The setting/alarm/trip point shall be checked using continuity tester.
5.10.6 Trip Amplifiers Trip amplifiers shall be calibrated using a temperature simulators or
voltage generator and precision meter for thermocouple or Resistance box for RTDs. The
required setting/ alarm point/ trip poing shall be checked using a continuity tester.
5.10.7 Receiver Switch module Receiver switch modules shall be calibrated using a current
source and a precision meter. The required setting/alarm/trip point shall be checked
using a continuity tester.
5.10.8 Alarm and Annunciator system
5.10.8.1 Alarm and annunciator system shall be checked for visual and Audio alarm operation
using dummy signals. Full alarm sequence of each alarm point shall be checked.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI INSTRUMENTS
5.10.8.2 Each point shall be checked for proper engraving.
5.10.9 Shutdown System
5.10.9.1 Operation of final actuating elements shall be checked for proper operation using dummy
signals.
5.10.9.2 All timers, push buttons and switches shall also be checked for their proper operation.
5.11 Analytical Instruments
5.11.1 Check the full analyser system including sample handling system for leakage.
5.11.2 Check the full sample handling system for its proper operation. Calibrate and check
completely all analysers using zero and span samples as per vendor catalogues.
5.12 Flow computer / Volume corrector
5.12.1 Corrected flow values shall be checked for various D.C. inputs and pressure and
temperature variations for upscale and downscale ranges.
5.13 The list of test and callibration instruments with tracability certificates shall be submitted
to MECON for approval before carrying out the tests / callibration of instruments at site.
5.14 The formats / description of tests / callibration of all instruments shall be submitted to
MECON for approval.
5.15 Daily / weekly reports shall be submitted during execution of work at site.
Document1
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
SPECIFICATION
FOR
INSTRUMENT TUBING
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
INSTRUMENTATION SECTION INSTRUMENT TUBING
Delhi
DELHI
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 CONSTRUCTION
3.0 TESTING
4.0 SHIPPING
5.0 REJECTION
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.1 This standard specifications, together with the data sheets attached herewith, covers the
requirements for the design, materials, testing and shipping of Instrument Tubing which
includes the following types:-
a) SS tubes
b) Copper tubes
1.1.2 The related standards referred to herein and mentioned below shall be of the latest
edition prior to the date of Purchaser's enquiry:
ASTM A 269 - Specification for seamless and welded ferritic stainless

steel tubing for general services.
ASTM B 251 - Specification for general requirements for wrought
seamless copper and copper alloy tube.
ASTM B 251M - Specification for general requirements for wrought
seamless copper and copper alloy tube (Metric)
ASTM B 68 - Specification for seamless copper tube, bright annealed.
ASTM B 68M - Specification for seamless copper tube, bright annealed.
(Metric)
1.1.3 In the event of any conflict between these specifications, data sheets, related standards,
codes, etc., the vendor shall refer the matter to the purchaser for clarifications and only
after obtaining the same shall proceed with the manufacture of the items in question.
1.2 Bids
1.2.1 Vendor's quotation shall include a detailed specification sheet for each type of tube which
shall provide the following information:
a) All the details regarding the type, construction, materials etc. of the items.
b) Overall the dimensions in mm.
1.2.2 All the units of measurement and material specifications for various parts in the vendor's
specification sheets shall be to same standards as in purchaser's data sheets.
1.2.3 Vendor shall attach a list of items, typewise, summing up all the deviations from this
specification and purchaser's data sheets if there are any. Also vendor shall provide
reasons for these deviations.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI
1.2.4 Vendor shall enclose catalogues giving detailed technical specifications and other
information for each type of tube in the bid.
1.2.5 Vendor's quotation, catalogues, drawings etc. shall be in English language.
1.3 Drawings, Data and Certification
Detailed drawings, data, catalogues and manuals etc. required from the vendor are
indicated by the purchaser in vendor data requirement sheets. The required number of
reproducibles and prints shall be despatched to the address mentioned, adhering to the
time limits indicated.
2.0 CONSTRUCTION
2.1 Stainless Steel Tubes
2.1.1 SS tubes of the tubes shall be Rockwell RB 70-70. Tubes shall be free from scratches
and to be suitable for bending.
2.1.3 Tube wall thickness shall be 0.049" for 1/2" OD and 1mm for 6 mm unless otherwise
specified.
2.1.4 Maximum working pressure shall be 153.0 kg/cm2 at 38oC for 1/2" OD Tube, unless
otherwise specified and 80.0 kg/cm2 at 38o for 6mm OD tube.
2.1.5 Tubes shall be supplied in minimum length of 6 metres without brazing in between.
2.1.6 Dimensional tolerances shall be as per ASTM A 269.
2.1.7 The following shall be marked on the tube:
a) Name of manufacturer
b) Type and material grade of tube
c) Tube O.D. and wall thickness
2.2 Copper Tubes
2.2.1 Copper Tubes (PVC Jacket)
2.2.1.1 The tube shall be soft annealed copper with 6mm OD and a wall thickness of 1.0 mm as
per ASTM B 68M Copper No.C12200.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI
2.2.1.2 The tube shall be jacketed with black PVC. The jacket thickness shall be 1.6mm. The PVC jacket
shall confirm to ASTM D-1047.
2.2.1.3 The tube ends shall be plugged prior to transportation.
2.2.1.4 The tube shall be of continuous length without any brazing in between for 100 metres
length.
2.2.1.5 Minimum length of single tube shall be 100 metres.
2.2.1.6 The dimensional tolerances shall be as per ASTM B 251M.
2.2.2 Bare Copper Tubes (For Steam Tracing)
2.2.2.1 The tube shall be soft annealed copper with 3/8" OD or 6mm OD with a wall thickness of
1.0 mm as per ASTM B68 copper No.C12200.
2.2.2.2 The tube ends shall be plugged prior to transportation.
2.2.2.3 The tube shall be of continuous length without any brazing in between for 100 metres
length.
2.2.2.4 Minimum length of tube shall be 100 metres.
2.2.2.5 The dimensional tolerances shall be as per ASTM B 251.
3.0 TESTING
3.1 The following tests shall be done for SS tubes.
a) Hardness test
b) Hydrostatic test at 153.0 kg/cm2 at 38o C for 1/2" tube and at 80.0 kg/cm2 at
38oC for 6mm tube, unless otherwise specified.
3.2 PVC jacketed copper tubes shall be tested at 7.0kg/cm2g with dry air for leak check.
3.3 Bare copper tubes shall be hydrostatically tested at 80.0 kg/cm2g at 38oC.
3.4 Final test before delivery shall include ball test to ensure clear opening of the tube for
copper tubes. The O.D.of the ball shall be minimum 1mm for 6mm O.D tube and 2mm
for 3/8" tube.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI
4.0 SHIPPING
4.1 The tubes shall be plugged at both ends to avoid entry of foreign matter. The tubes shall
be packed carefully so as to avoid damage during transport.
5.0 REJECTION
Vendor shall make his offer in detail, with respect to every item of the purchaser's
specifications. Any offer not conforming to this shall be summarily rejected.
Document1
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
SPECIFICATION
FOR
INSTRUMENT TUBE FITTINGS
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
INSTRUMENTATION SECTION INSTRUMENT TUBE FITTINGS
Delhi
DELHI
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 CONSTRUCTION
3.0 TESTING
4.0 SHIPPING
5.0 REJECTION
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 This standard specifications, together with the data sheets attached herewith, covers the
requirements for the design, materials, testing and shipping of instrument tube fittings
which includes the following types:-
a) SS compression fittings (SS tube)

b) Brass compression fittings (copper tube)
edition prior to the date of Purchase's enquiry:
ANSI B 2.1 - Pipe Threads

B16.11 - Forged steel fittings-socket welding and threaded.
IS:319 - Specification for free cutting brass bars, rods and sections.
ISA RP 42.1 - Nomenclature for instrument tubing - fittings.
codes etc., the vendor shall refer the matter to the purchaser for clarifications and only
1.2 Bids
1.2.1 Vendor's quotation shall include a detailed specification sheet for each type of tube
fittings which shall provide the following information:
a) All the details regarding the type, construction, materials, etc. of the items.
b) Overall dimensions in mm.
reasons for these deviations.
1.2.4 Vendor shall enclose catalogues giving detailed technical specifications and other
information for each type of fitting in the bid.
1.2.5 Vendor's quotation, catalogues, drawings, etc. shall be in English language.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI
Detailed drawings, data, catalogues and manuals etc., required from the vendor are
reproducibles and points shall be despatched to the address mentioned, adhering to the
2.0 CONSTRUCTION
2.1 SS Tube fittings:
2.1.1 Nomenclature of all tube fittings shall be as per ISA RP 42.1.
2.1.2 Fittings shall be flareless compression type and of three piece construction with ferrule,
nut and body suitable for use on SS tubes conforming to ASTM A 269 TP316, hardness
not exceeding RB80.
2.1.3 All parts shall be of SS 316.
2.1.4 Hardness of the ferrules shall be in the range of RB 85-90 so as to ensure a minimum
hardness difference of 5 to 10 between tube and fittings, for better sealing.
2.1.5 Nuts and ferrules of particular size shall be interchangeable for each type.
2.1.6 Spanner hold shall be metric.
2.1.7 Threaded ends of fittings shall be NPT as per ANSI B 2.1.
2.1.8 Copper Tube Fittings
2.2.1 Nomenclature of all tube fittings shall be as per ISA 42.1.
2.2.2 Fittings shall be of flareless compression type and of three-piece construction consisting
of ferrule, nut and body suitable for use on copper tubes conforming to ASTM B 68/B
68M hardnesss not exceeding RB 50.
2.2.3 All parts shall be manufactured from Brass as per IS 319 barstock and Nickel plated.
2.2.4 For better grip, vendor shall maintain hardness difference between tube & ferrule and
indicate the same along with the offer.
2.2.5 Nuts & ferrules of particular size shall be interchangeable for each type.
2.2.6 Threaded ends of fittings shall be NPT as per ANSI B 2.1.
2.2.7 Spanner hold shall be metric.
Document1
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI
2.2.8 Vendor shall ensure that the ferrules and nuts supplied for fittings shall be suitable for
sample tube which shall be supplied during manufacture.
3.0 TESTING
3.1 Random samples of SS tube fittings shall be hydrostatically tested as follows:-
For 6 mm fittings at 80.0 kg/cm2, 1/2" fittings at 153.0 kg/cm2 at 38oc unless otherwise
specified.
3.2 Random samples of brass compression fittings shall be hydrostatically tested as follows:-
For 1/4" fittings, at 10 kg./cm2, 3/8" at 80.0 Kg/cm2 and all at 38oC.
4.0 SHIPPING
4.1 All thread/ends shall be protected with plastic caps to prevent damage/entry of foreign
matter.
5.0 REJECTION
Document1
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
SPECIFICATION
FOR
INSTRUMENT VALVES AND MANIFOLDS
Document2
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
INSTRUMENTATION SECTION INSTRUMENT VALVES AND
Delhi
DELHI MANIFOLDS
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 CONSTRUCTION
3.0 TESTING
4.0 SHIPPING
5.0 REJECTION
Document2
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI MANIFOLDS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 This standard specifications, together with the data sheets attached herewith, covers the
requirements for the design, materials, testing and shipping of Instrument Valves &
Manifolds which includes the following types:-
a) Miniature instrument valves

b) Instrument valve manifolds
c) Instrument air valves
edition prior to the date of Purchaser's enquiry:
ANSI B 2.1 - Pipe threads

ANSI B 16.11 - Forged steel fittings-socket welding and threaded.
codes etc, the vendor shall refer the matter to the purchaser for clarifications and only
1.2 Bids
1.2.1 Vendor's quotation shall include a detailed specification sheet for each type of Valves &
Manifolds which shall provide the following information:
a) All the details regarding the type, construction, materials etc. of the items.
b) Overall dimensions in mm.
reasons for these in the bid.
1.2.5 Vendor's quotation, catalogues, drawings etc. shall be in English language.
Detailed drawings, data, catalogues and manual etc. required from the vendor are
reproducibles and prints shall be despatched to the address mentioned, adhering to the
Document2
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI MANIFOLDS
2.0 CONSTRUCTION
2.1 Instrument Valves (Miniature)
2.1.1 The instrument valves shall be globe pattern-needle valves forged/ barstock with inside
screwed bonnet.
2.1.2 Body and trim material shall be 316 SS unless otherwise specified.
2.1.3 The valve body rating shall be 3000 lbs unless specified in piping material specification
which shall govern in in case it is specified.
2.1.4 The end connection shall be 1/2" NPTF to ANSI B2.1.
2.1.5 The packing material shall be teflon unless otherwise specified.
2.1.6 The hand wheel material shall be carbon steel zinc plated.
2.1.7 Flow direction shall be marked on the body.
2.1.8 The valve dimension shall be as follows:
a) End to end dimensions 76 mm (approximately).

b) Height in fully open condition - 135mm maximum.
2.2 VALVE MANIFOLDS
2.2.1 3-Valve & 5-Valve manifolds:
2.2.1.1 3 Valve manifold shall be designed for direct coupling to differential pressure transmitters
having 2 bolt flanges with 54 mm (2-1/8") centre to centre connections and 41.3 mm
(1-5/8") bolt to bolt distance. The manifold shall contain two main block valves and an
equalizing by-pass valve. The valves shall be needle valves. They shall use self aligning
316SS ball seats.
2.2.1.2 5 Valve manifold shall contain two main line block valves and a combination double block
and bleed for the bypass line.
2.2.1.3 The manifold shall be suitably for mounting directly on the stanchion (2" pipe).
2.2.1.4 All bonnets shall have teflon packings unless otherwise specified.
2.2.1.5 The material of construction shall be 316 SS unless otherwise specified.
2.2.1.5 The material of construction shall be 316SS unless otherwise specified.
Document2
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI MANIFOLDS
2.2.1.6 The flanges shall be integral part of the block.
2.2.1.7 The process connection shall be 1/2" NPTF to ANSI B2.1.
2.2.1.8 The manifolds shall be supplied alongwith mounting accessories. The bolts and nuts shall
be alloy steel as per ASTM A 193 Gr B ASTM A 194 GR 2H respectively. rings shall be
teflon and other accessories shall be cadmium plated.
2.2.1.9 Vendor shall furnish the material certificate for body.
2.2.2 3 Way 2 Valve Manifold for pressure gauges.)
2.2.2.1 The manifold shall be designed for use with pressure gauges.
2.2.2.2 The valve shall be a ball valve.
2.2.2.3 The body shall be either straight or angle as specified in data sheets.
2.2.2.4 The body and trim material shall be 316SS, packing material shall be teflon unless
otherwise specified.
2.2.2.5 The inlet connection shall be 3/4" plain end (female) for socket weld as per ANSI B 16.11.
2.2.2.6 The gauge connections shall be with union nut & tail piece threaded 1/2" NPT(F).
2.2.2.7 The drain connection shall 1/2"NPTF.
2.3 Instrument Air Isolation Valves
2.3.1 The valves shall be full bore ball valves.
2.3.2 Body material shall be Nickel or Cadmium plated carbon steel.
2.3.3 Trim material shall be 316SS.
2.3.4 The end connection shall be 1/2" NPTF to ANSI B2.1 unless otherwise specified.
2.3.5 The packing material shall be teflon.
2.3.6 The handle/wrench material shall be cadmium or nickel plated carbon steel.
2.3.7 The valve body rating shall be ANSI 800 lb.
Document2
SPECIFICATION
ELECTRICAL & FOR
MECON LIMITED
Delhi
DELHI MANIFOLDS
2.3.8 End to end dimensions shall be 70mm (approximately).
3.0 TESTING
3.1 The instrument valves (miniature) shall be hydrostatically tested at 200kg/cm2 g at 38oC.
3.2 All manifolds (3 valve, 5 valve and 3 way, 2 valve ) shall be hydrostatically tested at 200
kg/cm2 at 38C.
3.3 The instrument air valves shall be hydrostatically tested at 15.0 kg/cm2g at 38oC and at
10.5 kg/cm2g with dry air.
4.0 SHIPPING
4.1 All threads/ends shall be protected with plastic caps to prevent damage/entry of foreign
matter.
5.0 REJECTION
Document2
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
INSTRUMENTATION
0 06.06.2005
Revision Date Prepared by Checked by Approved by

MECON LIMITED
DELHI SPECIFICATION FOR INSTRUMENTATION
ELECT. & INST. SPECIFICATION No. : MEC / S / 05 / E5 / I/ 08
SECTION Rev. 0 Page 1 of 15
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 DEFINITIONS
3.0 SCOPE OF WORK
4.0 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
5.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS TO BE PROVIDED BY OWNER
6.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR
7.0 SCRAP AND EXCESS MATERTIAL
8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTOR

MECON LIMITED
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.1 This part of the technical specifications covers in general, definitions, standards, scope of
works, specifications of work, documentation, scope of supply of materials and scrap and
excess materials and different requirements to be adhered to during the course of
execution of instrumentation works.
1.1.2 Instrumentation works shall be performed in accordance with this technical specification
and various other drawings and schedules supplied during the execution and time to time
instructions from Engineer-in-Charge or his authorised representative(s) during the
progress of the work.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Manifolds
2.1.1 For close coupled instruments "Manifold" shall mean complete piping of instruments from
first block valve upto the instruments, if the distance of the Instrument is within 2 feet
(0.6m), from the Instrument tapping. If the distance of instrument is more than 2 feet
(o.6m) from primary tapping such as orifice, then the installation is to be considered
under remote installation.
2.1.2 For remote mounted instrument, "Manifold" shall mean the assembly of nipples, valves
and fittings around the instrument to form a block and bleed or by pass manifold or drain
manifold as the case may be. These shall be generally according to the hook up
drawings enclosed with tender. Wherever the instruments are with 3--way-valve
manifold, this definition shall not be applicable as 3-way manifold forms part of
instrument.
2.2 First block valve
First block valve shall mean the valve/valves that are mounted directly on equipment,
columns, pipe, standpipe etc. and shall be operated to isolate the instrument and
connected instrument piping from the above items.
2.3 Supports
Supports shall mean the MS angles, flats, channels that are generally provided to support
the main cable ways, cable ducts, junction boxes, angle trays, perforated trays,
instrument piping, signal tubing, instrument air supply lines etc., at specified intervals
from the structures, concrete columns etc. to keep all items firmly secured against
vibration, warping, bending etc.
MECON LIMITED
2.4 Scrap
2.4.1 Salvageable scraps
Salvage scrap shall mean lengths of tubes, pipes, multicables, other cables etc. that can
be used one time or other at later date and normally they are recovered from the
cut-pieces of tubes, pipes, multicables, cables, etc.
2.4.2 Non Salvageable Scrap
Non salvagable scrap shall mean the lengths of tubes, pipes, multicables, cables, etc. that
cannot be used at all one time or other.
2.5 Standards
The instrumentation erection and calibration works shall be carried out generally in
accordance with various international and Indian standards in instrumentation listed
below but not limited to the following:
2.5.1 API-RP-550 Manual on Practices for instrumentation.
2.5.2 ISA standards and Practices for instrumentation
2.5.3 Instrumentation hook-up standards enclosed.
2.5.4 Instrumentation supports standard enclosed.
2.5.5 Manufacturer's standards and Practices.
3.0 SCOPE OF WORK
3.1.0 The Scope of work shall consist of supply of instrument items (as per schedule of
quantities/rates and SCC), instruments, their erection, testing, calibration and
commissioning and making it ready for commercial operation. The scope covers various
jobs listed under the schedule of quantities/rates. However to ensure proper execution
and completeness of instrument--work any or all of the following shall also form the part
of the scope and shall be covered in the quoted rates.
3.1.1 Fabrication of pipe nipples, including threading whenever required.
3.1.2 Fabrication of seal pot/syphon/drain pot as per standards. Filling of seal pots with filling
liquids as per instructions from Engineer-in-charge.
3.1.3 Back/seal welding of screwed fittings as required by standards.
3.1.4 Laying of cable underground including excavation, sand filling, brick laying and back
filling.
MECON LIMITED
3.1.5 Connection of purging devices for instruments to the systems provide as per drawings.
3.1.6 Civil works including the casting of foundation as per requirements for instruments
supports where paved surface do not exist.
3.1.7 Minor civil works like chipping of pavement and grouting on the pavements the
instrument panels/supports/stanchions, and chipping and refilling of the pavement for
conduits.
3.1.8 Sealing of cables/tube entries into the control room after laying and testing of all tubes,
cables etc.
3.1.9 Degreasing of handwheels of control valves, stud bolts, nuts of side and bottom flange of
control valves, orifice plates, other primary elements flanges, oxygen service impulse
lines, instruments as per manufacturers instructions and other items as required by
Engineer- in-charge.
3.1.10 Rotation of control valve bonnet wherever required.
3.1.11 Reversing the action of control valves either a) replacement of springs, accessories or in
positioner wherever required.
3.1.12 Minor modification/repairs required to be done on the instruments namely, changing the
dial, glasses for pressure gauges, temperature gauges and other instruments,
replacement of rotameter tubes, level gauge glasses, replacement of damaged signal
tubes, threads, couplings etc.
3.1.13 Painting of all structural supports for trays, pipes, junction boxes, instruments, etc, as per
painting specification.
3.1.14 Identification with approved colour of paint the instruments/impulse, lines manifold
connected with alarm/trap circuit. Also, punching of tag numbers on items shall be
carried out as per instructions of Engineer-in-charge.
3.1.15 Coordination with mechanical and other sub-contractors for proper installation of
line/vessels/equipment mounted instruments like control valves, orifice assemblies,
turbine meters, PD meters, level transmitters, level gauges, level switches etc. which
involves removal of instruments, disconnection of tubes/cables, reconnection for
alignment proper installation etc.
3.1.16 Drilling holes on all panels, shut down cabinets, power supply cabinets, control panels
pneumatic enclosures etc., for cables/ multitubes/ glands/ groomats.
3.1.17 Grounding of shield of all shielded cables to respective instruments earth bus provided
in the control room/local panel/thermocouple head.
3.1.18 Laying and termination at both ends between instrument earth buses provided in control
room/local panel to instrument earth pit provided by others.
MECON LIMITED
3.1.19 Supply of all types of consumables required for the execution of the job.
3.1.20 Submission of monthly material appropriation statements for cables, piping materials
fittings, including the quantity issued and expended in standard proforma.
3.1.21 Completion of owners drawings/documents, as per the execution of work at site.
3.1.22 Preparation and submission of as built drawings as required.
3.1.23 Start-up and commissioning.
3.1.24 Submission of final material appropriation statements for all the materials issued by the
owner.
3.1.25 Any other work not mentioned above, but required for the proper execution of the works.
3.1.26 Where requested by owner/Engineer-in-charge or his authorised representatives, all or

any of the works detailed above and schedule quantities shall also be performed on
package units, local panels/cabinets/gauge board installed by owner or by others.
3.1.27 Sealing of safety valves/switches with standard lead seals after final setting in the
presence of Engineer- in-charge.
4.0 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
4.1.0 INSTRUMENT PIPING
4.1.1 All primary piping shall be installed in the best workman like manner and shall follow
installation standards in each case. Where there is no installation standard, the
instruction of the Engineer-in-charge shall be followed.
4.1.2 Horizontal and vertical lines shall be installed using levels and plumo bobs.
4.1.3 Unless otherwise specified in the drawings pipelines shall have a slope of 8% on the
horizontal runs.
4.1.4 All welding shall be carried out as per welding procedures and codes with electrodes
approved by Engineer-in-charge. Only qualified welders approved by Engineer-in-charge
shall carry out welding. Charges for non-destructive testing like radiography, Dye
penetration tests, post heat treatment tests and stress relieving shall be carried out on
the basis of actual man hours spent towards these works and manhour charges with cost
of all materials, test equipments, etc. shall be used. However, any materials like
electrode, equipments etc. shall be used. However, any materials like electrode,
equipments, testing charges for various tests, etc., required for the initial qualification of
the welder/welders shall be or the scope of the contractor.
4.1.5 Pipe shall be bent using pipe benders only and any bending will be totally rejected. Pipes
shall be cut using pipe cutting device. Hot cutting will not be allowed.
MECON LIMITED
4.1.6 Piping for steam tracing shall be installed according to the standards and avoiding
condensate pockets.
4.1.7 All threaded joints shall be jointed with teflon tape and no other pipe jointing compound
shall be used except on high temperature service where graphited sealing compounds
shall be used.
4.1.8 All primary piping shall be properly supported at regular intervals of 1.0 meters. Angle
supports shall be fabricated from 40mmx40mmx5mm MS angles as minimum.
4.2.0 PVC COVERED/BARE TUBE (COPPER/SS/ALUMINIUM)
4.2.1 Single copper/SS/Aluminum tubes shall be laid as per standards on trays. Fabricated out
of 2.5 mm thick perforated steel plate. The width of the trays shall be selected as per the
number of tubes laid. Tubes shall be clamped to the trays at every 300 mm using clamps
made of galvanized steel/Aluminum strips. The practice of flattening tubes for clamping
purposes shall be avoided. In case of PVC covered tubes, any exposed portion at ends
and connection shall be neatly taped tp appropriate thickness.
4.2.2 Trays shall be properly supported either from any rigid steel structure or concrete
member as detailed under trays and supports below.
4.2.3 All male/female tube connectors shall be installed with Teflon tape only. Identification
tag plates/ferrules shall be provided on either side of copper tubing as per
tubing/junction box schedules. Ferrules shall be single sleeve type with letters and
numbers neatly printed.
4.3.0 INSTALLATION OF MULTITUBES AND MULTICORE CABLES
4.3.1 Multiple cables/multitubes shall always be installed on ducts/trays and properly clamped.
At every vertical drop to junction boxes, they shall be clamped at more frequency
intervals (Maximum of 300mm). They shall be connected inside junction boxes strictly
according to the number system as mentioned in cable schedule. At bends minimum
radius shall be maintained as per manufacturer's standard. The angle tray supports shall
be fabricated from 40mmx40mmx5mm angles minimum size.
4.3.2 Identification tags shall be provided on either end of multitube, multicore cables as per
cable/tubing/cable schedules. Engraved tag plates or PVC ferrules shall be used for
identification of tubes/cables.
4.3.3 All Multitubes and Multicables shall be cut after the exact site measurements are taken
between ends and the cable/tube drums shall be selected before cutting the lengths so
as to avoid any wastage.
4.3.4 In the field, the cables shall be laid in perforated trays as per layout drawings. Cables
shall also be buried or laid in concrete trenches. Inside control room, these shall be laid in
concrete trenches or under false floorings.
MECON LIMITED
4.3.5 In the field, the cables shall be laid in perforated trays as per layout drawings. Cables
shall also be buried or laid in concrete trenches. Inside control room, these shall be laid in
concrete trenches or under false floorings.
4.4.0 INSTALLATION OF INSTRUMENTS
4.4.1 All instruments shall be generally installed on supports as per installation standards in
each case, and shall be accessible.
4.4.2 Receiver gauges shall be mounted on instrument support itself as per tubing hook up
standards.
4.4.3 Filter regulators shall be mounted on the instruments support itself below the instruments
or on the control yoke.
4.5.0 INSTRUMENT AIR SUPPLY
4.5.1 The main instrument air header in each area is laid by other contractor. Air supply from
the main air header take off valve to individual instrument shall be through either
galvanized steel pipe or 1/4" OD PVC covered copper tube or SS tubes.
4.5.2 Individual takes off valves shall always be located on top of the main air header. Unions
shall be provided at convenient locations. There shall be one isolation valve at each
instrument end. The galvanised pipe shall be supported at a minimum interval of 1000
mm with 40mmx40mmx5mm MS angles. Final connection to be instrument shall be
copper/SS tubing as per tubing hookup standards.
4.5.3 Teflon tapes shall be used on all threaded joints.
4.6.0 INSTRUMENT STEAM TRACING
4.6.1 The mainsteam header in each area is laid by the other contractor. From the main steam
header take off valve, steam to individual instrument shall be taken through carbon steel
pipes supported at regular intervals. Steam tracing around individual instruments shall
be to copper tubes. After steam tracing, the line is connected to the drain funnel
through individual steam trap/condensate return header/tapper point as the case may be.
4.6.2 Electrical tracing shall be done by others.
4.7.0 PERFORATED TRAYS AND SUPPORTS
4.7.1 The perforated trays/angle trays shall be properly supported at a regular interval of max.
1000mm from insert plates or steel structures. Wherever insert plates are not available
supports on concrete structures on ceiling shall be fixed with a minimum 10mm diameter
expansion bolts. Angle supports for perforated trays/angle trays shall be fabricated from
40mmx40mmx5mm M.S. angles minimum size.
4.7.2 All supports shall be cut with hacksaw and any work executed by gas cutting for cutting
MECON LIMITED
and drilling holes will be totally rejected. Free ends of angle support shall not have sharp
edges and shall be properly rounded off.
4.7.3 Perforated trays/angle trays shall be used for branching cables and tubes from main
trays. Perforated trays shall be used for branching cables and tubes from main trays.
Perforated trays shall be fabricated out of 2.5 mm perforated steel sheet. Width of trays
shall be selected according to number of tubes and cables. Trays shall be laid generally
as per site conditions with the approval of Engineer-in-charge.
4.8.0 LAYING OF CABLES
4.8.1 All cables shall be laid in accordance with installation drawings and cable schedules.
Before laying, cable/multicable on drums shall be meggered and tested to ascertain the
transit damages.
4.8.2 All cables routes shall be carefully measured and cables cut to the required lengths,
leaving sufficient amount for the final connection of the cable to the terminals on either
end. The various cable lengths cut from the cable reels shall be carefully selected to
prevent undue wastage of cables. Sufficient extra length of cable shall be kept at the
terminal on points.
4.8.3 Cables shall have complete uncut lengths from one terminal to the other.
4.8.4 All cables shall be identified close to their termination point by cables number as per
cable schedules/junction boxes schedules. PVC ferrule/tag plate shall be used and these
identification tags shall be securely fastened to the cables.
4.8.5 All cores of electrical cables shall be identified by their wire numbers by means of the PVC
ferrules. Wire numbers shall be as per schedules. All temporary ends of cables shall be
protected against dirt and moisture. For this purpose, ends of all PVC insulation cables
shall be taped with an approved PVC or rubber insulating tape. Use of function type or
other fabric type is not permitted.
4.8.6 The cable shall be bent in a large radius. Cables installed above ground shall be run
exposed on walls, ceilings, structures and shall run parallel or at right angles with beams,
walls or columns.
4.8.7 Cables shall be rigidly supported on structural steel and masonary individually or in
groups as required using galvanised clips, multiple cable supports or cable trays. If
drilling of steel must be resorted to, approval must be obtained and steel must be drilled
where the minimum of weakening of the structure will result. Cable shall be supported at
every 500 mm.
4.8.8 All special cables and power supply cables will be laid directly to the field instrument
without any junction boxes, unless otherwise specified.
4.8.9 While laying cable in trenches or burying them care shall be taken to ensure that low
signal cables like alarm, analyser cables, special cables, special cables from turbine
meters, compensating cable etc. are separated from other power supply cables.
4.8.10 Each underground cable (either in concrete trenches or burried) shall be provided with
MECON LIMITED
identifying tag of lead securely fastened every 30m of its underground length with atleast
one tag at each end before the cable leaves/enters the ground.
4.8.11 Directly buried cables shall be laid underground in excavated cable trench wherever
specified in layout drawings. Trenches shall have sufficient depth and width to
accommodate all cables correctly spaced. Before cables are placed the trench bottom
shall be filled with 100 mm layer of sand and leveled. Each layer of cables shall be
covered with 150 mm of sand on top and sand shall be lightly pressed. A protective
covering of 75 mm thick second-class red bricks shall be placed flat on the final layer of
sand and cable. The remaining portion of the trench shall be then back filled with soil
compacted and leveled. On complete of every group of cable laying and before sand
filling, every cable shall be given insulation test in the presence of Engineer-in-charge.
Any cable proved to be defective should be replaced before the next groups of cables are
laid. Cable route markers indicating number of cables, depth and direction will be placed
enroute, on crossovers/turnings, etc. to mark the cable route.
4.8.12 At each road crossings and other places, where cables enter pipe sleeves, adequate bed
of sand shall be given so that the cables do not slack and get damaged by pipe ends
after pack filling.
4.8.13 At the entry into concrete blocks at road crossings cable loops shall be provided at either
end to prevent any damage to cables. Each cable shall have one tag at each end before
the cable enters/leaves conduct pipes
4.8.14 After laying of all the cables and multitubings, cables, the cable entry to control room
shall be suitably filled and sealed so as to achieve a positive seal against the entry of
gas/water.
4.8.15 All cables and tubes shall be laid in accordance with the layout drawings with sand and
precast concrete slabs shall be placed on the trench.
4.8.16 On completion of cable laying in concrete trenches, the trenches shall be filled with
sand and precast.
4.9.0 EARTHING
4.9.1 Earthing of junction boxes, local cabinets as per the documents and instruction from
Engineer-in-charge.
4.10.0 PAINTING
4.10.1 This part of the specification is applicable to cable ducts, MS cable ways, angle trays,
instrument supports, perforated trays, all structural supports for the above items, etc.
4.10.2 The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush, sand paper to
remove all scales. After cleaning, the surface is painted with one coat of red oxide zinc
chromate primer conforming to IS- 207 and allowed to dry completely.
4.10.3 Primer coated surface is painted with one coat of paint to the colour nearest to the final
paint and allowed to dry. The colour number shall be specified from IS-5.
MECON LIMITED
4.10.4 Final second coating shall be with the paint of desired colours and shall be selected
from IS-5.
4.10.5 It shall be noted that final second coating of external surfaces not covered by cables,
copper tubes etc. shall be applied just before handling over the plant or commissioning of
the plant whichever is earlier.
4.10.6 The name of manufacturer, colour and quality of all types of primer paint shall be subject
to approval of Engineer-in-charge.
4.11.0 TESTING
4.11.1 Electrical cables for signal power supply alarms, and compensating cables for
thermocouples; resistance thermometer cables shall be checked for megger values and
continuity before proper termination and ferruling.
4.11.2 Testing shall be carried out after the installation of instrument with primary piping
complete in all respects and approved by Engineer-in-charge.
4.11.3 Primary piping shall be tested hydraulically pneumatically to 1.5 times the operating
pressure after isolating the instruments. Flushing of piping shall be carried out as per
instructions of Engineer-in-charge. Lines shall be blown after hydro-testing. All external
displacement /float type level instrument level gauges shall also be tested as per
instructions of Engineer- in-charge.
4.11.4 Tubes and air line shall be tested with compressed air to 7 kg/cm2 upto the filter
regulator. The down steam side of the filter regulator shall be tested for 1.5kg/cm2. The
lines shall be blown with the instrument air upto the regulator for 15 minutes to remove
any traces of oil, dust & moisture. All lines shall be checked with soap solution and
bubbler unit for possible leak at joints. After pressurizing, source shall be cut off and rate
of fall in pressure shall be less than 1 p.s.i. for each 100 ft. of copper tubing for a test
period of 2 minutes as per I.S.A.R.P.7-1 "Pneumatic control circuit pressure test".
4.11.5 All test results shall be recorded in the approved format.
4.12.0 CALIBRATION
4.12.1 All instruments shall be calibrated strictly as per manufacturer's instructions prior to
installation. The scope of calibration includes all field and control rooms of all types
namely, pneumatic, electronic, electrical etc.
4.12.2 Contractor shall use his own oil free instruments, air compressor for calibration purposes.
MECON LIMITED
4.12.3 The level switches (external cage type) shall be set by filling the cage with water to the
desired alarm/trip level, while setting the switches, it shall be ensured that the micro
switches do not reset for full rated travel of the float.
4.12.4 Control valves and positioners shall be checked for hysterisis and linearity and calibration
for rated strokes. Prior to calibration, valves shall be cleaned externally. The stem is
then lubricated if required, and stroked few times to extreme positions of plug to ensure
that movement is free from friction. The valve shall then be calibrated for rated stroke
and linearity also. Subsequently the valves shall be checked for hysterisis to the accuracy
of 1% FS with positioners and 5% FS without positioners.
Stroke speed has to be evaluated for all trip/shutdown valves.
4.12.5 All calibrations reading shall be recorded in the enclosed format and submitted to
Engineer-in-Charge for approval. Where significant deviations from specifications are
obtained, the matter shall be brought to the immediate notice of the Engineer-in- Charge
for corrective actions.
4.12.6 Furnished hereunder is a list of recommended calibration and test equipments required as
a minimum for calibration work. The contractor shall clearly state in his offers the
complete list of calibration and test equipments along with the range, accuracy and
quantity, which he proposes to use for this job. Contractor should also ensure that any
equipment not listed below but required at the time of calibration shall be made available
at his own cost.
4.12.7 All test equipments/kits shall be approved by NPL authorities.
4.12.7.1 Controller test stands Mft. Standard
4.12.7.2 Indicator/recorder test stands -do-
4.12.7.3 Squeeze bulb (Flow calibrator) -

Range: 0-770, 10,000 mm wg.
4.12.7.4 Dead weight testers (Budenberg or equivalent) - +/- 0.1%

For ranges upto 350 kg/cm2
4.12.7.5 Gauge comparator for pressure gauges -

Rating : upto 350 kg/cm2
4.12.7.6 Oil bath for temperature calibrations Mfr's Std

max. Temp 350oC.
4.12.8.7 Standard Mercury in glass thermometers

Range : -50 to + 50oC. 0 to 100oC +_ 0.25%
(NPL certified) 0-250oC, 0-350oC
4.12.7.8 Standard gauges for Ranges upto 350kg/cm2 +
_ 0.25%
4.12.7.9 U-tube differential manometers/inclined

tube manometer Static pr. rating : 7 kg/cm2 +_ 1mm
MECON LIMITED
4.12.7.10 Single leg manometers +_ 1mm

Scale: -1500 mm water and 1500 mm hg.
Static pr. rating : 7 kg/cm2.
4.12.7.11 Decade resistance box MFR' std.
4.12.7.12 Millimeters +
_ 0.05Mv
4.12.7.13 Potentiometer -
(Cable of generating and measuring mV)
4.12.7.14 Meggers 500V/1000V -
4.12.7.15 Air hydro pump/hydraulic pump -
4.12.7.16 Vacuum pump -
4.12.7.17 Instrument air compressor with filters and -

Regulators and deoilers.
4.12.7.18 Current generator (instrument checker) -

4-20mA dc(YEW make or equivalent)
4.13.0 LOOP TEST
4.13.1 Loop test shall be performed after calibration of all instruments and leak test of signal
lines. Loop tests are conducted to check the functional performance of all elements
comprising the loop, thereby ensuring proper connections and operations.
4.13.2 Before proceeding for loop tests the calibration results of individual elements shall be
recorded on the enclosed proforma and shall get it approved by Engineer-in-Charge for
correctness of installation, measurements and calibration results.
4.13.3 Loop testing for all control loops shall be generally by simulation of process conditions
and shall fix points namely 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of full scale inputs. Detailed
procedure shall be submitted to Engineer-in-charge for approval before proceeding with
the loop testing.
4.13.4 In case of shutdown system field/receiver pressure switches are simulated for
abnormality by disconnecting the wires at terminal and function of all associated systems
are checked.
4.13.5 Performance of individual loops may be accepted for an overall accuracy of+
_ 1.5% where
deviations exist, contractor shall recalibrate the instruments, which form part of loop
testing wherever required, at no extra cost.
4.13.6 After the loop test is complete, the contractor shall connect back any terminations and
connections removed for loop test.
MECON LIMITED
4.13.7 A loop shall be considered as handed over only after measurements in that particular
loop are complete and certified by Engineer-in-Charge, in addition to loop sheets being
duly filled in all respects and approved and accepted by Engineer-in-Charge and client.
4.13.8 In case of loops in which certain instruments of the loops are calibrated by other agency,
loop testing shall be performed in coordination with the agency involved. Any defect in
the calibration of the instrument in contractor’s scope is observed, it shall be rectified to
the satisfaction of the Engineer-in- Charge. However, defect in calibration of the
instruments in the scope of other agency, same shall be rectified by the agency involved.
After the calibration has been rechecked by the other agency/agencies the loop checking
would be performed to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge, and this part covers under
the scope of the contract.
4.13.9 Final certified loop sheets shall be submitted in 4 copies and one transparency.
5.0.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS TO BE SUPPLIED FOR EXECUTION BY OWNER/ENGINEER

IN CHARGE
5.1.1 Piping ad Instrumentation diagrams.
5.1.2 General layout plan for all units, showing all information like position of field instruments
junction boxes indicative routes of cables, main ducts/cable trays.
5.1.3 Cable schedules for alarm, signal, shutdown, power supply and pneumatic cables,
earthing guide lines.
5.1.4 Termination details/drawings for connecting at control room end.
5.1.5 Individual Instrument specifications
5.1.6 Bill of materials
5.1.7 Installation standards/ Hook-up
5.1.8 Manufacturers hand book with instructions for installation and calibration wherever
necessary for reference.
6.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR
6.1.1 The drawings for materials that are included on their supply and erection scope namely
local control, panel, junction boxes, local cabinets.
6.1.2 The detailed engineering drawing wherever such drawing is assigned.
6.1.3 Two sets of layout drawings, standards bill of materials cable schedules etc., duly
incorporating the changes/modification carried out during the course of execution of
works.
MECON LIMITED
6.1.4 Final material appropriation statement for all free issue materials indicating shortages of
any in the proforma duly approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
7.1.0 SCRAP AND EXCESS MATERIAL
7.1.1 Every month, the contractor shall submit an account for all the materials issued by the
Owner in the standard proforma prescribed for this purpose by the Engineer- in-Charge.
7.1.2 On completion of the work, the contractor shall submit `Material appropriation'
statements for all materials issued by the Owner in the proforma prescribed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
7.1.3 The following scrap allowances are permissible.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Length below Non-salvageable Unaccountable
0.5 mm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Steel pipes, SS 2% 0.5%
Tubes single pair/
Twocore three
Core cables.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
length below Non-salvageable Unaccountable
20 m
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Multitube, 2% 0.5%
Multicables
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8.0 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTOR :
8.1.4 All excess materials and scrap shall be returned after duly accounting for, to the storage
points designated by the Owner. Where materials are to be weighed before return, the
contractor shall be responsible for making the necessary section obtained during the
course of construction for fabricating temporary supports or other items, without prior
permission of the Engineer- in-Charge.
8.1.5 If the contractor fails to return the surplus material as aforesaid, the owner will charge
the contractor for such unreturned materials at panel rates, which will deducted from
whatever amount is due to the contractor. In case any material issued by the Owner
deteriorates during storage by the contractor, new materials will be issued to him at
penal rates, but the delay in procuring such materials will be at the contractor's account
only.
****************
MECON LIMITED SPECIFICATION OF OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
DELHI & HDPE DUCT LAYING & ASSOCIATED WORKS
ELECT. & INST. SPECIFICATION No. : MEC / S / 05 / E5 / T / 001
SPECIFICATION OF
OPTICAL FIBER CABLE & HDPE DUCT
LAYING AND ASSOCIATED WORKS
SPECIFICATION No. : MEC / S / 05 / E5 / T / 001
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
0 27.09.2005 Sudhir Rakesh Shukla Pankaj Shrivastava

INDEX
SECTION 1
1.1 INTRODUCTION
1.2 SPECIAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDER
SECTION 2
2.1 DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER
SECTION 3
3.1 GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR THE BIDDER
SECTION 4
4.1 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (for information only)

4.2 JOINTING CLOSURES (for information only)
4.3 PERMANENTLY LUBRICATED HDPE CONDUIT
5.0 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE LAYING
6.0 PERMANENTLY LUBRICATED HDPE CONDUIT LAYING
SECTION 5
VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS & DOCUMENTATION
VENDOR’S SITE OFFICE
TESTING & FINAL DOCUMENTATION
SECTION 6
(ANNEXURE DRAWINGS/ SKETCH) (Applicable drawing highlighted)
MEC/05/E5/T/001 REV 0 MEC/05/E5/T/001A REV 0

MEC/05/E5/T/002 REV 0 MEC/05/E5/T/002 A REV 0
MEC/05/E5/T/006 REV 0 MEC/05/E5/T/007 REV 0
SECTION 1
1.1 INTRODUCTION
An Optical Fiber (OFC) system for the Telecommunication requirements has been most suitable
for gas pipeline project. Laying of OFC along with pipeline are present trend to economized the
project cost. The type, mode of laying are varied as per project requirement. Various options
mostly used for pipeline project are covered here. Bidder shall refer respective Scope of Work and
Schedule of Rates of project for details of suitable option, type of cable and laying process.
This specification covers the minimum requirement and guidelines for various activities to be
carried out by the contractor. As part of project, this Document / specification provides guideline
to be followed for Laying of HDPE duct, Blowing / Laying of Optical fiber cable alone or through
duct along the pipeline route. It also covers guidelines for Jointing and testing of the cable, HDPE
conduit and associated work.
Various proposed option for Scope of Work related to OFC and HDPE duct laying are defined as :
a) OFC to be laid directly burial type to meet the present telecommunication requirements. OFC shall be
laid in the same trench as that of the pipeline.
b) OFC to be laid directly burial type to meet the present telecommunication requirements and one HDPE
(PLE HDPE) telecom duct shall be laid for future requirement of telecommunication. The both the
HDPE duct and OFC shall be laid in the same trench as that of the pipeline.
c) OFC to be laid by blowing technique in permanently lubricated silicore lined HDPE (PLE HDPE)
telecom duct (Conduit) to meet the present telecommunication requirements and one HDPE (PLE
HDPE) telecom duct shall be laid for future requirement of telecommunication. The both the HDPE
duct and OFC shall be laid in the same trench as that of the pipeline.
1.2 SPECIAL INSTRUCTION TO BIDDER
1.2.1 Agency (Vendor / Contractor) that makes the bid in its name and takes the total responsibility for
the job irrespective of support from any other sub-agency.
1.2.2 Sub-agency identified by the bidder at the bid stage for execution of a predefined part of the work
and details has to be maintained in bid.
1.2.2 The Scope of supply, works, and technical requirements is expiated stated in the Bid document.
Bidder is required to study these requirements in detail and make the offer complete in all respects
leaving no scope for ambiguity.
SECTION 2
DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER
(Bidder shall furnished this information at the time of their offer and it will be part of contract for
successful bidder)
Bidder shall provide below details of specific experience of the party responsible for HDPE conduit
laying, Laying / Blowing of Optical Fiber Cable through HDPE conduit, jointing of HDPE conduit,
Optical Fibre cable & testing of HDPE and Optical Fibre cable. The experience record shall be
elaborated below, enclosing the copies of the work order & completion certificates. Only those
parties shall be accepted for the works, which have proven experience as asked below. Bidder to fill
blank (marked (b)), of this form:
(The information necessarily to be submitted during the Bid submission otherwise their offer may be
rejected / disqualified for OFC work)
Sl. No. Description Specification Column to be

filled by bidder
1 Name & address of the party responsible for Laying, (b)
jointing and testing of HDPE conduit in this project.
1.1 Whether the party has done similar works of laying of > 50 km in Yes / No
HDPE conduit one stretch
1.2 Project name, description, client name, telephone & fax no. (b)
of contact person for works done in Sl. No. 1.1 above.
1.3 Date of completion of work in Sl. No. 1.1 above (b)
1.4 Length of works in Sl. No. 1.1 above In kms (b)
1.5 Supporting documents for works in Sl. No. 1.1 above (a) Enclosed Yes / No
work order (b) completion certificate
2 Name & address of the party responsible Laying of optical (b)
fiber cable for direct underground burial/Blowing
application in this project.
2.1 Whether the party has done similar works optical fiber > 50 km cable Yes / No
cable.
2.2 Project names, description, client name, and telephone & fax (b)
no. of contact person for works done in Sl. No. 1 above
2.3 Date of completion of work in Sl. No. 1.1 above (b)
2.4 Length of works in Sl. No. 2.1 above In kms (b)
3 Name & Address of the party responsible for jointing and (b)
testing of Optical fibre cable in this project
3.1 Whether the party has done similar works of jointing and > 50 km cable Yes / No
testing of Optical fibre cable.
3.2 Project name, description, client name, telephone & fax no. (b)
of contact person for works done in Sl. No. 3.1 above.
Sl. No. Description Specification Column to be

filled by bidder
3.3 Date of completion of work in Sl No. 3.1 above (b)
3.4 Length of works in Sl. No. 3.1 above. In kms (b)
Data for the supply of Accessories related to work specified in this document. Bidder to fill up blank
spaces (marked (b)), of this form. Legend: NA – Not applicable. This section is applicable for the
supply of these items, if required.
Sl. No. Description Fill column Specifications meet Bid

document (Yes / No)
1) Permanently Lubricated HDPE conduit
Name and Address of manufacturer (b) (b)
Telephone and fax no. (b)
Name and Address of supplier in India (b)
Users certificate confirming satisfactory performance To be
for at least six months as on bid due date. enclosed
1.1 HDPE coupler

1.2 End Plugs (Before blowing of OFC)
1.3 Cable Sealing Plug
1.4 Duct sealing compound
Sl. No. Description Fill column Specifications meet Bid

document (Yes / No)
The Bidder shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for all works under this bid document. Bidder to
fill blank spaces (marked (b)), of this form. Legend : NA – Not applicable.
Sl. Description Performed by Place of execution

No (Provide name) of the activity
1.1 Single source responsibility with Performance guarantee Bidder NA
for successful completion of scope of work for this project.
1.2 HDPE conduit laying, sealing and testing (b) Site
1.3 Optical fiber cable Laying (b) Site
1.4 Optical fiber cable jointing & testing (b) Site
1.5 Documentation Bidder NA
Bidder shall specifically indicate the deviation related to technical work if any and give proper
justification with documentary evidence for specific deviation.
SECTION 3 (General Guidelines for Bidder):
3.1 The vendor shall be completely responsible for the successful completion of the job. However, to
ensure a good quality of workmanship, and the offered system, vendor shall prepare and submit
the documents for approval by the Owner / Consultant.
3.2 Vendor shall be totally responsible for the completion of project. In the event any modifications in
the specification included in the Bid document are warranted, he shall clearly spell out all such
requirements at the time of submission of his offer a deviation list for review and approval of
owner and consultant.
Vendor may improve upon specification, in such case vendor shall list out all proposed
improvements in Deviation list form along-with his offer for review and approval of owner and
consultant.
3.3 If during the course of execution of the work, any discrepancy or inconsistency, error or omission
in any or the provisions of the contact is discovered, the same shall be referred to the Consultant
for final decision & instruction. He will direct the manner in which the work is to be carried out.
The decision of the Owner/Consultant shall be final and conclusive and the vendor shall carry out
the work in accordance therewith.
3.4 The data provided in the bid document shall be used for reference purposes for the Bidder. It shall
be the bidder’s responsibility to verify the data & satisfy him in regard to accuracy & utility of
their data.
3.5 Splicing and jointing requirements in addition to above, arising out of any negligence on behalf of
the vendor shall be the responsibility of the vendor. In such case, the vendor shall take necessary
rectification action at his on cost including necessary materials.
SECTION 4 (SUB-SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS)
4.1 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE (for information only)
The selected vendor, before execution of the job may collect the final Optical Fiber cable
specification.
GENERAL:
Corrugated steel tape armored cable or Galvanized steel wire armored optical cable shall be
required and it has to cross various roads, railways, canals, small rivers, marshy areas etc. through
appropriate casings & directly as per site conditions.
The intent of the following specifications is to establish the minimum requirements and guidelines
for the Optical fiber cable to be used for this project. Wherever in this section “bidder to
specify/bidder to provide” is mentioned, same information can be collected after the award of the
contract.
4.1.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF FIBERS
4.1.1.1 General
The fiber shall fulfil latest ITU-T Recommendation G-652 & G-655 for single mode
optical fibers.
a) Total number of fibers Twelve (12) /Twenty four (24)

b) Type G.6.25 (12) / G.652 Eighteen (18),G.655 Six(6)
4.1.1.2 Geometrical, optical & physical characteristics of optical fibers
a) Mode field diameter Bidder to specify

b) Cladding diameter 125 µm + 2%
c) Mode field concentricity error Less than 1 µm
d) Cladding non-circularity Less than 2%
e) Cut-Off wavelength Bidder to specify
f) Protective materials/coatings Optical fibers shall be coated with UV cured
double Acrylic Resin. It should not have any
reaction with cladding or core material.
g) Nominal Overall thickness 250 µm
The coatings should provide max. Resistance to micro bending & abrasion and ensure mechanical
& optical strength. The coatings shall be easily stripped with mechanical tools.
Fiber Identification
The coating shall be in various colors in order to facilitate fiber identification. Fiber colors shall
correspond to IEC publications. The colors shall be durable. The colors should have colorfast
properties also in the presence of other materials during the lifetime of cable. The coating and the
color shall not react with surrounding jelly.
Each fiber and tube shall be identifiable thought the length of the cable in accordance with
following color sequence:
Tube Color of Fiber color Tube No. Color of tube Fiber color
No. tube
1 Blue Blue 7 Red Blue

Orange Orange
2 Orange Green 8 Black Green
Brown Brown
3 Green Slate 9 Yellow Slate
White White
4 Brown Red 10 Violet Red
Black Black
5 Slate Yellow 11 Pink Yellow
Violet Violet
6 White Pink 12 Aqua Pink
Aqua Aqua
4.1.1.3 Transmission characteristics of fibers
a) Attenuation The cabled fiber shall have attenuation coefficient 0.38

dB / km at 1310 mm wavelength region and 0.22, dB /
km at 1550 m wavelength region
b) Chromatic dispersion a) Less than 3.5 PS / NM. km at 1288 to 1339 NM
coefficient b) Less than 5.3 PS / nm. PS / nm. for 1271 to 1360 nm.
c) Polarization mode dispersion Less than 0.5 ps/ km ½
coefficient
4.1.2 CABLE CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION
4.1.2.1 General
a) Desired operating life of cable better than 35 years

b) Drum Length of CSTA, direct 2 or 4 km + 5%
underground type O.F. Cable
c)1 Cable weight in single drum Bidder to provide
(for nominal drum length)
c)2 No splicing shall be permitted on any fiber in a drum length of the cable.
d) Protection required
The cable shall be protected against damages from termite, fire, chemicals (such as oil. & natural
gas and other petroleum products), moisture and water, over the lifetime of the cable.
e) Cable identification
(i) The outer surface o the cable shall be permanently & legibly marked with color in contrast to the
outer sheath at regular intervals not exceeding one meter with name of client, name of
manufacturer, part number and ‘OPTICAL FIBER CABLE’. All the marking over OFC shall be
such that it should not be erased during field use.
(ii) The outer surface of each completed cable shall have sequentially numbered metric length markers
spaced at regular intervals of one meter.
f) Construction detail of cable
(i) Strength member:
Bidder has to specify (in case of metallic strength member, the same shall be provided
with suitable chemical coating to prevent corrosion).
(ii) Filling of Core :
The stranded tubes shall be filled with moisture resistant jelly, which should be compatible
with the coated fiber and the surroundings.
(iii) Number of fibers per tube : Two
(vi) Moisture barrier :
Polymer coated Aluminum tape placed longitudinally over the loose tubes. The tape shall
form a close fit around the cable core with a sealed overlap of 6 mm minimum.
Alternatively, water swellable tape or water swellable powder may be provided over the
tube.
(v) Inner sheath MDPE
Thickness of inner sheath 1.50 mm minimum Aluminium foil.
(vi) Armoring (Direct Underground burial type)
Corrugated steel (electrolytically chrome plated low carbon steels) tape both side coated
with ethylene acrylic copolymer applied longitudinally with minimum overlap of 6 mm
minimum.
Thickness of steel tape 0.15 mm minimum
Thickness of each polymer layer 0.04 mm minimum
(vii) Outer sheath HDPE
Thickness of outer sheath 1.50 mm minimum
(vii) Electrical continuity of the respective metallic layers shall be maintained between the
ends of the cable in each drum. The different metallic layers shall not be electrically
shorted to each other
4.1.2.2 Mechanical Characteristics of Cable
a) Temperature
Installation & operation 0° C to + 60° C
Storage 0° C to + 65° C
b) Tensile strength For CSTA cable 9.81 W Newton (W is weight of 1 km of cable in kg)
c) Cable weight in kg/km Bidder to specify
d) Minimum bending radius 20 * Cable diameter
4.1.2.3 Average splice loss 0.05 dB / Splice
4.2 JOINTING CLOSURES (for information only)
Jointing closure shall be suitable for armored and unarmored optical fiber cables of all
construction designs (slotted core, stranded tube, central tube). Jointing closures shall have 4 entry
ports to allow entry/exit of four optical fiber cables. The same shall have provision of
blocking/sealing of the ports, if not in use.
The fibers and their storage shall be managed with proper bend radius controls and protection. The
fiber organizer trays shall have provision of maximum 6 fibers per tray. The trays should be
hinged in such a manner that if moved about the hinge, the fibers Are not strained, kinked or
stressed. Also, it should be possible to work on the fibers on one tray without disturbing the fibers
o the other trays.
The jointing closure shall enable the metal parts of the cable and the internal metal parts of the
closure to be maintained at earth potential.
The sealing of the entry ports, shall provide adequate sealing and shall be capable of withstanding
an axial pull applied using 50 kg freely suspended weight of the cable, without using any
additional clamps, etc.
Jointing closures should be Dust tight (No dust ingress) and protected against immersion in water
(suitable for continuous immersion in saline water under 4-meter water-head). It should be
complete with all accessories including splice cassettes splice protection and all other accessories
including accessories for electrical continuity of metallic layer of optical fiber cable, etc along-
with instruction sheets.
The jointing closures shall be form one of the following recommended sub-vendors:
1) 3 M, 2) Raychem, 3) Siemens
The complete jointing closures including trays, joint protection sleeves etc shall be sourcing form
the above sub-vendors as a composite item.
4.3 SPECIFICATIOS OF PERMANTELY LUBRICATED CONDUIT:
The HDPE conduit shall be permanently lubricated with an inner layer of solid permanent
lubricant by co-extrusion method to minimize the internal coefficient of friction. The co-extruded
inner layer of above lubricant shall be continuous throughout the length of the HDPE conduit.
The HDPE conduits shall also be free of blisters. Shrink hooks, break and other defects. The
internal and external pipe surfaces shall be smooth. Pipes shall not display any stress edged
grooves or sink marks. The color of the pipes shall be orange and be uniform throughout. The
HDPE conduit shall unroll off the drums without snaking or waving having zero coil set.
Following are the mechanical and dimensional specifications of
HDPE conduit:
Pressure Rating : Min. 6 Kg/Cm2
Outer diameter : 4 0 mm.
Wall thickness : 4.0 +/- 0.3 mm
Tensile strength : 20 N/mm2 or better
Density : 940.0 – 950.0 kg/cum at 27° C
Melt Flow index : 0.4 to 0.95 gm/10 minutes at 90°
C under 5 Kg load
Intrinsic coefficient of friction : 0.06 (max) when tested with respect to Nylon
Impact strength : As per IS: 12235 (part 9), 1986
The pipes should confirm to following IS specifications:
1. IS – 7328 4. IS – 2530
2. IS – 9938 5. IS – 4984
3. ASTM D – 1693
HDPE conduit identification :
The outer surface of the HDPE conduit shall be permanently & legibly marked with color in
contrast to the outer sheath at regular intervals not exceeding one meter with name of client, name
of manufacturer and part number. All the markings over HDPE conduit shall be such that it should
not be erased during field use.
The outer surface of each completed cable shall have sequentially numbered metric length markers
spaced at regular intervals of one meter.
5.0 OPTICAL FIBER LAYING PROCEDURE
The cables shall be tested by the bidder himself in the cable drums at the designated stores at site,
before installation. The test results pasted on each drum and report to be submitted to site-in-
charge.
The vendor shall carry out all works concerning the cable laying. The cable shall be laid always on
the same side of the pipeline and any crossing of the pipeline shall be avoided. The trench
dimensions shall be so taken as to ensure proper laying of the cable including slackness. Vendor
shall plan the cable-laying schedule such that the complete drum-length of cable can be laid
without cutting in-between. The vendor shall prepare the cable drum schedule for this purpose.
DIRECT UNDERGROUND BURIAL:
The cable shall be laid in the pipeline trench on the right side of the pipeline in the direction of gas
flow specified by Section in charge. The cable shall be laid in the pipeline trench as shown in
Annexure Drawing.
Before laying the cable, 50 mm soft padding of sand or soft soil (riddled earth obtained by passing
through a sieve having meshes not exceeding 15 mm2, or of a natural soft ground not requiring
ridding) shall be done as shown in the drawings.
The cable laying (including excavation of trench and installation of cable) shall follow pipeline
lowering. The cable laying, testing and backfilling activities shall preferably be completed before
land restoration (e.g. bund preparation, leveling) is started by the pipeline crew.
The cable can be laid using a mobile reel system or a fixed reel system depending on the
characteristics of each section (excavation partially open, crossing etc.) The vendor shall establish
section the ways and means for the cable laying taking into account characteristics of the layout.
1) In case of a mobile reel system, the cable shall be laid directly on the prepared bed.
Only is special cases, the cable may be laid near the trench and later lowered manually.
The reel support shall be locked in position on the carrier or other means of transportation,
as to avoid any rotation on the vertical plane of the reel’s axis.
2) In case of a fixed reel system, the traction stress shall not be more than the permitted
resistance of the cable, prescribed by the cable manufacturer. The pin of the reel shall be
put on the proper track. The unwinding shall be supported by hand.
The cable shall be laid near the trench and later lowered in the bed manually, as to avoid damage
to the bed by the operators.
BLOWING / PULLING OF OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
Optical Fiber Cable will be blown into the laid HDPE conduit with the help of a compressor (with
minimum pressure of 8 bar and maximum pressure of 12 bar) with flow rate of minimum
10m3/minute) and a blowing machine. The blowing method involves feeding of Optical Fiber
Cable into the duct with the help of consistent high-pressure airflow, equally distributed along the
entire cable throughout the duct. The Contractor has to ensure the safe blowing of OFC into the
duct without any damage to the cable either internally. If at any stage of the project, any damage to
the cable due to blowing process is identified, then the Contractor will be fully responsible for that
has to ensure the rectification of the damage without any cost implications to the owner.
Optical Fiber Cable drum are available in the drum of 2/4 km nominal. There is possible that the
Contractor may not able to blow this length continuously. in this case the Contractor should follow
steps for safe blowing of OFC as the case may be:
For Example:-
1. Position the compressor and blowing machine at blowing pit C of 2 Km stretch

before A & B as shown below:
Blowing 1 km Blowing 1 Km Blowing

Pit A nominal Pit C nominal pit B
(Location of comp. &
Blowing machine)
2. Uncoil ~ 1 Km of cable in a figure of eight configuration and blow towards

blowing pit A and Coil 20 m of OFC in the blowing pit A. Now seal the duct end
at location A with the help of cable sealing plug.
3. Coil 20 m of OFC in the blowing pit at location C and seal the duct end with the
help of duct sealing compound.
4. Now uncoil the remaining Optical Fiber Cable from the drum in form of Figure of
8 to have an access to the other end of the cable.
5. Now blow this end of the cable towards the blowing pit B and coil 20 m of OFC
in the blowing pit B. Now seal the duct end at location B with the help of cable
sealing plug.
NOTE: Since the cable will be available in length of 2 or 4 KM +/- 5%, the cable length will
accordingly vary. So, the Contractor has to plan the location of blowing pits before laying of
HDPE conduit. The Contractor has to ensure that excess OFC is not coiled in the blowing pit
and also Optical Fiber cable does not fall short of the location of blowing pit. The Contractor
has to ensure the safe blowing of OFC for the complete stretch as shown in above figure. To
achieve the blowing of above shown stretch, blowing should be carried out downhill
wherever possible. The contractor has to do the preliminary survey for proper location of
the blowing equipment so that the blowing lengths are not reduced.
CABLE BLOWING PIT /CABLE PULLING PIT
The cable-blowing pit shall enclose HDPE section ends from both sides at every 1-km nominal
distance or as per direction of Engineer-in-charge. The cable-blowing pit shall be circular (Internal
diameter ~ 1200 mm) and made of reinforced concrete with lifting lungs cast into the lids during
contraction itself. The pit shall be provided with suitable arrangement for the entry of HDPE pipes
(50/40 mm outer dia ) from both side so that HDPE pipe should enter the pit at a height of 300
mm above the bottom level of the pit and to prevent entry of mud, insects etc.
CABLE JOINTING PIT
The cable blowing pit as described above will be used as Optical fiber Cable jointing pit every 2 or
4 km nominal distance because the OFC drum length is of 2/4 kM , so at every 2/4 kM nominal
distance this pit will be used to enclosed the OFC jointing enclosed of OFC jointing enclosure.
Contractor has to leave 20m coil of Optical Fiber Cable from both sides in to leave 20 m coil of
Optical Fiber Cable from both sides in the jointing pit i.e. total 40 m of OFC will be coiled in
jointing pit. Similarly the Contractor has to leave total 20 m of OFC in the blowing pit
SEALING OF HDPE CONDUIT AFTER BLOWING OF OFC
HDPE conduit will be selected with the help of cable sealing plugs after blowing of Optical Fiber
into the duct at jointing pit locations. HDPE conduits will be sealed with the help of Cable Duct
Sealing Compound after blowing of Optical Fiber cable into the duct at blowing pit locations.
Cable duct Sealing Compound should be no-toxic, vapor free and should not crack and fail due to
vibrations in the duct to temperature changes. Not other sealing material is to be used by the
Contractor to seal the ends of HDPE conduit with blown Optical Fiber cable at blowing pit
location.
The blowing/ jointing pit will completely filled with sand upto 30 cm from bottom level if the pit
prevent entry of rodents after blowing and jointing of OFC covering joint enclosure and HDPE
conduits completely.
5.1 CROSSING
(Road, Railways, Nullah, Canal, Minar/ Major River Crossings Cased, Uncased, Marshy area or
paddy fields.)
5.1.1 Cased Crossing
For pipeline crossing executed through using pipes or by boring/ jacking/HDD/Thrust Boring
methods (Refer Annexure Drawing)
In case of crossing to be done with boring/ jacking/ HDD/ Thrust Boring the OFC shall be laid in
HDPE conduit shall be Sub-contractor-ducted in a steel conduit. Easy-to-install cable sealing plug
shall be used to seal the ends of the conduit to prevent the ingress of water, dirt and rodents, which
may damage of OF Cable. The two ends of each conduit shall be sealed immediately after
installation of Sub-contractor-ducts and re-sealed when the cable has been installed inside the
conduit.
At bends and leading-in-points, a flexible PVC pipe may be used for protection and maintenance
of the required bending radius of minimum 20 time outer diameter of the cable.
5.1.2 Uncased Crossings:
For pipeline crossing executed through open cut:
For these crossing bidder shall lay the cable through the HDPE conduit. Length of HDPE pipe
shall be estimated with the help of survey documents & alignment sheets. For water crossings,
HDPE conduit shall be used till ~5m of the normal underground trench depth on either side. The
bank protection measure being provided for line pipe shall also be extended to take care of Optical
Fiber Cable. For road crossings, the HDPE conduits shall be extended for minimum 3 meters on
either side of the road. If casing is provided in open cut crossings then the OFC laying
methodology shall be similar to as explain above.
5.2 Terminal and Repeaters
Inside the boundary walls of the terminals and repeaters, the Optical Fiber Cable (s) from each
direction shall come to a common point & then shall be laid through HDPE conduit preferably
along the wall of the station upto and inside the telecom room. The same shall be similar to
Annexure Drawing but with cables/ conduit from both sides.
The HDPE pipe used for the leading-in of the Optical Fiber Cable into the telecom room shall be
below the ground level without getting exposed outside (which shall be properly sealed after cable
installation to avoid entry if rodents, insects, etc.). A 15m length of Optical Fiber Cable shall be
kept in the telecom room to facilities termination.
3.3 Tie-in Location
At all tie-in location the Optical Fiber Cable shall be laid in a separate trench 3 meter away from
the pipeline to avoid any damage to the Optical Fiber Cable. It shall be as per annexure drawing.
The Optical Fiber Cable trench shall extend to 5 meter on both sides of the tie-in locations. The
Optical Fiber Cable shall be suitable routed in the separate trench at all tie-in-location considering
minimum bending radius of the Optical Fiber Cable. At all these location, the cable shall be laid
through HDPE conduits for protection.
5.4 Joint Location
The trench shall be enlarged at the splicing points as needed to carry out the splicing works. The
enlargement shall be carried out on the same side of the conduits for protection.
5.5 FIBER TERMINATION CLOSURE (FTC)
5.5.1 TERMINATION
After entering the telecom room the cable shall be secured on `Steel Mesh’ or `Wire Mesh’ by the
help ties (-15 cable being kept in turns in oval from) this mesh shall have suitable chemical
coating/ painted to prevent corrosion. In case of painting, the color shall march the wall color.
Further, the cable shall be terminated of Fiber Termination Closure (FTC).
5.5.2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIBER TERMINATION CLOSURE
The FTC shall be wall-mounted type as suitable for the Optical Fiber Cable used for this project:
(24 Fibers). The FTC shall give grounding arrangement for all the metallic layers of the cable.
The cable shall be specified to pigtails on trays provided in the FTC. The connector side for the
pigtails shall be secured with suitable coupler/ through adapter provided as integral part of the
FTC itself. The FTC shall have trays suitable splicing maximum of 6 Fibers per tray. The
arrangement inside the FTC should be simple and in straight line.
FTC should have entry points for a minimum of 2 No. of Optical Cable (armored/ non-armored)
of diameter up to 20 mm with cable clamps to avoid entry of rodents/ dust in general. It should
have a minimum of 2 Nos. of outlets for taking out 24 Nos. Pigtail. The outlets should have cable
clamps. The FTC shall be from one of the following makes:
1) 3 M 2) Raychem 3) Krone.
The complete Fibre Termination Closure including trays, joint protection sleeves, pigtails, coupler
etc. shall be sourced from the above sub-venders as a composite items.
5.5.3 GROUNDING
Grounding arrangement should be provided with the FTC. It should include as minimum 2 Nos.
grounding shield bonds with nut and bolts for fixing to the armor of the OFC. 2 Nos. of grounding
cable of green color with suitable length & lugs clamped to its end for connecting the armor of
OFC with the grounding terminal of the FTC.
5.5.4 SINGLE MODE OPTICAL FIBER PIGTAIL & CONNECTORS TO BE USED IN THE FTC
The single mode fiber pigtails and connectors should meet the TU-T recommendations G-652 &
G-655 as required.
Both connectors and cable should be robust and should withstand wear and tear due to frequent
use, Connection and disconnection. Normal expected life should be 15 year or more.
Optical Fiber Cable, connections & pigtails shall be fully compatible and matching to each other.
6.0 LAYING OF PERMANENTLY LUBRICATED HDPE CONDUIT:
Permanently bid lubricated HDPE conduits shall be laid for installation of Optical Fibre Cable.
The conduits shall be continuous in length of 1 km. The HDPE laying will follow lowering of
pipeline. HDPE conduit should be laid in the pipeline trench bed along with OFC as per
Dwg./Sketch enclosed. The duct shall be placed over 50 mm soft padding of sand or soft soil
(riddled earth obtained by passing through a sieve having meshes not exceeding 15mm2, or of a
natural soft ground no requiring riddling) as shown in the drawing.
Contractor has to ensure the laying of HDPE conduit without any snaking or waving and the
HDPE conduit should rest on the trench bed i.e. the pipe should not hang n the trench bed. The
trench will be back filled after ensuring the correct positioning of HDPE conduit as mentioned
above. While back filling, the contractor has to ensure that the HDPE conduit is not hanging in the
trench bed.
Following procedure should be followed for laying HDPE conduits:
(A) Moving Trailer Method:
This method should be used when the path of duct does not contain any road/railway bores
or utility crossings. Following steps should be followed:
1. Fix the Jack Stand on the trailer properly.
2. Mount the duct coil reel/duct drum on the Jack stand.
3. Bring the trailer at the start point from where the duct is to be laid.
4. Move the trailer slowly along the trench route and uncoil the duct from the bottom
of the reel/drum and place into the trench. Avoid any over spinning of the duct
while uncoiling it from the drum.
(B) Manual Laying:
This method is used when there is an obstruction along the route. Following steps should
be followed:
1. Place the Jack stand along the side of the trench. Place the drum on the jack with
correct positioning of the drum i.e. the duct reel should uncoil from the bottom of
the drum. Duct reel should not uncoil form the top of the drum.
2. Rotate the drum slowly so that the duct comes off the drum slowly and the duct
reel should not overseen while pulling HDPE conduit for installation.
3. Unroll the duct to the required length spacing the workers after every 15 to 20
mtrs.
4. If any obstruction like utility crossings or road/railway crossings comes in then
ensure the HDPE conduit is drawn under the obstruction or through the crossing
without requiring joint in between.
5. The contractor can lay the duct into the trench either directly form the drum or
temporally lay the duct along the trench and then place it later in the trench.
C) Tensioning of the HDPE duct after laying :
1. Determine the direction of installation and set the reel. Duct should be unrolled
from the bottom of the coil.
2. Place the duct inside the trench.
3. Let two workers stand on the duct at start point and two other worker stretches the
duct, thereby giving tension, upto of 30-40 meters.
4. After covering the 30-40 meter backfill the trench at that point to hold the duct in
position and to avoid loss of tension.
5. Repeat the above procedure till the entire duct length of 1 KM laid with proper
tensioning.
6. Backfill the entire trenches.
To lay the next HDPE duct drum length, couple the laid HDPE ducts to the new drum to
be laid with the help of a coupler with same procedure explains above.
6.1 JOINTING OF HDPE CONDUITS:
In case of crossings there may be the possibility that laid HDPE section length may have
to be joined to other laid HDPE section length. The jointing of two ends of HDPE conduit
should strictly be done with the help of Coupler, which will be made of similar material.
Installation of HDPE coupler to join laid HDPE conduits should strictly bee done with the
help of C-spanners for proper tightening of Coupler. Joints may also likely to come up due
to road/ river/ nallah/ railways crossing. All efforts shall be made to minimize joints. The
coupling should be water and airtight and should be able to withstand minimum pressure
of 10 bar. Following procedure should be followed for jointing HDPE conduits:
1. Cut the two ducts that are to be jointed at the same place where they overlap.
Cutting should be done in such a way that the duct ends match with the coupler
perfectly because is very important that coupling joints be airtight. Proper pipe
shears or cutter must be used for smooth cutting Hacksaw should not be used to
cut the duct.
2. Debar both the inside and the outside edges of the duct with a debarring tool.
3. Apply a small amount of proper lubricant for better installation of plastic coupler.
4. Tighten the plastic coupler with C-Spanner.
6.2 SEALING OF HDPE CONDUIT:
The Contractor shall supply and put end plugs to seal the end of HDPE ducts after laying
of same to prevent ingress of sit, dust etc. Prior to back filling. The end plug should be
made of similar material as that HDPE conduit does not change its position due to heavy
impact of soils or due to any other cause.
6.3 HDPE CONDUIT TESTING AFTER LAYING:
HDPE conduits will be tested for proper laying, crush deformity and pressure testing. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible for any obstruction and deformity in the laid HDPE
conduit and shall have to remove the obstruction/ deformity of any kind before blowing
Optical Fiber Cable into the duct. Following tests are to be carried out on the laid HDPE.
1) Duct Cleaning:
Following steps are to be followed for cleaning the laid HDPE conduit:
♦ Compressed air should be blown through the duct in order to remove any dirt
and water that has accumulated inside the duct with the help of air
compressor. A short blast of air of about 1 bar shall be blown through the duct
for about 1 minute.
♦ Duct sponges will be blown through the duct to further remove any dirt and
water from the duct segment. Sponges should be blown into the duct clean and
a dry sponge comes out of the duct.
2) Duct Calibration and integrity Test:
♦ This test is to be done to check the roundness and the integrity of the duct.
During installation or backfill process there is possibility of flattening,
twisting or
kinking of the duct. This testing process shall be conducted by blowing a plug
or probe through the duct segment with compressed air.
♦ Calibration shall be done by a simple sender like small probe,which shall be
blown through the duct by compressed air. This probe shall be detectable
using a HF Detector.
♦ The calibration process shall be considered completed once the probe exits the
duct at the other end after an uninterrupted pass.
♦ When obstruction in the duct are found, these obstruction have to be removed
by removing the damaged or deformed portion of the duct and placing a new
section of duct.
3) Air Pressure Test :
♦ A static pressure test is to be carried out in order to verify air tightness for the
purpose of cable blowing as well as to prevent ingress of water or dirt during
the lifetime of the duct.
♦ To verify the air tightness, pressure inside the duct should be brought up to 10
bar for two minutes. A pressure drop of 0 to 0.5 bar per minute of the test is
acceptable. If a higher-pressure drop is detected, no further test should be
conducted until the leak has been located and repaired.
♦ After pressure teasing duct ends should be sealed with the help of duct plugs
to prevent entering of any dirt and water inside it.
After testing the duct any obstruction both the ends of HDPE conduit shall be plugged
again using end plugs.
BACK-FILLING
250 mm padding of sand / soft soil shall be done covering the HDPE conduit and then a warning
mat (PVC sheet, red color, warning in white, 150mm * 0.1mm in the Bidders scope) shall be
placed. After proper padding of the warning mat for min 100mm, the trench shall be backfilled.
WARNING MAT
Bidder shall supply the warning mat as per the MECON Specification No. MEC/TS/05/62/042,
Rev-0 and provide Warning mat before back filling. It is Bidder / vendor’s responsibility to collect
the information to be printed on the Warning mat before manufacturing. Vendor has to submit
Sample print and the all test certificates as per specification to Owner /consultant for review before final
dispatch at site. The supplier of the Mat shall have good reputation and past experience for similar job.
CABLE MARKERS
The Bidder shall make a 300mm diameter metal plate on the pipeline markers itself (at approx.
every kilometer and at crossings). The Bidder shall suitably paint on these metal plates the
following:
1. Optical fiber cable.

2. Cable progressive distance w.r.t. the repeater station. This repeater station shall be the
one nearest to the progressive distance in the direction as specified by SIC.
3. Optical fiber cable length
4. Fiber Length.
A typical diagram of a joint marker is shown at Annexure, drawing. Cable markers shall
be similar to the diagram except the description of joint number.
RECONCILIATION
For accounting of optical fiber cable, all cut pieces measuring in length of 100 meter and above
when returned to Owner’s storage points, shall be treated as serviceable materials. All cut pieces of
cables measuring less than 100 meter will be treated as scarp.
For accounting of optical fiber cable following allowances shall be permitted:
a) The basic length of optical fiber cable will be the length of pipeline as per pipeline
chainage and not cable length.
b) To take care of the terrain undulations and optical fiber cable slackness in trench and any
unaccountable wastage including scrap etc., an allowance of 2% of pipeline length will be
considered.
c) (1) At each planned jointing location, 40m of additional optical fiber cable length
shall be considered. The same will not be considered for unplanned joints arising
out of vendor negligence (not owner’s requirement).
(2) At blowing pits (other than planned joint location) 20m of additional Optical Fibre
Cable shall be considered.
d) At each repeater locations the following will be considered:
(1) From pipeline limit upto telecom building entry point in separate trench Actual
length.
(2) Telecom building entry point into the telecom room-Actual length.
e) At manned locations the following will be considered:
(1) From station limit upto telecom building entry point in separate trench
Actual length.
(2) Telecom building entry point into the telecom room-Actual length.
f) Serviceable materials (all cut pieces of cable Measuring 100 meter and above) subject to
the following : </=0.25% of total cable length
1) Acceptable physical conditions i.e. no kinks, no exposure of armor.

2) Successful OTDR testing
3) Both ends being sealed using heat shrinkable end caps.
For unaccounted optical fiber cable not returned to owner after reconciliation, deductions of 1.25
times the landed cost of optical fiber cable will be made.
JOINTING
Each splice loss shall be < 0.1 dB at 1310 nm.
In all the jointing locations (normal joints at the end of each drum as well as other joints) at least
20m of cable from each end of the cable shall be left surplus in a coiled. During jointing, electrical
continuity of each of the metallic layer in the optical fiber cable shall be maintained.
After completion of each joint at site, it shall be tested for water proof-ness by immersing it is
water along-with OFC for 5 minutes.
Jointing closures shall be issued to the vendor as a free issue material for all planner joints as per
the approved cable alignment sheets. (Cable alignment sheets are to be submitted immediately
after award of work for approval of owner/consultant). Jointing closures, jointing pits and all
accessories (along–with jointing, installation of joints, jointing pits etc. all complete) for
unplanned joints shall be provided by the vender at their own cost.
The OFC coil shall rest on the floor of the pit after turns being secured with cable ties. The lid of
the jointing pit should be ~1000mm below the ground level after installation. The HDPE conduit
shall enter the pit at the bottom level of the pit. Proper arrangement should be done for protection
of the cable at the entry points (Sealing of the HDPE conduit entry points at the jointing / blowing
pits e.g. sealing of the cable entry points after cable installation).
Joint markers
All jointing locations shall be marked with proper identification markers. The Bidder shall supply
fabricate and install the joint location markers. These markers shall be in line to the markers as
given in Annexure Drawing/Sketch of this Bid document. The markers shall show the progressive
joint No. and distance of the Joint as directed by site- Incharge. (SIC)
These markers shall be installed approximately 1mtr away from the jointing pit in the direction as
per the instruction of SIC/Owner.
Electronic markers
Additionally, bidder shall provide electronic locating system suitable for field use to locate
underground-buried Optical fiber cable joints.
The system shall consist of:
a) Electronic marker (to be buried underground along-with Optical fiber

cable joints).
b) Marker locator (including probe & locator electronics).
c) The electronic markers shall be placed at all joint locations (planned and
unplanned).
The electronic markers shall be lightweight and shall have a passive tuned resonant circuit,
enclosed and sealed within a casing. The marker locator shall be able to locate the electronic
markers from a distance of 2.2m minimum with the help of audio and visual signals. The markers
shall be of color suitable for Oil & Gas application.
The marker locator and the probe shall be of lightweight and portable enough to be carried (in
suitable carrying case, to be provided) on shoulder. The locator shall be able to work on batteries
(dry alkaline) for continuously 8 hours.
The electronic locating system shall be able to work in saline atmosphere in coastal area and shall
be protected against corrosion.
The electronic locating system shall not be affected by any metal, alternating current, etc. The
casing of the electronic marker shall be resistant to chemicals, minerals, water ingress and
temperature variation normally encountered in underground environments. The material used for
the manufacture of electronic markers shall be protected against any damage due to rodents or
any other insects in the underground environment.
Each marker locator provided shall be complete with its set of accessories (i.e. necessary
interfaces, connecting cables, software, etc.)
The electronic markers shall be buried underground 30 mm above the lid of the jointing pits and
shall not be in direct contract with any metallic body.
SECTION 5 (GENERAL)
5.1 VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENT AND DOCUMENTATION

(Exclusively for OFC Telecom work)
a) Six sets of Documentation shall be supplied with each submission.

b) All documents shall be in English language only.
c) During engineering stage, owner/consultant shall review/approve
drawings/documents to be mutually agreed with the vendor.
5.1.1 With each initial bid, the following documents shall be submitted (for information only) :
CV’s of key personnel has to be associated in this project.
5.1.2 After the award of work, the Bidder for review and approval from Owner/Consultant shall supply
the following documents in order to start cable laying at site:
1) Supply of cable alignment sheet.
Cable alignment shall comprise the following as a minimum.
i) Detailed measurement of length of optical fiber cable route along-with details of

road, nullah, river crossings, high Tension lines etc.
ii) Location of Terminals, repeaters and planned joints.
For the sections where the cable route may leave the pipeline route, the vendor shall make
a proper topographic survey to define the route and to determine the existence of over
ground or underground services that could interfere with the installation. The vendor shall
thereafter prepare a cable route sheet with proper scale showing the entire crossing and
topographic details as needed to define the route and its characteristics.
2) Procedure for laying Optical Fibre cable through Permanently Lubricated HDPE conduit
across any river / bridge.
3) Procedure for laying Optical Fibre cable through Permanently Lubricated HDPE conduit
across Minor River, nullah and road crossing.
4) Optical fiber cable jointing procedure.
5) Quality Assurance program as requested and the following:
a) Daily optical fiber laying/ jointing/ testing report formats.

b) Approved documents for all the material to be used during optical fiber laying i.e.
HDPE, warning mat etc.
6) Factory acceptance test procedure for HDPE conduit shall be provided.
7) Any other data, document not specifically mentioned, but required for the satisfactory
completion, operation and maintenance of the system shall be provided.
5.1.3 Documents to be supplied before ‘Final acceptance certificate’ issued by Owner:
1) As built cable route sheets shall comprise the following as a minimum :
i) Location of joints, crossings.
ii) At each joint location.
a) Progressive optical fiber cable length, including the additional

length at each joint location.
b) Fiber length, fiber length between joints, as measured by OTDR.
c) Progressive pipeline chainage.
d) Distance of joint from nearest pipeline markers & crossings, etc.
2) Final cable test reports (individual cable drums, hop to hop between repeaters,
section and end to end).
3) All final documents for this project in electronic form.
5.2 VENDOR’S SITE OFFICE
Vendor’s site office shall be capable of performing the following function :
a) Receipt of cable drums / equipment/goods at site, checking them for correctness and
completeness, storage, transportation of good, etc.
b) Installation of the optical fiber cable in best engineering practice and workmanship.
c) Check out on proper installation.
d) Liaison with Vendor’s head office.
e) Jointing, Testing and commissioning activities.
f) Conducting site acceptance testing to the satisfaction of owner.
5.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM:

a) Bidder shall submit the details of Quality Assurance Program followed by him. Bidder shall
obtain and forward the Quality Assurance Program for material supplied by the Sub-Vender.
b) The Owner /Consultant reserves the right to inspect and test each material / equipment at all
stages of production and commissioning of the system. The inspection and the testing shall
include but not limited to raw materials, components, sub- assemblies, prototypes, final
product etc.
c) For factory inspection and testing, Bidder shall arrange all that is required e.g. QA personnel,
space, test equipments etc. for successful carried out of the jab by Owner / consultant at
Bidder’s cost at manufacturer’s works. This excluded the costs of transportation, lodgings,
boarding of the Owner / consultant.
d) It shall be explicitly understood that under no circumstances shall any approval of the Owner /
consultant relieve the Bidder of his responsibility for material, design, quality assurance and
the guaranteed performance of the system and its constituents.
e) Bidder shall invite the Owner / consultant, at least 15 days in advance, of the date at which
system shall be ready for Inspection and testing. All relevant documents and manuals,
approved engineering drawing etc. shall be available with Owner / consultant well in advance
of the start of inspection and testing.
f) Owner / consultant or his representative shall after completion of inspection and testing to
their satisfactions, issue factory acceptance certificate to release the equipments for shipment.
No equipments shall be shipped under any circumstances unless a factory acceptance
certificates has been issued for it, unless agreed otherwise by the owner / consultant.
5.4 TESTING & FINAL DOCUMENTATION
The following tests (in the same sequence) shall be conducted final acceptance of material / laid
cable.
A1 Factory acceptance testing (if applicable)
A2 Regular Testing
A3 Site Acceptance Testing (SAT)
a) These tests shall be carried out on all material Equipment supplied by bidder including
those supplied by sub vendors, if any
b) Bidder shall arrange all necessary test instruments, manpower, testing gear, accessories etc
c) All technical personal assigned by bidder shall be fully conversant with the system
specification and requirements They shall have the specific capability to make the system
operative quickly and efficiently and shall not interfere or be interfered by other
concurrent testing, construction and commissioning activities in progress. They shall also
have the capability to incorporate any minor modification / suggestion put forward by
owner / consultant.
d) Power supply and any temporary commissioning facility including communication system
required for installation / testing / commissioning of the material / cable laying etc. shall
be arranged by the bidder.
e) TEST PLAN
Bidder shall submit to owner and consultant ‘Test Plans “ well in advance of
commencement of actual testing in each of the above mentioned test categories (refer
clause a)
The plans shall include:
i) Test to be conducted and purpose of test.

ii) Test procedure (including time schedule for the tests) and identification of test
inputs details and desired test results.
f) Test Report
The observation and test results obtained during various tests conducted shall be compiled
and documented to produce test reports by bidder. The test reports shall be given for each
hop of the concerned section. The report shall contain the following information to a
minimum.
1. Test Results
2. Comparison of test results with anticipated ( as per specifications) test results as
given in test plans and reason for deviation if any .
3. The data furnished shall prove convincingly that :
a) The system meets the guaranteed performance objectives.

b) Mechanical and electrical limits were not exceeded.
Factory Acceptance Testing for the Items to be supplied by the Bidder: ( FAT if applicable)
Factory acceptance test shall be carried out after review and approval of FAT procedures/
documents and shall be conducted at the manufacturing facilities from where the respective
material / subsystems are offered. The factory acceptance testing shall be conducted in the
presence of the owner / consultant. The test shall be carried out on all equipment/ items including
those supplied by sub vendors and factory acceptance certificates shall be issued. The factory test
shall include but not limited to :
1. Mechanical checks to the equipment for dimensions, inner and outer supports,
finishing, welds, hinges, terminal boards, connectors, cables, painting etc.
2. Check for assuring compliance with standards mentioned in the specifications
3. Individual check on each / module / sub-assembly in accordance with the modes
and diagnostics programs of the bidder.
4. Environmental testing.
5. Functional tests.
6. Any other test not included in FAT document but relevant to the project as desired
by owner / Consultant at the time of Factory acceptance testing.
Regular Testing:
After laying and jointing of cables and back – filling of the trench, the cable shall be tested
for attenuation over the laid cable and log off the same in Daily optical fibber cable laying,
jointing, testing format shall be maintained.
SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING ( SAT ) & FINAL ACCEPTANCE.
Site acceptance testing for handing over of laid cable and HDPE duct shall be done in the
presence of owner / consultant / telecom system vendor in the format provided by site in
charge.
Upon successful completion of the ‘ Site Acceptance Testing ‘ any shortfalls when
compared to the contract shall be made good by the vender.
The Bidder shall then provide as built documents as specified. After this, Owner /
consultant shall notify the vendor in writing his final acceptance of the laid cable/Duct and
the cable /Duct shall be considered ‘commissioned’. Bidder shall hand over to all free
issued items after reconciliation to Owners store.
Nothing herein above provided, inclusive of the ‘Final Acceptance Certificate’ shall
absolve vender of his full liabilities under the contract inclusion of and relative to the
system performance and material Guarantee/warranty.
********************
MECON LIMITED SPECIFICATION / PROCEDURE FOR OPTICAL
DELHI FIBER CABLE TESTING
SPECIFICATION/ PROCEDURE
FOR
OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE TESTING
Specification No.: MEC/S/05/E5/T/002
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092

INDEX
1. TEST PROCEDURE
1.1 FIBRE LENGTH MEASUREMENT
1.1.1 Test Description
1.1.2 Test Equipment
1.1.3 Procedure
1.2 INSERTION LOSS MEASUREMENT
1.2.2 Tools and Equipment required
1.2.3 Procedure
Appendices :
Appendix – 1 (A & B) : Test Format : Fibre Length Measurement
Appendix – 2 (A & B) : Test Format : Insertion Loss Measurement

TEST PROCEDURE
The Optical Fibre cable will be tested for its continuity and average loss in dB/km. The link will
be tested and recorded in the format given in Appendix-1 & 2.
1.1 Fibre Length Measurement
This test will check the continuity of the fibre from station to station and record the
length of fibre. Average loss per kilometer of fibre length shown in dB/km shall be
recorded for information only. Testing will be done from both ends and average will be
calculated (for both 1310 nm and 1550 nm).
1.1.2 Test Equipment
1. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)

2. Patchcords, pigtails
1.1.3 Procedure
• Power on the OTDR and make the settings as required for the top under test.
• Splice a pigtail to one of the fibres
• Connect the OTDR with pigtail
• Make the laser ON and observe the trace till it gets settled up to the end of the
trace.
• Store the results in the hard disk/floppy disk with proper identification of the
fibre under test.
• Record the results in format
• Repeat the procedure for the Opposite direction.
• Test Formats are provided in Appendix-1 (A & B)
• Repeat above steps for each fibre
1.2 Insertion Loss Measurement

During the insertion loss measurement, light is launched (LASER) in the fibre by using a
LASER source from one end at the other end by using an Optical Power meter the
received is measured. Fibre loss is calculated by subtracting the receive power from the
transmit power. This test also determines the fibre termination continuity on end to end
basis as the measurement is done on both the ends of a link.
1.2.2 Tools and Equipment required
1. Power meter working on 1310 nm and 1550 nm

2. Laser source working on 1310 nm and 1550 nm
3. Patchcords (10 mtrs)
1.2.3 Procedure
• One power meter, one laser source and one unit of optical talk set are required at
each end.
• At location A, switch ON the laser source, set it to operating wavelength of 1310

nm and connect it to the power meter (set at 1310 nm) by patch cord and record
the laser power transmitted. Record it in the test sheet.
• Cut the patch cords, laser source & power meter remaining connected to the 2
halves of the patch cord (i.e. 2 pig tails).
• Splice each of the pigtails to two ends of the same fibre under test.
• Record the power received in test sheet
• To establish communication between two stations A & B, connect the Optical

talk set to one of the fibre (for example fibre No. 24) at both the stations. When
that particular fibre is next for testing connects the talk set to one on which
testing is complete (for example fibre No.1).
• Confirm on the talk set that the power received is recorded.
• Repeats the test for 1550nm.
• Connect the source to next connector at Location A and Power Meter at

Location B.
• Repeat the same procedure with source at Location B and Power Meter at
Location A.
• Continue the above process till all fibres are tested
• Average loss of each fibre should be less than the average loss estimated.
• Test formats are provided in Appendix-2 (A & B)

Appendix-1 A
FIBRE LENGTH MEASUREMENT
Date : _____________________
Location A : _____________________
Location B : _____________________
Wavelength : 1310 nm
Equipment used : _____________________
Tube Fibre Fibre Length Optical loss dB/km

No./ color No./ Color (m) From A From B
1. Blue 1. Blue
2. Orange
2. Orange 3. Green
4. Brown
3. Green 5. Slate
6. White
4. Brown 7. Red
8. Black
5. Slate 9. Yellow
10. Violet
6. White 11. Pink
12. Aqua
7. Red 13. Blue
14. Orange
8. Black 15. Green
16. Brown
9. Yellow 17. Slate
18. White
10. Violet 19. Red
20. Black
11. Pink 21. Yellow
22. Violet
12. Aqua 23. Pink
24. Aqua
Cable loss (average of above) : __________________________ km

(ALL LOSSES MEASURED IN dB/km)
Signature & date Signature & date

(Tested & handed over by (Witnessed & Taken over by
Cable laying vendor for HDD) Main Line cable laying vendor)
Signature & date

Witnessed by Client/MECON representative (s)
Appendix-1 B
FIBRE LENGTH MEASUREMENT
Date : _____________________
Location A : _____________________
Location B : _____________________
Wavelength : 1550 nm
Equipment used : _____________________
Tube Fibre Fibre Length Optical loss dB/km

No./ color No./ Color (m) From A From B
1. Blue 1. Blue
2. Orange
2. Orange 3. Green
4. Brown
3. Green 5. Slate
6. White
4. Brown 7. Red
8. Black
5. Slate 9. Yellow
10. Violet
6. White 11. Pink
12. Aqua
7. Red 13. Blue
14. Orange
8. Black 15. Green
16. Brown
9. Yellow 17. Slate
18. White
10. Violet 19. Red
20. Black
11. Pink 21. Yellow
22. Violet
12. Aqua 23. Pink
24. Aqua
Cable loss (average of above) : __________________________ km


Signature & date

Appendix-2 A
INSERTION LOSS MEASUREMENT
Date : ___________________
Location A : ___________________Location B : __________________
Wavelength : 1310 nm Equipment used : ___________________
Cable Length from Appendix 1A : _________ km
Number of Splices (including Pigtails-N : ________________
Number of connectors-C : ___________________
Average IL = 0.38L + 0.1N + 0.5C : _________ (estimated)
Tube Fibre A-B B-A Average

No./ color No./ Color Power Transmitted at A Power Transmitted at B IL
Power IL (A-B) Power IL (B-A)
received at B received at A
1. Blue 1. Blue
2. Orange
2. Orange 3. Green
4. Brown
3. Green 5. Slate
6. White
4. Brown 7. Red
8. Black
5. Slate 9. Yellow
10. Violet
6. White 11. Pink
12. Aqua
7. Red 13. Blue
14. Orange
8. Black 15. Green
16. Brown
9. Yellow 17. Slate
18. White
10. Violet 19. Red
20. Black
11. Pink 21. Yellow
22. Violet
12. Aqua 23. Pink
24. Aqua

Signature & date

Appendix-2 B
INSERTION LOSS MEASUREMENT
Date : ___________________
Location A : ___________________Location B : __________________
Wavelength : 1550 nm Equipment used : ___________________
Cable Length from Appendix 1A : _________ km
Number of Splices (including Pigtails-N : ________________
Number of connectors-C : ___________________
Average IL = 0.22L + 0.1N + 0.5C : _________ (estimated)
Tube Fibre A-B B-A Average

No./ color No./ Color Power Transmitted at A Power Transmitted at B IL
Power IL (A-B) Power IL (B-A)
received at B received at A
1. Blue 1. Blue
2. Orange
2. Orange 3. Green
4. Brown
3. Green 5. Slate
6. White
4. Brown 7. Red
8. Black
5. Slate 9. Yellow
10. Violet
6. White 11. Pink
12. Aqua
7. Red 13. Blue
14. Orange
8. Black 15. Green
16. Brown
9. Yellow 17. Slate
18. White
10. Violet 19. Red
20. Black
11. Pink 21. Yellow
22. Violet
12. Aqua 23. Pink
24. Aqua

Signature & date

MECON LIMITED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF
DELHI OPTICAL FIBER CABLE & ACCESSORIES
SPECIFICATION No. : MEC / TS / 05 / E5 / T / 096
ELECT. & INST. SECTION
Rev. 1 Page 1 of 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE

&
ASSOCIATED ITEMS
Technical Specification No. :

MEC / TS / 05 / E5 / T / 096
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092
1 28.06.2006 Sachin Agrawal Rakesh Shukla Pankaj Shrivastava

Rev. 1 Page 2 of 2
INDEX
1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 DATA TO BE FURNISH BY THE BIDDER
3.0 SCOPE OF WORK
4.0 DESIGN OBJECTIVES AND GUIDELINES
4.1 Standards applicable
4.2 Approval of documents
4.3 General Guidelines
5.0 SUB SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
5.1 Optical fibre cable
5.2 Jointing Closures with accessories
6.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Vendor data requirements & documentation
6.2 Training
6.3 Packing
6.4 Quality Assurance Programme & Testing
Annexure ‘1’ : Cable Construction for 24 count CSTA Optical Fibre Cable
Annexure ‘2’ : Unpriced Bill of Materials

Rev. 1 Page 3 of 3
1.0 INTRODUCTION :
An Optical Fiber (OFC) system for the Telecommunication requirements has been most suitable
for gas pipeline project. Laying of OFC along with pipeline are present trend to economized the
project cost.
It is proposed to procure 24 fibre OFC designated for Blowing through Duct and direct burial
application to meet the telecommunications requirements. The OFC shall be blown into the self-
lubricated HDPE Duct directly using “Blowing Techniques”.
As part of this project, it is desired to provide necessary OFC and associated items, as per the
specifications provided in the Bid documents. This will provide only the Technical requirements
for Optical Fibre Cable and Associated items.
2.0 DATA TO BE FURNISHED BY THE BIDDER:
(Bidder shall furnished this information at the time of their offer and it will be part
of contract for successful bidder, the information necessarily to be submitted during
the Bid submission otherwise their offer may be rejected / disqualified for OFC
work)
Sl. Description Specification To be filled

No. by bidder
1 Name & address of the Bidder for OFC.
1.1 Whether Bidder is OFC Manufacturer OFC Yes/ No
1.2 Supply Record
1.2 a Manufacturing facilities from which OFC were - Jelly Filled, 1300nm/
supplied for earlier projects within last three years from 1550nm, single mode CSTA/
the bid date. ECCS, slotted core / loose
tube OFC, as per ITUG-652
- OFC as per ITUG-655
1.2 b Whether the manufacturing facilities for the cables in Yes/ No
1.2 a above is Bidder’s own facility.
1.2 c Detail of order in respect of having supplied minimum 1500 KMs (minimum)
155 KMs of OFC in last three years including at least 100 KMs (minimum)
100 KMs of steel Tap armoured OFC.
1.2 d Detail of manufacturing facilities of OFC for the project
including locations / capacity etc.
1.2 e Model no. of offered optical fiber cable.
1.2 f Enlist the documentary evidence of Bidder’s capability To be enclosed
to manufacturing and supply of above
a) P.O.Copies
Order completion certificate
1.2 g Name of the manufacturer of Optical fibre
2.0 Jointing Closure
2.1 Name and Address of the Bidder / supplier
2.2 Place of manufacturing
2.3 Users certificate confirming satisfactory performance
for at least six months as on bid due date.
2.4 Special tool and Tackles as per the list given in the Bill
of quantity
The Bidder shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for all works under this bid document. Bidder to
fill blank spaces (marked (b)), of this form. Legend : NA – Not applicable.
Rev. 1 Page 4 of 4
Sl. Description Performed by Place of execution of

No (Provide name) the activity
1.1 Single source responsibility with Performance guarantee for
successful completion of scope of work for this project.
1.2 Design & Engineering
1.3 Optical fiber cable & accessories
1.4 Documentation
Bidder shall specifically indicate the deviation related to technical work if any and
give proper justification with documentary evidence for specific deviation.
3.0 SCOPE OF WORK :
3.1 SCOPE OF WORK
3.1.1 The Scope of work shall include supply of optical fibre cable, joint closure and tools
as per the specification / requirement given in this document
The fibre for the cable can be procured from any reputed fibre manufacturer and the
inspection of the offered fibre shall be carried out at the premises of fibre manufacturer or
cable manufacturer at Owner’s prerogative.
Compliance with the requirements of this specification does not relieve the Supplier
of the equipment of proper design, meeting all the specified rated operating and
service conditions
The fibre for the cable can be procured from any reputed Optical Fibre manufacturers but
preferably from one of the followings:
1. Lucent
2. Fujikura
3. Corning
4. Alcatel
5. Sumitomo
6. Furukawa
7. Sterlite
Optical fibre shall meet all the technical specification mentioned in the tender documents.
All technical documents regarding procurement of optical fibre is to be supplied to Owner
/ MECON. Owner / MECON reserves the right to check the technical specifications of the
fibre prior to fabrication/ manufacturing of cable. Supplier has to offer the fibre for
inspection either in the premises of fibre manufactures/ cable manufactures or wherever
testing facility exists. However, Owner / MECON reserves the rights to get the optical
fibre tested for its technical parameters from any recognized independent test houses in
India and abroad.
3.1.1.1 Design, Engineering, Manufacture, Testing and supply of Corrugated steel tape armoured
(CSTA) or Electrolytically Chrome Plated Low Carbon Steel Armoured (ECCSA) optical
fibre cables as follows:
- Multi-grade cable of 24 fibre counts, out of this 6 fibre counts are ITU-T G.655 and 18
fibre counts are ITU-T G.652 specification embedded in one cable suitable for direct
underground burial application.
Rev. 1 Page 5 of 5
However OF cable shall be laid in a permanently lubricated HDPE pipe using blowing
techniques.
3.1.1.2 Manufacture/Procurement, Testing and supply of suitable Joint closures including all
necessary accessories of any of the following make:
i) Raychem
ii) 3M
iii) Siemens
3.1.1.3 Supply of Special Tools and Tackles as mentioned in the Bill of quantity. The Tools &
Tackles to be supply for the joints closures should be from the same manufacturing as that
of the joint closures.
3.1.1.4 Supply of complete technical literature and documentation as defined in Clause 6.1.
3.1.1.5 Quality Assurance and Testing as described at Clause 6.4 to the complete satisfaction of
the Owner/MECON &/or third appointed agency.
4.0 DESIGN OBJECTIVE AND GUIDELINES
4.1 STANDARDS APPLICABLE
The OF cable/materials provided shall conform to the latest editions of standards like
ITU-T, TIA, IEC, EIA, ASTM & BS.
International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)
IEC 60092-3 Electrical Installations in Ships & semi; Part 3: Cables [Construction,
Testing and Installations] Second Edition & semi; Amendment 1-
1969 & semi; Amendment 2-1971 & semi; Amendment 3-1973 &
semi; Amendment 4-1974 & semi; Amendment 5-1979 & semi;
Amendment 6-1984
IEC 60502 Extruded Solid Dielectric Insulated Power Cables for Rated Voltages
from 1 kV up to 30 kV First Edition
International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISO 9001 Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in
Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing
ISO 9003 Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Final Inspection
and Test
ISO 9004 Quality Management and Quality System Elements – Guidelines
Electronic Industries Association (EIA)
EIA TIA-455 Standard Test Procedure for Fibre Optic Fibres, Cables, Transducers,
Sensors, Connecting and Terminating Devices, and Other Fibre Optic Components
EIA TIA-492AAA-A Detail Specification for 62.5-Micrometer Core
Diameter/125-Micrometer Cladding Diameter Class Ia
Graded-Index Multimode Optical Fibres
Rev. 1 Page 6 of 6
EIA TIA 492AAA Detail Specification for Class IV a Dispersion-Unshifted

Single-Mode Optical Fibres
International Telecommunications Union

ITU-T G650 Definition and test methods for the relevant parameters of single
mode fibres – Series G
ITU-T G651 Characteristics of a 50/125 micrometer multimode graded index
optical fibre cable – Series G
ITU-T G652 Characteristics of a single mode non-dispersion – shifted optical fibre
cable – Series G
ITU-T-G655 Characteristics of a single mode non-zero dispersion – shifted optical
fibre cable – Series G
The optical fibre cable / materials provided shall conform to the latest editions of
standards like ITU-T, TIA, IEC, EIA, ASTM & BS.
In case of any conflict between the above standards and the specifications, the matter
shall be referred to OWNER/MECON.
Vendor shall proceed with design of the cable/equipment only after obtaining
clarifications from OWNER/MECON in all such cases.
4.2 APPROVAL OF DOCUMENTS
The vendor shall be completely responsible for the successful completion of the job.
However, to ensure a good quality of workmanship, as also of the offered system, vendor
shall prepare and submit the documents (as per clause 6.1 of section 6) to be approved by
the OWNER / MECON.
Vendor shall proceed with the manufacture / procurement / installation of the respective
materials and/or equipments only after obtaining the necessary approval from the
Owner/MECON.
4.3 GENERAL GUIDELINES
a) Vendor shall be totally responsible for the offered Optical Fibre,

cable/materials/equipments.
b) OWNER/MECON reserve the right to modify/revise/alter the specifications of

cable/equipments prior to acceptance of any offer.
c) If during the course of execution of the work any discrepancy or inconsistency,

error or omission in any of the provisions of the contract is discovered, the same
shall be referred to the owner/ MECON who shall give his decision in the matter
and issue instruction directing the manner in which the work is to be carried out.
The decision of the OWNER/MECON shall be final and conclusive and the
contractor shall carry out the work in accordance therewith.
d) The model numbers of jointing closure offered for this project must have been in
successful field use for more than one year.
Rev. 1 Page 7 of 7
e) It shall be strictly as per OWNER prerogative and decision of OWNER in the

matter being final, not more than 20% of total quantity ordered may be
accepted by OWNER in shorter length than specified 4 KM + 5% at a
discounted price by applying a discount to the ex-works price indicated in
price schedule as follows:
Drum Length 3000 Mtrs to 3799 Mtrs : 5% discount

Drum Length 2000 Mtrs to 2999 Mtrs : 10% discount
5.0 SUB SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
5.1 OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE
GENERAL
The vendor shall be totally responsible for the desired performance of the offered Optical
fibre, cable including design, engineering, manufacture, testing and supply. The cables
should be made with central core tube design.
Multi grade mono-mode cable with 24 fibre counts, out of this 6 fibre counts are as per
ITU-T G 655 and 18 fibre counts are as per ITU- T G652 specifications.
The types of optical fibre cable required are as follows.
CSTA or ECCSA, direct underground burial type O.F. Cable.
Corrugated steel tape armoured or Electrolytically Chrome Plated Low carbon Steel
Armoured cable shall be of direct burial type and shall be laid at an approximate depth of
1.6 meters from the ground level and shall be required to cross various roads, railways,
canals, small rivers, marshy areas etc. through appropriate casings & directly as per site
conditions. The cable shall be laid in a permanently lubricated HDPE pipe using blowing
techniques.
The intent of the following specifications is to establish the minimum requirements and
guidelines for the Optical fibre cable to be supplied for this project.
5.1.1. CABLE CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FOR 24 FIBRE
5.1.1.1. General
a) Desired operation life of cable Better than 30 years
b) Length of CSTA or ECCSA direct underground 4Km + 5%

Burial type O.F. Cable per drum
c)1 Cable weight in single drum Bidder to provide
c)1.1 (no splicing shall be permitted on any fibre in a drum length of the cable)
d) Protection required
The cable shall be protected against damages from termite, rodent, fire, chemicals
(such as oil & natural gas, LPG and other petroleum products), moisture and water
over the lifetime of the cable.
Rev. 1 Page 8 of 8
f) Cable identification
i) The outer surface of the cable shall be permanently & legibly marked
with colour in contrast to the outer sheath at regular intervals not
exceeding one meter with name of Owner, Logo of the Owner, name of
manufacturer, part number and ‘ OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE’.
ii) The outer surface of each completed cable shall have sequentially
numbered metric length markers spaced at regular intervals of one
meter.
g) Construction details of cable
i) Strength member FRP (minimum 2 mm dia)
ii) Filling of core The tubes shall be filled up with

moisture resistant jelly which
should be compatible with the
coated fibre and the
surroundings. The jelly shall
also be flooded over the
stranded tubes to ensure block
of water transmission.
iii) Number of fibres per tube 6 ( Six)
iii)A Colour of tubes 4 different distinct color
iv) Moisture barrier Water blocking tape of 0.15

mm minimum thickness applied
longitudinally over the loose
tube.
The tape shall form a close fit around the cable core with a sealed
overlap of 6 mm minimum.
vi) Inner sheath MDPE

Thickness of inner sheath 1.50 mm minimum
vii) Armouring (Direct Underground CSTATape or Electrolytically

Burial Type) chrome plated low carbon
steel tape both side coated with
ethylene acrylic copolymer
applied longitudinally with
minimum overlap of 6 mm.
Thickness of steel tape 0.15 mm minimum
Thickness of each polymer layer 0.04 mm minimum
viii) Outer sheath HDPE

Thickness of outer sheath 0.15 mm minimum
Rev. 1 Page 9 of 9
ix) Electrical continuity of the respective metallic layers shall be maintained

between the ends of the cable in each cable drum.
X) Overall cable outer diameter shall not exceed 16 mm.
5.1.1.2 Mechanical Characteristics of cable
a) Temperature
Installation & operation 0 Deg. C to 60 Deg. C
Storage 0 Deg. C to 65 Deg. C
b) Tensile strength
For CSTA, Direct underground The cable shall have

burial Type OFC sufficient strength to
withstand a load of value T=
9.81W Newton, Where W =
weight of 1Km of cable in
Kg.
The load shall not produce total strain exceeding 0.25% in the fibre.
c) Cable weight in Kg/Km Bidder to specify
d) Minimum bending radius 20*Cable diameter
5.1.1.3 Average splice loss 0.01db/splice
5.1.1.4 Maximum overall diameter of the cable 16 mm
5.1.1.5 Cross sectional diagram of the cable is attached for reference as annexure - 1. Bidder
should submit the proposed / offered cross section diagram of the cable with the bid
giving full details. It should confirm to general practice followed internationally.
Rev. 1 Page 10 of 10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF FIBRES TYPE I
Single Mode Optical Fibre, Fully ITU T rec. G652 Oct 2000, IEC60793-1 and Telecordia GR – 20
Core Compliant
Sr. no Parameter Requirement
1.0 Transmission characteristics
1.1 Attenuation coefficient

At 1310nm ≤0.35dB/Km
1.2 Mode field diameter at 1310nm Nominal Any single value 8.6 – 9.5µm ±
Tolerance 0.7µm
1.3 Cut-off wavelength on 2 mt sample of fibre ≤1320
1.4 Chromatic dispersion

1285-1330nm ≤3.5ps/nm-Km
1270-1340 nm ≤5.3ps/nm. Km
Zero dispersion wavelength 1300 –1324nm
Zero dispersion slope ≤0.093ps/sqnm. Km
2.0 Dimensional Specification
2.1 Geometrical parameter

• Primary coating diameter 245 ± 10µ m
• Cladding Diameter 125 ± 1µ m
• Clad non-circularity ≤ 1%
• Mode field concentricity error ≤ 0.8µ m
3.0 Mechanical Performance
3.1 Fibre Curl 4m
3.2 Fibre Proof test 1%
a) Protective materials/coatings
Optical fibres shall be coated with UV cured double Acrylate Resin. It should not have any
reaction with cladding or core material.
Nominal overall thickness 250 µm
The coatings should provide max. resistance to micro bending & abrasion and ensure mechanical
b) Fibre Identification
The coatings shall be in various distinct colours in order to facilitate fibre identification. Fibres
colours shall correspond to IEC publication 793-2 and 304. The colours shall correspond
reasonably with standard colours and shall readily be identifiable and shall be durable. The
colours used should have fast colours properties and should not fade during the lifetime of cable.
The coating and the colour shall not react with surrounding jelly. The vender shall take prior
approval from HPCL for the colour scheme for fibre identification before commencement of
manufacture of OFC.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF FIBRES TYPE II
Single Mode Optical Fibre Type-I Fully ITU-T G-655 October’2000 and IEC60793-2 Complaint
Sr. no Parameter Requirement
1. Transmission characteristics
1.1 Attenuation coefficient

1.2 Mode field diameter Nominal Any Single value between 8-11µ m
Tolerance + 0.7µm
1.3 Cut-off wavelength on 2 mt sample of fibre ≤1480
1.4 Chromatic dispersion

1530-1565nm 0.1- 6 ps/nm-Km
1565-1625 nm 4 – 11.2 ps/nm. Km
Zero Dispersion wavelength ≤ 1530nm
Zero dispersion slope ≤ 0.080
1.5 Polarized Mode dispersion IN Cable, maximum ≤ 0.15ps/√Km

individual fibre
1.6 Attenuation with bending ≤ 0.05dB at 1550nm

100 turns on a mandrel of 60mm diameter ≤ 0.5dB at 1550nm
1 turn on mandrel of 32mm diameter ≤ 0.6dB at 1625nm
3.0 Dimensional Specification
2.1 Geometrical parameter

1. Primary coating diameter 245±10µ m
2. Cladding Diameter 125 ± 1µ m
3. Clad non-circularity ≤ 1%
4. Mode field concentricity error ≤ 0.8µ m
5. Effective area ≥ 50squm.
4.0 Mechanical Performance
3.1 Fibre Curl 4m
3.2 Fibre Proof test 1%

a) Protective materials/coatings
Optical fibres shall be coated with UV cured double Acrylate Resin.
It should not have any reaction with cladding or core material.
The coatings should provide max. resistance to micro bending & abrasion and ensure mechanical
b) Fibre Identification
The coatings shall be in various distinct colours in order to facilitate fibre identification. Fibres
colours shall correspond to IEC publication 793-2 and 304. The colours shall correspond
reasonably with standard colours and shall readily be identifiable and shall be durable. The
colours used should have fast colours properties and should not fade during the lifetime of cable.
The coating and the colour shall not react with surrounding jelly. The vender shall take prior
approval from HPCL for the colour scheme for fibre identification before commencement of
manufacture of OFC.
5.1.3 OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE TESTS
The following minimum tests shall be conducted at the factory for the acceptance of the cable
(Tests under item No. 5.1.3.1 shall be conducted by the Bidder on his own and test results send to
the Owner/MECON for approval/review. Tests under item No. 5.1.3.2 shall be conducted by the
Bidder in the presence of Owner/MECON only, after receiving test results under item no. 1)(In
addition the Bidder shall provide Supplier's test certificate for the various types of raw materials
used in manufacturing of this optical fibre cable):
5.1.3.1 Tests for fibre: Testing Test Reference
a) Core (mode field) diameter and AT ITU-T, G 652 &

G.655
concentricity error
b) Cut-off wavelength AT ITU-T, G 652 &

G.655
c) Attenuation coefficient
c1) at 1300nm AT ITU-T, G 652 &

G.655
c2) at 1550nm AT ITU-T, G 652 &
G.655
C3) Spectral attenuation G.655 AT ITU-T
d) Chromatic dispersion
d1) at 1300 nm AT ITU-T, G 652 &

G.655
d2) at 1550nm AT ITU-T, G 652 &
G.655
d3) From 1530 to 1565nm G.655 AT ITU-T G.655
e) Cladding
ei) Diameter AT ITU-T, G 652 &

G.655
eii) Non circularity AT ITU-T, G 652 &
G.655
5.1.3.2 Tests on completed cables:
5.1.3.2.1 Visual inspection:
a) Cable lay-up and fibre ST

identification
b1) Identification and length marking ST

on outer jacket.
b2) Colour contrast of the marking ST

with the outer sheath of the cables
c) Overall diameter of the cable ST
5.1.3.2.2 Tests for moisture barrier:
a) Thickness of layers ST
b) Extent of overlapping ST
c) Electrical continuity of metallic AT

layers
d) Water swellable tape or power AT
e) Water immersion STIEC – 60793 – 1 – 53
5.1.3.2.3 Tests for corrugated steel tape armouring:
a) Thickness of layers ST
b) Extent of overlapping ST
c) Electrical continuity of AT
metallic layers
b) Electrical discontinuity between AT
CSTA and moisture barrier
5.1.3.2.4 Other tests:
a) Attenuation at 1310 nm & AT ITU-T, G. 652

1550 nm G.655
Polarization Mode dispersion ST ITU-T
b) Tensile performance ST IEC-794-1-E1

b1) CST-ECCSA, direct underground burial type O.F. Cable
(with a tensile load of value T= 9.81 W Newton, where W = weight of 1 km

`Cable' in kg).
c) Crush ST IEC-794-1-E3
(with 200 kg of load to be slowly placed and held for 60 seconds.

The change in attenuation should not exceed 0.1dB/km)
d) Impact ST IEC-794-1-E4
(with a mass of 5 kg allowed to fall freely from 500 mm height on the cable
sample 10 times repeatedly with a gap between one impact to another
approximately at 60 seconds. The change in attenuation should not exceed
0.05dB/km)
e) Torsion ST IEC-794-1-E7
(with a weight of 7.5 kg attached to the stationery chuck and shall be subjected to
10 cycles. The change in attenuation should not exceed 0.05dB/km)
f) Bend ST IEC-794-1-E11
(To be performed preferably with Procedure 1 (of IEC) with a mandrel diameter
of 24D mm, where D is the diameter of the cable and testing shall be done with 4
turns of cable wrapped and then unwrapped for 10 complete cycles. The change
in attenuation should not exceed 0.05dB/km)
g) i) Snatch ST IEC-794-1-E9
With a load of 100 N. No damage to the fibre, sheath or to the other cable
elements.
ii) Kink ST IEC-794-1-E10
Radius: 10*Cable diameter. No kink shall occur.
h) Temperature cycling ST IEC-794-1-F1
(This test shall be performed with a cable length of 200 m. Temperature cycle
shall be taken as:
i) at room temperature : 1 hr.
ii) at zero degrees : 12 hrs.
iii) at 65 degrees : 12hrs
and
iv) from 65 degrees to room temperature : 1 hr )
(The change in attenuation should not exceed 0.1dB/km)
i) Water penetration test ST IEC-794-1-F5
j) Water immersion ST IEC– 60793 – 53
k) Sheath integrity(Spark test) ST IEC-794-1-F3
The sheath shall withstand a spar test voltage of at least 8KVr.m.s. or 12 KVd.c.
LEGEND
AT : All to be tested
ST : Sample test ( 5% )
In case optical fibre cables, tested and inspected in accordance with this specification, fail
to pass the test or comply with the specification requirement, the tests shall be repeated on
a further representative set of cable pieces, and if it again fails, the whole lot shall be
rejected subject to the discretion of the Owner/MECON.
Bidder shall provide detailed test procedures for each of the above-mentioned tests and
may improve upon the same.
5.2 JOINTING CLOSURES
Jointing closures shall be suitable for the cables, as mentioned under clause 5.1. Jointing
closures should be Dust tight (No dust ingress) and Protected against immersion in water
(Suitable for continuous immersion in saline water) and should be complete with all
accessories including splice cassettes splice protection and all other accessories including
accessories for electrical continuity of metallic layers of optical fibre cable. The jointing
closures shall be provided with suitable jointing pit support hardware to secure the
jointing closures to a ~1200 mm dia. circular jointing pit.
Jointing Closure Tests
The following tests shall be conducted as a minimum:
a) Water Ingress Test
The cable-jointing box shall be assembled along with a continuous piece of cable passing
through. The jointing box shall then be secured at the bottom of a immersion tank
containing water upto a height of 2.0 m at normal room temperature for a period of 24
hours. The joint box will then be opened as per the specified procedure and visually
examined for any ingress of water. It shall be declared to have passed the test in case
there is no water present inside the box.
b) Impact test
The cable joint box shall be kept on a metal platform. A weight of 5 kgs spherical type
having radius of R 50mm at striking end will be made to strike the box at the middle after
having been released from a height of 500mm for 10 times. The joint box will be declared
to have passed the test in case there are no cracks or fracture inside or outside of the box.
c) Drop and topple test
A drop test platform consisting of a steel plate not less than 6.5mm thick has to be used.
The steel plate is bolted to a fully set concrete block at least 460mm thick. The joint box
shall then be allowed to topple and fall freely from a height of 2000mm. The joint box
will be declared to have passed the test in case there is no visible damage to the enclosure.
d) Pulling test
The joint box should be assembled with a long length of cable so that it can be pulled to
the required tension of 200 kgs to check the strength of fixing arrangement inside the joint
box.
e) Static load test
The assembled cable joint closure shall be kept on a platform with dimension more than
that of cable joint closure. A curved hollow profiled mandrel shall be used for application
of load and the mandrel shall be at the middle straight part of the joint closure. Weights
shall be gradually placed on the mandrel till the weight becomes 250 kgs. The joint box
shall be kept under the weight for a period of 24 hours. The joint closure shall be declared
to have passed the test in case there is no visible damage.
Bidder shall provide detailed test procedures for testing Jointing Closures, and may
improve upon the same.
6.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENT AND DOCUMENTATION
a) Six sets of Documentation shall be supplied with each submission.
b) All documents shall be in English language only.
c) During system definition /engineering stage, owner/MECON shall

review/approve drawings/documents to be mutually agreed with the vendor.
6.1.1 With the initial bid, the following documents shall be submitted:
1) Cable construction-showing cross section of the offered Optical fibre cable,

providing details of each layer (Specifically mentioning, material used, thickness
etc.).
2) Cable lifetime calculations.
3) Jointing Closure details.
6.1.2 The following documents for the complete system shall be supplied to
Owner/MECON in order to start Factory Acceptance Testing :
a) Following documents shall be supplied for review and approval (all under
category ‘*’).
1) Detailed testing procedure for Optical fibre cable.
2) Detailed testing procedure for Joint closures & Test Instruments.
3) Quality Assurance program
4) Any other data, document not specifically mentioned, but required for the
satisfactory completion, operation and maintenance of the system shall be
provided.
b) Following documents shall be supplied for information only.
1) Detail Technical manual of Joint closures and each type of

instruments/equipment containing circuit diagrams and description.
2) Maintenance manual of each type of instrument/equipment.

6.2 PACKING
All equipments/instruments/cable drums shall be individually packed in suitable

containers/crates designed to avoid damage to the equipments during transit and storage
in accordance with best commercial practice and with the requirements of applicable
specifications. The materials used for packaging, wrapping. Sealing, moisture resistant
barriers, corrosion preventers, etc. shall be of recognized brands and shall conform to best
standards in the areas in which the articles are packaged. The packing shall protect the
equipment from impact, vibration, rough handling, rain, dust, damp, insects, rodents, etc.
Each container/crate shall be subjected to impact, vibration and other mechanical tests.
Each container shall have a copy of factory acceptance test report enclosed in it.
Packages for optical fibre cable shall make provision to allow for two (2) meters of excess
cable on the inner end of the package to be accessed from outside. The outer end of the
cable shall have pulling eye with heat shrinkable sleeves attached to it. The inner end of
the cable shall be provided with a heat shrinkable sleeve. The ends shall be adequately
protected to allow for normal handling during shipment.
6.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME & TESTING
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
a) Vendor shall submit the details of Quality Assurance Programme followed by

him beginning with raw materials, fabricated components, assemblies, etc. to
finished product (AS APPLICABLE). Vendor shall obtain and forward the
Quality Assurance Programme for equipment supplied by Sub-contractor, if any.
b) The owner, MECON and/or third appointed agency reserves the right to inspect
and test cable, jointing closures, etc at all stages of production and testing. The
inspection and testing shall include but not be limited to materials, sub-
assemblies, prototypes, produced units, guaranteed performance specifications,
etc.
c) For Factory inspection and testing, Vendor shall arrange all that is required e.g.,
quality assurance personnel, space, test gear etc. for successful carrying out of
the job by the Owner's representatives at Vendor's cost at the
Vendor's/Manufacturer's works.
d) Owner's representatives shall have free entry and access to any and all parts of
the Vendor's facilities associated with manufacturing and testing of the system at
any given time.
e) It shall be explicitly understood that under no circumstances shall any approval

of the Owner or his representatives relieve the Vendor of his responsibility for
material, design, quality assurance and the guaranteed performance of the system
and its constituents.
f) Vendor shall invite the Owner/MECON, at least 30 days in advance, of the date
on which system shall be ready for Inspection and Testing. All relevant
documents and manuals; approved engineering drawings, etc. shall be provided
to the Owner's representatives well in advance of the start of Inspection and
Testing.
g) Owner/MECON shall, after completion of inspection and testing to their

satisfaction, issue factory acceptance certificates to release the cable/jointing
closures for shipment. No cable/jointing closures shall be shipped under any
circumstances unless a factory acceptance certificate has been issued for it,
unless agreed otherwise by Owner/MECON.
6.4.1 TESTING
a1) Optical Fibre Cable
Factory testing shall be conducted for acceptance of the cable at the manufacturing
facility, wherefrom cable is offered for this project before final acceptance, as per the
approved test plan.
a2) Jointing closures
Jointing closures shall be tested before final acceptance, as per the approved test plan.
a3) Test Instruments
All test instruments shall be provided with calibration certificates. Test instruments shall
be tested for functional operations, as per the approved test plan.
b) Vendor shall arrange all test equipments/instruments, manpower, test-gear,

accessories, etc., necessary for testing.
c) All technical personnel assigned by Vendor shall be fully conversant with the
system specifications and requirements. They shall have the specific capability
to make the system operative quickly and efficiently and shall not interfere or be
interfered by other concurrent construction and commissioning activities in
progress. They shall also have the capability to incorporate any minor
modifications/suggestions put forward by MECON/Owner.
d) Power supply required for testing shall be arranged by the Vendor.
e) Test Plan
Vendor shall submit to Owner and MECON `Test Plans' well in advance of
commencement of actual testing.
ei) Functional and performance description (in short) and Tests to be conducted and
purpose of test.
eii) Test procedures (including time schedule for the tests) and identification of test
inputs details and desired test results.
f) Test Report
The observations and test results obtained during various tests conducted shall be
compiled and documented to produce Test Reports by Vendor. The Test Reports
shall be given for each equipment/item and system as a whole. The report shall
contain the following information to a minimum:
fi) Test results.
fii) Comparison of test results with anticipated test result as given in test plans and
reasons for deviations if any.
fiii) The data furnished shall prove convincingly that:
I) The system meets the Guaranteed performance objectives.

II) Mechanical/Optical/Electrical limits were not exceeded.
III) Failure profile during the tests are well within the specified limits.
ANNEXURE
Annexure ‘1’ : Cable Construction for 24 count CSTA Optical Fibre Cable
Annexure ‘2’ : Unpriced Bill of Materials.

Schematic Constructional Diagram For 24 Fibre OFC
Fibre colors : BI, Or, Gr,, Br, SL, Nat
Loose Tube colours : BI, Or, Gr, Br
Filler colors : Black/Natural
Outer Diameter : 16 mm Maximum

Annexure ‘2’
Bill Of Quantity (Optical Fibre Cable and Associated Items)
The bidder shall fill quoted for the list provided against each item in the un-priced offer of the bid (Bidder
is required to quote for all items in this bid document)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sl.No. Description Unit Quantity
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A) SUPPLY
Supply of following items as per bid document:
a) 24 fibre composite OF cable (G-655 & As per SOR

G-652) 4 Kms +/-5% cable drums.
B) Supply of Joint Closures including all accessories (3M, SIEMENS, Raychem make)
a) For 24 fibre Composite OF cable As per SOR
C) Special Tools and Tackles
Optical Fibre Cable preparation tool kit (Each set consisting of following, No. of sets as
per SOR)
1. Three Wheel cutter (HDPE/ MDPE/ 1 No.

CSTA/ ECCS etc. accurately
2. Sheath Cutter (for cutting sheath) 1 No.
3. Adjustible torgue wrench with adopter 1 No.
4. Adjustible Knife 1 No.
5. Hack-Saw (small) 1 No.
6. Armour punch 1 No.
7. Measuring tape - SS (3 meters) 1 No.
8. L-N key 1 No.
9. Cable Cutter 1 No.
10. Crosshead screw driver 1 No.
11. Flat head screw driver 1 No.
12. Combination Plier 1 No.
13. Scissors 1 No.
14. Flat spanners 1 No.
15. Loose tube cutter 1 No.
16. Stripper 1 No.
17. V-Groove 1 No.
18. Installation kit for splice closures 1 No.
19. Fibre Cleaver (Diamond cutter) 1 No.
20. 5 Meter pigtails with FC/ PC
Connector at one end 1 No.
21. 10 meter patch cord with FC/PC
Connector at one end 1 No.
22. Documentation 6 Sets.
(Technical literature for Tools and Tackles)
MECON LIMITED Technical Specification For Permanently
DELHI
Lubricated Telecom HDPE Duct & Accessories
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 1 of 1
FOR
PERMANENTLY LUBRICATED
TELECOM HDPE DUCT & ACCESSORIES
Technical Specification No. :

MEC / TS / 05 / E5 / T / 037
MECON LIMITED
DELHI - 110 092

DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 2 of 2
Contents
Sl. No. Description
1.0 Scope
2.0 Reference Documents
3.0 PLB HDPE Duct Specification
4.0 PLB HDPE Duct Accessories
5.0 Inspection & Testing
6.0 Identification Marking
7.0 Type Approval and Acceptance Test
8.0 Storage at Manufacturing Works
9.0 Quality Assurance Plan and Testing
10.0 Vendor Data Requirement and Documentation
11.0 Packaging and Delivery
12.0 Enclosures:
1. Table – I : Scale of Sampling for visual and

dimensional requirements.
2. Table – 2 : Sampling for Acceptance tests
3. Annexure – I : Oxidation Induction Test
4. Annexure – II : Internal Co-efficient of Friction
5. Data Sheet : Data Sheet for HDPE DUCT

DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 3 of 3
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the minimum generic requirement of permanently self-

lubricated high Density Polyethylene ducts (PLB HDPE ducts) for use as underground
conduits for optical fibre cables and associated accessories, suitable for installation of
OFC by blowing technique.
The scope of work shall include supply of PLB HDPE ducts and the accessories as per
the specification/ requirements given in this document.
However Optical Fibre Cable shall be laid in a permanently lubricated HDPE pipe using
blowing technique.
1.1 Supply of special tools and tackles as mentioned in the bills of quantity.
1.2 Supply of complete technical literature and documentation as defined in Section 10.
1.3 Quality Assurance and testing as described at section 9, to the complete satisfactory of
the Owner/ Consultant and/or third appointed agency.
Unless otherwise specified, this document requires references to the latest standards of
the following:
IS 2530 Methods for test for Polyethylene Molding Materials and

Polyethylene Compounds
IS 4984 High Density Polyethylene Pipes for water supply
IS 7328 High Density Polyethylene materials for molding and
extrusion
IS 9938 Recommended colours for PVC insulation for LF wires and
cables
IS 12235 (Part – 9) Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable
water supplies – Impact strength at 0°C
IS 14151 (Part – 1) Ployethylene pipes for sprinkler irrigation systems (Part – I
Pipes)
ASTMD 1693 Test method for environmental stress cracking of ethylene
plastics.
3.0 PLB HDPE Duct Specification :
3.1 The PLB HDPE duct shall consist of two concentric layers, the outer layer being HDPE,
co-extruded with an inner layer of solid permanent lubricant, to reduce the internal co-
efficient of Friction (ICF). The lubricant shall be of a solid layer of uniform thickness so
formulated to provide a permanent, low friction boundary layer between the inner surface
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 4 of 4
of the duct and Optical Fiber cable. The lubricant layer shall be clearly visible in cross-
section, concentric with the outer layer.
3.2 Alternatively the duct can be of a homogenous construction (without a separate inner
layer) meting all the requirements of this specification.
3.3 The PLB HDPE duct shall be supplied in a continuous length in coil form, suitable for
shipping and handing purposes.
3.4 MATERIAL
3.4.1 Two Layer Construction
3.4.2 Outer Layer
The base HDPE rein used for the outer layer of the PLB HDPE duct shall conform to any
designation of IS – 7328 or to any equivalent standard meeting the following
requirements, when tested as per IS – 2530. However, the manufacturers shall furnish the
designation for the HDPE resin as permanently IS – 7328 as applicable.
a) Density : 0.940 TO 0.958 g/cc AT 27°C
B) Melt Flow Rate (MFR) : 0.2 to 1.1 g/10 minutes at 190°C & 6 kg
load.
3.4.3 Inner Layer
The inner lubrication material shall be of friction reducing, polymeric material which
shall be integral with HDPE layer. The lubricant materials shall have no toxic or dermatic
hazards for safe handling. In the finished PLB HDPE duct, the co-extruded layer of solid
permanent lubricant shall be integral part with HDPE and shall be white in colour and
clearly visible in cross-section of duct.
3.4.4 The inner layer of solid permanent lubricant shall be continuous all through and shall not
come out during storage, usage and throughout the life of the duct.
3.5 Homogenous Construction:
The HDPE material used for this construction shall meet the requirements listed in clause
4.1.1, such that the finished duct shall satisfy the internal Co-efficient of friction (ICF)
and all other requirements of this specification.
3.6 The raw material (s) used for the duct shall meet the following requirements :
i) The anti-oxidants used shall be physiologically harmless.

DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 5 of 5
ii) None of the additives shall be used separately or together in quantities as to

impair long term physical and chemical properties of the duct.
iii) Single pass rework material of the same composition produced from the
manufacturer’s own production shall be used and it shall not exceed 10% in any
case.
iv) The raw material used for extrusion shall be dried the moisture content to less
than 0.1%.
v) Suitable UV stabilizers shall be used for manufacturer of the duct to protect
against ultra violet degradation, when stored in open for a minimum period of 8
months.
vi) The raw material used in the manufacturer of the duct shall be such that the
service life of the duct and all its accessories can be expected to be more than 50
years including the life of permanent lubricant.
4.0 PLB HDPE DUCT ACCESSORIES
4.1 The following accessories are required for jointing the ducts and shall be supplied along
with the ducts. The manufacturers shall provide complete design details, procedure for
method of installation and type/ grade of the material used for the accessories. The qty.
will be as per material requisition (MR).
a) Plastic Coupler
It is used to couple two ducts. The design of this shall be simple, easy to install
and shall provide airtight and water tight joint between the two ducts. The
coupler shall ensure that the two ducts are butted smoothly without any step
formation in the inner surface. The jointing shall meet the air pressure test of 10
kg/cm2 for a minimum period of 2 hours without any leakage.
b) End Plug.
This is for sealing the ends of the empty ducts, prior to installation of the Optical
Fiber Cable and shall be fitted immediately after laying of the duct, to prevent the
entry of any dirt, water, moisture, insects/ rodents etc.
c) Cable Sealing Plug
This is used to seal the ends of the ducts perfectly, after the cable is installed in
the duct, to prevent the entry of dirt, water, moisture, insects/ rodents etc. This is
required at all places where cable has come out of the duct either for jointing or
entry into the building as required. The sealing plug shall be capable of
accommodating standard sizes of optical fibre cable taking into account the
variation in diameter due to tolerance limits, etc.
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 6 of 6
d) End Cap
This cap is made of hard rubber, shall be fitted into both ends of duct coil after
manufacturing the duct. This shall avoid entry of duct, mud and rainwater into
the duct during the transit and storage.
Note: The Accessories in clause 6.1 (b) and (c) shall be tested for air tightness with a
pressure of 1 bar for 30 minutes. For carrying out the tests for the above
accessories suitable length of duct shall be taken.
4.2 The following additional tools are required for jointing for the ducts and
installation for optical fibre cable. These items can be procured as per the
Manufacturer/ Supplier’s specification, as and when required by the Owner.(This
is required if exclusively mention in the Material Requisition).
a) Duct Cutter
This is required to cut the duct ends squarely without any burr or notch.
b) C-Spanner
This is required to tighten Plastic Coupler properly so as to ensure air/water

tightness as specified above.
c) Blowing Equipment
The equipment used for installing optical fibre cable by blowing technology shall
be capable of pushing 1 km (minimum) cable into the duct with powerful air
stream generated by a compressor. The compressor shall have the following
characteristics:
Pressure : Min 8 bar

Max. 12 bar
Flow rate : 10 m3/ minute
The mechanical feeder of the equipment shall not cause any damage to the sheath/ jacket
of the optical fibre cable.
5.0 INSPECTION AND TESTS:
The manufacturer shall perform all inspection and test as per the requirements of this
specification and the relevant codes, prior to shipment at this works. Such inspection and
test shall be, but not limited to the following:
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 7 of 7
5.1 Visual Inspection
The ducts shall be checked visually for ensuring good workmanship that the ducts shall
be free from blisters, shirks hole, flaking, chips, scratches, roughness, break and other
defects. the ducts shall be smooth, clean, round. The ends shall be cleanly cut and shall be
square with axis of the duct.
5.2 The colour of the duct shall be green and uniform throughout. Each duct shall contain 4
approximately equi-spaced continuous longitudinal stripes of width 3-mm minimum in
white colour. These stripes shall be co-extruded during manufacturing. The material of
the stripes shall be same as that of base compound for the duct.
5.2.1 In the case of two layer construction the inner layer (Soil Lubricant) shall be white in
colour.
5.2.2 The colours of the duct, stripe and inner layer (in the case of two layer construction) shall
be identifiable under normal lighting conditions and generally conform to IS-9938.
5.3 Dimension of Ducts
The nominal size of the ducts shall be 40/33 mm & 32/26 mm and shall meet the
following requirements.
40 mm/ 33 mm 32 mm/ 26 mm
a) Outside diameter 40 mm + 0.4 mm 32 mm + 0.3 mm
b) Wall thickness 3.5 mm ± 0.2 mm 3.0 mm ± 0.2 mm
c) Standard length 1000 ± 100 mtr. 1000 ± 100 mtr.
d) Maximum Outer 16 mm 12 mm
Diameter of Optical Fiber
Cable (OFC) that can be
Installed by air blowing
Technique
Note: Selection of duct size will depend on the outside diameter of the Optical Fiber
Cable (OFC) to be installed.
5.4.1 Tensile Strength and Elongation
The samples removed from the PLB HDPE ducts when tested as permanently IS-14151
(Part – I) shall meet the following requirements.
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 8 of 8
Tensile Strength : Min 20 N/mm2
Elongation : Min. 350%
5.4.2 Reversion Test:
The test shall be carried out as per IS-4984. For this purpose, a duct length of 200 mm
shall be placed horizontally in an air-oven or a suitable liquid bath on a support at 110 ±
2°C for 60 minutes so that the dimensional change in duct section are not impeded. After
cooling to room temperature the dimensional change of the duct section shall be
measured in the longitudinal direction and the deviation from the initial length shall be
calculated and stated in percentage. The dimensions shall not changes by more than 3%
in the longitudinal direction.
5.4.3 Environmental Stress Crack Resistance Test:
The specimen cut from the PLB HDPE ducts shall meet the environmental stress
cracking as described in ASTM D-1693, when tested with 10% Igepal (CO 630) solution
at 50 ±1°C for 96 hours. There shall be no failure.
5.4.4 Impact Strength Test:
The test has to be carried as per IS-12235 (Part – 9). A sample duct 150 mm in length
shall be placed on heavy rigid block whose faces are at an angle of 120°. A striker with a
hemispherical nose of 13 mm radius and loaded to a total weight of 10 kg shall be
allowed to fall freely in a suitable vertical guides through a height of 1.5 m before
striking the duct. The line of fall of the striker shall coincide with the diameter of the
duct. The duct shall not crack or split.
5.4.5 Crush Resistance Test :
Samples of duct of 150 mm ± 2 mm in length shall be subjected to a dead load of not less
than 50 kg for one minute and shall be allowed to recover for 5 minutes. The deflection
with load on and after recovery period shall not exceed 10% and 2% respectively.
5.4.6 Mandrel Test:
A 150 mm long mandrel of diameter, 3 mm less than the internal diameter of the duct
shall be passed through a 5 meter length of duct, freely throughout the length, when the
duct is bent to a radius of 5 meters.
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 9 of 9
5.4.7 Ovality Test:
Ovality is the difference between maximum outside diameter and the minimum outside
diameter at the same cross-section of the duct, at 300 mm away from the end. The ovality
for 40/33 mm and 32/26 mm ducts, when measured as per IS_4984 shall not exceed 1.4
mm and 1.3 mm respectively.
5.4.8 Coil Set Test :
The PLB HDPE duct shall unroll of the drums without snaking or waving having zero
coil set. Thus the duct shall lay straight into the trench without re-coiling. For this
purpose, when a minimum length of 50 meters duct taken from the coil and laid on the
ground, it shall be straight without any bends or kinks and without deformation, except 5
meters from each end.
5.4.9 Oxidation Induction Test:
The induction time in oxygen when tested with a copper pan as per method in Annexure
– I, shall not be less than 30 minutes.
5.4.10 Hydraulic Characteristics :
The duct shall be tested for internal pressure creep rupture test as per IS-4984. For this
purpose, a sample length of 10 times the outside diameter of the duct shall be taken. At
the end of the test, the sample shall not shown signs of localised swelling or leakage and
shall not burst during the test duration. The test showing failure within a distance
equivalent to the length of end cap from the end shall be disregarded and the test
repeated. The test temperature and the duration of the test shall be as follows:
Test Test Temp °C Test Duration (Hrs.) Induced Stress

(Min, holding time) (Mpa)
Type Test 80 165 3.5
Acceptance test 80 48 3.8
5.4.11 Internal Co-efficient of Friction:
The internal Co-efficient of Friction when tested as permanently method in Annxurer –

II, shall not exceed 0.06, when tested with respect to Nylon jacketted unarmored Optical
Fiber Cable i.e., 24 F Fiber or 12 F as required.
5.4.12 Optical Fiber Cable Blowing Test:
For this test an Optical fiber Cable of a diameter nearest to the diameter indicated in this
specification, relevant to the size of duct under test shall be installed by blowing of the
cable in a length of 1 km of the duct. The duct shall be laid with bends in the horizontal
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 10 of 10
and vertical planes and a raise in the middle. The 1 km section shall include two
couplings at suitable locations.
The OFC shall then be blown out. It shall be inspected for any visual damage. The OFC
shall then be blown in again.
It shall be possible to blow in the Optical Fiber Cable through the 1 km duct, each time in
not more then 30 minutes. There shall be no visible damage to OFC.
The test will be conducted on two samples out of the five submitted for Type Approval.
5.4.13 Owner/ Consultant reserves the right to perform stage – wise inspection and witness tests
as indicated above at manufacturer’s works prior to shipment. Manufacturer shall give
reasonable access and facilities required for inspection to the Owner / Consultant
Inspector.
Owner/ Consultant reserved- the right to require additional testing at any time to confirm
or further investigation a suspected fault. The cost incurred shall be to manufacturer’s
account. In no case shall any action Owner/ Consultant or his Inspector relive the
manufacturer of his responsibility for material, design, quality etc. Inspection and test
performed / withered by the Owner/ Consultant Inspector shall in no way relieve the
manufacturer’s obligation to perform the required inspection and test.
5.4.14 Test Certificate
Manufacturer shall submit all the test report of the test performed as per above
requirement.
The certificates shall be valid only when signed by Owner/ Consultant Inspector. Only
the certificate material shall be dispatched from manufacturer works.
6.0 IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS
The duct shall be prominently marked with indelible link, with the following information
at intervals every meter to enable identification of the pipe. The size of ink markings shall
be distinct, clearly and easily visible.
Client Name
Client Logo
Manufacturer’s Name (Also can be abbreviated form)
Name of the duct with size
Machine number/ specific serial number of the duct
Date of manufacturing
Sequential length marking at every meter.
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 11 of 11
7.0 TYPE APPROVAL AND ACCEPTANCE TEST :
7.1 All the tests mentioned in this document shall be carried out on the 5 standard lengths of
ducts and the samples must pass these tests before according the type approval. The
supplier shall furnish 5 standard length for carrying out these tests for according type
approval. Bulk manufacturer and supply shall start only after issue of type approval. The
type approval certificate shall clearly indicated the type/ grade/ source of high-density
polyethylene raw material, the size of the duct and the construction of the duct i.e., Two
layer of Homogenous.
7.2 Fresh type approval shall be obtained whenever grade/ source of raw material HDPE
resin or Solid Lubricant is changed.
7.3 Acceptance Tests
7.3.1 The acceptance tests shall be carried out on samples from the lot as per Table – 1 for
Dimensional and Visual requirements. The requirements for Tensile Strength &
Elongation, Reversion Test, Environmental Stress Crack resistance, Impact Strength,
Crush resistance, Oxidation Induction Test, Hydraulic Characteristics and internal Co-
efficient of Friction shall be carried out as per Table – 2.
7.3.2 The Owner at his discretion at any point of time can modify the acceptance tests and the
sampling plan.
8.0 STORAGE
All the material shall be stores in the manufacturer’s premises in such a manner that it
will not affect the performance of the product.
9.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM & TESTING
9.1 Quality Assurance Program
a) Vendor shall submit the details for Quality Assurance Program followed by him
beginning with raw materials, fabricated components, assemblies, etc., to
finished product (AS Applicable). Vendor shall obtain and forward the Quality
Assurance Program for equipment supplied by Sub-contractor.
b) The Owner/ Consultant and/ or third appointed agency reserves the right to
inspect and test duct and accessories etc. at all stages of production and testing.
The inspection and testing shall include but not be limited to materials, sub-
assemblies, prototypes, produced units, guaranteed, performance specifications
etc.
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 12 of 12
c) For factory inspection and testing, vendor shall arrange all the is required e.g.,
quality assurance personnel spaces, test gear etc., for successful carrying out of
the job by the Owner’s respectively at vendor’s cost at the vendor’s/
Manufacturer ‘s works.
d) Owner’s representatives shall have free entry and access to any and all parts of
the Vendor’s facilities associated with manufacturing and testing of the system at
any given time.
e) It shall be explicitly understood that under no circumstances shall any approval

of the Owner or his representatives relieve the vendor of his responsibility of
material, design, quantity assurance and the guaranteed performance of the
system and its constants.
f) Vendor shall invite the Owner/ Consultant, at least 30 days in advance, of the
date on which material shall be ready for inspection and testing. All relevant
documents and manuals approved engineering drawings, etc shall be provided to
the Owner’s / consultant’s representative’s well in advance of the start of
inspection and Testing.
g) Owner/ Consultant shall, after completion of inspection and testing to their

satisfactory, issues factory acceptance certificate to release duct / accessories for
shipment. No. Duct / accessories shall be shipped under any circumstances unless
a factory acceptance certificate has been issued for it, unless agreed otherwise by
Owner/ Consultant.
h) PLB HDPE Duct Testing
Factory testing shall be conducted for acceptance of the duct at the

manufacturing facility, wherefrom duct is offered for this project before final
acceptance, as per the approval test plan
i) Accessories Testing :
Accessories shall be tested before final acceptance, as per the approved test plan.
j) Test Instruments :
i) Vendor shall arrange all test equipment’s/ instruments, manpower, test-

gear, accessories etc. necessary for testing.
ii) All technical personnel assigned by vendor shall be fully conversant with
the system specifications and requirements. They shall have the specific
capability to make the system operative quickly and efficiently and shall
not interface or be interfered by other concurrent construction and
commissioning activities in progress. They shall also have the capability
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 13 of 13
to incorporate any minor modification/ suggestions put forward by

Owner/ Consultant.
iii) Power supply required for testing shall be arranged by the vendor
iv) Test Plane
Vendor shall submit to owner and consultant ‘Test Plans’ well in

advance of commencement of actual testing.
- Functional and performance description (in short) and tests to be

conducted and purpose of test.
- Test procedures (including time schedule for the tests) and
identification of test inputs details and desired test results.
v) Test report
The observation and test results obtained during various tests conducted
shall be complied and documented to produce test reports by vendor. The
test reports shall be given for each equipment / items and system as a
whole. The report contain the following information to a minimum/
vi) Test Results
- Comparison of tests results with anticipated test result as given

in test plans and reasons for deviations if any,
- The data furnished shall prove convincingly that:
- The system meets the Guaranteed performance objective.
- Mechanical/ Optical/ Electrical limits were not exceeded.
- Failure profiles during the tests are well within the specified
limits.
10.0 VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS AND DOCUMENTATION
10.1 All the documents shall be is English language only.
10.2 Six sets of documents shall be supplied with final submission.
10.3 With the initial bid, the following documents shall be submitted
i) Duct Construction Details and Duct Life.

ii) Accessories Details.
iii) Technical Literature etc.
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 14 of 14
10.4 Following documents shall be supplied to Owner/ Consultant in order to start Factory
Acceptance Testing
a) For Review Approval
i) Detailed Testing procedure for Duct.

ii) Detailed test procedure for accessories
iii) Quality assurance program
iv) Any other data/ documents not specifically mentioned but required for
the satisfactory completion of the work
b) For Information
i) Detail technical Literature and manuals for duct & accessories

ii) Installation, Maintenance & Operation Instruction Manual for all the
supply items
11.0 PACKAGE AND DELIVERY
The store shall be supplied in coils of suitable size for delivery in such a manner that they
arrive at their distribution in a safe and undamaged condition and will permit the loading,
unloading and handing the stores using standard moving equipment. The minimum inner
bending diameter of technical coiled duct shall be 25 times the outer diameter of the cut.
The material used for packaging wrapping sealing, moisture, resistant, corrosion prevents
etc. as per applicable shall be of recognized brands and shall conform to best standards
for packaging. The packing shall protect the material from impact vibration rough
handling rain, dust, damp, insects, rodents etc., Each packing should have packing slip
and test dispatch clearance documents.
_____________
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 15 of 15
Table – 1
SCALE OF SAMPLING FOR VISUAL AND DIMENSIONAL, REQUIREMENTS
No. of coils (Duct) in Sample No. Sample Size Cumulative Acceptance Rejection No.
the Lot Sample Size No.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Up to 150 First 13 13 0 2
Second 13 26 1 2
151 to 280 First 20 20 0 3
Second 20 40 3 4
281 to 500 First 32 32 1 4
Second 32 64 4 5
501 to 1200 First 50 50 2 5
Second 50 100 6 7
1201 to 3200 First 80 80 3 7
Second 80 160 8 9
3201 to 10000 First 125 125 5 9
Second 125 250 12 13

10001 to 35000 First 200 200 7 11
400
Second 200 18 19
Criteria:
The number of ducts given for the first sample in Column 3 shall be examined for
dimension and visual requirements. A duct failing to satisfy any of these requirements
shall be considered as defective. The lot shall be deemed to have satisfied these
requirements, if the number of defectives found in the first sample are less than or equal
to the corresponding acceptance number given in Column 5. The lot shall be deemed not
to have met these requirements of the number of defectives found in the first sample is
greater than or equal to the corresponding rejection number given in Column 6. If,
however, the number of defectives found in the first sample, lies between the
corresponding acceptance and rejection numbers given in Column 5 and 6, the second
sample of the size given in Column 3 shall be taken and examined for these requirements.
The lot shall be considered to have satisfied these requirements, if the number of
defectives found in the cumulative sample is less than or equal to the corresponding
acceptance number given in Column 5 otherwise not.
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 16 of 16
TABLE – 2
SAMPLING FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTS
A separate sample size for each of the tests shall be taken as stipulated at random from
the samples already examined for dimensions and visual inspection. All the ducts in each
of the sample size shall be tested for compliance for the requirements for as per clause
no. 5.4 of technical specification:
(a) Tensile Strength & Elongation

(b) Reversion Test
(c) Environmental Stress Crack Resistance
(d) Impact Strength
(e) Crush Resistance
(f) Oxidation Induction Test
(g) Hydraulic Characteristics
(h) Internal Co-efficient of Friction
The lot shall be considered to have met the requirements of these tests, if none of samples tested
fails.
No. of Coils Sample Size

Up to 150 3
151 to 1200 5
1201 to 35000 8
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 17 of 17
Annexure – I
OXIDATION INDUCTION TEST FOR PLB HDPE DUCT
1.0 A short length of completed duct (approximately 30 cm) shall be sealed at the ends and
placed in an oven at temperature of 68 ± 1°C for 8 hours. The sample shall then be
allowed to cool at room temperature for at least 16 hours. The sample shall be clean and
dry. The sample shall then by tested by means of a Differential Scanning Calorimeter
(DSC) or by Differential Thermal Analyser (DTA).
2.0 INSTRUMENT TEST PROCEDURE :
2.1 Cell cleaning: The cell shall be held at approximately 400 °C for 10 minutes in Nitrogen.
The cell shall be cleaned after standing over night and between testing of different
formulations.
2.2 Temperature Calibration: This has to be done according to the instrument manual. The
temperature scale should be adjusted until the determined melting point of pure Indium
metal is 156.6 °C at a heat rate of 5 °C per minute or any other heat rate as indicated in
the manual of the equipment is permitted.
2.3 Copper Pan Preparation: Prepare fresh oxide coatings by holding the pan in the flame
of Fisher burner until it begins to glow (about 3 seconds). Remove the pan from the flame
and immediately cool in a gentle stream of air. A fresh pan shall be used for each test,
and the copper shall be of electrolyte grade.
2.4 Sample Preparation: Take the sample weighing about 5 mg from the duct conditioned
as indicated above. Position the sample in the center of the copper pan. Cover with clean
316 stainless steel screen (40 mesh) and crimp the pan.
2.5 Nitrogen Purge: Place the sample pan and reference pan in instrument cell. Flush for 5
minutes with cylinder of nitrogen (99.6% extra dry grade) at 60 + 10 cc per minute.
2.6 Oxidation Test: Rapidly increase the temperature of the sample (20 °C /min or greater)
from 100 °C or lower initial temperature to 199 + 1°C. After thermal equilibrium is
obtained (steady recorder signal) switch to 80 + 20 cc per minute oxygen flow and
simultaneously start time-base recording. The oxygen used for the test should be
equivalent to or better than 99.9% extra dry grade.
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 18 of 18
2.7 Induction Period: The oxygen induction point shall be recorded as time zero, and the
chart speed shall be sufficient to provide a clearly discernible slope at the start of the
exothermic reaction. The test in the pure dry oxygen atmosphere shall continue until the
exothermic peak is produced. The intersection of the tangent of the exothermic sloped
line with the extended base line will be drawn. The time form time zero to this
intersection point is read from the base line and recorded as the oxidative induction time.
----------------------
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 19 of 19
Anenxure – 2
INTERNAL CO-EFFICIENT OF FRICTION TEST FOR PLB HDPE DUCT
1. SCOPE:
These procedure details the method employed to determine internal friction properties of
the duct.
2. APPARATUS :
Extensometer machine, circular test fixture of diameter 750 mm (capable of having

secured to it), 25 kg weight, optical fibre cable and pulley wheel.
3. METHOD:
a) A suitable length of the duct, per-conditioned at 23 + 2°C for 2 hours, shall be

secured to the text fixture such that the sample completes a 450°C wrap. With
one end extending vertically 200 mm towards the floor.
b) A suitable length of optical fibre cable shall be inserted into the sample.
c) The extensometer and the test fixture shall be aligned and secured from
movement.
d) The 25 kg tail weight shall be attached to the optical fibre cable extending from
the 200 mm vertical extension of the sample such that there is a minimum free
travel of 150 mm for the weight.
e) The other end of the optical fibre cable shall be attached via a pulley, to the
extensometer such that the planes of travel are in no direction diagonal and there
shall be slack remaining in the optical fibre cable.
f) The extensometer shall be operated, and the maximum load applied, in lifting the
25 kg weight to a minimum travel of 150 mm shall be noted.
g) Extensometer conditions
Load : kg or Newtons
Speed : 500 mm / minute
Mode : Tension
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 20 of 20
4. The co-efficient of friction shall be calculated by the following equation:
Internal Co-efficient of Friction (ICF) = loge (T1/T2) / Q
Where, T1 = Pulling force in kg;

T2 = 25 kg
Q= Angle of the subtending are between T1 & T2 in radians (i.e. 450 ° =
7.85398 radians)
DELHI
ELECT. & INST.
SECTION
Rev.1 Page 21 of 21
PERMANENTLY LUBRICANT HDPE TELECOM DUCT
(PLB HDPE Duct)
1.0 Design/ Manufacturing : AS per the technical Specification

Requirements.
2.0 Outer Diameter : 40 mm
3.0 Pressure Rating : Min 6 kg/cm2
4.0 Wall Thickness : 4.0 ± 0.3 mm
5.0 Tensite Strength : 20 N/ mm2 or better
6.0 Density : 940 - 950 kg/m3 at 27°C
7.0 Melt Flow Index : 0.4 to 0.95 gm/10 minutes at 90°C under 5 kg
load.
8.0 Intrinsic Coefficient of Friction : 0.06 (max.) when tested with

respect to Nylon.
9.0 Impact Strength : As per IS : 12235 (Part – 9), 1989
10.0 Confirmation to Standards : As per IS : 7328

( Latest) As per IS : 2530
As per IS : 9938
As per IS : 4984
As per IS : 1693
As per ASTM D : 1693
11.0 Quantity : As per SOR
****************
Rev. : 0
Edition : 1
SPECIFICATION
FOR
TEMPORARY CATHODIC PROTECTION
SYSTEM
SPECIFICATION NO.: MEC/S/05/21/016A
(OIL & GAS SBU)

MECON LIMITED
DELHI 110 092
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
TITLE MEC/S/05/21/016A REVISION : 0
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
SL. NO. DESCRIPTION
1.0 SCOPE
3.0 CORROSION DATA
4.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN PARAMETERS
5.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA
6.0 SYSTEM DETAILS
7.0 INSTALLATION
8.0 CIVIL WORKS
9.0 TESTING AND INSPECTION AT WORKS
10.0 PACKING AND TRANSPORT
11.0 SYSTEM TESTING COMMISSIONING AND INTERFERENCE MITIGATION
12.0 SYSTEM MONITORING
13.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
14.0 INSTRUMENTS, TOOLS AND SPARES
15.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH BID
PREPARED BY: CHECKED & APPROVED BY: ISSUE DATE :
(Amit Lavania) (D.K. Pande) Feb. 2009

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
AMENDMENT STATUS

(Name) (Name)
Amended
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification defines the requirements of design, engineering supply of

materials, installation, testing and commissioning of temporary cathodic protection
system of external surface of cross country underground pipeline/structure including
supplementing of corrosion survey, investigation for interference/ interaction
problems and mitigation of the same. Unless otherwise specified monitoring of the
temporary cathodic protection system till the commissioning of permanent C.P.
System shall be carried out by temporary C.P. contractor.
This specification defines the basic guidelines to develop a suitable temporary

cathodic protection system for the structure required to be protected. All data
required in this regard shall be taken into consideration to develop an acceptable
design and for proper engineering of the system.
1.2 Compliance with these specifications and/ or approval of any of the contractor's
documents shall in no case relieve the contractor of contractual obligations.
1.3 In case where temporary and permanent cathodic protection works are being
executed by the same agency, activities of permanent CP system which are common
to temporary CP system shall be completed as part of temporary CP system. In
cases where temporary and permanent cathodic protection works are being
executed by different agencies, the contractual scope of work shall be referred for
further details.
1.4 All work to be performed and supplies to be effected as a part of contract shall
require specific approval of owner or his authorised representative. Major activities
requiring approval shall include but not be limited to the following :-
• Corrosion survey data interpretation report and design basis for CP system.
• CP system design package
• Purchase requisitions for major equipment and vendor approval
• Detailed engineering package
• Field testing and commissioning procedure
• Procedures for interference testing and mitigation
• CPL survey and system monitoring procedures
2.1 The system design, performance and materials to be supplied shall unless otherwise
specified, conform to the requirements of latest relevant applicable standards of :-
- NACE Standard RP-0169 : Standard Recommended Practice

Control of External Corrosion on
Underground or Submerged Metallic
Piping systems.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
- NACE Publication 10A190 : Measurement technique related to

criteria for CP of Underground or
Submerged Steel Piping System (as
defined in NACE Standard RPO169-83).
- NACE Standard RP-0177 : Standard Recommended Practice

Mitigation of Alternating Current and
Lighting Effects on Metallic Structures
and Corrosion Control Systems.
- NACE Standard RP-0286 : Standard Recommended Practice The

Electrical isolation of Cathodically
Protected Pipelines.
- NACE Publication No. 54276 : Cathodic Protection Monitoring for

Buried Pipelines.
- BS 7361 Part I : Code of Practice for Cathodic Protection

for land and Marine applications.
- VDE 0150 : Protection against Corrosion due to

Stray Current from DC Installations.
- IS : 7098 Part I : XLPE insulated cables.
In case of conflicting requirements amongst any of the above standards the

publication having most stringent requirement shall be governing.
2.2 The equipment shall also confirm to the provisions of Indian Electricity rules and
other statutory regulations currently in force in the country.
2.3 In case of any contradiction between various referred standards / specifications /

data sheet and statutory regulations the following order of priority shall govern:
- Statutory Regulations
- Data Sheets
- Job Specification
- This Specification
- Codes and Standards.
3.0 CORROSION DATA
3.1 The corrosion survey including soil resistivity data along ROW and other data
required for CP design is attached with this document. However, verification of its
veracity and adequacy shall be the entire responsibility of the contractor. In addition,
contractor shall have to generate/ collect additional data as required for
completeness of the job. Contractor shall also carry out soil resistivity survey at
temporary anode ground bed locations for proper design of ground beds. Wenner's
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
4-pin method or approved equal shall be used for such measurements. Survey
instruments shall have maximum AC and DC ground current rejection feature.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the resistivity observations are not influenced by
the presence of foreign pipelines / structures, and earth currents in the vicinity of
EHV / HV lines and installations using earth return in their power system etc.
3.2 Additional data to be collected
The following data shall be collected to generate design data for evaluation of
interaction/ interference possibilities due to presence of other services in ROW/ in
vicinity.
i. Route and types of foreign service/pipeline in and around or crossing the

right of way (including those existing and those which are likely to come up
during contract execution or any abandoned pipelines.
ii. Details of Existing Pipelne including diameter, wall thickness, pressure,

pipeline coating against corrosion, soil cover used in case of pipelines.
iii. Detail of the existing cathodic protection system protecting the services i.e.
location, rating, type of protection, anode beds, test station locations and their
connection schemes.
iv. Graphical representation of existing structure/ pipe-to soil potential records.

T/R unit current/ voltage readings.
v. Remedial measures existing on foreign pipeline/services to prevent

interaction.
vi. Possibility of integration/isolation of CP system, which may involve

negotiations with owners of other services.
vii. Crossing and parallel running of electrified and non-electrified traction (along
with information regarding operating voltage, type AC/DC etc.) as well as
abandoned tracks near ROW having electrical continuity with the tracks in
use.
viii. Crossing and parallel running of any HT/AC/DC overhead line

(existing/proposed) along with details of voltage, type AC/DC etc.
ix. Voltage rating, number of cores and sheathing details of under ground power
cables, running in parallel or crossing ROW.
x. Information on existing and proposed DC/AC power sources and system

having earth as return path, in the vicinity of the entire pipeline, route such as
HV/DC sub stations, fabrication yards with electric welding etc.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
xi. Any masonry work for other concrete or non conductive constructions in the
ROW which may block the CP current or cause interference to the pipeline.
xii. Any other relevant information that may be needed in designing and
implementing proper protection scheme for the proposed pipeline.
Unless otherwise mentioned, Contractor shall conduct necessary potential

gradient survey for any existing anode ground bed that may interfere with the
CP system of the pipeline covered under this project.
3.3 Report
On completion of all field work a report incorporating all the results generated from
surveys and details of additional data collected shall be furnished. The report shall
also contain detailed interpretation of survey results and resistivity data enclosed,
probable interference prone areas etc. to form design basis for the scheme of
cathodic protection. This report shall be plotted on semi-log graph sheets.
4.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN PARAMETERS
Unless otherwise specified in the project specifications, following parameters shall be

used for design of temporary cathodic protection system.
Those parts of sacrificial anode cathodic protection system which will be integrated
with permanent CP system shall be designed based on permanent CP parameters.
4.1 Protection current density
(i) Pipe lines having polyethylene coatings
Pipeline Minimum Protection current density*

surrounding Temporary CP Permanent CP
(µA/m²) (µA/m²)
Normal soil 50 120
Marshy area/ 100 125
buried in sea
water/ HDD
crossing
High resistivity 25 100
area (more than
100Ω m)
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
(ii) Pipe lines having FBE Coatings
Pipeline Minimum Protection current density*

surrounding Temporary CP Permanent CP
(µA/m²) (µA/m²)
Normal soil 200 300
Marshy area 300 500
High resistivity area 150 250
(more than 100Ω m)
Pipe to soil "ON" potential shall not be more negative than (-) 1.5V.
* Actual current density to be adopted shall be decided based upon soil and
other environmental conditions, proximity of foreign pipelines and structures
affecting interference. Where considered necessary for satisfactory
protection of pipeline the current density shall be suitably increased by
contractor.
4.2 Safety factor for current density : 1.3
4.3 Anode utilization factor : 0.85 for Solid Anodes

0.6 for Ribbon Anodes
4.4 Pipeline natural potential : (-) 0.45 V
4.5 Unless otherwise specified in project specification the design life of temporary CP
shall be one year and that of permanent CP shall be 30 years.
5.0 CATHODIC PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA
5.1 Cathodic protection system shall be designed to meet the following criteria:
a) The pipe-to-electrolyte potential measurement shall be (-) 0.95 V or more

negative as measured between pipe surface and saturated Cu-CuS04,
reference electrode containing electrolyte when cathodic protection is applied
but on potential measurement shall not go more negative than (-)1.50 V.
b) The pipeline shall be considered protected when a minimum of (-)300 millivolt

potential shift has been achieved from the initial native potential to the CP ÒN’
potential.
c) In rare circumstances a minimum polarisation shift of (-) 100 millivolts shall

indicate adequate levels of cathodic protection for the pipeline. The formation of
decay of this polarisation shall be used in the criteria.
Discretion to use any of the criteria listed above shall solely rest with the Owner/
Owner’s representative.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
5.2 A positive potential swing of 50-100 mV shall be considered the criteria for presence of
an interference situation requiring investigation and incorporation of mitigation
measures by the CONTRACTOR.
6.0 SYSTEM DETAILS
The system shall include the following major equipment/sub-systems unless

otherwise specified:
- Sacrificial anodes and anode ground beds

- Test stations
- Surge diverter/grounding cell
- Polarisation cells
- Interconnecting cables
- Cable to pipe connections
- Surge Diverter
- CP System at cased crossings
- Electrical resistance probes
All equipment shall be new and supplied by approved reputed manufacturers.

Equipment offered shall be field proven. Equipment requiring specialised
maintenance or operation shall be avoided as far as possible and prototype
equipment shall not be accepted. Make and construction of all material shall be
subject to owner's approval.
The detailed specification of each system and equipment shall be furnished by the
contractor. However, certain minimum requirements for the major equipment are
highlighted in this document.
As far as possible equipment including test stations, anode lead junction boxes, etc.,
shall be located in safe area. All equipment located in hazardous areas shall be of
flame proof type as per IS: 2148 or equivalent international standard for gas groups
IIA & IIB and temp. Class T3. Indigenous equipment shall be certified by CMRI or
any other recognized testing body and shall be approved by the concerned statutory
authority. All flameproof equipment shall carry the BIS license marking as per the
requirement of statutory authorities.
All imported equipment for hazardous area may be tested and certified by an
independent certifying agency of country of equipment origin and shall be approved
by the concerned statutory authority in India.
6.1 Anode Ground Beds
6.1.1 The pipeline shall be protected by prepacked zinc/ magnesium anodes.
6.1.2 Along ROW where soil resistivity predominantly remains low, ranges from 0-10 ohm. m
and pH value is within 9, zinc anodes may be provided. Anodes of type I as per ASTM-
B 418 standard shall be used for seawater, brackish water or saline electrolyte
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
application and anode of type II as per ASTM-B 418 standard shall be used for fresh
water, back fill and soil applications.
6.1.3 Along ROW where soil resistivity predominantly in the range of 10 ohm. m to 30 ohm.
m low potential (1.55V) magnesium anodes may be provided.
6.1.4 Along ROW where soil resistivity is predominantly in the range of 30 ohm.m to 50
ohm.m high potential (1.75V) magnesium anodes may be provided.
6.1.5 At high resistivity area where resistivity is of the order of 50 ohm. m and above
magnesium ribbon anodes may be provided.
6.1.6 Where magnesium anodes are used for protection of polyethylene coated pipelines,
the anodes shall be preferably of low potential (1.55 V) type.
6.1.7 Anodes shall be installed along the pipeline at suitable intervals as per pipeline
protection voltage attenuation calculations and ground bed resistance/ current output
of anode installations. Minimum one anode installation shall be provided for every one
km. of the pipeline. In congested area, minimum one anode installation shall be
provided for every 250 meter of pipeline length. At high resistivity area the magnesium
ribbon anodes shall be installed all along the pipeline by the side of the pipeline in the
pipeline trench.
6.1.8 Each electrically continuous section of pipeline shall preferably be protected totally by
one type (material) of anodes to avoid inter-anode circulation currents.
6.1.9 The anodes shall be installed at sufficient depth to reach moist soil and shall be
separated from the pipe line by at least 5m and 2m for magnesium and zinc anodes
respectively. The magnesium ribbon abode shall be separated from the pipeline by at
least ½ meter. The anode connections to pipeline shall be routed through test stations.
6.1.10 At the temporary cathodic protection anode ground bed, the leads of all the anodes
shall be joined together in a junction box filled with epoxy and buried. A single cable
shall be routed from the junction box to the test station. At permanent CP anode
ground bed, the leads of all the anodes shall be brought up to the test station and shall
be terminated individually.
6.1.11 For sacrificial anode ground bed which shall be integrated with permanent CP System
the leads of all the anodes shall be brought up to the test station and shall be
terminated individually.
6.1.12 The number of anodes at each ground bed shall be sufficient for providing the
specified pipe protection current density taking into consideration the ground bed
resistance, pipe coating resistance, cable resistance, etc. Contractor shall prepare a
table for number of anodes required at different soil resistivities to produce the
specified protection current. Any deficiency in the protection system if noticed during
commissioning or during monitoring shall be corrected by the CP contractor by suitably
augmenting the system with additional anodes without any cost / schedule implications.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
6.1.13 For the portion of the pipeline for which for CP system has been specified based on the
permanent CP system parameters, the contractor shall ascertain the requirement of
the cathodic protection current density indicated in Cl. No. 4.1 above. Where specified
in the project specification / datasheet the requisite current density test /survey shall be
conducted by the contractor to establish the adequacy of the CP current requirement &
number of anode ground beds.
6.2.1 Magnesium anode
The anode shall confirm to the requirements of ASTM-B 418 standard. The anode
shall be of high manganese, magnesium alloy packed with special back fill. The
metallurgical composition, potential and consumption rate of anode shall be as
below:
(i) Composition:
Element Weight Weight

(Low Potential type) (High Potential type)
Manganese 0.15 – 0.7% 0.5 – 1.3%
Copper 0.02% max. 0.02% max.
Silicon 0.1% max. 0.05% max.
Zinc 2.5% - 3.5% -
Aluminium 5.3% - 6.7% 0.01% max.
Iron 0.003% max. 0.03% max.
Nickel 0.002% max. 0.001% max.
Other metallic elements

- Each - 0.05% max.
- Total 0.3% max. 0.3% Max.
Magnesium Balance Balance
(ii) Anode closed circuit 1.55 volts 1.75 volts

potential
(iii) Anode consumption rate 7.9 kg/(A yr)Max. 7.9 kg/(A yr) Max.
6.2.2 Zinc Anode
The anode shall confirm to the requirements of ASTM-B 418 standard. The anode
(other than ribbon anode) shall be packaged with special back fill. The metallurgical
composition of anode, potential and consumption rate shall be as below. Anodes of
Type-I shall be used for seawater, brackish water or saline electrolyte application
and anodes of Type-II shall be used for fresh water, back fill and soil applications.
(i) Composition:
Element Weight Weight
Type-I Type-II
Aluminum 0.1% to 0.5% 0.005% max.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
Cadmium 0.025 – 0.07% 0.003% max.

Copper 0.005% max. 0.002% max.
Iron 0.005% max. 0.0014% max.
Lead 0.006% max. 0.003% max.
Others 0.01% max. -
Zinc Remainder Remainder
(ii) Anode closed circuit 1.1 volts 1.1 volts

potential
(iii) Anode consumption 11.24 kg/(A yr) max. 11.24 kg/(A yr) max.
Rate
6.2.3 Contractor shall furnish spectrographic analysis from each heat both for zinc and
magnesium anodes along with electrochemical test results.
6.2.4 The anodes for grounding of cathodically protected above ground pipelines at
intermediate SV station, pigging stations, etc., grounding of motor operated valves
on cathodically protected portion of the pipeline, grounding of pipeline through
polarization cell at EHV / HV line crossings or running in parallel, etc. shall be of
minimum 20 kg net weight each. The anode and cable terminations shall be suitable
for the anticipated fault current at the location of installation. For pipelines protected
by sacrificial anodes, for directly grounding the pipeline shall be of the same type as
the one provided for the protection of the pipeline.
6.2.5 Special Backfill
The composition of special back fill for anodes shall be as below. In any case, the
thickness of back fill shall not be less than 50 mm on all sides of the anode.
Gypsum 75%
Bentonite 20%
Sodium Sulphate 5%
6.2.6 The anodes shall be provided with cable tail of sufficient length to reach junction box
test station as applicable without tension.
6.2.7 Tolerance in fabrication of anodes
The anode surface shall be free from cracks which may reduce the performance of
the anode.
Any cracks which follow the longitudinal direction of elongated anodes shall not be
acceptable.
Small cracks in the transverse direction of elongated anodes and in anodes of other
shapes may be accepted provided the cracks would not cause any mechanical
failure during service of the anode considering that the combination of cracks and
lack of bond to the anode core is detrimental.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
For transverse cracks the acceptable limits shall be furnished by the bidders along
with the offer.
The anode shall be free from excessive shrinkages. The following limits shall be
used:
- Maximum 10% of the depth of anode or 50% of the depth of the anode core
whichever is less. The depression may be measured from the edged of one
side.
The surface of the anodes shall be free from coatings and slag/dross inclusions etc.
The maximum deviation from straightness shall not exceed 2%.
The weight tolerance on individual anodes may be taken as ± 5%. The total weight of
the anodes shall not have negative tolerance.
Recommended dimensional tolerance shall be as follows:
Length ± 2.5%
Width/thickness ± 5%
6.3 Test Stations
6.3.1 Test stations shall be provided along the pipeline ROW for monitoring the
performance of the Cathodic Protection system at intervals not exceeding 1000
meters in uncongested & 250 meters in congested area unless otherwise specified.
In addition to above, test stations shall also be provided at the following locations:
a. At the locations of anode ground beds

b. At both sides of metalled road crossings
c. At all insulating joints
d. At vulnerable locations with drastic changes in soil resistivity
e. At connections of surge diverters, grounding cells and polarisation cells
f. At HV AC/DC overhead line crossings and selected locations where HT
overhead line is in the vicinity of the pipeline.
g. At both sides of railway line crossings and running parallel to the pipeline.
h. At both sides of major river crossings.
i. At high voltage cable crossings or along routes where HV cables are running
in parallel.
j. In the vicinity of DC net works or grounding system where interference
problems are suspected.
k. At crossings/parallel running of other pipeline / structures
l. At the locations of reference cell and Electrical Resistance probe installation.
m. At both sides of cased crossings
n. At any other locations considered vulnerable locations where interference is
expected
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
o. At locations of Sectionalising Valve (SV) stations.

p. At any other locations considered necessary by owner/owner’s representative
6.3.2 Bond stations shall be provided with shunt & resistor at required locations as a
means to monitor and control current flow between the pipeline and foreign pipelines
/ structures / electrified railway tracks etc. that crossing and running parallel to the
pipeline in common ROW or within 25 metre from the pipeline.
6.3.3 Test stations used for sacrificial anodes shall have shunt for measurement of anode
current, and provision for resistance insertion to limit the anode current output &
anode disconnecting link.
6.3.4 Test station with current measuring facility shall be provided at each intermediate CP
station drainage point (to measure pipeline from drainage point), at interference
prone areas, on both sides of major river crossings and minimum one for every 10
km (max.) alongwith pipeline.
6.3.5 All test stations shall have weather proof enclosure, having degree of protection IP
55 with hinged lockable shutter. Enclosure shall be made of sheet steel of at least 3
mm thickness and shall be suitable for M.S. post mounting. The test stations shall be
designed with terminals required for both temporary and permanent CP system and
shall be suitable for total life of permanent CP system.
6.3.6 The test stations shall be installed with the front of the test station facing the pipeline.
The name plate of test stations shall in minimum carry following information.
- Test station number

- Chainage in km
- Test station connection scheme type
- Distance from pipeline in meters
- Direction of product flow
6.3.7 Terminal blocks and different scheme of wiring as required shall be provided in the
test station as per the test station connection scheme sketch. Minimum 20% spare
terminals shall be provided in each TLP.
6.3.8 The location of all the test stations shall be marked with their connection schemes
and other relevant information's on alignment sheets. A detailed test station schedule
shall be prepared.
6.4 Surge diverter, grounding cell and polarisation cell
6.4.1 Where high voltage (66 KV and above) transmission line runs in parallel or crosses
the pipeline, the pipeline shall be grounded through polarisation cells & zinc anodes
of minimum 20 kg net wt. each. Alternatively, grounding could be done directly with
zinc galvanic anodes of minimum 20 kg wt. net each at the discretion of owner.
Grounding shall be done at regular intervals of maximum 1 km where transmission
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
lines run parallel within 25 meter of the pipeline to ground any surges on the pipeline
that would appear in case of transmission line faults.
6.4.2 In case of continuous induction of voltage on the pipeline beyond safe limits is
expected or observed during commissioning due to HV Line or other of any rating.,
the pipeline shall be grounded to the earth system of nearest HV transmission tower
of the transmission line causing the voltage induction through polarisation cell or the
pipeline shall be grounded to a separate earthing system of zinc galvanic anodes
through polarisation cell. Alternatively, the pipeline shall be directly grounded with
zinc galvanic anodes of minimum 20 kg net wt. each at the discretion of the owner.
The polarisation cell shall be installed in test station.
6.4.3 Explosion proof Surge Diverter (Spark Gap Arrester) shall be connected across each
insulating joint to protect it from high voltage surges.
6.4.4 Alternatively, zinc grounding cell may be provided across insulating joints along
ROW where the pipeline on both the sides of the insulating joint are cathodically
protected and difference of protection voltage is not more then 0.4 volts.
Alternatively, owner on its own discretion may permit use of Magnesium / Zinc
galvanic anodes for protection of insulating joints. Choice between Magnesium or
zinc anodes shall depend upon the potential valves on either side of the insulating
joint. These anodes shall be sized for the specified design life of permanent cathodic
protection system.
6.4.5 The total system including cables, cable termination, anodes/ surge diverters,
polarization cells shall be suitable for the anticipated fault current at the location of
installation.
6.4.6 Unless otherwise specified on data sheet, the minimum rating of grounding cells,
polarisation cells and surge diverters shall be as below:
(i) Grounding Cell

- Type : Zinc, 2 or 4 plate type
- Current rating : Suitable to pass more than
10kA surge
(ii) Polarisation cell

- Type : Solid state or Electrolytic multiple pairs
S.S plats type ground
- Rating : Suitable to pass 5KA or more surge
(iii) Surge Diverter (Spark Gap Arrester)

- Type : Spark gap
- Current, 8/20 wave : 100 kA
- Spark over AC voltage :
- 50 Hz : 1 kV
- Impulse (1.2/50) : 2.2 kV
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
micro sec)
6.4.7 The grounding cell, Surge Diverter (Spark Gap Arrester), and polarisation cell
system shall be sized for the design life of permanent CP system. The zinc or
magnesium anodes meant for pipeline grounding shall also be sized for the life of
the permanent CP system taking into account the current discharge from the
anodes. The grounding system shall have minimum resistance to earth to restrict the
pipeline voltage as per NACE / VDE criteria but shall not exceed 5 ohms. The
anodes shall be pre packed with special backfill adequately so that the performance
of the anode is not affected by the carbonates, bicarbonates, nitrates, etc. present in
the soil. In any case, the thickness of back fill shall not be less than 50 mm on all the
sides of the anode.
6.4.8 In case of HT transmission overhead lines of voltage below 66KV also requisite
mitigation measures should be provided to take care of continuous induction of
voltage interface due to presence of transmission line in close proximity. The pipeline
shall be grounded through polarization cell to earth system of HV tower causing the
voltage induction or to a separate earthing system of zinc anodes through
polarization cell.
6.4.9 Motor operated valves where located on the cathodically protected portion of the
pipeline shall be grounded by a zinc or magnesium anode of 20 kg net where the
type of anode provided for the CP system of the pipeline is zinc or magnesium
respectively. The MOV power supply cable armour shall be insulated (by cutting and
taping with insulation tape) at MOV end to avoid armour carrying CP current.
6.4.10 The above ground cathodically unprotected pipeline at intermediate SV stations,

pigging stations, etc. and terminals shall be earthed with GI earth electrodes. The
resistance to earth of grounding shall be limited to 5 ohms max.
6.5 Electrical Resistance Probe
6.5.1 Where specified in project specifications, electrical resistance probes utilising the
electrical resistance technique shall be provided along the pipeline at marshy areas
and at vulnerable locations to monitor the external corrosion activity on the pipeline.
The lead wires of the probe shall be connected to pipeline and terminated inside test
station enabling periodic resistance measurement with the probe using a portable
measuring instrument.
6.5.2 The material of the E/R probe element shall be of the same alloy as of the pipeline
material. The E/R probes shall be provided preferably at the bottom portion of
pipeline. The locations of E/R probes shall be got approved. Portable E/R probe
reading instrument shall be supplied by contractor.
6.6 CP at Cased Crossing
At cased crossings where casing is coated, the casing shall be protected by

sacrificial anode installations. The sacrificial anode installations shall be provided at
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
both ends of casing. The anode installation shall be sized based on permanent C.P.
design parameters specified for the main pipeline. At cased crossings where casing
is painted or uncoated, additional protection for casing pipes may not be provided.
The carrier pipe inside the casing shall be protected by zinc ribbon anodes weld
connected to the outer surface of bottom of carrier pipe extending upto hour hand
positions of 4 and 8 o'clock. The anodes shall be placed at close intervals as per
design calculations with minimum one number of anodes installed between every two
supports provided between carrier & casing and sized based on the permanent CP
design parameters for marshy area and design life of permanent CP system.
6.7 Reference Cell Access Points
Reference cell access points shall be provided near insulating joint locations and at
SV stations, where the ground is paved, for measurement of pipe to soil potentials. A
perforated PVC pipe filled with native soil and buried at the location shall be provided
for the purpose. The length of the PVC pipe shall be adequate to reach the native
soil below the paving.
6.8 Painting
The sheet steel used for fabrication shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased to
remove mill scale, rust, grease and dirt. Fabricated structures shall be pickled and
then rinsed to remove any trace of acid. The under surfaces shall be prepared by
applying a coat of phosphate paint and a coat of yellow zinc chromate primer. The
under surfaces shall be free from all imperfections before undertaking the finished
coat. After preparation of the under surface, spray painting with two coats of final
paint shall be done. The finished panel shall be dried in oven in dust free
atmosphere. Panel finish shall be free from imperfections like pin holes, orange
peels, run off paint, etc.
All unpainted steel parts shall be cadmium plated to prevent rust information.
6.9 Cables
Cables shall be annealed high conductivity, tinned, stranded copper conductor,

XLPE insulated 650/1100 V grade, armoured, PVC sheathed. The size of the copper
conductor shall be 6 sq mm for anode cable from anode to buried junction box, 10 sq
mm from junction box to test station, 10mm² from test station to pipeline. The size of
the conductor shall be 6 sq mm for potential measurement, 10 sq.mm for current
measurement and 25mm² for bonding, polarisation cell/grounding cell and surge
diverter connection purpose. The anode cable from anode to junction box (buried)
shall be unarmoured. The length of anode tail cable shall be sufficient enough to
reach junction box (buried) in case of temporary CP anodes and up to test station in
case of permanent CP sacrificial anodes. PE Sleeves shall be provided for
unarmoured cables.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
7.0 INSTALLATION
7.1 Cable Laying
7.1.1 Cables shall be laid in accordance with approved layout drawings to be prepared by
the contractor. No straight through joint shall be permitted in a single run of cable.
Cable route shall be carefully measured and cables cut to required length. Minimum
½ metre cable slack shall be provided near anodes, pipeline and test stations to
account for any settling.
7.1.2 All cables inside station/plant area shall be laid at a depth of 0.75 M. Cables outside
station/plant area shall be laid at a depth of 1.5m. Cables shall be laid in sand under
brick cover back filled with normal soil. Outside the station/plant area the routes shall
be marked with Polyethylene cable warning mats placed at a depth of 0.9m from the
finished grade.
7.1.3 All underground unarmoured cables forming part of permanent CP system shall run
through PE sleeves. Cables along the pipeline shall be carried along the top of the
pipe by securely strapping it with adhesive tape or equivalent as required.
7.1.4 RCC of proper size shall be provided for all underground cables for road crossings.
7.1.5 Cables shall be neatly arranged in trenches in such a manner that criss-crossing is
avoided and final take off to equipment is facilitated.
7.1.6 In case of above ground cable, all unarmoured CP cables shall be laid in GI conduits
of sufficiently large size, up to accessible height for protecting against the
mechanical damage.
7.1.7 The armour of all the cables from pipeline to test station (potential measurement,
reference cell cables, cathode cables, etc.) and test station to ground bed (anode
cable) shall be earthed only at test station end of the cable to avoid armour carrying
CP current. The cable armour shall be insulated by cutting and taping with insulation
tape.
7.2 Cable to Pipe Connections
All the cable connections to the pipeline including charged foreign pipeline shall be
made using an approved exothermic process. A suitable water proof sealing system
of the cable connections shall be made which will be compatible with parent coating
system of the pipeline after exothermic process. The resistance of cable to pipe at
the connection point shall not exceed 0.1 ohm. Coating shall be repaired after
connection of cable conductor to pipeline. The coating repair material shall be
compatible with the original coating and shall prevent ingress of water along the
cable surface and at the interface of coating repair with the original pipe coating.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
For charged pipeline pin-brazing shall be used. Eutectic solder shall not be
acceptable for charged or non-charged pipeline.
8.0 CIVIL WORKS
All civil works associated with the complete cathodic protection work shall be
included in the scope of contractor. This shall include providing cable trenches,
foundation for equipment and all test stations, etc.
9.0 TESTING AND INSPECTION AT WORKS
9.1 OWNER/OWNER's representative shall visit the works during manufacture of

various equipment to assess the progress of work as well as to ascertain that only
quality raw material is used for the same. All necessary assistance during such
inspections shall be provided.
9.2 The minimum testing, inspection requirements for all components/ equipments shall
confirm to the requirements as defined in the relevant codes and standards. Detailed
inspection and testing procedures along with the acceptance criteria shall be
prepared by CONTRACTOR for OWNER's approval.
9.3 Test certificates including test records, performance curves etc., shall be furnished.
All test certificates shall be endorsed with sufficient information to identify equipment
to which the certificate refers to and must carry project title, owner's name and
purchase order details etc.
9.4 Owner reserves the right to ask for inspection of all or any item under the contract
and witness all tests and carry out inspection or authorise his representative to
witness test and carry out inspection. CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER or
OWNER's representative at least 20 days in advance giving exact details of tests,
dates and addresses of locations where the tests would be carried out.
10.0 PACKING AND TRANSPORT
All equipment/material shall be protected for inland/marine transport, carriage at site

and outdoor storage during transit and at site. All packages shall be clearly, legibly
and durably marked with uniform block letters giving the relevant equipment/material
details. each package shall contain a packing list in a water proof envelope. Copies
of the packing list in triplicate, shall be forwarded to owner prior to despatch. All
items of material shall be clearly marked for easy identification against the packing
list.
11.0 SYSTEM TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND INTERFERENCE MITIGATION
11.1 System testing at site
11.1.1 Contractor shall furnish the detailed field testing and commissioning procedure for
approval. Field tests as per the approved procedures shall be carried out on the
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
equipment/systems before being put into service. the acceptance of the complete
installation shall be contingent upon inspection and field test results.
11.1.2 Before the CP facilities are placed in operation all necessary tests shall be carried
out to establish that all equipment, devices, wiring and connection, etc., have been
correctly installed, connected and are in good working condition as required for
intended operation.
11.1.3 Owner/owner's representative may witness all the tests. At least one week's notice
shall be given before commencing the tests.
11.1.4 All tools, equipments and instruments required for testing shall be provided by
CONTRACTOR.
11.1.5 Generally following tests shall be carried out and recorded in proforma given in
subsequent clauses:
Checking : Visual inspection, comparison with

drawings and specifications.
Inspection : Detailed physical inspection
Testing : Simulation tests of equipment to

determine its operational fitness.
Cables
- Cable no.
- Voltage grade
- Conductor cross-section
- Continuity check
- Voltage test
- Insulation resistance values between core to earth and
between cores
- All cables shall be tested by 500 V megger
Insulating joint
Checking of insulating joint for leakage, before and after energisation of C.P. by
means of insulating joint tester. Pipe to soil potential of both protected and non-
protected sides of insulating joint shall be checked before and after energistaion of
CP system.
Polarisation cell
- Location/identification number
- Rating
- Check for electrolyte
- Check for wiring
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
- Check for standby current drain with CP energisation (current drain with
respect to voltage across the cell shall be recorded)
- Details of grounding provided for polarization cell.
Grounding cell
- Location
- Type (no. of anodes)
- Ratings
Surge diverter
- Location/identification no.
- Ratings
- Check for healthiness
- Explosion proof enclosure
- Check for proper connection.
E/R Probe
- Location / Identification number

- Checking of wiring as per schematics
- Resistance reading of probe
Anode ground beds
- Location/test station number

- Current output of the ground bed
- Vertical / horizontal
- Check for actual layout and compliance with drawings.
11.2 Commissioning
11.2.1 Natural pipe to soil potential shall be measured at each test station location and
casing pipeline at the locations of cased crossings prior to connecting anodes to
pipeline. The pipe to soil potential observation shall be repeated after connecting the
anodes after allowing sufficient time for polarisation. The current output of the anode
installation shall also be measured to ensure that it does not exceed the output
current capacity of the anodes. In case the anode output current exceeds the rated
capacity it shall be controlled by insertion of resistance element in the anode circuit
inside test station and the pipe to soil potential shall be rechecked for adequacy of
protection. Additional anodes shall be provided where required to achieve desired
level of protection. In case pipe to soil potential exceeds the specified value, suitable
resistance shall be inserted in the anode circuit to limit the potential.
Each anode installation shall become individually operational as above.

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
11.2.2 After connecting all the anode ground beds to pipeline, measurement of pipe to soil
potentials shall be taken at each test station to ensure conformity to protection
criteria.
11.2.3 In case of insufficient protection as per the CP design criteria on any portion of the
pipeline, CONTRACTOR shall carry out necessary additions modification to the
provided protection in consultation with the OWNER / OWNER’s Representative.
11.2.4 Resistance readings of the probe shall be taken at all the locations of electrical
resistance probes.
11.3 Interference Mitigation
11.3.1 Investigation shall be made for stray current electrolysis of the pipeline, mutual
interface between the pipeline and foreign pipelines / structures, interference on
foreign pipeline / structures due to the CP of the pipeline and ground bed. AC
induction on pipeline due to overhead high voltage line, interference due to high
voltage DC lines & grounding, electric traction, etc.
11.3.2 Where transmission lines cross the pipeline or run in parallel within or more than
25m from the pipeline, AC voltage measurements shall also be made on the pipeline
to find out continuous induction of voltage. In case of induced voltage being beyond
safe limits, the pipeline shall be grounded in line with clause no. 6.4 above.
11.3.3 Measurements including pipe to soil potential and pipeline current etc., on the
pipeline/structure being CP protected shall be made to investigate the current
discharge and collection locations.
In case of fluctuating stray currents investigation shall be made continuously over a

period of time and if required simultaneously at different locations to find out the
stray current source. For long time measurements, recorders shall preferably be
used.
11.3.4 Where foreign pipeline (unprotected or protected by independent CP system) runs in

parallel to the pipeline in same trench or very near to the pipeline, and is not bonded
to the pipeline then investigation shall be made for current discharge points on both
the pipelines.
11.3.5 Mitigation measured shall be provided depending on type of interference. These

shall include installation of bond with variable resistor and diodes, installation of
galvanic anodes for auxiliary drainage of current, adjustment/relocation (if possible)
of offending interference source, provision of electric shield etc., depending on the
type of interference.
11.3.6 Bonding with foreign pipeline/structure as a mitigation measure shall be provided

where the owner of the pipeline/structure has no objection, otherwise, alternative
mitigation measure shall be provided. Where bonding is provided for mitigation the
bonding resistor shall be adjusted for optimum value for minimum/no interference.
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
Galvanic anodes installed as a mitigation measure shall be sized for the life specified
for permanent CP.
12.0 SYSTEM MONITORING
The temporary CP system provided shall be monitored at all the test stations once in
a month for healthiness/adequacy of protection till commissioning of permanent CP
or for design life of temporary CP specified, whichever is less. During this period if
any deficiency/interference in protection system is noticed the same shall be
rectified/augmented by additional anodes as required. The monitoring report shall be
submitted regularly to owner for his review/information.
13.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS
13.1 General
13.1.1 Within three weeks from the date of issue of PURCHASE ORDER, CONTRACTOR
shall submit four copies of the list of all drawings/ data/ manuals/ procedures for
approval, identifying each by a number and descriptive title and giving the schedule
date. This list shall be revised and extended, as necessary, during the progress of
work
13.1.2 All drawings and documents shall be in English and shall follow metric system.
Number of copies of each submission shall be as follows unless otherwise specified.
Submission No. of Copies

a. For review/approval 6
b. Drawings issued for execution

construction 6
c. Final / As built drawings

execution/construction 6
d. Operation/Maintenance manual,
vendor data 6
13.2 Contract drawings and documents
13.2.1 As a part of the contract, drawings and documents shall be furnished which shall
include but not be limited to the following:
a. Report on corrosion survey

b. Basis of system design calculations, equipment selection criteria and sizing
calculations.
c. Bill of material, material requisitions, purchase requisitions
13.2.2 Detailed construction drawings (including as built drawings)

REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
a. Sacrificial anode fabrication drawings

b. Typical layout drawing for anode ground bed installation and connection
c. Equipment layout, cable layout and schedules
d. Fabrication, installation and connection scheme drawing for different types of
test stations.
e. Fabrication and installation details of surge diverter, grounding cell and
polarisation cell with its enclosure and housing
f. Cable-to-pipe joint details for charged and non-charged pipelines.
g. Incorporation of anode beds, polarisation cell, surge diverters, test stations,
etc., and other relevant features of CP system design in Pipeline alignment
sheet and other related drawings
h. Identification of section of pipeline affected by interference, source of
interference and details of interference mitigation arrangements provided.
various measurement data at all relevant test stations with and without
mitigation measures provided.
i. Detailed commissioning report including various measurement data at all test

stations, etc.
j. Vendor drawings and catalogues, test certificates
k. Operation and maintenance manual
l. Miscellaneous
- Equipment inspection and testing procedure
- Construction, installation procedures
- Field testing and commissioning procedures
- Procedure for monitoring of cathodic protection after commissioning
- Quality control procedures
14.0 INSTRUMENT, TOOLS AND SPARES
14.1 CONTRACTOR shall supply all instruments, tools and tackles necessary for
proper operation and maintenance of complete cathodic protection system and
associated equipment.
14.2 CONTRACTOR shall provide a list of spares and consumables required for proper
operation and maintenance of part of cathodic protection system to be integrated
with permanent CP system designed on the basis of permanent CP design
parameters and associated equipment, for two years operation of the system.
15.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH THE BID
Bidders are advised in their own interest to provide the following information along
with the bid without which the bids are liable for summary rejection.
a. Basis and calculations for preliminary system design for cathodic protection
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

TEMPORARY CATHODIC
PROTECTION SYSTEM
EDITION : 1
system.
b. List of formulas to be used for detailed system design calculations.
c. Basis of system design, design calculations, equipment selection criteria,
sizing calculations along with characteristics curves for various equipments.
d. Preliminary bill of material for major equipment.
e. Details of the equipment/material offered along with technical leaflets/related
literatures/catalogues, make, rating, type test certificates.
f. Dimensions, weight and general arrangement drawings for each offered
equipment.
g. List of instruments, tools and tackles offered for maintenance and operation.
h. List of recommended maintenance/operation spares.
i. Clause-wise deviations, if any, to the specifications along with justifications.

Vol II of III-BGL-Kakinada

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vol II of III-BGL-Kakinada

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vol II of III-BGL-Kakinada

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bhagyanagar Gas Limited

CNG & CITY GAS DISTRIBUTION FOR KAKINADA

UNDER LIMITED DOMESTIC

Bid Document No.: 05/51/23LZ/BGL-KAKI/001-i)

PREPARED AND ISSUED BY

Pipeline Laying, Piping, Mechanical Works

1. Specification for Mainline Construction (Onshore) MEC/S/05/21/01

2. Specification for Welding of Onshore Gas MEC/S/05/21/02

3. Specification for Hydrostatic Testing of Onshore MEC/S/05/21/03

4. Specification for Major Water Crossings MEC/S/05/21/04

5. Specification for Pipeline Crossing Roads, MEC/S/05/21/05

6. Specification for Piping Fabrication and Erection MEC/S/05/21/06

7. Specification for Shop and Field Painting MEC/S/05/21/07

8. Specification for Repair of Pipeline Corrosion MEC/S/05/21/08

9. Specification for Pipeline Markers MEC/S/05/21/10

10. Specification for Flushing and Testing of Piping MEC/S/05/21/11

11. Specification for Casing Insulators and End Seals MEC/S/05/62/12

12. Specification for Field Joint Coating (Onshore MEC/S/05/21/13

13. Specification for Vents, Drains and Wells MEC/S/05/21/15

14. Specification for Blasting MEC/S/05/21/18

15. Specification for Gaskets, Bolts and Nuts MEC/S/05/21/19

16. Specification for Piping Material Specification MEC/23LZ/05/21/M/000/1092

17. Specification for Pre-Commissioning and MEC/S/05/21/61

18. Specification for Health, Safety and Environment MEC/S/05/21/65

19. Specification for Quality Assurance System MEC/S/05/62/66

D:\old data\Vijyant\BGL-23LB\BGL-Kakinada\Tender\Laying\Vol-II of III\Contents Vol II of III-BGL Kakinada.doc Page 1 of 3

20. Specification for Documentation for Pipeline MEC/S/05/21/69

21. Specification for Field Joint Coatings of Pipeline for MEC/S/05/21/74

22. Specification for Pipeline Crossings Using HDD MEC/S/05/21/75

23. Specification for Warning Mats MEC/TS/05/62/042, Rev-0

24. Specification for Long Radius Bends MEC/TS/05/62/015, R-1

25. Specification for Seamless Fittings and Flanges MEC/S/05/21/025

26. Specification for Assorted Pipes MEC/TS/05/62/059A

27. Specification for Ball Valves MEC/TS/05/21/002

Civil & Structural Works

1. Specification for Civil Works – Terminals MEC/S/05/11/01

Instrumentation and Telecom Works

1. Specification for Installation of Instruments MEC/S/05/26/01

2. Specification for Instrument Tubing MEC/S/05/26/02

3. Specification for Instrument Tube Fittings MEC/S/05/26/04

4. Specification for Instrument Valves and Manifolds MEC/S/05/26/05

5. General Technical Specification for Instrumentation MEC/S/05/26/08

7. Specification / Procedure for Optical Fiber Cable Testing MEC/S/05/E5/T/002

8. Technical Specification for Optical Fiber Cable & Accessories MEC/TS/05/E5/T/096

9. Technical Specification PLE HDPE Telecom Duct and MEC/TS/05/E5/T/037

D:\old data\Vijyant\BGL-23LB\BGL-Kakinada\Tender\Laying\Vol-II of III\Contents Vol II of III-BGL Kakinada.doc Page 2 of 3

Cathodic Protection Works

1. Specification for Temporary Cathodic Protection System MEC/S/05/21/016A

D:\old data\Vijyant\BGL-23LB\BGL-Kakinada\Tender\Laying\Vol-II of III\Contents Vol II of III-BGL Kakinada.doc Page 3 of 3

SPECIFICATION NO.: MEC/S/05/21/01

(OIL & GAS SBU)

DOCUMENT NO. Page 1 of 1

TITLE MAINLINE CONSTRUCTION MEC/S/05/21/01 REVISION : 0

2.0 REFERENCE CODES, STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

3.0 REQUIREMENTS OF R.O.U. AND ACCESS THERETO

5.0 HANDLING, HAULING, STRINGING AND STORING OF MATERIALS

9.0 LAYING OF PIPE

12.0 SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS ON THE PIPELINE

13.0 WORKING SPREAD LIMITATIONS

14.0 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION OF RIGHT-OF-WAY

Clearing, grubbing and grading of Right-of-way

Construction of all temporary facilities required in connection with the WORKS

Staking of the pipeline route

Handling, hauling, stringing and storing of all materials

Field-bending of line pipe

Installation of auxiliary facilities and appurtenances forming a part of pipeline

Clean-up and restoration of Right-of-way;

Maintenance during defects liability period.

the words "Shall" and "Must" are mandatory.

the works "Should, "May" and "Will" are non-mandatory, advisory or

Contract limits, obstacle crossings, change of wall thickness, including